Ricoh 1060 (B064 - B065 - B140 - B141 - B142 - B143 - B163 - B228) Aficio 1060 - Aficio 1075 - Aficio 2051 - Aficio 2051SP - Aficio 2060 - Aficio 2075 Parts & Service

MODEL MT-C1/C2
(Machine Code: B064/B065

B140/B141/B163
B142/B143/B228)
SERVICE MANUAL
30 July 2004
Subject to Change
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical
one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not
recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.
manuals4you.com
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
What This Manual Contains

This preliminary manual describes the installation procedures for the B064/B065
Copier and its peripheral devices:
Conventions in this Manual
This manual describes more than one machine.
The following short notations are used in text to refer to the following machines.
Short Notation
What it means
B064 Series
B064/B065
B140 Series
B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228
This manual uses several symbols.

Symbol
What it means
Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Short Edge Feed (SEF)
Long Edge Feed (LEF)
manuals4you.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT .........................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-2
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-3
1.1.4 DIMENSIONS ...................................................................................1-4
B064 Series ..........................................................................................1-4
B140 Series ..........................................................................................1-5
1.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-6
1.2 MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES).......................................1-7
1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-7
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-8
Removing Tapes and Retainers ...........................................................1-8
Connecting the ADF............................................................................1-10
Removing and Filling the Development Unit .......................................1-11
Re-installing the Development Unit.....................................................1-13
Initializing the Drum Settings (B064 Series)........................................1-14
Initializing the Drum Settings (B140 Series)........................................1-15
Tandem Tray ......................................................................................1-16
Machine Level.....................................................................................1-18
Date/Time Setting ...............................................................................1-18
SP Codes............................................................................................1-18
1.3 A3/DLT FEEDER KIT (B475)...................................................................1-19
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-19
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-20
1.4 LCT (B473) ..............................................................................................1-22
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-22
Removing Tape ..................................................................................1-23
Preparing the Main Machine ...............................................................1-24
Installing the LCT ................................................................................1-24
1.5 LG/B4 FEEDER KIT (B474).....................................................................1-26
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-26
1.6 3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674) .........................................1-30
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-30
Removing Tapes and Retainers .........................................................1-31
Installation...........................................................................................1-33
Selecting the Staple Supply Name .....................................................1-36
Enabling Booklet Binding ....................................................................1-36
1.7 PUNCH UNIT (B377)...............................................................................1-37
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-37
1.8 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470) .....................................................1-40

1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-40
Attaching the Extensions ....................................................................1-42
Attaching the Interposer Tray..............................................................1-43
Attaching the Corner Plates for the B478/B706 ..................................1-44
Right Rear Corner Plate (B478/B706 only) .........................................1-44
Right Front Corner Plate (B478/B706 only) ........................................1-45
Attaching the Finisher to the Machine.................................................1-46
1.9 9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)...........................................................................1-48
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-48
Installation...........................................................................................1-49
1.10 KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452) .......................................................1-51
1.11 COPY CONNECTOR KIT......................................................................1-52
1.11.1 COPY CONNECTOR KIT (B525-10, -12) FOR B064 SERIES.....1-52
ACCESSORY CHECK........................................................................1-53
Installation...........................................................................................1-54
Installing the Hardware .......................................................................1-55
1.12 COPY CONNECTOR KIT (B328-03) FOR B140 SERIES.....................1-59
ACCESSORY CHECK........................................................................1-59
Preparation .........................................................................................1-60
Installation...........................................................................................1-61
1.12 3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706)...................................................1-64
1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-64
1.12.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-65
1.12.3 WHEN YOU MOVE THE FINISHER TO A NEW LOCATION.......1-68
1.13 PUNCH UNIT (B531/A812) ...................................................................1-69
1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-69
1.13.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-70
1.14 JOGGER UNIT (B513) ..........................................................................1-74
1.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-74
1.14.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-75
1.15 Z-FOLDING UNIT B660.........................................................................1-76
1.15.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-76
1.15.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-77
Before You Begin................................................................................1-77
Unpacking...........................................................................................1-77
Docking to the Finisher .......................................................................1-78
Docking to the Main Frame.................................................................1-81
1.16 MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES .............................................................1-83
1.16.1 PRINTER/SCANNER KIT (G338), PRINTER KIT (G339) ............1-83
ACCESSORY CHECK........................................................................1-83
1.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-84
Inserting DIMMs..................................................................................1-84
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-85
1.16.3 PS3 (B525-08)..............................................................................1-87
ii
manuals4you.com
iii
manuals4you.com
1.16.4 USB 2.0 (B525-01) .......................................................................1-88

ACCESSORY CHECK........................................................................1-88
USB SP Settings.................................................................................1-89
1.16.5 IEEE1394 (G561) FIREWIRE INTERFACE..................................1-90
ACCESSORY CHECK........................................................................1-90
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-92
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-93
1.16.6 IEEE802.11B WIRELESS LAN (G628).........................................1-94
ACCESSORY CHECK........................................................................1-94
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ...................................................1-96
SP Mode Settings for 802.11b Wireless LAN .....................................1-98
1.16.7 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB) (B519) ................................1-99
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-100
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-100
Installing the Firmware......................................................................1-100
Installing the Hardware .....................................................................1-101
1.17 MFP OPTIONS: B140 SERIES ...........................................................1-102
1.17.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................1-102
1.17.2 PRINTER/SCANNER KIT (B659) ...............................................1-103
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-103
Installation.........................................................................................1-104
1.17.3 PS3 (B525-15)............................................................................1-107
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-107
Installation.........................................................................................1-107
1.17.4 USB 2.0 INTERFACE BOARD (B596-01) ..................................1-108
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-108
Installation.........................................................................................1-108
1.17.5 IEEE 1394 INTERFACE BOARD (B581-01)...............................1-109
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-109
Installation.........................................................................................1-109
1.17.6 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE BOARD (B582-01, -02) ..................1-110
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-110
Installation.........................................................................................1-110
1.17.7 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT (G377) ...................................1-112
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-112
Installation.........................................................................................1-112
1.17.8 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609).........................................1-113
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-113
Installation.........................................................................................1-113
1.17.9 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ...........................1-114
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-114
Seal Check And Removal .................................................................1-114
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-115
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................... 2-1

2.1 PM TABLES ..............................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 MAIN MACHINE ...............................................................................2-1
2.1.2 ADF ..................................................................................................2-5
2.1.3 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES ...............................................2-5
LCT (Large Capacity Tray) B473 ..........................................................2-5
Cover Interposer Tray B470..................................................................2-5
3000-Sheet Finisher with 50-sheet stapler and Saddle-Stitching
B468/B469/B674...................................................................................2-6
3000-Sheet Finisher B478/B706...........................................................2-6
Z-Folding Unit Type 2105 (B660)..........................................................2-6
2.2 RELATED SP CODES ..............................................................................2-6
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 3-1

3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS ..............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 DRUM...............................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 DRUM UNIT .....................................................................................3-1
3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ...................................................................3-2
3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT...............................................................................3-2
3.1.5 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................3-2
3.1.6 CHARGE CORONA..........................................................................3-3
3.1.7 DEVELOPMENT...............................................................................3-3
3.1.8 CLEANING .......................................................................................3-4
3.1.9 FUSING UNIT...................................................................................3-4
3.1.10 PAPER FEED.................................................................................3-4
3.1.11 USED TONER ................................................................................3-4
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................3-5
3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS .............................................................................3-5
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS ...................................................................................3-5
3.3 OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS ....................................3-6
3.3.1 OPERATION PANEL........................................................................3-6
3.3.2 FRONT DOOR..................................................................................3-6
3.3.3 RIGHT COVERS ..............................................................................3-7
3.3.4 LEFT COVERS.................................................................................3-8
3.3.5 REAR COVERS................................................................................3-9
3.4 SCANNER ...............................................................................................3-10
3.4.1 ADF AND TOP COVERS ...............................................................3-10
ADF.....................................................................................................3-10
Top Covers .........................................................................................3-11
3.4.2 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-12
3.4.3 SCANNER ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS.........................................3-13
3.4.4 LENS BLOCK .................................................................................3-14
3.4.5 EXPOSURE LAMP .........................................................................3-15
3.4.6 LAMP REGULATOR.......................................................................3-16
3.4.7 SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD (SDRB).................................3-17
3.4.8 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-18
3.4.9 SCANNER HP SENSOR ................................................................3-19
iv
manuals4you.com
3.4.10 SCANNER WIRE REPLACEMENT ..............................................3-20

Preparation for Removal .....................................................................3-20
Wire Removal: Back ...........................................................................3-21
Wire Removal: Front ...........................................................................3-22
Attaching the New Wire ......................................................................3-23
3.4.11 SCANNER HEATER.....................................................................3-25
3.5 LASER UNIT ...........................................................................................3-26
3.5.1 CAUTION DECALS ........................................................................3-26
3.5.2 LD UNIT AND POLYGON MOTOR ................................................3-27
3.5.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR REPLACEMENT........3-29
3.5.4 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT.............................................................3-30
3.6 DRUM UNIT ............................................................................................3-32
3.6.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL.................................................3-32
Removal..............................................................................................3-32
Re-installation .....................................................................................3-33
Replacement with a used Development Unit ......................................3-33
3.6.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ..............................................................3-34
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE AND GRID...........................................3-35
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANING PADS ...............................3-36
3.6.5 OPC DRUM REMOVAL..................................................................3-37
Dusting the Drum Surface...................................................................3-38
3.6.6 PTL (B140 SERIES ONLY) ............................................................3-39
3.6.7 QUENCHING LAMP .......................................................................3-40
3.6.8 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR........................................................3-40
3.6.9 CLEANING FILTER ........................................................................3-41
3.6.10 CLEANING BLADE.......................................................................3-41
3.6.11 CLEANING BRUSH......................................................................3-42
3.6.12 PICK-OFF PAWLS .......................................................................3-43
3.6.13 ID SENSOR..................................................................................3-43
3.6.14 DRUM MOTOR.............................................................................3-44
3.6.15 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE ..................................................3-45
3.6.16 TONER SEPARATION UNIT........................................................3-45
3.6.17 OZONE FILTERS .........................................................................3-46
3.6.18 OPTICS DUST FILTER ................................................................3-46
3.6.19 INTERNAL DUST FILTER............................................................3-46
3.7 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ............................................................................3-47
3.7.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT ......................................................3-47
3.7.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER ...............................................................3-49
3.7.3 ENTRANCE SEAL AND SIDE SEALS ...........................................3-50
3.7.4 TD SENSOR...................................................................................3-51
3.7.5 TONER END SENSOR ..................................................................3-51
3.7.6 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR..............................................................3-52
3.7.7 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR ..............................................................3-53
3.8 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ..........................................................................3-54
3.8.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT .................................................................3-54
3.8.2 TRANSFER BELT ..........................................................................3-55
3.8.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING BLADE .....................................3-57
3.8.4 DISCHARGE PLATE ......................................................................3-58
3.8.5 TRANSFER POWER PACK ...........................................................3-59
v
3.9 FUSING UNIT..........................................................................................3-60

3.9.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-60
3.9.2 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE MOTOR (B140 SERIES)............3-61
3.9.3 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE HP SENSOR (B140 SERIES) ....3-62
3.9.4 FUSING UNIT THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS .................3-63
B064 Series ........................................................................................3-64
B140 Series ........................................................................................3-64
3.9.5 WEB CLEANING ROLLER.............................................................3-65
Web Unit Disassembly........................................................................3-65
Web Unit Assembly.............................................................................3-66
3.9.6 WEB MOTOR AND WEB END SENSOR.......................................3-67
3.9.7 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING UNIT ........................................3-68
B064 Series ........................................................................................3-68
B140 Series ........................................................................................3-69
3.9.8 FUSING LAMPS, HOT ROLLER, AND PRESSURE ROLLER.......3-70
B064 Series: Fusing Lamps................................................................3-70
B140 Series: Fusing Lamps................................................................3-71
Important Notes about Fusing Unit Assembly (B064 Series) ..............3-76
3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER.....................................................................3-77
3.9.10 STRIPPER PAWLS ......................................................................3-78
B064 Series ........................................................................................3-78
B140 Series ........................................................................................3-79
3.9.11 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT ...............................................3-80
3.9.12 FUSING UNIT EXIT SENSOR......................................................3-81
3.9.13 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR.................................................................3-82
3.9.14 FUSING EXIT AND EXIT UNIT ENTRANCE SENSORS .............3-83
3.10 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................3-84
3.10.1 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL ...........................................................3-84
3.10.2 DUPLEX UNIT SIDE-TO-SIDE ADJUSTMENT ............................3-85
3.10.3 JOGGER FENCE ADJUSTMENT ................................................3-85
3.10.4 DUPLEX MOTORS.......................................................................3-86
Duplex Inverter Motor .........................................................................3-86
Duplex Jogger and Transport Motors..................................................3-87
3.10.5 DUPLEX TRANSPORT CLUTCH/JOGGER HP SENSOR...........3-88
3.10.6 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR...................................................3-89
3.10.7 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSOR 3 .............................................3-90
3.10.8 INVERTER EXIT SENSOR, TRANSPORT SENSORS 1 & 2.......3-91
3.10.9 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT ....................................3-92
3.11 PAPER FEED........................................................................................3-93
3.11.1 PAPER TRAY REMOVAL ............................................................3-93
3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT...................3-95
3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT.............................3-96
3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......3-97
3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT............................3-98
3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE....................................3-100
3.11.7 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT .....3-103
3.11.8 FEED UNIT.................................................................................3-104
3.11.9 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT................3-106
3.11.10 RELAY SENSOR......................................................................3-107
vi
manuals4you.com
3.11.11 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD.........................3-108

3.11.12 BY-PASS TRAY ROLLERS......................................................3-109
3.11.13 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT .........................................................................3-110
3.11.14 REGISTRATION SENSOR.......................................................3-111
3.11.15 REGISTRATION AND BY-PASS UNIT REMOVAL ..................3-112
3.12 PCBS AND HDD .................................................................................3-114
3.12.1 BCU BOARD (BASE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT) .......................3-114
3.12.2 CONTROLLER BOARD .............................................................3-115
B064 Series: Controller Board ..........................................................3-115
B140 Series: Controller Board ..........................................................3-116
3.12.3 IPU BOARD................................................................................3-117
B064 Series: IPU Board....................................................................3-117
B140 Series: IPU, Mother Board.......................................................3-118
3.12.4 DEVELOPMENT POWER PACK ...............................................3-121
3.12.5 PSU, PFC BOARDS ...................................................................3-122
B064 Series ......................................................................................3-122
B140 Series PSU..............................................................................3-122
3.12.6 HDD............................................................................................3-123
B064 Series HDD..............................................................................3-123
B140 Series HDD..............................................................................3-124
3.12.7 NVRAM.......................................................................................3-125
3.12.8 DIMMS........................................................................................3-127
3.13 ADF .....................................................................................................3-128
3.13.1 ADF COVERS ............................................................................3-128
3.13.2 FEED UNIT.................................................................................3-129
3.13.3 FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER.........................................3-130
3.13.4 SEPARATION ROLLER .............................................................3-131
3.13.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR.........................................................3-132
3.13.6 ADF CONTROL BOARD ............................................................3-133
3.13.7 ORIGINAL WIDTH, INTERVAL, AND SKEW CORRECTION
SENSORS..................................................................................3-134
3.13.8 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS.................................................3-135
3.13.9 DF POSITION AND APS SENSOR ............................................3-136
3.13.10 OTHER ADF SENSORS ..........................................................3-137
3.13.11 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR ...............................................3-138
3.13.12 FEED MOTOR..........................................................................3-138
3.13.13 EXIT MOTOR AND TRANSPORT MOTOR .............................3-139
3.13.14 PICK-UP ROLLER MOTOR AND HP SENSOR.......................3-140
3.13.15 CIS POWER SUPPLY BOARD AND CIS UNIT........................3-141
3.13.16 ADF EXIT SENSOR .................................................................3-142
3.14 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ...................3-143
3.14.1 PRINTING ..................................................................................3-143
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side.........................................3-143
Blank Margin.....................................................................................3-144
Registration Buckle Adjustment ........................................................3-144
3.14.2 SCANNING.................................................................................3-145
Registration: Platen Mode.................................................................3-145
Magnification.....................................................................................3-145
vii
3.14.3 ADF SCANNING ADJUSTMENTS .............................................3-146

Vertical Black Lines...........................................................................3-146
DIP Switch Settings (ADF Main Board).............................................3-146
ADF Skew Correction .......................................................................3-146
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION .......................................................3-148
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 4-1

4.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 RECOVERY METHODS...................................................................4-2
4.1.2 IMPORTANT SP CODES .................................................................4-2
4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES .........................................................4-3
4.1.4 JAM DETECTION.............................................................................4-6
SENSOR LOCATIONS .........................................................................4-6
4.1.5 TIMING CHARTS .............................................................................4-7
Feed, Transport, Feed Out: Face-up ....................................................4-7
Transport, Inverter, Feed Out: Face-down............................................4-8
Duplex Transport ..................................................................................4-9
4.1.6 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ...............................................................4-10
4.2 B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE..............................................................4-11
4.2.1 B064 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ...............................4-11
4.2.2 B064 SERIES SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS ....................................4-12
SC100: Scanning System ...................................................................4-12
SC300: Image Development System (1).............................................4-15
SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, and Fusing Systems .................4-21
SC600: Data Communication .............................................................4-24
SC700: Peripherals.............................................................................4-26
SC800: Overall System.......................................................................4-29
SC900: Miscellaneous ........................................................................4-32
4.2.3 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT ................4-34
4.3 B140 SERIES SERVICE MODE..............................................................4-36
4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK..................................................4-36
4.3.2 B140 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ...............................4-37
4.3.3 B140 SERIES SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS ....................................4-38
SC100: Scanning System ...................................................................4-38
SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, and Fusing Systems .................4-47
SC600: Data Communication .............................................................4-51
SC700 Series: Peripherals..................................................................4-53
SC800: Overall System.......................................................................4-57
SC900: Miscellaneous ........................................................................4-62
4.3.4 JAM CODES...................................................................................4-66
Main Unit: Paper Jam Errors...............................................................4-66
Finisher B469 Jam Codes...................................................................4-67
Finisher B468/B674 Jam Codes .........................................................4-67
Finisher B478/B706 Jam Codes .........................................................4-68
Mailbox B471 Jam Codes ...................................................................4-68
Cover Interposer Tray B470 Jam Codes.............................................4-68
viii
manuals4you.com
Z-Folding Unit B660 Jam Codes.........................................................4-69

4.3.5 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT ................4-70
4.4 OTHER PROBLEMS (B064/B140 SERIES) ............................................4-73
4.4.1 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS ........................................................4-73
4.4.2 COMMON PROBLEMS ..................................................................4-73
4.4.3 FREQUENT PAPER JAMS ............................................................4-74
5. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 5-1

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-1
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-1
To Enter and Exit the Service Mode .....................................................5-2
To Switch to the Copy Window for Test Printing...................................5-2
Using the SP Mode ...............................................................................5-2
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-4
SP Mode Print (SMC Print) ...................................................................5-5
5.2 RESETS ....................................................................................................5-6
5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801 ......................................................5-6
5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET ...............................................5-8
Software Reset .....................................................................................5-8
Resetting the System............................................................................5-8
Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only .................................5-8
Resetting Scanner Features Only.........................................................5-8
5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING......................................................................5-9
5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-003.......................................5-9
Test Pattern Table ..............................................................................5-10
5.3.2 IPU FRONT/BACK TEST PATTERNS: SP2902-001,002...............5-11
Test Pattern Table ..............................................................................5-12
5.3.3 IPU PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-004..............................5-13
5.4 SOFTWARE UPDATE.............................................................................5-14
5.4.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE: B140 SERIES....................5-14
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel.......................................5-19
Downloading Stamp Data ...................................................................5-19
NVRAM Data Upload/Download .........................................................5-20
5.4.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE: B064 SERIES....................5-21
GW Controller/BCU Update ................................................................5-22
Forced Update ....................................................................................5-23
Stamp Data Update ............................................................................5-23
Operation Panel Software Update ......................................................5-24
Scanner Update..................................................................................5-25
NIB Update .........................................................................................5-25
NetFile Firmware Update ....................................................................5-25
NVRAM Update ..................................................................................5-26
Firmware Update Notes ......................................................................5-26
5.5 SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE ............................................................5-27
Overview.............................................................................................5-27
Move Exec ..........................................................................................5-28
Undo Exec ..........................................................................................5-28
ix
5.6 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES...................................................5-29

5.6.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY ...................................................................5-29
5.6.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLE.............................................................5-30
SP1xxx Feed ......................................................................................5-30
SP2xxx Drum ......................................................................................5-35
SP3xxx Processing .............................................................................5-53
SP4xxx Scanner .................................................................................5-56
SP5xxx Mode......................................................................................5-66
SP6xxx Peripherals...........................................................................5-100
SP7xxx Data Logs ............................................................................5-106
SP8xxx: Data Log2 ...........................................................................5-120
5.6.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE.........................................................5-149
5.6.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE .......................................................5-150
5.7 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK.......................................................................5-162
5.7.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803 ................................................5-162
5.7.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804 ............................................5-168
5.7.3 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007 ......................................................5-170
5.7.4 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008...................................................5-171
5.7.5 FINISHER INPUT CHECK: SP6117 (B478/B704 ONLY) ............5-172
5.7.6 FINISHER OUTPUT CHECK: SP6118 .........................................5-174
5.8 USING THE DEBUG LOG.....................................................................5-175
5.8.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ...........5-175
5.8.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD .....................5-178
5.8.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ...........................................5-179
5.8.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .........................................................5-180
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-180
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-180
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-180
5.9 USER TOOLS .......................................................................................5-181
5.9.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-181
5.9.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS ....................................................................5-182
B064 Series System Settings ...........................................................5-182
B140 Series System Settings ...........................................................5-184
5.9.3 COPIER/DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES ..............................5-187
5.9.4 INQUIRY.......................................................................................5-191
5.9.5 COUNTER....................................................................................5-191
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ....................................................... 6-1

6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 PAPER PATH (WITH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY) ......................6-3
6.1.2 PAPER PATH (WITH 9-BIN MAILBOX) ...........................................6-4
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-5
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE...............................................................................6-6
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................6-6
6.2.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................6-7
BCU (Base Engine Control Unit)...........................................................6-7
Controller Board....................................................................................6-7
MB (Mother Board) ...............................................................................6-7
IPU (Image Processing Unit) ................................................................6-7
x
manuals4you.com
SBU (Sensor Board Unit)......................................................................6-8

PFC (Paper Feed Control) ....................................................................6-8
SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) ..............................................................6-8
VIB (Video Interface Board) ..................................................................6-8
DRB (Drive Board) ................................................................................6-8
CNB (Connection Board) ......................................................................6-8
HDD (Hard Disk Drive)..........................................................................6-9
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW................................................................6-10
6.4 ADF .........................................................................................................6-12
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-12
6.4.2 ADF DRIVE LAYOUT .....................................................................6-13
6.4.3 PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT .................................................................6-14
6.4.4 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT....................................................................6-15
6.4.5 ORIGINAL SEPARATION ..............................................................6-16
6.4.6 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT ...............................................................6-17
6.4.7 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION ..................................................6-18
6.4.8 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-20
6.4.9 ADF SCANNING.............................................................................6-23
6.4.10 JAM DETECTION.........................................................................6-24
6.5 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-25
6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-25
6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-26
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-27
Sensors...............................................................................................6-27
Detection Timing.................................................................................6-28
6.5.4 SCANNING MAGNIFICATION .......................................................6-29
Book Mode..........................................................................................6-29
6.5.5 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS)......................................................6-30
Xenon Lamp CCD ADS..................................................................6-30
CIS ADS .............................................................................................6-30
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-31
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-31
6.6.2 IMAGE PROCESSING FLOW ........................................................6-32
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING MODES .....................................................6-33
6.6.4 IMAGE QUALITY SP ADJUSTMENTS...........................................6-34
Custom Settings for Each Mode: Image Quality .................................6-34
Custom Settings for Each Mode: Line Width Correction .....................6-36
Custom Setting: Duplex Scanning Mode Original Image Quality
Settings...............................................................................................6-38
Settings Adjustable for Each Original Mode........................................6-39
6.6.5 RELATION BETWEEN THE SP AND UP SETTINGS....................6-40
6.6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING TROUBLESHOOTING ..............................6-42
Removing Background from Coarse Paper ........................................6-42
Improving the Appearance of a Copy of a Color Document................6-42
Removing Vertical White Lines During Duplex Scanning....................6-43
Equalizing Duplex Scanned Image Quality of Front/Back Sides.........6-44
Equalizing Image Quality of Front Sides for Duplex and Simplex
Modes .................................................................................................6-44
xi
6.7 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-45

6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-45
6.7.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-46
6.7.3 FOUR-BEAM EXPOSURE .............................................................6-47
6.7.4 COOLING FAN...............................................................................6-48
6.7.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES ................................................................6-49
6.8 DRUM UNIT ............................................................................................6-50
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-50
6.8.2 OPC DRUM ....................................................................................6-51
6.8.3 DRUM DRIVE .................................................................................6-51
6.8.4 DRUM CHARGE.............................................................................6-52
6.8.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANING ..........................................6-53
6.8.6 DRUM PICK-OFF MECHANISM ....................................................6-54
6.8.7 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-55
6.8.8 DRUM VENTILATION AND OZONE FILTER.................................6-56
6.8.9 TONER RECYCLING .....................................................................6-57
6.8.10 WASTE TONER COLLECTION....................................................6-58
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-58
Error Detection....................................................................................6-58
6.8.11 PROCESS CONTROL..................................................................6-59
What Happens at Power On ...............................................................6-59
Drum Potential Sensor Calibration......................................................6-60
Development Bias, Bias Grid, and LD Adjustment..............................6-61
ID Sensor Calibration (Vsg) ................................................................6-63
TD Sensor Calibration (Vref)...............................................................6-63
6.9 DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY ................................................6-64
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-64
Development Unit ...............................................................................6-64
Toner Supply ......................................................................................6-65
6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................6-66
6.9.3 DEVELOPER/TONER MIXING (AGITATION)................................6-67
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-68
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................6-69
6.9.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT DRIVE AND VENTILATION ......................6-70
6.9.7 TONER END SENSOR ..................................................................6-71
6.9.8 SHUTTER MECHANISM................................................................6-71
6.9.9 TONER BOTTLE SUPPLY AND VENTILATION ............................6-72
6.9.10 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .......................................................6-73
Sensor Control Mode ..........................................................................6-73
Pixel Count Toner Supply Mode .........................................................6-74
TD Sensor Initialization .......................................................................6-75
Determining Vref .................................................................................6-75
Toner Supply without ID Sensor and TD Sensors ..............................6-76
Abnormal TD Sensor Output...............................................................6-76
Abnormal ID Sensor Output................................................................6-76
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-77
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-77
6.10 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................6-78
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-78
xii
manuals4you.com
6.10.2 TRANSFER BELT LIFT ................................................................6-79

Mechanism .........................................................................................6-79
Timing .................................................................................................6-80
6.10.3 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE ........................................................6-81
6.10.4 TRANSFER CURRENT SETTINGS .............................................6-82
6.10.5 TRANSFER CURRENT CIRCUIT ................................................6-83
6.10.6 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE AND PAPER TRANSPORT................6-84
6.10.7 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING .....................................................6-85
6.10.8 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................6-86
6.11 PAPER FEED........................................................................................6-87
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-87
Tray Capacities...................................................................................6-88
Built-in Feed Stations..........................................................................6-88
By-pass Feed......................................................................................6-88
Paper Registration ..............................................................................6-88
Jam Removal......................................................................................6-88
6.11.2 DRIVE...........................................................................................6-89
6.11.3 TRAY AND PAPER LIFT MECHANISM TRAY 2,3....................6-90
Bottom Plate Lift .................................................................................6-90
Lift Sensor...........................................................................................6-91
6.11.4 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM........................6-92
Paper Feed and Separation: No Paper Present .................................6-92
Paper Feed and Separation................................................................6-93
Separation Roller Release Mechanism...............................................6-94
6.11.5 PAPER NEAR-END AND PAPER END TRAYS 2 AND 3 .........6-95
6.11.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...........................................................6-96
Tandem Tray (Tray 1) .........................................................................6-96
Universal Cassettes (Tray 2, 3) ..........................................................6-96
6.11.7 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS..............................................6-97
6.11.8 TANDEM TRAY TRAY 1 ...........................................................6-98
Overview.............................................................................................6-98
Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray ................................6-99
Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection..............................................6-100
Fence Drive ......................................................................................6-102
Rear Fence Drive..............................................................................6-103
Tray Side-to-side Positioning ............................................................6-104
6.11.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM TRAYS 1 TO 3 ...............6-105
6.11.10 BY-PASS TRAY........................................................................6-106
By-pass Feed and Separation ..........................................................6-106
By-pass Tray Paper End Detection...................................................6-107
By-pass Paper Size Detection ..........................................................6-108
6.11.11 PAPER REGISTRATION..........................................................6-109
Overview...........................................................................................6-109
Paper Registration Drive...................................................................6-110
Jam Removal at Paper Registration .................................................6-111
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT....................................................6-112
xiii
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-112

B064 Series ......................................................................................6-112
B140 Series ......................................................................................6-113
Both Series .......................................................................................6-113
6.12.2 FUSING MECHANISM ...............................................................6-114
B064 Series ......................................................................................6-114
B140 Series ......................................................................................6-115
6.12.3 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................6-116
B064 Series ......................................................................................6-116
B140 Series ......................................................................................6-117
6.12.4 HOT ROLLER CLEANING .........................................................6-118
Overview...........................................................................................6-118
Web Drive .........................................................................................6-119
Web Near-end ..................................................................................6-119
Web End ...........................................................................................6-119
6.12.5 FUSING UNIT ENTRANCE GUIDE............................................6-120
6.12.6 FUSING UNIT DRIVE.................................................................6-121
6.12.7 CPM DOWN MODE....................................................................6-122
B140 Series ......................................................................................6-122
6.12.8 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL........................................6-123
6.12.9 EXIT............................................................................................6-125
6.12.10 EXIT JUNCTION GATE............................................................6-126
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT.....................................................................................6-127
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-127
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE .........................................................................6-128
6.13.3 INVERTER OPERATION ...........................................................6-129
Inverter Feed-in and Jogging ............................................................6-129
Inverter Feed-out ..............................................................................6-130
6.13.4 DUPLEX TRAY FEED ................................................................6-131
6.13.5 DUPLEX INTERLEAVE FEED....................................................6-132
6.14 ENERGY SAVER MODES ..................................................................6-134
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-134
6.14.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE............................................................6-135
Entering the energy saver mode.......................................................6-135
What happens in energy saver mode ...............................................6-135
Return to stand-by mode ..................................................................6-135
6.14.3 LOW POWER MODE .................................................................6-136
Entering the low power mode ...........................................................6-136
What happens in low power mode....................................................6-136
Return to stand-by mode ..................................................................6-136
6.14.4 AUTO OFF MODE......................................................................6-137
Entering auto off mode......................................................................6-137
What happens in auto off mode ........................................................6-137
Returning to stand-by mode..............................................................6-137
Disabling auto off mode ....................................................................6-137
6.14.5 NIGHT MODE.............................................................................6-138
Entering night stand-by and night modes..........................................6-138
What happens in night stand-by and night modes ............................6-138
Returning to stand-by mode..............................................................6-138
xiv
manuals4you.com
PERIPHERALS
LCT (B473)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.................................. B473-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
EXTERNAL COVERS ........................................................................ B473-1

PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS......................................... B473-2
PICK-UP SOLENOID ......................................................................... B473-3
PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES....................... B473-4
TRAY MOTOR.................................................................................... B473-5
PAPER STACK SENSOR .................................................................. B473-5
PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT ............................................................. B473-6
2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B473-7

2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B473-7
2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS ....................................................... B473-7
2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT................................................................. B473-9
2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION .................................................. B473-10
2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED....................................................... B473-10
2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION ...................................................... B473-11
2.3 PAPER LIFT ..................................................................................... B473-12
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ......................................................... B473-14
2.5 PAPER END DETECTION ............................................................... B473-15
A3/DLT TRAY KIT (B475)

1.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT ................................. B475-1
1.1.1 REMOVING THE LIFT WIRE .................................................... B475-1
1.1.2 INSTALLING THE LIFT WIRE................................................... B475-2
2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B475-3
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B468/B469/B674)

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

POSITIONING ROLLER..................................................................... B468-2
INNER COVER................................................................................... B468-2
BRUSH ROLLER................................................................................ B468-3
LOWER TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2............................... B468-4
PROOF TRAY EXIT AND FULL SENSORS....................................... B468-5
EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................... B468-6
FINISHER, STAPLER ENTRANCE SENSORS ................................. B468-7
SADDLE-STITCH STAPLER REPLACEMENT .................................. B468-8
xv
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT (B674 ONLY)........................................... B468-10

JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR (B674 ONLY) .............................. B468-11
JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR(B674 ONLY) ....................... B468-12
PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT................................................ B468-13
JAM DETECTION........................................................................... B468-14
DIP SW 100 (MAIN BOARD).......................................................... B468-15
JOGGER FENCE ADJUSTMENT .................................................. B468-15
2. DETAILS ............................................................................. B468-24

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
OVERVIEW ...................................................................................... B468-24

DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B468-25
TRAY/STAPLER JUNCTION GATES .............................................. B468-28
PRE-STACKING............................................................................... B468-29
VERTICAL LIFT MECHANISM......................................................... B468-30
2.5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. B468-30
2.5.2 UPPER TRAY.......................................................................... B468-31
Just After the Power is Switched on............................................. B468-31
Height Adjustment During Feed-Out ............................................ B468-31
Upper Tray Full ............................................................................ B468-31
2.5.3 LOWER TRAY......................................................................... B468-32
Just After the Power is Switched on............................................. B468-32
Positioning the Lower Tray for Feed-out ...................................... B468-32
Lower Tray Height Adjustment During Feed-out.......................... B468-32
Lower Tray Full ............................................................................ B468-33
2.6 SHIFT MECHANISM ........................................................................ B468-34
2.7 PAPER POSITIONING ..................................................................... B468-35
2.8 STAPLER ......................................................................................... B468-36
2.8.1 STAPLING MECHANISM ........................................................ B468-36
2.8.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT........................................................... B468-37
Horizontal Stapler Movement....................................................... B468-37
Rotational Stapler Movement....................................................... B468-38
2.8.3 FEED OUT .............................................................................. B468-39
2.9 STAPLING Z-FOLDED PAPER (B674 ONLY) ................................. B468-40
2.10 BOOKLET FINISHING ................................................................... B468-41
2.10.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................... B468-41
2.10.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING.................................. B468-41
2.10.3 INITIAL FOLDING.................................................................. B468-41
2.10.4 FINAL FOLDING AND FEED-OUT........................................ B468-43
PUNCH UNIT (B377)

1.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT.................................................... B377-1
2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B377-2

2.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ............................................................ B377-2
2.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ......................................................... B377-4
xvi
manuals4you.com
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6

FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ................................................. B470-2
FEED BELT ........................................................................................ B470-3
GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT........................................................... B470-4
MAIN BOARD..................................................................................... B470-5
MOTOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................. B470-6
1.6.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR............................................ B470-6
1.6.2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR ................................................ B470-6
1.6.3 FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR .................................... B470-7
2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B470-8

2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B470-8
2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT .......................................................................... B470-8
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................ B470-9
2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...................................................... B470-10
2.1.4 PAPER PATH.......................................................................... B470-13
2.2 PAPER FEED................................................................................... B470-14
Power On..................................................................................... B470-14
Paper Separation and Feed......................................................... B470-14
Bottom Tray Lift ........................................................................... B470-14
Paper Near-end ........................................................................... B470-14
Paper End.................................................................................... B470-14
9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)

1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS ....................................................................... B471-1
1.2 SENSORS .......................................................................................... B471-2
1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD............................................ B471-3
2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B471-4

2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B471-4
2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................. B471-4
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................ B471-5
2.1.3 PAPER PATH............................................................................ B471-6
2.2 BASIC OPERATION........................................................................... B471-7
2.2.1 PAPER PATH............................................................................ B471-7
2.3 OVERFLOW DETECTION ................................................................. B471-8
2.3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................... B471-8
2.3.2 DETECTION TIMING ................................................................ B471-9
2.4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING ......................................... B471-10
2.4.1 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 1ST BIN TRAY................................. B471-10
2.4.2 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 2ND ~ 9TH BIN TRAY ..................... B471-10
xvii
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B478)

1. INSTALLATION .................................................................... B478-1
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............................................. B478-2
3.1 DOOR AND COVER .......................................................................... B478-3
Front Door...................................................................................... B478-3
Left Inner Cover ............................................................................. B478-3
Inner Cover .................................................................................... B478-3
Side Table and Upper Tray............................................................ B478-4
Left Covers .................................................................................... B478-5
Rear Cover and Top Cover............................................................ B478-5
Shift Tray ....................................................................................... B478-5
3.2 ROLLERS........................................................................................... B478-6
3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER................................................. B478-6
3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................ B478-7
3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER................................................. B478-8
3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT .................................................................. B478-9
3.4 JOGGER FENCE ............................................................................. B478-10
3.5 SENSORS ........................................................................................ B478-11
3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR ...... B478-11
Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2 ..................................................... B478-11
Exit Guide Open Sensor .............................................................. B478-11
3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR................. B478-12
Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor ................................................... B478-12
Upper Tray Exit Sensor................................................................ B478-12
3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR................................................... B478-13
3.5.4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS . B478-14
Entrance Sensor .......................................................................... B478-14
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor...................................................... B478-14
3.5.5 PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR............................................... B478-15
3.5.6 STAPLE WASTE HOPPER SENSOR ..................................... B478-16
3.5.7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN
SENSORS ............................................................................... B478-17
3.6 STAPLER ......................................................................................... B478-18
3.7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR ...................................................................... B478-19
3.7.1 STACKING ROLLER/ROLLER DRAG MOTORS,
RETURN HP SENSOR............................................................ B478-20
3.8 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) ......................................................... B478-23
3.8.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT......................................... B478-23
Front to Rear Adjustment............................................................. B478-23
Right to Left Adjustment............................................................... B478-23
3.9 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)....................................................... B478-24
3.9.1 JOGGER UNIT ........................................................................ B478-24
3.9.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB................................................................ B478-25
3.9.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR.......................................................... B478-26
xviii
manuals4you.com
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................ B478-27

5. SERVICE TABLES.............................................................. B478-28
5.1 DIP SWITCHES................................................................................ B478-28
5.2 TEST POINTS .................................................................................. B478-28
5.3 FUSES ............................................................................................. B478-28
6. DETAILS ............................................................................. B478-29

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE ........................................ B478-29

PAPER PRE-STACKING ................................................................. B478-30
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING ........................................... B478-31
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT .......................................................... B478-32
Side-to-Side ................................................................................. B478-32
Rotation (1) .................................................................................. B478-33
Rotation (2) .................................................................................. B478-33
6.5 STAPLER ......................................................................................... B478-34
6.6 FEED-OUT ....................................................................................... B478-36
6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING ................................................................. B478-37
6.8 SHIFT TRAY..................................................................................... B478-38
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. B478-38
Stand-by Mode ............................................................................ B478-38
6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT.................................... B478-39
Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode)...................................................... B478-39
Staple Mode................................................................................. B478-39
6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION.............................. B478-40
6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ...................................... B478-41
6.10 JAM CONDITIONS......................................................................... B478-42
6.11 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) ....................................................... B478-43
6.11.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE............................................................. B478-43
6.11.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ............................................ B478-44
6.12 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)..................................................... B478-45
6.12.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT .............................. B478-45
6.12.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE .......................................................... B478-46
7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ................................ B478-47

7.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .......................................... B478-47
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.................................. B478-48
7.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B478-51
xix
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706)

1. INSTALLATION .................................................................... B706-1
3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT............................................... B706-3
Front Door...................................................................................... B706-3
Left Inner Cover ............................................................................. B706-3
Inner Cover .................................................................................... B706-3
Side Table and Upper Tray............................................................ B706-4
Left Covers .................................................................................... B706-5
Rear Cover and Top Cover............................................................ B706-5
Shift Tray ....................................................................................... B706-5
3.2 ROLLERS........................................................................................... B706-6
3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER................................................. B706-6
3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................ B706-7
3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER................................................. B706-8
3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT .................................................................. B706-9
3.4 JOGGER FENCE ............................................................................. B706-10
3.5 SENSORS ........................................................................................ B706-11
3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR ...... B706-11
Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2 ..................................................... B706-11
Exit Guide Open Sensor .............................................................. B706-11
3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR................. B706-12
Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor ................................................... B706-12
Upper Tray Exit Sensor................................................................ B706-12
3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR................................................... B706-13
3.5.4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS . B706-14
Entrance Sensor .......................................................................... B706-14
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor...................................................... B706-14
3.5.5 PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR............................................... B706-15
3.5.6 STAPLE WASTE HOPPER SENSOR ..................................... B706-16
3.5.7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN
SENSORS ............................................................................... B706-17
3.6 STAPLER ......................................................................................... B706-18
3.7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR ...................................................................... B706-19
3.7.1 STACKING ROLLER/ROLLER DRAG MOTORS,
RETURN HP SENSOR............................................................ B706-20
3.8 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT ................................................................... B706-23
3.8.1 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER............................................. B706-23
3.8.2 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT .......................................................... B706-24
3.8.3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR.............................................. B706-25
3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR...................................... B706-26
3.9 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) ......................................................... B706-27
3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT......................................... B706-27
Front to Rear Adjustment............................................................. B706-27
xx
manuals4you.com
Right to Left Adjustment............................................................... B706-27

3.10.1 JOGGER UNIT ...................................................................... B706-28
3.10.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB.............................................................. B706-29
3.10.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR........................................................ B706-30

5. SERVICE TABLES.............................................................. B706-32
5.1 DIP SWITCHES................................................................................ B706-32
5.2 TEST POINTS .................................................................................. B706-32
5.3 FUSES ............................................................................................. B706-32
6. DETAILS ............................................................................. B706-33

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE ........................................ B706-33

PAPER PRE-STACKING ................................................................. B706-34
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING ........................................... B706-35
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT .......................................................... B706-36
Side-to-Side ................................................................................. B706-36
Rotation (1) .................................................................................. B706-37
Rotation (2) .................................................................................. B706-37
6.5 STAPLER ......................................................................................... B706-38
6.6 FEED-OUT ....................................................................................... B706-40
6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING ................................................................. B706-41
6.8 SHIFT TRAY..................................................................................... B706-42
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. B706-42
Stand-by Mode ............................................................................ B706-42
6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT.................................... B706-43
Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode)...................................................... B706-43
Staple Mode................................................................................. B706-43
6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION.............................. B706-44
6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ...................................... B706-45
6.10 STAPLING Z-FOLDED PAPER...................................................... B706-46
6.11 JAM CONDITIONS......................................................................... B706-47
6.12 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) ....................................................... B706-48
6.12.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE............................................................. B706-48
6.12.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ............................................ B706-49
6.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT .............................. B706-50
6.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE .......................................................... B706-51
7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ................................ B706-52

7.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .......................................... B706-52
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.................................. B706-53
7.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B706-56
xxi
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)

1. INSTALLATION .................................................................... B660-1
3.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN........................................................................ B660-3
3.2 COVERS ............................................................................................ B660-4
3.3 FEED MOTOR.................................................................................... B660-5
3.4 UPPER EXIT SENSOR ...................................................................... B660-6
3.5 UPPER STOPPER MOTOR/HP SENSOR, FEED SENSOR ............. B660-7
3.6 FOLD TIMING SENSOR .................................................................... B660-8
3.7 LOWER STOPPER MOTOR/HP SENSOR, RELAY BOARD............. B660-9
3.8 LEADING EDGE SENSOR, LOWER EXIT SENSOR ...................... B660-10
3.9 ANTI-STATIC BRUSH...................................................................... B660-11
3.10 FOLD ROLLER MOTOR ................................................................ B660-12
3.11 MAIN CONTROL BOARD .............................................................. B660-13
3.12 PSU ................................................................................................ B660-14

5. SERVICE TABLES.............................................................. B660-16
6. DETAILS ............................................................................. B660-17
6.1 OVERVIEW ...................................................................................... B660-17
6.2 Z-FOLDING UNIT PAPER PATH ..................................................... B660-19
6.2.1 PAPER PATH WITH NO FOLDING......................................... B660-19
6.2.2 PAPER PATH WITH Z-FOLDING............................................ B660-20
6.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS......................................................... B660-24
6.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B660-25
SCANNER UNIT/PRINTER UNIT (G338/G339)

1. DETAILS ...............................................................................G338-1
1.1 MACHINE LAYOUT............................................................................ G338-1
1.2 CONTROLLER BOARD ..................................................................... G338-2
1.2.1 CONTROLLER BOARD LAYOUT ............................................. G338-2
1.2.2 CONTROLLER BOARD DIP SWITCHES.................................. G338-4
1.2.3 LED INDICATORS..................................................................... G338-4
1.3 ETHERNET BOARD .......................................................................... G338-5
1.3.1 ETHERNET BOARD LAYOUT .................................................. G338-5
1.3.2 ETHERNET BOARD OPERATION............................................ G338-6
1.4 USB .................................................................................................... G338-7
1.4.1 PIN ASSIGNMENT .................................................................... G338-7
1.4.2 REMARKS ABOUT USB ........................................................... G338-8
xxii
manuals4you.com
Related SP Mode........................................................................... G338-8

1.5 IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) ........................................................ G338-9
1.5.1 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................... G338-9
1.5.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM..................................................................... G338-9
2. SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................. G338-10
2.1 SCANNER ........................................................................................ G338-10
2.2 PRINTER.......................................................................................... G338-11
2.3 CONTROLLER BOARD CONFIGURATION .................................... G338-12
2.4 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .......................................................... G338-13
2.4.1 PRINTER................................................................................. G338-13
Printer Drivers .............................................................................. G338-13
Printer Utility Software ................................................................. G338-13
2.5 PAPER SIZES SUPPORTED BY THE PRINTER ............................ G338-14
2.6 USB SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. G338-15
2.7 IEEE 802.11B SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. G338-15
MFP OPTIONS (B659/B581/B596/B582/G377/B609/B735)

1. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ................................................. B659-1
1.1 MFP OPTION SLOT ASSIGNMENT .................................................. B659-1
1.2 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ............................................................ B659-2
1.2.1 PRINTER................................................................................... B659-2
Printer Drivers ................................................................................ B659-2
Printer Utility Software ................................................................... B659-2
1.3 PAPER SIZE SUPPORTED BY THE PRINTER................................. B659-3
1.4 NETWORK INTERFACE BOARD (NIB) (B594) ................................. B659-4
Operation ....................................................................................... B659-4
1.5 USB 2.0 INTERFACE BOARD (B596) ............................................... B659-5
Remarks about USB ...................................................................... B659-5
Related SP Mode........................................................................... B659-5
1.6 IEEE802.11B INTERFACE BOARD (WIRELESS LAN) (B582).......... B659-6
1.6.1 LED INDICATORS..................................................................... B659-6
1.6.2 TRANSMISSION MODES ......................................................... B659-6
1.6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES ................................................. B659-6
Communication Status................................................................... B659-6
Troubleshooting Procedure............................................................ B659-7
1.7 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB) (B609) ...................................... B659-8
1.8 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ................................... B659-9
1.8.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY .......................................................... B659-9
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten ............................ B659-9
Overwrite timing ............................................................................. B659-9
1.8.2 ERASE ALL MEMORY ............................................................ B659-10
1.8.3 OVERWRITE METHOD .......................................................... B659-10
2. SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................. B659-11
2.1 CONTROLLER BOARD ................................................................... B659-11
2.2 PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT (B659) .................................................. B659-11
Printer .......................................................................................... B659-11
xxiii
Scanner ....................................................................................... B659-12

2.3 IEEE1394 INTERFACE BOARD (B581)........................................... B659-13
Hardware Specification ................................................................ B659-13
System requirement..................................................................... B659-13
2.4 USB 2.0 INTERFACE BOARD (B596) ............................................. B659-13
2.5 IEEE802.11B INTERFACE BOARD (B582) ..................................... B659-14
2.6 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT (G377)......................................... B659-14
System requirement..................................................................... B659-14
Hardware Specifications .............................................................. B659-14
2.7 MFP OPTI0N CONFIGURATION ...................................................... B659-15
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS............................................................. SPEC-1
1.1 COPIER....................................................................................... SPEC-1
1.2 ADF ............................................................................................. SPEC-2
1.3 POWER CONSUMPTION ........................................................... SPEC-3
2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ............................................................. SPEC-5
3. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT .................................................................... SPEC-6
3.1 A3/DLT KIT (B475) ...................................................................... SPEC-6
3.2 LCT (LARGE CAPACITY TRAY) (B473) ..................................... SPEC-6
3.3 3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH SADDLE-STITCH AND
50-SHEET STAPLER (B468) ...................................................... SPEC-7
General ...........................................................................................Spec-7
Upper Tray......................................................................................Spec-7
Lower Tray......................................................................................Spec-7
Proof Tray .......................................................................................Spec-7
Staple Specifications.......................................................................Spec-8
Saddle-Stitch Staple Specifications ................................................Spec-8
3.4 3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH 50-SHEET STAPLER (B469)..... SPEC-9
General ...........................................................................................Spec-9
Lower Tray......................................................................................Spec-9
Proof Tray .......................................................................................Spec-9
Staple Specifications.......................................................................Spec-9
3.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH SADDLE-STITCH AND
50-SHEET STAPLER (B674) .................................................... SPEC-10
General .........................................................................................Spec-10
Upper Tray....................................................................................Spec-10
Lower Tray....................................................................................Spec-11
Proof Tray .....................................................................................Spec-11
Staple Specifications.....................................................................Spec-12
Saddle-Stitch Staple Specifications ..............................................Spec-12
3.6 PUNCH UNIT (B377)................................................................. SPEC-13
3.7 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470) ....................................... SPEC-14
3.8 3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706) ....................................... SPEC-15
3.9 PUNCH UNIT (B531)................................................................. SPEC-16
3.10 PUNCH UNIT (A812)............................................................... SPEC-17
xxiv
manuals4you.com
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
JOGGER UNIT (B513) ............................................................ SPEC-18

9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)........................................................... SPEC-18
LG/B4 KIT (B474) .................................................................... SPEC-18
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660) ........................................................ SPEC-18
xxv
30 July 2004
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installation
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range:
Recommended: 15C to 25C (59F to 77F)

Possible: 10C to 32C (50F to 90F)
2. Humidity Range:
15% to 80% RH (27C 80%, 32C 54%)
3. Ambient Illumination:
Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or

strong light.)
4. Ventilation:
Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour
5. Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.10 mg/m3

Humidity
80%
54%
Operation range
15%
10C
(50F)
27C
32C
(80.6F) (89.6F)
Temperature
B064I502.WMF
6. If the place of installation is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the machine

where it will be:
1) Subjected to sudden temperature changes
2) Directly exposed to cool air from an air-conditioner
3) Directly exposed to heat from a heater
1-1
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.

8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet) above sea
level.
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base with the front and back of the
machine within 5 mm (0.2") of level.
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
11. Do not connect the machine to a power source shared with another electrical
appliance.
12. The machine can generate a an electromagnetic field which could interfere with
radio or television reception.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
2. Right to left:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
The machine legs may be screwed up or down in order to level the machine. Set a
carpenters level on the exposure glass.
1-2
30 July 2004
Place the copier near the power source, providing minimum clearance as shown
below. The same amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral
devices are installed.
50 mm (2") Back
40 mm (1.6") Right
100 mm (4") Left
700 mm (27.6") Front
1-3
manuals4you.com
B064I001.WMF
Installation
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
30 July 2004
1.1.4 DIMENSIONS
B064 Series
480 mm (18.9")
425 mm (16.7")
1,098 mm (43.2")
1,165 mm (45.9")
1,014 mm (39.9")
734 mm (28.9") 690 mm (27.2")

314 mm (12.4")
90 mm (3.5")
B064I003.WMF
750 mm (29.5")
620 mm (24.4")
458 mm (18")
B064I002.WMF
1-4
Installation
30 July 2004
B140 Series
480 mm (18.9")
425 mm (16.7")
1,165 mm (45.9")
1,098 mm (43.2")
1,014 mm (39.9")
90 mm (3.5")
734 mm (28.9")
690 mm (27.2")
177 mm (6.9")
314 mm (12.4")
B064I140.WMF
750 mm (29.5")
620 mm (24.4")
458 mm (18")
B064I002.WMF
1-5
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
1.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily
accessible. Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
4. Never set anything on the power cord.
Input voltage level
Permissible voltage fluctuation
North America 120 V, 60 Hz: 20 A or more

Europe/Asia 220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: 10 A or more
Taiwan 110V, 60 Hz, 20A or more
10%
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
The Main Power LED ( ) lights or flashes at the following times:
While the platen cover or ADF is open
While the main machine is communicating with the network server
While the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory when reading or
writing data.
There are two power switches on the machine:
Main Power Switch.
Located on the front left corner of the machine and covered by a plastic cover.
This switch should always remain on unless the machine is being serviced.
Operation Power Switch.
Located on the right side of the operation panel. This is the switch normally used
by the customer to power the machine on and off.
1-6
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES)
1.2 MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES)

1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description
Qty
1. Model Name Decal (-29 Only) ............................................... 1

2. Operation Instructions (-17, -19, -29, -69 Only) ..................... 2
3. NECR with Envelope (-17 Only) ............................................ 1
4. Decal Paper Size ................................................................ 1
5. Decal: Caution Chart: Paper Set: Direction ........................... 1
6. Stand Holder.......................................................................... 1
7. Operating Instructions Holder ................................................ 2
8. Decal Original Table (Face Up) .......................................... 1
9. Decal Cleaning - Multiple .................................................... 1
10. Cloth DF Exposure Glass ................................................... 1
11. Cloth Holder........................................................................... 1
12. Decal Toner Supply - Multiple ............................................ 1
13. Decal: Power Source: Off ...................................................... 1
14. Decal Exposure Glass: Multiple ............................................. 1
15. Decal D1/E1 Multiple .......................................................... 1
1-7
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Removing Tapes and Retainers
CAUTION
To avoid serious injury, do not connect the power plug to the machine until
you are instructed to do so.
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
B064I404.WMF
B140I403.WMF
1. Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping.

2. Remove all filament tape from the front [A] of the machine.
3. Open the lower tray [B] and remove the operating instructions holder and foot
risers.
4. Open the ADF feed cover and remove the tape and retainer [C].
5. Remove the tape from the back [D] of the machine.
NOTE: Save the filament tape and shipping retainers to prepare the machine
for shipping in the future.
1-8
6. Raise the ADF and remove all the

tape and shipping retainers around the
exposure glass [A] and operation
panel.
Installation
30 July 2004
[B]
7. Remove the shipping retaining sheet

[B] under the white pad.
[A]
B064I005.WMF
8. Open the front door, open the toner

bottle holder [C], then remove all tape
and shipping retainers.
[C]
B064I007.WMF
9. Remove the PCU inner cover [D] ( x

2) and disconnect the fan motor [E]
(
x 1).
[E]
[D]
B064I008.WMF
1-9
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
10. Lower the transfer unit by turning its

knob [A].
11. Remove the bracket [B], and the red
tag from the transfer belt ( x 1).
12. Remove the pin [C], and the red tag
from the cleaning plate.
[B]
[A]
[C]
B140I009.WMF
[D]
13. Open the tandem tray (top paper

tray) and remove the metal retainer
bracket [D] ( x 1), wire, and red tag.
Connecting the ADF
B064I401.WMF
Connect the ADF plug [A] to the

connector on the back of the
machine.
[A]
B064I405.WMF
1-10
30 July 2004
1. Remove shutter cover [A] of the toner

supply unit ( x 1).
2. Remove the lock screw [B] from the toner
bottle open/close bracket.
Installation
Removing and Filling the Development Unit
[C]
[D]
3. Make sure that the shipping tape at [C]

has been removed.
4. Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing
the toner bottle holder to the right.
NOTE: After re-installation, the tab [D]
should be behind the stay and
its pin below should be in the
open track below.
[B]
[A]
B064I300.WMF
5. Remove the face plate [E] of the

development unit (knob x 1, x 2).
[E]
B064I302.WMF
[G]
6. Disconnect the development unit [F]

(
x 2).
NOTE: If the LCT is installed, you may
need to disconnect it so the front
door can open far enough to
allow removal of the
development unit.
7. Close the supply pipe shutter [G], and
then while allowing the development unit
[H] to slip to the right, slowly pull it out of
the machine.
[H]
1-11
manuals4you.com
[F]
B064I303.WMF
8. Remove the toner hopper [A] (

2).
30 July 2004
[A]
[B]
9. Rotate the toner hopper [B] slightly

10 to 20 as you slide it up to
remove it.
B064I304.WMF
10. While turning the knob [C] slowly,

pour in one pack of developer [D]
from one end of the development
unit to the other.
11. Make sure that the developer is
evenly distributed. Note the
developer lot number printed on the
top edge of the bag. You will need
the lot number when you execute
SP2963 (Installation Mode).
[D]
[C]
12. Assembly the developer unit then

re-install it in the machine.
B064I305.WMF
13. Follow the instructions printed on

the inside of the front door to install
the toner bottle.
NOTE: If the door does not close,
make sure that the pipe line
shutter is rotated down.
(See Step 7 above.)
1-12
Re-installing the Development Unit
[A]
B064I310.WMF
When re-installing the development unit, engage the plate on the front of the
development unit with the silver pin [A] inside the machine, then slide it to the left
toward the drum.
If the unit is installed correctly, you should see the pin above the plate, and the
plate should be flat against the front of the development unit.
If the development unit will not move past the pin, the couplings are not aligned
correctly at the back of the machine. Turn the gear on the front of the developer
unit until the couplings engage at the rear of the machine.
Before closing the front door, make sure that the pipe line shutter is rotated down
to the open position.
1-13
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
Initializing the Drum Settings (B064 Series)

After switching on the machine, you must execute SP2963 (Installation Mode)
within 60 seconds to 1) Initialize the developer and force toner supply to the
development unit, and 2) Initialize the auto process control settings.
SP2963 must be executed before sample copying or test printing.
If you do not press Execute in Step 2 in the following procedure within 60
seconds after the machine is switched on, the auto process control features
(potential sensor calibration, Vsg, Vref, etc.) will not initialize correctly.
If the machine starts the auto process control routine before you have a chance
to press Execute, switch the machine off and try again.
1. Connect the power cord.
2. Within one minute, before the auto process control settings initialize, execute
SP2963.
Press Clear Modes .
On the operation panel keypad, press
.
Hold down Clear/Stop
for more than 3 seconds.
Press Copy SP on the touch-panel.
Press
.
Press Enter
.
Enter the Developer Lot No. with the key display, then press Execute.
About four minutes is required to initialize toner supply and the auto process
control settings.
3. Press Exit to leave the SP mode.
4. Attach the appropriate decals (provided) to the paper trays.
5. Check copy quality and machine operation.
NOTE: At installation, use SP2963 to enter the lot number, initialize the
developer, and to force toner supply to the toner hopper. After
replacing developer in a machine that has already been installed, do
not use SP2963; execute SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting) instead to
enter the lot number and initialize the TD sensor. ( 3.7.1)
1-14
Initializing the Drum Settings (B140 Series)

You must do SP2963 (Installation Mode) to 1) Initialize the developer and do a
forced toner supply to the development unit, and 2) Initialize the auto process
control settings.
You must open the front door before you switch the machine on. If you do this,
the machine does not do the short automatic process control procedure, which is
usually done after the machine power is turned on.
SP2963 must be done before you do sample copying or test printing.
If you do not press Execute in Step 6, the auto process control items (potential
sensor calibration, Vsg, Vref, etc.) will not initialize correctly.
1. Open the front door.
2. Connect the power cord.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Go into the SP mode.
Push Clear Modes .
On the operation panel keypad, push
.
5. Close the front door.
6. Do SP2963.
.
Press Execute.
Input the Developer Lot No. with the key display, then press Execute.
Approximately four minutes is necessary to initialize toner supply and the auto
process control settings.
7. Press Exit to go out of the SP mode.
8. Attach the applicable decals (supplied with the machine) to the paper trays.
9. Check the copy quality and machine operation.
Important
At installation, use SP2963 to enter the lot number, initialize the developer,
and to force toner supply to the toner hopper.
After you replace developer in a machine that has been already installed, do
not use SP2963; use SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting) instead to enter the
lot number and initialize the TD sensor. ( 3.7.1)
1-15
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
Tandem Tray
Before shipping the machine, the tandem tray is set for A4 or LT LEF and must be
adjusted if the customer wants to use the tandem tray for another paper size.
Feed Station
Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
Allowed Size
A4 LEF, LT LEF
1. Open the front cover.

2. Completely pull out the tandem feed
tray [A] so that the right tandem tray
[B] separates from the left tandem
tray.
[B]
[A]
B064I564.WMF
[D]
3. Remove the right tandem inner cover
[C].
4. Re-position the side fences [D] ( x
2). The outer slot position is used
when loading A4 size paper.
[C]
5. Re-install the right tandem inner

cover [C].
B064I565.WMF
1-16
30 July 2004
Installation
[B]
6. Remove the tray cover [A] (
x 2).
7. Remove the motor cover [B] (
x 4).
[A]
B064I566.WMF
[C]
8. Re-position the side fences [C] ( x 8).
The outer slot position is used when
loading A4 size paper.
9. Re-install the motor cover and the tray
cover.
B064I523.WMF
[D]
10. Remove the rear bottom plate [D]

( x 1).
[E]
11. Re-position the return position sensor

bracket [E] ( x 1). To use the paper
tray for A4 size, put the screw in the
left hole as shown. (For LT size, the
screw should be placed on the right.)
12. Re-install the rear bottom plate.
13. Change the paper size using SP5959001 (Paper Size Tray 1). For details,
see SP5959 in section 5. Service
Tables.
B064I024.WMF
1-17
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Machine Level
1. Set a stand [A] at each corner of the
machine.
2. Place a level on the exposure glass
and use a wrench to turn each nut [B]
and level the machine to 5 mm of the
horizontal.
[B]
3. Check the machine operation. With

the customer, determine the best
place to attach the cleaning reminder
decal.
[A]
B064I010.WMF
Date/Time Setting
Use the User Tools menu to set the current date and time.
On the operation panel, press the User Tools key.
On the touch-panel, press System Settings.
Press the Timer Setting tab.
Press Set Date the enter the date.
Press Set Time to enter the time.
SP Codes
SP5812-001~002
Service Telephone
Number Settings
SP5841-001
Supply Name Setting

Toner Name Setting:
Black
Total Counter Reset
SP7825 (B064 Series Only)
1-18
Execute this SP and enter the

contact numbers of the custom
engineer. These are the
numbers displayed when a
service call is issued.
This name appears when the
user presses the Inquiry on the
User Tools screen.
Execute after installation and
after making all test copies to
reset the electronic counter
total.
30 July 2004
A3/DLT FEEDER KIT (B475)
Installation
1.3 A3/DLT FEEDER KIT (B475)

Description
Qty
1. A3/DLT Tray .......................................................................... 1

2. Short connector ..................................................................... 1
3. Page size decals.................................................................... 1
3
2
B475I001.WMF
1-19
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004

CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the
following procedure.
1. Draw out the tandem tray completely

to separate the left and right sides of
the tray, then remove the front cover
[A] ( x 2).
[B]
2. Push in the right tandem tray [B].
[A]
B475I707.WMF
3. Remove the left tandem tray [C]

( x 5). Save these screws.
[C]
B475I708.WMF
1-20
4. Remove the right tandem tray [A] (

2). Save these screws.
Installation
30 July 2004
[A]
B475I709.WMF
5. Connect the short connector [B] to the

left tandem tray terminal [C].
[C]
[B]
6. Remove the stay [D] (

install it.
x 2) and re-
B475I201.WMF
[D]
7. Attach the A3/DLT tray [E], using the

screws removed earlier.
8. Re-install the front cover.
9. Switch the machine on, enter the SP
mode and select the paper size for
Tray 1 with SP5959-001 (Paper Size
Tray 1) For details, see SP5959 in
section 5. Service Tables.
10. Attach the appropriate decal for the
selected paper size.
[E]
B475I202.WMF
1-21
manuals4you.com
LCT (B473)
30 July 2004
1.4 LCT (B473)

Description
Qty
1. Flat-head shoulder screw - M4 x 6......................................... 1

2. Upper docking pins (grooved)................................................ 2
3. Lower docking pin (not grooved)............................................ 1
4. Installation Instructions .......................................................... 1
5. Paper Set Decal..................................................................... 1
1-22
30 July 2004
LCT (B473)
Installation

Removing Tape
[B]
[A]
[C]
B473I001.WMF
B473I002.WMF
1. Remove the filament tape from the body [A] and top cover [B] of the LCT.
2. Remove the tape under the lid [C] of the LCT.
1-23
manuals4you.com
LCT (B473)
30 July 2004
Preparing the Main Machine

CAUTION
1. Remove the LCT installation cover

[A] from the right side of the
machine. ( x 2).
2. Save the screw on the left [B]. You
will need it to install the LCT.
[C]
3. Remove the LCT connector cover

[C] (x 1) and the covers over the
holes for the docking pins [D]. (x 3)
[A]
[B]
[D]
B473I003.WMF
Installing the LCT

1. Insert the two upper docking pins
(grooved) [A] into the upper slots
and the lower docking pin [B] into
the lower slot.
[A]
[B]
B473I004.WMF
1-24
LCT (B473)
Installation
30 July 2004
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B473I005.WMF
2. Align the holes on the side of the LCT

[A] with the docking pins on the side of
the machine [B], then slowly push the
LCT onto the pins.
NOTE: The release button [C] is used
to unlock the LCT so it can be
disconnected from the machine.
[E]
3. Connect the plug [D] of the LCT power

cord to the side of the machine.
4. Insert the flat-head shoulder screw [E]
into the hole and fasten it to lock the
release lever in place.
For easier access to the hole for the
screw [E], you can remove the right
panel [F] ( x 2).
5. Switch the machine on and execute
SP5959 005 (Paper Size Tray 4
(LCT)) to select the paper size. For
details, see SP5959 in section 5.
Service Tables.
1-25
manuals4you.com
[F]
B473I006.WMF
LG/B4 FEEDER KIT (B474)
30 July 2004
1.5 LG/B4 FEEDER KIT (B474)

Description
Qty
1. Tapping screws - M4 x 8........................................................ 4

2. Tapping hex screws - M4 x 8 ................................................. 6
3. Harness clamp....................................................................... 1
4. B4/LG frame .......................................................................... 1
5. Front bracket.......................................................................... 1
6. Rear bracket .......................................................................... 1
7. Bottom plate extension .......................................................... 1
8. Cover ..................................................................................... 1
1-26
30 July 2004
If the LCT is connected to the machine

1. Open the cover and remove the paper.
Installation

[A]
2. Lower the LCT tray. Cover the near end

sensor [A], then press the tray down
button [B] to lower the tray bottom plate.
[B]
B474I507.WMF
CAUTION
3. Disconnect the LCT from the machine
( 1.4.2).
4. Remove the LCT upper cover [C].
[C]
B474I504.WMF
1-27
manuals4you.com
5. Remove the LCT cover [A] (
30 July 2004
x 1).
6. Remove the right stay [B] and reattach it below ( x 2).

7. Remove the right cover [C] (
[A]
x 2).
[B]
[C]
B474I001.WMF
8. Attach the front bracket [D] with the

beveled corner down ( x 2).
NOTE: If the brackets are difficult to
install, raise the bottom plate with
your hand.
9. Attach the rear bracket [E] with the
beveled corner down ( x 2).
[E]
[F]
10. Attach the bottom plate extension [F]

with the hex nuts ( x 4).
[D]
B474I502.WMF
11. Align the positioning pin [G].

12. Attach the B4/LG frame [H] with the
hex nuts ( x 2).
[G]
The kit is set for B4. If you need to
change the paper size to LG, do the
following steps.
[H]
1-28
B474I553.WMF
13. Move the front side fence [A] to the LG

position and fasten ( x 1).
Installation
30 July 2004
[B]
14. Move the rear side fence [B] to the LG

position and fasten ( x 1).
[A]
B474I555.WMF
15. Change the position of the lower limit

sensor [C] ( x 1).
16. Attach the harness (not shown) to the
back of the plate and secure the
sensor connector wire.
[C]
B474I508.WMF
17. Attach the LCT cover [D] provided with

the kit ( x 1).
18. Re-attach the right cover [E] (
[D]
x 2).
19. Connect the LCT to the machine

( 1.4.2).
20. Switch the machine on, enter the SP
mode, then use SP5959 005 (Paper
Size Tray 4 (LCT) to select the new
paper size. For details, see SP5959 in
section 5. Service Tables.
[E]
B474I506.WMF
1-29
manuals4you.com
3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)
30 July 2004
1.6 3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)

Description
Qty
1. Rear joint bracket................................................................... 1

2. Front joint bracket .................................................................. 1
3. Upper output tray ................................................................... 1
4. Lower output tray ................................................................... 1
7. Tapping screws - M4x 14....................................................... 4
8. Cushion (with double-sided tape) .......................................... 1
9. Ground (earth) plate .............................................................. 1
1-30
30 July 2004
This section describes the common installation instructions for these finishers:
B468 Booklet Finisher, which can do punching, shifting, stapling, and saddlestitching with staples. The booklet finisher can be used with the B064 Series.
B469 Finisher, which can do punching, shifting, and stapling but with no saddlestitching unit..
B674 Booklet Finisher, which can do punching, shifting, stapling, and saddlestitching with staples. The booklet finisher can be used with the B140 Series.
Installation
NOTE: Differences in the installation procedures are denoted B468 or B469 or

B674.
B468 (B064 Series)

B674 (B140 Series)
B469 (B064 Series/B140 Series)
B469I001.WMF
B468I001.WMF
1-31
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
[A]
B468I002.WMF
1. Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping.

2. Remove all filament tape and shipping retainers from the front of the finisher.
3. Open the front door [A] and remove all the tape and shipping retainers from
inside the finisher.
1-32
Installation
CAUTION
[B]
[C]
[A]
B468I003.WMF
1. Install the front [A] and rear [B] joint brackets (

2. Install the ground plate [C] (
x 2 each, M4x 14).
x 2, M3 x 6).
1-33
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
[A]
[E]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B468I004.WMF
3. Peel the cover tape from the sponge cushion [A], then install it in the upper slot.
NOTE: If you will also install the cover interposer tray, do not attach the
cushion here. Attach it to the cover interposer tray. The cover
interposer tray must be installed on the finisher before you attach the
finisher and tray to the main machine.
4. Align the brackets [B] with the slots in the finisher.
5. Slowly and carefully, to avoid bending the entrance guide plates of the finisher,
push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets enter the
slots.
6. Using the screw [C] removed above, secure the lock lever [D] (
x 1).
7. Connect the plug [E] of the finisher power cord to the connector on the
machine.
CAUTION
Always move the finisher slowly to avoid bending the entrance guide
plates. Bent guide plates could interfere with paper transport from the
machine to the finisher.
1-34
[C]
Installation
30 July 2004
[D]
B468/B674
[B]
[F]
[A]
B469
B468I005.WMF
[E]
B469I005.WMF
B468 (B064 Series)

B674 (B140 Series)
1. Install the lower output tray [A] ( x 2).
NOTE: Only the lower output tray has a movable support tray [B].
2. Install the upper output tray [C] (
x 2).
3. Attach the staple position decal [D] to the ADF.

B469 (B064 Series/B140 Series)
1. Install the output tray [E] (
x 2).
2. Attach the staple position decal [F].
1-35
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Selecting the Staple Supply Name

Enter the SP mode and execute the following information.
5841*
Supply Name Setting

005
Staple Std
006
These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry

button on the initial User Tools screen.
Enter the name of the staples in use for normal stapling
(not booklet stapling). This setting should be done for the
B468, B469, and B674.
Enter the name of the staples in use for booklet stapling
(saddle-stitching). This setting is required only for the
B468 and B674
Staple Bind
Enabling Booklet Binding

To enable booklet binding, you must select the center stapling position.
1. Press the User Tools key.
2. Touch Copier/Document Server Features.
3. Touch the Input/Output tab, then access Select Stapling Position.
4. Touch any Stapling Position button and touch the center stapling symbol.
5. Exit the User Tools mode. Specify the number of copies, touch the center
stapling symbol on the operation panel, then start the print job.
These SP adjustments are available but not required at installation.
SP6902
SP6120
Fold Position
Adjustment
Staple Jogger
Adjustment
Use this SP to fine adjust the fold and staple positions if they
are not aligned correctly. See 5. Service Tables.
Allows fine adjustment of the staple unit jogger fences for
different paper sizes, if required. See 5. Service Tables.
1-36
PUNCH UNIT (B377)
1.7 PUNCH UNIT (B377)

The Punch Unit B377 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finishers B468/B469/B674.

Description
Qty
1. Punch unit.............................................................................. 1
2. Sensor arm ............................................................................ 1
3. Hopper................................................................................... 1
4. Step screw ............................................................................. 1
5. Spring .................................................................................... 1
6. Spacer (2 mm) ....................................................................... 1
7. Spacer (1 mm) ....................................................................... 1
8. Tapping screw - M3 x 8 ......................................................... 1
9. Tapping screw - M3x 10 ........................................................ 2
1-37
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
PUNCH UNIT (B377)
30 July 2004
[A]
[B]
B377I201.WMF
[C]
B377I103.WMF
[E]
[D]
[F]
B377I202.WMF
CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord.
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
2. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
3. Open the front door and remove the rear cover [A] (
4. Remove the bracket [B] (
x 2) and paper guide [C] (
5. Remove the plastic knockout [D].

6. Install the sensor arm [E] (
x 1).
7. Install the spring [F].
1-38
x 4).
x 1).
PUNCH UNIT (B377)
Installation
30 July 2004
[A]
[C]
[B]
B377I203.WMF
[D]
B377I105.WMF
[F]
[E]
B377I106.WMF
8. Remove the shipping bracket [A] (
x 2).
9. Position the 2 mm spacer [B] and secure the punch unit (
x 2).
10. Secure the punch unit at the front with the shoulder screw [C] (
x 1).
11. Connect the harnesses [D] and clamp them as shown.

NOTE: No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. The
punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine, so it knows
what type of punch unit has been installed.
12. Slide the hopper [E] into the machine.
13. Fasten the two 1 mm spacers [F] to the rear frame. These may be used during
future adjustments.
NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the holes.
14. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation.
1-39
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
1.8 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)

1
10
12
11
Description
B470I006.WMF
Qty
1. Front door extension (Top) .................................................... 1

2. Rear cover extension (bottom)............................................... 1
3. Shoulder screws .................................................................... 3
4. Tapping screws M4 x 8 ....................................................... 7
7. Ground Plate.......................................................................... 1
8. Plate extension (bottom)........................................................ 1
9. Right rear cover plate (for B478/B706 only)........................... 2
10. Right front corner plate (for B478/B706 only)......................... 2
11. Spacer (B468/B469/B674 only) ............................................. 1
12. Front door extension (bottom)................................................ 1
1-40
30 July 2004
This procedure shows you how to install the Cover Interposer Tray B470 on the:
3000-sheet Finisher (Booklet Finisher) B468/B674
3000-sheet Finisher B469
3000-sheet Finisher B478/B706.
NOTE: The B468/B469/B674 require installation of only the front spacer. The
B478/B706 requires installation of corner plates.
[A]
[E]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B470I001.WMF
[F]
B470I007.WMF

2. Remove all tape and retainers from the cover interposer tray [A].
3. Remove the tape and cardboard [B] from the ground connector.
4. Remove the cover [C] of the relay connector.
5. Loosen the screw of the bracket [D] ( x 1) then remove the bracket.
NOTE: If you will install the cover interposer tray with a finisher that was
installed on the machine before this time (B468/ B469/ B478/ B674/
B706), remove the sponge strip [E] from the finisher. Keep it until you
attach it again to the interposer tray.
6. Remove the guide plate [F].
1-41
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
Attaching the Extensions
[A]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B470I003.WMF
CAUTION
Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine and that
the copier is turned off and disconnected from the power outlet before you
start the following procedure.
1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] (
x 3).
2. Remove the ground plate [B] from the finisher, and keep the screws
3. Attach the bottom plate [C] ( x 2, M3 x 6). Then attach the ground plate [B] to
the bottom plate ( x 2) with the screws that you removed in step 2.
4. Attach the bottom front door extension [D] (
5. Attach the top front cover extension [E] (
6. Attach the rear cover extension [F] (
x 2, M4 x 8).
x 2, M4 x 8).
x 2, M3 x 6).
1-42
Installation
30 July 2004
Attaching the Interposer Tray

[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
Booklet Finisher
B468/B469/B674 Only
B470I004.WMF
1. If you install the cover interposer tray on the B468/B469/B674 finisher, install
the spacer [A]. You will hear a click when it is installed correctly.
NOTE: If you install the cover interposer tray on the B478/B706, do not install
this spacer. This spacer is for the B468/B469/B674 installation only.
2. Lift the cover interposer tray, and align the keyholes [B] with the shoulder screws
[C]. Then move the cover interposer down onto the screws.
3. Attach the cover interposer with the screw [D] (
x 1, M3 x 6).
Important
If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the B468/B469/B674, skip the
next section and go directly to Attaching the Finisher to the Machine on page 146.
If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the B478/B706, go to the next
section, install the corner plates on the B478/B706, then go to Attaching the
Finisher to the Machine on page 1-46.
1-43
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Attaching the Corner Plates for the B478/B706

The corner plates are installed on the B478/B706 only. Attach the cover interposer
tray to the finisher before you attach the corner plates.
Right Rear Corner Plate (B478/B706 only)
[C]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B]
B470I009.WMF
1. Temporarily set the screws [A] (with approximately two turns) at the right end of
the finisher extension table [B] ( x 2, tapping M4 x 8)
NOTE: You cannot see the holes, because there is tape on them. Punch the
screws through the holes.
2. Align the notches [C] in the right rear corner plate [D] with the screws, and
attach the plate.
3. If there is a gap [E] between the plate and the tray extension attached to the
side of the finisher:
Loosen the two screws below the table extension (not shown)
Align the table extension with the corner of the finisher and the plate
Tighten the tray extension screws.
4. With a long screw driver inserted through the notches in the right rear corner
plate [D], tighten the screws. This attaches the right rear corner plate to the
table extension [B].
1-44
30 July 2004
Installation
Right Front Corner Plate (B478/B706 only)

[C]
[B]
[A]
B470I008.WMF
1. Temporarily set the screw [A] (M4 x 8) (with approximately two turns) to attach
the panel at the right front corner.
NOTE: You cannot see the hole, because there is tape on it. Punch the screw
through the hole.
2. Align the notch in the right front corner plate [B] with the screw and install it.
You hear a click when it is put into its correct position.
3. Put a long screwdriver into the plate cutout [C]. Then, tighten the screw to
attach the right front corner plate.
1-45
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Attaching the Finisher to the Machine

[A]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B470I005.WMF
1. Attach the sponge strip [A] (this is supplied with the finisher).
NOTE: If you will install the cover interposer tray with a finisher that was
installed on the machine before this time, remove the strip from the
finisher and attach it to the cover interposer tray.
2. Attach the guide plate [B] (removed from the finisher) to the cover interposer
( x 2).
NOTE: Make sure to use the two small tapping screws supplied with the
machine, and not the machine screws that you removed from the
finisher with the guide plate.
3. Release the lock lever [C] (
x 1).
4. Lower the transport guide plate [D].

5. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets [E]
go into the slots.
Important: Do the above step carefully. Do not bend the entrance guide
plates. Bent guide plates could cause a blockage for paper transport
between the finisher and copier.
6. Attach the lock lever [C] (
x 1).
7. Lift the transport guide plate [D] to close it.

8. Connect the connector [E] into the copier.
1-46
9. Switch on the machine, and select the default paper size for the cover
interposer.
Important: Be sure to execute the correct SP code for the machine. Please
refer to the table below.
Machine
B064 series
B140 series
Correct SP Code
SP5959-006
SP5158-001 to 008
1-47
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
1.9 9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)

Description
Qty
1. Trays...................................................................................... 9
2. Guide plate ............................................................................ 1
3. Decals (bin display) ............................................................... 1
1-48
30 July 2004
Installation

1. Remove the filament tape [A].
NOTE: Handle the mailbox carefully.
The corner leaf [B] can be
damaged easily.
[A]
[B]
Installation
B471I001.WMF
CAUTION
If the Cover Interposer Tray B470 is installed on the Finisher B468/B469/B674,
remove it. The cover interposer tray and mailbox cannot be installed on the finisher
at the same time.
1. Remove the top cover [A] of the finisher
( x 1).
2. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 1).
NOTE: Loosen the screw. Do not
remove it.
[A]
[B]
B471I002.WMF
1-49
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
[A]
3. Attach the guide plate [A] to the top

of the finisher ( x 2, M3 x 8).
B471I003.WMF
[B]
4. Attach the mailbox [B] to the top of
the finisher ( x 4, M3 x 8).
[C]
5. Attach the 9 trays [C] to the mailbox.
[D]
6. Give the decals [D] to the customer

for notation and pasting at the
correct location.
B471I004.WMF
1-50
30 July 2004
KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452)
Installation
1.10 KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452)

[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[F]
B140I001.WMF
[H]
[I]
[G]
B064I103.WMF
1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inner surface of the key counter
bracket [B] and install the key counter holder [C].
2. Attach the key counter holder to the bracket (
3. Install the key counter cover [D] (
x 2).
x 2).
4. Remove the caps [E, F] from the right cover with a screwdriver.
5. Install the stepped screw [G].
6. Join the connectors [H].
7. Put the key counter holder assembly [I] on the stepped screw.
8. Change the setting of the Key Counter Management to the setting that is
necessary for the customer (User Tools> System Setting> Key Operator
Tools).
9. If necessary, change the setting of SP5121 (Counter Up Timing).
1-51
manuals4you.com
COPY CONNECTOR KIT
30 July 2004
1.11 COPY CONNECTOR KIT

1.11.1 COPY CONNECTOR KIT (B525-10, -12) FOR B064 SERIES
Important Notes
1. The following are the specialized firmware versions for use with the Copy
Connector Kit or MLB option. When installing either of these options, it is
necessary to install the following firmware together as a set.
Software
Part Number
Version (1st released)
GW Controller: System
B5254108
5.07
GW Controller: Copy
B5254109
5.07
BCU
B5254123
5.03d
Printer/Scanner
B5255204
4.15/5.00
NIB/Netfile
B5254114
3.00/1.79
LCDC
B5254176 (NA)
B5254177 (EU)
2.04
2. With the Copy Connector/MLB modifications, the machine firmware has been
divided up into 2 main groups:
1) The Copy Connector/MLB group (beginning with the versions listed above)
2) The usual firmware used up to the present, i.e. for machines without the
Copy Connector or MLB options.
Important: Firmware from these two groups cannot be used interchangeably.
Always update within the same group, otherwise the machine will not operate
correctly.
3. The Copy Connector Kit and MLB options cannot be installed in the same
machine. It is necessary to install one or the other.
4. As shown above, the GW controller firmware for the Copy Connector/MLB
group has been divided into GW System and GW Copy, as the increased size
has exceeded the card's storage capacity.
1-52
COPY CONNECTOR KIT
ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. Copy Connector Board .......................................................... 2

2. MLB Interface Board.............................................................. 2
3. Interface Cable ...................................................................... 3
4. Interface Harness Power Line............................................. 2
5. Hub ........................................................................................ 2
6. Key Top Application............................................................ 6
7. Operating Instructions (English)............................................. 1
8. Key Top Printer................................................................... 2
9. Anti-static Cap ....................................................................... 2
10. Ferrite Core............................................................................ 4
11. Knob Screw ........................................................................... 4
12. Decal Copy Connector........................................................ 4
13. Tapping Screw M3 x 8 ....................................................... 4
1-53
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
COPY CONNECTOR KIT
30 July 2004
Installation
CAUTION
Unplug the machine main power cord before starting the following
procedure.
Perform the following procedures for both the main and sub copiers.
Installing the Firmware: B064 Series
[A]
B110I201.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover (
x 2).
2. Remove the controller cover (
x 10).
3. Turn on DIP SW2-1 on the controller board [A].

4. Install the following firmware.
GW Controller (System and Copy)
Printer/Scanner
NIB Netfile
5. Turn off DIP SW2-1 on the controller board.
BCU
LCDC
1-54
30 July 2004
COPY CONNECTOR KIT
Installation
Installing the Hardware
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B110I202.WMF
B110I201.WMF
1. Replace the interface board [A] with the MLB Interface Board [B].
NOTE: This step is not necessary from the following Serial Numbers:
Part Number
B06417
B06419
B06422
B06424
B06426
B06427
B06428
B06429
B06469
Serial Number
J4235300054
J42304XXXXX
J42304XXXXX
L1283040001
7P10430001
J4230300409
J42304XXXXX
J42304XXXXX
J42304XXXXX
Part Number
B06517
B06519
B06522
B06524
B06526
B06527
B06528
B06529
B06569
Serial Number
J4335300191
J43304XXXXX
J43304XXXXX
L1293040001
7P20430001
J43304XXXXX
J43304XXXXX
J43304XXXXX
J43304XXXXX
2. Remove the 4P connector [C] for the HDD and connect it to CN319 on the MLB
Board.
3. Connect one end of the power interface harness [D] to the HDD connector, and
the other end to CN318 on the MLB Board.
1-55
manuals4you.com
COPY CONNECTOR KIT
30 July 2004
[C]
[B
B110I203.WMF
[D]
[A]
4. Remove the connector cover [A] (
x 2).
5. Install the CCK interface board [B] as shown.

6. Connect the harness [C] to CN315 on the MLB Board.
7. Attach the decals [D] as shown.
1-56
B110I102.WMF
COPY CONNECTOR KIT
Installation
30 July 2004
[C]
[A]
[B]
B110I204_RTB.WMF
[D]
B110I103_RTB.WMF
8. Lead the interface cable [AI] through the anti-static cap [BJ], and then connect
it to the interface board.
9. Attach the anti-static cap (2 knob screws [C]).
10. Replace the key top [D].
11. Repeat both the firmware and hardware procedures above for the other copier.
1-57
manuals4you.com
COPY CONNECTOR KIT
30 July 2004
12. Perform Steps 12 and 13 below if the distance between the two machines is
more than 4.5m.
[B]
[A]
B110I205.WMF
13. Use the Hubs [A] to connect the interface cables.

NOTE: When connected in this way, the maximum length possible is 13.5m (3
interface cables).
14. Attach the ferrite cores [B] as shown.
1-58
30 July 2004
COPY CONNECTOR KIT (B328-03) FOR B140 SERIES
Installation
1.11.2 COPY CONNECTOR KIT (B328-03) FOR B140 SERIES

ACCESSORY CHECK
1
3
2
Description
5
B328I101.WMF
Qty
1. Interface Cable 1394 ............................................................. 3

2. Repeater Hub 1394 ............................................................... 2
3. Connection PCB .................................................................... 2
4. Power Repeater Cable .......................................................... 2
5. Keytops for B070/B071 (NA, EU 1 each)
Other Function .................................................................... 2
Printer/Other Function ......................................................... 2
6. Keytops for B140 series (NA, EU 1 each)
Other Function..................................................................... 2
Printer/Other Function ......................................................... 2
Printer/Other Function + Scanner........................................ 2
7. SDRAM DIMM 64 MB ........................................................... 2
8. Operating Instructions (NA) .................................................. 1
9. CD-ROM (Operating Instructions for EU) .............................. 1
1-59
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Preparation
Before you begin the installation procedure:
Check the distance between the machines to be connected.
Check if the printer/scanner option is installed on the machines.
Measure the distance between the machines. Then check the number of cables
and repeater hubs that are necessary.
DISTANCE
Up to 4.5 m (14.8 ft.)
4.5 ~ 9.0 m (14.8 ~ 29.5 ft)
9.0 ~ 13.5 m (29.5 ~ 112.5 ft.
POWER REPEATER
HUBS
None
1
2
INTERFACE
CABLES
1
2
3
Three sets of key-tops (2 per set, 1 for NA, 1 for EU) are included for each
machine, but you must install only one key-top on each machine.
Install the key labeled Printer/Other Function + Scanner (or its equivalent
symbol key-top for EU) on a machine with the printer/scanner option installed
Install the key labeled Other Function (or its equivalent symbol key-top for EU)
on a machine without the printer/scanner option.
1-60
30 July 2004
Installation
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
B659I103.WMF
B661I110.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Remove the controller box cover [A] (
3. Remove the cover from Slot A2 [B] (
x 12).
x 2).
4. Put the Copy Connector Kit board [C] in Slot A2 and tighten the knob screws (x
2).
1-61
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
[A]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[C]
B661I113.WMF
[F]
B659I112.WMF
5. Connect one end [A] of the power supply harness to the mother board (
x 1).
6. Connect the other end [B] of the power supply harness to the connector board
(
x 1).
7. Connect the 64 MB DIMM [C] to the mother board.
NOTE: This memory chip is a data transfer buffer.
8. Connect the connector board [D] to Slot A2.
9. Connect one end of the connector cable [E] to the copy connector board.
10. Connect the other end of the cable to the other machine.
-orIf the distance between the machines is more than 4.5 m (14.8 ft.), connect the
cables to a connector hub [F].
1-62
Installation
30 July 2004
[A]
B064I402.WMF
15. Replace the key tops [A].

16. Repeat the firmware and hardware procedures above for the other copier.
1-63
manuals4you.com
3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706)
30 July 2004
1.12 3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706)

Description
Qty
1. Cushion ................................................................................. 1
2. Table Extension ..................................................................... 1
3. Leveling Shoes ...................................................................... 1
4. Rear Joint Bracket ................................................................. 1
5. Front Joint Bracket................................................................. 1
6. Entrance Guide Plate............................................................. 1
7. Grounding Plate..................................................................... 1
8. Auxiliary Tray Holder ............................................................. 2
9. Auxiliary Tray - Proof ............................................................. 2
10. Auxiliary Tray - Shift............................................................... 2
11. Tapping Screws - M4 x 8 ....................................................... 2
14. Phillips Screws w/washer - M4 x 14....................................... 4
15. Shift Tray ............................................................................... 4
16. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1
1
4
15
14
13
12
11
10
B706I201A.WMF
1-64
Installation
30 July 2004
1.12.2 INSTALLATION
B478I002.WMF
B478I003.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
[F]
B478I014.WMF
[B]
[C]
B478I019.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Open the front door and remove the shipping retainers. Remove brackets [A],
[B], and [C] ( x 2 each).
3. Install the front joint bracket [D] and rear joint bracket [E] (
14) on the left side of the copier.
4. Remove the connector cover [F].
1-65
manuals4you.com
x 2 each) (M4 x
30 July 2004
[A]
B478I004.WMF
[C]
[B]
B478I005.WMF
[D]
0 ~ 2 mm
0 ~ 5 mm
B478I107.WMF
5. Install the grounding plate [A] ( x 2) (M3 x 6).

NOTE: Set the grounding plate so that there is no gap between the grounding
plate and the bottom frame of the finisher (as shown).
6. Install the table extension [B] as shown ( x 2) (M4 x 8).
NOTE: The edge of the table extension should be aligned with the edge of the
finisher (as shown).
7. Attach the cushion [C] to the right side of the upper cover.
NOTE: If you are installing the cover interposer tray, do not attach the cushion
here. Attach it to the cover interposer tray. The cover interposer tray
must be installed before you dock the finisher and tray with the main
machine. For details, see the Cover Interposer Tray B470 installation
instructions.
8. Install the entrance guide plate [D] (
x 2) (M3 x 6).
1-66
30 July 2004
Installation
[C]
B478I534.WMF
[D]
[B]
[A]
B478I006.WMF
9. Attach the shift tray [A] (
x 4) (M3 x 8).
10. Open the front door of the finisher, and remove the screw from the locking
lever, then pull out the locking lever [B].
11. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing in the
locking lever [B].
NOTE: Before securing the locking lever, make sure that the top edges of the
finisher and the copier are parallel from front to rear as shown [C].
12. Secure the locking lever [B] (
x 1) and close the front door.
13. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the copier.

14. Set the leveling shoes (x 4) under the feet and level the machine.
1-67
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
1.12.3 WHEN YOU MOVE THE FINISHER TO A NEW LOCATION

Before you move the finisher, do SP6107-003. This moves the mechanisms to their
home positions.
After you move the finisher, the mechanisms go back to the ready condition
automatically, after you turn the power on.
1-68
PUNCH UNIT (B531/A812)
1.13 PUNCH UNIT (B531/A812)

The Punch Unit B531/A812 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B478/B706.

2
1
3
4
14
13
12
11
10
B531I001.WMF
Description
Qty
1. Punch unit.............................................................................. 1
2. Harness Connector Cable - PCB ........................................... 1
3. Harness Connector Cable - HP Sensor 2 .............................. 1
4. Harness Connector Cable - HP Sensor 1, Hopper Full.......... 1
5. Sensor Arm and Sensor ........................................................ 1
6. Spacer (2 mm) ....................................................................... 1
7. Spacer (1 mm) ....................................................................... 2
8. Spring .................................................................................... 1
9. Step Screw (large) (M4 x 11) ................................................. 1
10. Tapping Screw (M4 x 10)....................................................... 2
11. Step Screw (small) (M3 x 4)................................................... 1
12. Machine Screw, Washer (M4 x 6).......................................... 1
13. Knob ...................................................................................... 1
14. Punch Waste Hopper............................................................. 1
1-69
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
1.13.2 INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
B531I09.WMF
[D]
[F]
[E]
B531I002.WMF
CAUTION
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover (
x 2).
3. Unpack the punch unit and remove the motor protector plate [A] (
cam lock plate [B] ( x 1).
4. Remove the inner cover [C] (
x 4) and the
x 3).
5. Behind the inner cover at [D] and [E], press the lock tab to the right to release
the inner cover from the frame.
6. Remove the plastic knockouts [F].
1-70
30 July 2004
Installation
[A]
[B]
[C]
B531I003.WMF
B531I004.WMF
7. Remove the paper guide [A] (
x 4).
8. Install the sensor arm [B] ( x 1, small step screw (M3 x 4).
NOTE: Make sure that the sensor arm swings freely on the step screw.
9. Attach the spring [C].
1-71
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
[D]
[A]
B531I006.WMF
[C]
[B]
B531I005.WMF
10. At the front, secure the punch unit [A] with the large step screw (
10).
x 1, M4 x
11. At the rear, position the 2 mm spacer [B] and attach the punch unit [C] ( x 2,
M4 x 10).
NOTE: At the hole just above the lock lever, use one of the screws from the
paper guide removed above to fasten the remaining two spacers to the
frame. These extra spacers are used to adjust the horizontal position of
the punch holes.
12. At the front, fasten the punch unit knob [D] (
1-72
x 1).
Installation
30 July 2004
[E]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B531I007.WMF
[B]
[F]
B531I008.WMF
13. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN129 of the finisher PCB and to
CN600 of the punch unit PCB.
14. Connect the HP Sensor 2 harness connector [B] to CN130 of the finisher PCB
and to HP Sensor 2.
15. Connect the single end of the hopper full sensor connector cable [C] to the
hopper full sensor on the arm (
x 1, clamp x 1), then connect the other two
connectors to HP Sensor 1 [D] and CN620 [E] of the punch PCB.
NOTE: No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. The
punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine, so it knows
what type of punch unit has been installed.
16. Slide the hopper [F] into the finisher.
17. Re-attach the inner cover and rear cover.
18. Close the front door and re-connect the finisher to the machine.
1-73
manuals4you.com
JOGGER UNIT (B513)
30 July 2004
1.14 JOGGER UNIT (B513)

The Jogger Unit B531 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B478/B706.

Description
Qty
1. Jogger Unit B513 ................................................................... 1

3. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1
1-74
JOGGER UNIT (B513)
Installation
30 July 2004
1.14.2 INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
B513I001.WMF
[D]
B513I002.WMF
[E]
B513I003.WMF
[C]
1. Turn the main machine switch off and disconnect the finisher from the main
frame.
2. Use the flat head of a screw driver to remove the left upper cover [A] from the
finisher and discard it.
3. Remove the cover plate [B] from the jogger unit (
x 2). Save the screws.
4. With the jogger unit connector on the left side, hook the frame of the jogger unit
[C] into the holes on the left and right side of the finisher frame.
5. On the left side, fasten the connector [D] to the socket (
x 1).
6. On the left and right side, attach the jogger unit frame to the side of the finisher
with the screws [E] provided ( x 2).
7. Re-attach the jogger unit cover to its frame with the screws removed in step 2
( x 2).
1-75
manuals4you.com
Z-FOLDING UNIT B660
30 July 2004
1.15 Z-FOLDING UNIT B660

The Z-Folding unit can be installed only on the 3000-Sheet Finisher B674.

Description
Qty
1. Lock Bracket Rear (Cover Interposer Tray) ........................ 1
2. Lock Bracket Rear ............................................................. 1
3. Lock Bracket Front (Cover Interposer Tray)*1 .................... 1
4. Lock Bracket Front*1 .......................................................... 1
5. Ground Plate (Cover Interposer Tray) .................................. 1
6. Ground Plate (Z-folding unit) ................................................ 1
7. Ground Plate (Finisher or Cover Interposer Tray) ................ 1
8. Right Docking Bracket ........................................................... 1
9. Left Docking Bracket ............................................................. 1
10. Front Spacer *2 ..................................................................... 1
11. Rear Spacer *2 ...................................................................... 1
12. Power Cord............................................................................ 1
13. Sponge Strip.......................................................................... 1
14. Screws M3 x 6 ....................................................................... 8
15. Screws M4 x 6 ....................................................................... 8
*1 Items 3, 4, are not required for the B706 (SR841) with B070/B071.
*2 Items 10, 11 are not required for the B674 (SR861)
2
3
1
5
10
11
12
15
14
13
1-76
B660I003.WMF
30 July 2004
Z-FOLDING UNIT B660
CAUTION
Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of
the following procedures.
Before You Begin

Do the installation procedure for the finisher but do not dock it to the machine.
The Z-folding unit must be installed between the finisher and the main machine.
Do the installation for the cover interposer tray (if necessary).
If the finisher is already installed, disconnect the finisher from the main machine.
(If the cover interposer tray is installed on the finisher, it is not necessary to
remove the cover interposer tray.)
[C]
Unpacking
[A]
[E]
[D]
[G]
[B]
[F]
[I]
[I]
[H]
B660I001.WMF
B660I002.WMF
1. Detach the head of the I/F connector [A].

2. Remove all tape [B] from unit.
3. Open the front door [C].
4. Raise the horizontal transport plate [D] and remove the cushion [E].
5. Pull out the Z-folding mechanism [F] and remove the cushion [G].
6. Open the right vertical transport cover [H].
7. Remove four spacers [I] by pulling on the string.
1-77
manuals4you.com
Installation
Z-FOLDING UNIT B660
30 July 2004
Docking to the Finisher
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[G]
[F]
x 2).
2. Attach the left docking bracket [A] to the Z-folding unit (

provided with the finisher).
3. Attach the right docking bracket [B] to the Z-folding unit (
provided with the finisher).
x 2) (Bracket
x 2). (Bracket
4. Attach the rear locking bracket ( x 2).

Attach rear bracket [C] if the cover interposer tray is installed.
Attach rear bracket [D] if cover interposer tray is not installed.
5. Attach the front locking bracket ( x 2).
NOTE: This step is required only when the Z-folding unit is installed with the
B674 (SR861).
Attach front bracket [E] if the cover sheet interposer is installed.
Attach front bracket [F] if the cover sheet interposer is not installed.
6. Attach the ground plate [G] to the Z-folding unit (
1-78
x 2).
manuals4you.com
1. Remove the back cover of the finisher (
B660I004.WMF
Z-FOLDING UNIT B660
Installation
30 July 2004
1. Remove the tape from the sponge [A] and

attach it to the Z-folding unit.
[A]
5 mm
B660I005.WMF
[B]
2. At the left bottom edge of
the Z-folding unit, remove
the bracket [B] ( x 1).
3. Push in the support [C].
4. Reattach the bracket [B] (
x 1).
[C]
5. If the cover interposer tray is
attached to the finisher, attach the
ground plate [D] to the Z-folding
unit ( x 2)
[B]
B660I006.WMF
[D]
CAUTION
With the support retracted,
the Z-folding unit tips easily!
B660I102.WMF
1-79
manuals4you.com
Z-FOLDING UNIT B660
30 July 2004
[B]
[C]
[F]
[E]
[A]
B660I013.WMF
[D]
6. Attach the ground plate [A] ( x 2) to the finisher (or the cover interposer tray).
NOTE: This is the ground with the flat plate attached with 2 vertical screws.
7. Open the front door of the finisher.
8. Pull out the lock lever [B] of the finisher (
-or-
x 1).
If the cover interposer tray is installed, pull out the lock lever of the cover
interposer tray.
9. Dock the Z-folding unit to the finisher.
10. Fasten the screw [B] (
x 1).
11. Fasten screw [E] to front lock bracket [F].

12. Fasten the rear lock bracket [D] (
x 1).
1-80
Z-FOLDING UNIT B660
Installation
30 July 2004
Docking to the Main Frame

[G]
[C]
[H]
[A]
[D]
[I]
[B]
[E]
[F]
B660I007.WMF
1. Fasten the two docking brackets [A] (provided with the Z-folding unit) to the
main machine ( x 2 each).
2. At the right bottom edge of the Z-folding unit, remove the screw and bracket,
push in the support [B] , then reattach the screw and bracket
3. Pull the top cover [C] toward you then raise it.
4. Raise the horizontal transport plate [D] to the left.
5. Pull out the Z-folding mechanism [E].
6. Pull out the Z-folding unit lock lever [F] (
x 1).
7. At the right bottom edge of the Z-folding unit, confirm that the breaker switch is
ON.
NOTE: This switch should display . If you see O, set the switch to .
The machine will not recognize the Z-folding unit if this switch is off.
8. Dock the Z-folding unit [G] to the main machine.
9. Push in the lock lever [F] and fasten it (
x 1).
10. Push in the Z-folding mechanism [E], lower the horizontal transport plate [D],
then close the front door [C].
11. Attach the I/F cable [H] of the Z-folding unit to the main machine.
12. Connect the power cord [I] to the Z-folding unit.
1-81
manuals4you.com
Z-FOLDING UNIT B660
30 July 2004
[A]
B660I009.WMF
13. Reattach the finisher rear cover (
x 2).
14. Connect the I/F cable [A] of the finisher to the Z-folding unit.
1-82
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
1.16 MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES

1.16.1 PRINTER/SCANNER KIT (G338), PRINTER KIT (G339)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. Scanner/Printer DIMM (G338) or Printer DIMM (G339) ........ 1

2. Centronics Interface .............................................................. 1
3. NIB ........................................................................................ 1
4. Screws - M3 x 8..................................................................... 2
5. Ferrite Core ........................................................................... 1
6. Key Top Assembly ................................................................ 1
7. Operating Instructions Printer............................................. 1
8. Installation Instructions.......................................................... 1
9. FCC Label ............................................................................ 1
10. Software CD-ROM ................................................................ 3
1-83
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004

Inserting DIMMs
Read this section carefully before installation so you know how to insert the DIMMs
correctly.
CAUTION
Follow the procedure below to connect the DIMMs to the controller board.
Incorrect insertion can damage the controller board or cause a bad
connection between the DIMM and controller contacts. If the upper contact
is pressed in and bent, the resulting poor connection could cause the
entire system to not operate.
[A]
[B]
[C]
G338I901.WMF
1. Hold the ROM DIMM with the edge connector [A] pointing toward the slot and
the notch [B] on the DIMM in the upper right corner.
2. Insert the edge connector [C] into the slot at a 30-degree angle from the
surface of the board.
NOTE: If the angle is too low, the upper contact could bend.
3. Move the outside edge of the ROM DIMM up and down slightly until it works
into the connector, then gently press it down level with the controller board.
1-84
Installation Procedure
[A]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[E]
[B]
G338I201.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: The printer/scanner unit requires at least 128 MB of memory (more is
recommended). Memory chips are not packaged with this unit.
1. Disconnect the ADF cable.
2. Remove the rear upper cover (
x 2).
x 10).
CAUTION
Make sure that the DIMMs are inserted correctly. ( 1.16.2)
4. Insert the SDRAM DIMM (expansion memory 128 MB or 256 MB) [A] into
PC133 on the controller.
5. Insert the ROM DIMM [B] (printer/scanner) board into Slot 1.
6. Remove the Centronics connector cover [C] and insert the Centronics
connector [D] into CN310 and fasten with the provided screws ( x 2).
Rating voltage of interface connectors: Max. DC 5V
7. Remove the slot covers [E] (
x 2).
8. Install the NIB [F] into CN311 ( x 1).

Rating voltage of interface connectors: Max. DC 5V
1-85
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
[A]
G338I402.WMF
9. Make sure that the following SP commands are set correctly.

SP5811 Machine No. Setting
SP5907 Plug & Play
10. Attach the provided decal near the machine name on the copier.
11. Wrap the Ethernet cable three times inside the ferrite core, close the ferrite
core, then connect the modular jack to the NIB.
12. Follow the procedures in the instruction manuals to perform the user settings.
13. Replace the key top assembly [A].
1-86
30 July 2004
Installation
1.16.3 PS3 (B525-08)
[A]
B064I204.WMF

x 2).
x 9).
3. Insert the PS3 module [A] into Slot 2.

CAUTION
Make sure that the DIMM is inserted correctly. (1.16.2)
1-87
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
1.16.4 USB 2.0 (B525-01)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. USB 2.0 PCB......................................................................... 1
[A]
[B]
B064I202.WMF
CAUTION
3. Remove the slot cover [A] (
x 2).
x 9).
x 2).
4. Insert the USB board [B] into the PCI slot.

5. Fasten the slot cover to the USB board (
x 2).
6. Use SP5990-005 to print a Self-Diagnostic Report with the system settings and
confirm that the machine correctly recognizes the interface.
1-88
USB SP Settings
The following SP commands are available. However, only one setting may require
adjustment and this setting should be performed only if the customer is
experiencing USB data transmission errors.
NOTE: Do not change the settings marked DFU. These settings are for design
and factory use only.
To enter the SP mode:
1. Press Clear Modes
2. On the operation panel keypad, press
3. Hold down Clear/Stop
4. Press Copy SP on the touch-panel to open the SP command selection

screen.
14APR 2002 03:25
SP Mode (Service)
SP2XXX
Feed
Drum
SP3XXX
Process
SP4XXX
Open All
Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log
SP1XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
SP7XXX
SP8XXX
Data Log2
Close All
Copy Window
Group
X-XXX-XXX
SP Direct
Exit
COPY: SP1-001-001
Page
Line
21
Line
Page
Initial
Group
0
Prev Page
Next Page
B064I999.WMF
5. Enter
SP No.
5844-001
Name
Transfer Rate
5844-002
5844-003
5844-004
Vendor ID
Product ID
Dev. Release Num
Function
Adjusts the USB transfer rate. Do not change the setting
unless there is a data transfer error using the USB high
speed mode.
HS/FS: High speed/Full speed auto adjust
(480Mbps/12Mbps)
FS:
Full speed (12Mbps fixed)
Displays the vendor ID. DFU
Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version number. DFU
1-89
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
1.16.5 IEEE1394 (G561) FIREWIRE INTERFACE

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. IEEE-1394 Cable 2M 4PI ...................................................... 1

2. IEEE-1394 Cable 2M 6PI ...................................................... 1
3. PCB GW1394........................................................................ 1
1-90
30 July 2004
Installation
[A]
[B]
[C]
B064I205.WMF
CAUTION
x 2).
x 9).
x 2).
4. Attach the IEEE1394 board [B].

5. sUse the provided cable to connect the machine and the computer.
6. Make sure that the jumper is on TB2 [C].
7. Print a system settings list and confirm that the machine correctly recognizes
the interface.
1-91
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
1. Press User Tools/Counter.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
3. Press Interface Settings.
System Intialization Settings
End
Select the desired settings.
Network
Parallel Interface
IEEE 1394
IEEE 802.1b
IP Address
0000.0000.0000.0000
Subnet Mask
0000.0000.0000.0000
IP Over 1394
Enabled
SCSI Print
SCSI Print Bi-directional
On
Enabled
B064I998.WMF
4. Press the key and enter the following settings:

IP Address
Subnet Mask
IP Over 1394. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables
IP Over 1394 as the default setting for the printing method.
SCSI Print. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables
SCSI Print as the default setting for the printing method.
SCSI Print Bi-directional. Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.
1-92
30 July 2004
Installation
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
To enter the SP mode:

screen.
14APR 2002 03:25
SP Mode (Service)
Open All
SP2XXX
Feed
Drum
SP3XXX
Process
SP4XXX
SP7XXX
Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log
SP8XXX
Data Log2
SP1XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
Close All
Copy Window
Group
X-XXX-XXX
SP Direct
Exit
COPY: SP1-001-001
Page
Line
21
Line
Page
Initial
Group
0
Prev Page
Next Page
B064I999.WMF
5. Enter
SP No.
5839-004
Name
Device Name
5839-007
Cycle Master
5839-008
BCR Mode
5839-009
IRM 1394a Check
5839-010
Unique ID
5839-011
Logout
5839-012
5839-013
Login
Login MAX
Function
Sets the names for all the physical devices connected to
the IEEE 1394 firewire network.
Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE 1394
standard bus.
Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for the
Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus for
when IRM is not in use. Three settings are available: 00,
01, 11.
Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394 is
conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
Enables the Node_Unique_Id setting for enumeration on
the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login for SBP-2.
Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range: 1
~ 62.
1-93
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
1.16.6 IEEE802.11B WIRELESS LAN (G628)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. Wireless LAN PCB (GW-WLAN) ........................................... 1

2. Antenna (GW-WLAN) (options) ............................................. 2
3. Card (GW-WLAN) ................................................................. 1
4. Wireless LAN Instructions ..................................................... 1
1-94
30 July 2004
Installation
40 ~ 60 mm
[E]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B064I206.WMF
B064I207.WMF
CAUTION
x 2).
x 9).
x 2).
4. Insert the wireless LAN board [B] into the PCI Slot 1.
5. Fasten the slot cover to the wireless LAN board (
x 2).
6. Set the jumper [C] between pins 3 and 4 on the wireless LAN board.
7. Insert the LAN PC card [D] into the wireless LAN board.
8. Connect the antennas. Use the provided double-sided tape to attach the
antennas [E] to the side of the machine.
NOTE: 1) Set the antennas 40~60 mm apart (1.5~2.5").
2) Attach the antennas where they will not be moved or damaged by
opening and closing the door of the machine.
3) Set up the antenna in an area that is free of interference from electrical
equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field.
4) Always remove the antenna before moving the machine.
5) If reception is poor, move the machine and antenna closer to the access
point.
9. Print a system settings list and confirm that the machine correctly recognizes
the interface.
1-95
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 802.11. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be used if Ethernet is being used.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select Interface Settings Network (tab) Network I/F Settting
4. Select either Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b.
5. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options are displayed.
System Intialization Settings
End
Select the desired settings.
Network
Parallel Interface
Transmission Speed
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP (Privacy) Setting
IEEE 1394
IEEE 802.1b
802.11 Ad Hoc Mode

ASSID
11
Bandwidth Status
1/2
Disabled
Previous
Next
B064I997.WMF
6. Transmission Mode. Select either Ad Hoc Mode or Infrastructure Mode.

7. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
8. Channel. This setting is required when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
1-96
9. WEP (Privacy) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is

designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order to unlock encoded
data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There are 64 bit and
128 bit WEP keys.
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
128 bit 26 characters
10. Bandwidth Status. This setting is enabled only for the Infrastructure Mode.
Press here to display the current status of the bandwidth. One of the following
is displayed to reflect the reception status of the wireless LAN:
Good
Fair
Poor
Unavailable
76 ~ 100%
41 ~ 75%
21 ~ 40%
0 ~ 20%
11. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to display more settings, then
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point, depending on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps
5.5 Mbps
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
140 m (153 yd.)

200 m (219 yd.)
270 m (295 yd.)
400 m (437 yd.)
12. To initialize the wireless LAN settings, use page 2/2. Press Execute to initialize
the following settings:
Transmission mode
Channel
Transmission Speed
WEP
SSID
WEP Key
1-97
manuals4you.com
Installation
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
SP Mode Settings for 802.11b Wireless LAN

The following SP commands can be set for 802.11b

screen.
14APR 2002 03:25
SP Mode (Service)
Open All
SP2XXX
Feed
Drum
SP3XXX
Process
SP4XXX
SP7XXX
Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log
SP8XXX
Data Log2
SP1XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
Close All
Copy Window
Group
X-XXX-XXX
SP Direct
Exit
COPY: SP1-001-001
Page
Line
21
Line
Page
Group
Initial
0
Prev Page
Next Page
B064I999.WMF
5. Enter
SP No.
5840-004
5840-006
Name
SSID
Channel MAX
5840-007
Channel MIN
5840-010
5840-011
5840-020
WEP Key
WEP Key Select
WEP Mode
Function
Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed
for your country.
Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
Used to display the maximum length of the string that can
be used for the WEP Key entry.
1-98
30 July 2004
NOTE:
1. This table shows the special firmware versions to use with the Copy Connector
Kit or File Format Converter (MLB option). When you install one of these
options, it is necessary to install these firmware modules together as a set.
Software
GW Controller: Copy
BCU
Printer/Scanner
NIB/Netfile
LCDC
Part Number
B5254108
B5254109
B5254123
B5255204
B5254114
B5254176 (NA)
B5254177 (EU)

5.07
5.07
5.03d
4.15/5.00
3.00/1.79
2.04
2. With the Copy Connector/MLB modifications, the machine firmware is divided

into 2 main groups:
1) The Copy Connector/MLB group (this starts with the versions in the table
above)
2) The usual firmware that was used until this time, that is, for machines without
the Copy Connector or MLB options.
Important: Do not mix firmware from these two. Always use firmware from the
same group, or the machine will not operate correctly.
3. The MLB option cannot operate with any of these items installed. You must
remove these before you start the procedure below:
- Wireless LAN board
- IEEE1394 I/F board
- USB2.0 I/F board
- Copy Connector Kit components
group is divided into GW System and GW Copy. This is because the firmware
is too large to go on one card.
1-99
manuals4you.com
Installation
1.16.7 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB) (B519)
30 July 2004
ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. File Format Converter Board ................................................. 1

2. MLB bracket........................................................................... 1
3. MLB panel.............................................................................. 1
4. Screw M3 x 6 ......................................................................... 2
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power code before you start this procedure.
Installing the Firmware

1. Remove the rear cover (
x 2).
x 10).
3. Turn on DIP SW2-1 on the controller board.

4. Install these firmware modules.
Printer/Scanner
NIB Netfile
6. Install these firmware modules.
BCU
LCDC
1-100
30 July 2004
Installation
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B110I104.WMF
x 2).
2. Remove the bracket [B] and attach the MLB panel [C].
3. Attach the File Format Converter board [D] to the controller board (
x 2).
4. Replace the controller board cover and rear cover.

5. Turn the main switch ON.
6. Do a network function Memory Clear (SP5801-010).
7. Do an NCS function Memory Clear (SP5801-011). This resets the network
password to password.
NOTE: This step is necessary to make sure that the password is reset
correctly.
8. Input these default values manually (SP5836).
SP Number
5836-001
5836-002
5836-072
5836-073
5836-075
5836-076
Value
0
0
0
0
0
1
SP Number
5836-082
5836-083
5836-085
5836-086
5836-091
1-101
manuals4you.com
Value
1
1
1
2
50
30 July 2004
1.17 MFP OPTIONS: B140 SERIES

1.17.1 OVERVIEW
To make it easy to install MFP options, there are 6 slots (A1, A2, B1 to B4) for
boards and 3 slots (C1 to C3) for SD cards on the controller box. Each board or SD
card must be put in its assigned slot. The correct slots for each option are shown
on the decal attached to the controller box cover (shown in the diagram).
MFP Option Slot Assignment
A1
C1
B1 B2
A2 Tandem
1394/802.11b/
C2
B1 USB2.0/Bluetooth
B2 File Format Converter
C3 B3 B4
B3 Paralle(1284)
B4 Ethernet
C1 Printer/Scanner
A1 A2
C2 Option PDL
C3 Service
B659I101.WMF
1-102
Installation
30 July 2004
1.17.2 PRINTER/SCANNER KIT (B659)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. 256 MB Memory DIMM ......................................................... 1

2. NIB Board ............................................................................ 1
3. Centronics Board (IEEE 1284)............................................... 1
4. Printer/Scanner SD Card ....................................................... 1
5. EULA Sheet ........................................................................... 1
6. Caution Decal ........................................................................ 1
7. Keytop ................................................................................... 1
8. Ferrite Core............................................................................ 1
9. Adapter for NIB Board ........................................................... 1
10. Operating Instructions............................................................ 1
NOTE: The optional 256 MB Memory Kit B585 is necessary for this installation.
This memory kit is not supplied with the Printer/Scanner Kit B580.
1-103
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Installation
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[A]
B659I103.WMF
B659I104.WMF
CAUTION
Before you start this procedure, turn the machine off and disconnect the
power plug from the power source.
1. Remove the controller box cover [A] (
x 12).
2. Hold the 256 MB memory DIMM [B] with the slot [C] in the edge connector on
the left.
3. Install the DIMM in the slot [D] above the other memory DIMM [E].
NOTE: To remove the memory DIMM, pull out the spring-loaded clips on one
of the two ends of the DIMM.
4. Attach the controller box cover.
1-104
30 July 2004
[F]
Installation
[E]
[I]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[H]
[A]
B659I102.WMF
[G]
5. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B4 (
x 2).
6. Install the NIB board [B] in Slot B4 and secure it with the screws.
7. Remove the cover [C] of Slot B3 (
x 2).
8. Install the Centronics board [D] in Slot B3 and secure it with the screws.
9. Remove the slot cover [E] (
x 2).
10. Hold the SD Card [F] with its label turned as shown above, then install it in Slot
C1.
NOTE: If you push in the SD Card, this releases it for removal. Make sure the
SD Card is installed and locked in position. If it is not fully in the slot,
push it in carefully until it locks in position.
11. Wind the cable [G] one full turn around the ferrite core [H], then close the core
to lock it.
12. Connect the adapter [I] to the NIB board.
1-105
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
[B]
[A]
B064I402.WMF
13. Attach the decal near the machine name on the copier.
14. Obey the procedures in the operating instructions to make the user settings.
15. Replace the old key top assembly [A] with the new one [B].
16. Make sure that these SP commands are set correctly.
SP5811 Machine No. Setting
SP5907 Plug & Play
1-106
Installation
30 July 2004
1.17.3 PS3 (B525-15)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. PostScript3 Emulation SD Card............................................. 1
Installation
[B]
[A]
B659I111.WMF
1. Turn the machine off.

x 2).
3. Install the PS3 SD Card [B] in Slot C2.

NOTE: If you push in the SD Card, this releases it for removal. Make sure the
SD Card is installed and locked in position. If it is not fully in the slot,
push it in carefully until it locks in position.
4. Turn the machine on.
1-107
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
1.17.4 USB 2.0 INTERFACE BOARD (B596-01)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. USB 2.0 Interface Board ........................................................ 1
Installation
You can only install one of these cards, because only one PCI slot (B1) is available
for these options:
USB 2.0
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
Bluetooth Interface Unit G377
If a different card is installed in B1, you must remove it before you install USB 2.0
Interface Board.
[A]
B659I108.WMF

2. Remove the cover of Slot B1 (
x 2).
3. Install the USB 2.0 interface board [A] in Slot B1 and attach it with the screws.
4. Print a configuration page to make sure that the machine can see the USB
interface board.
User Tools > Printer Features > List Test Print > Configuration Page
1-108
30 July 2004
Installation
1.17.5 IEEE 1394 INTERFACE BOARD (B581-01)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. IEEE 1394 Interface Board .................................................... 1

2. 4-Pin Cable ............................................................................ 1
3. 6-Pin Cable ............................................................................ 1
Installation
for these options:
USB 2.0
If a different card is installed in B1, you must remove it before you install IEEE
1394 Interface Board.
[A]
B659I108.WMF

x 2)
3. Install the IEEE 1394 board [A] in Slot B1 and attach it with the screws.
4. Turn the machine on and print a configuration page to make sure that the
machine can see the IEEE 1394 (FireWire) board:
User Tools> Printer Features> List Test Print> Configuration Page
1-109
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
1.17.6 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE BOARD (B582-01, -02)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Qty
IEEE 802.11b Interface Board...............................................

WLAN PIC Card ....................................................................
Antennas ..............................................................................
Velcro pads ..........................................................................
Antenna Cap .........................................................................
1
1
2
2
1
Installation
for these options:
USB 2.0
If a different card is installed in B1, you must remove it before you install IEEE
802.11b Interface Board.
[C]
[A]
[B]
B659I108.WMF

2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the cover of Slot B1 ( x 2).

Remove the plastic cap [A] from the PCI card.
Connect the PCI card [B] to the wireless LAN board.
Install the wireless LAN board [C] in Slot B1 and attach it with the screws.
1-110
Installation
30 July 2004
40 to 60 mm
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B659I105.WMF
6. Remove the tape from the back of the Velcro patches [A]. Then, attach the
patches to the right rear corner of the main frame. Then attach the antennas [B]
to the patches.
7. Put the connectors through the antenna cap [C].
8. Connect each antenna to a terminal [D] and attach the antenna cap.
NOTE:
1) Attach the antennas as specified above. But, if you change the

location of an antenna, make sure that the antennas are separated
by a minimum of 40~60 mm (1.5~2.5").
2) Install the antennas in an area that is free of interference from
electrical equipment that causes a strong electromagnetic field.
3) Always remove the antennas from the corners of the machine and
disconnect them before you move the machine.
4) If reception is not good, move the machine and antennas more
near to the access point.
9. Turn the machine on and print a configuration page to make sure that the
machine can see the installed IEEE 802.11b interface board:
User Tools> Printer Features> List Test Print> Configuration Page
1-111
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
1.17.7 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT (G377)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
Qty
Bluetooth Board.....................................................................
Bluetooth Card ......................................................................
Antenna Cap .........................................................................
Velcro pads ..........................................................................
1
1
2
2
Installation
for these options:
USB 2.0
If a different card is installed in B1, you must remove it before you install the
Bluetooth interface unit.
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B659I108.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover from Slot B1 [A] (
x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board [A] (Knob-screw x 2).

3. Insert the Bluetooth card [B] in the slot.
4. Push the antenna [C] to extend it.
5. Attach the antenna cap [D].
1-112
Installation
30 July 2004
1.17.8 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) ................... 1
Installation
[A]
B659I109.WMF

x 2).
3. Install the file format converter board [A] in Slot B2 and attach it with the screws.
1-113
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
1.17.9 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Qty
1. SD Card................................................................................. 1
Seal Check And Removal
[A]
B692I901.WMF
B692I903.WMF
[B]
CAUTION
Before you start the installation, you must check the box seals to make
sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at
the factory.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.

Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
The surfaces of the tapes should be blank. If you see VOID on the tapes,
do not install the components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID, remove them from the corners
of the box.
3. When you remove each seal, the VOID marks [B] can be seen. In this
condition, they cannot be attached to the box again.
1-114
Installation
30 July 2004
CAUTION
The machine should always be turned off and its power cord disconnected
before you do any of these procedures.
1. If the machine is on, turn off the main power switch.

2. Disconnect the network cable, if the NIB is installed.
4. Do the Copy SPs in the table below.
SP No.
5871-001
5967-001
5846-090
5836-001
SP Name
HDD Function Disable
Copy Server Set Function
USC Settings - Plain Data Forbidden
Capture Settings Capture Function
Set To:
1 (On)
1 (Off)
1 (Check)
1 (On)
5. Do the Printer SP in the table below.

SP No.
1006-001
SP Name
Sample/Proof Print
Set To:
1 (On)
[A]
[B]
B659I111.WMF
6. Turn the operation switch and operation switch off.

x 2).
8. Install the SD Card [B].
1-115
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
9. Connect the network cable, if the NIB option is installed.

11. Go into the SP mode and do SP5878.
12. Go out of the SP mode, turn the operation switch off, then turn the main power
switch off.
13. Turn the machine power on.
14. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings> Administrator> Auto
Erase Memory Setting> On.
15. Go out of the User Tools mode.
[A]
[B]
09/09/2003
Origi.
Total
[C]
14:13
Copies
B692I904.WMF
B692I905.WMF
16. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
17. Make a Sample Copy.
18. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The bottom of the icon becomes thicker [B].
Next Copy is shown for a short interval below the icon.
The icon goes back to its usual shape [C].
19. Remove the Document Server and Scanner key-tops, and replace them with
the blank key-tops that are supplied with the kit.
1-116
30 July 2004
PM TABLES
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 PM TABLES
Symbol key:
C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect,

EM: Emergency Maintenance
WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing
any procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
2.1.1 MAIN MACHINE

SCANNER OPTICS
1st, 2nd, 3rd Mirror
Exposure Glass
Scanner Guide Rails
Toner Shield Glass
Reflector
EM 300K 450K 600K Expected K

Note
C
C
C
Optics cloth
C
C
C
C
Dry cloth or alcohol
After cleaning with alcohol,
L
L
L
lubricate scanner guide rails
with Launa Oil.
C
C
C
C
Optics cloth
C
C
C
Optics cloth
AROUND THE DRUM

Charge Corona Grid
Charge Corona Wire
Charge Wire Cleaning
Pad
Cleaning Blade
Cleaning Brush
Charge Corona Casing
Internal Dust Filter
ID Sensor
Pick-off Pawls
Potential Sensor
Quenching Lamp
Transfer Entrance Stay
Ozone Filter (Top)
Cleaning Filter
Cleaning Side Seal
Cleaning Entrance Seal

Note
R
R
450
Blower brush.
R
C
R
450
Alcohol, or clean damp cloth.
R
450
R
R
C
C
500
500
R
R
C
C
I
C
C
C
R
R
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
I
C
C
C
R
R
C
C
2-1
manuals4you.com
Alcohol, or clean damp cloth.

Blower brush.
Blower brush. Do SP 3001 002
after cleaning.
Replace if necessary.
Blower brush.
Dry cloth.
Dry cloth.
Dry cloth.
Dry cloth.
Preventive
Maintenance
The amounts mentioned (K=1,000) as the PM interval indicate the number of prints
or copies unless stated otherwise. These numbers are based on the PM counter.
PM TABLES
30 July 2004
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Developer
Development Roller
Shaft
Development Roller
Development Filter
Development Sleeve
Surface
Drive Gears
Entrance Seal
Side Seals
Toner Bottle Holder
Paddle Roller Shaft
Used Toner Separation
Unit

Note
R
R
( 3.7.1) PM cycle is 350K.
Clean with blower brush and dry
C
C
cloth every time the developer is
replaced.
C
C
R
I
R
Blower brush.
Dry cloth.
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Blower brush.
Blower brush, dry cloth.
Dry cloth.
PAPER FEED
EM
Registration Rollers
Relay Rollers
Paper Dust Mylar
Registration Sensor
Relay Sensor
By-pass Paper End
Sensor
Grip Rollers
Paper Feed Guide
Plate
Vertical Transport
Rollers
Paper Feed Sensors
Paper End Sensors
300K 450K 600K 1000K Expected K

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2-2
Note
Alcohol
Alcohol
Dry cloth
Blower brush
Blower brush
Dry cloth, blower brush
Dry cloth, blower brush
Dry cloth
Alcohol
Blower brush
Blower brush
PAPER FEED
PM TABLES
B064 Series
EM 300K 450K 600K 1000K Expected K
Feed Rollers
450K
Pick-up Rollers
450K
Separation Rollers
450K
By-pass Feed Rollers

By-pass Pick-up Rollers
By-pass Separation
Rollers
R
R
R
R
450K
450K
Note
For the K reading,
check the logging data
for the paper cassettes
counter. See NOTE
below this table.
See NOTE below this
table.
450K
PAPER FEED
B140 Series
EM 300K 450K 600K 900K
Feed Rollers
R
Pick-up Rollers
R
Separation Rollers
R
R
By-pass Feed Rollers
R
By-pass Pick-up Rollers
R
By-pass Separation
Rollers
Expected K
1000K
1000K
1000K
1000K
1000K
Note
See NOTE below this
table.
See NOTE below this
table.
1000K
NOTES
Always replace pick-up, feed and separation rollers as a set.
If the copier is a B064 Series machine, check the counter value for each paper tray station with
SP7204 (Copy Counter Paper Trays). If the value has reached 300K, replace the rollers. The
quality of the paper can have an effect on the service life of the rollers. Paper with a rough
surface, for example, can increase abrasion on the rollers and decrease their service life. After
replacing the rollers, reset the counter with SP7816 (Copy Counter Reset).
If the feeding from the by-pass tray causes frequent jams, and the by-pass tray is not used
regularly, check the by-pass tray rollers. If pick-up, feed, and separation rollers for the by-pass
tray are of lighter color than those of more frequently used trays, replace them.
TRANSFER BELT UNIT

EM
Transfer Belt
300K 450K 600K Expected K

C
Transfer Roller Cleaning

Blade
Transfer Entrance Guide
Plate
Transfer Drive Roller
Transfer Drum Roller
Transfer Bias Roller
Transfer Exit Guide Plate
Discharge Plate
750
750
C
C
C
C
R
C
C
C
C
R
2-3
manuals4you.com
Note
Use dry cloth to clean
transfer belt. Always replace
transfer belt and transfer
roller cleaning blade together.
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Preventive
Maintenance
30 July 2004
PM TABLES
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT AND PAPER EXIT

Cleaning Web
R
R
Cleaning Web Pressure
R
Roller
Cleaning Web Pressure
R
Roller Bearings
De-Curler Rollers
C
C
Exit Rollers
C
C
Exit Static Discharge
I
I
Brush
Fusing Entrance Guide
C
C
Plate
Fusing Exit Guide Plate
C
C
Hot Roller
R
R
600
Hot Roller Bearings
R
R
1000
Hot Roller Strippers
R
R
600
Pressure Cleaning Roller
R
R
R
I
R
Bearings
I
I
Spring Plate
Pressure Roller
R
R
600
Pressure Roller Bearings
R
R
600
Thermistors x2
R
C
I
Transport Rollers
Fusing Lamp
I
I
C
I
Note
Replace roller and bushings
together.
Alcohol
Alcohol
Dry cloth.
Dry cloth.
B140 Series: R at 300K
Replace as a set.

Always replace pressure
roller and bearings together.
B064 Series: I at 500K
Alcohol
DUPLEX
EM
Entrance Sensor
Inverter Exit Rollers
Transport Rollers
Reverse Trigger Rollers
Inverter Entrance Roller
Entrance Anti-Static
Brush
Reverse Junction Gate
300K 450K 600K Expected K

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2-4
Note
Blower brush
Alcohol
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Blower brush
Dry cloth
30 July 2004
PM TABLES
The PM interval is for the number of originals that have been fed.
Note
Water or alcohol, belt cleaner
Pick-up Roller
C
R
R
R
to clean paper feed belt.
Separation Roller
C
R
R
R
Replace these items together.
Paper Feed Belt
C
R
R
R
CIS Glass
C
C
C
Dry cloth
White Guide Plate
C
C
C
Dry cloth
Sensors
C
C
C
C
Blower brush.
Platen Cover Sheet
C
C
C
C
Water or alcohol
Drive Gears
L
L
L
Grease G501.
Water or alcohol
Transport Rollers
C
C
C
Entrance Roller
C
C
C
White Platen Roller
C
C
C
Pre-Scanning Roller
C
C
C
Scanning Roller
C
C
C
Exit Roller
C
C
C
2.1.3 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES

LCT (Large Capacity Tray) B473
ROLLRES
Pick-up Roller
Feed Roller
Separation Roller
EM 300K 450K 1000K

R
R
R
Expected K
Note
See NOTE below this table.
NOTE: Replace pick-up, feed and separation rollers as a set. If the copier is a
machine of the B064 Series, check the counter value for each paper tray
station with SP7204 (Copy Counter Paper Trays). If the value has
reached 300K, replace the rollers. After replacing the rollers, reset the
counter with SP7816 (Copy Counter Reset).
Cover Interposer Tray B470

The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed.
EM
60K
120K
180K
Note
Feed Belt
R
R
R
Replace as a set.
Pick-up Roller
R
R
R
Separation Roller
R
R
R
Driver Rollers
Idle Rollers
Discharge Brush
Bushings
Sensors
Feed Drive Gear
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
L
L
Damp clean cloth.
Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.

Blower brush.
2-5
manuals4you.com
Preventive
Maintenance
2.1.2 ADF
RELATED SP CODES
30 July 2004
3000-Sheet Finisher with 50-sheet stapler and Saddle-Stitching

B468/B469/B674
EM
Driver Rollers
Idle Rollers
Discharge Brush
Bushings
Sensors
Jogger Fences
300K
C
C
C
450K
C
C
C
600K
C
C
C
C
I
C
I
C
I
700K
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
1050K
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
Note
Dry cloth

Blower brush.
Make sure screws are tight.
3000-Sheet Finisher B478/B706

EM
Driver rollers
Idle rollers
Discharge brush
Bushings
Sensors
Jogger fences
Staple waste hopper
350K
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
Note
Alcohol

Blow brush.
Make sure screws are tight.
Empty staple waste.
Z-Folding Unit Type 2105 (B660)

Drive Rollers
Idle Rollers
Anti-Static Brush
Bushings
Sensors
As Needed
C
C
C
L
C
Note
Dry cloth.
Dry cloth.
Dry cloth. Replace every 1000 K.
Silicone Oil
Dry cloth.
2.2 RELATED SP CODES

This is a list of the PM related SP codes. For details, refer to Section 5 Service
Tables.
7803*
7804*
PM Counter Display
PM Counter Reset
Displays the PM count since the last PM.

Resets the PM count.
2-6
30 July 2004
GENERAL CAUTIONS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
Do not turn off either of the power switches while any of the electrical components
are active. Doing so might cause damage to units such as the transfer belt, drum,
and development unit when they are pulled out of or put back into the copier.
An organic photoconductor (OPC) drum is more sensitive to light and ammonia gas
than a selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC drum.
1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.
2. Never expose the drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a
minute.
3. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is
touched with a finger or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with
wet cotton. Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
5. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.
6. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily
damaged.
7. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
8. Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when keeping the drum unit, or
the drum itself, out of the copier. Doing so avoids exposing it to bright light or
direct sunlight, and will protect it from light fatigue.
9. Dispose of used drums in accordance with local regulations.
10. When installing a new drum, execute SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
3.1.2 DRUM UNIT

1. Before pulling out the drum unit, place a sheet of paper under the drum unit to
catch any spilt toner.
2. Make sure that the drum unit is set in position and the drum stay is secured
with a screw before the main switch is turned on. If the drum unit is loose, poor
contact of the drum connectors may cause electrical noise, resulting in
unexpected malfunctions (RAM data change is the worst case).
3. To prevent drum scratches, remove the development unit before removing the
drum unit.
3-1
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
3.1.1 DRUM
GENERAL CAUTIONS
30 July 2004
3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT

1. Never touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the transfer belt, as the surface is easily damaged.
3. Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and the inner part of
the transfer belt with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping.
3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT

1. When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the white paint is at the rear
left corner.
2. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or glass cleaner to reduce the amount of
static electricity on the glass surface.
3. Use a cotton pad with water or a blower brush to clean the mirrors and lens.
4. Do not bend or crease the exposure lamp flat cable.
5. Do not disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and the copy
image out of focus.
6. Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws. Doing so will throw the CCD out
of position.
3.1.5 LASER UNIT

1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode
casing. Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the
factory.
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open
the optical housing unit.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare
hands.
5. After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment. Otherwise, an
SC condition will be generated.
3-2
30 July 2004
GENERAL CAUTIONS
3.1.6 CHARGE CORONA

1. Clean the corona wires with a dry cloth. Do not use sandpaper or solvent.
2. Clean the charge corona casing with water first to remove NOx based
compounds. Then clean it with alcohol if any toner still remains on the casing.
3. Clean the end block with a blower brush first to remove toner and paper dust.
Then clean with alcohol if any toner still remains.
5. Make sure that the wires are correctly between the cleaner pads and that there
is no foreign material (iron filings, etc.) on the casing.
6. When installing new corona wires, do not bend or scratch the wire surface.
Doing so may cause uneven charge. Also be sure that the corona wires are
correctly positioned in the end blocks.
7.
Clean the grid plate with a blower brush (not with a dry cloth).
8. Do not touch the charge grid plate with bare hands. Also, do not bend the
charge grid plate or make any dent in it. Doing so may cause uneven charge.
3.1.7 DEVELOPMENT
1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller.
2. Place the development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from the
copier.
3. Never disassemble the development roller assembly. The position of the doctor
plate is set with special tools and instruments at the factory to ensure the
proper gap between the doctor blade and the development roller.
4. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
5. Dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations.
6. Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than
specified for this model. Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner
scattering.
7. Immediately after installing new developer, the TD sensor initial setting
procedure should be performed with SP2801 (TD Sensor Initialization) to avoid
damage to the copier. Do not perform the TD sensor initial setting with used
developer. Do not make any copies before doing the TD sensor initial setting.
8. When using a vacuum cleaner to clean the development unit casing, always
ground the casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner density sensor
with static electricity.
9. When replacing the TD sensor, replace the developer, then execute SP2801
(TD Sensor Initialization) and SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
3-3
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Do not touch the corona wires with bare hands. Oil stains from fingers may
cause uneven image density on copies.
GENERAL CAUTIONS
30 July 2004
3.1.8 CLEANING
1. When servicing the cleaning section, be careful not to damage the edge of the
cleaning blade.
2. Do not touch the cleaning blade with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling the cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to
catch any toner falling from it.
3.1.9 FUSING UNIT

1. After installing the fusing thermistor, make sure that it is in contact with the hot
roller and that it is movable.
2. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers or their tension
springs.
3. Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with bare hands.
4. Make sure that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch
the inner surface of the hot roller.
3.1.10 PAPER FEED

1. Do not touch the surface of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fence of the paper tray must
be positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.
3.1.11 USED TONER

1. We recommend checking the amount of used toner at every EM.
2. Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner
into an open flame, for toner dust may ignite.
3-4
30 July 2004
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Description
Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs./set)
Test Chart S5S (10 pcs./set)
Test Chart S5S DF (10 Sheets/Set)
Flash Memory Card 4 MB
Case Flash Memory Card
Loop Back Connector
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS
Part No.
A2579300
52039502
54429101
Description
Grease Barrierta JFE 5 5/2
Silicon Grease G-501
Setting Powder
3-5
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
Part No.
A0069104
A2929500
VSST9500
N8036701
N8036701
G0219350
OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS
30 July 2004
3.3 OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS

3.3.1 OPERATION PANEL
[A]
[B]
B140R900.WMF
[A]: Shoulder screws (

[B]: Operation panel (
x 2)
x 1)
3.3.2 FRONT DOOR
[A]
[B]
B140R901.WMF
While supporting the front door [A] with one hand, press down on the hinge bracket
[B] then raise the door slightly to remove it.
3-6
30 July 2004
3.3.3 RIGHT COVERS

[C]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[E]
[D]
1. LCT entrance guide cover [A] (
B140R902.WMF
x 2)
2. Right upper cover [B] ( x 2)

To remove the right cover, remove the LCT entrance guide plate, open the
by-pass tray, then slide the right upper cover down to remove it.
When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that 1) the tabs
[C] on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine, and 2) the
catches on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
3. Lower right cover [D] ( x 2)
After removing the screws, slide the cover down to remove it.
When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs [E]
on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine.
3-7
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
3.3.4 LEFT COVERS
[A]
[B]
B140R903.WMF
[A]: Left upper cover ( x 2)

Slide down to remove.
When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that 1) the tabs
on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine, and 2) the
catches on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
[B]: Left lower cover ( x 2)
When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on
the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine.
3-8
30 July 2004
3.3.5 REAR COVERS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[C]
B140R904.WMF
[A]: Disconnect the ADF plug.

[B]: Rear upper cover ( x 3)
the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
[C]: Rear lower cover ( x 2)
the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
3-9
manuals4you.com
SCANNER
30 July 2004
3.4 SCANNER
3.4.1 ADF AND TOP COVERS
ADF
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B140R905.WMF
[E]
[E]
B140R906.WMF
Rear upper cover. ( 3.3.5)

[A]: Cable bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Controller/IPU panel ( x 2)
Swing open the panel so you can see the back.
[C]: Connector cover ( x 2)
[D]: Connector (2nd from the top) (
x 1)
[E]: ADF base left and right plates ( x 2)
While holding the ADF firmly, slide the ADF back and lift the large end of the
keyholes over the shoulder screws.
3-10
30 July 2004
SCANNER
Top Covers
[A]
[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
B140R907.WMF
ADF ( 3.4.1)
[A]: Top inside cover ( x 2)
[B]: Top left cover ( x 1)
[C]: Top right cover ( x 1)
[D]: Operation panel ( x 1) ( 3.3.1)
3-11
manuals4you.com
SCANNER
30 July 2004
3.4.2 EXPOSURE GLASS
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B140R908.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Rear scale ( x 3)
Left cover ( x 3)
ADF exposure glass
Exposure glass
NOTE: Lift out the exposure glass and left scale together. The left scale is
permanently attached to the exposure glass with double-sided tape. Do not
remove the left scale from the exposure glass.
When re-installing the exposure glass:
Position the exposure glass first. Make sure that the arrow mark is in the upper
left corner.
When re-installing the left cover, make sure it is seated correctly.
3-12
30 July 2004
SCANNER
3.4.3 SCANNER ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B140R909.WMF
Exposure glass ( 3.4.2)

[A]: Original length sensor ( x 1,
x 1)
NOTE: In North America, two length sensors are provided.
[B]: Original width sensor (
x 1,
x 1)
3-13
manuals4you.com
SCANNER
30 July 2004
3.4.4 LENS BLOCK
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B140R910.WMF
B140R911.WMF

Operation panel ( x 1) ( 3.3.1)
[A]: Top right cover ( x 1)
[B]: Right upper stay ( x 2)
[C]: Lens cover ( x 2)
[D]: Lens block ( x 2,
x 3)
NOTE: To avoid damaging the lens block, never set it down on the side with the
PCB; turn it over with the PCB up.
Re-assemble the machine, then perform the scanner and printer adjustments.
( 3.14)
3-14
30 July 2004
SCANNER
3.4.5 EXPOSURE LAMP

[D]
[A]
[C]
B140R912.WMF

Operation panel ( 3.3.1)
Push the 1st scanner [A] to the cutout [B] in the scanner frame.
[C]: Exposure lamp cover ( x 2)
[D]: Exposure lamp ( x 3,
x 1)
NOTE: Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers.
3-15
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
SCANNER
30 July 2004
3.4.6 LAMP REGULATOR
[A]
[B]
[C]
B140R913.WMF

Exposure lamp cover and exposure lamp ( 3.4.5)
[A]: Metal strip reflector
NOTE: Avoid touching the surface of the reflector and do not bend it.
[B]: Lamp regulator ribbon connector
[C]: Lamp regulator ( x 4,
x 1)
3-16
30 July 2004
SCANNER
3.4.7 SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD (SDRB)
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B140R914.WMF
Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)

[A]: Scanner motor drive board (
x 3,
x 3)
3-17
manuals4you.com
SCANNER
30 July 2004
3.4.8 SCANNER MOTOR
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140R915.WMF
[E]
[D]
B140R916.WMF
[F]
B140R917.WMF
Right upper cover ( 3.3.3)

Controller/IPU panel door
Flywheel ( x 3)
[A]: Drum cooling fan ( x 1,
x 1)
[B]: Charge power pack cooling fan ( x 2,
x 1)
[C]: Exhaust fan ( x 1,
x 1)
[D]: Development power pack ( x 2,
x 3)
[E]: Vent ( x 2)
[F]: Scanner motor (
x 1, harnesses x 2, x 3, timing belt x 1)
Re-assemble the scanner, then do the scanner and printer adjustments. ( 3.14)
3-18
30 July 2004
SCANNER
3.4.9 SCANNER HP SENSOR
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B140R918.WMF

[A]: Sensor bracket and leaf ( x 1)
[B]: Scanner HP sensor (
x 1)
3-19
manuals4you.com
SCANNER
30 July 2004
3.4.10 SCANNER WIRE REPLACEMENT

Preparation for Removal
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B140R919.WMF
[E]
[F]
B140R920.WMF
ADF and top covers ( 3.4.1)

Operation panel ( x 1) ( 3.3.1)
[A]: Scanner unit external cover ( x 4,
[B]: Left stay ( x 5)
[C]: Right stay ( x 5)
[D]: ADF upper support frame ( x 8)
[E]: Lower support frame ( x 6)
[F]: Scanner unit front panel ( x 6)
3-20
x 1)
30 July 2004
SCANNER
Wire Removal: Back

[D]
[B]
[C]
B140R921.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Drive pulley ( x 1)
Timing belt
Tension bracket ( x 1, spring x 1)
Rear wire pulley ( x 1) and rear scanner wire
3-21
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
SCANNER
30 July 2004
Wire Removal: Front

[B]
[C]
[A]
B140R922.WMF
[A]: Tension bracket ( x 1, spring x 1)

[B]: Front wire pulley ( x 1)
Remove the screw. While pulling back on the drive shaft, remove the pulley
shaft.
[C]: Scanner wire
3-22
30 July 2004
SCANNER
Attaching the New Wire
[C]
[D]
[A]
B140R923.WMF
[B]
B140R924.WMF
1. While paying attention to the direction of the wire (the leading bead), thread the
wire [A] through the pulley, wrap the wire on the pulley, then apply tape to hold
it in place.
Wind the wire on the bead side [B] clockwise 6 times, and the ring side 2
times as shown ( ).
2. Set the pulley with the taped wire on the scanner drive shaft.
3. Position the 1st scanner with the positioning pins, part number A0069104 ([A]
on the next page).
4. Wind the end of the wire with the bead [C] as shown (
).
5. Wind the ring-end of the wire around the pulley [D], install the tension bracket
[E] , then tighten the screw slightly to temporarily lock the wire to the bracket
).
(
3-23
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[E]
SCANNER
30 July 2004
[A]
[B]
B140R925.WMF
6. Attach the 1st scanner bracket [B].

7. Tighten the screw on the tension bracket ([E] previous page).
8. Remove the positioning pins. Hold the center of the 1st scanner then move it
gently left and right to make sure that the wire is seated and positioned
correctly.
9. Insert the positioning pins again, then loosen the following screws: 2nd scanner
inner screws, 1st scanner bracket screws, tension bracket screw.
10. With the pulley facing directly up, tighten the screws again to fix the pulley in
place.
11. Re-assemble the scanner, then perform the scanner and printer adjustments.
( 3.14)
3-24
30 July 2004
SCANNER
3.4.11 SCANNER HEATER

[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B140R927.WMF
[D]
B140R926.WMF

[A]: Scanning glass plate ( x 4).
[B]: Scanner heater ( x 2).
[C]: Fasten the cable with the harness clamp.
[D]: Fasten the connector on the left side of the machine (
3-25
manuals4you.com
x 1).
LASER UNIT
30 July 2004
3.5 LASER UNIT

WARNING
any procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
WARNING
This laser unit uses four laser beams produced by a Class III LDA with a
wavelength of 788 nm and intensity of 10 mW. Direct exposure to the
eyes could cause permanent blindness.
Before performing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit, press
the main power switch to power the machine off. Then unplug the
machine from the power source. Allow the machine to cool for a few
minutes. The polygon motor continues to rotate for about one to three
minutes.
Never power on the machine with any of these components removed: 1)
LD unit, 2) polygon motor cover, 3) synchronization detector.
3.5.1 CAUTION DECALS

Two caution decals are provided for the laser section.
DECAL6.WMF
B140R928.WMF
3-26
30 July 2004
LASER UNIT
3.5.2 LD UNIT AND POLYGON MOTOR

[A]: LD unit cover ( x 4)
[B]: Harness connector
[C]: Polygon motor cover (
x 4)
[C]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B140R929.WMF
CAUTION
An accidental static discharge could damage the LDB (Laser Diode
Board). Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from
your hands.
The polygon motor rotates at extremely high speed and continues to
rotate after switching the machine off. To avoid damaging the motor,
never remove the polygon motor within three minutes of switching off the
main power and disconnecting the power plug.
[D]: LDB connectors (
x 6)
[E]: LD unit ( x 2)
[F]: Polygon motor ( x 3,
x 2)
[D]
[F]
Follow this procedure in reverse

order to install the new LD unit or
polygon motor.
[E]
B140R930.WMF
CAUTION
Before fastening the polygon motor in place ( x 3,
x 2), make sure that
the glass panel of the laser port is facing to the right (toward the mirrors in
the optical path).
3-27
manuals4you.com
LASER UNIT
30 July 2004
SP Adjustments
1. Execute SP2962 (Automatic Adjustment of Drum Conditions) after replacing
the LD unit, but only if SP3901 Auto Process Control is on.
2. Read the label [A] attached to the LD unit [B]. Execute SP2115 (Main Scan
Beam Pitch Adjustment) and enter the numbers printed on the label.
[A]
[B]
B140R931.WMF
The first line on the label is the machine number.

The second line on the label includes three numbers separated by slashes.
Reading from left to right, these are the correct settings for SP2115 (Main
Scan Beam Pitch Adjustment) 001, 002, and 003.
Do not remove this label and make sure it is flat against the side of the LD
unit.
3. Perform the scanner and printer adjustments. ( 3.14)
3-28
30 July 2004
LASER UNIT
3.5.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B140R932.WMF
Remove the right side cover ( x 2)

NOTE: If the optional LCT is installed, disconnect it (
x 1).
[A]: Development unit fans ( x 4,

x 1)
[B]: Synchronization detector ( x 1,
x 1)
After replacement, set SP1002-001~007 (Side-to-Side Registration) to the defaults.
3-29
manuals4you.com
LASER UNIT
30 July 2004
3.5.4 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT

WARNING
If you have just disassembled the LD unit, to avoid serious damage to the
eyes from accidental exposure to laser beams you must confirm that the
machine has been re-assembled completely before operation.
This adjustment corrects the parallelogram pattern to the desired rectangular
pattern for printing; it does not correct the skew of scanned images.
1. Execute SP2902-003 (Test Pattern Printing Test Pattern) 018 to print the A4
LEF pattern. Check the printed patterns and estimate the angle of adjustment
required.
2. Remove the exposure glass ( 3.4.2).
3. Remove the LD unit cover and polygon motor cover ( 3.5.2).
4. Remove the right cover ( 3.3.3).
5. Loosen the screws of the laser exposure unit
x 3).
[B]
[A]
B140R933.WMF
6. While watching the scale [A], use a flathead screwdriver [B] to move the laser
exposure unit left or right to adjust the position of the unit.
3-30
30 July 2004
LASER UNIT
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
1 mm
[B]
B140R934.WMF
7. Adjust the position of the laser exposure unit.

If the pattern is skewed at the corner of the leading edge [A], move the unit
so it moves the pointer on the scale toward the back.
If the pattern is skewed at the lower left corner of the trailing edge [B], move
the unit so it moves the pointer on the scale toward the front.
NOTE: The scale is set for increments of 1 mm.
8. After adjustment, tighten the screws on the laser exposure unit, re-assemble
the machine and print the pattern again with SP2902-003 No.18.
9. Check the pattern. Repeat the procedure if more adjustment is required.
3-31
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
3.6 DRUM UNIT

3.6.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL
Removal
[E]
[C]
[B]
B140R936.WMF
[A]
[D]
[F]
B140R935.WMF
[G]
[H]
B140R937.WMF
[A]: Shutter cover ( x 1).

[B]: Lock screw
[C]: Toner bottle.
Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing the toner bottle holder to the right.
[D]: Face plate (knob x 1, x 2)
NOTE: After re-installation, the tab [E] should be behind the stay and its pin
below should be in the open track below.
[F]: Close the supply pipe shutter
[G]: Development unit (
x 2 [H])
Allow the unit to slip to the right, then slowly pull it out of the machine.
NOTE: If the LCT is installed, you may need to disconnect it so the front door
can open far enough to allow removal of the development unit.
3-32
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
Re-installation
When re-inserting the development unit,
engage the plate on the front of the
development unit with the silver pin [A] inside
the machine, then slide it to the left toward
the drum.
If the development unit will not move past the

pin, the couplings are not aligned correctly at
the back of the machine. Turn the gear on the
front of the developer unit until the couplings
engage at the rear of the machine.
B140R938.WMF
[A]
Before closing the front door, make sure that

the pipe line shutter is rotated down to the
open position.
Replacement with a used Development Unit

When using a development unit from another machine for test purposes, execute
the following procedure.
1. Check the value of SP2220 (Vref Manual Setting) in both the machine
containing the test unit and the machine that you are going to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit, then input the VREF for this unit into SP2220.
3. After the test, reinstall the old development unit, and change SP2220 back to
the original value.
3-33
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
If the unit is installed correctly, you should see

the pin above the plate, and the plate should
be flat against the front of the development
unit.
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
3.6.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT
[A]
B140R939.WMF
Development unit ( 3.6.1)

[A]: Charge corona unit ( x 1,
x 1)
3-34
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE AND GRID
[A]
[C]
[E]
Replacement
Adjustment
[G]
[F]
[B]
B140R940.WMF
[D]
B140R941.WMF
Charge corona unit ( 3.6.1)

[A]: Grid ( x 1)
[B]: Front bracket
[C]: Rear bracket
[D]: Front block cover
[E]: Rear block cover
[F]: Corona wire
Disconnect the wire behind the grid bracket.
NOTE: 1) Never touch the charge corona wire with bare hands. Always protect it
from dust, oil, etc.
2) Never bend or knot the wire. Charge will not distribute evenly on a bent
wire.
3) Make sure that the wire seam [G] is as close as possible to the wire
hook at the rear.
4) At the front and back, make sure that the wire is threaded correctly into
the grooves in the end blocks.
5) After replacing the charge corona wire, make sure that the wire cleaner
pads are engaged correctly with the wires.
6) After replacing the wire, set SP2001-001 (Charge Roller Bias
Adjustment Applied Voltage for Image Processing) to the default.
3-35
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANING PADS

[A]
B140R942.WMF

Charge corona wire and grid ( 3.6.3)
[A]: Cleaning pad ( x 1)
3-36
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
3.6.5 OPC DRUM REMOVAL
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B140R943.WMF
B140R944.WMF

[A]: Drum unit ( x 1,
x 1)
Grasp the drum unit by the knob to remove it from the machine.
[B]: OPC drum
After replacing the drum, do the following SPs:
Set SP2001-001 (Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Applied Voltage for Image
Processing) to the default setting.
SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions), only if SP3901 (Auto Process
Control) is on.
NOTE: 1) To avoid fingerprints on the surface of the OPC drum, never touch the
surface of the drum with bare fingers.
2) Never use alcohol to clean the surface of the OPC drum. Blow dry the
OPC drum, then wipe clean with a clean, slightly damp cloth.
3) Before installing a new drum, dust the surface of the OPC drum
carefully with setting powder. For more, see next page.
3-37
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
Dusting the Drum Surface

The surface of the drum is less smooth, so you must apply Drum Setting Powder
(P/N: 54429101) to the drum surface before installation.
Important!: Failure to apply the drum powder before installation could damage the
drum cleaning blade or scour the drum surface.
[B]
[A]
[C]
[F]
B140R209.WMF
[E]
[D]
B140R210.WMF
1. Apply the setting powder by tapping the powder bag [A] across the surface of
the drum [B].
2. Cover the entire length of the drum over a 45-90 degree portion [C] (about 1/4
of the total drum surface). Apply enough powder so the area turns white.
NOTE: If setting powder is not available, use waste toner instead of drum
setting powder. However, this could cause dirty backgrounds on the
first copies.
3. Install the new drum in the OPC unit so that the powdered surface [D] faces the
cleaning blade [E].
4. Rotate the drum once clockwise [F] until it stops again at the same position.
Important: Never rotate the drum anti-clockwise.
3-38
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
3.6.6 PTL (B140 SERIES ONLY)

[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
B140R708.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)

[A]: PTL bracket ( x 2)
[B]: PTL (
x 1)
Reinstallation
The shoulder screw [C] must be attached again at its initial location.
3-39
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
3.6.7 QUENCHING LAMP
[A]
B140R945.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)

[A]: Quenching lamp (
x 1)
At the center, push back the hook to release the quenching lamp.
NOTE: Use only a blower brush to clean the quenching lamp.
3.6.8 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR

[A]
B140R946.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)

[A]: Drum potential sensor ( x 2,
x 1)
NOTE: After replacing the drum potential sensor, do SP2962 (Adjustment of
Drum Conditions), only if SP3901 (Auto Process Control) is on).
3-40
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
3.6.9 CLEANING FILTER
B140R947.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)

[A]: Cleaning filter
3.6.10 CLEANING BLADE

[A]
B140R948.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)

[A]: Drum cleaning blade (
x 2)
NOTE: 1) Clean the blade edge carefully with only a soft, clean cloth.
2) Handle the blade carefully to avoid nicking its edge.
3) New blades are treated with special setting powder, so avoid touching
the edge of a new cleaning blade. If the edge of a new blade is
accidentally wiped clean, dust it lightly with some toner before installing
it.
4) Before installing a new blade, make sure that the blade side seals are
not pinched by the blade.
3-41
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
3.6.11 CLEANING BRUSH
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140R949.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)

Drum cleaning blade ( 3.6.10)
[A]: Coupling ( x 1)
[B]: Inner bushing
[C]: Cleaning brush
Pull the shaft toward the rear to disengage the front of the shaft, then pull
out.
NOTE: 1) After replacing the cleaning brush, clean the ID sensor to make sure
that it is clean and free of toner.
2) Avoid touching the cleaning brush with bare hands.
3) Check the entrance seals and confirm that they are not bent.
3-42
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
3.6.12 PICK-OFF PAWLS
[B]
B140R950.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)

[A]: Pick-off pawl bracket ( x 2)
[B]: Pick-off pawl (spring x 1)
3.6.13 ID SENSOR
[A]
B140R951.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)

Pick-off pawls ( 3.6.12)
[A]: ID sensor ( x 2,
x 1)
After replacing the sensor, do the following SPs:
SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions), only if SP3901 (Auto Process
Control) is on).
SP3001-002 (ID Sensor Initialization Setting).
3-43
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
3.6.14 DRUM MOTOR
[A]
B140R952.WMF
[B]
[D]
[C]
B140R953.WMF
Rear covers ( 3.3.5)

Controller/IPU panel ( x 2) (not shown)
The panel swings open like a door. You do not need to remove it.
Flywheel ( x 3) (not shown)
[A]: Three gears ( x 1,
x 2, Timing belt x 1)
[B]: Spring
[C]: Timing belt
[D]: Drum motor (
x 1, x 5)
3-44
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
3.6.15 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE
[C]
[B]
[E]
[D]
B140R954.WMF
1. Open the front door [A].

2. Remove the lock pin [B], then pull out the toner collection bottle [C] and its base
[D].
3. Detach the bottle from the base clamp [E] and replace it.
3.6.16 TONER SEPARATION UNIT
[A]
B140R955.WMF

[A]: Toner separation unit (
x 3)
3-45
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
3.6.17 OZONE FILTERS

[A]: Filter cover ( x 1)
The filter cover is on the back of
the machine.
[B]: Ozone filter (top)
[C]: Ozone filter (bottom)
[A]
[B]
[C]
B140R956.WMF
3.6.18 OPTICS DUST FILTER

[A]: Filter cover
[B]: Optics dust filter
[B]
[A]
B140R957.WMF
3.6.19 INTERNAL DUST FILTER

2. Pull out the internal dust filter [A].
[A]
B140R958.WMF
3-46
30 July 2004
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.7 DEVELOPMENT UNIT

3.7.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the development unit
( 3.6.1)
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Remove the toner hopper [A] ( x 2)

Rotate the toner hopper very slightly
(10 ~ 20) as you slide it up to
remove it.
NOTE: To avoid toner spill, hold the
hopper level as you remove it
B140R959.WMF
[B]
3. Hold the development [B] unit over a

large sheet of paper, then slowly turn it
upside down to empty the developer.
[C]
4. Turn the knob [C] through several

complete rotations to empty all the
developer in the development unit.
5. Clean the development sleeve and its
side seals.
B140R960.WMF
6. Turn the unit over and set it on another

sheet of clean paper.
7. Note the developer lot number printed
on the top edge of the bag. You will
need the lot number when you input
SP2801.
[E]
[D]
8. Clean the development roller shaft with

a clean cloth and blower brush.
9. While turning the knob [D] slowly, pour
in one pack of developer [E] from one
end of the development unit to the
B140R961.WMF
other.
Make sure that the developer is evenly distributed.
NOTE: Continue to turn the knob several times to prevent clumping in the
developer.
3-47
manuals4you.com
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
30 July 2004
10. Re-assemble the machine.

Hold the hopper perfectly level when re-attaching it, to prevent toner from
entering the rails of the development filter.
NOTE: Automatic process control starts automatically after the machine is
switched on, so after replacing the developer, you should enter the SP
mode and initialize the developer with SP2801 as soon as possible
after switching the machine on.
11. Do SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting).
B064 Series
Switch the machine on.
Press Clear Modes
.
Press
.
Read the lot number from the package, enter the number, then press
.
Press Execute.
B140 Series
Open the front door.
Important: If you open the front door, auto process control will not start.
SP2801 must be done before auto process control starts.
Turn the machine on.
Push Clear Modes
.
Push Copy SP on the touch-panel.
Push
.
Read the lot number from the pack of developer, input the number, then push
.
Push Execute.
3-48
30 July 2004
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.7.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER
[B]
[C]
B140R962.WMF

[A]: Toner hopper
[B]: Filter case
[C]: Development filter
Make sure that the rails where the development filter bracket [D] connects to
the development unit are clean and free of toner. If there is any toner in the
rails, wipe them clean.
When installing a new filter, set the filter inside the filter case then place the
case on top of the filter bracket [D]. The filter case closes any gaps at the
edges of the filter to prevent toner scatter.
3-49
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
30 July 2004
3.7.3 ENTRANCE SEAL AND SIDE SEALS
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140R963.WMF
[D]
B140R964.WMF

[A]: Entrance seal bracket ( x 2)
After removing the screws, press in the catches on either end [B] to release
the entrance seal bracket, then remove it.
Clean the entrance seal bracket before re-installing it.
When re-installing, make sure the tabs [C] and notches are engaged at four
locations.
[D]: Side seals
Remove the side seals from both ends, clean the area, and replace with
new seals.
3-50
30 July 2004
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.7.4 TD SENSOR
[A]
B140R965.WMF

[A]: TD sensor ( x 1)
Before installing a new TD sensor, clean the TD sensor port [B].
After replacing the TD sensor, do the following SPs
SP2801 TD Sensor Initial Setting
SP2962 Auto Process Control (only if SP3901 Auto Process Control is
on).
3.7.5 TONER END SENSOR

[B]
[A]
[C]
B140R966.WMF

[A]: Toner hopper ( x 2)
[B]: Toner end sensor ( x 2)
Remove the screws carefully to avoid stripping the holes.
Before installing a new toner end sensor, clean the toner end sensor port
[C].
3-51
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
30 July 2004
3.7.6 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR
[G]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B140R967.WMF
[F]
[E]
[D]
B140R968.WMF

Swing the toner unit out of the machine and remove the toner bottle.
[A]: Bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Lock plate ( x 1)
[C]: Toner bottle unit (
x 1, harness x 1,
x 1)
The c-clamp is under the toner unit.
Lift the toner bottle unit off the pegs and lay it on a piece of newspaper to
avoid toner spill.
[D]: Bottom plate ( x 3, harnesses x 2)
2 screws on the bottom, 1 screw on the side.
[E]: Toner supply motor bracket ( x 2)
[F]: Toner supply motor ( x 2)
NOTE: After re-installation the tab [G] should be behind the stay and its pin
below should be in the open track below.
3-52
30 July 2004
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.7.7 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR
[C]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B140R970.WMF
[E]
[D]
B140R969.WMF
[A]: Flywheel ( x 3)
[B]: Waste toner pump tube ( x 1,
x 1)
[C]: Drive rod
Lift the toner pump tube to disengage the drive rod, pull out the rod, and
push the rubber tube aside.
[D]: Development motor bracket ( x 3,
x 1)
[E]: Development motor ( x 4)
3-53
manuals4you.com
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
30 July 2004
3.8 TRANSFER BELT UNIT

3.8.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
[B]
[C]
[A]
B140R971.WMF
NOTE: Before you begin, spread a mat or some clean paper on the floor where
you intend to set the transfer belt unit.
1. Remove the OPC drum unit ( 3.6.5).
2. Disconnect the transfer belt unit [A] (
x 1).
3. Remove the transfer belt unit stay [B] (
x 1).
4. While supporting the transfer belt unit with your hand, turn the release lever [C]
counter-clockwise to release it, then pull the transfer belt unit out of the
machine.
NOTE: The transfer belt unit can be
removed without removing the
OPC drum unit. However, the
transfer belt unit must be
removed carefully to avoid
scratching the surface of the
transfer belt on the OPC drum
unit [D] above. Avoid touching
the belt with bare hands.
[D]
B140R972.WMF
3-54
30 July 2004
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
3.8.2 TRANSFER BELT

[C]
[D]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[F]
[A]
B140R973.WMF
[E]
B140R974.WMF
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. ( 3.8.1)

2. Disconnect the earth terminal [A] and transfer current terminal [B] (
While doing this, hold the transfer belt unit [C] by its knobs [D].
x 2).
3. Raise and stand the belt perpendicular to the unit and remove it.
NOTE: To avoid scratching the belt on the guide, never rotate the belt unit
farther than 90 degrees.
4. Release the drive roller [E] (
x 2).
5. Press in on the drive roller to collapse the unit into a U shape [F].
6. Remove the belt and replace it.
3-55
manuals4you.com
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
30 July 2004
[A]
Check the following points:

Before re-assembling the transfer belt unit, use a clean cloth and alcohol to clean
the contact points of the drive roller, idle roller, and transfer roller. Make sure
these areas are clean and free from toner, paper dust, etc.
Never touch the surface of the belt with bare hands and never apply alcohol to
the surface of the belt. Clean it with a blower brush. Check the underside of the
transfer belt and clean with the blower brush.
When re-assembling the transfer belt unit, make sure that the transfer belt is
centered between the triangular marks [A] on either side of the unit.
After re-assembly, make sure that the transfer belt is inside the transfer current
terminal. The belt could be cut if it is not positioned correctly.
Confirm that both the ground and transfer current terminal are connected and
that the harnesses are not touching the release lever.
After re-installing the transfer belt unit, turn the belt and confirm that the toner
collection coil turns.
The transfer belt and transfer roller cleaning blade must always be replaced
together ( 3.8.2).
3-56
manuals4you.com
B140R975.WMF
30 July 2004
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
3.8.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING BLADE
[B]
[D]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[C]
B140R976.WMF
Transfer belt unit ( 3.8.1)

Disassemble the transfer belt unit ( 3.8.1)
[A]: Transfer roller cleaning blade ( x 2,
x 2)
NOTE: 1) Never remove the inner lock screws [B] of the transfer roller cleaning
blade. When re-assembling, make sure that the clamps [C] and [D] are
arranged as shown above to avoid contact with the release lever.
2) The transfer roller cleaning blade should always be replaced when the
transfer belt is replaced.
3) Never touch the edge of a new transfer roller cleaning blade. The edge
of the blade is dusted with setting powder. If the setting powder is
removed accidentally, dust the edge of the blade with toner. This is
especially important when only the transfer roller cleaning blade must be
replaced without replacing the transfer roller.
4) Work carefully around the transfer power pack located inside the
transfer belt unit, especially when cleaning with an vacuum cleaner, to
avoid damaging the power pack with static electricity.
3-57
manuals4you.com
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
30 July 2004
3.8.4 DISCHARGE PLATE

[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
[E]
B140R977.WMF
1. Remove the transfer belt unit ( 3.8.1)

2. Remove the shoulder screw and spring [A].
3. Rotate the discharge unit up, then lift it straight up to remove it.
4. Disconnect the three large tabs [B].
5. Remove the bracket [C] (
x 1).
6. Disconnect the 6 small seal case tabs [D].

7. Remove the discharge plate [E].
NOTE: When you re-assemble the discharge unit, set the discharge plate and
make sure that it is perfectly flat before re-connecting the tabs. Before
re-attaching the bracket [C], make sure that all the tabs are connected.
3-58
30 July 2004
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
3.8.5 TRANSFER POWER PACK

[F]
[E]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B140R978.WMF
Transfer belt unit ( 3.8.1)

[A]: Wire ( x 1) (all wire guides)
[B]: Ground terminal wire (wire guide x 1)
This terminal wire does not disconnect from the power pack.
Loosen the two left screws of the transfer belt lift solenoid [C], and remove
the top screw [D] to free the ground terminal wire.
[E]: Transfer current terminal wire (wire guides x 2)
[F]: Transfer power pack (
x 1)
Disconnect the two standoffs on the right edge of the power pack and
remove.
Re-installation
Confirm that the left edge of the power pack is below the tabs on the left.
Confirm that the transfer current terminal wire is below the wire guides on the
right.
Pass the ground terminal wire under the top connector of the solenoid bracket
and tighten all the screws of the solenoid bracket.
Make sure the wire is below all the wire guides at the top.
3-59
manuals4you.com
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
3.9 FUSING UNIT

CAUTION
Switch off the machine, remove the plug from the power source, then allow
sufficient time for the fusing unit to cool before you remove it from the
machine.
3.9.1 FUSING UNIT

NOTE: Before you begin, spread a mat or some clean paper on the floor where
you intend to set the fusing unit.
[B]
[A]
B140R979.WMF

Pull out the transfer unit.
[A]: Knob ( x 1)
Open D3 and D4 until you can see the hole in the shaft.
Insert the tip of a screwdriver into the hole of the shaft to hold it in position
as the knob is turned to remove or install it.
[B]: Inner cover ( x 3)
Pull the fusing unit release lever, then pull the unit out on the rail supports.
At reassembly, make sure that the harness of the web drive motor is not
pinched by the inner cover.
3-60
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
B140 Series
[C]
[C]
[B]
[B]
[A]
[A]
B140R502.WMF
B140R980.WMF
[A]: Open the exit separation pawl assembly.

[B]: Stopper bracket ( x 1)
[C]: Fusing unit (B064 Series:
x 2, B140 Series:
x 2)
Important:
Give support to the bottom of the fusing unit with your hand when you remove it.
3.9.2 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE MOTOR (B140 SERIES)

[B]
[A]
B140R206.WMF
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)

[A]: Bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Motor ( x 2,
x 1,
x 2)
3-61
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
B064 Series
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
3.9.3 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE HP SENSOR (B140 SERIES)
[A]
[B]
B140R207.WMF

[A]: Bracket ( x 2)
[B]: HP sensor (pawls x 4)
3-62
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
3.9.4 FUSING UNIT THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B140R981.WMF

[A]: Upper cover ( x 1)
[B]: Press in to release the pawls inside, then remove.
Important: Make sure that the pawls [B] engage correctly when you install
the unit again.
3-63
manuals4you.com
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
[A]
B064 Series
[D]
[B]
[C]
B140R982.WMF
B064 Series
[A]: End thermistor ( x 1,
x 1)
[B]: Bracket ( x 2)
[C]: Center thermistor ( x 1)
[D]: Two thermostats ( x 3)
B140 Series
B140R201.WMF
B140 Series
:
:
:
:
Rear end cover ( x 2)

End thermistor bracket and thermistor ( x 1,
x 1, metal clamps)
Center thermistor bracket and thermistor ( x 1,
x 1, metal clamps)
Three thermostats ( x 5)
Important:
To prevent damage to a thermostat, never touch its detection surface.
3-64
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
3.9.5 WEB CLEANING ROLLER
[B]
[A]
B140R983.WMF
B140R984.WMF
[D]
[F]
[C]
[E]
B140R985.WMF
Open the front door and pull out the fusing unit on its support rails.
[A]: Web unit ( x 2,
x 2)
The web unit can be removed without removing the fusing unit from the
machine.
[B]: Upper cover ( x 1)
Rotate the cover down slightly to remove.
[C]: Web shafts ( x 2)
[D]: Remove the web cleaning rollers from the shaft driver pins.
[E]: Web bushing (spring x 1)
[F]: Cleaning roller
NOTE: 1) After replacing the web with a new one, you must execute SP1902-001
(Fusing Web Used Area Display/Setting) to reset the web consumption
count to zero. This SP code must be executed to release SC550.
2) Be sure to print an SMC report before executing Memory All Clear
(SP5801). After executing SP5801, be sure to re-enter the value
recorded for SP1902-001 in the SMC report.
3-65
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
Web Unit Disassembly
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
Web Unit Assembly

[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B140R986.WMF
[E]
[F]
[G]
B140R987.WMF
1. Attach the cleaning roller [A]

Insert the end of the web into the slot .
2. Insert the drive pins [B] into the web shaft ().
3. After installing bushing 1 [C], rotate the shaft right to lock it, then attach the lock
screw ().
4. Set the web [D] under the feeler [E] of the web end sensor ().
5. Attach bushing 2 [F] ().
6. Attach the new web roll [G] and wind it tight so no slack remains ().
NOTE: Before reassembling the machine, confirm that 1) there is no slack in
the web roll, 2) the web is below the feeler of the web end sensor.
7. Attach the upper cover.
8. After installing a new web roll, reset SP1902-001 to zero.
3-66
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
3.9.6 WEB MOTOR AND WEB END SENSOR
[A]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B140R988.WMF
[D]
[E]
B140R989.WMF
Web unit and end cover ( 3.9.5)

[A]: Bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Web motor positioning bracket ( x 1)
[C]: Web motor
[D]: Web motor/sensor mount ( x 3)
[E]: Web end sensor (
x 1, harness x 1)
NOTE: At reassembly, make sure that the harness of the web driver motor is not
pinched by the fusing inner cover
3-67
manuals4you.com
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
3.9.7 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING UNIT

B064 Series
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
B140R990.WMF

[A]: Lower cover ( x 1)
[B]: Cleaning roller bracket (
[C]: Cleaning roller ( x 1)
x 2)
NOTE: 1) When attaching the lower cover of the pressure roller cleaning roller,
make sure that the tab [D] engages with the groove [E].
2) If the bushings are noisy after replacement, lubricate them on both ends
and the holes where the bushings are attached with Barietta Grease
L553R.
3-68
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
B140 Series
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[A]
B140R204.WMF

[A]: Cover ( x 1)
[B]: Pressure cleaning roller (
x 2)
3-69
manuals4you.com
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
3.9.8 FUSING LAMPS, HOT ROLLER, AND PRESSURE ROLLER

If you wish to remove the pressure roller only, without removing the hot roller and
fusing lamps, please do not use this procedure. Use the procedure in the next
section.
B064 Series: Fusing Lamps

Rear
[B]
[D]
Front
[C]
[A]
[E]
B140R991.WMF
[F]
[G]
B140R992.WMF

[A]: Rear terminal brackets ( x 3)
[B]: Upper connectors (
x 2)
[C]: Lower connector (
x 1)
[D]: Rear fusing lamp holder ( x 1)
[E]: Fusing lamp connectors (
x 2)
[F]: Front fusing lamp holder ( x 3)
[G]: Fusing lamps
NOTE: Handle the fusing lamps carefully to prevent breaking them; avoid touching
them with bare hands.
3-70
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
B140 Series: Fusing Lamps

B140 Series Rear
[F]
[G]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[F]

[A]: Rear bracket ( x 2 at , x 1 at )
[B]: White connector (
x 1)
[C]: Lock bracket ( x 1)
[D]: Rear terminal connector bracket ( x 1 at under metal clamp,
[E]: Connector ( x 1,
x 1)
[F]: Blue, green connectors
[G]: Rear fusing lamp holder ( x 1)
3-71
manuals4you.com
B140R208.WMF
x 1 at )
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
B140 Series Front
[E]
[A]
[B]
[D]
B140R202.WMF
[C]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
Plate ( x 1)
White connector (
x 1)
Red connectors (
x 2)
Front fusing lamp holder (
Fusing lamps (x 3)
x 1)
NOTE: Be careful when you move the fusing lamps. Do not break them. Do not
touch them with bare hands.
3-72
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
Reinstallation: B140 Series Fusing Lamps

Front
Rear
W
B
G
W
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[C]
B140R205.WMF
1. Attach the rear fusing holder first.

2. Put in the lamps from the front.
3. Use the color coding of the connectors to set the lamps in the correct opening
in the rear fusing lamp holder.
NOTE: The openings in the rear holder have marks W (White), B (Blue), and G
(Green). These colors must agree with the letters on the holder: W, B, G.
4. At the front, see the colors of the connectors at the rear, and set the ends of the
lamps:
White
[A]
Blue
[B]
Green
[C]
3-73
manuals4you.com
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
[A]
B140R993.WMF
[C]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B140R994.WMF
Web unit ( 3.9.5)

[A]: Pressure arm
Insert the tips of two screwdrivers and press down to release.
[B]: C-clamps (both ends)
[C]: Drive gear
[D]: Bushings (both ends)
[E]: Bearings
[F]: Hot roller
3-74
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[C]
B140R995.WMF
B140R996.WMF
[A]: Entrance guide plate ( x 2)

[B]: Pressure roller ( x 2)
NOTE: The pressure roller and pressure roller bearing should always be
replaced together.
[C]: Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces of the bushings with Barrierta S552R
grease.
NOTE: If the bushings are warm, allow them to cool before applying the
Barrierta grease. Applying the grease while the bushings are hot could
generate gas.
3-75
manuals4you.com
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
Important Notes about Fusing Unit Assembly (B064 Series)
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B140R997.WMF
B140R998.WMF
Follow these important guidelines when re-assembling the fusing unit:

Use the external holes to fasten the screws when you fasten the lower guide
plate. The inner screws are adjusted to correct wrinkling.
Handle the fusing lamps carefully to prevent breaking them; avoid touching them
with bare hands.
Match colors of the bayonet connectors with the colors of the terminals when
reconnecting them to the bracket at [A] and [B]. If either connection is incorrect,
the machine cannot control the temperature of the hot roller and an SC is logged
as soon as the machine is powered on.
The discharge brush [C] on the fusing terminal bracket should contact the inner
surface of the hot roller.
Check that there is some play [D] (in the direction indicated by the arrows) in the
positioning of the fusing lamps.
3-76
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER

Use this procedure when you wish to remove only the pressure roller.
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[B]
B140R999.WMF

Turn the fusing unit upside down.
[A]: Lower cover ( x 1)
[B]: Pressure roller cleaning unit ( x 2)
[C]: Release the pressure arms
Use screw driver to lower the pressure arms on both ends of the pressure
roller ( 3.9.8) and remove the springs [D] (x 2) on both sides.
[E]: Pressure roller
NOTE: 1) The fusing lamps are fragile. Work carefully to avoid breaking them.
2) During assembly, handle the roller carefully to avoid scratching it on the
bracket.
3) Make sure the tabs and grooves of the lower cover are engaged
correctly before tightening the screw.
Spring Adjustment
Two holes [F] are provided on each pressure arm for the springs.
Normally the springs should be attached to the lower holes. Attaching the springs
to the upper holes exerts less pressure on the hot roller. Attach the springs to the
upper holes only for especially thin paper.
3-77
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
3.9.10 STRIPPER PAWLS

B064 Series
[A]
[B]
[C]
B140R800.WMF
[D]
B140R801.WMF
Remove the fusing unit ( 3.9.1)

[A]: Top cover ( x 1)
[B]: Bracket ( x 1, spring x 1)
[C]: Inner cover ( x 2)
[D]: Stripper pawl ( x 1, spring x 3)
3-78
30 July 2004
B140 Series
FUSING UNIT
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[D]
B140R517.WMF
[C]
B140R523.WMF
Remove the fusing unit ( 3.9.1)

[A]: Top cover ( x 1)
[B]: Bracket ( x 1, spring x 1)
[C]: Inner cover
[D]: Stripper pawl (spring x 1). Open the arms to release the stripper pawl, and
remove it.
3-79
manuals4you.com
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
3.9.11 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
B140R802.WMF
1. After the machine is powered on with the main switch, make an A4/LT LEF
copy, then stop the machine while the paper is still in the fusing unit by
switching it off.
NOTE: This is easier with an OHP sheet. Use an OHP sheet if you have one
available.
2. Open the front door, then turn the fusing knob to feed out the copy.
3. Measure the width of the band on the part of the image where it is particularly
black. The band, called the nip band [A], should be 9.00.7 mm at the center.
NOTE: When the fusing is incorrect (wrinkles, offset, curl), measure the nip
band width. The nip band width can be adjusted by changing the
position of the springs [B] on either end of the pressure roller. The
fusing temperature can also be adjusted with SP1105 (Fusing
Temperature Adjustment) for Normal, OHP, and Thick Paper.
3-80
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
3.9.12 FUSING UNIT EXIT SENSOR

[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[E]
[C]
[D]
B140R803.WMF

[A]: Open the hot roller stripper pawl unit
[B]: Exit guide plate ( x 2)
[C]: Fusing exit sensor holder ( x 2)
[D]: Plate spring
[E]: Fusing exit sensor (
x 1)
3-81
manuals4you.com
FUSING UNIT
30 July 2004
3.9.13 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR
[A]
[C]
B140R804.WMF
[B]
B140R805.WMF

Open the I/O board ( x 2)
[A]: CNB bracket ( x 4,
x all)
[B]: Timing belt
[C]: Fusing/exit motor bracket ( x 1)
Fusing/exit motor ( x 2)
The fusing/exit motor (not shown) is inside the bracket.
3-82
30 July 2004
FUSING UNIT
3.9.14 FUSING EXIT AND EXIT UNIT ENTRANCE SENSORS

[A]
[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
B140R806.WMF
Open the front door and pull out the exit/inverter unit.
[A]: Fusing exit sensor bracket ( x 2)
[B]: Fusing exit sensor (
x 1)
[C]: Exit unit entrance sensor bracket ( x 2)
[D]: Exit unit entrance sensor (
x 1)
3-83
manuals4you.com
DUPLEX UNIT
30 July 2004
3.10 DUPLEX UNIT

3.10.1 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
[C]
B140R808.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the duplex unit.
2. Remove the slide rail roller on the left [A] and on the right [B] (
x 1).
3. Lift out the duplex unit [C].

NOTE: To re-install the duplex unit, insert the duplex unit partially, only until it
enters the black guide rail, then re-attach each slide rail roller. After that,
push the duplex unit into the machine completely. This method prevents
interference from the guide plate during installation.
3-84
30 July 2004
DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.2 DUPLEX UNIT SIDE-TO-SIDE ADJUSTMENT

[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[A]
B140R809.WMF
1. Remove the inner cover [A] (
x 3)
2. Move the handle lock screw [B] from the right to the center.
3. Loosen the left lock screw [C], then adjust the position of the duplex unit.
3.10.3 JOGGER FENCE ADJUSTMENT

SP1008
Duplex Fence
Adjustment
Execute this SP to adjust the distance between the jogger

fences, if required. A smaller value shortens the distance. If the
fences are too far apart, skewing may occur in the duplex tray.
If the fences are too close, the paper may be creased in the
duplex unit. For details, see 5. Service Tables.
3-85
manuals4you.com
DUPLEX UNIT
30 July 2004
3.10.4 DUPLEX MOTORS

Duplex Inverter Motor
[A]
B140R810.WMF
[C]
[B]
[A]: Remove the cover ( x 3)
[B]: Inverter motor bracket ( x 3)
[C]: Inverter motor (harness x 1,
x 1,
x 2, timing belt x 1)
3-86
B140R811.WMF
30 July 2004
DUPLEX UNIT
Duplex Jogger and Transport Motors
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B140R812.WMF
[C]
[B]
B140R813.WMF
[A]: Jogger motor (

x 1, x 2)
[B]: Transport motor bracket (harness x 1,
[C]: Transport motor ( x 2)
x 1,
3-87
manuals4you.com
DUPLEX UNIT
30 July 2004
3.10.5 DUPLEX TRANSPORT CLUTCH/JOGGER HP SENSOR

[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B140R814.WMF
[A]: Duplex unit release lever ( x 2)

[B]: Jogger motor bracket (harnesses x 4, x 3)
[C]: Transport clutch (harness x 1,
x 1)
To release the clutch, push in the catch pawl on the side of the shaft.
[D]: Jogger HP sensor (spring x 1, x 2,
x 1)
3-88
30 July 2004
DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.6 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR

[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B140R815.WMF
[A]: Bracket ( x 2)
[B]: Duplex entrance sensor (
x 1)
At re-assembly, insert the plunger into the solenoid before re-attaching the
solenoid.
3-89
manuals4you.com
DUPLEX UNIT
30 July 2004
3.10.7 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSOR 3

[B]
[A]
[C]
B140R816.WMF
[A]: Right half of table ( x 2,

x 1)
The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes
when re-attaching.
[B]: Remove the screw in the center of the table to release the sensor bracket
below.
[C]: Transport sensor 3 (
x 1)
3-90
30 July 2004
DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.8 INVERTER EXIT SENSOR, TRANSPORT SENSORS 1 & 2

[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[C]
B140R817.WMF
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
B140R818.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Cross-stay ( x 4)
Reverse trigger roller shaft
Jogger fences ( x 1 each)
Left half of table ( x 2)
The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes
when re-attaching.
To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table, pull the table to
the right to disengage the tabs and then remove.
[E]: Inverter exit sensor ( x 1, harness x 1,
x 1)
[F]: Transport sensor 1 (harness x 1,
x 1)
[G]: Transport sensor 2 (harness x 1,
x 1)
3-91
manuals4you.com
DUPLEX UNIT
30 July 2004
3.10.9 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
B140R819.WMF
1. Cross stay ( 3.10.8)

2. Reverse trigger roller shaft (3.10.8)
3. Left half of the table (3.10.8)
4. Jogger motor bracket ( 3.10.5)
Slip the one end of the belt around the gear below the jogger motor.
Slip the other end of the belt around the gear at the other side of the duplex
unit.
5. If you are replacing the belt, set both jogger fence brackets at the center of the
belt and tighten the screw [A].
If you are adjusting the belt, loosen the screw and slide the plastic piece [B] on
the belt to the left or right to adjust the position of the front fence, then tighten
the screw.
3-92
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
3.11 PAPER FEED

3.11.1 PAPER TRAY REMOVAL
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140R820.WMF
[D]
B140R821.WMF

2. Pull out the tandem tray drawer [A] completely to separate the left [B] and right
[C] sides of the tandem tray.
3. Remove the left tandem tray [D] (
x 5).
3-93
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
[A]
[B]
[D]
B140R822.WMF
[E]
[C]
B140R823.WMF
[A]: Right tandem tray (
x 2).
NOTE: 1) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels [B]
ride on the slide rail [C].
2) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray
stopper [D] is set behind the stopper [E] on the frame.
3-94
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B140R824.WMF
Turn off the main switch.

Pull out the tandem feed tray.
[A]: Rear bottom plate ( x 1)
[B]: Return sensor (
x 1).
3-95
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B140R825.WMF

Pull out the tandem feed tray.
[A]: Rear bottom plate ( x 1).
[B]: Back fence transport gear ( x 1)
[C]: Move the back fence to the right.
[D]: Rear HP sensor (
x 1)
3-96
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[B]
[C]
B140R826.WMF
[D]
[E]
B140R827.WMF

Remove the right tandem tray ( 3.11.1)
[A]: Inner cover ( x 2)
[B]: Side fences ( x 1 each)
[C]: Bottom plate ( x 4)
[D]: Connector (
x 1)
[E]: Sensor ( x 1)
3-97
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom
plate lift wire. It is necessary to remove the shaft for replacing the rear
bottom plate lift wire.
[A]
[D]
B140R828.WMF
[G]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[C]
Remove the right tandem tray. (Refer to Paper Tray Removal.)
[A]: Remove the inner cover ( x 2)
[B]: Remove the left stay.
[C]: Wire stoppers
Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook.
[D]: Wire covers ( x 1 each)
[E]: Bracket ( x 1, x 1, bushing x 1)
[F]: Gear
[G]: Bottom plate lift wire
3-98
B140R829.WMF
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
[E]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B140R830.WMF
NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire:

1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B], and set the projection [C] in
the hole [D].
2) Position the wire as shown [E].
3) Do not cross the wires.
3-99
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE

NOTE: At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT LEF. Only A4 or LT LEF paper
can be used for tandem feed.
[B]
[D]
B140R832.WMF
[A]
[C]
B140R831.WMF
1. Open the front cover.

2. Completely pull out the tandem feed tray [A] to separate the right tandem tray
[B] from the left tandem tray.
3. Remove the right tandem inner cover [C] (
4. Re-position the side fences [D] (
A4: Outer slot position
LT: Inner slot position
x 2).
x 1 each).
5. Re-install the right tandem inner cover.
3-100
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[D]
B140R833.WMF
[C]
[E]
B140R835.WMF
B140R834.WMF
6. Remove the tray cover [A] (
x 2).
7. Remove the DC motor cover [B] (

8. Remove the rear side fence [C] (
2).
x 4).
x 4) and re-position the rear cover [D] (
9. Re-position the side fences [C] [E] (

A4: Outer slot position
LT: Inner slot position
x 4).
10. Re-install the DC motor cover and the tray cover.
3-101
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
[A]
[B]
B140R836.WMF
11. Remove the rear bottom plate [A] (
x 1).
12. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [B] ( x 1).

To use the paper tray for A4 size, set the screw in the left hole as shown. (For
LT size, the screw should be placed on the right.)
13. Reinstall the rear bottom plate.
14. Input the new paper size into SP5959-001 (Paper Size Tray 1). For details,
see SP5959 in section 4. Service Tables.
15. Do the scanner and printer adjustments. ( 3.14)
3-102
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
3.11.7 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[D]
B140R837.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Remove the tray.

Feed roller ( x 1)
Pick-up roller ( x 1)
Separation roller ( x 1)
NOTE: 1) The operation of the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1),
universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3), by-pass tray, and ADF are similar.
However, the only rollers that are interchangeable are the tandem and
universal tray rollers (Trays 1, 2, 3).
2) Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement.
3-103
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
3.11.8 FEED UNIT

[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
B140R839.WMF
[E]
B140R838.WMF
Front door ( 3.3.2)

LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover ( 3.3.3)
If the LCT is connected, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
Pull out all three trays (do not remove).
[A]: Nylon peg
[B]: Toner collection bottle
[C]: Vertical transport guide
[D]: Inner cover ( x 2)
NOTE: When re-installing the vertical transport guide, remove the lower right cover
then insert from [E]. ( 3.3.3)
3-104
PAPER FEED
[B]
[A]
B140R840.WMF
B140R841.WMF
[A]: Guide plate ( x 1)

1st feed unit only.
[B]: Feed unit ( x 1,
x 3)
Insert your hand from the right and pull the feed unit forward.
NOTE: To avoid hitting the unit on the sides of the machine, remove it
carefully and slowly.
3-105
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
3.11.9 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order to
change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment
can be done:
When feeding special paper, especially thick paper
When the customer is experiencing feed problems
[A]
[B]
B140R842.WMF
1. Remove the feed unit ( 3.11.8)

2. Loosen the hex screw [A].
NOTE: The separation roller gear [B] is positioned at the groove before
shipping.
3. To adjust for thick paper, move the separation roller gear [B] to the left to
decrease the pressure.
orTo correct misfeeds, move the separation roller gear to the right to increase the
pressure.
3-106
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
Replacement
Adjustment
3.11.10 RELAY SENSOR
[B]
[A]
[C]
B140R843.WMF
[A]: Remove the LCT entrance guide cover.

[B]: Relay sensor bracket ( x 1)
[C]: Relay sensor (
x 1)
3-107
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
3.11.11 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
B140R845.WMF
[D]
B140R844.WMF
Registration inner cover ( x 2)

Not shown. This cover is directly below the by-pass tray.
[A]: Connector (
x 1)
[B]: Ground wire ( x 1)
[C]: By-pass tray
Disconnect the by-pass tray from the pins on both sides.
[D]: By-pass table ( x 2)
[E]: By-pass paper size detection board ( x 2)
After installation, execute SP1904 to calibrate the maximum and minimum paper
sizes for the side fences:
SP1904-001 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection Minimum Size
Move the side fences to the minimum size, then execute this SP.
SP1904-002 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection Maximum Size
Move the side fences to the maximum size, then execute this SP.
3-108
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
3.11.12 BY-PASS TRAY ROLLERS
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B140R846.WMF
Right covers ( 3.3.3)

By-pass tray ( 3.11.11)
[A]: By-pass cover ( x 2)
[B]: Feed roller ( x 1)
[C]: Pick-up roller ( x 1)
[D]: Separation roller ( x 1)
NOTE: 1) Even though the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1),
universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) and the by-pass tray are identical, the
rollers are not interchangeable.
2) Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement.
3-109
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
3.11.13 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE

ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B140R847.WMF
1. Loosen the separation roller gear [A].

The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order
to change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller. This
adjustment can be done:
When feeding special paper, especially thick paper
When the customer experiences feed problems
NOTE: The separation roller gear is positioned at the groove before shipping.
2. Move the separation roller gear right to increase the pressure to correct
misfeeds.
3-110
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
3.11.14 REGISTRATION SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[C]
[B]
B140R848.WMF
B140R849.WMF
[A]: Inner cover (
x 4)

OPC drum unit ( 3.6.5)
[B]: Paper dust removal unit (
[C]: Registration sensor
x 1,
x 1)
3-111
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
3.11.15 REGISTRATION AND BY-PASS UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[F]
B140R850.WMF
1. Remove the development unit. ( 3.6.1)

2. Remove the inner cover. (
x 4)
3. Disconnect the toner bottle holder connector [A] and counter connector [B].
4. Pull out the duplex unit about 10 cm.
Confirm that the registration roller is separated from the positioning pin.
5. Remove the right upper cover. ( 3.3.3)
6. Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
7. Disconnect the following connectors:
Relay clutch connector [C]
Guide plate solenoid connector [D]
Guide plate sensor connector [E]
By-pass tray unit connectors [F]
3-112
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[A]
B140R851.WMF
[D]
B140R852.WMF
8. Remove the by-pass feed motor [A] ( x 3,

x 1).
At re-installation, if the tension of the belt [B] is slack, loosen the screw on the
tension bracket [C], move the screw to put more tension on the belt, then
tighten the screw at the new position.
9. Remove the by-pass unit [D] ( x 4).
When removing and installing the by-pass unit:
Make sure that the unit does not catch on any harnesses.
On re-installation, make sure that no harnesses are pinched between the unit
and the machine frame.
You must re-install the by-pass unit with the duplex unit open.
3-113
manuals4you.com
PCBS AND HDD
30 July 2004
3.12 PCBS AND HDD

3.12.1 BCU BOARD (BASE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT)
[A]: BCU board bracket ( x 4)
[A]
B140R853.WMF
[B]: BCU board (
x 4,
x 17)
[B]
B140R854.WMF
NOTE: Make sure that the DIP switch settings on the new board and identical to
the DIP switch settings of the old board.
After replacing this board, execute SP3001-002 (ID Sensor Initialization)
3-114
30 July 2004
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.2 CONTROLLER BOARD

B064 Series: Controller Board
x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment

[A]: Swing-out the PCB unit (
[A]
B140R855.WMF
[B]: Controller cover ( x 9)

[C]: Controller board ( x 2,
x 2)
Pull the controller board out in
the direction of the arrow.
Important:
Remove the NVRAM from the old
controller board and install it on the
new board.
[C]
[B]
B140R856.WMF
3-115
manuals4you.com
PCBS AND HDD
30 July 2004
B140 Series: Controller Board
[A]
[C]
[D]
B140R704.WMF
[E]
[B]
B140R705.WMF
Rear covers (3.3.5)

Controller box cover ( x 12)
[A]: Controller board plate ( x 2)
[B]: Lower covers
[C]: Controller board ( x 2)
[D]: Remove the DIMM from the old controller board, and connect it to the new
board.
[E]: Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board, and connect it to the new
board.
3-116
30 July 2004
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.3 IPU BOARD
Replacement
Adjustment
B064 Series: IPU Board
[B]
[A]
B140R857.WMF

Swing-out the PCB unit (3.12.2)
[A]: PCB unit cover ( x 7)
[B]: IPU board ( x 3,
x 7)
3-117
manuals4you.com
PCBS AND HDD
30 July 2004
B140 Series: IPU, Mother Board
[B]
B140R858.WMF
[A]
B140R807.WMF
[C]
Rear covers (3.3.5)
[A]: Controller box cover ( x 12)
[B]: BCU cover plate ( x 6)
[C]: Controller box door ( x 5)
B140R859.WMF
3-118
30 July 2004
PCBS AND HDD
[B]
[D]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[C]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
B140R860.WMF
Connector cover ( x 2)
Harness ( x 1,
x 1)
IPU cover ( x 5)
IPU board ( x 3,
x 8)
NOTE: Record the positions of the IPU board screws. Attach them at the same
positions when you install the board again.
3-119
manuals4you.com
PCBS AND HDD
30 July 2004
[B]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B140R707.WMF
[D]
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
A1, A2 connector slots assembly ( x 1)

Connector cover ( x 2)
Mother board support plate ( x 5)
Mother board ( x 1)
Mother board DIMM
3-120
30 July 2004
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.4 DEVELOPMENT POWER PACK
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
B140R861.WMF

[A]: Flywheel ( x 3)
[B]: Development power pack (
x 2,
x 3)
NOTE: Mark the bayonet connectors [C], [D] with a felt pen to ensure that they are
not connected incorrectly when the power pack is re-connected.
3-121
manuals4you.com
PCBS AND HDD
30 July 2004
3.12.5 PSU, PFC BOARDS

B064 Series
Rear lower cover ( 3.3.5)
[A]: Harness clamps ( x 3)
[B]: PSU ( x 6,
x 13)
The PSU consists of two PCBs.
[C]: PFC ( x 4,
x 14)
[A]
[B]
[C]
B140R862.WMF
B140 Series PSU

Rear covers (3.3.5)
[A]: PSU (
x 5, x 7)
[A]
3-122
B140R703.WMF
30 July 2004
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.6 HDD
Replacing the NVRAM or the HDD erases documents stored in the document
server. Before replacing either of these items, consult with the customer to
determine the best time to perform the replacement.
Important
It is not necessary to format a replacement hard disk designed for this machine.
B064 Series HDD

Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
[C]
B140R863.WMF

[A]: Controller cover ( x 10)
[B]: HDD bracket ( x 8,
x 4)
[C]: HDD ( x 8)
Do the procedure in Stamp Data Update on page 5-12 to download the stamp
data.
3-123
manuals4you.com
PCBS AND HDD
30 July 2004
B140 Series HDD

[A]
B140R701.WMF
[B]
[C]
Rear covers ( 3.3.5)
B140R702.WMFF

[A]: HDD assembly ( x 3,
x 2)
[B]: HDD bracket ( x 4)
[C]: HDD ( x 4)
Do the procedure in Stamp Data Update on page 5-12 to download the stamp
data.
3-124
30 July 2004
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.7 NVRAM
This machine has an electronic counting device that uses software to monitor the
number of copies. In addition to the electronic counter of the NVRAM on the
controller board, the machine is also equipped with a mechanical counter.
B140 Series
Replacement
Adjustment
B064 Series
[A]
[A]
B140R705.WMF
B140R864.WMF
1. Enter the SP mode and print the SMC report.

Press Clear Modes
.
2. Execute SP5990-001 (All SP Groups) to print an SMC report.
3. Insert the IC card or SD card.
If the machine is a B064 Series machine, remove the slot cover and connect
the flash memory card to the controller board.
-orIf the machine is a B140 Series machine, put the SD card in Slot C3.
4. Execute SP5824 (NVRAM Data Upload) to upload the data to the flash memory
card.
5. Switch the machine off and disconnect the power cord.
6. Remove the NVRAM [A].
Touch a metal surface to discharge any static build up on your hands or tools
before you touch the controller board.
Work carefully when removing the NVRAM to avoid damaging other
components on the controller board or short circuiting the pins of other chips.
3-125
manuals4you.com
PCBS AND HDD
30 July 2004
7. Install the new NVRAM. Make sure that the NVRAM is installed the correct way
around.
8. Connect the power cord and switch the machine on.
9. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5801 (Memory All Clear)
10. Execute SP5825 (NVRAM Download) to download the data uploaded from the
old NVRAM.
11. Switch the machine off then on.
12. Execute SP5990 to print another SMC report. Confirm that all the SP settings
have been initialized.
13. Execute SP3001-002 (ID Sensor Initialization) to initialize the ID sensor.
14. Execute SP5907 (Plug & Play) and enter the brand and model name of the
machine for Windows Plug & Play capability.
15. For details about SP initial settings, see Section 5 Service Tables.
3-126
30 July 2004
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.8 DIMMS
Read this section carefully before installation so you know how to insert the DIMMs
correctly.
[A]
[B]
[C]
B140R865.WMF
1. Hold the ROM DIMM with the edge connector [A] pointing toward the slot and
the notch [B] on the DIMM in the upper right corner.
2. Insert the edge connector [C] into the slot at a 30-degree angle from the
surface of the board.
3. Move the outside edge of the ROM DIMM up and down slightly until it works
into the connector, then gently press it down level with the controller board.
3-127
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
CAUTION
Follow the procedure below to connect the DIMMs to the controller board.
Incorrect insertion can damage the controller board or cause a bad
connection between the DIMM and controller contacts. If the upper contact
is pressed in and bent, the resulting poor connection could cause the
entire system to not operate.
ADF
30 July 2004
3.13 ADF
3.13.1 ADF COVERS
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140R866.WMF
Open the feed cover [A] (
x 1,
x 2, ground wire x 1).
[B]: Front cover ( x 2)

Press down on the tabs to remove.
[C]: Rear cover ( x 2)
Press down on the tabs to remove.
3-128
30 July 2004
ADF
3.13.2 FEED UNIT

[C]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B140R867.WMF
1. Open the feed cover [A].

2. Remove the snap fitting [B].
3. Push the feed unit slowly to the left to disengage the shaft [C] on the right, then
lift it out.
3-129
manuals4you.com
ADF
30 July 2004
3.13.3 FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER

[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
B140R868.WMF
[F]
B140R869.WMF
1. Remove the feed unit ( 3.11.8).

2. Remove the pick-up roller unit [A].
3. Remove the bushings [B].
4. Remove the pick-up roller [C].
NOTE: At re-assembly, make sure that the tab on the front guide plate is above
the pick-up roller.
5. Hold the feed belt holder [D] by the left and right sides, then carefully pull it off
the bushing. Do not let the springs [E] fall.
6. Remove the feed belt [F].
NOTE: When re-assembling, set the pick-up roller springs first, then follow this
procedure in reverse.
3-130
30 July 2004
ADF
3.13.4 SEPARATION ROLLER

[A]
[D]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B140R870.WMF
Open the feed cover.

Feed unit ( 3.11.8)
[A]: Separation roller cover
Use the tip of a screwdriver to push up the cover.
[B]: C-Clamp ( x 1)
[C]: Separation roller
[D]: Torque limiter clutch
3-131
manuals4you.com
ADF
30 July 2004
3.13.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR

[A]
[C]
[B]
B140R872.WMF
B140R871.WMF

Feed unit (3.11.8)
[A]: Guide plate ( x 3)
[B]: Registration sensor bracket (
[C]: Registration sensor (
x 1)
x 1)
3-132
30 July 2004
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
3.13.6 ADF CONTROL BOARD
[A]
B140R873.WMF
Rear cover ( 3.13.1)

[A]: ADF board ( x 2,
x 14)
3-133
manuals4you.com
ADF
30 July 2004
3.13.7 ORIGINAL WIDTH, INTERVAL, AND SKEW CORRECTION

SENSORS
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
B140R874.WMF
[F]
[D]
B140R875.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

Guide plate ( x 3)
Width sensor guide plate ( x 1)
Original width sensors (x 4)
Interval sensor (
x 1)
Skew correction sensor (
x 1)
3-134
30 July 2004
ADF
3.13.8 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

[A]
[C]
[E]
[B]
B140R876.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
Open the original tray.

Lower cover ( x 4)
Original length sensor 1 B5 (
Original length sensor 2 A4 (
Original length sensor 3 LG (
x 1)
x 1)
x 1)
3-135
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
ADF
30 July 2004
3.13.9 DF POSITION AND APS SENSOR
[B]
[C]
[A]
B140R877.WMF
Open the ADF.

ADF rear cover. ( 3.13.1)
[A]: Bracket ( x 1)
[B]: ADF position sensor (
[C]: APS sensor (
x 1)
x 1)
3-136
30 July 2004
ADF
3.13.10 OTHER ADF SENSORS

[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[G]
[H]
B140R879.WMF
[F]
[E]
[D]
B140R878.WMF

Front/rear covers ( x 4) ( 3.13.1)
[A]: C-Clamps ( x 2)
[B]: Original tray (
x 1)
[C]: Bottom plate (
x 1)
[D]: Original set sensor ( x 1)
[E]: Feed cover sensor (
x 1)
[F]: Bottom plate HP sensor (
x 1)
[G]: Pick-up roller HP sensor ( (
x 1)
[H]: Bottom plate position sensor (
x 1)
3-137
manuals4you.com
ADF
30 July 2004
3.13.11 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR
[A]
[B]
B140R880.WMF

[A]: Bottom plate lift motor bracket (harness x 1,
[B]: Bottom plate lift motor ( x 2)
x 1,
3.13.12 FEED MOTOR
[A]
B140R881.WMF
[B]
[A]: Feed motor bracket (
[B]: Feed motor ( x 2)
x 2,
x 1, spring x 1, belt x 1)
3-138
30 July 2004
ADF
3.13.13 EXIT MOTOR AND TRANSPORT MOTOR
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[D]
[C]
B140R882.WMF

Bottom plate lift motor ( 3.13.11)
[A]: Timing belt
[B]: Exit/transport motor unit ( x 3,
[C]: Transport motor ( x 2)
[D]: Exit motor ( x 2)
x 2)
3-139
manuals4you.com
ADF
30 July 2004
3.13.14 PICK-UP ROLLER MOTOR AND HP SENSOR

[A]
[B]
B140R883.WMF

[A]: Pick-up roller lift motor ( x 2,
x 1)
[B]: Pick-up roller HP sensor (
x 1)
3-140
30 July 2004
ADF
3.13.15 CIS POWER SUPPLY BOARD AND CIS UNIT
[B]
[E]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[D]
B140R885.WMF
[F]
[C]
[G]
B140R884.WMF
WARNING
this procedure.
Feed unit ( 3.11.8)
Guide plate (3.11.15)
NOTE: To avoid an accidental static discharge which could damage the circuits of
the CIS power supply board, touch a metal surface before touching the
board.
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Guide plate mylar ( x 1)

CIS power supply board ( x 2,
x 2)
Timing belt
CIS unit ( x 2,
x 3)
Remove the CIS unit carefully to avoid scratching the glass.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty re-installing the CIS unit, you can remove
the two drive gears [E] ( x 1), the separation roller shaft [F] ( x 2),
and cross-stay [G] ( x 4).
3-141
manuals4you.com
ADF
30 July 2004
3.13.16 ADF EXIT SENSOR
[A]
[B]
B140R886.WMF
CIS Power Supply Board (3.13.15)

[A]: Exit sensor bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Exit sensor (
x 1)
3-142
30 July 2004
COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
3.14 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
3.14.1 PRINTING
1. Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these
adjustments.
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3, No. 18 to print the test pattern for
the following procedures.
3. After completing these printing adjustments, be sure to set SP 2-902-3 to 0
again.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. Check the leading edge registration, and adjust it using SP1-001.
Specification: 3 2mm.
2. Check side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust with the
following SP modes.
Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)
Tray 2 (Universal Tray)
Tray 3 (Universal Tray)
Tray 4
By-pass Tray
LCT
Duplex Tray
SP mode
SP1002-001
SP1002-002
SP1002-003
SP1002-004
SP1002-005
SP1002-006
SP1002-007
Specification
01.5
A
Japan Only
01.5
01.5
01.5
B140R887.WMF
3-143
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
These adjustments must be performed after replacing any of the following parts:
Scanner wires
Lens block
Scanner motor
Polygon motor
Tandem tray side fences
Memory All Clear
30 July 2004
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within
specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right edge blank margins, and adjust them with the
following SP modes.
SP2101 Print Erase Margin
Leading Edge
Trailing Edge
Left edge
Right edge
SP mode
SP2101-001
SP2101-002
SP2101-003
SP2101-004
Specification
2.52 mm
C
21.5 mm
A: Trailing edge blank margin

B: Right edge blank margin
C: Leading edge blank margin
D: Left edge blank margin
A
B
B140R888.WMF
Registration Buckle Adjustment

When the customer is using special paper, buckle adjustment may be required if
paper feed problems arise.
If the buckle is too large, this can cause wrinkling, creasing, or Z-fold jams
caused by sheets overtaking the sheets ahead of them in the paper path.
If the buckle is too small, this can cause jams at the registration roller or skew
during paper feed.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Open SP1003.
To prevent wrinkling, creasing, or Z-fold jams, set a smaller value.
To prevent jams at the registration roller or to eliminate skew, set a larger
value.
SP1003-001
SP1003-002
SP1003-003
Registration Buckle Adjustment Tray, LCT

Registration Buckle Adjustment Duplex Tray
Registration Buckle Adjustment By-pass Tray
Adjustment range
Initial value
-9 mm ~ +9 mm (small ~ large buckle)

0 mm (Buckle = 10 mm)
3-144
30 July 2004
3.14.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
NOTE: Use an S-5-S test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a
copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration,
and adjust them with the following SP modes if
necessary.
Replacement
Adjustment
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
B140R889.WMF
SP No.
SP4010
SP4011
Name
Scanner
Leading Edge
Registration
Scanner Sideto-Side
Registration
Initial
0
0
Comment
A positive value shifts the image away from the
leading edge, a negative value shifts it toward
the leading edge.
A positive value shifts the image toward the
right edge, a negative value shifts it toward the
left edge.
Magnification
Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Main Scan Magnification

2. Check magnification, and then SP2909-001 (Main
Scan Magnification - Copy) to adjust magnification if
required. Specification: 2%.
Sub Scan Magnification

2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4008 (Scanner
Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if necessary.
Specification: 0.9%.
3-145
manuals4you.com
B140R890.WMF
A: Main scan magnification
3.14.3
30 July 2004
ADF SCANNING ADJUSTMENTS
Vertical Black Lines

Vertical black lines in scanned images may be caused by dust or scratches on the
ADF exposure glass. If the problem cannot be solved by cleaning the ADF
exposure glass, execute SP4018 (Scanner Optical Axis Adjustment).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Adjust the scanner stopping position with SP4018-003 (just input a new value).
Store this value in the machine with SP4018-004.
Adjust the ADF registration for the front side scan with SP6006-003.
Make a test copy to check that the problem has been solved.
DIP Switch Settings (ADF Main Board)

1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
SW 101
2
3
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Operation Mode
I/F Operation
Free run (Simplex: each sheet stopped for registration)
Free run (Simplex: continuous scanning)
Free run (Duplex: no registration) SP6009 (ADF Free Run)
Not used.
Free run (Entrance mode*1, simplex, no registration)
Free run (Entrance mode, simplex, continuous scanning)
Motor test (feed, transport, exit motors)
*1
: The entrance mode disregards paper size. Skew correction is performed at the scanning roller.
ADF Skew Correction
[A]
B140R891.WMF
If the skew with A4 SEF paper is more than 0.5/200 mm in the main scan direction, you
can adjust the position of the ADF hinge [A] or adjust the appropriate SP codes below.
3-146
6006*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
ADF Registration Adjustment

ADF Horizontal Registration (Front)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front in ADF mode.
[3~+3/0.1 mm]
ADF Horizontal Registration (Back)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the back in ADF mode.
[3~+3/0.1 mm]
ADF Vertical Registration (Front)
Adjusts the vertical registration for the front in ADF mode.
[30 ~+24/1 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+24 = +4.1 mm
ADF Vertical Registration (Back)
Adjusts the vertical registration for the back in ADF mode.
[30 ~+30/1 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+30 = +5.1 mm
ADF Buckle Adjustment 1
Adjusts the roller timing at the skew correction sensor/entrance roller. A larger
setting causes more buckling.
[12.0~+12/1 mm]
-12 = -3.0 mm
+12 = +3.0 mm
Adjusts the roller timing at the interval sensor/scanning roller. A larger setting
causes more buckling.
[8.0~+8/1 mm]
-8 = -2 mm
+8 = +2 mm
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Front)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the front.
[20~+20/1 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Back)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the back.
[20~+20/1 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
NOTE: Normally, the interval sensor detects the leading edge of small originals
(B6, A5, HLT), or originals for duplex copying, and delays the start of the
scanning roller for the prescribed number of pulses to buckle the paper and
correct skew. This feature can be switched on for all paper sizes with
SP6020 (ADF Contact Mode In/Out). However, switching this feature on for
all sizes reduces scanning speed slightly.
3-147
manuals4you.com
Replacement
Adjustment
30 July 2004
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
30 July 2004
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

After clearing the memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working
correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These
items are for design use only. To avoid causing an error, do not touch the
Reset key while doing this procedure.
1. Press
, press
Diagnostics menu.
, and then press
5 times to open the Self-
B140R892.WMF
2. On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust (or press
).
B140R893.WMF
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark
4. Press the lower right mark
after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and
repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press
).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
3-148
30 July 2004
OVERVIEW
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 OVERVIEW
Troubleshooting
This section contains the troubleshooting procedures for the B064 Series and B140
Series machines. A full list of SC codes is given for each series. When you do
troubleshooting on a machine, refer to the correct table:
B064 Series SC Code Table: Section 4.2
B140 Series SC Code Table: Section 4.3
Important:
The general information in this Overview section applies to the B064 Series and
B140 Series machines.
The information in section 4.4 Other Problems (B064/B140 Series) also applies
to all the machines of the two series.
4-1
manuals4you.com
OVERVIEW
30 July 2004
4.1.1 RECOVERY METHODS

When an error occurs during downloading, an error code is displayed on the
operation panel.
If the download procedure can be re-started, re-start the download procedure.
If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for other than the GW
controller, replace the board where the downloaded program is stored.
If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for the GW controller, set DIP
SW 1 to ON. Power the machine off and on to start the downloading program.
After downloading has completed, set the DIP SW to OFF then power the
machine off and on again.
4.1.2 IMPORTANT SP CODES

SP5802
Free Run Mode
SP5803
Input Check
SP5804
Output Check
SP5990
SMC Printout
SP7801
ROM Version
Display.
Self-Diagnostic
Result Display
Firmware Version
SP7832
SP7911 (B064)
SP7801 (B140)
SP7990 (B064)
SP7403 (B140)
Status of Issued SC
Execute this SP to force base engine to run in

the free run mode for testing.
Displays the signals received from sensors and
switches. Refer to the detailed tables in 4.
Service Tables.
Switches electrical components one by one for
testing. Refer to the detailed tables in 4.
Service Tables.
Prints the SMC Report. Some SC codes
(logged SPs) are shown only in the SMC Report
and do not show on the operation panel display.
(4.3.5)
Displays the version number of the main
machine and connected peripherals.
Execute this SP to display a list of error codes.
No errors have occurred if nothing is displayed.
Displays the current numbers of all versions of
the firmware in the system.
Execute to display the following information
about the most recently issued SC: 1) Source
file name, 2) SC number, 3) Result
NOTE: For more information about these and other SP codes, see 4. Service
Tables.
4-2
30 July 2004
OVERVIEW
4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES

Display
Reboot after
card insert E01
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Details
Controller ROM update error 1
When the update break data is stored
in NVRAM, the break module
information and the decompression
module capable of writing do not
match.
Controller ROM update error 2.
Error occurs during ROM update
program initialization.
The ROM for the write operation does
not exist.
02
Download Error E02

Power off/on
03
Download Error E03

Power off/on
04
Download Error E04

Power off/on

GZIP data confirmation fails. (CRC
value check)
05
Download Error E05

Power off/on

Error occurs when writing to the
device.
06
Download Error E06

Power off/on
Download Error E19

Power off/on
Down Error E20
Power Off/On

Schedule data is unclear.
System error 1 (+SC991)
The physical address cannot be
mapped. Software/hardware is
defective
There is not sufficient memory to
download.
19
20
21
Download Error E21

Power Off/On
CPU clock error.
4-3
manuals4you.com
Recovery
Use the correct card
Cycle the machine

off/on to rewrite
Cycle the machine
off/on
Install the missing
ROM DIMM
Cycle the machine
off/on
Set DIP SW 1 to ON
and retry
Replace RAM DIMM
Replace controller
board
Cycle the machine
off/on
Set DIP SW 1 to ON
and retry
Replace RAM DIMM
Replace controller
board
Turn the machine
power off/on.
Set controller DIPSW1 to ON to force the
machine to write to
ROM.
If you cannot force
the machine to write,
replace the controller
board.
Software defective
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
Replace controller
board
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try.
Replace RAM
Replace the controller
board
Troubleshooting
01
OVERVIEW
30 July 2004
Display
Download Error E22
Module ID
Card No xx/xx
Details
Data fails to decompress. Card
defective.
SC991
System error 4
Selfupdate does not execute.
Software defective.
23
Download Error E24

Power Off/On
System error 5
Card read/write error. Software or card
defective.
30
No Valid Data E30
31
Reboot After Card

Insert E31
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Reboot After Card
Insert E32
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download dysfunction 1
Print download is not possible. Cannot
download to HDD because HDD not
installed or defective.
Download continuity error with more
than one card. The second or later
card is not compatible.
Download interrupted because card is
not correct, or power failure interrupted
download.
22
32
33
No Valid Data E33
34
No Valid Data E34
35
No Valid Data E35
36
No Valid Data E36
37
No Valid Data E37
40
Download Error E40

Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download Error E41
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
41
Card version error. Attempted to
download program using a card with
the wrong version number.
Specification error. DOM card set in
EXP machine, or vice versa.
Wrong model. The inserted card is for
another model.
Module error. The program that you
are attempting to download does not
exist on the machine, or the contact
points at the card and the machine slot
are not connected.
Edit option card error. You attempted
to employ a used card.
Download result failure 1
Engine download failure.
Fax download failure.
4-4
Recovery
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try.
Replace card
Replace controller
board
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
Set DIP SW 1 to ON
and re-try
board
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
Replace the card
board
HDD defective
HDD harness
disconnected,
defective
Set the correct cards
in the correct order

If power failure
caused the failure,
remove the card and
insert another.

Use the correct card,
inserted correctly
Install a ROM DIMM if
none is installed
Use an unused card
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
30 July 2004
43
44
Display
Download Error E42
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download Error E43
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download Error E44
Module ID Card No.
50
No Valid Data E50
51
(no display)
52
(no display)
53
(no display)
Details
Operation panel or language download
failed. For this error, sometimes the
message may not be displayed.
Print download failed.
Recovery
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try

The data targeted for the write
operation could not be accessed.
Turn the machine

power off/on.
Replace the SD card
with the start-up SD
card that has the
source data
Set controller DIPSW1 to ON to force the
machine to write
If you cannot force
the machine to write,
replace the controller
board.
Use the correct SD
card.
Download invalid
The source data for the update could
not be authenticated.
Remote ROM update failure 1
The source data for the ROM update is
corrupted because the machine is
operating and an SC code has been
issued.
Remote ROM update failure 2
The source data received for the ROM
update is corrupted; it failed a SUM
check due to its abnormal length.
The previous download in progress
was cancelled.
4-5
manuals4you.com
Cycle the machine

off/on and re-try
Turn the machine

power off/on and try
again.
Try again with the

correct data.
Do the download
procedure again.
Troubleshooting
42
OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
30 July 2004
4.1.4 JAM DETECTION

SENSOR LOCATIONS
The flashing portion of the jam position display on the operation panel indicates the
location of the paper jam, then lights if any paper remains after jam removal.
However, paper may remain in the paper path at locations other than where the
jam was removed.
The illustration below shows the locations of the jam sensors.
Paper exit sensor
Exit unit entrance sensor
Fusing unit paper exit sensor
Hot roller
Transfer belt
OPC
Duplex entrance
sensor
Duplex inverter
exit sensor
Duplex transport
sensors 1, 2, 3
Reverse trigger roller
Registration sensor
Relay sensor
Paper feed sensor 1
Transport sensor 1
Tray 1
Paper feed sensor 2
Transport sensor 2
Tray 2
Paper feed sensor 3
Transport sensor 3
Tray 3
B064T429.WMF
4-6
30 July 2004
OVERVIEW
4.1.5 TIMING CHARTS

Feed, Transport, Feed Out: Face-up
Paper feed motor
(1)
Paper feed sensor
Vertical transport sensor
(3)
(2)
(4)
Lower Relay motor
(5)
(6)
Relay sensor
(7)
(8)
Troubleshooting
Registration sensor
Registration motor
(9)
Fusing unit paper exit
sensor
(10)
(12)
(11)
Paper exit sensor
B064T430.WMF
(1):
(2):
Paper feed motor ON Paper feed sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
Paper feed motor ON Vertical transport sensor does not switch ON at the correct
time.
(3): Vertical transport sensor ON Paper feed sensor does not switch OFF at the correct
time.
(4): Vertical transport sensor ON Vertical transport sensor does not switch OFF at the
correct time.
(5): Lower relay motor ON Relay sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(6): Vertical transport sensor OFF Relay sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(7): Relay sensor ON Registration sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(8): Relay sensor OFF Registration sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(9): Registration motor ON Fusing unit paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the
correct time.
(10): Fusing unit paper exit sensor ON Exit unit entrance sensor does not switch ON at the
correct time.
(11): Exit unit entrance sensor ON Paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct
time.
(12): Registration motor OFF Paper exit sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
4-7
manuals4you.com
OVERVIEW
30 July 2004
Transport, Inverter, Feed Out: Face-down

Registration sensor
Fusing unit paper exit
sensor
(1)
(3)
(2)
Duplex entrance sensor
(4)
Inverter exit sensor
(5)
(6)
Paper exit sensor
(1):
(2):
(3):
(4):
(5):
(6):
From the registration sensor to the fusing unit exit, jam detection is the same as face-up
feed out.
Exit unit entrance sensor ON Duplex entrance sensor does not switch OFF at the
correct time.
Registration sensor OFF Duplex entrance sensor does not switch OFF at the correct
time.
Duplex entrance sensor ON Inverter exit sensor does not switch OFF at the correct
time.
Inverter exit sensor ON Paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
Duplex entrance sensor OFF Paper exit sensor does not switch OFF at the correct
time. (Paper remains at the duplex unit exit.)
4-8
manuals4you.com
B064T431.WMF
30 July 2004
OVERVIEW
Duplex Transport
Duplex entrance sensor
Inverter Exit sensor
Duplex transport sensor 1
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Relay sensor
(1):
(2):
(3):
(4):
(5):
(6):
(7):
Duplex entrance sensor ON Inverter exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct
time.
Inverter exit sensor ON Duplex transport sensor 1 does not switch on at the correct
time.
Duplex transport sensor 1 ON Duplex transport sensor 2 does not switch on at the
correct time.
Duplex entrance sensor ON Duplex transport sensor 2 does not switch OFF at the
correct time.
Duplex transport sensor 2 ON Duplex transport sensor 3 does not switch ON at the
correct time.
Duplex transport sensor 2 OFF Duplex transport sensor 3 does not switch OFF at the
correct time.
Duplex transport sensor 3 ON Relay sensor does not switch on at the correct time.
4-9
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
B064T432.WMF
OVERVIEW
30 July 2004
4.1.6 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

Here are some important points to keep in mind when downloading software:
If an error interrupts download processing, the machine cannot operate normally
with the program software only partially downloaded.
When download processing execution starts, Downloading is displayed and
when downloading has completed successfully, the message is cleared.
If the download is interrupted when the Downloading message is displayed,
the machine does not attempt a re-try.
The program that downloads firmware from an IC card is part of the GW
controller software. If downloading this software is interrupted, the program
stored in the machine may be corrupted. Because of this, it may not be possible
to restart the downloading program. (In addition, if the GW controller software
cannot be downloaded, other software on other IC cards cannot be downloaded.)
However, it may be possible to restart the program without replacing the board
by setting DIP SW 1 on the controller to ON, and re-starting.
4-10
30 July 2004
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.2 B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE

4.2.1 B064 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
C
D
Definition
Reset Procedure
Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation panel.

The machine is disabled. The user cannot reset the
SC.
SCs that disable only the features that use the
defective item. Although these SCs are not shown
to the user under normal conditions, they are
displayed on the operation panel only when the
defective feature is selected.
SCs that are not shown on the operation panel.
They are internally logged.
Turning the operation switch or main power switch
off then on resets SCs Displayed on the operation
panel. These are re-displayed if the error occurs
again.
Enter SP mode, then turn the

main power switch off and on.
Turn the main power switch off
and on.
Logging only
Turn the operation switch or
main power switch off and on.
NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then
reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.

2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before
replacing motors or sensors.
3) When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode, the display does not
indicate the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the
SP mode. This does not apply to Level B codes.
4-11
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
Level
30 July 2004
4.2.2 B064 SERIES SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

SC100: Scanning System
SC No.
101
D
120
121
122
Symptom
Exposure Lamp Error
At trigger on, the lamp was not
detected on.
Possible Cause
Scanner home position error 1

The scanner HP sensor does not
detect the on condition during
initialization or copying.

detect the off condition during

The scanner home position sensor
does not detect the on condition
during original scanning.
4-12
Exposure lamp defective

Lamp regulator defective
Exposure lamp connector defective
Dirty standard white plate
Dirty scanner mirror or scanner mirror out
of position
SBU board defective
SBU connector defective
IPU defective
BCU, SDRB (Scanner Driver Board)
defective.
Scanner motor defective
Harness between BCU, SDRB, scanner
motor disconnected.
Scanner HP sensor defective.
Harness between scanner HP sensor
and BCU disconnected.
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, carriage
installation incorrect.
defective.
Scanner motor defective.
motor disconnected.
defective.
motor disconnected.
SC No.
123
D
143
144
181

Symptom
does not detect the off condition
SBU auto adjust error

Automatic adjustment of the SBU
fails when the machine is switched
on.
SBU transmission error

After the SBU switches on, the
BCU detects one of the following
conditions on the SBU:
1 s after power on, the SYDI
signal does not go high, even
after 1 retry.
signal goes high, but the SBU ID
could not be read after 3
attempts.
CIS lamp abnormal
After the CIS lamp trigger goes on,
the CIS lamp is not detected on.
Detecting the lamp on or off
determines the peak white level
value for shading correction. (If the
peak level is determined to be
below a certain level, the CIS lamp
is judged to be off.)
Possible Cause
defective.
motor disconnected.
Exposure lamp defective.
Exposure lamp regulator defective.
Harness between exposure lamp and
lamp regulator is disconnected.
White plate installed incorrectly or is
dirty.
Scanning mirrors of the exposure unit are
dirty or out of position.
SBU board defective.
VIB board defective.
Harness between SBU, VIB
disconnected.
Harness between VIB, BCU
disconnected.
IPU defective
BCU defective
SBU defective.
VIB defective
Harness (40-pin shielded) between the
SBU, VIB is disconnected.
Harness (shielded cable) between the
VIB, BCU is disconnected.
IPU defective
CIS lamp defective.

CIS power supply board defective.
Harness between lamp and power supply
board is disconnected.
Harness between CIS, ADF is
disconnected.
CIS exposure glass dirty.
White roller dirty or installed incorrectly.
CIS unit defective.
PSU defective
4-13
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
30 July 2004

SC No.
183
D
184
30 July 2004
Symptom
CIS auto adjust error
Automatic adjustment of the CIS
unit failed.
CIS transmission error

When the CIS is powered on, the
ADF detects one of the following
abnormal conditions on the CIS
unit:
The SOUT signal does not go
high within 1 s after power on.
The SOUT signal goes high
within 1 s after power on, but the
SBU ID cannot be read after 3
attempts.
4-14
Possible Cause
CIS unit defective.

White roller dirty or installed incorrectly.
PSU power supply (+5V, 12V) is
abnormal.
IPU defective
CIS unit defective.
Harness between the CIS, ADF is
disconnected.
PSU power (5V) is abnormal.
BCU, IPU defective
30 July 2004
SC300: Image Development System (1)
303
305
306
Symptom
Charge corona output error
The feedback voltage from the
charge corona unit is detected too
high 9 times.
Charge corona grid leak
When the high voltage is output to
the corona grid, feedback voltage
exceeds the prescribed value 9
times.
Charge corona wire cleaner error 1
The charge corona wire cleaner
motor is detected:
Motor locks within 4 s after
switching on, or does not lock
within 30 s.
Motor locks within 10 s after
reversing, or does not lock within
30 s.
The current at the charge corona
motor is detected less than 83 mA.
Possible Cause
Charge corona power pack defective
Charge corona harness disconnected
Poor charge corona unit connection
Charge corona wire cleaner motor
defective
BCU board defective

connector is defective or not connected.
When SC310~SC317 are logged, the machine halts without displaying the SC number. These SC
codes log an abnormal condition at the potential sensor only when SP3901 (Auto Process Control)
is set to on.
SC No.
310
C
311
Symptom
Potential sensor calibration error 1
During drum potential sensor
calibration, the drum potential
sensor output voltage does not
meet specification when test
voltages (100V, 800V) are
applied to the drum.
Possible Cause
Potential sensor defective
Potential sensor harness disconnected
Potential sensor connector defective or
disconnected
BCU defective
OPC connector defective
Development power pack defective
disconnected
BCU defective
4-15
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
300
D

SC No.
312
C
314
315
316
317
321
30 July 2004
Symptom
calibration when adjusting the drum
potential (VD), the drum potential
sensor detects VD higher than VG
(grid voltage).
-orWhen adjusting VD (drum surface
potential of black areas after
exposure), even after 5 adjustments
of VG (charge corona grid
potential), VD could not be set in
the target range (80010 + VL +
130V)
potential (VH) for LD power
adjustment, the first time the VH
pattern is made, the drum potential
sensor detects that VH is more than
500V:
VH > |500 + VL + 130| V
calibration, when 100V is applied
to the drum, the output value is out
of the prescribed range.


calibration, when VL is adjusted, the
pattern surface potential VL pattern
is not within range 0V ~ 400V. (VL
is the potential after exposing a
white pattern.)
Possible Cause
disconnected
BCU defective
Charge corona unit worn out, dirty

disconnected
BCU defective
LD defective
disconnected
BCU defective
disconnected
BCU defective

disconnected
BCU defective
No laser writing signal (F-GATE) error 1
The laser writing signal (F-GATE)
IPU board defective
for the IPU does not go LOW within PCI bus between controller board, IPU
60 s.
board defective
4-16
SC No.
322
D
335
336
337
338
340

Symptom
Laser synchronization detector error
After the polygon motor reaches
standard rotation speed and the LD
unit fires for 500 ms, the laser
synchronization detector does not
generate a signal.
Polygonal mirror motor error 1

The ready signal does not go low
within 20 s after the polygonal
mirror motor turns on or changes
speed of rotation.
The ready signal does not go high
mirror motor turns off.

The XSCRDY signal goes high
while the polygonal mirror motor
turns on, even though there was no
demand for either turning off the
motor or changing the motor speed.
During exposure, while the polygon
motor is rotating, the XSCRDY
signal goes high.
TD sensor output error

TD sensor output voltage (Vt),
measured during each copy cycle,
is detected 10 times at one of the
following levels:
Vt = 0.5 volts or lower
Vt = 4.0 volts or higher
Possible Cause
Harness between detector and I/F
disconnected or damaged
Detector is installed incorrectly.
Detector board is defective
Controller board defective
IPU board defective
LDB defective
Harness between I/F and polygon motor
disconnected or defective
Polygon motor or polygon motor driver
defective
IPU board defective
defective
IPU board defective
Harness between the polygon motor and
I/F disconnected or defective.
defective
IPU board defective
defective
IPU board defective
TD sensor defective
TD sensor harness disconnected
TD sensor connector disconnected or
defective
BCU defective
Toner bottle motor defective
Note: When the TD sensor is defective, the
toner supply is controlled using pixel
count and the ID sensor.
4-17
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
30 July 2004

SC No.
341
C
342
345
350
351
30 July 2004
Symptom
TD sensor adjustment error 1
During the TD sensor auto
adjustment, the TD sensor output
voltage (Vt) is 2.5 volts or higher
even though the control voltage is
set to the minimum value (PWM =
0)
When this error occurs, SP2-906-1
reads 0.00V.
Note: This SC is released only after
correct adjustment of the TD sensor
has been achieved. Switching the
machine off and on will cancel the
SC display, but does not release ID
sensor toner supply.
voltage (Vt) does not enter the
target range (3.0 0.1V) within 20
s.
When this error occurs, the
indication of SP2-906-1 reads
0.00V.
correct adjustment of the TD
sensor has been achieved.
Switching the machine off
and on will cancel the SC
display, but does not release
ID sensor toner supply.
Development output abnormal
The high voltage applied to the
development unit is detected 10
times higher than the upper limit
(45%) of PWM.
ID sensor error 1
One of the following ID sensor
output voltages was detected twice
consecutively when checking the ID
sensor pattern.
Vsp 2.5V
Vsg < 2.5
Vsp = 0V
Vsg = 0
ID sensor error 2
The ID sensor output voltage is
5.0V and the PWM signal input to
the ID sensor is 0 when checking
the ID sensor pattern.
4-18
Possible Cause
TD sensor defective
defective
BCU defective
TD sensor defective
defective
BCU defective

Development bias connection defective
Development bias connector
ID sensor defective
ID sensor harness disconnected
ID sensor connector defective
BCU defective
Defect at ID sensor pattern writing
Charge power pack defective
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
BCU defective
Defect during ID sensor pattern writing
ID sensor dirty
30 July 2004
353
354
355
Symptom
ID sensor error 3
For 2 s during the ID sensor pattern
check, the ID sensor pattern edge
voltage is not 2.5V or the pattern
edge is not detected within 800 ms.
ID sensor error 4
output voltages is detected at ID
sensor initialization.
Vsg < 4.0V when the maximum
PWM input (255) is applied to the
ID sensor.
Vsg 4.0V when the minimum
ID sensor.
ID sensor error 5
20 s after the start of automatic
adjustment, Vsg cannot be adjusted
to target (4.0 0.2V).
ID sensor pattern voltage error

Drum potential sensor output is out
of the target range (-100 - -400V)
when reading the drum voltage for
Possible Cause
ID sensor defective
BCU defective
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
BCU defective
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
BCU defective
ID sensor dirty
Drum potential sensor defective

Drum potential sensor harness
disconnected
Drum potential sensor connector
defective
IOB defective
Charge corona wire dirty
4-19
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
352
C
30 July 2004

SC No.
401
D
402
430
440
441
490
495
496
497
Symptom
Transfer output abnormal
When the transfer is output, the
feedback voltage remains higher
than 4V for 60 ms.
Possible Cause
Transfer power pack defective

Poor connection between the transfer
current terminal and the transfer power
pack
Transfer output abnormal release detection
When the transfer is output, there is Transfer power pack defective
hardly any feedback voltage within
Transfer unit harness disconnected
60 ms even with application of 24% Transfer connector disconnected,
PWM.
defective
Quenching lamp error
At the completion of auto process
Quenching lamp defective
control initialization, the potential of Quenching lamp harness disconnected
the drum surface detected by the
Quenching lamp connector disconnected
potential sensor is more than
or defective
400V, the prescribed value.
Main motor lock
The main motor lock signal remains Too much load on the drive mechanism
low for 2 seconds while the main
Main motor defective
motor is on.
Development motor lock
The development motor lock signal
Too much load on the drive mechanism
remains high for 2 seconds while
Development motor defective
the development motor is on.
Main fan abnormal
The main fan motor lock signal
Too much load on the motor, motor is
goes high for 5 s while the fan is
blocked by something
on.
Fan connector disconnected
Toner recycling unit error
Encoder pulse does not change for Too much load on the drive mechanism
3 s after the main motor switches
Toner end sensor detective,
on.
disconnected
Toner collection bottle error
The toner collection bottle set
No toner collection bottle set
switch remains off when the front
Poor connection on the switch connector
door is closed.
Toner collection motor error
The toner collection motor
Toner collection motor defective
connector set signal remains off for Motor connector disconnected
1 s.
4-20
30 July 2004
SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, and Fusing Systems
502
503
504
507
510
Symptom
Tray 1 lift malfunction
The lift sensor is not activated
within 10 seconds after the tray
lift motor starts lifting the bottom
plate.
Paper height sensor actuator
does not move away from the
sensor for 4 counts.
plate.
Paper height sensor actuator
does not move away from the
sensor for 4 counts.
within 13 s after the tray lift motor
starts lifting the bottom plate.
At power on, or when the tray set
sensor goes on after tray inserted,
the tray continues to lower for 5 s.
The motor stops but restarts when
the tray is re-inserted.
Japan only.
LCT feed motor malfunction
One of the following conditions is
detected:
The LD signal from the feed
motor is detected abnormal for
50 ms after the motor switches
on.
At power on, the motor is
detected loose or disconnected.
LCT tray malfunction
detected:
When the bottom plate is lifted,
the upper limit sensor does not
come on for 18 s.
When the bottom plate is
lowered, the lower limit sensor
does not come on for 18 s.
After lift begins, the upper limit
sensor does not switch on before
the pick-up solenoid switches on.
The paper end sensor switches
on during lift and the upper limit
sensor does not switch on for 2.5
s, and a message prompts user
to reset paper.
Possible Cause
Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
Paper or other obstacle trapped between
tray and motor
Pick-up solenoid disconnected or
blocked by an obstacle

tray and motor
Tray lift motor defective or poor

connection
Lift sensor defective or poor connection
Feed motor defective

Feed motor connector disconnected
Obstacle interfering with operation of
motor
Tray lift motor defective or connector

disconnected
Lift sensor defective or disconnected
Pick-up solenoid defective or
disconnected
Paper end sensor defective
4-21
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
501
B

SC No.
B
515
516
520
521
541
542
543
544
30 July 2004
Symptom
Tandem rear fence motor error
One of the conditions is detected:
The rear fence does not reach
the return position within 10 s
after the rear fence motor
switches on, or does not return to
the HP.
The HP sensor and return sensor
switch on at the same time.
Tandem side fence motor error
The side fences do not reach the
fully open or closed position within
2 seconds after the side fence
motor switches on.
Possible Cause
Rear fence motor defective or poor
connection
tray and motor
Motor mechanical overload
Return sensor or HP sensor defective or
dirty
Side fence motor defective or poor

connection
Motor mechanical overload
Side fence positioning sensor defective
or dirty
Duplex jogger motor error 1

When the jogger fence moves to
Paper or other obstacle has jammed
the home position, the jogger HP
mechanism
sensor does not turn on even if the
Sensor connector disconnected or
jogger fence motor has moved the
defective
jogger fence 153.5 mm.
Sensor defective
When the jogger fence moves from Paper or other obstacle has jammed
the home position, the jogger fence
mechanism
HP sensor does not turn off even if
the jogger motor has moved the
defective
Sensor defective
Fusing thermistor open
The fusing temperature detected Thermistor open
by the thermistor is below 7C for Thermistor connector defective
35 seconds.
Thermistor damaged or warped
The center thermistor (non Fusing temperature 15% less than the
contact) abnormal.
standard input voltage
Fusing temperature warm-up error
After power on, or after closing
Fusing lamp disconnected
the front door, the hot roller does Thermistor warped or installed incorrectly
not reach the 80C control
Thermostat operating
temperature within 360 s.
After the fusing lamp
temperature exceeds 80C,
temperature does not change 2
degrees within 20 s.
Fusing lamp overheat error 1 (software)
Central thermistor detected a
PSU defective
BCU defective
temperature of 230C at the
center of the hot roller.
End thermistor detected 220C x
100 ms 5 times at the end of the
hot roller.
Fusing lamp overheat error 1 (hardware)
The BCU detects an overheat error PSU defective
even if the protection in the
BCU defective
software does not work.
4-22
SC No.
545
A
547
550
590
599

Symptom
Fusing lamp overheat error 2
After hot roller reaches the warmup temperature, the fusing lamps
continued full capacity output for 55
s without the hot roller rotating (for
a total of 45s).
Zero cross signal malfunction
detected 10 times:
When the main switch is on, the
frequency measured by the
number of zero cross signals for
500 ms is larger than 66Hz or
smaller than 45 Hz.
The interval between one zero
cross signal and the next is 7.5
ms or shorter 3 times
consecutively for 500 ms.
Fusing Web End
Web end detected 5 times within
500 ms and web motor continues to
rotate 40 s. If web end is detected
for another 400 ms, then the SC is
logged.
Possible Cause
Fusing thermistor out of position
Noise on the ac power line
Web end (requires replacement)

Web end sensor defective
Note: After replacing the web with a new
one, reset SP1902 001 to 0 to
release SC550.

The toner collection motor sensor
output does not change for 3
seconds while the toner collection
motor is on.
Toner collection motor defective

Motor drive defective
Toner collection motor sensor connector
defective
Motor overload
1-bin Exit Motor Error (should only occur in Japanese models)
The transport lock sensor output
Motor overload
does not change within 300 ms
Motor drive defective
after the motor switches on.
4-23
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
SC600: Data Communication

SC No.
601
D
610
611
612
620
621
623
624
626
627
630
Symptom
Possible Cause
Communication error between BCU and scanner unit
BCU does not communicate with Serial line connection unstable
scanner unit within 0.8 s after
External noise on the line
power on.
BCU does not detect a break
signal after connecting to
scanner unit.
Communication error detected 3
times.
BCU ADF communication/timeout abnormal
After 1 data frame is sent to the
Serial line connection unstable
ADF, an ACK signal is not received External noise on the line
within 100 ms, and is not received
after 3 retries.
BCU ADF communication/break reception abnormal
During communication a break
(Low) signal was received from the
Harness disconnected or defective
ADF.
BCU ADF communication/command abnormal
An command that cannot be
A software error, result of an abnormal
executed was sent from the main
procedure.
machine to the ADF.
BCU ADF communication/timeout error
finisher MBX, an ACK signal is not
received within 100 ms, and is not
received after 3 retries.
BCU Finisher communication/break error
During communication with the
finisher MBX, the BCU received a
break (Low) signal from the finisher.
BCU Tray 1~3 communication/timeout error
trays, an ACK signal is not received External noise on the line
after 3 retries.
BCU Tray 1~3 communication/break reception error
finisher trays, the BCU received a
break (Low) signal.
BCU LCT communication/timeout error
LCT, an ACK signal is not received
after 3 retries.
BCU LCT communication/break reception error
LCT, the BCU received a break
(Low) signal.
CSS (RSS) communication error between line adapter and CSS center
Japan only
4-24
SC No.
632
B
633
634
635
640
641
670
672
690
691
692

Symptom
Key/card counter device error 1
device, an ACK signal is not

device, the BCU received a break

(Low) signal.
After installation of the device, a
message alerts user to a backup
RAM error.
After installation of the device a
message alerts user to a battery
voltage abnormal error.

BCU Controller data transfer error 1
Data is sent from the BCU to the
controller, but the transmission

causes a checksum error.
BCU Controller data transfer error 2
Data is sent from the BCU to the
controller, but the transmission

causes a frame error.
Engine startup error
Engine does not respond within
30 s after power on.
Engine down detected suddenly
during power on and warmup.

Controller startup error
After power on the line between
the controller and the operation
panel does not open for normal
operation.
After normal startup,

communication with the
controller ceases.
GAVD Block 12 bus error
The register for this block is set for
an error.
GAVD FCI Block I2 bus error
an error.
CDIC GAVD Block I2 bus error
an error.
Possible Cause
The serial line from the device to the
copier is unstable, disconnected, or
defective.
The serial line from the device to the

copier is unstable, disconnected, or
defective.
Device control board defective
Device control board backup battery
defective
Device control board defective
Device control board backup battery
defective
The error is logged but the machine can
continue to operate.
The error is logged but the machine can

continue to operate.
BCU installation incorrect

BCU defective
Sudden communication reset occurred
between the BCU and the controller.
Controller stalled
Controller installed incorrectly
Operation panel harness disconnected or
defective
IPU defective
IPU defective
IPU defective
4-25
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
SC700: Peripherals
SC No.
700
D
701
720
722
724
725
726
Symptom
ADF original pick-up error 1
Pick-up roller HP sensor signal
does not change after the pick-up
motor has turned on.
ADF bottom plate motor error
Bottom plate position sensor
does not detect the plate after
the bottom plate lift motor
switches on to lift the plate.
Bottom plate HP sensor does not
detect the plate after the bottom
plate motor reverses to lower the
plate.
Finisher transport motor error
The encoder pulse of the transport
motor does not change state
(high/low) within 600 ms and does
not change after 2 retries.
Finisher jogger motor error
The finisher jogger HP sensor
remains de-activated for more
1,000 pulses when returning to
home position.
remains activated for more than
1,000 pulses when moving away
from home position.
Finisher staple hammer motor error
Stapling does not finish within 450
ms after the staple hammer motor
switches on and the stapler jams.
Stapler is released from the reverse
lock status. If the stapler does not
operate within 450 ms, even in the
reverse lock position, then the SC
is logged.
Finisher stack feed-out motor error
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor
does not activate within the
prescribed number of pulses after
the stack feed-out motor turns on
and does not activate after 2
retries.
Finisher upper tray lift motor error
The paper height sensor does not
activate within the prescribed time
after the upper tray lift motor turns
on, or the sensor remains on after
the motor reverses to lower the
tray.
4-26
Possible Cause
Pick-up roller HP sensor defective

Pick-up motor defective
Timing belt slipping, out of position
ADF main board defective
Bottom plate position sensor defective

Bottom plate HP sensor defective
Bottom plate motor defective
Finisher transport motor defective

Transport motor harness disconnected,
or defective
Finisher main board defective
Jogger HP sensor defective

Jogger mechanism overload
Jogger motor defective (not rotating)
Staple jam
Stapler operation overload
Staple hammer motor defective
Motor connector disconnected, or
defective
Stack feed-out HP sensor defective

Stack feed-out motor defective
Motor overload
Upper tray paper height sensor defective

Sensor harness disconnected, defective
Tray lift motor defective
Tray lift motor overload
30 July 2004
729
730
732
733
735
736
Symptom
Finisher stapler rotation motor error
The stapler motor switches on but
the motor does not return to the
home position within the prescribed
number of pulses. After 2 counts,
the SC is logged as a jam.
Finisher punch motor error
The punch HP sensor does not
the punch motor turns on.
Possible Cause
Stapler rotation motor defective

Poor stapler rotation motor connection
Stapler rotation sensor defective
Rotation motor overload
Punch HP sensor defective

Punch motor defective
Poor punch motor overload
Finisher stapler movement motor error
The stapler HP sensor does
Stapler HP sensor defective
after the stapler motor turns on and Stapler movement motor defective
moves the stapler away from home Finisher main board defective
position. After 2 counts, the SC is
Stapler movement motor overload
logged as a jam.
Finisher shift roller motor error
The shift roller HP sensor does not
Shift roller HP sensor defective
after the shift roller motor turns on.
Shift roller motor defective
After 2 counts, the SC is logged as
a jam.
Shift roller motor overload
Finisher lower tray lift motor error
After the lift motor switches on to lift Paper height sensor 1 or 2 defective
the tray, paper height sensor 2
does not detect the top of the paper Tray lift motor defective
stack, or after the motor reverses to Finisher main board defective
lower the stack the top of the stack
remains detected (the status of
paper height sensor 1 does not
change). After 2 counts, the SC is
logged as a jam.
Finisher pre-stack motor error
The pre-stack motor starts but
does not return to the home
Sensor harnesses disconnected,
position within 400 pulses. After
defective
2 counts, the SC is logged as a
Pre-stack motor defective
jam.
Motor does not return to the
Pre-stack motor overload
home position within 280 pulses
immediately before or after prestacking. After 2 counts, the SC
is logged as a jam.
Finisher paper exit guide plate motor error
The paper exit guide plate motor
Guide plate HP sensor defective
starts but the paper exit guide plate Sensor harness disconnected, defective
HP sensor does not activate within
Paper exit guide plate motor defective
750 ms. After 2 counts, the SC is
logged as a jam.
Guide plate motor overload.
4-27
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
727
B

SC No.
737
B
738
739
740
741
742
743
750
30 July 2004
Symptom
Trimmed staple waste hopper full
The hopper that holds the waste
from staple trimming is full.
Finisher pressure plate motor error
The pressure plate motor switches
on but does not return to the home
position within the prescribed time
after 2 counts.
Finisher folder plate motor error
The folder plate motor turns on but
the plate does not return to the
time for 2 counts.
Possible Cause
Staple waste hopper full
Staple waste sensor defective
HP sensor defective
Harness disconnected, defective
Motor defective
Motor overload
Plate HP sensor defective

Folder plate motor defective
Folder plate motor overload
Finisher front saddle-stitch stapler motor error
Saddle-stitch stapler motor fails to
HP sensor defective
operate within 450 ms within 2
counts..
Stapler motor defective
Stapler motor overload
Finisher rear saddle-stitch stapler motor error
HP sensor defective
counts..
Finisher jogger side fence motor error
The jogger motor turns on but the
HP sensors defective
side fences to not return to the
home position within 340 pulses for Motor defective
2 counts.
Motor overload
Finisher Jogger Motor Error
The jogger fences did not return to
Jogger lift sensor or jogger fence sensor
their horizontal home positions on
connectors disconnected, loose, or
both ends of the unit, or to their
damaged.
down home positions within the
Jogger lift sensor or jogger fence sensor
prescribed number of pulses. Only
is defective.
staple mode is disabled. Shift
Main harness connection loose or broken.
output, or output to the proof tray
Shift jogger motor or shift jogger lift motor
can still be used.
defective.
Finisher main board defective.
Cover interposer bottom plate motor error
The bottom plate motor turns on
to raise the bottom plate but the
plate position sensor does not
detect the plate within 3 s.
Cover sheet feeder main board defective
The bottom plate motor reverses Harnesses disconnected, defective
to lower the bottom plate but the
bottom plate HP sensor does not
4-28
30 July 2004
SC800: Overall System
804
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
Symptom
Video output transfer does not end (K)
Video signal is sent to the engine
but no command is received within

the prescribed time from the engine
to signal the end of transfer
output all black.
Video input transfer does not end (K)
Video transfer is requested from the
scanner, but no command is
received within the prescribed time
from the scanner to signal a
response output all black.
Watchdog error
Control error
Fatal kernel error

Software defective
Self-diagnostic error: CPU

Unexpected external error or
interrupt occurred.
Self-diagnostic error: ASIC

ASIC timer interrupt and CPU timer
interrupt are compared and found
to be out of range.
Self-diagnostic error: HDD
Check performed when HDD is
installed:
HDD device busy for over 31 s.
After a diagnostic command is

set for the HDD, but the device
remains busy for over 6 s.
A diagnostic command is issued
to the HDD device but the result
is an error.
Self-diagnostic error: NIB
The SUM of the MAC address

written in the SEEP ROM for the
MAC address is calculated and

compared with the stored SUM
and judged NG.
There is a format error in the
MAC address stored in the SEEP
ROM for the MAC address.
A loopback error occurs on the
PHY chip of the NIB.
Self-diagnostic error: NVRAM
NVRAM device does not exist, or
NVRAM device is damaged.
Self-diagnostic error: NVRAM (option)

Optional NVRAM is installed, but a
write/verify error occurred.
Possible Cause
System program defective

Optional board defective
Software defective
Software defective
HDD defective
HDD harness disconnected, defective
NIB board defective

NVRAM defective
Incorrect NVRAM installed.
4-29
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
800
D

SC No.
826
C
827
828
829
835
836
837
838
850
30 July 2004
Symptom
Possible Cause
Self-diagnostic error: NVRAM (option NVRAM)
The difference between the 1 s
NVRAM defective
measured for RTC in the NVRAM
NVRAM installed incorrectly
and the 1 s timeout of the CPU is
out of range, or the NVRAM is not
detected.
Self-diagnostic error: RAM
The write/verify check for the RAM
mounted on the board resulted in
RAM defective
an error.
Self-diagnostic error: ROM
Software defective
Measuring the CRC for the boot
monitor and operating system
program results in an error.
ROM defective
A check of the CRC value for
ROMFS of the entire ROM area
results in an error.
Self-diagnostic error: RAM (option)
A write/verify check of the RAM
mounted on the board results in
RAM defective
a error.
The SPD value of the entire RAM
DIM is incorrect, or cannot be
read.
Note: RAM is not in use so the
result is not displayed on the
operation panel.
Self-diagnostic error: Centronic device
Loopback connector is
connected but check results in
an error.
Loopback connector is
connected but DMA data error

detected.
Centronic loopback connector is
not connected for detailed selfdiagnostic test.
Self-diagnostic error: Font ROM
A device exists in the font area but
it contains corrupted data.

Self-diagnostic error: Font ROM (option)
A device exists in the font area but
it contains corrupted data.

Self-diagnostic error: Clock Generator
Setup data is read from the clock
generator via the I2C bus but differs

from the prescribed value.
Net I/F error
Duplicate IP addresses.
Illegal IP address.
Driver unstable and cannot be
used on the network.
4-30

Centronic loopback connector not
connected correctly
Centronic loopback connector defective
Font device defective
Font device defective
IP address setting incorrect

NIB (PHY) board defective
30 July 2004
860
861
862
863
864
865
Symptom
IEEE 1394 I/F error
Driver setting incorrect and cannot
be used by the 1394 I/F.
USB driver is corrupted or has
become unstable and cannot be
used by the USB I/F.
HDD startup error at main power on
HDD is connected but a driver
error is detected.
The driver does not respond with
the status of the HDD within 30
s.
HDD re-try failure
At power on with the HDD detected,
power supply to the HDD is
interrupted, after the HDD is
awakened from the sleep mode, the
HDD is not ready within 30 s.
Possible Cause
1394 I/F connection incorrect

1394 I/F board defective
USB connection incorrect
HDD is not initialized

Level data is corrupted
HDD is defective
Harness between HDD and board

disconnected, defective
HDD power connector disconnected
HDD defective
Number of bad sectors exceeds allowed maximum
The number of bad sectors on the
Execute 5832 001 to format the HDD and
HDD in the area for storing images
replace the bad sectors. HDD
exceeds 101.
replacement is recommended because
an HDD unit that generates bad sectors
is probably of poor quality and performs
poorly.
HDD data read failure
The data written to the HDD cannot HDD defective
be read normally, due to bad
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at
sectors generated during operation.
the image partition, the bad sector
information is written to NVRAM, and the
next time the HDD is accessed, these
bad sectors will not be accessed for
read/write operation.
HDD data CRC error
During HDD operation, the HDD
Data transfer did not execute normally
cannot respond to an CRC error
while data was being written to the HDD.
query.
HDD access error
HDD responded to an error during
HDD defective.
operation for a condition other than
those for SC863, 864.
4-31
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
851
B
30 July 2004
SC900: Miscellaneous
SC No.
900
D
901
951
953
954
955
964
984
985
986
990
Symptom
Electrical total counter error
The total counter contains
something that is not a number.
Mechanical total counter error
The mechanical counter is not
connected.
Possible Cause
NVRAM defective
Mechanical total counter defective

Mechanical total counter connector not
connected
F-GATE signal error

When the IPU has already received Software defective
the F-GATE signal (laser writing
BCU defective
start trigger signal), the IPU
receives another F-GATE signal.
Scanner image setting error
The settings required for image
Software defective
processing using the scanner are
not sent from the IPU.
Printer image setting error
Software defective
processing using the printer
controller are not sent from the IPU.
Memory setting error
The settings that are required for
Software defective
image processing using the
memory are not sent from the IPU.
Printer ready error
The print ready signal is not
Software defective
generated for more than 17
seconds after the IPU received the
print start signal.
Print image data transfer error
After a data transfer begins from
the controller to the engine via the
BICU defective
PCI bus, the transfer does not end
BICU, controller disconnected
within 15 s.
Scanned image data transmission error
the engine to the controller via the
BICU defective
within 3 s.
Value of setting for software write parameter incorrect
The write parameter received by
the write module at the beginning of BICU defective
the setting table is NULL.
Software performance error
*1
The software performs an
Software defective, re-boot
unexpected function and the
program cannot continue.
4-32
30 July 2004
SC No.
991
C

Symptom
Possible Cause
Software capable of looping cannot continue
*1
program cannot continue. However,
unlike SC990, recovery processing
allows the program to continue.
*1
: In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:

1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent
logged errors.
2) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you
will see detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the
software file name, line number, and so on. 1) is the recommended method, because
another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.
997
998
999
Symptom
Undefined software error
Software encountered an
unexpected operation. This error is
issued if the error cannot be
covered by SC990.
Cannot select application function
Application does not start after
pressing the appropriate key on the
operation panel.
Application cannot start
Register processing does not
execute for any application within
60 s after the machine is powered
on. All applications do not start
correctly, and all end abnormally.
Program download error
The program download from the IC
card does not execute normally.
This SC is not logged.
Possible Cause
Software defective
An error undetectable by any other SC
code occurred
Software bug
A RAM or DIMM option required by the
application is not installed or not installed
correctly.
Software bug
A RAM or DIMM option required by the
correctly.
Card installed incorrectly

BICU defective
IC card defective
NVRAM defective
Power down during program
downloading
4-33
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
992
C
30 July 2004
4.2.3 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT

Here is a list of SC codes that are printed in the SMC report but may not appear in
the operation panel display. Note that the codes that have the same number are
identified by an additional 4-digit hexadecimal number.
SC No.
820
0001
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
000A
000B
000C
000D
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
00FF
Symptom
TLB conversion (store) exception
error
TLB miss (load) exception error
TLB miss (store) exception error
Read address exception error
Write address exception error
Command bus exception error
Data bus exception error
System call exception error
Break exception error
Illegal command exception error
Potential sensor exception error
Overflow exception error
UTLB miss exception error
Allocation 0 error
Allocation 1 error
Allocation 2 error
Allocation 3 error
Allocation 4 error
Allocation 5 error
Non-initialization allocation error
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
0601
0602
0605
0606
0607
060A
060B
060C
060D
060E
0610

Break point exception error
Allocation 0 mask exception error
CPU timer 2 allocation set error
820
0612
ASIC allocation error
820
06FF
CPU master clock error
820
0702
Command cache error
820
0709
Data cache error
Possible Cause
Unexpected error in CPU device:
Boot monitor or self-diagnostic
program corrupted
CPU device error

ASIC device error
4-34
CPU defective
Local bus defective
CPU device error
CPU device error

ASIC device error
Peripheral device defective
CPU device error
Error in CPU initialization data (ASIC
error)
CPU cache defective
Memory error (insufficient speed)
CPU device error
30 July 2004
822
3003
HDD timeout
822
823
823
823
824
826
826
3004
6101
6104
6105
1401
1501
15FF
Self-diagnostic command error

MAC address SUM error
PHY chip ID illegal
PHY loopback error
NVRAM verify error
Clock error
RTC non-detection error
826
0201
Resident memory verify error
828
0101
Boost trap code (CODE) error
828
828
0104
0105
ROM FS error
Forgery prevention error
829
829
0301
0302
835
1102
Option memory 0 verify error

Option memory 0 configuration
information error
Verify error
835
110C DMA verify error
835
1120
836
837
838
1601
1602
2701
Possible Cause
CPU device defective (controller board
defective)
CPU error (controller board defective)
HDD defective
HDD connector disconnected, defective
ASIC device error (controller board
defective)
HDD defective
Loopback connector nondetection

Font ROM 0 error
Font ROM 1 error
Verify error
NVRAM defective
Optional NVRAM defective
Incompatible NVRAM installed
NVRAM battery defective
Memory on controller board defective
RAM DIMM defective
Software storage error (re-install
software)
ROM device error
Forgery prevention chip defective
Forgery prevention chip error
Replace the controller, ROM, or RAM
DIMM
Controller board internal memory error
RAM DIMM defective
Loopback connector error (controller

board defective)
Loopback connector error
Loopback connector not set
4-35
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
Symptom
820 070A Data cache clear error
820 0801 TLB virtual address error
820 0804 TLB global error
820 0807 UTLB miss error
820 0808 TLB read miss error
820 0809 TLB write miss error
820 080A TLB mode file error
820 4002 Single-precision calculation error
820 4003 Double-precision calculation error
820 4004 Exception error
820 4005 Exception mask error
30 July 2004
4.3 B140 SERIES SERVICE MODE

4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
NOTE: This function is not used on B064 series machines.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF. After he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >
OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on.
It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the
machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169
to 1.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP 5169 from 1 to 0.
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed
servicing the machine.
The Administrator will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON.
4-36
30 July 2004
4.3.2 B140 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
C
D
Definition
Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation
panel. The machine is disabled. The user
cannot reset the SC.
SCs that disable only the features that use the
defective item. Although these SCs are not
shown to the user under normal conditions,
they are displayed on the operation panel only
when the defective feature is selected.
SCs that are not shown on the operation panel.
They are internally logged.
Turning the operation switch or main power
switch off then on resets SCs Displayed on the
operation panel. These are re-displayed if the
error occurs again.
Reset Procedure
Enter SP mode, then turn the
main power switch off and
on.
Turn the main power switch
off and on.
Logging only
Turn the operation switch or
main power switch off and
on, or the machine reboots
automatically. (See below.)
When a Level D SC code occurs

A screen opens on the operation panel to tell the user that 1) an error occurred, 2)
the job that the machine does at that time will be erased, and 3) the machine will
reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The user can: 1) stop until the machine reboots automatically after a short time, or
2) touch Reset on the screen to reset the machine immediately, and go back to
the copy screen.
If the operator does not touch Reset, the next message tells the user that 1) the
machine reset automatically and 2) the previous job was lost and must be done
again. After the user reads the message, the user touches Confirm on the screen.
The next screen shows the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the
user turns the machine off and on.
If the operator touches Reset to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to
reboot, the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy
screen.
Important
Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.
If the Remote Service System is used, the SC code is sent immediately to the
Service Center
4-37
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
Level
30 July 2004
4.3.3 B140 SERIES SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

Important
If a problem concerns electrical circuit boards, always disconnect then reconnect
the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
If a motor lock error occurs, first check the mechanical load before replacing
motors or sensors.
When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode, the display does not
display the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP
mode.
The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level D SC
code. This is done for Level D SC codes only. (4.3.2)
SC100: Scanning System

SC No.
101
D
120
121
Symptom
Exposure Lamp Error
At trigger on, the lamp was not
detected on.
Possible Cause

detect the on condition during

detect the off condition during
4-38

Lamp regulator defective
Lamp regulator harness damaged,
disconnected
Dirty standard white plate
Scanner mirror dirty or out of position
Lens dirty, out of position
SBU board defective
defective
motor disconnected.
installed incorrectly.
defective
motor disconnected
Scanner HP sensor defective
and BCU disconnected
122
123
143
144

does not detect the on condition

does not detect the off condition
SBU auto adjust error

Automatic adjustment of the SBU
fails when the machine is switched
on.
SBU transmission error

After the SBU switches on, the
BCU detects one of the following
conditions on the SBU:
signal does not go high, even
after 1 retry.
signal goes high, but the SBU ID
could not be read after 3
attempts.

defective
motor disconnected
installed incorrectly
defective
motor disconnected
Exposure lamp regulator defective
Harness between exposure lamp and
lamp regulator is disconnected
White plate installed incorrectly or is dirty
Scanning mirrors of the exposure unit are
dirty or out of position
SBU board defective
VIB board defective.
Harness between SBU, VIB
disconnected
Harness between VIB, BCU
disconnected
SBU defective
VIB defective
Harness (40-pin shielded) between the
SBU, VIB is disconnected
Harness (shielded cable) between the
VIB, BCU is disconnected
4-39
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
30 July 2004
181
183
184
30 July 2004
CIS lamp abnormal

After the CIS lamp trigger goes on,
the CIS lamp is not detected on.
Detecting the lamp on or off
determines the peak white level
value for shading correction. (If the
peak level is determined to be
below a certain level, the CIS lamp
is judged to be off.)
CIS auto adjust error

Automatic adjustment of the CIS
unit failed.
CIS transmission error
When the CIS is powered on, the
ADF detects one of the following
abnormal conditions on the CIS
unit:
The SOUT signal does not go
high within 1 s after power on.
The SOUT signal goes high
within 1 s after power on, but the
SBU ID cannot be read after 3
attempts.
4-40
CIS lamp defective

CIS power supply board defective
CIS lamp regulator defective
Harness between lamp and lamp
regulator is disconnected.
Harness between CIS, ADF is
disconnected
White roller dirty or installed incorrectly
CIS unit defective
CIS unit defective

CIS exposure glass dirty
White roller dirty or installed incorrectly
CIS unit defective
Harness between the CIS, ADF is
disconnected
30 July 2004
303
303
304
305
306
Symptom
Charge corona output error
The feedback voltage from the
charge corona unit is detected too
high 9 times.
times.
times.
Charge grid circuit open
When high voltage goes to the
corona grid, feedback voltage is
more than the set value 9 times.
This feedback voltage is used to
update PWM for output control.
The charge cleaner pad does not
arrive at the home position:
Motor locked within 4 s after
switching on, or does not lock
within 30 s.
Motor locked within 10 s after
reversing, or does not lock within
30 s.
Charge coronal motor is
disconnected. (The current at the
charge corona motor is detected
less than 83 mA.)
Possible Cause
Charge corona unit defective or
disconnected
Charge corona harness defective
Charge corona power pack is defective.
defective
Motor driver defective

connector is defective, connected.
NOTE: When SC310~SC317 are logged, the machine halts without displaying the SC
number. These SC codes log an abnormal condition at the potential sensor only
when SP3901 (Auto Process Control) is set to on.
SC No.
310
D
Symptom
Possible Cause
disconnected
IOB defective
4-41
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
300
D

SC No.
311
C
312
314
315
316
30 July 2004
Symptom
potential (VD), the drum potential
sensor detects VD higher than VG
(grid voltage).
-orWhen adjusting VD (drum surface
potential of black areas after
exposure), even after 5 adjustments
of VG (charge corona grid
potential), VD could not be set in
the target range (80010 + VL +
130V)
potential (VH) for LD power
adjustment, the first time the VH
pattern is made, the drum potential
sensor detects that VH is more than
500V:
VH > |500 + VL + 130| V

4-42
Possible Cause
disconnected
IOB defective
disconnected
IOB defective
Charge corona unit worn out, dirty

disconnected
IOB defective
LD defective
disconnected
IOB defective
disconnected
IOB defective
30 July 2004
SC No.
317
C

Symptom
calibration, when VL is adjusted, the
pattern surface potential VL pattern
is not within range 0V ~ 400V. (VL
is the potential after exposing a
white pattern.)
Possible Cause
disconnected
IOB defective
No laser writing signal (F-GATE error)

The laser writing signal (F-GATE)
BICU board defective
for the IPU does not go LOW within PCI bus between controller board, BICU
60 s.
board defective
322
Laser synchronization detector error

After the polygon motor reaches
standard rotation speed and the LD
unit fires for 500 ms, the laser
synchronization detector does not
generate a signal.
Polygon mirror motor error 1
The ready signal does not go low
within 20 s after the polygon mirror
motor turns on or changes speed.
335
336
337
338
Polygon mirror motor error 2

The ready signal does not go high
mirror motor turns off.

The XSCRDY signal goes high
while the polygon mirror motor turns
on, even though there was no
request to either turn off the motor
or change the motor speed.
While the polygon motor is rotating,
the XSCRDY signal goes high
during exposure.
Harness between detector and I/F

disconnected or damaged
Detector is installed incorrectly
Detector board is defective
IPU board defective
defective
IPU board defective
defective
IPU board defective
Noise on the line where the polygon
ready signal (XSCRDY) is transmitted.
defective
Noise on the line where the polygon
ready signal (XSCRDY) is transmitted.
defective
IPU board defective
4-43
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
321

SC No.
340
C
30 July 2004
Symptom
TD sensor output error
TD sensor output voltage (Vt),
measured during each copy cycle,
is detected 10 times at one of the
following levels:
Possible Cause
TD sensor defective
defective
IOB defective
341
342
345
350

voltage (Vt) is 2.5 volts or higher
even though the control voltage is
set to the minimum value (PWM =
0). When this error occurs, SP2906-1 reads 0.00V.
voltage (Vt) does not enter the
target range (3.0 0.1V) within 20
s. When this error occurs, the
display of SP2-906-1 reads 0.00V.
Development output abnormal
The high voltage applied to the
development unit is detected 10
times higher than the upper limit
(45%) of PWM.
ID sensor error 1
output voltages was detected twice
consecutively when checking the ID
sensor pattern.
Vsp 2.5V
Vsg < 2.5
Vsp = 0V
Vsg = 0
4-44
TD sensor defective
defective
IOB defective
toner supply is controlled using pixel count
and the ID sensor.
TD sensor defective
defective
IOB defective

Development bias leak due to poor
connection, defective connector
ID sensor defective
IOB defective
ID sensor pattern not written correctly
Incorrect image density
ID sensor dirty
30 July 2004
352
353
354
355
Symptom
ID sensor error 2
The ID sensor output voltage is
5.0V and the PWM signal input to
the ID sensor is 0 when checking
ID sensor error 3
For 2 s during the ID sensor pattern
check, the ID sensor pattern edge
voltage is not 2.5V or the pattern
edge is not detected within 800 ms.
ID sensor error 4
output voltages is detected at ID
sensor initialization.
Vsg < 4.0V when the maximum
ID sensor.
Vsg 4.0V when the minimum
ID sensor.
ID sensor error 5
Vsg falls out of the adjustment
target (4.0 0.2V) during Vsg
checking.
ID sensor error 6
The Vp value, which measures the
reflectivity of the ID sensor pattern,
was not in the range of 70V to
400V.
Possible Cause
ID sensor defective
IOB defective
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
IOB defective
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
IOB defective
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
IOB defective
ID sensor dirty

Potential sensor harness defective
Potential sensor disconnected
IOB defective
OPC unit connector defective
Charge corona wire dirty, broken
4-45
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
351
C
30 July 2004

SC No.
401
D
402
430
440
441
490
495
496
497
Symptom
Possible Cause
Transfer output abnormal
When the transfer is output, the
Transfer power pack defective
feedback voltage remains higher
Transfer current terminal, transfer power
than 4V for 60 ms.
pack disconnected, damaged connector
Transfer output abnormal release detection
When the transfer is output, there is Transfer power pack defective
hardly any feedback voltage within
Transfer unit harness disconnected
60 ms even with application of 24% Transfer connector loose, defective
PWM.
Quenching lamp error
At the completion of auto process
Quenching lamp defective
control initialization, the potential of Quenching lamp harness disconnected
the drum surface detected by the
Quenching lamp connector loose,
potential sensor is more than
defective
400V, the prescribed value.
Main motor lock
The main motor lock signal remains Drive mechanism overloaded
low for 2 seconds while the main
Motor driver board defective
motor is on.
Development motor lock
The development motor lock signal
Drive mechanism overloaded due to
remains high for 2 seconds while
toner clumping in the wasted toner path
the development motor is on.
If this SC is returned on a machine in the field, inspect the toner supply unit coil. If
the gear is not damaged replace the coil. If the gear is damaged, the gear shaft is
probably deformed, so replace the entire unit.
Main fan error
The main fan motor lock signal
Fan motor overloaded due to obstruction
goes high for 5 s while the fan is
Fan connector disconnected
on.
Toner recycling unit error
Encoder pulse does not change for Waste toner transport has stopped due
3 s after the main motor switches
to motor overload
on.
Toner end sensor detective,
disconnected
Toner collection bottle error
The toner collection bottle set
No toner collection bottle set
switch remains off when the front
Poor connection of the switch connector
door is closed.
The toner collection motor
Toner pump motor defective
connector set signal remains off for Motor connector loose, disconnected
1 s.
4-46
30 July 2004
SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, and Fusing Systems
502
503
504
507
Symptom
plate.
When the tray lowers, the tray lift
sensor does not go off within 1.5
sec.
Tray overload detected when the
tray is set.
The lower limit sensor of the LCT
does not detect the lower limit
within 10 sec.
plate.
sec.
tray is set.
plate.
sec.
tray is set.
plate.
sec.
tray is set.
LCT feed motor malfunction
detected:
The LD signal from the feed
motor is detected abnormal for
50 ms after the motor switches
on.
At power on, the motor is
detected loose or disconnected.
Possible Cause
Tray lift motor defective, disconnected
tray and motor
Pick-up solenoid disconnected, blocked
by an obstacle
Too much paper loaded in tray

tray and motor

tray and motor

tray and motor
Feed motor defective

Feed motor connector disconnected
Obstacle interfering with mechanical
movement of motor.
4-47
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
501
B

SC No.
510
B
515
520
521
531
541
30 July 2004
Symptom
LCT tray malfunction
detected:
When the bottom plate is lifted,
the upper limit sensor does not
come on for 18 s.
When the bottom plate is
lowered, the lower limit sensor
does not come on for 18 s.
After lift begins, the upper limit
sensor does not switch on before
the pick-up solenoid switches on.
The paper end sensor switches
on during lift and the upper limit
sensor does not switch on for 2.5
s, and a message prompts user
to reset paper.
Tandem rear fence motor error
One of the conditions is detected:
The return sensor does not
switch on within 10 sec. after the
rear fence motor switches on.
The HP sensor does not switch
on 10 sec. after the rear fence
motor switches on.
The HP sensor and return sensor
switch on at the same time.
When the jogger fence moves to
the home position, the jogger HP
sensor does not turn on even if the
jogger fence motor has moved the
When the jogger fence moves from
the home position, the jogger fence
HP sensor does not turn off even if
the jogger motor has moved the
Fusing exit motor error
The PLL lock signal was low for 2
seconds during motor operation.
The fusing temperature detected by
the center thermistor was below
0C for 7 sec.
4-48
Possible Cause
Tray lift motor defective or connector
disconnected
Lift sensor defective or disconnected
Pick-up solenoid defective or
disconnected
Paper end sensor defective
Rear fence motor defective or poor

connection
Paper or other obstacle interfering with
operation of the sensors
tray and motor
Motor mechanical overload due to
obstruction
Return sensor or HP sensor defective or
dirty
mechanism
defective
Sensor defective
mechanism
defective
Sensor defective
Motor lock caused by too much load
Thermistor open
Thermistor connector defective
Thermistor damaged, or out of position
Fusing temperature 15% less than the
standard input voltage
SC No.
542
A
543
544
545
547
550

Symptom
Possible Cause
One of the following occurred:
Thermistor warped, out of position
After power on, or after closing
the front door, the hot roller does Thermostat not operating
not reach the 100C control
temperature within 25 s.
5 sec. after temperature rise
started, temperature remained
below 21C after 5 samplings.
Fusing unit did not attain reload
temperature within 48 sec. of the
start of fusing temperature
control.
Central thermistor detected a
PSU defective
temperature of 240C at the center
IOB defective
of the hot roller. Fusing temperature BICU defective
control software error
Either the central thermistor or an
PSU defective
end thermistor detected a
IOB defective
temperature of 250C on the hot
BICU defective
roller.
-orFusing temperature control
software error
After hot roller reaches warmup
Thermistor damaged, or out of position
temperature, the fusing lamps
remained on at full capacity for 11
samplings (1.8 sec. duration) while
the hot roller was not rotating.
Zero cross signal malfunction
Noise on the ac power line
detected 10 times:
When the main switch is on, the
frequency measured by the
number of zero cross signals for
500 ms is larger than 66Hz or
smaller than 45 Hz.
The interval between one zero
cross signal and the next is 7.5
ms or shorter 3 times
consecutively for 500 ms.
Fusing Web End
Web end detected 5 times within
Web end (requires replacement)
500 ms and web motor continues to Web end sensor defective
rotate 40 s. If web end is detected
Note: After replacing the web with a new
for another 400 ms, then the SC is
one, reset SP1902 001 to 0 to
logged.
release SC550.
4-49
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
30 July 2004

SC No.
551
A
552
553
555
569
590
599
30 July 2004
Symptom
Fusing thermistor error 1
The end thermistor (contact type)
was less than 0C (32F) for more
than 7 seconds.
could not detect:
100C 25 seconds after the start
of the warmup cycle.
A change in temperature more
than than 16 degrees for 5
seconds.
The reload temperature with 56
seconds after the start of the
fusing temperature control cycle.
was at 240C (464F) for more than
1 second.
Fusing lamp error
After the start of the warmup cycle,
a fusing lamp was at full power for
1.8 seconds but the hot roller did
not turn.
Fusing pressure release motor error
During copying, the HP sensor
could not detect the actuator, tried
again 3 times and could not detect.
The toner collection motor sensor
output does not change for 3
seconds while the toner collection
motor is on.
1-bin Exit Motor Error (Japan Only)

The transport lock sensor output
does not change within 300 ms
after the motor switches on.
4-50
Possible Cause
Thermistor disconnected
Thermistor connector defective
Thermistor bent, damaged
Thermistor position incorrect
PSU defective
IOB control board defective
BICU control board defective
Thermistor bent, out of position
Circuit breaker opened
Motor lock because of too much load
HP sensor defective, disconnected,
connector defective, harness damaged
Motor lock due to obstruction

Motor connection loose, defective
Toner collection motor sensor
disconnected, sensor defective
Rotational transmission shaft (6 x 30)
missing
Motor overload
30 July 2004
SC No.
610
D
611
612
620
621
623
624
626
627
630
Symptom
Possible Cause
BICU
ADF communication/timeout abnormal
ADF, an ACK signal is not received External noise on the line
after 3 retries.
BICU
ADF communication/break reception abnormal
During communication a break
(Low) signal was received from the
ADF.
BICU
ADF communication/command abnormal
A command that cannot be
A software error, result of an abnormal
executed was sent from the main
procedure.
machine to the ADF.
BICU
ADF communication/timeout error
finisher MBX, an ACK signal is not
BICU
Finisher communication/break error
finisher MBX, the BICU received a
break (Low) signal from the finisher.
BICU
Tray 1~4 communication/timeout error
trays, an ACK signal is not received External noise on the line
after 3 retries.
BICU
Tray 1~4 communication/break reception error
finisher trays, the BICU received a
break (Low) signal.
BICU
LCT communication/timeout error
LCT, an ACK signal is not received
after 3 retries.
BICU
LCT communication/break reception error
LCT, the BICU received a break
(Low) signal.
RSS communication error
An error was detected in
No action required
communication via RSS between
the machine and the RSS center.
Error occurred on a public line at
the RSS terminal.
4-51
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC600: Data Communication

SC No.
670
D
672
30 July 2004
Symptom
Engine startup error
The machine engine, controlled by
the BICU (Base Image Control
Unit), was operating incorrectly
when the machine was switched on
or returned to normal operation
from the energy save mode.
Controller startup error
After power on, the line between
the controller and the operation
panel did not open for normal
operation.
After normal startup,
communication with the
controller stopped.
4-52
Possible Cause
Check the connections between BICU
and controller
BICU defective
PSU defective
Controller stalled
Controller installed incorrectly
Operation panel harness disconnected or
defective
30 July 2004
SC700 Series: Peripherals
701
720
722
724
725
Symptom
ADF original pick-up error
Pick-up roller HP sensor signal
does not change after the pick-up
motor has turned on.
ADF bottom plate motor error
One of the following occurred:
Bottom plate position sensor
does not detect the plate after
the bottom plate lift motor
switches on to lift the plate.
Bottom plate HP sensor does not
detect the plate after the bottom
plate motor reverses to lower the
plate.
Finisher transport motor error
The encoder pulse of the transport
motor does not change state
(high/low) within 600 ms and does
not change after 2 retries.
Finisher jogger motor error
remains de-activated for more
than 1,000 pulses when returning
to home position.
remains activated for more than
1,000 pulses when moving away
from home position.
Finisher staple hammer motor error
Stapling does not finish within 450
ms after the staple hammer motor
switches on and the stapler jams.
Stapler is released from the reverse
lock status. If the stapler does not
operate within 450 ms, even in the
reverse lock position, then the SC
is logged.
Finisher stack feed-out motor error
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor
does not activate within the
prescribed number of pulses after
the stack feed-out motor turns on
and does not activate after 2 retries
because the stack feed-out belt
failed to return to the home
position.
Possible Cause
Pick-up roller HP sensor defective

Pick-up motor defective
Timing belt slipping, out of position

Finisher transport motor defective, or

overloaded due to obstruction
Transport motor harness disconnected,
or defective
Jogger mechanism overloaded due to
obstruction
Jogger motor defective (not rotating)
Staple jam
Stapler operation overload
Staple hammer motor defective
Staple hammer motor connector
disconnected, or defective
Stack feed-out HP sensor defective

Stack feed-out motor defective
Motor overload due to obstruction
4-53
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
700
D

SC No.
726
B
727
729
730
732
733
735
30 July 2004
Symptom
Finisher upper tray lift motor error
The paper height sensor does not
after the upper tray lift motor turns
on, or the sensor remains on after
the motor reverses to lower the
tray.
Finisher stapler rotation motor error
The stapler motor switches on but
the motor does not return to the
number of pulses.
Finisher punch motor error

The punch HP sensor does not
the punch motor turns on.
Possible Cause
Upper tray paper height sensor defective

Tray lift motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Stapler rotation motor HP sensor

Motor harness damaged, disconnected
Stapler lift motor defective
Rotation motor overload due to
obstruction
Punch HP sensor defective

Punch motor defective
Poor punch motor overload due to
obstruction
Finisher stapler movement motor error

The stapler HP sensor does
after the stapler motor turns on and

moves the stapler away from home
position. After 2 counts, the SC is
logged as a jam.
Stapler HP sensor defective

Stapler movement motor defective
Stapler movement motor overload due to
obstruction
Finisher shift roller motor error

The shift roller HP sensor does not
after the shift roller motor turns on.
After 2 counts, the SC is logged as
a jam.
Shift roller HP sensor defective

Shift roller motor defective
Shift roller motor overload
Paper height sensor 1 or 2 defective

Finisher lower tray lift motor error

After the lift motor switches on to lift
the tray, paper height sensor 2 does
not detect the top of the paper stack,
or after the motor reverses to lower
the stack the top of the stack remains
detected (the status of paper height
sensor 1 does not change). After 2
counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
Finisher pre-stack motor error
The pre-stack motor starts but
does not return to the home
position within 400 pulses. After 2
counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
Motor does not return to the
home position within 280 pulses
immediately before or after prestacking. After 2 counts, the SC
is logged as a jam.
4-54

Sensor harnesses disconnected,
defective
Pre-stack motor defective
Pre-stack motor overload due to
obstruction
SC No.
736
B
737
738
739
740
741
742
743

Symptom
Possible Cause
Finisher paper exit guide plate motor error
The paper exit guide plate motor
Guide plate HP sensor defective
starts but the paper exit guide plate Sensor harness disconnected, defective
HP sensor does not activate within
Paper exit guide plate motor defective
750 ms. After 2 counts, the SC is
logged as a jam.
Guide plate motor overload due to
obstruction
Trimmed staple waste hopper full
The hopper that holds the waste
Staple waste hopper full
from staple trimming is full.
Staple waste sensor defective
Finisher pressure plate motor error
The pressure plate motor switches
HP sensor defective
on but does not return to the home
position within the prescribed time
Motor defective
after 2 counts.
Motor overload due to obstruction
Finisher folder plate motor error
The folder plate motor turns on but
Plate HP sensor defective
the plate does not return to the
home position within the prescribed Folder plate motor defective
time for 2 counts.
Folder plate motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Finisher front saddle-stitch stapler motor error
HP sensor defective
counts..
Stapler motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Finisher rear saddle-stitch stapler motor error
HP sensor defective
counts.
Finisher jogger side fence motor error
The jogger motor turns on but the
HP sensors defective
side fences to not return to the
home position within 340 pulses for Motor defective
2 counts.
Motor overload
Finisher shift motor errors
For the optional jogger unit for the
HP sensor of shift jogger motor, harness,
B706 finisher: During the return
connector defective, or motor
operation, the shift jogger motor or
disconnected
shift jogger fence lift motor did not
HP sensor, harness, connector of
return to the home position within
retraction motor defective, or motor
the set number of pulses.
disconnected
Shift jogger motor defective
Shift jogger fence lift motor defective
Finisher main control board defective
4-55
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
30 July 2004

SC No.
750
B
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
30 July 2004
Symptom
Possible Cause
Cover interposer bottom plate motor error
The bottom plate motor turns on
to raise the bottom plate but the
plate position sensor does not
Cover sheet feeder main board defective
The bottom plate motor reverses Harnesses disconnected, defective
to lower the bottom plate but the
bottom plate HP sensor does not
Z-Folding unit error 1
The fold roller motor did not get to
Motor defective
the set speed after 1200 ms.
Motor disconnected
Motor lock because of overload
Z-Fold main control board defective
The HP sensor of the lower stopper Lower stopper motor defective
motor does not go off after the
Lower stopper motor disconnected,
stopper moved 128.7 mm after the
connector defective
start of the operation.
Lower stopper motor HP sensor
The HP sensor of the upper stopper Upper stopper motor defective
motor does not go off after the
Upper stopper motor disconnected,
stopper moved 128.7 mm.
connector defective
Upper stopper motor HP sensor
2000 ms after the fan motor
Fan motor defective
switched on, the lock signal did not
Fan motor disconnected
release.
Fan motor locked because of too much
load
The fold timing sensor does not
Paper dust on the sensor
operate correctly.
Sensor disconnected, defective
Mirror dirty, or out of position
The leading edge sensor does not
Paper dust on the sensor
operate correctly.
Sensor disconnected, defective
Mirror dirty, or out of position
The machine could not write to the
EEPROM defective, replace Z-Fold main
EEPROM two times (one after the
control board
other).
4-56
30 July 2004
SC800: Overall System
819
Symptom
Watchdog error
While the system program is
running, a bus hold or interrupt
program goes into an endless loop,
preventing any other programs from
executing.
Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM
overflow occurred during system
processing. One of the following
messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
0x696e
init died
0x766d
vm_pageout: VM is full
4361
Cache Error
Other
Possible Cause
System program defective; switch off/on,
or change the controller firmware if the
problem cannot be solved
Controller option malfunction
System program defective

Optional board defective
Replace controller firmware
NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC
report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the
operation panel.
821
Self-diagnostic error 2: ASIC

The ASIC provides the central point for the control of bus arbitration for CPU
access, for option bus and SDRAM access, for SDRAM refresh, and for
management of the internal bus gate.
Error code 0xffff ffff is
0B00
ASIC (controller board defective)
returned when the register
Write & Verify check is
executed on the ASIC
mounted on the controller
board. The ASIC controls
the ROM and buses for
other devices.
0B06
ASIC not detected
ASIC defective
Poor connection between North Bridge
and PCI I/F
Replace controller board
Failed to initialize or could
0B10
Connection bus defective
not read connection bus.
SHM defective
Data in SHM register
Replace controller board
incorrect.
NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC
report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the
operation panel.
4-57
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
818
D

822
824
826
828
30 July 2004
Self-diagnostic error 3: HDD

Check performed when HDD
3003
is installed:
HDD device busy for over
31 s.
After a diagnostic
command is set for Sthe
HDD, but the device
remains busy for over 6 s.
A diagnostic command is
issued to the HDD device but
the result is an erro
No response to the self3004
diagnostic command from the
ASIC to the HDDs
Mandolin does not respond,
3013
the HDD device remains
BUSY for more than 31 s, or
the BUSY signal does not
drop within 6 s after the
diagnostic command is
issued to the HDDs.
Error returned from HDD in
3014
response to the selfdiagnostic command,
Mandolin could not be located
due to a read/write error at
the HDD register.
Self-diagnostic error 4: NVRAM
NVRAM device does not exist,
NVRAM device is damaged, NVRAM
socket damaged
HDD defective
HDD harness disconnected, defective
HDD defective
HDD defective
HDD connector loose or defective
Controller defective
HDD defective
NVRAM defective
NVRAM backup battery exhausted
NVRAM socket damaged
Self-diagnostic error 6: NVRAM (option NVRAM)
The difference between the 1 NVRAM defective
1501
s measured for RTC in the
NVRAM installed incorrectly
NVRAM and the 1 s timeout
Replace RTC database
of the CPU is out of range, or
the NVRAM is not detected.
Backup battery error. Battery
15FE
Replace RTC backup battery
is exhausted or not within
rated specification.
Self-diagnostic error 7: ROM
Measuring the CRC for the boot
monitor and operating system
program results in an error.
A check of the CRC value for
ROMFS of the entire ROM area
results in an error.
Software defective
ROM defective
NOTE: For more details about this SC 833, SC834 error, execute SP5990 to print an
SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on
the operation panel. The additional error codes (0F30, 0F31, etc. are listed in the
SMC report.
4-58
833
0F30
0F31
0F41
50B1
50B2
834
5101
850
851
853
854
855
856
857

Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control
ASCI (Mandolin) for system control is
could not be detected. After the PCI
defective
configuration, the device ID for the
Interface between North Bridge and
ASIC could not be checked.
AGPI is defective
Replace the mother board
The read/write check done for
Memory device defective
resident RAM on the mother board
could not be done correctly.
Could not initialize or read the bus
Bus connection defective, loose
connection.
SSCG defective
Value of the SSCG register is
Bus connection loose, defective
incorrect.
SSCG defective
Self-diagnostic error 9: Optional Memory RAM DIMM
The write/verify check for the
optional RAM chip on the engine
Mother board defective
mother board gave an error.
Net I/F error
Duplicate IP addresses.
IP address setting incorrect
Illegal IP address.
Driver unstable and cannot be
used on the network.
IEEE 1394 I/F error
Driver setting incorrect and cannot
NIB (PHY), LINK module defective;
be used by the 1394 I/F.
change the Interface Board
Wireless LAN Error 1
During machine start-up, the
Wireless LAN card missing (was
machine can get access to the
removed)
board that holds the wireless LAN,
but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN Error 2
During machine operation, the
Wireless LAN card missing (was
machine can get access to the
removed)
board that holds the wireless LAN,
but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN error 3
An error was detected on the
Wireless LAN card defective
wireless LAN card (802.11b or
Wireless LAN card connection incorrect
Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN error 4
An error was detected on the
Wireless LAN card defective
wireless LAN card (802.11b or
PCI connector (to the mother board)
Bluetooth).
loose
USB I/F Error
The USB driver is not stable and
Bad USB card connection
caused an error.
Replace the controller board
4-59
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
30 July 2004

860
861
863
864
865
866
867
868
30 July 2004
HDD startup error at main power on

HDD is connected but a driver
error is detected.
The driver does not respond with
the status of the HDD within 30
s.
HDD re-try failure
At power on with the HDD detected,
power supply to the HDD is
interrupted, after the HDD is
awakened from the sleep mode, the
HDD is not ready within 30 s.
HDD data read failure
The data written to the HDD cannot
be read normally, due to bad
sectors generated during operation.
HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD
cannot respond to an CRC error
query. Data transfer did not execute
normally while data was being
written to the HDD.
HDD access error
HDD responded to an error during
operation for a condition other than
those for SC863, 864.
SC card error 1: Confirmation
The machine detects an electronic
license error in the application on
the SD card in the controller slot
immediately after the machine is
turned on.
The program on the SD card
contains electronic confirmation
license data. If the program does
not contain this license data, or if
the result of the check shows that
the license data in the program on
the SD card is incorrect, then the
checked program cannot execute
and this SC code is displayed.
SD card error 2: SD card removed
The SD card in the boot slot when
the machine was turned on was
removed while the machine was on.
SD card error 3: SC card access
An error occurred while an SD card
was used.
4-60
HDD is not initialized

Level data is corrupted
HDD is defective
Harness between HDD and board

HDD power connector disconnected
HDD defective
HDD defective
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at
the image partition, the bad sector
information is written to NVRAM, and the
next time the HDD is accessed, these bad
sectors will not be accessed for read/write
operation.
HDD defective
HDD defective.
Program missing from the SD card

Download the correct program for the
machine to the SD card
Insert the SD card, then turn the machine

off and on.
SD card not inserted correctly

SD card defective
Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC
card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
870
873
874
875
880

Address book data error
Address book data on the hard disk Software defective. Turn the machine
was detected as abnormal when it
off/on. If this is not the solution for the
was accessed from either the
problem, then replace the controller
operation panel or the network. The
firmware.
address book data cannot be read
HDD defective.
from the HDD or SD card where it
is stored, or the data read from the
media is defective.
More Details
Do SP5846 050 (UCS Settings Initialize all Directory Info.) to reset all address
book data.
Reset the user information with SP5832 006 (HDD Formatting User
Information).
Replace the HDDs.
Boot the machine from the SD card.
HDD mail send data error
An error was detected on the HDD
Do SP5832-007 (Format HDD Mail TX
immediately after the machine was
Data) to initialize the HDD.
turned on, or power was turned off
Replace the HDD
while the machine used the HDD.
Delete All error 1: HDD
A data error was detected for the
Turn the main switch off/on and try the
HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All
operation again.
option was used.
Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit
Note: The source of this error is the
again. For more, see section 1.
Data Overwrite Security Unit B660
Installation.
running from an SD card.
HDD defective
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error occurred while the
Turn the main switch off/on and try the
machine deleted data from the
operation again.
HDD.
Note: The source of this error is the
Data Overwrite Security Unit B660
running from an SD card.
File Format Converter (MLB) error
A request to get access to the MLB MLB defective, replace the MLB
was not answered within the
specified time.
4-61
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
SC900: Miscellaneous
SC No.
900
D
901
920
921
925
Symptom
Electrical total counter error
The total counter contains
something that is not a number.
Mechanical total counter error

The mechanical counter is not
connected.
Possible Cause
NVRAM incorrect type

NVRAM defective
NVRAM data scrambled
Unexpected error from external source
Mechanical total counter defective

Mechanical total counter connector not
connected
Printer error 1
An internal application error was
detected and operation cannot
continue.
Printer error 2
When the application started, the
necessary font was not on the SD
card.
Net File function error
The NetFile file management on the
HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile
management file is corrupted and
operation cannot continue. The
HDDs are defective and they
cannot be debugged or partitioned,
so the Scan Router functions
(delivery of received faxes,
document capture, etc.), Web
services, and other network
functions cannot be used.
HDD status codes are displayed
below the SC code:
Software defective; turn the machine

off/on, or change the controller firmware
Insufficient memory
Font not on the SC card
Refer to the four procedures below

(Recovery from SC 925).
Here is a list of HDD status codes:

Display
(-1)
(-2)
(-3)
(-4)
(-5)
(-6)
(-7)
(-8)
(-9)
(-10)
(-11)
(-12)
(-13)
Meaning
HDD not connected
HDD not ready
No label
Partition type incorrect
Error returned during label read or check
Error returned during label read or check
filesystem repair failed
filesystem mount failed
Drive does not answer command
Internal kernel error
Size of drive is too small
Specified partition does not exist
Device file does not exist
4-62
30 July 2004
Recovery from SC 925

Procedure 1
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865) with SC 925, do
the recovery procedures for SC860 ~ SC865.
Procedure 2
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that:
Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased
All captured documents will be erased
DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be
erased
Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be
erased.
The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the
management information must be configured again (this will use a lot of time).
Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:
1. Go into the User Tools mode and do Delivery Settings to print all received fax
documents that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase them.
2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer
Documents.
3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on.
Procedure 3
If Procedure 2 is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD
Formatting All), then turn the machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask
the customer before you do this SP code.
Procedure 4
If Procedure 3 is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
4-63
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), turn
the machine power off and on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then
initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting
Ridoc I/F).

953
954
955
964
984
985
986
990
991
30 July 2004
Scanner image setting error

processing using the scanner are

not sent from the IPU.
Printer image setting error
processing using the printer

controller are not sent from the IPU.
Memory setting error
The settings that are required for
image processing using the

memory are not sent from the IPU.
Printer ready error
The print ready signal is not
generated for more than 17

seconds after the IPU received the
print start signal.
Print image data transfer error
the controller to the engine via the
within 15 s.
Scanned image data transmission error
the engine to the controller via the
within 3 s.
Software error 1
The write parameter received by
the write module at the beginning of

the setting table is NULL.
Software error 2
program cannot continue.
Software error 3
program cannot continue. However,
unlike SC990, recovery processing
allows the program to continue.
*1
Software defective
Software defective
Software defective
Software defective
Controller (SIMAC) board defective

BICU defective
BICU
controller disconnected

BICU defective
BICU controller disconnected

BICU defective
BICU controller disconnected
*1
*1
: In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:

3) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent
logged errors.
4) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you
will see detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the
software file name, line number, and so on. 1) is the recommended method, because
another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.
4-64
30 July 2004
997
998
Software error 4: Undefined

An error not controlled by the
system occurred (the error does not
come under any other SC code).
Cannot select application function
An application does not start after
the user pushed the correct key on
the operation panel.
Application cannot start
Register processing does not
operate for an application within 60
s after the machine power is turned
on. No applications not start
correctly, and all end abnormally.
Software defective
Turn the machine power off and on. The
machine cannot be used until this error is
cleared.
Software bug
A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the
correctly.
Software bug
A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the
correctly.
Troubleshooting
992
4-65
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
4.3.4 JAM CODES

Here are lists of SC codes that are printed in the SMC report; they do not appear
on the operation panel display.
Main Unit: Paper Jam Errors

No.
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
34
Check-In Failure
(Paper Does Not Arrive)
Initial Jam (Power On)
Tray 1 feed sensor
Tray 2 feed sensor
Tray 3 feed sensor
Tray 4 feed sensor (Japan Only)
LCT feed sensor
Transport sensor 1
Transport sensor 2
Transport sensor 3
Transport sensor 4 (Japan Only)
Relay sensor
Registration sensor
Fusing exit sensor
Exit unit
Duplex inverter sensor
1-Bin tray (Japan Only)
Bypass paper end sensor
No.
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Check-Out Failure
(Paper Remains)
Tray 1 feed sensor
Tray 2 feed sensor
Tray 3 feed sensor
Tray 4 feed sensor (Japan Only)
LCT feed sensor
Transport sensor 1
Transport sensor 2
Transport sensor 3
Transport sensor 4 (Japan Only)
Relay sensor
Registration sensor
66 Exit unit
69 Exit unit entrance sensor
71
72
73
74
4-66

1-Bin tray (Japan Only)
30 July 2004
Finisher B469 Jam Codes

No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
109
110
111
112
113
115
116
Location
Entrance Sensor
Proof Tray Exit Sensor
Exit Sensor
Staple Entrance Sensor
Exit Sensor after jogging
Stapler Unit 1
Shift Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Shift Roller or Guide Plate Motor
Stapler Movement or Stapler Rotation Motor
Stapler Unit 2
Feed Out Belt Motor
Punch Hole Motor
Related SC Code
SC733
SC722
SC732, SC736
SC727, SC730
SC724
SC725
SC729
No.
Location
Related SC Code
121
Entrance Sensor
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
Exit Sensor
Stapler Unit 1
Saddle Stitch Stapler Unit
Shift Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
133
Stapler Unit 2
134
135
136
Folder Plate Motor

Feed Out Belt Motor
Punch Hole Motor
SC733, SC726
SC722
SC732, SC736
SC727, SC730
SC724, SC728, SC740,
SC741
SC739
SC725
SC729
4-67
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
Finisher B468/B674 Jam Codes
30 July 2004
Finisher B478/B706 Jam Codes

No.
141
142
143
144
145
148
149
150
151
153
155
156
158
Location
Entrance Sensor
Exit Sensor
Upper Transport Motor
Shift Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Stapler Unit
Feed Out Belt Motor
Punch Hole Motor
Z-Fold Jogger Motor (B706 Only)
Related SC Code
SC733, SC726
SC722
SC732, SC736
SC724, SC738, SC740, SC741
SC725
SC729
Mailbox B471 Jam Codes

No.
161
162
163
164
165
Location
Vertical Transport Sensor 1 (CN201)
Related SC Code
-----------
Cover Interposer Tray B470 Jam Codes

No.
166
167
168
Location
Feed or Pull-out Sensor
Exit Sensor
Bottom Plate Position Sensor
Related SC Code
----SC750
4-68
30 July 2004
Z-Folding Unit B660 Jam Codes

Location
Paper Feed Sensor: Paper Late
Paper Feed Sensor: Paper Remains
Fold Timing Sensor: Paper Late
Fold Timing Sensor: Paper Remains
Leading Edge Exit Sensor: Paper Late
Leading Edge Exit Sensor: Paper Remains
Upper Stopper Path Sensor: Paper Late
Upper Stopper Path Sensor: Paper Remains
Lower Exit Sensor: Paper Late
Lower Exit Sensor: Paper Remains
Upper Exit Sensor: Paper Late
Upper Exit Sensor: Paper Remains
Paper Fold Motor Lock
Lower Stopper Motor Lock
Upper Stopper Motor Lock
4-69
manuals4you.com
Related SC Code
-------------------------------
Troubleshooting
No.
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
181
182
183
184
185
30 July 2004
4.3.5 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT

These codes are also used in the SMC report.
Codes that have the same number in this series are identified by an additional 4digit hexadecimal number.
SC No.
820
0001
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
000A
000B
000C
000D
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
00FF
Symptom
TLB conversion (store) exception
error
TLB miss (load) exception error
TLB miss (store) exception error
Command bus exception error
Data bus exception error
Break exception error
Potential sensor exception error
Overflow exception error
UTLB miss exception error
Allocation 0 error
Allocation 1 error
Allocation 2 error
Allocation 3 error
Allocation 4 error
Allocation 5 error
Non-initialization allocation error
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
0601
0602
0605
0606
0607
060A
060B
060C
060D
060E
0610

Break point exception error
CPU timer 2 allocation set error
820
0612
ASIC allocation error
820
06FF
CPU master clock error
4-70
Possible Cause
Unexpected error in CPU device:
Boot monitor or self-diagnostic
program corrupted
CPU defective
Local bus defective
CPU device error
CPU device error

ASIC device error
CPU device error

ASIC device error
Peripheral device defective
CPU device error
Error in CPU initialization data (ASIC
error)
30 July 2004

Symptom
Command cache error
Possible Cause
820
820
0709
070A
Data cache error

Data cache clear error
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
0801
0804
0807
0808
0809
080A
4002
4003
4004
4005
TLB virtual address error

TLB global error
UTLB miss error
TLB read miss error
TLB write miss error
TLB mode file error
Single-precision calculation error
Double-precision calculation error
Exception error
Exception mask error
822
3003
HDD timeout
822
823
823
823
824
826
826
3004
6101
6104
6105
1401
1501
15FF
Self-diagnostic command error

MAC address SUM error
PHY chip ID illegal
PHY loopback error
NVRAM verify error
Clock error
RTC non-detection error
826
0201
Resident memory verify error
828
0101
Boost trap code (CODE) error
828
828
0104
0105
ROM FS error
Forgery prevention error
829
829
0301
0302
835
1102
Option memory 0 verify error

Option memory 0 configuration
information error
Verify error
835
110C DMA verify error
835
1120
836
837
838
1601
1602
2701
CPU error (controller board defective)
HDD defective
HDD connector disconnected, defective
ASIC device error (controller board
defective)
HDD defective
Loopback connector nondetection

Font ROM 0 error
Font ROM 1 error
Verify error
CPU cache defective

Memory error (insufficient speed)
CPU device error
Boot mode setting for CPU error
Insufficient memory
CPU device defective (controller board
defective)
NVRAM defective
Optional NVRAM defective
Incompatible NVRAM installed
NVRAM battery defective
Memory on controller board defective
RAM DIMM defective
Software storage error (re-install
software)
ROM device error
Forgery prevention chip defective
Forgery prevention chip error
Replace the controller, ROM, or RAM
DIMM
Controller board internal memory error
RAM DIMM defective
Loopback connector error (controller

board defective)
Loopback connector not set
4-71
manuals4you.com
Troubleshooting
SC No.
820 0702

SC No.
30 July 2004
Symptom
Possible Cause
853 D
IEEE802 11b card startup error

Not used.
854 D
IEEE802 11b card access error

Not used.
855 D
IEEE802 11b card error

Not used.
IEEE802 11b card connection board error
Not used.
Address book data error
The address book in the hard disk is
accessed. An error is detected in
the address book data; address book

data is not read; or data is not written
into the address book.
NOTE: To recover from the error, do
any of the following
countermeasures:
Format the address book by using
SP5-832-008 (all data in the address
bookincluding the user codes and
countersis initialized)
Initialize the user data by using SP5832-006 and -007 (the user codes
and counters are recovered when the
main switch is turned on).
Replace the hard disk (the user
codes and counters are recovered
when the main switch is turned on).
Printer error
The printer program cannot be
continued.
Net file error

The management file for net files is
corrupted; net files are not normally
read.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the

document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
Other system SCs
The controller received an unknown
SC code from the engine.

Network error
The ASIC program of GW controller
cannot be continued.
856 D
870 B
920
925
992
993
4-72
Data corruption
Defective hard disk
Defective software
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
Contact your product specialist.
Defective ASIC
Defective GW controller
30 July 2004
OTHER PROBLEMS (B064/B140 SERIES)
4.4 OTHER PROBLEMS (B064/B140 SERIES)

4.4.1 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
FU1
FU101
FU103
FU104
FU105
FU106
FU107
FU108
FU109
FU110
FU111
Rating
115 V
210~230V
2A/125V
6.3A/250V
12A/125V
6.3A/250V
6.3A/125V
6.3A/250V
6.3A/125V
6.3A/250V
6.3A/125V
6.3A/250V
6.3A/125V
6.3A/250V
6.3A/125V
6.3A/250V
6.3A/125V
6.3A/250V
6.3A/125V
6.3A/250V
6.3A/125V
6.3A/250V
6.3A/125V
6.3A/250V
Symptom at Power On
Anti-condensation heater does not operate.
No response.
SC510 is displayed.
Nothing displayed on LCD.
Door Open is displayed.
ADF does not operate.
SC121 is displayed.
Finisher does not work.
Door Open is displayed.
SC510 is displayed.
Nothing is displayed on LCD.
Troubleshooting
Fuse
4.4.2 COMMON PROBLEMS

Problem
Dirty Copies
Jam Fusing Unit
Jam Fusing Unit
Jam Original
Lines (black or white)
Misfeed Fusing Unit
Offset
Poor separation
SC300 ~ SC306
Check
Fusing Unit
Fusing Unit
Fusing Unit
ADF
Around the Drum
Fusing Unit
Fusing Unit
Transfer Belt Unit
Around the Drum
Skew Original
Toner on transfer belt
Wrinkling
Inspect, Clean, Replace

Pressure roller
Hot roller
Hot roller strippers
Pick-up, paper feed, separation rollers
Cleaning blade, cleaning brush
Hot roller
Hot roller
Transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade
Charge corona wire, charge corona grid,
charge corona wire cleaner.
Pick-up, paper feed, separation rollers
Transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade
Pressure roller
ADF
Transfer Belt Unit
Fusing Unit
4-73
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
4.4.3 FREQUENT PAPER JAMS

If there are frequent paper jams, check SP7504 in section 5. Service Tables. If
these locations have frequent jams, do the procedures described below.
Symptom 1: Jams when paper is fed from a by-pass tray that is not used
frequently
If the customer does not use the by-pass tray frequently, the rollers can become
worn.
1. Visually check the by-pass tray pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. If these rollers are paler than the rollers in paper trays that are more frequently
used, replace the rollers in the by-pass tray.
NOTE: For more details, see 3. Replacement and Adjustment, 3.11.12 ByPass Tray Rollers.
Symptom 2: Jams with noise from the paper feed unit
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B064R603.WMF
1. Remove the paper feed unit. For details, see 3. Replace and Adjustment,
3.11.8 Paper Feed Unit.
2. Loosen screw [A].
3. Push the motor [B] toward the tray side, then tighten the screw [A].
4. Loosen screws [C] and [D], let the spring move the unit to the correct position,
then tighten the screws.
4-74
30 July 2004
Symptom 3: Other
1. If none of the two symptoms 1 or 2 applies, do this procedure.
2. Use SP7504 to check the jam counts and find which SPs have high counts.
3. From the table and illustration below, find which gears must be replaced.
Example: For tray 1, if SP7504-012 is high, replace gear A, or if SP7504-008 is
high, replace gear B.
Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
SP7504 12
Gear [A]
SP7504 8
Gear [B]
Gear [A]
SP7504 9
SP7504 10
Gear [B]
Gear [A]
Gear [B]
Gear [A]
SP7504 11
Gear [B]
Troubleshooting
4. Clean the shafts and replace the necessary gears.

5. Replace a gear if its cutout and arrow are not in the same position.
[A]
[B]
B064R966.WMF
6. When you replace Gear [A] or Gear [B], be sure to put the metal face on the
outer side, and the arrow must be in view.
7. If a replacement gear is not available, do this as a temporary procedure:
1) Remove the paper feed unit.
2) Remove the gear.
3) Clean the gear shaft and inside the gear.
4) Attach the gear.
5) Install the paper feed unit.
4-75
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF. After he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >
OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on.
It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the
machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169
to 1.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP 5169 from 1 to 0.
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed
servicing the machine.
The Administrator will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON.
5-1
Service
Tables
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
NOTE: This function is not used on B064 series machines.
30 July 2004
To Enter and Exit the Service Mode


The Copy SP or PM Counter items are displayed. If the printer or
scanner/printer option is installed, the Printer SP and Scanner SP items are
also available.
To enter normal Copy SP mode, touch Copy SP.
4. When you are finished, press Exit to exit the SP mode, then press again to
return to the Copier Window.
To Switch to the Copy Window for Test Printing

1. In the SP mode display, press Copy Window to switch to the copy operation
screen when you need to select paper for a test print.
2. Use the copy window (copier mode) to select the appropriate settings (paper
size, etc.) for the test print.
3. Press Start
to execute the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from
step 1.
Using the SP Mode

SP command numbers can be entered directly (if you know the entire number) or
the command can be selected from the menus.
Direct Entry
SP5831 (Initial Setting Clear) an executable SP that initializes the User Tools
settings, can be executed immediately by just entering the numbers.
1. Press
2. Press Enter
.
.
3. Press Execute on the touch panel.

If you know all seven digits of the SP code, enter the seven numbers and press
Execute.
However, if you do not know all the numbers, enter only the first four numbers of
the seven-digit SP and press Enter
. The display goes immediately to the first
SP of that group. Then you can use the buttons to browse to the desired selection.
5-2
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Button Selection Entry

1. Refer to the SP Mode Tables at the end of this section to find the SP that you
want to adjust.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set, and press
. The small entry box on the right is activated
and displays the default or the current setting below.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy
window and select the settings for the test print. Press Start
twice, then
press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode
display.
7. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
5-3
Service
Tables
5. To enter a setting
Press
to enter a minus sign. Then use the keypad to enter the appropriate
number. The number you enter will write over the previous setting.
Press
to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
30 July 2004
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
14APR 2002 03:25
SP Mode (Service)
Open All
Close All
Copy Window
SP1XXX
Group
SP2XXX
X-XXX-XXX
SP Direct
Exit
COPY: SP1-001-001
Page
SP3XXX
Line
SP4XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
21
Line
Initial
Page
(10)
SP7XXX
SP8XXX
Group
Prev Page
Next Page
B140S907.WMF
(1):
(2):
Open All.
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
Close All.
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
(3):
Copy Window.
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SP
mode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.
(4):
SP Direct.
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number, then press
. (SP Direct must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Direct if it is not highlighted.)
(5):
Exit.
Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
(6):
SPnxxx.
Press any group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP code list for SP1-nnn, press SP1XXX. If an SP has sublevels, it
is marked with a right pointing triangle.
(7):
Group.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
(8):
Page.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
(9):
Line.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
(10): Prev Page or Next Page.

Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
5-4
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SP Mode Print (SMC Print)

You can print an SMC Report to check the machines condition. The SMC Report
gives a list of the SP commands and their settings.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
021
022
023
SP Print Mode (SMC Print)

In the SP mode, push Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the
paper size, then push Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to make sure that
all the information is printed. Push SP Window to go back to the SP mode, select
the necessary SP Print Mode, and push Execute.
All (Data List)
SP (Mode Data List)
User Program Data
Logging Data
Self-Diagnostic Report
Non-Default (Prints only SPs that are set to values other than defaults.)
NIB Summary (Configuration, Systemlog, Nvramlog)
Capture Log
Copier User Program (Copy Management Report)
Scanner SP
Scanner User Program (Scanner Management Report)
Service
Tables
5990
5-5
RESETS
30 July 2004
5.2 RESETS
5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801
Before shipping, the SP mode data settings are printed in an SMC Report and
attached to the exposure glass of the machine for your reference. Store this report
in a safe place (next to the toner collection bottle, for example). It is a list of all the
SP initial settings. Refer to this list if you need to initialize one or more SPs. The
initial SP settings are also written in the SP mode tables at the end of this section.
As a rule, you should always print an SMC Report before initializing or adjusting
the SP settings. The SMC Report provides a concise list of all the SP commands
and their current settings. The report can be used for reference if the service
manual is not available.
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP7003-001 (B064)
SP8381 (B140)
SP5811-001:
SP5907:
Electrical total counter value

Machine serial number
Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
1. Execute SP5990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.

2. Open SP mode 5801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to
initialize all modules.
B064 Series
No.
1
2
3
What It Initializes
All modules
Engine
6
7
8
SCS (System Control

Service)
/SRM
IMH
MCS (Memory Control
Service)
Copier application
Fax application
Printer application
9
10
Scanner application
Network application
11
NCS (Network Control

Service)
14
15
DCS
UCS
4
5
Comments
Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process
settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
Initializes the image file system.
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents.
Initializes all copier application settings.
Not used.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer SP bit
switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails, and
initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and
the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses
also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor
settings, and the TELNET settings.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery & Receive Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Directory Control Service) settings.
5-6
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
RESETS
No.
What It Initializes
1 All Clear
2 Engine Clear
3
SCS
IMH Memory Clear
MCS
6
7
8
Copier application
Fax application
Printer application
Scanner application
10
Web Service/
Network application
11
NCS
14
15
16
Clear DCS Setting
17
CCS
Clear UCS Setting

MIRS Setting
Comments
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy
process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control
Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM
update information.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored
documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Not used.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer
SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP
modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails,
and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a
PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP
addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)
settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service)
settings.
4. Press Execute, then follow the prompts on the display to complete the
procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
Execute SP2115 Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment
Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments
( 3.14).
Do the touch screen calibration ( 3.15).
Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been
changed from their factory settings.
Execute SP3001-002 ID Sensor Initial Setting
6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
5-7
Service
Tables
B140 Series
RESETS
30 July 2004
5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET

Software Reset
The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Do one of these two
steps.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-orPush and hold down
together for over 10 seconds. When the machine
beeps once, release both buttons. After Now loading. Please wait is displayed for
a few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is ready for operation.
Resetting the System

The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this
procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the User Tools key.
3. Hold down the # key and touch the System Setting key.
4. A confirmation message will be displayed, then press Yes.
Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only

The copy/document server settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults
with this procedure.
2. Push the User Tools key.
3. Hold down the # key and touch the Copy/Document Server Features key.
4. A message will be displayed, then press Yes.
Resetting Scanner Features Only

The scanner settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this
procedure
2. Push the User Tools key.
3. Hold down the # key and touch Scanner Features key.
4. A message will be displayed, then press Yes
5-8
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
TEST PATTERN PRINTING
5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING

5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-003
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments ( 3.14) but
most are used primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU.
NOTE: Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely.
Otherwise, an SC may occur.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2902-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press
the table below.)
. (See
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes to select the test
pattern for printing.
4. Press Copy Window to open the copy window, then select the settings for the
test print (paper size, etc.)
twice (ignore the Place Original messages) to start the test
6. After checking the test pattern, press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP
mode display.
7. Exit the SP mode.
5-9
Service
Tables
5. Press Start
print.
30 July 2004
Test Pattern Table

These patterns can be selected for SP2902-003
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Test Pattern
None
Alternating Dot Pattern (1-dot)
Grid Pattern (1-dot): 0ch
Grid Pattern (1-dot pair)
Checkered Flag Pattern
Horizontal Line (2-dot)
Vertical Line (2-dot)
Cross Stitch (Horizontal)
Cross Stitch (Vertical)
Argyle Pattern
Trimming Area
Full Dot Pattern
Black Band (Vertical)
Black Band (Horizontal)
Stair
Blank Image
Grid Pattern (1-dot): 0ch (with external data)
Trimming Area (with external data)
Argyle Pattern (with external data)
Outside Data
5-10
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
5.3.2 IPU FRONT/BACK TEST PATTERNS: SP2902-001,002

Front side pattern (SP2902-001). Generated by the IPU in place of data
scanned from the front side of an original (CCDSBU). Generated in the
scanner image correction circuit.
Back side pattern. (SP2902-002. Generated by the IPU in place of data scanner
from the back side of an original (CISSBU). Generated in the scanner image
correction circuit.
The IPU test patterns are primarily used for design purposes. However, they can
be used as follows:
To confirm that the IPU is processing images correctly.
To fine tune the image processing parameters
To help trace the causes of poor images. For example, if the IPU test patterns
are normal when the machine is producing poor quality images, then the problem
must be after the IPU.
1. Enter the SP mode, select SP2902.
3. Scroll then select the number of the test pattern that you want to print (see the
table below).
4. Press
6. Press Start
to start the test print.
7. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.

NOTE: Patterns 6, 8, 9, and 11 are the best choices for testing and confirming
the operation of the IPU.
5-11
Service
Tables
2. Select 001 to print a test pattern for the front side, or select 002 to print a test
pattern for the back side.
30 July 2004
Test Pattern Table

These patterns can be selected for both SP2902-001 and 002.
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Test Pattern
None
Independent Dot (1-dot)
Grid Pattern (1-dot)
Vertical Stripes
Grayscale Horizontal (16-level)
Grayscale Vertical )16-level)
Grayscale Vertical-Horizontal (16-level)
Cross Pattern
Argyle Pattern
Density Patch (256-level)
Trimming Area
Bandwidth (Vertical)
Bandwidth (Horizontal)
Auto Create Vertical 1-dot Line (Main Scan)
Auto Create Horizontal 1-dot Line (Sub Scan)
Auto Create 1-dot Independent Dots
Auto Create Grid 1-dot Line
Auto Create Vertical Stripes
Auto Create Horizontal Stripes
Auto Create Grayscale Horizontal (20 mm)
Auto Create Grayscale Vertical (20 mm)
Auto Create Argyle
5-12
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
5.3.3 IPU PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-004

This test pattern is generated in the application input processing circuit in the IPU.
The operation path is as follows:
Application input Memory Printer
This test pattern is primarily used for design purposes, but it can also be used to
trace the source of problems beyond the IPU (in the application input or BICU)
which are causing poor print quality.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2902-004.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press
the table below.)
Pattern
Off
Vertical Grayscale 20
Horizontal Grayscale 40
Caterpillar
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes to select the test
pattern for printing.
5. Press Start
print.
twice (ignore the Place Original messages) to start the test
6. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.

7. Switch the machine off and on.
5-13
Service
Tables
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
. (See
SOFTWARE UPDATE
30 July 2004
5.4 SOFTWARE UPDATE

The cards that are necessary for the software update, and the update procedures,
are different for each machine:
Machine
B140 Series
B064 Series
Card
SD Card
IC Memory Card
Procedure
( 5.4.1)
( 5.4.2)
For more, refer to the applicable section below.
5.4.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE: B140 SERIES

SD cards are used to update the software and to back up important data. Here is a
list of the firmware modules that can be updated or restored from an SD card:
GW controller software
BCU software
LCDC (operation panel) software
Network Sys (network) software
Web Sys (Web Image Monitor)
Document Server software
NFA (Net File) software
Printer application software
Scanner application software
DESS (encryption module) software
Important: Here are some important points for when you use IC cards.
Do not connect or remove a SD card with the machine power turned on.
Do not turn the power off while the machine downloads data from an SD card.
The SD card is a precision item. Use it carefully. Do not keep the card in a
location where there is high temperature, high humidity, or light from the sun.
Do not bend an SD card, make scratches on it, or apply strong shock or vibration
to it.
5-14
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Doing the Software Update Procedure

An SD card with the software downloaded to
it is necessary for this procedure.
[B]
1. Turn the main switch off.

2. Remove the SD card slot cover from the
controller.
[A]
3. Hold the SD card [A] (the surface with

printing must be away from the front of
the machine), and install the SD card in
slot C3 [B].
5. Stop until the version update screen is displayed. If the SD card contains more
than one software application, the screen will be almost the same as the one
below. The screen below shows that the SC card contains two applications:
Engine and Printer.
PCcard -> ROM Page01
Engi 1)
ne(
ROM: XXXXXXX
ROM: X.XX
NEW: XXXXXXX
NEW: X.XX
P ri
nter(
2)
ROM: XXXXXXX
ROM: X.XX
NEW: XXXXXXX
NEW: X.XX
Exi 0)
t(
B140S901.WMF
5-15
Service
Tables
B140S908.WMF
SOFTWARE UPDATE
30 July 2004
6. To select the item for upgrade, touch the selection on the touch panel, or push
the corresponding key on the 10-key pad (1 to 5) of the operation panel. The
number in parentheses tells you which key to push. When you make a
selection, the [Verify(./*)] and [Update(#)] buttons come on the screen.
PCcard -> ROM Page01
Engi 1)
ne(
ROM: XXXXXXX
ROM: X.XX
NEW: XXXXXXX
NEW: X.XX
P ri
nter(
2)
ROM: XXXXXXX
ROM: X.XX
NEW: XXXXXXX
NEW: X.XX
V eriy(/*)
f .
Exi 0)
t(
U pdate(
#)
B140S902.WMF
If you push [Exit] (or the [0] key), you go back to the usual operation screen.
Push the [Start] key on the operation panel to select and download all the
options shown on the screen.
Push the [Clear] key on the operation panel if you want to cancel your
selections and make new ones.
ROM: This is the number and other version information of the ROM
firmware installed in the machine at this time.
NEW: This is the number and other version information of the firmware on
the SD card.
7. With the selected items shown in reverse color, push the [Update] button or the
[#] key on the operation panel to start the update.
After you push [Update]:
PCcard -> ROM
ng
Loadi
P ri
nter
****_
B140S903.WMF
The middle bar shows the name of the module that the machine updates at this
time. (The example above shows that the machine updates the Printer module
at this time.)
The bottom bar is a progress bar. The _ marks in the progress bar are
replaced by * marks. This progress bar cannot be displayed during the
firmware update for the operation panel. But, the LED of the [Start] key on the
operation panel changes from red to green to show that the update of the
operation panel firmware continues.
5-16
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SOFTWARE UPDATE
When the update is completed, you will see this screen.

PCcard -> ROM
U pdate D one
P ri
nter
B140S904.WMF
After the firmware update, you will see Update Done in the first bar. The name
of the module in the bottom bar is the name of the last module that was updated
(only the name of the last module is shown, if several modules were been
updated).
8. Turn the power off and on. Then, select the items that you updated, and then
push the [Verify] button. This is to check that the modules were updated
correctly.
If you see Verify Error in the first bar on the screen, then you must do the
procedure again for the module shown in the bottom bar.
PCcard -> ROM
Service
Tables
V eri Error
fy
P ri
nter
B140S905.WMF
NOTE: The Verify procedure is not necessary but it is strongly

recommended.
9. After the firmware is correctly updated, turn the main power switch off.
10. Push the SD card in a small distance to release it, then pull it out of the slot.
11. Turn the main power switch on, and check that the machine operates correctly.
5-17
SOFTWARE UPDATE
30 July 2004
Errors During Firmware Update

PCcard -> ROM
N o V ald D ata E24
i
B140S906.WMF
If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be shown in the first
line. The error code consists of the letter E and a number (E20, for example).
Error Message Table
NO.
20
21
22
23
24
30
31
32
33
MEANING
Cannot map logical address

Cannot access memory
Cannot decompress
compressed data
Error occurred when ROM
update program started
SD card access error
No HDD available for stamp
data download
Data incorrect for continuous
download
Data incorrect after download
interrupted
Incorrect SD card version
35
Module mismatch - Correct

module is not on the SD card
Module mismatch Module on
SD card is not for this machine
36
Cannot write module Cause

other than E34, E35
34
40
42
43
44
50
Engine module download failed

Operation panel module
download failed
Stamp data module download
failed
Controller module download
failed
Electronic confirmation check
failed
SOLUTION
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a

different SD card.
HDD connection not correct, or replace hard disk.
The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or data
is damaged.
Controller program defective. If the second attempt
fails, replace the controller board.
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a
different SD card.
HDD connection not correct or replace hard disks.
Install the SD card with the remaining data necessary
for the download, then re-start the procedure.
Do the recovery procedure for the module, then
repeat the installation procedure.
The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or data
is damaged.
The data on the SD is not correct. Get the correct
data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD
card is for a different machine. Get the correct data
then install again.
then install again.
Replace the data for the module on the SD card and
try again, or replace the BCU board.
try again, or replace the LCDC.
try again, or replace the hard disk.
tray again, or replace the controller board.
then install again.
5-18
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel

Use this procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
1. Turn the copier main switch off.
2. Put the SD card into service slot C3.
3. Turn the copier main switch on.
4. Stop until the card utility screen is displayed.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, the initial screen opens in English.
6. Touch [Opepanel.DOM].
7. Touch [UpDate(#)] to start the update.
While the data downloads, the operation panel goes off.
The LED on the [Start] key flashes red at 1/2 second intervals for
approximately 6 minutes.
When the update is completed, the [Start] key starts to flash at 1-second
intervals.
Downloading Stamp Data

After you replace or format the HDD, download the stamp data from the controller
firmware to the hard disk.
2. Select SP5853 then press Execute.
3. Obey the instructions on the screen to complete the procedure.
5-19
Service
Tables
8. Turn the copier main power switch off, remove the SD card, then turn the
copier on again.
SOFTWARE UPDATE
30 July 2004
NVRAM Data Upload/Download

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Do this procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
NOTE: Always upload this data to an SD card before you replace the NVRAM.
1. Before you turn the machine off, do SP5990 001 (SMC Print). This gives you a
record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
2. Turn the copier main power switch off.
3. Put the SD card into service slot C3, then turn the copier on.
4. Do SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) then push the Execute key
When uploading is completed, a file is coped to the NVRAM folder on the SD
card. The file is saved to this path and filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example for Serial Number B0700017:
NVRAM\B0700017.NV
5. To prevent an error during the download, write the serial number of the
machine on the SD card.
NOTE: This is necessary because NVRAM data from more than one machine
can be uploaded to the same SD card.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM
Do this procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the
machine.
If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between
the controller and BCU is defective, the NVRAM data download will not complete
correctly.
If the download does not complete correctly, do the download procedure again.
If this does not complete correctly, input the NVRAM data manually from the
SMC print that you made before you uploaded the NVRAM data.
1. Turn the copier main power switch off.
2. Put the SD card with the NVRAM data into service slot C3.
3. Turn the copier main power switch on.
4. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and push the Execute key.
NOTE: The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial
number of the machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the
download will not complete correctly.
This procedure downloads the following data to the NVRAM:
Total Count
C/O, P/O Count
5-20
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SOFTWARE UPDATE
5.4.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE: B064 SERIES

IC cards are used to update the software and to back up important data. Here is a
list of the items that can be updated or restored from an IC card:
BCU software
GW controller software
LCDC (operation panel) software
Scanner (DIMM) software
PHY: NCS (NIB) software
PHY: NFA (NetFile) software
Stamp data
NVRAM software
Important: Here are some important points to keep in mind when handling and
using IC cards.
Never insert or remove a IC card with the machine power switched on.
Never switch the power off while the machine is downloading data from an IC
card.
The IC card is a precision item so handle it carefully. Never store the card in a
location subject to high temperature, high humidity, or direct sunlight.
Never bend the card, scratch it, or subject it to strong shock or vibration.
If an error occurs during downloading, an error code appears. For full details on
these error codes and how to recover the machine, see Troubleshooting
Program Download (Section 4.1).
5-21
Service
Tables
First, install the BCU software, then the GW controller software, then the others
can be upgraded in any order.
SOFTWARE UPDATE
30 July 2004
GW Controller/BCU Update
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Disconnect the ADF plug, remove the rear upper cover (
the IC card slot cover ( x 1).
x 2), then remove
3. With its a side facing up, insert the IC card into the slot.
4. Switch the machine on.
5. Wait for the update screen to open.
PC Card -> NEW
System (1)
Copy (2)
Engine (3)
Page 01
ROM: B0655102
ROM: 0.4.6
ROM: B0655102
ROM: 0. 4. 6
ROM: B0655120
ROM: 2.19
NEW: B0655102
NEW: 0.4.6
NEW: B0655102
NEW: 0. 4. 6
NEW: B0655120
NEW: 2.19
Exit (0)
B140S909.WMF
NOTE: 1) In the ROM number displays, the first line is the software number and
the second line is the version number.
2) The left column displays the current software and version numbers of
the software in the machine, and the column on the right displays the
same information for the data on the IC card.
6. Press the appropriate item on the touch-panel.
For the GW controller, press System (1) and Copy (2) on the touch-panel,
or you can press
or
on the operation panel.
For the BCU, press Engine (3) on the touch-panel, or you can press
on
To update all, press two buttons simultaneously.
PC Card -> NEW
System (1)
Copy (2)
Engine (3)
Verify (./*)
Page 01
ROM: B0655102
ROM: 0.4.6
ROM: B0655102
ROM: 0. 4. 6
ROM: B0655120
ROM: 2.19
Exit (0)
NEW: B0655102
NEW: 0.4.6
NEW: B0655102
NEW: 0. 4. 6
NEW: B0655120
NEW: 2.19
Update (#)
B140S910.WMF
7. To start the installation, press Update (#) on the touch panel, or press
on
8. The installation screen opens. As the installation progresses, the dashes on the
display are replaced by asterisks (****----)
9. When Power Off/On is displayed, switch the machine off and remove the IC
card.
5-22
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Forced Update
If the download does not complete normally and you cannot restart the installation
procedure, execute a forced installation.
1. Switch off the machine.
2. Remove the controller cover and set DIP SW1 to ON.
3. Make sure that the IC card is inserted correctly and switch the machine on.
4. Repeat from Step 5 of the previous section.
NOTE: If the IC card of a different machine is used by mistake to start the
installation, the operation panel will return a message: Download
Error or No Matching Data. Then the machine will log SC999.
Stamp Data Update

After the hard disk has been initialized, the preset stamp data must be downloaded
to the hard disk.
x 2), then remove

In the lower right corner of the Download Watermark screen, press OK on the
touch panel.
5-23
Service
Tables
3. With the A side facing up, insert the printer IC card into the slot.
SOFTWARE UPDATE
30 July 2004
Operation Panel Software Update

x 2), then remove
3. With its A side facing up, put the operation panel IC card into the slot.
Press OpePanel.EXP then press Update (#).
The installation download starts in about 9 seconds.
The operation panel goes off and the Start
LED flashes red during
downloading.
When the download is completed, the Start
LED flashes green.
6. Switch the machine off, remove the IC card, then switch the machine on.
NOTE: 1) During the download, the operation panel switches off and only the Start
key flashes red.
2) You must wait until the Start key stops flashing red and starts flashing
green.
3) If a power failure occurs during downloading, E32 (Reboot After Card
Insert) is logged. Remove the IC card, switch off the machine. Insert the
card again and switch on the machine to restart downloading.
5-24
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Scanner Update
x 2), then remove
3. With its a side facing up, insert the scanner IC card into the slot.
Press Opt DIMM Scn (1) then press Update (#).
When Power Off/On is displayed, the download is completed.
NIB Update
x 2), then remove
3. With its a side facing up, insert the NIB data IC card into the slot.
Press Network Support (1) then press Update (#).
When Power Off/On is displayed, the download is completed.
NetFile Firmware Update

Netfile firmware controls jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC
and the DeskTopBinder software.
x 2), then remove
3. With its a side facing up, insert the NetFile IC card into the slot.
Press Network DocBox (1) then press Update (#).
When Power Off/On is displayed, the installation is completed.
5-25
Service
Tables
SOFTWARE UPDATE
30 July 2004
NVRAM Update
This procedure describes updating the NVRAM firmware ( 3.12.7).
NOTE: Before updating NVRAM, the contents of NVRAM should be uploaded to a
PC memory card and then downloaded after updating the NVRAM
firmware ( 3.12.7).
x 2), then remove
3. With its a side facing up, insert the NVRAM IC card into the slot.
NOTE: The success of the download cannot be guaranteed if the front door is
closed during the download execution.
6. After the download is completed, a message on the operation panel will prompt
you to switch the machine off and on.
The NVRAM download execution updates everything except the following SP
functions:
SP7003 ***
SP7006 ***
SP7007 ***
Total Count
C/O, P/O
Other Device Counters
Firmware Update Notes

GW Controller Ver. 3.51 (or later), Scanner 2.08 Ver. 2.08 (or later) support
SMTP authentication.
When installing Ver. 4.01 or later, make sure that you install the GW Controller
firmware and other firmware as a set if the Copy Connector Kit or MLB option are
not installed.
If the Copy Connector Kit or MLB is installed, make sure that you have the
correct firmware for installation. You will need the set of firmware that supports
the Copy Connector Kit and MLB options.
When updating BCU firmware Ver. 4.x or later, use GW controller firmware Ver.
3x or later.
When updating GW controller firmware Ver. 3x or later, use BCU firmware Ver.
4.x or later.
5-26
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE
5.5 SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE

Overview
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP5873) copies application programs
from one SD card to a different card.
The machine has three SD card slots. Slots 1 and 2 are used for application
programs, and Slot 3 is used for servicing only.
Important
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program
to the target SD card.
Always use a new SD card. Do not use the SD card if it was previously used with
a computer. Correct operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from the
card to another card. The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is
licensed to use the application program, and the CE may need to check the SD
card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
Licensing does not let you copy PostScript data to a different SD card. But, you
can copy an application from an SD card to an SD card that holds PostScript
data.
Licensing and security restrictions do not let you copy the Data Overwrite
Security B660 application to a different SD card. But, you can copy other data to
the original SD card that holds the B660 application.
If an SD card was used to combine applications on that card, that SD card
cannot be used for a different function.
5-27
Service
Tables
Three SD cards cannot be used at the same time for applications. If the customer
must use more than two SD cards, more than one application can be stored on the
same SD card.
SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE
30 July 2004
Move Exec
Do this procedure to move an application from one SD card to another.
2. Put the destination SD card in SD Card Slot 1.
3. Put the source SD card into SD Card Slot 3. This SD card holds the application
program that you want to copy to the destination SD card in Slot 1.
4. Turn the main switch on.
6. Do SP5873-001 Move Exec.
7. Obey the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
11. Check that the application programs combined on the SD card in Slot 1 operate
correctly.
Undo Exec
Do this procedure to repair the original source SD card if you accidentally move the
application to a different SD card.
2. Put the original source SD card in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is
copied back into this card.
3. Put the original destination SD card (with the stored application program that
you want to return to the original source SD card in Slot 1) in SD card Slot 3.
5. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec)
6. Obey the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
8. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 1
9. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 3, then put it in SD card Slot 1.
11. Check that the application programs run correctly.
5-28
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5.6 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

5.6.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY
Notation
(B064 only)
(B140 only)
[range/step]
Italics
*
DFU
Japan only
SEF
LEF
What it means
This is added to the title of an SP that is for the B064/B065 only. *1
This is added to the title of an SP that is for the
B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228 only. *1
Example: [9~+9/0.1 mm]
The default setting can be adjusted in 0.1mm steps in the range 9.
Note: The default setting for each SP mode is shown on the screen
in the Initial box immediately below the entry box. Some of the
default settings for the B064 Series and B140 Series are slightly
different, so be sure to check the Initial box on the SP mode
screen.
Comments added for reference.
An asterisk marks the SPs that are reset to their factory default
settings after an NVRAM reset.
Denotes Design or Factory Use. Do not change this value.
The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
Short Edge Feed
Long Edge Feed
Service
Tables
*1: SP titles without B064 only or B140 only are for the B064 and the B140
series machines.
5-29
30 July 2004
5.6.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLE

SP1xxx Feed
1001*
Leading Edge Registration

Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern
(SP2902-003, No.18).
[9~+9/0.1mm]
Specification: 32mm
1002*
Side-to-Side Registration
Adjusts printing side-to-side registration for each feed station, using test pattern
(SP2902-003, No.18).
These SPs should be adjusted after replacing the laser synchronization detector or
the laser optical unit.
Tray-1
[9~+9/0.1 mm]
Tray-2
Tray-3
Tray-4 (Japan only)
By-pass Tray
LCT
Duplex Tray
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
1003
001*
002
003*
Registration Buckle Adjustment

Adjusts the registration motor timing. This timing determines the amount of paper
buckle at registration. (A higher setting causes more buckling.)
[9~+9/1 mm]
Tray LCT
Duplex Tray
By-pass Tray
1007
By-pass Feed Paper Size Display

Use this SP to confirm the size of the paper detected in the by-pass tray if paper is
skewing during feeding.
1008*
Duplex Fence Adjustment

Adjusts the distance between front and rear fences. A smaller value shortens the
distance. If the fences are too far apart, skewing may occur in the duplex tray. If
the fences are too close, the paper may be creased in the duplex unit.
[5~+5/0.1 mm]
5-30
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Fusing Idling (B064 only)

This setting controls the length of time that the hot roller turns freely with no paper
in the fusing unit. This increases the temperature of the hot roller.
Adjusts the fusing idling time:
[0~900/1 s]
Increase this value when fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is not completed
because of low room temperature.
1104*
Fusing Temperature Control

Selects the fusing temperature control mode.
[0~1/1]
0: On/Off control
1: Phase control
If power supply to the machine is unstable, select Phase Control. The machine
must be switched off and on after this setting is changed for the new setting to take
effect.
Phase control could interfere with radio or TV reception.
1105*
Fusing Temperature Adjustment

Adjusts the fusing temperature of the hot roller for plain paper, OHP or thick paper.
Normal Time (Center
Fusing temperature during the ready condition (and
Thermistor)
during printing for B064)
B064: [150~230/1 degree C]
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Normal Time (End
Fusing temperature during the ready condition
Thermistors) (B140 Only)
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
OHP (Center Thermistor)
Fusing temperature during printing:
B064: [150~230/1 degree C]
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
OHP (End Thermistor)
(B140 Only)
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Thick Paper (Center
Thermistor)
B064: [180~205/1 degree C]
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Thick Paper (End
Thermistors) (B140 Only)
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Normal Paper (Center
Thermistor) (B140 Only)
B140: [150~230/1 degree C]
Normal Paper (End
Thermistor) (B140 Only)
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
1106
001
002
Fusing Temperature Display

Center Temperature
Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the
thermistor at the center of the hot roller.
End Temperature
Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the
thermistors at the ends of the hot roller.
5-31
Service
Tables
1103*
1112
1901*
001
002
1902*
001
002
003
004
005
30 July 2004
Auto Process Control

Sets the temperature of the hot roller for auto process control to start.
[70~150/1C] DFU
CPM Down for Special Paper
Selects the speed (copies per minute) for copying on thick paper or tab sheets. A
slower speed makes fusing better. This setting has no effect on fusing
temperature.
Thick Paper
[0~4/1 step]
0: 25 cpm
1: 35 cpm
2: 40 cpm
3: 45 cpm
Tab Sheet
[0~4/1 step]
0: 25 cpm
1: 35 cpm
2: 40 cpm
3: 45 cpm
Fusing Web Motor Control
Fusing Web Used Area Display/Setting
Displays the percentage of the web consumption in 1% steps (0% ~ 100%). This
setting must be reset to zero after the web is replaced.
[0~120/1 %]
Fusing Web Motor Operation Interval
Adjusts the interval of copy operation time (seconds) after which the web motor is
driven.
[5~50/1 s]
Fusing Web Motor Operation Time
Adjusts the length of time that the web motor is driven.
[1~40/0.1 s]
Web Near End Value
Adjusts the timing of the web near end alert by changing the amount of web that
has been used before the alert is triggered.
[0~100/1 %]
Web Roll Coefficient
Determines the coefficient of the web take-up time from cleaning toner from the
roller while taking into consideration the take-up time for web buckle. DFU
[10~20/1]
5-32
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
002
003
1904
001
002
Web Job End

Yes/No
This determines whether the web motor is driven at the end of a job.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
Enable when too much paper dust is causing copies to blacken.
Job End Condition (Continuous PPC Time)
At the end of a job, the web motor is driven if the job lasted longer than the value of
this SP mode. Only valid if SP1903-001 is set to On.
[1~99/1s]
Job End Frequency
If the web motor is driven at the end of a job, this SP determines how many times
the web motor operation is executed.
[1~5/1]
By-pass Tray Paper Size Correction
Minimum Size
Calibrates the minimum paper width position of the sensor (100 mm). Move the
side fences to the 100 mm position then press Execute.
Maximum Size
Calibrates the maximum paper width position of the sensor (A3). Move the side
fences to the A3 position then press Execute.
1905*
Thick Paper By-pass Tray

Adjusts the by-pass feed clutch operation for thick paper.
[0~1/1]
1: On: 30 ms
0: Off:
This setting switches the by-pass feed clutch on for 30 ms when the registration
motor turns on. It only happens when thick paper is selected, to help this paper
pass through the registration rollers.
1906
001
002
Temperature/Humidity Sensor DFU

Temperature Sensor
Humidity Sensor
1907
Pre-Fusing Idling On/Off (B140 only)

Pre-fusing idling: The hot roller turns freely to increase its temperature before thick
paper or OHP goes through the fusing unit.
[0~1/1]
0: Pre-fusing idling is not done.
1: The fusing motor turns the hot roller with no paper in the fusing unit. This
makes sure that the hot roller gets to the correct temperature. It is only done
for thick paper or OHP. In this mode, the paper stops at the registration roller.
This roller starts when the hot roller gets to the correct temperature.
5-33
Service
Tables
1903*
001
1910
1911
1912
1920
30 July 2004
Japan Only
Japan Only
Japan Only
Japan Only
5-34
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
002
003
004
005
006
2101*
001
002
003
004
Charge Roller Bias Adjustment

Applied Voltage for Image Processing
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process
control is off.
[600~1300/ 10 V]
After replacing the charge corona wire or the drum, reset to the factory default
setting.
ID Sensor Pattern: Adjustment of Applied Voltage
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when the ID sensor pattern is created.
[600~1300/10 V]
Setting for Total Bias Current
Adjusts the total current applied to the charge corona wire. DFU
[900~1500/10 A]
Setting for Total Bias Current of Grid
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process
control is on.
[600~1300/10 A]
This voltage changes every time auto process control starts up (every time the
machine is switched on).
Total Bias Grid Current: OHP Total
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when OHP mode is selected.
[600~1300/10 V]
Use this if there is a copy quality problem when making OHPs.
Total Bias Current: Photo Mode Total
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when Photo mode is selected. DFU
[1400~ 2800/10 A]
Printing Erase Margin
These settings adjust the erase margin for the leading, trailing, left, and right
edges.
Leading Edge
[0.0~9.0/0.1 mm], Specification: 32 mm
Trailing Edge
[0.0~9.0/0.1 mm], Specification: 32 mm
Left Edge
[0.0~9.0/0.1 mm], Specification: 21.5 mm
Right Edge
5-35
manuals4you.com
2001*
001
Service
Tables
SP2xxx Drum
2104*
001
002
003
004
30 July 2004
Small Pitch Banding Reduction DFU

Reduction Mode On/Off Setting:1200 dpi
Switches on/off the setting that corrects uneven images generated during 1200
dpi printing.
[0~1/1]
1: On
0: Off
Unevenness may appear in dot patterns or narrowly spaced horizontal lines, i.e.
some areas may appear lighter or darker than others.
Reduction Mode On: 1200 dpi Printing
Adjusts the amount of correction for uneven images generated during 1200 dpi
printing.
[20~+10/1]
Reduction Mode On/Off: 1200 dpi Copying
Switches on/off the setting that corrects uneven images generated during 1200
dpi copying.
[0~1/1]
1: On
0: Off
Reduction Mode On: 1200 dpi Copying
Adjusts the amount of correction of uneven image generated during 1200 dpi
copying.
[20~+10/1]
2110
Test Mode dpi

Adjusts the pixel density. Required for design check, beam pitch adjustment for the
test pattern, etc. DFU.
[0~10/1]
2111
FCI Shade Detection

Allows shading detection if FCI (Fine Character Adjustment) smoothing is on. With
this SP switched on, photos and painted areas are detected, and FCI is not
applied in these areas. FCI is used for outputs in printer mode.
Matrix Size (>600 dpi)
[0~128/1]
Threshold Value (>600 dpi)
[0~128/1]
Matrix Size (<400 dpi)
[0~128/1]
Threshold Value (<400 dpi)
[0~128/1]
001
002
003
004
5-36
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
2115
001
002
003
2201*
001
002
003
004
005
Binary Edge Processing Parameter

Allows setting a parameter for binary edge processing for the printer application
with FCI switched off. The value for this SP is enabled only when the printer is
initialized. In all other cases, the data registered in the software are enabled. This
SP allows adjustment of image quality if the desired effect cannot be achieved
with the default settings for edge processing. However, some settings could cause
defective images on white paper.
Leading Edge Pixel Level (1200 dpi)
[0~15/1]
Trailing Edge Pixel Level (1200 dpi)
[0~15/1]
Continuous Pixel Level (1200 dpi)
[0~15/1]
Independent Dot Pixel Level (1200 dpi)
[0~15/1]
Leading Edge Pixel Level (600 dpi)
[0~15/1]
Trailing Edge Pixel Level (600 dpi)
[0~15/1]
Continuous Pixel Level (600 dpi)
Independent Dot Pixel Level (600 dpi)
Main Scan Beam Pitch Adjustment
A label attached to the LD unit service part lists the correct settings. Refer to these
settings when adjusting the beam pitch for LD0 to LD3.
Pitch Adjustment Between LD0 and LD1
[0~999/1]
[0~999/1]
[0~999/1]
Development Bias Adjustment
Dev. Bias (Image)
Adjusts the development bias for copying when process control is off
[100~800/10 V]
Adjust as a temporary measure to compensate for an aging drum until the old
drum can be replaced.
ID Sensor Pattern
Adjusts the development bias used to create the ID sensor pattern. DFU
[100~800/10 V]
This SP and SP2201-004 must be changed together by the same amount.
OHP
Adjusts the development bias for copying with OHP sheets.
[100~800/10 V]
ID Sensor Pattern Dev. Potential
Adjusts the development potential to create the ID sensor pattern. DFU
[100~800/10 V]
This SP and SP2201-002 must be changed together by the same amount.
Vb Scale Voltage Setting
Sets the Vb target development bias voltage (Vb). DFU
[100~800/10 V]
5-37
Service
Tables
2114*
30 July 2004
2207*
Forced Toner Supply

Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to the toner supply unit. Press Execute to
force toner supply.
Use to determine if toner supply is operating correctly. If forcing toner supply with
this SP does not darken the image, then toner supply is not operating correctly.
2208*
Toner Supply Mode

Selects the toner supply mode: Sensor Control or Image Pixel Count.
[0~1/1]
0: Sensor Control
1: Pixel Count
Select Image Pixel Count only if the TD sensor has failed and cannot be replaced
immediately, so that the customer can use the machine. Return the setting to
Sensor Control after replacing the sensor.
2209*
Toner Supply Rate

Adjusts the toner supply rate.
[50~2000/5 mg pers sec]
Increasing this value reduces the time the toner supply clutch remains on. Use a
lower value if the user tends to make many copies that have large areas of black.
2210*
ID Sensor Pattern Interval

Adjusts the time interval between making ID sensor patterns onto the drum for
Vsp/Vsg detection.
[-~200/1]
Reduce the interval for copies that contain a high proportion of black.
2220*
Vref Manual Setting

Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref) manually.
[100~400/1 V]
Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that
already contains toner. For example, when using a development unit from another
machine for test purposes, do the following:
1) Check the value of SP2220 in both the machine containing the test unit and
the machine that you are going to move it to.
2) Install the test development unit, then input the VREF for this unit into
SP2220.
3) After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2220 back
to the original value.
2223*
Vt Display
Displays the current TD sensor output voltage.
5-38
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
2310*
001
002
003
004
005
006
2311*
001
002
003
004
005
006
2312*
001
002
003
004
005
006
Transfer Curr. Adj.

Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying.
Note: If this SP is too high, toner on the paper can go back to the drum.
Main Unit Image Development: Front Side
[10~200/1 A]
Main Unit Image Development: Back Side
[10~200/1 A]
By-pass Image Development: Front Side
[10~200/1 A]
Postcard (Japan Only)
[10~200/1 A]
Paper Interval
[10~200/1 A]
Tab Paper
[10~200/1 A]
Thick Paper: Front Side
[10~200/1 A]
OHP: Front Side
[10~200/1 A]
Tracing Paper: Front Side
[10~200/1 A]
Image Leading Edge DFU
[10~200/1 A]
Image Trailing Edge DFU
[10~200/1 A]
LCT Trans. Curr. Adj. DFU
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying and paper feed from
the LCT.
Main Unit Image Development: Front
[10~200/1 A]
Main Unit Image Development: Back
Image Leading Edge: Back
Image Trailing Edge: Back
Image Leading Edge: Thick Paper
[10~200/1 A]
Image Trailing Edge: Thick Paper
Tray 1 Trans. Curr. Adj. DFU
Tray 1.
Image Leading Edge: Front
[10~200/1 A]
Image Trailing Edge: Front
[10~200/1 A]
Tray 2.
[10~200/1 A]
[10~200/1 A]
5-39
Service
Tables
2301*
2313
001
002
003
004
005
006
2314
001
002
003
004
005
006
2315
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
2506*
001
002
30 July 2004

Tray 3.
Image Leading Edge - Front
[10~200/1 A]
Image Trailing Edge Front
Image Leading Edge Back
Image Trailing Edge Back
Image Leading Edge Thick Paper
[10~200/1 A]
Image Trailing Edge Thick Paper
Tray 4 Trans. Curr. Adj. (Japan Only)
Tray 4.
[10~200/1 A]
[10~200/1 A]
Bypass Trans. Curr. Adj. DFU
the bypass tray.
[10~200/1 A]
[10~200/1 A]
Image Leading Edge: OHP
[10~200/1 A]
Image Leading Edge: OHP
Cont. Op. Time Cleaning Setting
Operation Setting
Determines whether multiple copy jobs are stopped at regular intervals for: 0)
Stopping and reversing the drum motor to clean the cleaning blade edge, and 1)
creating an ID sensor pattern to correct toner density control.
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
The interval is set with SP2506-002. Use if the drum gets dirty or images get too
pale or too dark during a long job.
Time Setting
Selects the interval at which multi-copy jobs are stopped.
[1~100/1 min.]
5-40
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
002
2602
001
002
003
004
ID Sen. Patt. During Job

Operation Setting
Determines whether an ID sensor pattern is created during copy jobs.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
No. of Copies
Selects the interval (number of copies) between ID sensor patterns when 1 is
selected for SP2507-001
[0~10,000/1]
PTL Setting (1st /2nd Copy Side) (B140 only)
Turns the PTL off and on. The PTL (Pre-Transfer Lamp) decreases the charge on
the drum to make better separation of the paper from the drum, and prevents
stripper pawl marks on the leading edges of copies.
Note:
The PTL operates only when copying with plain paper or translucent paper. It
does not operate when copying with OHP, index sheets, or thick paper.
If blurring occurs in images at the leading edges of copies, switch SP2602-001
off (set to 0).
ON/OFF Setting
Turns the PTL lamp on/off during transfer to the front side of
(1st Copy Side)
the paper at normal speed. This setting is always off when
thick paper or OHPs are fed.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
The timing can be adjusted with SP2602-002.
OFF Timing (1st
Adjusts the length of the space from the leading edge where
Copy Side)
PTL quenching is applied to the front side at normal speed.
For example, if you select +5, then quenching will be done 5
mm from the leading edge on the front side.
[1~3/1]
ON/OFF Setting
Turns the PTL lamp on/off during transfer to the front side of
(2nd Copy Side)
the paper at normal speed.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
OFF Timing (2nd
Adjusts the length of the space from the leading edge where
Copy Side)
PTL quenching is applied to the back side at normal speed.
For example, if you select +5, then quenching will be done 5
mm from the leading edge on the back side.
[1~3/1]
5-41
Service
Tables
2507*
001
30 July 2004
2801*
TD Sensor Initial Setting

Press the Execute button to do the TD sensor initial setting. This SP mode controls
the voltage applied to the TD sensor to make the TD sensor output about 3.0 V.
When SP2967 is on, the TD sensor output is set to about 2.5 V.
Note: Execute this SP only after replacing the TD sensor or developer.
2803
Charge Cleaner Start Time

Press Start to clean the charge corona wire manually.
When copy density across the paper is uneven, clean the wire with this mode.
2804
001
Charge Cleaner
Operation Mode
Determines whether the charge corona wire is cleaned at regular intervals.
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
The time interval between cleaning is set with SP2804-002.
Number of Sheets
Sets the interval (number of sheets printed) between charge corona wire
cleanings.
[100~10,000/100]
002
2813
Exposure Gamma Table DFU

Is the gamma table is used when the printing test pattern is done with SP2902 003.
[0~1/1]
0: Gamma table used in the printing test pattern.
1: Forces test pattern output with SP2902 003 (Printing Test Pattern). The write
exposure gamma table is not applied. Current image mode selection or other
settings are ignored.
2902
001
Test Pattern
IPU Test Pattern: Front Side
Produces a scan test pattern in place of data scanned from the front side
[0~30/1]
(CCDSBU) of an original. ( 5.3.2)
IPU Test Pattern: Back Side
Produces a scan test pattern in place of data scanned from the back side
[0~30/1
(CISSBU) of an original. ( 5.3.2)
Printing Test Pattern
Produces the printer test patterns. ( 5.3.1)
[0~27/1]
IPU Printing Test Pattern
Produces test patterns in place of scan image data. ( 5.3.3)
[0~5/1]
002
003
004
5-42
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
2906*
001
002
2909*
001
002
TD Sensor Control Voltage and Check

TD Sensor Control Voltage Setting
Adjustment mode for production. DFU
[4.0~12.0/0.1]
Automatic Adjustment Setting
Displays the TD sensor data stored when SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Settings) is
executed.
Copy
Adjusts magnification in the main scan direction for copying.
[2.0~+2.0/0.1%]
Printer
Adjusts magnification in the main scan direction for printing from a computer.
[2.0~+2.0/0.1%]
Sub Scan Magnification
Adjusts magnification in the main scan direction for copying.
[1.0~+1.0/0.1%]
2912*
001
Drum Reverse Rotation

Rotation Amount
Sets the length of time the drum is reversed to clean the drum cleaning blade.
[1~3/1]
To calculate the actual time of reverse rotation, multiply the selected value by the
15 ms.
Rotation Interval
Determines the frequency of drum reverse rotation for blade cleaning.
[0~6/1 min.]
002
2913*
001
002
Temperature & Humidity Display

Machine Temperature Shows the internal temperature of the machine.
Machine Humidity
Shows the internal humidity of the machine.
2920*
LD Off Check
Checks if the LD turns off or on when the front door is opened. DFU
[0~1/1]
0: On
1: Off
5-43
Service
Tables
2910*
30 July 2004
2930*
Transfer Idle Cleaning

When resolution changes from 400 to 600 dpi, the LD writes a pattern on the drum.
Toner is applied, and this must be cleaned off the belt. This SP mode determines
whether bias is applied to the transfer belt cleaning bias roller at this time. DFU
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
Switching this function on adds 3 s to the job time.
2931*
001
Transfer Current On/Off Timing (LCT)

La1
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for front side copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La1f
Adjusts the area where the transfer is applied for the leading
edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1r
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the
trailing edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for back side copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2f
DFU
leading edge during back side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2r
trailing edge during back side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying thick paper .
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3f
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying thick
paper .
[30~+30/1 mm]
Lc3r
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with thick
paper from the LCT
[30~+20/1 mm]
Lc3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with thick
paper from the LCT.
[30~+30/1 mm]
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
5-44
manuals4you.com
2932*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Transfer Current On/Off Timing (Tray 1)

La1
[30~+30/1 mm]
La1f
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the
leading edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1r
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2f
DFU
Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge during front
side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2r
Adjusts the transfer current for the trailing edge during back
side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side
copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying thick
paper.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3f
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the leading edge
length when with copying thick paper.
[30~+20/1 mm]
Lc3r
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for the trailing edge
length when copying with thick paper.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc3
paper.
[30~+30/1 mm]
5-45
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
2933*
001
002
30 July 2004

La1
[30~+30/1 mm]
La1f
[0~+20/1 mm]
003
Lc1r
004
Lc1
005
La2
006
La2f
007
Lc2r
008
Lc2
009
La3
010
La3f
011
Lc3r
012
Lc3
DFU

[0~+20/1 mm]
[30~+30/1 mm]
[30~+30/1 mm]
leading edge during backside copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
[0~+20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
paper.
[30~+30/1 mm]
length when copying thick paper.
[0~20/1 mm]
length when copying with thick paper from the LCT.
[0~20/1 mm]
paper.
[30~+30/1 mm]
5-46
manuals4you.com
2934*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012

La1
[30~+30/1 mm]
La1f
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1r
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side
copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2f
DFU
leading edge during back side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2r
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2
copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3
paper.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3f
[0~20/1 mm]
Lc3r
[0~20/1 mm]
Lc3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with
thick paper from the LCT.
[30~+30/1 mm]
5-47
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
2935*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
30 July 2004
Transfer Current On/Off Timing (Tray 4) (Japan Only)

La1
[30~+30/1 mm]
La1f
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1r
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side
copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2f
DFU
leading edge during backside copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2r
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2
copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3
paper.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3f
[0~20/1 mm]
Lc3r
[0~20/1 mm]
Lc3
paper from the LCT.
[30~+30/1 mm]
5-48
manuals4you.com
2936
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
Transfer Current On/Off Timing (By-pass)

La1
[30~+30/1 mm]
La1f
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1r
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc1
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2
[30~+30/1 mm]
La2f
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2r
[0~+20/1 mm]
Lc2
DFU
copying.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying on thick
paper.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La3f
length when copying on thick paper.
[0~20/1 mm]
Lc3r
length when copying with thick paper.
[0~20/1 mm]
Lc3
when copying with thick paper.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La4
OHP.
[30~+30/1 mm]
La4f
when copying with OHP.
[0~20/1 mm]
Lc4r
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the trailing edge
when copying with OHP.
[0~20/1 mm]
Lc4
OHP.
[0~20/1 mm]
5-49
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
2940*
Reface Mode
Controls if a blade bend prevention pattern is made when the ID sensor pattern is
made. This setting controls the pattern count. DFU
[0~100/1]
Increase the setting if the rotation of the drum is not smooth, that is, when drum
rotation is making noise.
2950
001
002
Vh Pattern Creation Setting (B140 only) DFU

Exposure Level
Offset Light Amount
2961
Developer Adjust Mode DFU
2962
Automatic Adjustment of Drum Conditions

Manually does a process control. Push Execute to start.
But, this only operates if process control is enabled with SP3901, and if the fusing
temperature is less than 100C.
2963
Installation Mode
Use the keyboard display to enter the lot number of the developer. (The lot number
is embossed on the top edge of the developer pack.)
Press Execute to initialize the developer and force toner supply to the toner
hopper at machine installation.
2964*
001
Transfer Cleaning Blade Forming

Pattern Interval Setting
Selects the interval for application of a strip of toner across drum and transfer belt
to prevent the drum cleaning blade and belt cleaning blade from sticking and
bending against the drum or belt.
[0~200/1 copy] DFU
If set to zero, then no pattern is created.
Pattern Light Amount Setting
Adjusts the intensity of light that is used to create the blade protection pattern.
[0~4/1] DFU
Transfer Current On/Off Setting
Determines whether transfer current is switched on or off while the blade
protection pattern is created. DFU
Sets Off, toner is applied to the entire cleaning area and drum cleaning blade.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
002
003
[0~15/1]
[-45 ~-100/1]
5-50
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
001
002
003
004
005
006
2966*
001
002
Toner Pump System Adjustment DFU (B064 only)

The transportability of toner improves if there is more than the prescribed amount
of toner in the toner unit. In order to achieve this the prescribed amount of toner
must be in the unit. The amount of toner pumped is determined by the amount of
toner consumed, so by adjusting the amount of consumption, the machine can
determine the amount of tone to pump to keep the toner supply unit topped off:
Toner Consumed (g) = Pixel Count x Target Toner Amount
Toner Consumption for First Rotation
[1~100/1 g] DFU
Toner Consumption After First Rotation
[1~100/1 g] DFU
Pump Clutch On Time
[1~5/1 s] DFU
Pump Motor On Time
[1~20/1 s] DFU
Toner Consumed: Rev. Returning to First
[1~50/1 g] DFU
Amount of Toner Consumed Display
DFU
Drum Conditions: Periodic Adjustment (B064 Series)
On/Off
Controls if auto process control is done and corona wire cleaning is done at a set
interval.
[0~1/1]
0: On
1: Off
When this setting is on, auto process control and wire cleaning are done
automatically (1) when the main switch is switched off for 24 hours, and (2) after
each copy job.
Time Setting
Sets the time interval between automatic adjustments after SP2966 001 is turned
on.
[1~24/1 hour]
2966*
Drum Conditions: Periodic Adjustment (B140 Series)

Sets the time interval between automatic adjustments.
[1~24/1 hour]
2967*
Developer Density Adjustment Mode

Determines whether the amount of toner is checked during auto process control
with only the TD sensor. With this feature on, the machine uses the TD sensor
only.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
During auto process control execution after the main switch is turned on, the toner
amount in the development unit is normally checked and adjusted using the ID
sensor. However, in some environments, such as where there could be traces
ammonia in the air, copies could appear dirty or too dark because the ID sensor
reading is not reliable.
5-51
Service
Tables
2965*
30 July 2004
2968
Toner Exit Mode

Press Execute to force used toner into the toner collection bottle. The moving parts
of the cleaning and toner collection areas will turn for about 60 s with the transfer
belt released.
2969*
001
Toner Bottle Revolution Count

Copy Count Setting
Sets the standard number of copies by using the
number of toner bottle rotations. DFU
[50~500/1]
Count Reset
Press Execute to reset the toner bottle rotation count.
DFU
Copy Count Display 1
Used to check the number of toner bottle rotations.
002
003
2970*
Transfer Belt Resistance: Disp. Current Value

Displays the resistance of the transfer belt and displays this value (M). DFU
2971*
001
002
Trans. Interval Output

Voltage
Current
2972*
Toner Bottle Cool. Fan Drive Control

Switches fan control On/Off.
[0~1/1]
0: Off. The toner bottle fan switches off when the machine is powered off and
when the machine enters the night mode.
1: On:Toner bottle fan remains on.
Switch on in an extremely hot environment to prevent the toner from overheating
and clumping.
Displays the measurement condition of the value in

SP2970.
5-52
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
SP3xxx Processing
002
3103*
001
002
003
3901*
ID Sensor Initial Setting

ID Sensor PWM Setting
Recovers the machine when an SC is logged because the ID Sensor Initial Setting
is not done after doing an NVRAM Clear or replacing the NVRAM. Reset this SP to
the factory setting in this case.
[0~255/1]
ID Sensor Initialization
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. The ID sensor output for the bare drum
(VSG) is adjusted to 4.0 0.2V.
Press Execute.
This SP mode should be performed after:
(1) Replacing or cleaning the ID sensor, (2) Replacing the NVRAM, (3) Clearing
NVRAM, (4) Replacing the BICU board.
ID Sensor Output Display
Vsg
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output after checking the bare drum
surface.
Vsp
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output after checking the ID sensor
pattern image
Vsdp
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output immediately after Vsp is output
when the charge potential drops. This reading is used to test and determine
characteristics for design.
Note: If the ID sensor output is abnormal, an SC is logged and the displays
change:
1) SC350-01 logged: Vsp/Vsg/Vsdp = 0.00/0.00/0.00
Auto Process Control On/Off Setting
Determines whether the machine checks and corrects the drum potential (Vd) and
LD power when the fusing temperature is lower than 100C at power-on.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
This setting attempts to change the Vd setting consistent with the OPC, the charge
corona unit, and environment to improve the reliability of the system.
5-53
Service
Tables
3001*
001
3902*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
3903*
30 July 2004
Drum Condition Display

Auto Process Control On/Off
Displays whether auto process control is switched on or off (0:Off, 1:On)
When auto processing control is set on, displays only when the potential sensor
is calibrated correctly. Auto process control is not executed when this SP is
switched off.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
Vd
Displays drum dark potential, the standard potential, electrical potential of the
black areas after exposure.
Vh
Displays standard halftone drum potential, used for laser power adjustment.
Vg
Displays the charge grid voltage resulting from the latest Vd adjustment.
LD Level
Displays the LD power correction value as a result of the latest Vh adjustment.
ID Sensor Pattern Potential
Displays Vid, the latest drum surface voltage measured on the ID sensor pattern.
Vql
Displays the drum potential after quenching.
Vl
Shows the standard electrical potential of white areas on the drum after
exposure.
Drum Rotation Time Extension On/Off (B064 Series)
Turn this setting on to decrease out-of-focus copy images when the machine is
used immediately after power-on.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
If On is selected, after auto process control, the drum continues to rotate until the
fusing unit gets to its operation temperature.
5-54
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
002
3904
Drum Rotation Time Extension Mode (B140 Series)

(0:OFF/1:ON)
Turns on the drum rotation mode. This increases the time that the drum turns
freely after the machine is turned on. After this function is turned on with this SP,
it will be enabled only when SP3904 001 is set to 2. If SP3904 001 is set to 0
or 1, the extra drum rotation mode will not be enabled.
[0~1/1]
0: Extra drum rotation mode is off.
1: After auto process control, the drum continues to turn until the fusing unit
gets to its operation temperature. Use this setting to decrease out-of-focus
copy images when the machine is used immediately after power-on.
Drum Rotation Time
Sets the amount of time the drum turns in the drum rotation mode before the first
copy after the machine is turned on. SP3903-001 must be on or this setting has
no effect.
[120~600/1]
Warm Up Short Mode (B140 only)
Controls when corona wire cleaning is done to adjust the length of time that is
necessary for startup.
[0~2/1]
0: Charge corona wire not cleaned when the machine is turned on.
Warmup Time: 30 sec. (Short Process Control is done)
1: Charge corona wire cleaned only when the machine is turned on.
Warmup Time: 30 sec. + 40 sec. (for cleaning) = 70 sec. (Short Process Control
is done)
2: Normal startup procedure at power on:
Warmup Time: 240 sec. (Full Process Control is done; same as B064)
Potential sensor calibrated
Drum starts to turn when fusing unit gets to the warmup temperature (not
done during Short Process Control)
Potential sensor readings are used to adjust development bias, grid voltage,
laser diode.
ID sensor calibrated (not done during Short Process Control)
TD sensor calibrated (not done during Short Process Control)
5-55
Service
Tables
3903*
001
30 July 2004
SP4xxx Scanner
4008*
Scanner Sub Scan Magnification

Fine adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for scanning by changing
the speed of the scanner motor.
[0.9~+0.9/0.1 %]
Setting a lower value reduces the speed of the motor and lengthens the image in
the sub scan direction (direction of paper feed).
Setting a higher value increases the speed of the motor speed and shortens the
image in the sub scan direction.
4010*
Scanner Leading Edge Registration

Adjust the registration of the leading edge for scanning in the sub scan direction.
[0.9~+0.9/0.1 %]
This setting ensures that the point where the original strikes the registration roller
matches the point where the F-GATE signal will trigger the start of scanning in the
main scan direction.
Setting a larger value shifts the image away from the leading edge, and a smaller
value shifts the image toward the leading edge.
4011*
Scanner Side-to-Side Registration

Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in the main scan direction across
the page.
[0.3~+0.3/0.1 %]
Setting a negative value shifts the image toward the left edge, and setting a
positive value shifts the image toward the right edge.
4012*
Scanner Erase Margin

These settings adjust the margins (erase margins) of the scanned area on the
sheet. The leading, trailing, right, and left margins can be set independently.
Leading Edge
[0~0.9/0.1 mm]
Trailing Edge
Right
Left
001
002
003
004
4013
001
002
Scanner Free Run

Switches on/off a scanner free run. The scanning area is A3.
Press On or Off.
Scanner Free Run: Lamp On
Performs a scanner free run with the
exposure lamp on.
Scanner Free Run: Lamp Off
Performs a scanner free run with the
exposure lamp off.
5-56
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
002
4018*
002
003*
004
4019*
White Board Read Adjust

Read Start Position
Adjusts the start position for reading the standard white
board.
[9~+9/1]
Read Width
Adjusts the width of the area read on the standard white
board.
[9~+9/1]
Scanner Optical Axis Adjust
Adjust Display DFU
Displays the result after adjusting SP4018 001
[2~+2/0.1]
Read Position Set
Lets you adjust the scanning position for free runs. It changes the scanning stop
position if the exposure glass causes black lines because it is dirty. The default is
set with SP4018 001. If you adjust this SP, the leading edge registration changes
and the setting of SP6006 003 for the ADF also changes.
[4~+4/0.1]
Read Position Set Start
If 003 is adjusted, push Execute to force the change to take effect on the main
machine.
Scanner HP View Position Display
Use to display the status of each error after SC120, SC121, SC122, or SC123 is
logged. (These are scanner HP sensor errors.)
[0~1/1]
0: Normal
1: Abnormal
Bit 0: Sensor OFF at start of high-speed return operation.
Bit 1: Remains ON after return.
Bit 2: Remains ON during return.
Bit 3: Does not switch OFF during forward motion
Bit 4: Switches ON at return
Bit 5: Scanner HP detection is out of position.
5-57
Service
Tables
4016*
001
4020
001
002
003
30 July 2004
ADF Scan Glass Dust Check

This feature checks the ADF exposure glass for dust that can cause black lines in
copies. If dust is detected, a message is displayed, but the process does not
stop.
Check On/Off Change (0:OFF/1:ON)
Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of the ADF when
the original size is detected before a job starts. This function can detect dust on
the white plate above the scanning glass, as well as dust on the glass. Sensitivity
of the level of detection is adjusted with SP4020-002.
[0~1/1]
0: Off. No dust warning.
1: On. Dust warning. This warning does not stop the job.
Note: Before switching this setting on, clean the ADF scanning glass and the
white plate above the scanning glass.
Detect Level
Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP is
available only after SP4020-001 is switched on.
[0~8/1]
If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued, raise the
setting to increase the level of sensitivity.
If warnings are issued when you see no black streaks in copies, lower the
setting.
Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass by the
originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not
detected and the warning remains on.
Rejection Level
Sets the level for vertical line correction (the black vertical lines caused by dust
on the ADF exposure glass).
[0~7/1]
0:
No vertical line correction.
1-7: Enables and sets the level for vertical line correction. If you select a higher
number, this can decrease the unwanted lines caused by dust. But, it can
also erase thin vertical lines of the original.
4301
APS Sensor Output Display

Displays the APS sensor output signals when an original is placed on the
exposure glass. If a non-standard size is placed on the glass, asterisks (*) are
displayed.
4303*
APS A5 Size Detection

Selects whether or not the copier determines that the original is A5/HLT size
when the APS sensor does not detect the size.
[0~1/1]
0: Not detected
1: A5 SEF (51/2" x 81/2")
If 1 is selected, paper sizes that cannot be detected by the APS sensors are
detected as A5 SEF. If 0 is selected, Cannot detect original size will be
shown.
5-58
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Read SBU ASIC ID

Displays the SBU ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the SBU adjusts
automatically at power on.
[0~FFFFh/1]
4601*
SBU PLL Adjustment

Adjusts the PLL bandwidth. DFU
[0~FFFFh/1]
4605
001*
Scanner Adjustment
Flag Display
Displays a flag to indicate whether density control adjustment was executed with
the standard white board for the CCD.
[0~1/1]
0: Not executed.
1: Executed
Start
Starts the density adjustment for the CCD using the standard white board. Place
5 sheets of A3 plain paper on the exposure glass, then press Execute. A
message is displayed to indicate the success or failure of the adjustment. DFU
002
4610*
4613*
4616*
4624*
4632*
4641*
4646*
4647*
4662*
4681*
4691*
4694*
White Level Adj: Next

White Level Adj.: Previous Normal
White Level Adj.: Factory
Read Offset Data
Gain Adjustment
White Adjust Loop
SBU Adjustment Error Flag
SBU Hard Error Flag
Gain Adjustment Normally
Gain Adjustment at Factory
Read Shading Data
Black Level
4700*
Read CIS ASIC ID

Reads and displays the ID of the CIS board at power.
4701*
4702*
Frequency Adjust
Periodic Adjustment Setting
DFU
DFU
5-59
Service
Tables
4600*
4705
001*
002
4713*
4716*
4732*
4735*
4741*
4742*
4745*
4747*
4762*
4765*
4781*
30 July 2004
CIS Adjustment
Flag Display
Displays whether density adjustment was executed for the CIS, using the white
roller.
[0~1/1]
0: Not executed
1: Executed
Start
Starts the standard white density adjustment for the CIS. Place 5 sheets of A3 on
the exposure glass, then press Execute. A message is displayed to indicate the
success or failure of the adjustment. DFU
CIS White Level Adjustment
CIS White Level Adjustment
CIS Gain Adjustment
CIS Read White Level
CIS White Adjust Loop
CIS White Roller Adjust Loop
CIS Adjustment Overflow Flag
CIS Adjustment Time Out Flag
CIS Gain Adjustment Normal
CIS Adjustment Overflow Flag
CIS Gain Adjustment at Factory
DFU
5-60
manuals4you.com
4901
001*
002
003*
004*
010*
011*
012*
013*
014*
019*
Front Side Scan Correction

Front Shading Correction: AEREF Setting
Changes the AEREF (Automatic Exposure Reference) value that is used in
shading correction for the image scanned from the front side (SBU). DFU
[0~63/1]
Front Shading Correction: Shading Data Output
Outputs the AEREF value that is used in shading correction for the image
scanned from the front side (SBU). DFU
[0~1/1]
0: Normal
1: Output
After you set 001, go back to the Copy Window and push Start. (The machine
automatically goes out of SP mode.)
Front Digital AE: AEREF Setting
Changes the AEREF (Automatic Exposure Reference) value that is used in
digital A/E processing for the image data scanned from the front side. DFU
[63/63]
Front Digital AE: Low Limit
Sets the low limit at 120 for the value used in digital A/E processing for the image
data scanned from the front side. DFU
[0~1/1]
0: No low limit
1: Low limit set
Changes the density of front side
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Text
(SBU) scanned image data and
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Photo
the MTF.
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Text/Photo
[0~3/1]
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Pale
0: Normal
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Generation
1: Low Level
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Setting
2: Medium Level
3: High Level
5-61
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
4902
30 July 2004
Back Side Scan Correction

001* Back Shading Correction:
AEREF Setting
002
Back Shading Correction:
Shading Output Data
003* Back Digital AE: AEREF
Setting
004* Back Digital AE: Low Limit
010* Back Scan Image Adj.
Mode: Text
Mode: Photo
Mode: Text/Photo
Mode: Pale
Mode: Generation
019* Back Scan Image Adj. Scan
Select Mode DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
Changes the density of rear side (SBU)
scanned image data and the MTF.
[0~3/1]
0: Normal
1: Low Level
2: Medium Level
3: High Level
Selects mode for scan selection.

0: Mode for the default scanner
1: Mode for the upgraded scanner.
5-62
manuals4you.com
4903*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
Image Quality Adj.

Text Mode
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Text mode.
[0~10/1]
Text Mode (25.0~55%)
0: Softest
Text Mode (55.5~75.0%
5: Normal
Text Mode (75.5%~160%)
10: Sharpest
Text Mode (160.5~400.0%)
Photo Mode Dithering
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Photo mode with
dithering
Photo Mode Dithering (25.0~55%)
[0~6/1]
0: Softest
Photo Mode Dithering (55.5~75.0%
3: Print Original Mode
Photo Mode Dithering (75.5%~160%)
6: Sharpest
Photo Mode Dithering (160.5~400.0%)
Photo Mode Error Diffusion
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Photo mode with
error diffusion.
Photo Mode Error Diffusion (25.0~55%)
[0~6/1]
0: Softest
Photo Mode Error Diffusion (55.5~75.0%
1: Normal (Default)
Photo Mode Error Diffusion (75.5%~160%)
6: Sharpest
Photo Mode Error Diffusion (160.5~400.0%)
Text/Photo Mode
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Text/Photo mode.
[0~10/1]
Text/Photo Mode (25.0~55%)
0: Softest
Text/Photo Mode (55.5~75.0%
1: Photo Priority
Text/Photo Mode (75.5%~160%)
5: Normal (Default)
Text/Photo Mode (160.5~400.0%)
9: Text Priority
10: Sharpest
Pale Mode
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Pale mode.
Pale Mode (25.0~55%)
[0~10/1]
0: Softest
Pale Mode (55.5~75.0%
1: Soft
Pale Mode (75.5%~160%)
5: Normal (Default)
Pale Mode (160.5~400.0%)
9; Sharp
10: Sharpest
Generation Mode
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Generation mode.
Generation Mode (25.0~55%)
[0~10/1]
0: Softest
Generation Mode (55.5~75.0%
1: Soft
Generation Mode (75.5%~160%)
5: Normal (Default)
Generation Mode (160.5~400.0%)
9: Sharp
10: Sharpest
5-63
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
060
061
062
063
064
070
071
072
073
074
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
30 July 2004
Independent Dot Erase

Sets the level for independent dot erasure. The higher the setting, the stronger
the effect.
Independent Dot Erase: Text Mode
[0~14/1]
Independent Dot Erase: Photo Mode
[0~14/1]
Independent Dot Erase: Text/Photo Mode
Independent Dot Erase: Pale Mode
Independent Dot: Generation Mode
[0~14/1]
Background Erase
Sets the level for background erase. The higher the setting, the stronger the
effect.
Background Erase: Text Mode
[0~255/1]
Background Erase: Photo Mode
Background Erase: Text/Photo Mode
Background Erase: Pale Mode
Background Erase: Generation Mode
Line Width Correction
Selects the level of line width correction for the copy mode and direction of
scanning. Where a range of settings is possible, [0~8] for example, the higher
the setting, the thicker the lines.
Line Width Correction: Text Mode Select
[0~8/1]
Line Width Correction: Text Mode (Main Scan)
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Text Mode (Sub Scan)
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Photo Mode Select
[0~8/1]
Line Width Correction: Photo Mode (Main Scan)
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Photo Mode (Sub Scan)
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Text/Photo Mode Select
[0~8/1]
Line Width Correction: Text/Photo Mode (Main Scan)
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Text/Photo Mode (Sub Scan)
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Pale Mode Select
[0~8/1]
Line Width Correction: Pale Mode (Main Scan)
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Pale Mode (Sub Scan)
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Generation Mode Select
[0~8/1]
Line Width Correction: Generation Mode (Main Scan) [0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Generation Mode (Sub Scan)
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
5-64
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
4904*
002
Line Width Correct

Processing Select: Photo
020
021
022
023
024
Text Mode
Photo Mode
Text/Photo Mode
Pale Mode
Generation Mode
4909
001
Image Processing Through DFU

IPU Front Side Image Module
Selects the image processing module for
scanning related to the SBU. The SBU (Sensor
Board Unit) converts the scanned image to
digital before sending it to the IPU.
[0~127/1]
IPU Back Side Image Module
scanning related to the CIS (Contact Image
Sensors).
[0~63/1]
IPU Plotter Image Module
scanning related to the SBU.
[0~255/1]
003
5-65
Service
Tables
002
Selects the image processing mode for Photo

Mode.
[0~3/1]
0: 106 line dither processing
3: Error diffusion processing
Turns line correction on/off for each mode.
[0~1/1]
0: No processing
1: Makes thin lines more thick.
30 July 2004
SP5xxx Mode
5024*
mm/inch Display Selection

Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
[0~1/1]
0: mm
1: inch
5037
Status Lamp Detection

Enables or disables the function of the status lamp installed above the operation
panel.
[0~1/1]
0: Off: Disabled
1: On: Enabled
This status lamp requires special ordering and installation for this machine.
5045
Counter Method Japan Only
5047
Reverse Paper Display

Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed.
[0~1/1]
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
5051
Toner Refill Detection Display Japan Only
5-66
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Auto Density Level

Selects the image density levels that are used in ADS mode by assigning a
value to the center notch.
[1~7/1 step/notch]
5112*
Non-Std. Paper Sel.

Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal
cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes. If 1 is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard
paper size using the UP mode.
5113*
001
Optional Counter Type

Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:
0: None
1: Key card (RK3, 4) Japan only
2: Key card down
3: Pre-paid card
4: Coin Lock
5: MF key card
11: Exp Key Card (Add)
12: Exp Key Card (Deduct)
External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external
device for user access control.
Note: SDK refers to software on an SD card.
[0~3/1]
0: No external devices.
1: External device 1
002
5118*
Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: Release for normal operation
1: Prohibit access to machine
5120*
Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal

Do not change. Japan Only
[0~2/1]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset
5-67
Service
Tables
5106*
30 July 2004
5121*
Counter Up Timing
Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at
paper exit. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: Feed count
1: No feed count
5126
F Original Size Selection

Sets the original size that the machine detects for F sizes.
[0~2/1]
0: 8hf x 13
1: 8hf x 13qr
2: 8 x 13
Note: hf = 1/2, qr = 1/4
5127
APS OFF Mode

This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or
pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine.
[0~1/1]
0: On
1: Off
5129
F Paper Size Selection

Sets the paper size that the machine detects when the 8 x 13 dial setting on a
paper cassette is used (LT/DLT version).
[0~2/1]
0: 8 x 13
1: 8hf x 13
2: 8qr x 13
Note: hf = 1/2, qr = 1/4
5131*
Paper Size Type Selection

Selects the paper size type (for originals and copy paper). (Only needs to be
adjusted if the optional printer controller is installed)
[0~2/1]
0: JP (Japan)
1: NA (North America)
2: EU (Europe)
After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on.
5-68
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
5141* Tray for Tab Sheets (B064 only)

Sets the height of the tabs for each paper source for tab sheets. The height of a tab is
measured from the edge of the paper to the edge of the tab.
[0~152/0.1 mm]
011
Tab Height: By-pass
The height of the tab is the value set for this SP
012
Tab Height: Tray 1
multiplied by 0.1. The default tab height then is:
013
Tab Height: Tray 2
130 x 0.1 = 13 mm
014
Tab Height: Tray 3
To change this setting, measure the height of the tab
015
Tab Height: Tray 4
in millimeters, multiply by 10, then input the result.
016
Tab Height: Tray 5
For example, if the measured height of the tab is 10
millimeters, enter 100.
Bypass Length Setting
Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
5154
001
Exit Tray Set

Limitless
Allows limitless paper output.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On. Once the initial paper exit is full, another will be selected automatically.
Switch this SP on only in the job queuing mode, i.e. when printing jobs in the
order of selection with the print priority function. Print priority is set in the User
Tools mode (System Settings> General Features> Print Priority> Job Order.)
Override
Allows overriding of the setting for SP5154-001.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
This SP can be set only when on is selected for SP5154-001. Changing this
setting has no effect on the machine when SP5154-001 is off.
002
5-69
Service
Tables
5150
5158
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
5162
30 July 2004
Cover Feeder Size Change (B140 only)

Controls the paper size for the cover interposer tray. Select a paper size and push
[Execute].
Note: hf = 1/2, qr = 1/4
For all versions
[0~1/1]
0: A3
1: 12 x 18
For Europe and China
[0~2/1]
0: 8hf x 13
1: 8 x 13
2: 8qr x 13
For USA
[0~1/1]
0: 8hf x 14
1: 8hf x 13
For USA
[0~1/1]
0: 11 x 8hf
1: 10hf x 7qr
For USA
[0~1/1]
0: 8hf x 11
1: 8 x 10
[0~1/1]
0: 8K
1: 11 x 17
[0~1/1]
0: 16K (267 x 195)
1: 8hf x 11
[0~1/1]
0: 16K (195 x 267)
1: 11 x 8hf
App. Switch Method (B140 only)
Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a software
switch.
[0~1/1]
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
5169
CE Login (B140 only)

If you will change the printer bit switches, you must log in to service mode with this
SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0~1/1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
5-70
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
5212*
003
Page Numbering
Duplex Printout Left/Right Position
004
Duplex Printout High/Low Position
5302*
Set Time
Sets the time clock for the local time.
[1440~1440/1 min.]
5307*
Summer Time
Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the change to
Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall. This SP lets
you set these items:
- Day and time to go forward automatically in April.
- Day and time to go back automatically in October.
- Set the length of time to go forward and back automatically.
The settings for 002 and 003 are done with 8-digit numbers:
Digits
Meaning
Month. 4: April, 10: October (for months 1 to 9, the first digit of 0
1st, 2nd
cannot be input, so the eight-digit setting for 002 or 003 becomes
a seven-digit setting)
3rd
Day of the week. 0: Sunday, 1: Monday
4th
The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit. If 0
is selected for Sunday, for example, and the selected Sunday is
the start of the 2nd week, then input a 2 for this digit.
5th, 6th
The time when the change occurs (24-hour as hex code).
Example: 00:00 (Midnight) = 00, 01:00 (1 a.m.) = 01, and so on.
7th
The number of hours to change the time. 1 hour: 1
If the time change is not a whole number (1.5 hours for example),
8th
digit 8 should be 3 (30 minutes).
Setting
Enables/disables the settings for 002 and 003.
001
[0~1/1]
002
003
Rule Set (Start)

Rule Set (End)
0: Disable
1: Enable
The start of summer time.
The end of summer time.
5-71
Service
Tables
Horizontally positions the page numbers

printed on both sides during duplexing.
[10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
Vertically positions the page numbers
printed on both sides during duplexing.
[10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
5404*
User Code Count Clear

001
User Code Counter Clear
30 July 2004
Clears all user code counters.

Press # to execute.
5501*
PM Alarm
Sets the count level for the PM alarm.
[0~9999/1]
0: Alarm disabled
The PM alarm goes off when the print count reaches this value multiplied by
1,000.
5504*
5505*
Jam Alarm
Error Alarm
5507
001
002
003
Supply Alarm Japan Only

Paper Supply Alarm
Staple Supply Alarm
Toner Supply Alarm
128*
132*
Interval: Other
Interval: A3
133*
134*
141*
142*
160*
164*
166*
172*
Interval: A4
Interval: A4
Interval: B4
Interval: B5
Interval: DLT
Interval: LG
Interval: LT
Interval HLT
Japan Only
(B064 only)
Enables or disables the call function. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: No call
1: Call
If this SP is enabled, use the settings below to set the
supply level to initiate a call for each paper size.
Sets the level to initiate a paper supply call for each
paper size, if SP5507-001 is enabled. Japan Only
[00250~10,000/1]
5-72
manuals4you.com
5508*
001
002
003
CC Call Japan Only

Jam Remains
Continuous Jams
Continuous Door Open
004
Low Call Mode
011
Jam Detection: Time

Length
012
Jam Detection
Continuous Count
013
Door Open: Time Length
021
Jam Operation: Time

Length
022
Jam Operation:
Continuous Count
023*
Door Operation: Time

Length
Enables/disables initiating a call.

[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables/disables the new call specifications designed
to reduce the number of calls.
[0~1/1]
0: Normal mode
1: Reduced mode
Sets the length of time to determine the length of an
unattended paper jam.
[03~30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is
enabled (set to 1).
Sets the number of continuous paper jams required
to initiate a call.
[02~10/1]
enabled (set to 1).
Sets the length of time the remains opens to
determine when to initiate a call.
[03~30/1]
enabled (set to 1).
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left
unattended.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when continuous paper
jams occur.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
Determines what happens when the front door
remains open.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
5-73
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
30 July 2004
5513
Parts Alarm Level Count Japan Only

001
Normal
Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to
sound for the number of copies.
[1~999/1 K]
002
DF
Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to
sound for the number of scanned originals.
[1~999/1 K]
5514
001
002
Parts Alarm Level Japan Only

Normal
DF
5-74
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Memory Clear
Clears all data from NVRAM. Before executing this SP, print an SMC Report.
( 5.2.1)
001
002
All Clear
Engine Clear
003
SCS
004
IMH Memory Clear
005
MCS
006
007
008
Copier application
Fax application
Printer application
009
Scanner application
010
Web Service/ Network application
011
NCS
014
Clear DCS Setting
015
Clear UCS Setting
016
MIRS Setting
017
CCS
5802*
Printer Free Run

Makes a base engine free run
[0~1/1]
0: Disable: Release free run mode
1: Enable: Enable free run mode
Return this setting to off (0) after testing is completed.

Initializes all registration settings for the
engine and copy process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS
(System Control Service) settings, operation
display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting
for stored documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Not used.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs
registered, the printer SP bit switches, and
the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and
all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files
and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login
ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the
document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface
settings (IP addresses also), the
SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control
Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information
Control Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information
Report Service) settings. (B140 only)
Initializes the CCS (Certification and
Charge-control Service) settings. (B140
only)
5-75
Service
Tables
5801
30 July 2004
5803
Input Check
Displays signals received from sensors and switches. ( 5.7.1)
5804
Output Check
Turns on the electrical components individually for testing. ( 5.7.2 )
5807
001
002
003
004
Option Connection Check

ADF (1:Connect)
Bank (1:Connect)
LCT (1:Connect)
Finisher (1:Connect)
5811*
Machine No. Setting
5812*
001
Service Tel. No. Setting

Service
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a
service call condition occurs.)
Facsimile
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the
Counter Report (UP mode). Not Used
Supply
Displayed on the initial SP screen.
Operation
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be
displayed on the initial screen.
002
003
004
Displays a 1 or 0 to indicate the status of the

device.:
[0~1/1]
1: Connected
0: Not connected
Enters the machine serial number. DFU
5-76
manuals4you.com
5816*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
Remote Service (B064 only)

I/F Setting
Turns the remote diagnostics off and on.
[0~2/1]
0: Remote diagnostics off.
1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on.
2: Network remote diagnostics.
CE Call
Lets the customer engineer start or end the remote machine
check with CSS or NRS; to do this, push the center report
key.
Function Flag
Enables and disables remote diagnosis over the NRS
network.
[0~1/1]
0: Disables remote diagnosis over the network.
1: Enables remote diagnosis over the network.
Communication
Push Execute to do a transmission test call for NRS. The
Test Call
test gives a value from 0 to 99.
[0~1/1]
0: Normal end (center operates)
1: Normal end (center does not operate)
Other: Not normal
Device
Push Execute to test if the machine operates.
Information Call
[0~1/1]
0: Normal end (center operates)
1: Normal end (center does not operate)
Other: Not normal
Device
Controls if the item for initial setting of the screen for the NRS
Information Call
device-information notification-call is shown.
Display
[0~1/1]
0: Enabled. Item initial setting not shown.
1: Disable. Item for initial setting shown.
SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation
is done by SSL during an RCG send for the NRS over a
network interface.
[0~1/1]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
RCG Connect
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the
Timeout
RCG (Remote Communication Gate) connects during a call
via the NRS network.
[1~90/1 sec.]
RCG Write to
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent
Timeout
data is written to the RCG during a call over the NRS
network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
RCG Read
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent
Timeout
data is written from the RCG during a call over the NRS
network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
5-77
Service
Tables
30 July 2004

011
5821*
001*
002*
Port 80 Enable
30 July 2004
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP

method over Port 80 on the NRS network.
[0~1/1]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
Remote Service Address Japan Only (B140 only)

CSS PI Device Code
Sets the PI device code. After you change this
setting, you must turn the machine off and on.
RCG IP Address
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h~FFFFFFFFh/1]
5824
NVRAM Data Upload

Uploads the NVRAM data to an IC flash memory card (B064) or an SD card
(B140). Push Execute.
Note: When uploading in this SP mode data, the front door must be open.
5825
NVRAM Data Download

Downloads data from an IC flash memory card (B064) or an SD card (B140) to
the NVRAM in the machine. After downloading is completed, remove the card
and turn the machine power off and on.
5-78
manuals4you.com
5828
012
075
076
077
078
079
050
051
052
084
090
091
5831
Network Setting
Device Name (B064 only)
Use these SPs to perform the network settings.
DNS Server From DHCP (B064 only)
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
DNS Server 3
Domain Name (Ethernet)
1284 Compatibility
Enables and disables bi-directional communication
(Centro)
on the parallel connection between the machine and
a computer.
[0~1/1]
0:Off
1: On
Data Transfer (Centro)
Determines the speed of data transmission on the
parallel line connection between the machine and a
computer.
[0~1/1]
0: Slow
1: Fast
With the Slow setting, there is a 120-microsecond
interval from the time an STB signal is sent until the
data is moved.
ECP (Centro)
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode)
for data transfer.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Print Settings List
Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings.
TELNET (0:OFF 1:ON)
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is
disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Web (0:OFF 1:ON)
Disables or enables the Web operation.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Initial Setting Clear

Press Execute to initialize all User Tool settings and restore them to their factory
settings.
5-79
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
5832
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
011
5833
30 July 2004
HDD Formatting
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
HDD Formatting (All)
HDD Formatting (IMH)
HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
HDD Formatting (Job Log)
HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
HDD Formatting (User Info.)
Mail RX Data
HDD Formatting (Data for a Design)
HDD Formatting (Log)
HDD Formatting (Ridoc DiskTopBinder)
e-Cabinet Enable
Enables the e-Cabinet function. Then, the user names in the cabinet are enabled
for use with the POP server.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5-80
manuals4you.com
5836*
001
002
003
061
071
072
073
074
075
076
081
082
083
084
Capture
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated
from the initial system screen.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
Print Backup Function (0:Off 1:On)
Turns the print backup feature on and off. Default: 0 (Off)
When this feature is on, the print backup features are shown in the initial system
settings. Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB:Media Link
Board) is installed.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Captured File Resend (B064 only)
To decrease the load on the network, only the captured document is sent (0), or
the network accurately keeps the captured document and it can be sent again
(1).
Reduction for Copy Color
[0~3/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
Reduction for Copy B&W Text
[0~6/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Reduction for Copy B&W Other
[0~6/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Reduction for Printer Color
[0~3/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
Reduction for Printer B&W
[0~6/1]
0 1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Reduction for Printer B&W HQ
[1~5/1]
1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8
Format for Copy Color
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU
Format for Copy B&W Text
[0~3/1]
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Format Copy B&W Other
[0~3/1]
Format for Printer Color
[0~3/1]
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU
5-81
Service
Tables
30 July 2004

085
30 July 2004
092
[0~3/1]
Format for Printer B&W HQ
[0~3/1]
Default for JPEG
[5~95/1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when
optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed.
Sets the quality level of JPEG images for
High Quality for JPEG
093
Low Quality for JPEG
094
Default Format for Backup Files

(B140 Only)
095
Default Resolution for Backup Files
097
Default Compression for Backup Files
098
Back Projection Removal

(B140 Only)
086
091
Format for Printer B&W
high quality sent to the Document Server

with the MLB (Media Link Board).
[5~95/1]
Sets the quality level of JPEG images for
low quality sent to the Document Server
with the MLB (Media Link Board).
[5~95/1]
Sets the format of the backup files.
[0~2/1]
0: TIFF
1: JPEG
2: For printing
This feature can be selected only if
SP5836-3 is set to 1.
Sets the resolution conversion ratio for
the backup files.
[0~3/1]
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3 x
3: 1/4x
Sets the rate of compression for the
backup files.
[0~2/1]
0: Standard
1: Low
2: High
Removes the ghost images that are

copied from the back sides of twosided originals.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5-82
manuals4you.com
5839*
004
007
008
009
010
011
012
IEEE 1394 (B064 only)

This SP is displayed only when an IEEE 1394 (firewire) card is installed.
Host Name
Enter the name of the device used on the network. Example: RNP0000000000
Cycle Master
Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable (Off)
1: Enable (On)
BCR Mode
Determines how BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) operates on the 1394
standard bus when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM.
(NVRAM: 2-bits)
[Always Effective]
IRM 1394a Check
Conducts a 1394a check of IRM when the independent node is in any mode
other than IRM.
[0~1/1]
0: Checks whether IRM conforms to 1394a
1: After IRM is checked, if IRM does not conform then independent node
switches to IRM.
Unique ID
Lists the ID (Node_Unique_ID) assigned to the device by the system
administrator.
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator.
Instead, the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used.
ON: The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used, and
the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored. Also, when the serial
bus is reset, extra bus transactions are opened for the enumeration.
Logout
Handles the login request of the login initiator for SBP-2. (1-bit)
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disable (refuse login)
Initiator retry during login
Login refusal on arrival of login request (standard operation)
ON: Enable (force logout)
Initiator retry during login
Login refusal on arrival of login request, and the initiator forces the login.
Login
Enables or disables the exclusive login feature (SBP-2 related).
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disables. The exclusive login (LOGIN ORB xclusive it) is ignored.
ON: Enables. Exclusive login is in effect.
5-83
Service
Tables
30 July 2004

013
5840*
006
007
011
5841*
30 July 2004
Login MAX
Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits)
[0~63/1]
0: Reserved
63: Reserved
IEEE 802.11b (B064 only)
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth
setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This
bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
WEP Key Select
Determines how the initiator (SBP-2) handles subsequent login requests.
[0~1/1]
0: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused.
1: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused and the initiator logs out.
Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed.
001
011
012
013
014
021
022
023
Supply Name Setting

Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
Toner Name Setting: Black
Enter the name of the toner in use.
Standard Staples
StapleStd1
StapleStd2
StapleStd3
StapleStd4
StapleBind1
Saddle-Stitch Staples
StapleBind2
StapleBind3
5842*
001
Net File Analysis Mode Setting
5-84
manuals4you.com
Bit SW 0011 1111
30 July 2004
002
003
004
USB
Transfer Rate
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.
[Full Speed]
[Auto Change]
Vendor ID
Sets the vendor ID:
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
Product ID
Sets the product ID.
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
[0000~9999/1] DFU
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number
recognized as the BCD.
5845* Delivery Server

These are delivery server settings.
001
FTP Port No.
[0~65535/1]
002
IP Address
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting.
[0~FFFFFFFF/1]
003
Retry Interval (B064 only)
Sets the time interval before the machine tries again when it goes back to standby
after an error occurs during an image transfer with the delivery scanner or SMTP
server.
[60~900/1]
004
Number of Retries (B064 only)
Sets the number of times the machine tries again before it returns to standby after
an error occurs during an image transfer with the delivery or SMTP server.
[0~99/1]
005
Capture Server IP Address (B064 only)
Sets the capture server IP address for the capture feature.
[0~0xFFFFFFF]
006
Delivery Error Display Time
Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test
error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external
device.
[0~999/1]
007
Delivery Options (B064 only)
Connects to the Scan Router server for delivery of scanned documents.
[0~1/1]
0: No connection to Scan Router delivery server
1: Connected to Scan Router server for delivery of scanned documents.
5-85
Service
Tables
5844*
001

008
009
30 July 2004
IP Address (Secondary)
Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery
server for Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address, and does not
refer to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model (B140 only)
Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O
device.
[0~4/1]
010
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr. Capability (B140 only)
Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
[0~255/1]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to 0)
011
Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext) (B140 only)

These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of
registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
5-86
manuals4you.com
5846*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
UCS Setting
Machine ID (Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is
only displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
6-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
8-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
Machine ID Clear (Delivery Server)
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the
machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
[2000~50000/1]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,
and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Model (B064 only)
Changes the model of the transfer server that is registered for the I/O device.
[0~4/1]
0: Not used
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Server Capability (B064 only)
Changes the functions that can be done by the server that is registered for the I/O
device.
Bit 7 = 1 Comment information
Bit 6 = 1 Address direct entry possible
Bit 5 = 1 Mail Rx confirmation possible
Bit 4 = 1 Address book auto update
Bit 3 = 1
Fax Rx function
Delivery Server Retry Timer
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/1 s]
0: No retries
Delivery Server Retry Times
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/1]
5-87
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
008
010
048
049
050
051
052
053
070
071
072
073
074
30 July 2004
Delivery Server Maximum Entries

Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about the users
of the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[20000~50000/1]
LDAP Search Timeout (B140 only)
Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1~255/1]
Initialize Delivery Info.
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the delivery
address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize LDAP Info.
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP
address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize Local Info.
Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by
UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not
deleted.
Upload All Directory Info.
Uploads all directory information to the IC card.
Download All Directory Info.
Downloads all directory information from the IC card.
Update Info Clear (B140 only)
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot. Deletes only the
files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is writeprotected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
LDAP Attribute (Name) (B140 only)
Lets you input a search attribute other than the default mail (cn) for the LDAP
server search.
LDAP Attribute (Mail) (B140 only)
Lets you input a search attribute other than the default mail address (mail) for the
LDAP server search.
LDAP Attribute (Fax) (B140 only)
Lets you input a search attribute other than the default facsimile telephone number
(FacsimileTelephoneNumber) for the LDAP server search.
LDAP Attribute (Organization) (B140 only)
Lets you input a search attribute other than the default organization name (o) for
the LDAP server search.
LDAP Attribute (Organizational Unit) (B140 only)
Lets you input a search attribute other than the default organization unit name (ou)
for the LDAP server search.
5-88
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
091
094
5847*
002
003
005
006
021
Plain Data Forbidden (B140 only)

Lets you to prevent the address from transmission as plain data. This is a security
function that prevents unauthorized access to address book data.
[0~1/1]
0: No check. Address book data not protected.
1: Check. Enables operation of UCS without data from HDD or SC card and
without creating address book information with plain data.
FTP Auth. Port Settings
Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the
individual authorization mode.
[0~65535/1]
Encryption Status
Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP
server.
[0~255/1] No default
Net File Resolution Reduction
5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally
by the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
NetFile refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
[0~4 /1]
Rate for Copy B&W Text
0: 1x
Rate for Copy B&W Other
1: 1/2x
Rate for Printer B&W
2: 1/3x
Rate for Printer B&W HQ
3: 1/4x
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5~95/1]
5-89
Service
Tables
090
5848*
001
002
003
004
005
009
011
021
022
041
100
5849*
001
002
30 July 2004
Web Service
5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5847 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
Acc. Ctrl. : NetFile (Lower 4 Bits Only)
Bit switch settings.
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router
have no effect on capture.
Acc. Ctrl. : Repository (Lower 4
0000: No access control
Bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Switches access control on and off.
Acc. Ctrl. : Doc. Svr. Print
(Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF
Acc. Ctrl. : User Directory
(Lower 4 Bits)
Acc. Ctrl. : Delivery Input (Lower
4 Bits)
Acc. Ctrl. : Job Control (Lower 4
Bits)
Acc. Ctrl: Device Management
(Lower 4 Bits)
Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits)
Acc. Ctrl: User Administration
(Lower 4 Bits)
Acc. Ctrl: Security Setting
(Lower 4 Bits)
Repository: Download Image
[1~1024/1 K]
Max. Size
Installation Date
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
Display
The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation
Date or Inst. Date.
Switch to Print
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the
printout for the total counter.
[0~1/1]
0: No Print
1: Print
5-90
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
002
5852
001
002
Address Book Function (B064 only)

Switch Module Selects the module for managing user information.
[0~1/1]
0: SCS
1: UCS
Select Title
Selects the default heading of the address book.
[2~4/1]
2: Heading 1
3: Heading 2
4: Heading 3
SMTP (B064 only)
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. The protocol for communication between Internet
main MTAs (Message Transfer Agents).
Server
Sets the server name.
Name
Port Number Sets the port number
5853
Stamp Data Download

Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the
hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the
user will not have access to the fixed stamps (Confidential, Secret, etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the
HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.
5856
Remote ROM Update

When set to 1 allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284)
during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is
cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel
cable
[0~1/1]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
5-91
Service
Tables
5850*
001
5857
001
30 July 2004
Save Debug Log (B140 Only)

On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this
feature is switched on.
[0~1/1]
002
005
006
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
0: OFF
1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD Card)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event
selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2~3 /1]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
Save to HDD
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk. (5.8.2)
Save to SD Card
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card. (5.8.2)
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the
SD Card. (5.8.2)
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the
SD Card. (5.8.2)
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with
no key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files
generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010
or 011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
Free Space on SD Card
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory) onto
an SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. ( 5.8.4)
Make HDD Debug
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. ( 5.8.4)
Make SD Debug
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. ( 5.8.4)
5-92
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
5858*
001
Debug Save When (B140 Only)

These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of
SC error codes.
Engine SC Error (0:OFF
Stores SC codes generated by copier engine
1:ON)
errors.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
002
Controller SC Error (0:OFF

1:ON)
Stores SC codes generated by GW controller

errors.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
003
004
Any SC Error
Jam (0:OFF 1:ON)
[0~65535/1]
Stores jam errors.
[0~1/1]
5859*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
Debug Log Save Function (B140 Only)

These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions
Key 1
that use common memory on the controller board. (5.3.1)
Key 2
[-9999999~9999999/1]
Key 3
Key 4
Key 5
Key 6
Key 7
Key 8
Key 9
Key 10
5-93
Service
Tables
0: OFF
1: ON
5860*
020
021
022
30 July 2004
SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 (B140 only)

Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1~168/1]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not
received during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0~1/1]
0: No. From item not switched.
1: Yes. From item switched.
5870
Common Key Info Writing (B140 only)

Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS
specifications.
Note: This SP is for future use and currently not used.
5871
HDD Function Disable (B140 Only)

Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the
HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to
enable the setting.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Note: This SP is intended for use during installation of the Data Overwrite
Security Unit B735 (a new option). For more, see section 1. Installation.
5-94
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
001
002
5875
SD Card Apli.
Allows you to integrate (copy) applications from SD cards onto other SD cards.
( 5.5)
Executes the move from one SD card to another.
Move Exec
This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
Undo Exec
SC Auto Reboot
Determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC error
occurs.
[0~1/1]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and
logs the SC error code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not
reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.
Service
Tables
5873
5-95
30 July 2004
5907*
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name

Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names
should be registered again.
After selecting, press the Original Type key and # key at the same time. When
the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913
002
Switchover Permission Time

Print Application Timer
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take
control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is not
operating because a key has not been pressed.
[3~30/1 s]
5914*
Application Counter Display

Selects the total counts that will be displayed in the UP mode.
Print Counter
[0~1/1]
0: Not displayed
Copier Counter
1: Displayed
001
003
5915*
Mechanical Counter Detection

Displays whether the mechanical counter is installed in the machine.
[0~2/1]
0: Not detected.
1: Detected
2: Unknown
5918*
A3/DLT Counter Display

Determines whether pressing the counter key displays count confirmation:
system initial settings
system manager settings
counter
[0~1/1]
0: No display
1: Display
This SP affects the display only, and has no effect on SP5104 (A3/DLT Double
Count).
5-96
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
5921
Key Card Setting Japan Only

Enables operation with a key card device outside Japan.
[0~1/1]
0: No key card operation
1: Key card operation
5952
Fact Adjust Mode DFU
5959*
001
Paper Size (B064 only)

Tray 1
Tray 1 (Tandem Tray) can accept two paper sizes: A4 LEF and LT LEF. Enter
the correct number to select the size of the paper loaded in Tray 1:
A4 LEF: 5
LT LEF: 38
If the A3/DLT Tray Kit B475 is installed, enter the correct number to select the
size of the paper loaded in the kit:
005
006
No.
132
141
5
Size
11" x 17"
81/2" x 14" SEF
81/2" x 11" LEF
No.
160
167
38
Tray 4 (LCT)
Tray 4 (LCT) accepts three paper sizes. Enter the correct number of the size of
the paper loaded in the LCT:
A4 LEF: 5
B5 LEF: 14
LT LEF: 38
If the LG/B4 Feeder Kit B474 is installed, enter the correct number to select the
size of the paper loaded in the kit:
A4 SEF: 133
B4 SEF: 141
LG SEF: 164
Cover Sheet
The Cover Interposer Tray B470 is provided with two arrays of paper size
sensors to detect the paper size. However, some of the paper sizes may not be
indicated correctly on the display panel. For more details, refer to the Cover
Interposer Tray manual section Paper Size Detection.
5-97
Service
Tables
Size
A3 SEF
B4 SEF
A4 LEF
5959*
001
005
006
30 July 2004
Paper Size (B140 only)

Tray 1
The following paper sizes can be set. If the A3 DLT kit is not installed, you can
only use settings 0 and 1.
0: A4
6: 81/2 x 14 R (LG SEF)
1: 81/2x 11 (LT)
7: 81/2 x 11 R (LT SEF)
2:A3
8: B5
3:B4
9: B5 R (B5 SEF)
4:A4R (A4 SEF)
10: Custom Size
5:11 x 17
Tray 4 (LCT)
Tray 4 (LCT) accepts three paper sizes. Enter the correct number of the size of
the paper loaded in the LCT:
0: A4
4: 81/2 x 14 R (LG SEF)
1:81/2 x 11
5: B4 R (B4 SEF)
2:B5
6: 81/2 x 14 R (LG SEF)
3:A4 R (A4 SEF)
7: Custom Size
Cover Sheet DFU
The Cover Interposer Tray B470 is provided with two arrays of paper size sensors
to detect the paper size. However, some of the paper sizes may not be indicated
correctly on the display panel. For more details, refer to the Cover Interposer Tray
manual section Paper Size Detection.
5967*
Copy Server: Set Function

[0~1/1]
0: ON
1: OFF
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.
5974*
Cherry Server
Do not change. Japan Only
5-98
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
021
022
023
SP Print Mode (SMC Print)

In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the
paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all
the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the
desired print, and press Execute.
All (Data List)
SP (Mode Data List)
User Program Data
Logging Data
Self-Diagnostic Report
Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
NIB Summary
Capture Log
Copier User Program
Scanner SP
Scanner User Program
Service
Tables
5990
5-99
30 July 2004
SP6xxx Peripherals
6006*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
ADF Registration Adjustment

ADF Horizontal Registration (Front)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front in ADF mode.
[3~+3/0.1 mm]
ADF Horizontal Registration (Back)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the back in ADF mode.
[3~+3/0.1 mm]
ADF Vertical Registration (Front)
Adjusts the vertical registration for the front in ADF mode.
[30 ~+24/1 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+24 = +4.1 mm
ADF Vertical Registration (Back)
Adjusts the vertical registration for the back in ADF mode.
[30 ~+30/1 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+30 = +5.1 mm
Adjusts the roller timing at the skew correction sensor/entrance roller. A higher
setting causes more buckling.
[12.0~+12/1 mm]
-12 = -3.0 mm
+12 = +3.0 mm
Adjusts the roller timing at the interval sensor/scanning roller. A higher setting
causes more buckling.
[8.0~+8/1 mm]
-8 = -2 mm
+8 = +2 mm
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Front)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the front.
[20~+20/1 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Back)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the back.
[20~+20/1 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
5-100
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
6007
ADF Input Check
Displays signals received from sensors and switches in the ADF. ( 5.7.3)
001
Group 1
002
Group 2
003
Group 3
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
ADF Output Check

Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing. ( 5.7.4)
Feed Motor: Forward
Feed Motor: Reverse
Transport Motor: Forward
Exit Motor: Forward
Pick-up Motor: Reverse
Bottom Plate Motor: Forward
Bottom Plate Motor: Reverse
6009
DF Free Run
6016
Original Size Determination Priority

Allows selection of alternate settings for automatic original size detection. (
6.4.9)
6017*
Sheet Through Magnification

This changes the magnification by adjusting the speed of scanning.
[50~+50/1 %]
6020*
ADF Contact Mode In/Out

If the original is small (B6, A5, HLT), the delay sensor detects the leading edge of
the sheet and delays the original at the entrance roller for the prescribed number
of pulses to buckle the leading edge and correct skew.
[0~1/1]
0: Delay skew correction only for small originals
1: Delay skew correction for all originals, regardless of size. (May reduce the
scanning speed of the ADF)
Performs an ADF free run in duplex original mode.
5-101
Service
Tables
6008
30 July 2004
6105*
Staple Position Adjustment

Adjusts the stapling position in the main scan direction.
[3.5~+3.5/0.5 mm]
A larger value shifts the stapling position outward.
6107*
Finisher Free Run (B478/B706 only)

Selects the free run mode during testing.
Stapling Mode
Stapling only
All Mode
All finisher operation is tested
Packing Mode
Before you move the finisher to a new location, do
this SP. When you switch on the machine after you
moved it, the finisher automatically goes to the
ready condition.
Shift Mode
Tests the shift mode
001
002
003
004
6113*
001
002
Punch Hole Adjustment

2-Holes
Adjusts the punch hole position in the sub-scan direction for the punch unit with
two punch holes.
[7.5~+7.5/0.5 mm]
A larger value shifts the punch holes towards the edge of the paper.
3-Holes
Adjusts the punch hole position in the sub-scan direction for the punch unit with
three punch holes.
[7.5~+7.5/0.5 mm]
A larger value shifts the punch holes towards the edge of the paper.
6116*
Staple Limit Counter for Thick Paper

Multiply the normal limit by this number to determine the staple limit number for
thick paper.
[1~3/1 sheet]
6117
Finisher Input Check
001
002
003
004
005
006
6118
6119*
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches

of the finisher. ( 5.7.5)
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
Finisher Output Check
Turn on the electrical components of the finisher

individually for test purposes. ( 5.7.6)
Punch Function Enabled (Thick Paper)

Allows punching heavier paper, including tab sheets.
[0~1/1]
0: Punching thick paper prohibited
1: Punching thick paper allowed
5-102
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Staple Jogger Adjustment
A3
B4
A4T (SEF)
A4Y (LEF)
B5T (SEF)
B5Y (LEF)
DLT
LG
LTT ( LT SEF)
LTY (LT LEF)
Other
Allows fine adjustment of the staple unit jogger fences

for different paper sizes.
[-1.5~+1.5/0.5 mm]
A higher value moves the fence away from the paper,
while a lower value brings the fences closer in.
Service
Tables
6120*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
5-103
6122
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
30 July 2004
Z-Fold Position Adjust (B140 only)

These settings adjust the positions of the first and second folds of paper fed
through the Z-folding unit. The first 8 settings (001-008) adjust the position of the
first fold for the paper sizes listed. The second 8 settings (009-016) adjust the
position of the second fold. The illustration shows the position of the sheet while it
goes through the lower exit rollers after it has been folded.
1st Fold
A3
[-4~+4/0.2 mm]
Adjusts the position of the first fold [A] to decrease or
B4
increase the distance (A) between the leading edge [B] and
A4 SEF
the crease of the 2nd fold [C].
DLT
LG
LT SEF
12 x 18
1st Fold: Other
2nd Fold
A3
[-4~+4/0.2 mm]
Adjusts the position of the 2nd fold [C] to decrease or
B4
increase the length (L1) of the sheet between the trailing
A4 SEF
edge [D] and the 2nd fold.
DLT
LG
LT SEF
12 x 18
Other
[D]
[A]
L1
[B]
[C]
B140S911.WMF
5-104
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
ADF Up/Down Setting

Sets the timing for raising and lowering the bottom plate of the ADF.
[0~1/1]
0: Original set
1: Copy start
6902*
Fold Position Adjustment

Adjusts the fold position of the copies for saddle-stitching according to paper size
for multiple sheets. The amount of folding skew for single and multiple sheets is
different. This SP adjusts for multiple sheets. SP6903 adjusts for single sheets.
Note (B140 only): Always set SP6902 first and then set SP6903. If the order is
reversed, the value of SP6902 is added to SP6903. This causes the folding
position to shift for single-sheets and causes the booklet to skew.
A3
[3.5~+3.5/0.5 mm]
B4
A4T (SEF)
B5T (SEF)
DLT
(B140 only)
LG
LTT (SEF)
Others
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
6903*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
6904
Fold Position Adjustment (1 Sheet) (B140 only)

Adjusts the fold position for single sheets to minimize vertical skew. The amount
of folding skew for single and multiple sheets is different. This SP adjusts for single
sheets. SP6902 adjusts for multiple sheets.
Note: Always set SP6902 first and then set SP6903. If the order is reversed, the
value of SP6902 is added to SP6903. This causes the folding position to shift for
single-sheets and causes the booklet to skew.
[-7.5~+7.5/0.5 mm]
A3
A higher value brings the fold closer to the trailing edge; a lower
B4
value moves it away from the trailing edge.
A4T (SEF)
B5T (SEF)
DLT
LG
LTT (SEF)
Others
Punch Function Enabled (Z-Fold) (B140 only)
Switches on the hole punch for use when the machine operates with the Z-fold
unit.
[0~1/1]
0: No punching with Z-fold unit operation
1: Punching allowed with Z-fold unit operation
5-105
Service
Tables
6900*
30 July 2004
SP7xxx Data Logs

7001*
Main Motor Operation Time
7002*
001
Original Counter (B064 only)

Total
Displays the total number of fed originals.
002
003
004
Copy
Fax
Document Box
005
006
Scanner
Others
7003*
Print Counter (B064 only)

Displays the total number of prints in all modes.
Total Count
Displays the total number of prints in all modes.
Copy
Displays the total number of prints in copy mode.
Printer
Displays the total number of prints in printer mode.
Others
Displays the total number of prints in other modes.
001
002
004
005
7006*
001
002
7007*
001
002
003
004
Displays the total drum rotation time.
Displays the total number of fed originals in copy mode.

Not used.
Displays the total number of fed originals in document server
mode.
Displays the total number of fed originals in scanner mode.
Displays the total number of fed originals in other modes.
C/O, P/O Counter (B064 only)

C/O
Displays the number of sets of copies per original when making 10 or more
sets of copies.
When making 15 sets of copies of an original, this counter value will
increase by 6.
P/O
Displays the number of sets of prints per original data when making 10 or
more sets.
When making 15 sets of prints of an original data, this counter value will
increase by 6.
Other Device Counters (B064 only)
Duplex Counter
Displays the count total for the selected item.
A3/DLT Counter
Staple Counter
Scan Counter
5-106
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
005
006
014
038
044
132
133
134
141
142
160
164
166
172
255
Print Count Paper Size (B064 only)

Displays the total number of prints by paper size.
A4 LEF
Displays the number of copies by paper size.
Display range: 0~9999999
A5 LEF
B5 LEF
LT LEF
HLT LEF
A3 LEF
A4 SEF
A5 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
HLT SEF
Other
7105*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
255
P Type Counter (B064 only)

Displays the total number of prints by paper type. A singleNormal
sided print counts as 1 and a two-sided print counts as 2.
Recycled
Special
Color 1
Color 2
Letterhead
Label
Thick
OHP
Used
Index (Tab Sheets)
Tracing
Others
7201*
Total Scan Counter

(B064 only)
Displays the total number of scanned originals.
7204*
Print Counter Paper Trays (B064 only)

Displays the total number of sheets fed from each paper tray.
001
By-pass
002
Tray 1
003
Tray 2
004
Tray 3
005
Tray 4
006
LCT
007
Cover Interposer
5-107
Service
Tables
7101*
30 July 2004
7205*
ADF Counter (B064 only)

Displays the total number of originals fed by the ADF.
7206*
Staple Counter (B064 only)

001
Normal
002
Booklet
7209*
Punch Counter (B064 only)

Displays the total number of times the punch has been used.
7301*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
Number of Copies by Reproduction Ratio (B064 only)

Reduce 25% <-> 49%
Displays the total number of prints for each
reproduction ratio range.
Reduce 50% <-> 99%
Full Size
SP7848 clears these counters.
Enlarge 101% <-> 200%
Enlarge 201% <-> 400%
Free Mag. %
Free Size Mag. %
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Displays the total number of staples

used.
5-108
manuals4you.com
7304*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
7305
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
Copy: Number of Copies by Mode (B064 only)

Displays the total number of copies by original type. SP7837 or SP7848 clears this
counter.
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Generation Copy
Pale
Punching
Repeat
Sort
Staple
Series
Erase
Duplex
ADF
Double Copy
Duplex Original
Divide Copy
Combine 1 Side
Combine 2 Side
Booklet Gathering
Pamphlet Saddle-Stitch
Batch
SADF
Mixed Sizes
Stamp
Cover/Chapter Sheet
Chapter Page
Copy: Display Jobs by Continuous (B064 only)
Displays the total number of multiple print jobs by the size of the sets. SP7838 or
SP7848 clears this counter.
1 to 1
1 to 2 <-> 5
1 to 6 <-> 10
1 to 11 <-> 20
1 to 21 <-> 50
1 to 51 <-> 100
1 to 101 <-> 300
1 to 310 <-> Over
5-109
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
7306
7320
7321
7323
7324
7325
7326
7327
7328
30 July 2004
Copy: Display Jobs by Mode (B064 only)

Displays the total number of copy jobs by operation mode (stapling, punching,
etc.). SP7839 or SP7848 clears this counter.
Doc. Svr. Scan Count
Displays the total number of pages stored in the document server. SP7840 or
Doc. Svr. Original Size Display
Displays by paper size the total number of originals stored in the document server.
SP7841 or SP7848 clears this counter.
Doc. Svr. Print Size Display
Displays by paper size the total number of prints stored in the document server.
SP7842 or SP7848 clears this counter.
Doc. Svr. Print Job Counter
Displays the total number of jobs executed from the document server. SP7843 or
Doc. Svr. Job Count (Page No)
Displays the number of pages in jobs executed from the document server. SP7844
or SP7848 clears this counter.
Doc. Svr. Job Count (File No.)
Displays the number of files in jobs executed from the document server. SP7845 or
Doc. Svr. Job Count (Set No.)
Displays the number of sets of multiple page print jobs executed from the
document server. SP7846 or SP7848 clears this counter.
Doc. Svr. Job Count (Print Mode)
Displays the total number of prints in print mode executed from the document
server. SP7847 or SP7848 clears this counter.
7401*
Total SC Counter
Displays the total number of SCs logged.
7403*
SC History
Displays information about the 10 most recent service calls (Code, Total, Date, and
Details).
7502*
Total Paper Jam Counter

Displays the total number of copy jams.
7503*
Total Original Jam Counter

Displays the total number of original jams.
5-110
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Paper Jam Location

Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused
by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Paper Late
(Remains ON)
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
34
Paper Lag
(Remains OFF)
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
66
69
71
72
73
74
On Screen
At power on
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
External Tray
Registration 1
Registration 2
Registration 3
Registration 4
Middle Sensor
Registration
Fusing
Duplex Exit
Duplex Exit
Ent Duplex
Ent Duplex 1
Ent Duplex 2
Ent Duplex 3
Exit Duplex
1-Bin Tray
Bypass: Non-Feed
5-111
What It Means
1st Paper Feed SN

2nd Paper Feed SN
3rd Paper Feed SN
4th Paper Feed SN (Japan Only)
LCT Paper Feed SN
1st Vertical Transport SN
2nd Vertical Transport SN
3rd Vertical Transport SN
4th Vertical Transport SN (Japan
Only)
Relay SN
Registration SN
Fusing Exit SN
Exit Unit Entrance SN
Paper Exit SN
Duplex Entrance SN
Duplex Transport SN 1
Duplex Inverter SN
1-Bin Tray SN Japan Only
By-pass Paper End SN
Service
Tables
7504
7504
101
102
103
104
105
106
109
110
111
112
113
115
116
30 July 2004
Finisher (B469: No Saddle Stitch)

Finisher 101. Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the entrance sensor at the precise time or
remains at the entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 102. Proof Tray Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the proof tray exit sensor at the precise time
after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the proof tray exit sensor for
longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 103. Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time after
activating the entrance sensor or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the
prescribed time.
Finisher 104. Staple Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the staple entrance sensor at the precise time
after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the staple entrance sensor for
Finisher 105. Exit Sensor after jogging
When the paper from the jogger unit fails to activate the exit sensor at the
precise time or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 106. Stapler Unit 1
When the stapler unit fails to send any signals while stapling.
Finisher 109. Shift Motor
When the signal status of the lower tray encoder sensor does not change at the
precise time during motor rotation. Returns SC733
Finisher 110. Jogger Fence Motor
When the status of the jogger fence HP sensor does not change at the precise
time during jogger fence motor rotation. Returns SC722.
Finisher 111. Shift Roller or Guide Plate Motor
When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not change at the precise time
during shift roller motor rotation, or the status of the guide plate position sensor
does not change at the precise time during guide plate motor rotation. Returns
SC732, SC736
Finisher 112. Stapler Movement or Stapler Rotation Motor
When the status of the stapler HP sensor does not change at the precise time
during stapler movement motor rotation, or the status of the stapler rotation
sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler rotation motor.
Returns SC730, SC727
Not logged. Returns SC724.
Finisher 115. Feed Out Belt Motor
When the status of the feed out belt HP sensor does not change at the precise
time during feed out belt motor rotation. Returns SC725.
Finisher 116. Punch Hole Motor
When the status of the punch HP sensor does not change at the precise time
during punch hole motor rotation. Returns SC729
5-112
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
Finisher (B468/B674)
When the paper fails to activate the entrance sensor at the precise time or
remains at the entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
When the paper fails to activate the proof tray exit sensor at the precise time
after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the proof tray exit sensor for
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time after
activating the entrance sensor or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the
prescribed time.
When the paper from jogger unit fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise
time or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
When the stapler unit fails to send any signals while stapling.
Finisher 127. Saddle Stitch Stapler Unit
Finisher : When the saddle stitch stapler fails to send any signals while stapling.
Saddle Stitch,
Finisher 128. Saddle Stitch Stapler Unit
When the status of the exit sensor does not change at the precise time during
saddle stitching.
When the status of the upper tray limit sensor does not change at the precise
time while lifting the upper exit tray, the status of the upper tray full sensor does
not change at the precise time while lowering the upper exit tray, or the status of
the lower tray encoder sensor does not change at the precise time while moving
the lower tray. Returns SC733, SC726
time during jogger fence motor rotation. Returns SC722
When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not change at the precise
time during shift roller motor rotation, or the status of the guide plate position
sensor does not change at the precise time during guide plate motor rotation.
Finisher 132. Stapler Movement or Stapler Rotation Motor
When the status of the stapler HP sensor does not change at the precise time
during stapler movement motor rotation, or the status of the stapler rotation
sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler rotation motor.
Not logged. Returns SC724, SC740, SC741
5-113
Service
Tables
7504
121
134
135
136
7504
141
142
143
144
145
148
149
150
151
153
30 July 2004
Finisher 134. Folder Plate Motor

When the status of the folder plate HP sensor does not change at the precise time
during folder plate motor rotation. Returns SC739
Finisher 135. Feed Out Belt Motor
When the status of the feed out belt HP sensor does not change at the precise
time during feed out belt motor rotation. Returns SC725
Finisher 136. Punch Hole Motor
When the status of the punch HP sensor does not change at the precise time
during punch hole motor rotation. Returns SC729
Finisher (B478/B706)
When the paper fails to activate the entrance sensor at the precise time or remains
at the entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
When the paper fails to activate the proof tray exit sensor at the precise time after
activating the entrance sensor or remains at the proof tray exit sensor for longer
than the prescribed time.
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time after activating
the entrance sensor or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed
time.
When the paper from jogger unit fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time
or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 148. Upper Transport Motor
When the upper transport motor fails to send any signals while rotating.
When the status of the lower tray encoder sensor does not change at the precise
time during shift motor rotation. Returns SC733
time during jogger fence motor rotation. Returns SC722
When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not change at the precise time
during shift roller motor rotation, or the status of the guide plate position sensor
does not change at the precise time during guide plate motor rotation. Returns
SC732, SC736
Finisher 153. Stapler Unit
When the stapler unit fails to send any signals while stapling. Returns SC724
5-114
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
155
156
Finisher: Feed Out Belt Motor

When the status of the feed out belt HP sensor does not change at the precise time
during feed out belt motor rotation. Returns SC725
Finisher : Punch Hole Motor
When the status of the punch HP sensor does not change at the precise time during
punch hole motor rotation. Returns SC729
Mail Box (B471)
Mail Box 161. Vertical Transport Sensor 1 (CN201)
An error is returned when the status of one or more of these sensors does not
change with the prescribed time.
7504
166
Cover Interposer Tray (B470)

Inserter 1. Feed or Pull-out Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the feed or pull-out sensor at the precise time.
Inserter 2. Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time or remains at
the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Inserter 3. Bottom Plate Position Sensor
When the status of the bottom plate position sensor does not change at the precise
time during bottom plate motor rotation. Returns SC750,
167
168
7504
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
181
182
183
184
185
Z-Folding Unit (B660)

Z-Fold 169. Paper Feed Sensor: Paper Late
Z-Fold 170. Paper Feed Sensor: Paper Remains
Z-Fold 171. Fold Timing Sensor: Paper Late
Z-Fold 172. Fold Timing Sensor: Paper Remains
Z-Fold 173. Leading Edge Exit Sensor: Paper Late
Z-Fold 174. Leading Edge Exit Sensor: Paper Remains
Z-Fold 175. Upper Stopper Path Sensor: Paper Late
Z-Fold 176. Upper Stopper Path Sensor: Paper Remains
Z-Fold 177. Lower Exit Sensor: Paper Late
Z-Fold 178. Lower Exit Sensor: Paper Remains
Z-Fold 181. Upper Exit Sensor: Paper Late
Z-Fold 182. Upper Exit Sensor: Paper Remains
Z-Fold 183. Paper Fold Motor Lock
Z-Fold 184. Lower Stopper Motor Lock
Z-Fold 185. Upper Stopper Motor Lock
Note: Paper Late means the copy did not arrive (check-in) at the sensor site
within the prescribed time. Paper Remains means the copy did not leave (checkout ) from the sensor site within the prescribed time.
5-115
Service
Tables
7504
161
162
163
164
165
30 July 2004
7505*
001
003
004
005
006
053
054
055
056
Original Jam Detection

At power on
Registration sensor check in failure
Nip-in sensor check in failure
Registration sensor (On check)
Relay Sensor (On check)
Registration sensor check out failure
Nip-in sensor check out failure
Registration sensor (Off check)
Relay sensor (Off check)
7506*
005
006
014
038
044
132
133
134
141
142
160
164
166
172
255
Jam Count by Paper Size (B064 only)

Displays the total number of jams by paper size.
A4 LEF
Displays the total number of jams by paper size.
A5 LEF
B5 LEF
LT LEF
HLT LEF
A3
A4 SEF
A5 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
HLT SEF
Others
7507*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
Plotter Jam History

Copy Latest Displays the following items for the last 10 copy paper jams: 1) Jam
code, 2) Paper size, 3) Total count when jam occurred, 4) Date of
Latest 1
jam.
Latest 2
The jam codes are listed in the SMC report under SP7504.
Latest 3
Latest 4
Latest 5
Latest 6
Latest 7
Latest 8
Latest 9
Displays the total number of original

jams by paper size.
5-116
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
7508*
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
Original Jam History

Displays the following items for the Latest 10 original jams: 1)
Original Latest
Jam code, 2) Paper size, 3) Total count when jam occurred,
Latest 1
4) Date of jam.
Latest 2
The jam codes are listed in the SMC report under SP7504.
Latest 3
7617
001
002
Parts PM Counter Display

Normal
DF
7618
001
PM Parts Counter Reset Japan Only

Normal
Press Execute to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the
main machine.
DF
Press Execute to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the
ADF.
Japan Only
Japan Only
7801*
ROM No./Firmware Version
Displays the ROM version numbers of the main

machine and connected peripheral devices.
Displays the PM count since the last PM.
Resets the PM count.
Press Start to reset the SC and jam counters.
Pressing the # key will reset all counters, except
for the following:
Optional card/key counters
Total electronic counts
Copy count
Print count
Duplex count
Staple count
A3/DLT count
P/O count
C/O count
Press # to clear the key operator code if the
customer key operator forgets the password and
the machine cannot be used.
7803*
7804*
7807*
7808*
PM Counter Display
PM Counter Reset
SC/Jam Counter Reset
Counters Reset (B064 only)
7810*
Key Operator Code Clear

(B064 only)
7811*
Original Feed Count Clear (B064 only)

Clears the original total display, displayed with SP7002-***. To clear, press
5-117
Service
Tables
002
Latest 4
Latest 5
Latest 6
Latest 7
Latest 8
Latest 9
30 July 2004
7816*
001
002
003
004
005
006
Copy Counter Reset (B064 only)

Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)
Resets the total feed count for each feed station.
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4 Japan Only
LCT
By-pass
7817*
7822
ADF Counter Reset (B064 only)

Copy Counter Rest Magnification
(B064 only)
7825
Total Counter Reset (B064 only)

Resets the electronic counter total. Normally, this SP is executed at installation.
7826*
MF Error Counter
Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter. Japan Only
Error Total
A request for the count total failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
Error Staple
The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
001*
002*
Resets the counters of SP7205

Resets all counters of SP7301.
7827
MF Error Counter Clear

Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only
7832
Self-Diagnostic Report Details

Press # to display a list of error codes. Nothing is displayed if no errors have
occurred.
7834
001
002
003
Clear Pixel Coverage Data DFU

Last & Average pages
Toner Bottle in Use
Page Counts (2 Prev. Toner Bottles)
7836
Total Memory Size

Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.
Copy Clear: Pages by Mode (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear counter SP7304 (Copy Num Copies by Mode)
Copy Clear: Jobs by Count Continuous (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear counter SP7305 (Copy: Display Jobs by Mode)
Copy Clear: Jobs by Mode (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear counter SP7306 (Copy: Display Jobs by Mode).
LS Clear: Stored Image Logins (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear counter SP7320 (Doc. Svr. Scan Count.
LS Clear: Originals by Size (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear counter SP7321 (Doc. Svr. Original Size Display)
7837
7838
7839
7840
7841
5-118
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7852
LS Clear: Prints by Size (B064 only)

Press Execute to clear counter SP7323 (Doc. Svr Print Size Display).
LS Clear: Print Job Logins (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear counter SP7324 (Doc. Svr. Print Job Counter).
LS Clear: Print to Page Distr. (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear SP7325 (Doc. Svr. Job Count (Page No.).
LS Clear: Print Job File Distr. (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear SP7326 (Doc. Svr Job Count (File No.)
LS Clear: Print Job Copies Distr. (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear SP7327 (Doc. Svr. Job Count (Set No.
LS Clear: Number of Pages by Mode (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear SP7328 (Doc. Svr Job Count (Print Mode).
Copy: All Clear (B064 only)
Press Execute to clear the following SP codes: SP7301, SP7304, SP7305,
SP7306, SP7320, SP7321, SP7323, SP7324, SP7325, SP7326, SP7327,
SP7328.
010
ADF Scan Glass (B140 only)

Displays the count for the number of times the machine detected dust on the ADF
exposure glass strip at the beginning of copy jobs.
Count range: 00000 to 65535
The count is done only when SP4020 001 has been switched on (Default: Off).
For more, see SP4020.
Dust Counter
Total count for the number of times the dust warning
message was issued on the operation panel. This warning is
issued before the original is copied if there is dust on the
ADF exposure glass.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
This counter does not operate if SP4020-001 is switched off.
Clear Counter
This counts how many times the machine moves the
scanner to a different leading edge position to correct the
above problem.
Counter Reset
Resets SP7852-001 and 002
7901
001
002
003
Assert Info.
Filename
Line No.
Value
001
0002
Used for debugging. DFU
5-119
Service
Tables
7842
30 July 2004
SP8xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers
SP8211~SP8216
SP8401~SP8406
SP8691~SP8696
What They Do
The number of pages scanned to the document server.
The number of pages printed from the document server
The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an application). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.
PREFIXES
T:
Total: (Grand Total).
C:
P:
S:
L:
Copy application.
Print application.
Scan application.
Local storage
(document server)
O:
Other applications
(external network
applications, for
example)
WHAT IT MEANS
Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.)..
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
application when the job was not stored on the
document server.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
server. The L: counters work differently case by
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Refers to network applications such as Web
Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
(Software Development Kit) will also be counted
with this group in the future.
5-120
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
The Group 8xxx SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of
displaying them on the small LCDs of other machines that use these SP codes.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
ABBREVIATION
/
>
AddBook
Apl
B/W
Bk
C
ColCr
ColMode
Comb
Comp
Deliv
DesApl
Dev Counter
Dup, Duplex
Emul
FC
FIN
Full Bleed
GenCopy
GPC
IFax
ImgEdt
K
LS
LSize
Mag
MC
NRS
Org
OrgJam
Palm 2
WHAT IT MEANS
By, e.g. T:Jobs/Apl = Total Jobs by Application
More (2> 2 or more, 4> 4 or more
Address Book
Application
Black & White
Black
Cyan
Color Create
Color Mode
Combine
Compression
Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Duplex, printing on both sides
Emulation
Full Color
Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
No Margins
Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
Black (YMCK)
Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
Large (paper) Size
Magnification
One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. NRS is used overseas, CSS
is used in Japan.
Original for scanning
Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers
on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats.
5-121
Service
Tables
Key for Abbreviations

ABBREVIATION
PC
PGS
PJob
Ppr
PrtJam
PrtPGS
R
Rez
SC
Scn
Sim, Simplex
S-to-Email
SMC
Svr
TonEnd
TonSave
TXJob
YMC
YMCK
30 July 2004
WHAT IT MEANS
Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
Print Jobs
Paper
Printer (plotter) Jam
Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available.
Resolution
Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scan
Simplex, printing on 1 side.
Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Server
Toner End
Toner Save
Send, Transmission
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK
NOTE: All of the Group 8xxx SPs are reset with SP5801-001 Memory All Clear, or
the Counter Reset SP7808.
5-122
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
T:Total Jobs
C:Total Jobs
P:Total Jobs
S:Total Jobs
L:Total Jobs
These SPs count the number of times each

application is used to do a job.
[0~9999999/1]
Note: The L: counter is the total number of
times the other applications are used to send a
job to the document server, plus the number of
times a file already on the document server is
used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is
specified.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments
5-123
Service
Tables
8001
8002
8004
8005
8006
8011
8012
8014
8015
8016
8017
T:Jobs/LS
C:Jobs/LS
P:Jobs/LS
S:Jobs/LS
L:Jobs/LS
O:Jobs/LS
30 July 2004
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to

the document server by each application, to
reveal how local storage is being used for input.
[0~9999999/1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
8021
8022
8024
8025
8026
8027
T:Pjob/LS
C:Pjob/LS
P:Pjob/LS
S:Pjob/LS
L:Pjob/LS
O:Pjob/LS
These SPs reveal how files printed from the

document server were stored on the document
server originally.
[0~9999999/1]
stored from within the document server mode
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
5-124
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8031
8032
8034
8035
8036
8037
T:Pjob/DesApl
C:Pjob/DesApl
P:Pjob/DesApl
S:Pjob/DesApl
L:Pjob/DesApl
O:Pjob/DesApl
These SPs reveal what applications were used

to output documents from the document server.
[0~9999999/1]
printed from within the document server mode
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
T:TX Jobs/LS
C:TX Jobs/LS
P:TX Jobs/LS
S:TX Jobs/LS
L:TX Jobs/LS
O:TX Jobs/LS
These SPs count the applications that stored

files on the document server that were later
accessed for transmission over the telephone
line or over a network (attached to an e-mail).
[0~9999999/1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
scanned from within the document server mode
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8051
8052
8054
8055
8056
8057
T:TX Jobs/DesApl
C:TX Jobs/DesApl
P:TX Jobs/DesApl
S:TX Jobs/DesApl
L:TX Jobs/DesApl
O:TX Jobs/DesApl
These SPs count the applications used to

send files from the document server over the
telephone line or over a network (attached to
an e-mail). Jobs merged for sending are
counted separately.
[0~9999999/1]
sent from within the document server mode
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
5-125
Service
Tables
8041
8042
8044
8045
8046
8047
30 July 2004
8061
T:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8062
C:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8064
P:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
8065
S:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
8066
8067
O:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application,
over the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
001
Sort
002
003
004
Stack
Staple
Booklet
005
Z-Fold
006
Punch
007
Other
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is

set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L:
counter increments. (See SP8066)
Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in
staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8064)
Reserved. Not used.
5-126
manuals4you.com
8071
8072
8074
8075
8076
8077
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
T:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the
job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the
S:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the
L:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages in
the job.
O:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
1 Page
2 Pages
3 Pages
4 Pages
5 Pages
6~10 Pages
11~20 Pages
21~50 Pages
51~100 Pages
101~300 Pages
301~500 Pages
501~700 Pages
701~1000 Pages
1001~ Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076-0xx) increments.
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP8072) and scan jobs (SP8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP8072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
5-127
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
8131
8135
30 July 2004
T:S-to-Email Jobs
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail,
regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
S:S-to-Email Jobs
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail, without
storing the original on the document server.
These counters count jobs, not pages.

If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).
8141
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router
server.
8145
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned in scanner mode and sent to a
Scan Router server.

The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a Color job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
5-128
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8151
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a PC
(Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, SP8151 and SP8155 perform identical counts.
8155
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.

If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
T:Total Scan PGS
C:Total Scan PGS
S:Total Scan PGS
L:Total Scan PGS
These SPs count the pages scanned by each

application that uses the scanner to scan images.
[0~9999999/1]
SP8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of
physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
5-129
Service
Tables
8191
8192
8195
8196
30 July 2004
8205
S:LSize Scan PGS

[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan
jobs only.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
display..
8211
8212
8215
8216
T:Scan PGS/LS
C:Scan PGS/LS
S:Scan PGS/LS
L:Scan PGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages scanned into

the document server .
[0~9999999/1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen
Reading user stamp data is not counted.

If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
5-130
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8221
001
002
ADF Org Feeds

[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back
side scanning.
Front
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front
side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user
loads face up.)
Back
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
scanning.
8231
001
002
003
004
005
Scan PGS/Mode
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine
the work load on the ADF.
Large Volume
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in
the ADF at one time.
SADF
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
Mixed Size
Selectable. Select Mixed Sizes on the operation
panel.
Custom Size
Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Platen
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
5-131
Service
Tables
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
30 July 2004
T:Scan PGS/Org
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs,
regardless of which application was used.
8242
C:Scan PGS/Org
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
8245
S:Scan PGS/Org
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
8246
L:Scan PGS/Org
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8241
8242
8243
8245
8246
8247
001: Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
002: Text/Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
003: Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
004: GenCopy, Pale
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
005: Map
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
006: Normal/Detail
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
007: Fine/Super Fine
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
008: Binary
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
009: Grayscale
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
011 Other
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
8241
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
5-132
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8251
8252
8254
8256
8257
T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
These SPs show how many times Image Edit

features have been selected at the operation panel
for each application. Some examples of these editing
features are:
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit
features have been used. A detailed breakdown of
exactly which features have been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
These SPs count the number of pages scanned

using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how
the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.
[0~9999999/1]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.
8291
8295
8296
T:Scan PGS/Stamp
S:Scan PGS/Stamp
L:Scan PGS/Stamp
These SPs count the number of pages stamped with

the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0~9999999/1]
from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen
5-133
Service
Tables
8281
8285
8301
8302
8305
8306
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
254
255
30 July 2004
T:Scan PGS/Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing)
page size [SP8441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output
(printing) page size [SP8442].
S:Scan PGS/Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output
page size [SP8445].
L:Scan PGS/Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare
original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP8446].
A3
Yes
A4
Yes
A5
Yes
B4
Yes
B5
Yes
DLT
Yes
LG
Yes
LT
Yes
HLT
Yes
Full Bleed
Yes
Other (Standard)
Yes
Other (Custom)
Yes
5-134
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8311
8315
T:Scan PGS/Rez
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, SP8311 and SP8315 perform identical counts.
001
002
003
004
005
1200dpi ~
600dpi~1199dpi
400dpi~599dpi
200dpi~399dpi
~199dpi
Service
Tables
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.
5-135
8381
8382
8384
8385
8386
8387
T:Total PrtPGS
C:Total PrtPGS
P:Total PrtPGS
S:Total PrtPGS
L:Total PrtPGS
O:Total PrtPGS
30 July 2004
These SPs count the number of pages printed by

the customer. The counter for the application used
for storing the pages increments.
[0~9999999/1]
from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go
to the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
8391
LSize PrtPGS
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8401
8402
8404
8405
8406
T:PrtPGS/LS
C:PrtPGS/LS
P:PrtPGS/LS
S:PrtPGS/LS
L:PrtPGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages printed

from the document server. The counter for the
application used to print the pages is incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored
from within the document server mode screen at
[0~9999999/1]
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
5-136
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8421
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window at
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
8422
8424
8425
8426
8427
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last
pages printed only on one side are not counted.
[0~9999999/1]
8421
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
012
013
Simplex> Duplex
Duplex> Duplex
Book> Duplex
Simplex Combine
Duplex Combine
2> (2 up, 1 side
4> (4 up, 1 side)
6> (6 up, 1 side)
8> (8 up, 1 side)
Booklet
Magazine
8422
8423
8424
8425
8426
8427
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need
to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
5-137
manuals4you.com
Prints/Duplex
Service
Tables
8411
30 July 2004
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
3
6
4
7
4
8
4
8431
8432
8434
8436
8437
001
002
003
Magazine
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
4
6
4
7
4
8
4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below,
regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below
with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/1]
with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/1]
with Other applications.
Cover/Slip Sheet
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
Series/Book
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
User Stamp
The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.
5-138
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8442
8444
8445
8446
8447
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
8441
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
254
255
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)
8442
8443
8444
8445
8446
8447
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
5-139
Service
Tables
8441
8451
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
8461
8462
8464
8466
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
30 July 2004
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Bypass
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Copier
Tray 2
Copier
Tray 3
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 4
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 5
LCT (Option)
Tray 6
Currently not used.
Tray 7
Currently not used.
Tray 8
Currently not used.
Tray 9
Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based
on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers.
However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
Normal
Recycled
Special
Thick
Normal (Back)
Thick (Back)
OHP
Other
5-140
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8471
001
002
003
004
005
PrtPGS/Mag
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
~49%
50%~99%
100%
101%~200%
201% ~
8481
8484
T:PrtPGS/TonSave
P:PrtPGS/TonSave
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
[0~9999999/1]
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
5-141
Service
Tables
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8511
8514
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
30 July 2004
T:PrtPGS/Emul
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
RPCS
RPDL
PS3
R98
R16
GL/GL2
R55
RTIFF
PDF
PCL5e/5c
PCL XL
IPDL-C
BM-Links
Japan Only
Other
SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print
application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
5-142
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8522
8524
8525
8526
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
T:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
Sort
Stack
Staple
Booklet
Z-Fold
Punch
Other
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
8531
Staples
This SP counts the amount of staples used

by the machine.
[0~9999999/1]
5-143
Service
Tables
8521
8541
001
002
8542
001
002
8544
001
002
30 July 2004
T:GPC Counter
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count and display the total C/O (Copies/Original) and P/O
(Prints/Original) for documents read and output from the document server
when making 11 or more copies and prints.
GPC Counter
Lease GPC Counter
C:GPC Counter
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count and display the total C/O (Copies/Original) for documents
read and output from the document server when making 11 or more
copies.
GPC Counter
Lease GPC Counter
P:GPC Counter
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count and display the total P/O (Prints/Original) for documents
read and output from the document server when making 11 or more prints.
GPC Counter
Lease GPC Counter
For example, if you make 15 prints of a 3 page original, for a total of 45 sheets,
then the P counter would be 15 (5 copies counted from 11 to 15 x 3 pages). No
count is returned for 1~10 prints of an original.
Either the GPC counter or the Lease GPC counter will be used, depending on
the contract set up for the machine.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8581
T:Counter
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
8591
O:Counter
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
A3/DLT
Duplex
Staple
001
002
003
5-144
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8655
T:S-to-Email PGS
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail
for both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail
for the Scan application only.
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
8661
8665
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
server by the Scan application.
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
5-145
Service
Tables
8651
8671
8675
8691
8692
8694
8695
8696
30 July 2004
T:Deliv PGS/PC
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a
PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/PC
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC
with the Scan application.
T:TX PGS/LS
C:TX PGS/LS
P:TX PGS/LS
S:TX PGS/LS
L:TX PGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages sent from the

document server. The counter for the application that was
used to store the pages is incremented.
[0~9999999/1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation
panel. Pages stored with the Store File button from within
the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored are counted for the application that stored them.
8701
001
002
003
004
005
8741
001
002
003
004
005
TX PGS/Port
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
RX PGS/Port
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used
to receive them.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
5-146
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
8771
Dev Counter
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development
rollers) for black and other color toners.
Note: For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the same
as the Total count.
8791
LS Memory Remain
8801
Toner Remain
[0~100/1]
This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows
the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note:
This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is
better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
8941
Machine Status
[0~9999999/1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Operation Time
Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Standby Time
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
Low Power Time
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
Off Mode Time
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
Down Time/SC
Total down time due to SC errors.
Down Time/PrtJam
Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
Down Time/OrgJam
Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
Down Time/TonEnd
Total down time due to toner end.
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
5-147
Service
Tables
001
This SP displays the percent of space available

on the document server for storing documents.
[0~100/1]
8951
001
002
004
005
007
009
010
30 July 2004
AddBook Register
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
[0~9999999/1]
User Code
User code registrations.
Mail Address
Mail address registrations.
Group
Group destination registrations.
Transfer Request
Fax relay destination registrations
for relay TX.
[0~255/1]
Copy Program
Copy application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
Printer Program
Printer application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner Program
Scanner application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
5-148
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
5.6.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE

Bit Switches
Bit SW 1
Bit SW 2
Bit SW 3
Bit SW 4
Bit SW 5
Bit SW 6
Bit SW 7
Bit SW 8
1003
001
Clear Setting
Initialization Printer System
002
003
CSS Counter Reset

Delete Program
1004
1005
Print Summary
Display Version
Adjust the bit SW settings.

Note: These bit switches are not used
at this time.
Initializes the settings in the printer

features of UP mode.
Japan only
Japan only
Prints the printer summary sheet.
Displays the version of the printer
firmware.
Service
Tables
1001
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
5-149
30 July 2004
5.6.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE

SP
1001
1002
1003*
Number/Name
Model Name
Scanner Firmware
Version
003 Scanner Firmware
Number
004 Detail Model Name
Error Log Display
FTP Port Number
1004*
Compression Type
1005*
Erase Margin
1006*
Auto Reset Timer
1009*
Remote Scan Disable
001
002
Function/[Setting]
Displays the model name.
Displays the scanner firmware version.
Displays the firmwares part number.
Displays the detail model name.
Displays the error log data.
Changes the FTP port number.
After changing this value, do the following:
1. Run the Registry Editor
2. Access
/HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/
Ricoh/NetworkScanner
3. Change the value of PortNo to this SP
modes value
[0~65535/1]
Selects the compression type for binary
picture processing.
[1~3/1]
1: MH
2: MR
3: MMR
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the
scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the
original, create a margin.
[0~5/1 mm]
Adjusts the auto reset timer for the scanner
function.
If this is 0, the auto reset function is
disabled.
[0,10~99/1 s]
Enables/Disables the TWAIN scanner driver.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(B140 only)
5-150
manuals4you.com
2002
Text Mode
001* MTF Filter Coefficient
(Text/Binary/Main scan)
002*
003*
004*
005*
MTF Filter Coefficient

(Text/Binary/Sub scan)
MTF Filter Strength
(Text/Binary/Main scan)
MTF Filter Strength

(Text/Binary/Sub scan)
Smoothing Filter
(Text/Binary)
006*
Scanner Gamma
(Text/Binary)
007*
Brightness Notch 7
(Text/Binary)
008*
Contrast Notch 7
(Text/Binary)
Threshold Level Notch 7
(Text/Binary)
Brightness Notch 6
(Text/Binary)
Contrast Notch 6
(Text/Binary)
Threshold Level Notch 6
(Text/Binary)
Brightness Notch 5
(Text/Binary)
Density Level 5:
Contrast
Density Level 5:
Threshold
Density Level 4:
Intermediate Brightness
Density Level 4:
Intermediate Contrast
009*
010*
011*
012*
013*
014
015
016
017
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main

scan direction for Text mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
If this is 0, the MTF filter is not applied.
[0~15/1]
As above, for sub scan
[0~13/1]
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main
scan direction for Text mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
[0~7/1]
As above, for sub scan
[0~7/1]
Selects the smoothing pattern for Text mode
when using binary picture processing mode.
A larger value could cause moir to appear in
the image.
[0~7/1]
Selects the scanner gamma type for Text
mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
[0~6/1]
The following SPs adjust the image density
(brightness, contrast, and thresholds) for each
image density level (from 7 to 1) for Text
mode when using binary picture processing
mode. The settings are reflected in the
gamma table.
[0~255/1]
[0~255/1]
[0~255/1]
[0~255/1]
[0~255/1]
[0~255/1]
[0~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
5-151
Service
Tables
30 July 2004

018
30 July 2004
[1~255/1]
028
Density Level 4:
Intermediate Threshold
Density Level 3:
Brightness
Density Level 3:
Contrast
Density Level 3:
Threshold
Density Level 2:
Brightness
Density Level 2:
Contrast
Density Level 2:
Threshold
Density Level 1 Dark
Brightness
Density Level 1 Dark:
Contrast
Threshold
029
Unevenness Correction
[0x00~0x07/1]
030
Notch No. 1 (Darker):

Contrast: 1-255
Contrast: 1-255
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
031
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[0x00~0x07/1]
5-152
manuals4you.com
2003
Text/Photo Mode
001
Main Scan MTF Level
002
Sub Scan MTF Level
003
Main Scan MTF Strength
004
Sub Scan MTF Strength
005
Smoothing Level
006
Gamma Selection
007
Density Level 7 Light :

Brightness
008
Density Level 7 Light:

Contrast
Threshold
Density Level 6:
Brightness
Density Level 6:
Contrast
Density Level 6:
Threshold
Density Level 5:
Brightness
Density Level 5:
Contrast
Density Level 5:
Threshold
Density Level 4
Intermediate: Brightness
Density Level 4
Intermediate: Contrast
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
Sets the MTF coefficient for the main scan

direction.
[0x00~0xFF/0x01]
Sets the MTF coefficient for the sub scan
direction.
[0x00~0xFF/0x01]
Sets the MTF strength for the main scan
direction.
[0~0x07/0x01]
Sets the MTF strength for the sub scan
direction.
[0~0x07/0x01]
Sets the smoothing coefficient.
[0~0xFF/0x01]
Selects the gamma setting.
[0x00~0x06/0x01]
0:Normal, 1:Smooth
2:Distinct
3:Sharp
4:Text
5:Photo.
image density level (from 7 to 1) for
Text/Photo mode when using the delivery
scanner mode. The settings are reflected in
the gamma table.
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
5-153
Service
Tables
30 July 2004

018
019
020
021
022
023
024
024
026
027
028
029
030
031
Density Level 4
Intermediate: Threshold
Density Level 3:
Brightness
Density Level 3:
Contrast
Density Level 3:
Threshold
Density Level 2:
Brightness
Density Level 2:
Contrast
Density Level 2:
Threshold
Brightness
Contrast
Threshold
Notch No. 2: Threshold:
1-255
Notch No. 1: Brightness:
1-255
Notch No. 1: Threshold:
1-255
Notch No. 1: Contrast:
1-255
30 July 2004
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
5-154
manuals4you.com
2004
Photo Mode
001
Main Scan MTF Level
002
Sub Scan MTF Level
003
004
005
Smoothing Level
006
Gamma Selection
007
008
Dither Pattern
Brightness
009

Contrast
Threshold
Density Level 6:
Brightness
Density Level 6:
Contrast
Density Level 6:
Threshold
Density Level 5:
Brightness
Density Level 5:
Contrast
Density Level 5:
Threshold
Density Level 4
Density Level 4
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018

direction.
[0x00~0xFF/0x01]
direction.
[0x00~0xFF/0x01]
direction.
[0~0x07/0x01]
direction.
[0~0x07/0x01]
[0~0x07/0x01]
[0x00~0x06/0x01]
0:Normal
1:Smooth
2:Distinct
3:Sharp
4:Text
5:Photo.
[0x01/0x0x]
image density level (from 7 to 1) for Photo
mode when using the delivery scanner mode.
The settings are reflected in the gamma table.
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
5-155
Service
Tables
30 July 2004

019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
Density Level 4
Density Level 3:
Brightness
Density Level 3:
Contrast
Density Level 3:
Threshold
Density Level 2:
Brightness
Density Level 2:
Contrast
Density Level 2:
Threshold
Brightness
Contrast
Threshold
Brightness: 1-255
Contrast: 1-255
Threshold: 1-255
30 July 2004
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
5-156
manuals4you.com
2005
Grayscale Mode
001
Main Scan MTF Level
002
Sub Scan MTF Level
003
004
005
Smoothing Level
006
Gamma Selection
007
Density Level 7 Light :

Brightness
008

Contrast
Threshold
Density Level 6:
Brightness
Density Level 6:
Contrast
Density Level 6:
Threshold
Density Level 5:
Brightness
Density Level 5:
Contrast
Density Level 5:
Threshold
Density Level 4
Density Level 4
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017

direction.
[0x00~0xFF/0x01]
direction.
[0x00~0xFF/0x01]
direction.
[0~0x07/0x01]
direction.
[0~0x07/0x01]
[0~0xFF/0x01]
[0x00~0x06/0x01]
0:Normal
1:Smooth
2:Distinct
3:Sharp
4:Text
5:Photo
image density level (from 7 to 1) for grayscale
mode when using the delivery scanner mode.
The settings are reflected in the gamma table.
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
5-157
Service
Tables
30 July 2004

018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
Density Level 4
Density Level 3:
Brightness
Density Level 3:
Contrast
Density Level 3:
Threshold
Density Level 2:
Brightness
Density Level 2:
Contrast
Density Level 2:
Threshold
Brightness
Contrast
Threshold
30 July 2004
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
[1~255/1]
5-158
manuals4you.com
2006
Grayscale Compression
001
Standard
002
High Quality
003
Low Quality
004
007
MTF Filter Strength (Sub

Scan)
Smoothing Filter
008
Scanner Gamma
011
Notch No. 7 (Lighter)

Brightness: 1-255
Brightness: 1-255
Threshold: 1-255
1-255
1-255
Notch No. 6: Threshold: 1255
1-255
Notch No. 5: Contrast: 1255
Notch No. 4 (Middle):
Brightness: 1-255
Contrast: 1-255
Threshold: 1-255
1-255
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
Sets the rate of compression when Standard

is selected for handling JPEG files.
[5~95/1]
5: High compression (smaller file)
95: Low compression (larger file)
Sets the rate of compression when High is
selected for handling JPEG files.
[5~95/1]
Sets the rate of compression when JPEG
files.Low is selected for handling
[5~95/1]
[1~7/1]
(B140 only)
[1~7/1]
(B140 only)
[0~3/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
5-159
Service
Tables
30 July 2004

024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
30 July 2004

1-255
1-255
1-255
Brightness 1-255
Contrast 1-255
Threshold 1-255
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
[1~255/1]
(B140 only)
5-160
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
2021
Compression Ratio of Grayscale (B140 only)

[5-95/1]
001
Compression Ratio
(Normal Image)
002
Compression Ratio (High
Quality Image)
003
Compression Ratio (Low
Quality Image)
004
Compression Ratio
(HighLv2 Quality Image)
005
Compression Ratio
(LowLvl2 Quality Image)
8002
File Server
001
IP Address
8003
Delivery Server Retries

001
Number of Retries
002
8004
Retry Interval
Capture Server IP
Address
Transmission Error Display Time
Determines the number of retries when

connection fails.
[0~99/1]
Sets the IP Address for the NOA Capture
Server (address for E-Cabinet). Make sure
this address is not the same as the IP
address.
A one-line error message when a
transmission error occurs on the file server.
This setting determines how long this one-line
message is displayed.
[0~999/1 s]
5-161
Service
Tables
002
Sets the IP Address for the Scan Router

server. The settings below will be displayed
on the System Settings tab.
Sets the time to wait between retries when
connection fails.
[60~90/1 s]
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
30 July 2004
5.7 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

5.7.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803
This procedure allows you to test sensors and other components of the machine.
After you select one of the categories below by number, you will see a small 8-bit
table with the number of the bit and its current setting (0 or 1). The bits are
numbered 0 to 7, reading right to left.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5803.
2. Enter the number (1 to 13) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
Bit
76543210
Setting
11001010
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
1. Paper Feed 1
Bit
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Rear Side Fence Close Sensor

Rear Side Fence Open Sensor
Front Side Fence Close Sensor
Front Side Fence Open Sensor
Near End Sensor
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Paper Height 1 Sensor

(see tables below)
2. Paper Feed 2
Bit
Item
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Size 5
Size 4
Size 3
Size 2
Size 1
Not used
Not used
Not used
See Paper Size Tables Below
Tray 2
Tray 2
Tray 2
Tray 2
Tray 2
5-162
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
1500 sheets
bit-3
bit-2
bit-1
bit-0
0
0
0
0
1000 sheets
0
0
0
1
3. Paper Feed 3
Bit
Item
7
Size 5
6
Size 4
5
Size 3
4
Size 2
3
Size 1
2
Not used
1
Not used
0
Not used
0
0
1
1
400 sheets
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
70 sheets
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
See Paper Size Tables Below.
Tray 3
Tray 3
Tray 3
Tray 3
Tray 3
Universal Tray Size Detection N.A. models only

11" x 17"
8 1/2" x 14"
8 1/2" x 11"
11" x 8 1/2"
5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
8 1/2" x 5 1/2"
8" x 10 1/2"
7 " x 10 1/2"
8" x 13"
*
Switch Setting (LOW = pressed)

LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
Panel Display
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
11" x 17" SEF

8 1/2" x 14" SEF
8 1/2" x 11" SEF
8 1/2" x 11" LEF
5 1/2" x 8 1/2" SEF
8 1/2" x 5 1/2" LEF
8" x 10 1/2" SEF
7 1/4" x 10 1/2" SEF
8" x 13" SEF
(size set in User
Tools)
Universal Tray Size Detection EU/ASIA models

Paper Size
A3 SEF
8 1/4" x 13"
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
8 1/2" x 13"
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
*

LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
5-163
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Panel Display
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
A3 SEF
8 1/4" x 13" SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
8 1/2" x 13" SEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
(size set in User
Tools)
Service
Tables
Paper Size
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
4. Paper Feed 4
Bit
30 July 2004
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5. Paper Feed 5
Bit
Item
7
Size 5
6
Size 4
5
Size 3
4
Size 2
3
Size 1
Right Tray Paper
2
1
0
Less than 30%
30% or more
Less than 30%

Less than 30%
Near End
30% or more
30% or more
Not Near End
Near End
Near End
1st Paper Height

Japan only
2nd Paper Height
3rd Paper Height
1st Paper Near End
Japan only
2nd Paper Near End
3rd Paper Near End
Not Near End

Not Near End
Present
Not Present
3 trays
Sensor
Tray Type
Not used
6. Paper Feed 6
Bit
4 trays
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Set
Not set
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Paper present
Set
Activated
Paper not present
Not set
Tray 1
Not used
Present
---
Not present
---
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 1
Not used
Present
Present
Present
---
Not present
Not present
Not present
---
Tray 2
Tray 3
Present
Present
Not present
Not present
Left Tandem Tray Set

Japan only
Japan only
Rear Fence HP Sensor
Japan only
Rear Fence Return Sensor
Left Tray Paper Sensor
Right Tandem Tray Set
7. Paper Feed 7
Bit
Item
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1st Paper Feed Sensor

2nd Paper Feed
Sensor
3rd Paper Feed Sensor
4th Paper Feed Sensor
2nd Paper Feed
Sensor
4th Paper Feed Sensor
5-164
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
8. Paper Feed 8
Bit
Item
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1st Tray Lift Sensor

2nd Tray Lift Sensor
3rd Tray Lift Sensor
4th Tray Lift Sensor
1st Paper End Sensor
2nd Paper End Sensor
3rd Paper End Sensor
9. Paper Feed 9
Bit
Tray 1
Not used
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 1
Not used
Tray 2
Tray 3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Paper
Paper
Paper
Paper
On
On
On
On
No Paper
No Paper
No Paper
No Paper
Description
Reading
0
Toner Collection Bottle Set SW
3
2
1
0
Switch not
pressed
Switch pressed
Not used
Not used
Toner Overflow SW
Switch pressed
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
10. Paper Feed 10

Bit
Description
Switch not
pressed
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DFU
11. Paper Feed 11

Bit
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Service
Tables
7
6
5
DFU
5-165
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
12. DIP Switches

Bit
30 July 2004
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DFU
13. Exit
Bit
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
14. Duplex
Bit
Deactivated
Toner end
Deactivated
Activated
Not toner end
Activated
Set
Paper present
Paper present
Not web end
Toner Collection Motor Sensor

Toner End Sensor
Toner Collection Coil Sensor
Not used
Exit Unit Set
Paper Exit Sensor
Exit Unit Entrance Sensor
Web End Sensor
Not set
Paper not present
Paper not present
Web end
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15. Lock Detection 1

Bit
Set
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
Deactivated
Paper not present
Paper not present
Not used
Duplex Unit Set
Duplex Transport 3 Sensor
Duplex Jogger HP Sensor
Duplex Inverter Sensor
Duplex Entrance Sensor
Not set
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Activated
Paper present
Paper present
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Set
Not locked
Locked
Not locked
60 CPM
Key Card Set

Development Motor Lock
Fusing/Exit Motor Lock
Drum Motor Lock
CPM
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not set
Locked
Not locked
Locked
75 CPM
5-166
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Leaked
Not leaked
Locked
Locked
Charge Corona Leak

Not used
Toner Collection Motor Lock
Exhaust Fan Lock
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not locked
Not locked
17. Registration Sensor

Bit
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Open
Not full
Closed
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Not used
Not used
Front Door Open
Copy Tray Full Sensor
Guide Plate Position Sensor
Relay Sensor
By-pass Paper End Sensor
Registration Sensor
Closed
Full
Open
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
18. Original Size Set Sensor

Bit
Description
Reading
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not set
Set
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
5-167
Set
Fusing Unit Set

Not used
Key Counter Set
Original Length 2 Sensor
Original Width 3 Sensor
Not set
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
Service
Tables

Bit
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
30 July 2004
5.7.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804

1. Open SP mode 5804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table on the next page.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item.
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched on for a long time.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
27
28
31
39
40
41
43
44
Description
Feed Motor 1
Feed Motor 2
Feed Motor 3
Feed Motor 4
By-pass Feed Clutch
LCT Paper Feed Motor
Pick-up SOL 1
Pick-up SOL 2
Pick-up SOL 3
Pick-up SOL 4
By-pass Pick-up SOL
LCT Pick-up SOL
Reverse Release SOL 1
Tandem Connection Release SOL
Left Tandem Lock SOL
Tandem Transport Motor
Relay Motor
Main Motor
Fusing Exit Motor
Registration Motor
Guide Plate Release SOL
Exit Junction SOL
Inverter Duplex Motor
Duplex Transport Motor
5-168
manuals4you.com
No.
45
46
47
52
53
54
55
56
57
62
63
64
67
69
70
72
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
Description
Duplex Entrance Junction Gate SOL
Inverter Jogger SOL
Duplex Transport CL
Development Roller Clutch
Development Motor
Used Toner Motor
Web Motor
Toner Bottle Motor
Trigger/Separation CL
Quenching Lamp
Charge Corona
Grid Wire
Development Bias
Transfer Bias
ID Sensor LD
Xenon Lamp
Fan
Unit Fan
Main Ventilation Fan
Main Suction Fan
Main Vacuum Fan
OPC Fan
FIN Junction SOL
FIN Junction SOL (Stapler)
FIN End Roller SOL
Total Counter
FIN Main Motor 1
FIN Main Motor 2
FIN Exit Motor
Booklet Stapler Motors
FIN Punch Motor
LD DC Lamp DFU
FIN Tray Lift Motor
FIN Jogger Motor
FIN Staple Transport Motor
FIN Exhaust Motor
FIN Shift Motor
FIN Staple Slant Motor
Status Lamp (Green)
Status Lamp (Red)
PTL
5-169
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
30 July 2004
5.7.3 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007

1. Open SP mode SP6007.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
Bit
76543210
Data
11001010
Group 1
No.
Description
0
Original Length Sensor 3 (LG)
1
Original Length Sensor 2 (A4)
2
Original Length Sensor 3 (B5)
3
Original Set Sensor
4
Original Width Sensor 1
5
6
7
Group 2
No.
Description
0
Skew Correction Sensor
1
Interval Sensor
2
Registration Sensor
3
Exit Sensor
4
DF Position Sensor
5
APS Start Sensor
6
Feed Cover Sensor
7
Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
Group 3
No.
Description
0
Bottom Plate HP Sensor
1
Bottom Plate Position Sensor
2
Not Used
3
Not Used
4
Not Used
5
Not Used
6
Not Used
7
Not Used
5-170
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5.7.4 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008

1. Open SP mode SP6008.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
Bit
76543210
Data
11001010
Description
Feed Motor: Forward
Feed Motor: Reverse
Transport Motor: Forward
Exit Motor: Forward
Pick-up Motor: Reverse
Bottom Plate Motor: Forward
Bottom Plate Motor: Reverse
0
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Service
Tables
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5-171
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
30 July 2004
5.7.5 FINISHER INPUT CHECK: SP6117 (B478/B704 ONLY)

Class 3
No.
Bit
No.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Reading
Description
Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor
Not Used
Shift Tray Lower Limit 2 Sensor
Shift Tray Lower Limit 3 Sensor
Stapler Tray Exit Sensor
Shift Tray Exit Sensor
Upper Tray Exit Sensor
Entrance Sensor
Not used
Front Door Safety Switch
Stapler Tray Paper Sensor
Staple End Sensor
Staple Hammer HP Sensor
Stapler HP Sensor
Shift Tray Half-turn Sensor
Jogger HP Sensor
Not Used
Staple Cartridge Set Sensor
Staple Mode HP Sensor 2
Staple Mode HP Sensor 1
Not Used
Punch Waste Hopper Sensor
Punch HP1 Sensor
Punch Unit Connection
Stapler Ready
Stapler Return Sensor
Exit Guide Open Sensor
Stack Plate Center HP Sensor
Pre-stack Tray Paper Sensor
Staple Waste Hopper Sensor
Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
Upper Tray Limit Sensor
Punch HP 2 Sensor
Not Used
Shift Lower Limit - Large Paper
Sensor
Shift Mode HP Sensor
Stacking Roller HP Sensor
Positioning Roller HP Sensor
Stack Plate Rear HP Sensor
Stack Plate Front HP Sensor
0
Home position
1
Not home position
Not detected
Not detected
Paper not detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper not detected
Detected
Detected
Paper detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper detected
Door closed
Paper not detected
Not end
Home position
Not home position
Home position
Not home position
Door open
Paper detected
End
Not home position
Home position
Not home position
Home position
Set
Not detected
Not detected
Not set
Detected
Detected
Not full
Full
Home position
Not home position
Connected
Not connected
Ready
Not ready
Not detected
Detected
Home position
Not home position
Not home position
Home position
Paper not detected
Paper detected
Not full
Full
Not home position
Home position
Not full
Full
Home position
Not home position
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Home position
Not home position
Not home position
Detected
Not home position
Home position
Home position
Home position
Not home position
5-172
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
Bit
No.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reading
Description
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Emergency Stop Switch
Shift Jogger Lift HP Sensor
(Optional Jogger Unit)
Shift Jogger HP Sensor
(Optional Jogger Unit)
Optional Jogger Unit Connection
Not press
Press
Home position
Not home position
Not home position
Home position
Connection
Not connection
Service
Tables
Class 3
No.
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5-173
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
30 July 2004
5.7.6 FINISHER OUTPUT CHECK: SP6118

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Description

Shift Tray Exit Motor
Upper Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
Shift Tray Lift Motor
Jogger Motor
Stapler Motor
Staple Hammer Motor (Stapler Unit)
Punch Motor
Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
Positioning Roller Solenoid
Stack Feed-out Motor
Shift Motor
Stapler Rotation Motor
Lower Transport Motor
Exit Guide Motor
Stack Plate-Center Motor
Pre-stack Junction Gate Solenoid
Pre-stack Paper Stopper Solenoid
Stapler Return Solenoid
Stack Plate- Front Motor
Stack Plate Rear Motor
Stacking Roller Drag Motor
Stacking Roller Motor
Shift Jogger Motor (Optional Jogger Unit)
Shift Jogger Lift Motor (Optional Jogger Unit)
5-174
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.8 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer
Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
The Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure
below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the
HDD.
5.8.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
Press
then use the 10-key pad to enter
.
Press and hold down
Touch Copy SP.
On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 1 On/Off.
COPY : SP-5-857-001
Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
_1_
Initial 0
3. On the control panel keypad, press 1 then press

. This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is 0 (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.
5-175
Service
Tables
The debug information cannot be saved the until the Save Debug Log function
has been switched on and a target has been selected.
USING THE DEBUG LOG
30 July 2004
4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved.
Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 2 Target, enter 2 with the operation
panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press
.
COPY : SP-5-857-002
Save Debug Log
Target (2:HDD 3:SD Card)
_2_
Initial 2
NOTE: Select 3 SD Card to save the debug information directly to the SD

card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch 5858 and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
1
Engine SC Error
Controller SC Error
Any SC Error
Jam
Saves data when an engine-related

SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controllerrelated SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that
you specify by entering code number.
Saves data for jams.
NOTE: More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press ON for each selection. This example
shows Engine SC Error selected.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Engine SC Error
__OFF__
__ON__
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch 3 Any SC Error, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control
panel number keys, then press
. This example shows an entry for SC670.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Any SC Error
__670
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section 4. Troubleshooting.
5-176
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
USING THE DEBUG LOG
6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch 5859.
Under 5859 press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press
.
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered.
COPY : SP-5-859-001
Debug Save Key No.
Key 1
___2222
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
COPY
4848 (COPY)
2224 (BCU)
PRINTER
2222 (SCS)
2223 (SRM)
256 (IMH)
1000 (ECS)
1025 (MCS)
4400 (GPS)
4500 (PDL)
4600 (GPS-PM)
2000 (NCS)
2224 (BCU)
SCANNER
WEB
5375 (Scan)
5682 (NFA)
3000 (NCS)
2000 (NCS)
5682 (NFA)
6600 (WebDB)
3300 (PTS)
6666 (WebSys)
2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (0).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym
ECS
GPS
GSP-PM
IMH
MCS
Meaning
Engine Control Service
GW Print Service
GW Print Service Print Module
Image Memory Handler
Memory Control Service
Acronym
NFA
PDL
PTS
SCS
SRM
NCS
Network Control Service
WebDB
Meaning
Net File Application
Printer Design Language
Print Server
System Control Service
System Resource
Management
Web Document Box
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on

the HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected
SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.
5-177
Service
Tables
KEY NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
USING THE DEBUG LOG
30 July 2004
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.
5.8.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into the service slot of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
3. After you return to the service center, use a card reader to copy the file and
send it for analysis to Ricoh by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
5-178
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.8.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any
other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct
customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously
switched on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard
disk as the save destination (SP5857-002).
1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, press
(Clear Modes).
2. On the control panel, enter 01 then hold down

for at least 3 sec. until
the machine beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for
later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
Service
Tables
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to
an SD card.
5-179
USING THE DEBUG LOG
30 July 2004
5.8.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015
Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
SP5857-016
Create a File on HDD to Store a Log
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation
takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and
on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the
log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire
the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the
HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not
require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug
log data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).
SP5857-017
Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a

completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card, but this
operation takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched
off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to
create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required
to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already
created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new
log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to
delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857017).
5-180
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
USER TOOLS
5.9 USER TOOLS

5.9.1 OVERVIEW
This section is a summary of the user tools. Refer to the operators manual for
more details.
1. On the operation panel, press the User Tools button.
2. Press the appropriate key, then access the following items:
Initial System
Copier/Document Box
Initial Printer Settings
Initial Scanner Settings
Display Language
Contact Information
Counters
During machine operation, in the jam mode, or while a warning message is

displayed, the display language can be changed and the counters can be
displayed. However, the counters cannot be printed.
5-181
Service
Tables
You can use these tools while the machine is operating, during a jam, or even
when a warning is displayed. However, you cannot move to the user screen while
in the SP mode, but you can easily switch between the SP mode screen and the
operation screen by pressing Copy Window.
USER TOOLS
30 July 2004
5.9.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS

B064 Series System Settings
General Features
Panel Tone
Warm Up Notice
Copy Count Display
Function Priority
Print Priority
Function Reset Timer
Interleave Print
Output Tray Setting
Output Copier
Output: Document Server
Output: Printer
ADF Original Table Elevation
Job List Display Time
Tray Paper Settings
Paper Tray Priority: Copier
Paper Tray Priority: Printer
Tray Paper Size: Tray 2
Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Paper Type: Tray 1
Paper Type: Tray 2
Paper Type: Tray 3
Paper Type: Tray 4
Paper Type: LCT
Slip Sheet Tray
Cover Sheet Tray
Slip Sheet Tray 1
Slip Sheet Tray 2
Timer Setting
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer
Panel Off Timer
System Reset Timer
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer
Scanner Auto Reset Timer
Set Date
Set Time
Weekly Timer Code
Weekly Timer: Monday
Weekly Timer: Tuesday
Weekly Timer: Wednesday
Weekly Timer: Thursday
Weekly Timer: Friday
Weekly Timer: Saturday
Weekly Timer: Sunday
5-182
manuals4you.com
USER TOOLS
Interface Settings
Network
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Network Boot
Effective Protocol
NW Frame Type
Ethernet Speed
Parallel Interface
Parallel Timing
Parallel Communication Speed
Selection Signal Status
Input Prime
Bidirectional Communication
File Transfer
Delivery Option
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner Recalls
Key Operator Tools
User Code Management
Key Counter Management
Key Operator Code
Display/Print Counter
Display/Clear/Print Counter per User Code
Address Book Management
Address Book: Program/Change/Delete Group
Address Book: Change Order
Address Book: Edit Title
Address Book: Select Title
Auto Delete File
Delete All Files
Display Password with Stored File
Key Operators E-Mail Address
AOF (Always On)
5-183
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
USER TOOLS
30 July 2004
B140 Series System Settings

General Features
Panel Tone
Warm Up Notice
Copy Count Display
Function Priority
Print Priority
Function Reset Timer
Interleave Print
Output Copier
Output: Document Server
Output: Printer
ADF Original Table Elevation
Job List Display Time
<F/F4> Size Setting
Z-fold Position
Tray Paper Settings
Paper Tray Priority: Copier
Paper Tray Priority: Printer
Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Paper Type: Tray 1
Paper Type: Tray 2
Paper Type: Tray 3
Paper Type: LCT
Cover Sheet Tray
Slip Sheet Tray
Designation Sheet Tray 1
Designation Sheet Tray 2
Printer Bypass Paper Size
Timer Settings
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer
Panel Off Timer
System Reset Timer
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer
Scanner Auto Reset Timer
Set Date
Set Time
Weekly Timer Code
Auto Logout Timer
Weekly Timer: Monday
Weekly Timer: Tuesday
Weekly Timer: Wednesday
Weekly Timer: Thursday
Weekly Timer: Friday
Weekly Timer: Saturday
Weekly Timer: Sunday
5-184
manuals4you.com
USER TOOLS
Interface Settings
Network
IP Address
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
NW Frame Type
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Ethernet Speed
Ping Command
Permit SNMP V3 Communication
Permit SSL/TLS Communication
Host Name
Machine Name
Parallel Interface
Parallel Timing
Parallel Communication Speed
Selection Signal Status
Input Prime
Bidirectional Communication
Signal Control
File Transfer
Delivery Option
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP
POP3 Setting
Administrator's E-mail Address
E-mail Communication Report
Default User Name/Password (Send)
Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message
Program/Change/Delete Subject
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner Recalls
Auto Specify Sender Name
5-185
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
USER TOOLS
30 July 2004
Administrator Tools
User Authentication Management
Administrator Authentication Management
Program/Change Administrator
Extended Security
Extend Change Unit Management
Enhanced Extend Change Unit Management
Display Print Counter
Display/Clear/Print Counter Per User
Address Book Management
Address Book: Program/Change/Delete/Delete Group
Address Book: Edit Title
Address Book: Change Order
Print Address Book: Destination List
Address Book: Select Title
Auto Delete File
Delete All Files
Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server
Use LDAP Server
AOF (Always ON)
Firmware Version
Auto Erase Memory Setting
Erase All Memory
5-186
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
USER TOOLS
General Features
Auto Paper Select Priority
Auto Tray Switching
Paper Display
Original Type Priority
Original Type Display
Auto Image Density Priority
Copy Quality
Image Density
Duplex Mode Priority
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode
Change Initial Mode
Tone: Original Remains
Job End Call
Copy Function Key: F1
Document Server Storage Key: F1
Document Server Print Key 1: F1
Reproduction Ratio
Shortcut R/E 1
Shortcut R/E 2
Shortcut R/E 3
Enlarge 1
Enlarge 2
Enlarge 3
Enlarge 4
Enlarge 5
Priority Setting: Enlarge
Reduce 1
Reduce 2
Reduce 3
Reduce 4
Reduce 5
Reduce 6
Priority Setting: Reduce
Ratio for Create Margin
R/E Priority
5-187
Service
Tables
5.9.3 COPIER/DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES
USER TOOLS
30 July 2004
Edit
Front Margin: Left/Right
Back Margin: Left/Right
Front Margin: Top/Bottom
Back Margin: Top/Bottom
1-Sided
2-Sided Auto Margin: T to T
1-Sided
2-Sided Auto Margin: T to B
Erase Border Width
Erase Original Shadow in Combine
Erase Center Width
Image Repeat Separation Line
Double Copies Separation Line
Separation Line in Combine
Copy Back Cover
Front Cover Copy in Combine
Copy on Designating Page in Combine
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine
Copy Order in Combine
5-188
manuals4you.com
USER TOOLS
Stamp
Background Numbering
Size
Density
Preset Stamp
Stamp Priority
Stamp Language
Stamp Position: COPY
Stamp Position: URGENT
Stamp Position: PRIORITY
Stamp Position: For Your Info.
Stamp Position: PRELIMINARY
Stamp Position: For Internal Use Only
Stamp Position: CONFIDENTIAL
Stamp Position: DRAFT
Stamp Format: COPY
Stamp Format: URGENT
Stamp Format: PRIORITY
Stamp Format: For Your Info.
Stamp Format: PRELIMINARY
Stamp Format: For Internal Use Only
Stamp Format: CONFIDENTIAL
Stamp Format: DRAFT
User Stamp
Program/Delete Stamp
Stamp Position: 1
Stamp Position: 2
Stamp Position: 3
Stamp Position: 4
Stamp Format: 1
Stamp Format: 2
Stamp Format: 3
Stamp Format: 4
Date Stamp
Format
Font
Stamp Position
Stamp Setting
Size
Superimpose
5-189
Service
Tables
30 July 2004
USER TOOLS
30 July 2004
Page Numbering
Stamp Format
Font
Size
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position
Page Numbering in Combine
Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet
Stamp Position P1, P2
Stamp Position: 1/5, 2/5
Stamp Position: -1-, -2-
Stamp Position: P.1, P.2
Stamp Position: 1, 2,
Stamp Position: 1-1, 1-2
Superimpose
Input/Output
Switch to Batch
SADF Auto Reset
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue
Auto Sort
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart
Select Stapling Position (Top Left)
Select Stapling Position (Bottom Left)
Select Stapling Position (Top Right)
Select Stapling Position (Bottom Right)
Select Stack Position
Select Punch Type
Letterhead Setting
Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Glass Mode
Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Bypass Mode
5-190
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
USER TOOLS
5.9.4 INQUIRY
B064 Series INQUIRY
Machine Repair
Telephone No.
Machine Serial No.
Sales Representative
Telephone Number
Consumables
Toner
Staple
B140 Series INQUIRY

Machine Repair
Telephone No.
Machine Serial No.
Telephone Number
Service
Tables
5.9.5 COUNTER
Total Counter
Print Counter List
5-191
30 July 2004
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6.1 OVERVIEW
34
8
9
33
10
32
31
11
30
12
29
13
14
28
15
27
26
17
25
18
24
19
23
20
22
21
B140D900.WMF
6-1
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
16
OVERVIEW
30 July 2004
1. Entrance Roller (ADF)
18. Feed Roller (Paper Tray)
2. Feed Belt (ADF)
19. Separation Roller (Paper Tray)
3. Separation Roller (ADF)
20. Pick-up Roller (Paper Tray)
4. Pick-up Roller (ADF)
21. Universal Tray (Tray 3)
5. CIS (Contact Image Sensor)
6. Original Feed-in Tray
23. Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
7. Exposure Glass
24. Duplex Unit
8. Fusing Unit
25. Inverter
9. CCD
26. Inverter Exit Roller
10. OPC Drum
27. Inverter Entrance Roller
11. Development Unit
28. Duplex Junction Gate
12. Development Roller
29. Reverse Trigger Roller
30. Exit Unit
14. By-pass Tray
31. Pressure Roller
15. Relay Sensor
32. Hot Roller
16. Grip Roller
33. Scanning (ADF)
17. Feed Sensor (Paper Tray)
34. Exposure (ADF)
6-2
30 July 2004
OVERVIEW
6.1.1 PAPER PATH (WITH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY)

3
1
4
5
1. Proof Exit Tray

2. Cover Sheet Path
3. Original Path
4. By-pass Tray
5. LCT Feed
6. Vertical Transport Path
7. Finisher Exit Tray 2
8. Finisher Exit Tray 1
6-3
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D901.WMF
OVERVIEW
30 July 2004
6.1.2 PAPER PATH (WITH 9-BIN MAILBOX)

5
6
7
8
2
3
B140D902.WMF
1. Original Paper Path

2. Vertical Transport Path
3. LCT Feed
4. Selected Trays
5. Turn Gates
6. Mailbox Paper Path
7. Junction Gate (paper goes either up to the
mailbox or out to the finishers proof tray)
8. Junction Gates (two junction gates control
the paper path inside the finisher)
6-4
30 July 2004
OVERVIEW
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1
3
11
10
9
8
5
7
B140D903.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. Paper Feed Motor 2

8. Lower Relay Motor
9. Paper Feed Motor 1
10. By-pass Motor
11. Development Motor
Scanner Motor
Drum Motor
Fusing/Exit Motor
Registration Motor
Toner Collection Motor
Paper Feed Motor 3
6-5
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
6-6
Motor CLs, SOLs
Paper Sensors
Motor CLs, SOLs
Motor Sensors
HVPS
APS Sensors
Exposure Lamp
LDB
CIS
Syncho. Detection
Sensor
Polygon Motor
IPU
PFC
SBU
VIB
SDRB
Operation Panel
MB
BCU
HDD
Scanner
Motor
Controller
IEEE1394 IEEE1284
USB 2.0
PCMCIA
PSU
DRB
CNB
Heaters
Heaters
NIB
MLB
Connectivity I/F
Registration, Duplex,
Relay motors
Fusing Exit, Drum,

Development Motors
LCT
FIN
ADF
Front Door SW
BOARD STRUCTURE
30 July 2004
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
B140D904.WMF
30 July 2004
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

This machine employs Ricoh GW (Grand Work) architecture.
Here is a summary of the main parts of the board structure.
BCU (Base Engine Control Unit)

This is the main control board that controls engine sequence, timing for
peripherals, image processing, and the video data path.
BCU Base Board DIP SW101

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Function
Not used
Not used
Design/Factory Use Only
Not used
Not used
Local
Local
Local
On/Off
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Comment
Japan
115 V
220/240V
6,7,8: OFF, OFF, OFF

6,7,8: ON, OFF, OFF
6,7,8: OFF, ON, OFF
Controller Board
NOTE: 1) The Controller is on the front side of the swing out circuit board unit, with
the IPU on the back side.
2) All Controller DIP SWs should be OFF during normal operation.
MB (Mother Board)
Interfaces the Controller, BICU, and optional devices such as key counters.
IPU (Image Processing Unit)

Processes images scanned by the CIS and SBU.
All IPU Board DIP switches should be set to OFF.
IPU Board DIP SW 102

No.
1
2
3
4
Function
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
On\OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Comment
DFU: Design, Factory Use only. Do not change these settings.

NOTE: The IPU is on the back side of the swing out circuit board unit.
6-7
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
The controller controls all devices for memory DIMMs, HDD, copying, printing,
scanning, etc. In order to add an option (printer, scanner, FireWire, wireless LAN,
etc.), install the appropriate ROM DIMM on the controller board.
BOARD STRUCTURE
30 July 2004
SBU (Sensor Board Unit)

The SBU receives analog signals from the CCD and converts these into digital
signals used for image processing.
PFC (Paper Feed Control)

Controls the paper feed trays built into the main machine. The PFC contains an
independent CPU.
SDRB (Scanner Driver Board)

Located behind the BCU, drives the scanner and ADF motors and exposure lamp,
monitors the scanner HP sensor and the ADF components.
VIB (Video Interface Board)

Located under the exposure glass, interfaces the BCU and IPU with the operation
panel and SBU.
DRB (Drive Board)

Drives the duplex stepper motors (x2), the registration motor, and lower relay
motor.
CNB (Connection Board)

Relays signals for the ADF, finishers, LCT, fusing exit, drum motor, development
motor, and front cover switches.
6-8
30 July 2004
BOARD STRUCTURE
HDD (Hard Disk Drive)

The HDD has a capacity of 40 GB for image storage. It can store up to
approximately 1,735 copy images, based on the ITU-T No. 4 Chart.
Area
For image
storage
For temporary
images
Power Off
Store
FileSystem1
Store
500 MB
FileSystem2
FileSystem3
Delete
Store
500 MB
2000 MB
FileSystem4
Store
2 MB
Other
Store
174 MB
Delete
Capacity
37124 MB
Control
Copy conversion 1735
Copy
Allocated copies
Printer
Scanner
50 jobs
500
100
200
500
Comment
Copy server, local
storage
Electronic sort,
test printing,
confidential
printing
Print font
download, form
registration
Job spooling area
Work data of
SmartNet Monitor
for ADMIN.
Area for storing
email addresses
For debugging
Note the following important points regarding HDD replacement:

Replacing the HDD loses all document server documents, and user stamps.
When the HDD is replaced, the print data (user stamps) must be re-installed, so
bring an IC card holding the print data so it can be downloaded.
The Scan to Email addresses are also lost by HDD replacement. However,
addresses can be backed up SmartNetMonitor.
6-9
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
An SC is logged if the HDD is abnormal or cannot be detected. After pressing a key

to affirm that you have read the message, the machine shuts down partially but can
still be used. However, some features may not be available.
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
30 July 2004
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW

1
B140D905.WMF
10
9
8
6
B140D906.WMF
1. EXPOSURE
A xenon lamp exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to
the CCD, where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is
converted to a digital signal, processed, and stored in the memory. At the time
of printing, the data is retrieved and sent to the laser diode. For multi-copy runs,
the original is scanned once and stored on the hard disk.
2. DRUM CHARGE
In the dark, the charge corona unit gives a negative charge to the OPC drum.
The grid plate ensures that corona charge is applied uniformly. The charge
remains on the surface of the drum because the OPC layer has a high
electrical resistance in the dark.
6-10
30 July 2004
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
3. LASER EXPOSURE
The processed image data from the scanned original is retrieved from the hard
disk and transferred to the drum by four laser beams, which form an
electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. The amount of charge
remaining as a latent image on the drum depends on the laser beam pulse
duration, which is controlled by the BICU.
4. DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
The drum potential sensor detects the change in drum potential, caused by
variable conditions around the drum (heat, humidity, drum service) and adjusts
the following voltages:
Grid bias voltage (Vg or Vgrid)
Laser diode power
Development bias voltage (Vb)
The drum thermistor detects drum temperature and this data is used to control
the above voltages.
6. IMAGE TRANSFER
Paper is fed to the area between the drum surface and the transfer belt at the
proper time to align the copy paper and the developed image on the drum. The
transfer roller applies a high positive charge to the reverse side of the paper
through the transfer belt. This positive charge pulls the toner particles from the
drum to the paper while the paper is electrostatically attracted to the transfer
belt.
7. PAPER SEPARATION
Paper separates from the drum as a result of the attraction between the paper
and the transfer belt. The pick-off pawls also help separate the paper from the
drum.
8. ID SENSOR
The laser writes a sensor pattern on the drum surface. The ID sensor
measures the reflectivity of the pattern and outputs this data (Vsp) to the CPU.
The Vsp output signal is one of the factors used for toner supply control.
9. CLEANING
The cleaning brush removes toner remaining on the drum after image transfer
and the cleaning blade scrapes off all remaining toner.
10. QUENCHING
The light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the charge on the
drum surface. After cleaning and quenching, the drum surface is ready for the
next cycle.
6-11
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
5. DEVELOPMENT
The magnetic developer brush on the development roller contacts the latent
image on the drum surface. Toner particles are electrostatically attracted to the
areas of the drum surface where the laser reduced the negative charge on the
drum.
ADF
30 July 2004
6.4 ADF
6.4.1 OVERVIEW
1
10
11
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
B140D907.WMF
13. 3rd Transport Roller

14. CIS (Contact Image Sensor)
15. White Platen Roller
16. Exit Sensor
17. 2nd Transport Roller
18. ADF Exposure Glass
19. Scanning Roller
21. Pre-scanning Roller
22. Interval sensor
23. 1st Transport Roller
1. Original Width Sensors (x 4)

2. Entrance Roller
3. Skew Correction Sensor
4. Separation Roller
5. Feed Belt
6. Pick-up Roller
7. Original Length Sensor 1
10. Original Tray
11. Exit Tray
12. Exit Roller
Some sensors are not shown, but the callouts indicate their approximate locations.
Original Separation and Feed. The standard FRR system for paper separation
and feed. (
Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Document Feed> FRR with
Feed Belt
Original Size Detection. A combination of three original length sensors on the
original tray and an array of four original width sensors in the paper feed path is
used. (
Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Original Size Detection>
Dynamic Original Size Detection)
Duplex Scanning. The front side of the original is scanned as it passes over the
ADF exposure glass below, and the back is scanned by a CIS mounted above the
paper path. There is no inverter mechanism for duplex scanning in the ADF.
6-12
30 July 2004
ADF
6.4.2 ADF DRIVE LAYOUT

[A]
[C]
[B]
[E]
5
[D]
4
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[K]
B140D908.WMF
1. Pick-up Roller Lift Motor

2. Feed Motor
3. Bottom Plate Motor
4. Transport Motor
Pick-up roller lift motor: Drives the pick-up roller lift mechanism through gear [A].
Feed motor: Drives the following:
Pick-up roller and feed belt drive gear [B]
Entrance roller [C] and 1st transport roller [D]
Bottom plate motor: Drives the bottom plate lift mechanism through gear [E].
Transport motor: Drives the following:
Pre-scanning roller [F]
Scanning roller [G]
2nd transport roller [H]
White platen roller [ I ]
3rd transport roller [J]
Exit motor: Drives the exit roller [K].
6-13
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
5. Exit Motor
ADF
30 July 2004
6.4.3 PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT

[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B140D909.WMF
[A]: Pick-up roller lift motor

[B]: Cam
[C]: Pick-up roller release lever
[D]: Pick-up roller
[E]: Pick-up roller HP sensor
When there are no originals: The pick-up roller [D] remains up (this is the home
position).
When an original is placed on the tray: The original set sensor switches on, and
this switches motor [A] on. The cam [B] releases lever [C]. The lever rises and the
pick-up roller [D] drops onto the stack of paper. Then the pick-up roller feeds the
paper to the feed belt and separation roller.
6-14
30 July 2004
ADF
6.4.4 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT
[A]
[C]
[B]
B140D910.WMF
When an original is placed on the original tray: The original set sensor switches
on, the pick-up roller drops, and sensor [around location A] (on the pick-up roller
assembly) switches off. Then, motor [B] lifts lever [C], raising the bottom plate.
When the bottom plate reaches the correct feed position: Sensor [A] switches
off and motor [B] stops.
During the job, when the top of the stack becomes too low: When the pick-up
roller drops low enough to switch sensor [A] on again, motor [B] switches on again
to raise the stack to the correct feed position.
6-15
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]: Bottom plate sensor

[B]: Bottom plate motor
[C]: Lift lever
ADF
30 July 2004
6.4.5 ORIGINAL SEPARATION

[B]
[C]
[A]
B140D911.WMF
[A]: Pick-up roller

[B]: Feed belt
This mechanism prevents feeding more than one sheet at a time.
(
Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Document Feed> FRR with Feed Belt)
6-16
30 July 2004
ADF
6.4.6 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[I]
[M]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[K]
[J]
[L]
B140D912.WMF
When the skew correction sensor detects the leading edge of the original, the prescanning roller [F] switches on. Skew is also corrected at the pre-scanning roller.
( 6.4.7)
Shading correction, which attempts to compensate for slight distortions caused by
the differences in brightness of the light elements due to wear, temperature
variation, or distortion by the lenses, is done for the first sheet:
The original is fed for a few clock pulses after the registration sensor [G] detects
the leading edge of the original.
The original is then delayed slightly at the ADF exposure glass while the CPU
uses the white plate to determine the white peak level for the job.
The pre-scanning roller [F], scanning roller [H] and transport rollers [I] feed the
original over the ADF exposure glass [J] and under the CIS [K], until it reaches
the exit roller [M].
If the reverse side of the original is to be scanned, the CPU uses the surface of
the white platen roller [L] to determine the white peak level for the job.
6-17
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
The pick-up roller [A] feeds the original to the feed belt [B] and separation roller [C].
Skew is corrected at the skew correction sensor [D] and entrance roller [E].
( 6.4.7)
ADF
30 July 2004
6.4.7 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
B140D913.WMF
Skew correction sensor

Entrance roller
Feed roller (Transport Roller 1)
Interval sensor
Pre-scanning roller
Scanning roller
After pick-up and separation, the skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading
edge of the original and the entrance roller [B] is delayed for the prescribed number
of pulses to buckle the original and correct skew.
If the original is B6, A5, or HLT, or during any duplex scanning regardless of
original size, when the interval sensor [D] detects the leading edge of the original,
the pre-scanning motor [E] is delayed for the prescribed number of pulses to buckle
the original and correct skew.
When scanning only the front side of originals larger than A5, after the entrance
roller [B] starts rotating, the feed motor increases the speed of roller [C] to reduce
the interval between the original just fed and the original ahead being scanned.
When the interval sensor [D] detects the leading edge of the original approaching
the pre-scanning roller, the pre-scanning roller slows down slightly. Roller [C] is still
feeding the paper faster than the pre-scanning roller [E], and this slows the original
at the leading edge and corrects skew.
6-18
30 July 2004
ADF
Here is a summary of the skew correction methods.
Skew correction sensor/entrance roller

Duplex Scanning
Simplex Scanning
B6, A5, HLT

Yes
Yes
NOTE: Skew is always corrected with method

paper size and mode.
Larger Than A5
Yes
Yes
for every job, regardless of the
Interval sensor/pre-scanning roller stop correction

Duplex Scanning
Simplex Scanning
B6, A5, HLT

Yes
Yes
Larger Than A5
Yes
No
NOTE: Use SP6020 (ADF Contact Mode In/Out) to enable skew correction method
for all jobs to ensure accurate original feeding. However, switching this
feature on slows original feed slightly.
Interval sensor/pre-scanning roller slow-down correction

B6, A5, HLT
No
No
Larger Than A5
No
Yes
Detailed
Descriptions
Duplex Scanning
Simplex Scanning
6-19
manuals4you.com
ADF
30 July 2004
6.4.8 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[F]
[G]
[A]
B140D914.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
Original width sensor 1

B5 length sensor
A4 length sensor
LG length sensor
When the leading edge of the paper passes the skew correction sensor, the CPU
reads the outputs from the original width and length sensors.
Please refer to the table on the next page.
6-20
30 July 2004
ADF
Size (W x L)
A3 SEF (297 x 420 mm)
B4 SEF (257 x 364 mm)
A4 SEF (210 x 297 mm)
A4 LEF (297 x 210 mm)
B5 SEF (182 x 257 mm)
B5 LEF (257 x 182 mm)
A5 SEF (148 x 210 mm) *1
A5 LEF (210 x 148 mm)
B6 SEF (128 x 182 mm) *1
B6 LEF (182 x 128 mm) *1
11" x 17" SEF (DLT)
11" x 15" SEF
10" x 14" SEF
81/2" x 14" SEF (LG)
81/2" x 13" SEF (F4)
81/4" x 13" SEF
8" x 13" SEF (F)
81/2" x 131/4" SEF (F)
81/2" x 11" SEF (LT)
11" x 81/2" LEF (LT)
71/4" x 101/2" SEF
101/2" x 71/4" LEF
8" x 10" SEF (F)
51/2" x 81/2" SEF (HLT)
81/2" x 51/2" LEF (HLT)
8 K SEF (267 x 390 mm)
16 K SEF (195 x 267 mm)
16 K LEF (267 x 195 mm)
1:
0:
Y:
N:
S:
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
Original Width
Sensors
2
3
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
4
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Original Length
Sensors
B5
A4
LG
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
NA
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
S
Y
Y
S
N
S
S
Y
Y
Y
S
S
Y
Y
N
N
N
EU
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
S
N
N
N
Y
N
S
S
S
S
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Actuated
Not actuated
Yes. Size detected.
No. Size not detected.
Selectable. Size not detected with default but default can be changed with SP6016
(Original Size Determination Priority) or SP5126 (F Original Size Selection). Refer to the
description in the next section.
*1
: For A5 SEF, B6 SEF, and B6 LEF, all sensors are off. The machine determines the paper
size by measuring the distance between the leading and trailing edges using the skew
correction sensor and clock pulses.
6-21
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Original Size Detection Table
ADF
30 July 2004
Changing the Default Selection with SP6016 and SP5126

Here is a list of paper sizes that can be set for the default to enable detection. The
bold sizes are the default settings, and the italic sizes are the alternate settings.
64
32
16
8
North America
DL SEF
11" x 15"
LT LEF
Exec LEF
LT SEF
8" x 10" SEF
LG SEF
Set by SP 5126
4
2
1
Europe/Asia
8K
DL SEF
16 K SEF
LT SEF
16 K LEF
LT LEF
To change the default settings:

1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select SP6016.
3. Replace the default settings with the alternate settings.
In North America, enter 120 to replace the default settings with the alternate
settings. The bold settings in the table above are replaced with the italicized
settings.
In Europe (or Asia), enter 7 to replace the default settings with the alternate
settings. The bold settings in the table above are replaced with the italicized
settings.
4. To restore all the default settings in either North America or Europe/Asia, enter
0.
SP 5126
This SP controls the alternative paper sizes that are detected for LG SEF (USA) or
8 x 13" (Europe/Asia).
6-22
30 July 2004
ADF
6.4.9 ADF SCANNING
[A]
[B]
B140D915.WMF
[C]
The ADF scans both sides of an original without inverting the original:
Front side: Scanned at the ADF exposure glass [A] by a xenon exposure
lamp and CCD below the original
Back side: Scanned by a CIS [B] above the paper path
The CIS can scan a line 306 mm (12") wide at 600 dpi. To increase the scanning
speed, the sensors are divided into 13 parallel blocks.
NOTE: Both sides are scanned at 600 dpi. The 600 dpi output is boosted to 1200
dpi by image processing at the IPU.
The CIS reads the surface of the white roller [C] and uses this reading (white point
=0) as a reference point for density correction.
Digital Processes> Image Processing> Black and White CCD Systems, Black
and White CIS Systems
6-23
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D916.WMF
ADF
30 July 2004
6.4.10 JAM DETECTION
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B140D917.WMF
Four sensors, the skew correction sensor [A], interval sensor [B], registration
sensor [C], and exit sensor [D] detect jams in the paper path. The conditions that
trigger a jam detection are listed below.
Jam Type
Skew correction
Check in failure
sensor
Interval sensor
Check in failure
Registration sensor
Check in failure
Exit sensor
Check in failure
Skew correction
sensor
Check out failure
Interval sensor
Check out failure
Registration sensor
Check out failure
Exit sensor
Check out failure
Cause
Remains off after enough time for the original to
feed twice the distance from the original setting
position to the skew correction sensor.
feed twice the distance from roller [E] to the
interval sensor.
feed twice the distance from the skew correction
sensor to the registration sensor.
feed twice the distance from the registration
sensor to the exit sensor.
Remains on after enough time for a 610 mm
(24") original to feed (except when the user is
feeding custom-sized originals, which can be up
to 1260 mm).
Remains on after enough time for the original to
feed twice the distance from the interval sensor
to the skew correction sensor.
feed twice the distance from the skew correction
sensor to the registration sensor.
feed twice the distance from the registration
sensor to the exit sensor.
NOTE: If a problem occurs in the ADF, either SC700 or SC701 will be issued. For
details, please refer to Section 4 of this manual.
6-24
30 July 2004
SCANNING
6.5 SCANNING
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
10
B140D918.WMF
6. Exposure Glass (ADF)

7. Original Width Sensor
8. Original Length Sensors 1, 2
9. Scanner Lens Block
10. CCD (Charge Coupled Device)
Exposure Glass
Lamp Regulator
Exposure Lamp (Xenon)
White Plate
Scanner HP Sensor
A xenon lamp (23W) illuminates the original. Light is reflected from the original to
the CCD: 1st Mirror 2nd Mirror 3rd Mirror Scanner Lens CCD
The lens block (which consists of the scanner lens, CCD, and SBU) adjusts for
refraction, MTF, and focusing. The lens block is replaced as a unit and requires no
adjustment in the field.
The resolution of the CCD is 600 dpi.
6-25
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
SCANNING
30 July 2004
6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140D919.WMF
The scanner motor [A] (a dc stepper motor) drives the first scanner [B] and second
scanner [C] through drive wires and pulleys.
The scanner HP sensor [D] detects when the scanner is at home position. The
machine measures distance from home position by counting scanner motor pulses.
Scanning Mode
100% Reproduction Ratio
Returning to HP
Speed
420 mm/s
840 mm/s
6-26
30 July 2004
SCANNING
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Sensors
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
B140D920.WMF
Original length sensor [A] and Original width sensor [B] (reflective sensors) detect
the width and length of the original on the exposure glass.
The ADF functions as the platen. The DF position sensor [C] (attached to the ADF)
detects whether the ADF is open or closed.
The following diagram shows the locations of the sensors.

Length Sensor 4
229.5 mm, 84 mm
0,0 (L, W)
Length
Width
Width Sensor 1
127.9 mm, 195.8 mm
Length Sensor 5
Width Sensor 2
138.5 mm, 233 mm
Width Sensor 3
141.2 mm, 271.6 mm
A5-S
A5-L
A4-S
B5-L
B4-S
A4-L
A3-S
B140D921.WMF
6-27
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
The APS start sensor [D] triggers auto paper size detection.
SCANNING
30 July 2004
The table below lists the sensor output for each paper size.
If an original is on the exposure glass, you can check the sensor output by using
SP4301 (APS Sensor Output Display).
Original Size
A4/A3
LT/DLT
A3
11" x 17"
B4
A4 SEF
81/2" x 11"
A4 LEF
11" x 81/2"
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
A5 SEF
51/2" x 81/2"
A5 LEF
81/2" x 51/2"
APS Length
5
4
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
APS Width
2
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
3
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
SP4301
Display
000 11111
000 01110
000 00111
000 01100
000 00110
000 01000
000 00100
000 00000
1: High (Paper Present), 0: Low (No Paper)
If the original is small (such as A5-LEF), all sensors remain off and the machine
indicates that the original size cannot be detected. However, you can force the
machine to detect A5/HLT in this situation by adjusting SP4303 (APS A5 Size
Detection).
Detection Timing
When the power is on, the APS sensors are always active, but the CPU checks
their signals only after the platen is lowered.
Book Mode
In the Book mode (when the ADF is open), the CPU checks the APS sensors and
determines the original size after Start
is pressed.
ADF Mode
The CPU checks the APS sensors after the platen is lowered.
By-pass Mode
The APS sensors are ignored when copy paper is fed from the by-pass tray, but
the by-pass tray can handle a variety of sizes and orientations. To accomplish this:
The machine always assumes short-edge feed for paper on the by-pass tray.
Width is measured by a sensor inside the by-pass tray.
The bypass tray cannot measure length, so the registration sensor determines
the length of the paper using clock pulses.
The copy time for the first sheet is slower, because the entire exposure glass area
(or width for the CIS) is scanned. However, when the size of the first sheet has
been detected, scanning is at normal speed for the remaining sheets. (
Handling Paper> Paper Feed> Paper Size Detection> By-pass Size Detection)
6-28
30 July 2004
SCANNING
6.5.4 SCANNING MAGNIFICATION

Book Mode
Reduction and enlargement is done differently for main scan and sub scan:
Main scan: Handled by image processing in the IPU.
Sub scan: Handled by varying the speed of the scanner motor.
Reproduction ratios of 50% or higher: The scanner speed is lower for higher
magnification ratios. For example, for 200% enlargement, the scanner motor speed
is reduced to 50%.
Detailed
Descriptions
Reproduction ratios of less than 50%: The scanner motor cannot run fast
enough. So, the scanner slows to half the speed required for that reduction ratio.
For a 49% magnification ratio, the scanner speed is the same as for 98%
magnification. This causes twice as many scan lines as needed, so alternate lines
are removed.
6-29
manuals4you.com
SCANNING
30 July 2004
6.5.5 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS)

Auto Image Density (ADS), also called original background correction, corrects for
variation in background density down the page to prevent the background of an
original from appearing in copies. This machine uses rear scale peak sampling (the
area sampled, which must contain no data, is near the rear scale).
Xenon Lamp CCD ADS

When an original with a gray background is scanned, for example, the gray area
becomes the peak white level density; therefore, the gray background will not
appear on copies.
The area that the CCD uses as a reference for ADS is shown in the following
diagram.
(
Digital Processes> Image Processing> Black and White CCD Systems>
Analog Signal Processing> Automatic Image Density)
0.5 mm
10 mm
15 mm
Auto Detection Area
75 mm
Exposure Glass
B140D922.WMF
CIS ADS
The CIS reads the surface of the white platen roller and uses this reading (white
point =0) as a reference point for density correction. When an original is scanned,
the CIS starts 20 mm from the edge away from the operation panel and reads 65
mm in towards the center of the white platen roller and then performs image
density correction line by line.
6-30
30 July 2004
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.6.1 OVERVIEW
This diagram shows the machine components that do the image processing.
CIS
Key
Data flow
SBU
Signal flow
SBU/CIS
PCI BUS
BCU
IPU
Controller
Polygon Motor
LDB
OPC
B140D923.WMF
SBU/CIS:
Photoelectric conversion (600 dpi, 2-channel CCD odd/even

allocation), Amplification, A/D Conversion (analog to digital), Light
intensity detection (scanning)
BCU:
Engine control, Scanner control, SBU settings, LDB settings
IPU:
Shading correction, Image Processing, Main/Sub scan

magnification, Video patch switching, Compression/ decompression,
GAVD
Controller:
System control, software application control, image storage control,

compression/decompression
LDB:
4-beam laser exposure, digital-to-grayscale conversion,

synchronization detection
6-31
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
HDD
IMAGE PROCESSING
30 July 2004
6.6.2 IMAGE PROCESSING FLOW

Image processing is done by the IPU (Image Processing Unit), following the steps
shown below.
Overall image processing for this machine is designed to:
Target edges with filters to improve the angles of text characters and reduce the
occurrence of moir filled areas.
Improve the evenness of granular areas in images
Shading Correction
Corrects the dispersion of the scanning lens

and CCD.
Gamma Correction
Background erase
Smoothing filter to reduce the occurrence of
moir.
Smoothing
Determines if an image is text or raster

image data and processes the data
accordingly.
Selects the best methods for Filtering,
Density Control, and Grayscale Processing.
Auto Select
MTF and smoothing (MTF filter of previous

machines)
Either of two filters is selected by Auto
Select above.
Removes isolated pixels.
Filtering
Employs one of two gamma tables,

selected by Auto Select above
Density Control
Error diffusion, dithering, or binary picture

processing
Black-and-white digitization or dithering is
selected by Auto Select above.
Grayscale Processing
Video Path
LD Unit
6-32
Application (printer)
30 July 2004
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING MODES

The user can select one of the following five modes with the User Tools screen:
Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation.
Each mode has four different settings (described below). Each mode has a Custom
Setting that can be customized with SP modes to meet special requirements that
cannot be covered by the standard settings.
Mode
Text
Tex/Photo
Photo
Setting
Soft
Normal
Sharp
Custom Setting
Photo Priority
Normal
Text Priority
Custom Setting
Print Photo
Normal
Glossy Photo
Custom Settings
Pale
Generation
Copy
Soft
Normal
Sharp
Custom Setting
Soft
Normal
Sharp
Custom Setting
Function
Used for black-and-white printed material and documents
that contain mainly text. Easily reads lines as well as text
Used for newspapers, time schedules, or any type of
printed material with fine print.
Stores SP command settings.
Used for documents that contain text and color or blackand-white photos, such as catalogs, magazines, maps,
etc. Provides more faithful reproduction than the Text
mode.
Used for magazines, graphics, for smooth reproduction.
Employs dithering.
Used for copying photographs, graphics, for sharp
reproduction. Employs error diffusion.
Used for best results in copying glossy photographs for
sharp reproduction. Employs error diffusion.
Stores SP command settings. Employs either error
diffusion or dithering, depending on an SP setting.
Used for low density documents with text handwritten in
black or color pencil (or carbon copies) such as receipts,
invoices, etc.
Used to achieve an image smoother than Normal.
Used to achieved best reproduction of copies of copies
by smoothing the image.
Used to emphasize lines and text stronger than Normal for
better image quality.
6-33
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
NOTE: To see these settings in the User Tools mode, press the User Tools key,
press Copier/Document Server Functions, then press Copy Quality.
IMAGE PROCESSING
30 July 2004
6.6.4 IMAGE QUALITY SP ADJUSTMENTS

Adjustments are easier with this machine, because the parameters have been
grouped and no longer have to be adjusted one by one.
In this section, we will cover the custom settings for each of the 5 original modes:
These custom settings are:
Image Quality
Duplex Scanning Mode
Settings adjustable for each original mode will also be covered (these do not just
affect the custom settings; they also affect all sub original modes, such as sharp
text).
Background Erase
Note concerning Photo Mode: There are two sets of custom settings for photo
mode. One is for dithering, and one is for error diffusion. The set of custom settings
that will be used depends on the setting of SP 4904 002.
Custom Settings for Each Mode: Image Quality

Custom Setting: Text Mode Image Quality
Item
Text
25~55%
55.5~75%
75.5~160%
160.5~400%
Range
Default
0~10
5 Normal
SP No.
SP4903-001
SP4903-002
SP4903-003
SP4903-004
If the value is increased, the outlines of lines become sharper but this could cause
moir to appear in dot patterns. If the value is decreased, image patterns become
smoother, the occurrence of moir decreases, but the corners of characters and
intersections of lines at acute angles may not be as sharp.
Custom Setting: Photo Mode (Dithering) Image Quality
Item
Photo
25~55%
55.5~75%
75.5~160%
160.5~400%
Range
Default
0~6
3 Print Photo
SP No.
SP4903-005
SP4903-006
SP4903-007
SP4903-008
Used for coarse, dithered tone photographs such as newsprint.

If the value is increased, the photo becomes sharper, but blurring could occur in
the sub scan direction. If the value is decreased, blurring in the sub scan direction
is less obvious but outlines become fuzzy.
6-34
30 July 2004
IMAGE PROCESSING
Custom Setting: Photo Mode (Error Diffusion) Image Quality

Item
Photo
25~55%
55.5~75%
75.5~160%
160.5~400%
Range
Default
0~6
1 Normal
SP No.
SP4903-009
SP4903-010
SP4903-011
SP4903-012
Used for printed materials (magazines, etc.) with photographs to sharp patterns in
copies.
If the photos have dithered tones, the image becomes sharper if the value is
increased, but blurring could occur in the sub scan direction. If the value is
decreased, blurring in the sub scan direction is less obvious but outlines become
fuzzy.
Custom Setting: Text/Photo Mode Image Quality
Item
Text/Photo
25~55%
55.5~75%
75.5~160%
160.5~400%
Range
Default
0~10
5 Normal
SP No.
SP4903-013
SP4903-014
SP4903-015
SP4903-016
See the remarks for Custom Setting: Text Mode Image Quality above.
Item
Pale
25~55%
55.5~75%
75.5~160%
160.5~400%
Range
Default
0~10
5 Normal
SP No.
SP4903-017
SP4903-018
SP4903-019
SP4903-020
If the value is increased, low density areas become sharper, but the background
could become dirtier. If the value is decreased, the background disappears but the
density of low density areas becomes low.
Custom Setting: Generation Mode Image Quality
Item
Generation
25~55%
55.5~75%
75.5~160%
160.5~400%
Range
Default
0~10
5 Normal
SP No.
SP4903-021
SP4903-022
SP4903-023
SP4903-024
See the remarks for Custom Setting: Pale Mode Image Quality above.
6-35
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Custom Setting: Pale Mode Image Quality
IMAGE PROCESSING
30 July 2004
Custom Settings for Each Mode: Line Width Correction

Custom Setting: Text Mode Line Width Correction
Item
Selection
Line Width
Correction
Main Scan
Sub Scan
Range
Default
Content
0~8
0 (Thin) - 4 (Off) - 8 (Thick)
0~1
0~1
1
1
0:OFF 1:ON
0:OFF 1:ON
SP No.
SP4903-080
SP4903-081
SP4903-082
If the value is made smaller, the line width correction becomes thinner, and if the
value is made larger, the line width correction becomes thicker. To switch this
feature off, select 4.
If the above settings do not make the lines thin enough, use SP4904 020 (Image
Quality Exposure: Thin Line - Text Mode). Normally, SP4904 020 is set to 0 (OFF).
As the setting is increased (1~3), the line width correction effect becomes stronger,
and lines become thinner. All settings of SP4903 080 will be affected by the same
amount.
Custom Setting: Photo Mode Line Width Correction
Item
Selection
Line Width
Correction
Main Scan
Sub Scan
Range
Default
Content
0~8
0~1
0~1
1
1
0:OFF 1:ON
0:OFF 1:ON
SP No.
SP4903-083
SP4903-084
SP4903-085
See the remarks for Custom Setting: Text Mode Line Width Correction above.
Quality Exposure: Thin Line Photo Mode). Normally, SP4904 021 is set to 0
(OFF). As the setting is increased (1~3) the line width correction effect becomes
stronger, and lines become thinner. All settings of SP4903 083 will be affected by
the same amount.
Custom Setting: Text/Photo Mode Line Width Correction
Selection
Item
Line Width
Correction
Main Scan
Sub Scan
Range
Default
Content
0~8
0~1
0~1
1
1
0:OFF 1:ON
0:OFF 1:ON
SP No.
SP4903-086
SP4903-087
SP4903-088
If the above settings do not make the lines thin enough, use SP4904-022 (Image
Quality Exposure: Thin Line Text/Photo Mode). Normally, SP4904-022 is set to 0
stronger, and lines become thinner. All settings of SP4903-086 will be affected by
the same amount.
6-36
30 July 2004
IMAGE PROCESSING
Custom Setting: Pale Mode Line Correction

Item
Selection
Line Width
Correction
Main Scan
Sub Scan
Range
Default
Content
0~8
0~1
0~1
1
1
0:OFF 1:ON
0:OFF 1:ON
SP No.
SP4903-089
SP4903-090
SP4903-091
Quality Exposure: Thin Line Pale Mode). Normally, SP4904 023 is set to 0 (OFF).
As the setting is increased (1~3) the line width correction effect becomes stronger,
and lines become thinner. All settings of SP4903 089 will be affected by the same
amount.
Custom Setting: Generation Copy Line Width Correction
Selection
Item Line Width
Correction
Main Scan
Sub Scan
Range
Default
Content
0~8
0~1
0~1
1
1
0:OFF 1:ON
0:OFF 1:ON
SP No.
SP4903-092
SP4903-093
SP4903-094
Detailed
Descriptions
If the above settings do not make the lines thin enough, use SP4904-024 (Image
Quality Exposure: Thin Line Generation Mode). Normally, SP4904-024 is set to 0
stronger, and lines become thinner. All settings of SP4903-092 will be affected by
the same amount.
6-37
manuals4you.com
IMAGE PROCESSING
30 July 2004
Custom Setting: Duplex Scanning Mode Original Image Quality Settings

Front Side Quality Adjustment
Item
Front Side Scan
Range
Text
Photo
Text/Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
Default
Content
0~3
0: Normal
1: Weak
2: Medium
3: Strong
Range
Default
Content
0: Normal
1: Weak
2: Medium
3: Strong
SP No.
SP4901-010
SP4901-011
SP4901-012
SP4901-013
SP4901-014
Rear Side Quality Adjustment

Back Side Scan
Item
Text
Photo
Text/Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
0~3
SP No.
SP4902-010
SP4902-011
SP4902-012
SP4902-013
SP4902-014
Simplex/Duplex Front Side Quality Adjustment

Item
Determines if SP4901-010 ~ 014 applies to
scanning single-side or single and double-side
originals.
Range
Default
0~1
SP No.
SP4901-019
0: The adjustment will be applied only for duplex mode front side copies.
1: The adjustment will be applied for simplex mode, and for front side copies in
duplex mode.
6-38
30 July 2004
IMAGE PROCESSING
Settings Adjustable for Each Original Mode

Item
Text
Photo
Text/Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
Range
Default
0~14
0 (Off)
SP No.
SP4903-060
SP4903-061
SP4903-062
SP4903-063
SP4903-064
Independent dot erase removes isolated black pixels. As this setting is increased,
the greater the number of eliminated isolated pixels. Setting to zero switches this
function off.
Background Erase
Item
Text
Photo
Text/Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
Range
Default
0~255
0 (Off)
SP No.
SP4903-070
SP4903-071
SP4903-072
SP4903-073
SP4903-074
Detailed
Descriptions
Background erase attempts to eliminate the heavy background texture from copies
of newspaper print or documents printed on coarse paper. Pixels of density below
the selected threshold level are eliminated. Setting this feature to zero switches it
off. Increasing this setting increases the effect of background erase.
6-39
manuals4you.com
IMAGE PROCESSING
30 July 2004
6.6.5 RELATION BETWEEN THE SP AND UP SETTINGS

The tables below illustrate the relationship between the UP and SP settings for
each of the 5 original modes. The scale across the top of the table is the range of
settings for the SP modes.
NOTE: The settings in the gray areas indicate the UP settings overlaid on the SP
scale of the table. Words that are not shaded within the tables, such as
softer, indicate how the image changes if you change the SP setting is a
certain direction.
The related UP mode is User Tools Copier Features General Features
Copy Quality.
Text Mode
Setting
25% ~55%
Sharp
Normal
Soft
75.5 ~ 160%
160.5 ~ 400%
25% ~55%
160.5 ~ 400%
SP No.
SP4903-005
Sharper
Print Photo
Softer
75.5 ~ 160%
SP4903-006
SP4903-007
SP4903-008
Photo Mode (Error Diffusion)

1
75.5 ~ 160%
160.5 ~ 400%
Normal
55.5 ~ 75%
Softer
25% ~55%
6-40
SP No.
SP4903-009
Sharper
Glossy Photo
Setting
SP4903-002
SP4903-003
SP4903-004
Photo Mode (Dithering)
55.5 ~ 75%
SP No.
SP4903-001
55.5 ~ 75%
Setting
10
SP4903-010
SP4903-011
SP4903-012
30 July 2004
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text/Photo Mode
2
Photo Priority
25% ~55%
55.5 ~ 75%
75.5 ~ 160%
160.5 ~ 400%
10
SP No.
SP4903-013
Text Priority
Normal
Setting
SP4903-014
SP4903-015
SP4903-016
Pale Mode
Setting
10
25% ~55%
SP No.
75.5 ~ 160%
SP4903-018
Sharp
Soft
55.5 ~ 75%
Normal
SP4903-017
SP4903-019
160.5 ~ 400%
SP4903-020
Generation Copy
0
25% ~55%
160.5 ~ 400%
Sharp
Normal
75.5 ~ 160%
SP No.
SP4903-021
Soft
55.5 ~ 75%
10
SP4903-022
SP4903-023
SP4903-024
6-41
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Setting
IMAGE PROCESSING
30 July 2004
6.6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING TROUBLESHOOTING

Removing Background from Coarse Paper
NOTE: If text fades and thin lines
appear broken, then adjust
SP4903 080~082 (Text
Mode Select Thick Lines
for Line Width Correction).
Pale Mode - Copy
Increase value of
SP4903 017~020
OK
OK
END
B140D924.WMF
Improving the Appearance of a Copy of a Color Document

NOTE: If text fades, adjust
SP4903 089~091 (Pale
Mode Select Thick Lines
for Line Width Correction).
Pale Mode - Copy
NG
Increase value of
SP4903 017~020
NG (Background Out)
Adjust SP4903 073

(Background Erase Mode)
END
B140D925.WMF
6-42
30 July 2004
IMAGE PROCESSING
Removing Vertical White Lines During Duplex Scanning

During duplex scanning, the CCD
scans the front side and the CIS
scans the rear side. In Text, Pale,
or Generation Copy mode, when
there are halftones (such as
photos) on the rear side, vertical
white lines may appear in these
areas. This is because of gaps at
the junctions between blocks of
elements in the CIS (there is a
junction every 25 mm). If this
occurs, adjust SP4902 010~014
(Image Adjust Mode Back Side
Scan). Increasing the value
reduces the white stripes, but could
reduce resolution slightly.
Otherwise, try using Text/Photo
mode.
NOTE: Each original mode has a
separate adjustment.
Duplex Scan Mode

Back Side Has White Stripes
in Halftones?
White Stripes on Back Side Gone

After Adjusting SP4902 010~014?
*1
Duplex Scan Mode

Image Quality of Front/Back
Sides Differnt?
Equal Image Quality Restored After

Adjusting With SP4901 010~014
*2
Equal Quality Restored After

Adjusting with SP4901 019?
Detailed
Descriptions
Simplex Scan Mode

Front Side And Duplex Scan
Front Side Image Quality
Different?
*3
END
*1: Front Side Quality Adjustment

*2: Rear Side Quality Adjustment
*3: Simplex/Duplex Front Side Quality Adjustment
B140D926.WMF
6-43
manuals4you.com
IMAGE PROCESSING
30 July 2004
Equalizing Duplex Scanned Image Quality of Front/Back Sides

During duplex scanning, when SP4902-010~014 is adjusted, only the back side is
affected, so you may see a slight difference in the quality of the images scanned
from the front and back sides of the same page. You can adjust the quality of the
front side image by changing SP4901-010~014 (Image Quality Adjustment For
Front Side Scan). This mode is enabled for the Custom Setting original mode only.
NOTE: Each original mode has a separate adjustment.
Equalizing Image Quality of Front Sides for Duplex and Simplex Modes
Normally, the front side adjustment (SP4901-010~014) is only applied for duplex
jobs. So, you may see a slight difference in the quality of images scanned in
simplex mode and for the front sides of duplex mode jobs.
If you change SP4901-019 to 1, the front side image quality adjustment (SP4901
010~014) will be applied to both duplex and simplex jobs. This mode is enabled for
the Custom Setting only.
SP4901-019
0: Enabled for Duplex Only (default setting)
1: Enabled for Simplex and Duplex Scanning
6-44
30 July 2004
LASER EXPOSURE
6.7 LASER EXPOSURE

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
There are four laser diodes. Four parallel beams write four lines at once, 24 lines
with one complete rotation of the polygon mirror, with the polygon motor rotating at
42,756 rpm.
Multiple beam scanning achieves:
Longer life of the polygon motor (four-beam scanning requires fewer motor
rotations)
Quieter operation because fewer polygon motor revolutions are required.
Up to 5 image density levels (0 ~ 4) are used for each pixel. To achieve this, this
machine controls the duration of the laser exposure using PWM (Pulse Width
Modulation).
(
Digital Processes> Printing> Laser Printing> Image Processing)
The strength of each beam is 10 mW/channel at a wavelength of 788 nm.
LD Unit
Line Scanning
Polygon Motor
Semi-conductor laser encased in an aluminum die-cast bracket.

Wavelength: 788 nm
Output: 10 mW/channel
4-beam exposure
APC (Auto Power Control) provided
Gradation control with PWM
Light weight, aluminum die-cast housing
Main line scanning by polygon mirror
F lens controls the beam position and focus in the main scan direction.
Beam focus correction by WTL.
42,756 rpm
NOTE: 1) A new ceramic shaft increases the durability of the polygon motor.
2) This machine uses APC (Auto Power Control), so no adjustments are
required when the LD unit is replaced.
6-45
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Specifications
LASER EXPOSURE
30 July 2004
6.7.2 OPTICAL PATH
4
5
7
8
1
2
3
9
10
B140D927.WMF
1. LD Unit
6. WTL
2. Cylindrical Lens
7. 2nd Mirror
3. 1st Mirror
8. Toner Shield Glass
4. Polygonal Mirror Motor
9. Laser Synchronizing Detector
5. F Lens
10. OPC Drum
The optical path is a standard arrangement, starting at the LD unit and ending with
the creation of the latent image on the OPC drum. (
Digital Processes>
Printing> Laser Printing> Image Processing> Optical Components)
6-46
30 July 2004
LASER EXPOSURE
6.7.3 FOUR-BEAM EXPOSURE

The LD unit uses four laser diodes to scan
four lines simultaneously. The diodes are
fixed at 1200 dpi, so beam pitch
adjustments are not required.
B140D928.WMF
The diagonal arrangement of the four

beams achieves 1200 dpi.
CH1
Sub Scan
When edge processing or smoothing (FCI

fine character adjustment) is used, one-bit
data is converted to grayscale data in the
LD driver circuit board.
Greyscale control: The greater the
exposure time of the laser beam, the darker
the pixel. The duration (width) of the pulse
is adjusted with PWM (pulse width
modulation) in 5 steps.
CH3
CH2
Main Scan
CH4
6-47
manuals4you.com
B140D929.WMF
Detailed
Descriptions
600 dpi 8-bit scanner data is converted to

1200 dpi 1-bit digital data during image
processing.
LASER EXPOSURE
30 July 2004
6.7.4 COOLING FAN
[E]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
B140D930.WMF
The air [C] above passes through a dust filter before it reaches the optical path.
The air passing below [D] flows over the top of the fusing unit and is expelled by
the fusing cooling fan.
The polygonal mirror motor [E] normally remains on. It shuts down when the
machine is powered off or enters the auto off mode or night mode.
6-48
manuals4you.com
The cooling fan [A] at the back of the machine blows air through the duct [B] and
sends it above and below the laser exposure unit. The fan switches on and off with
the polygon motor.
30 July 2004
LASER EXPOSURE
6.7.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES

Front Door
Inter-lock SW
IPU
+LD5V
+5V
REG
LDD
+3.3V
AA
RE
MGAVD
DATA1
DATA1+
LVDS
RECEIVER
IC
DATA1
ALD
560
560
8.2
15
10
5
+5V
LDA
PSU
LDB
B140D931.WMF
To ensure the safety of customers and customer engineers, two switches inside
the cover prevent the laser beams from switching on accidentally.
Detailed
Descriptions
When the front cover is open, the 5V line connecting each LD driver on the LD
control board is disconnected.
6-49
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
6.8 DRUM UNIT

6.8.1 OVERVIEW
1
12
11
10
9
4
8
5
13 (B140 Series only)
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B140D251.WMF
Quenching Lamp
Charge Corona Unit
Toner Recycling Pipe
Drum Potential Sensor
OPC Drum
Pick-off Pawls
Pick-off Pawl Spurs
8. ID Sensor
9. Toner Collection Coil
10. Pressure Release Filter
11. Cleaning Brush
12. Cleaning Blade
13. PTL (Pre-Transfer Lamp)
The OPC drum (diameter 100 mm) is charged by the charge corona unit, a
standard Scorotron grid wire charging and cleaning system.
The drum motor drives the drum and the drum cleaning unit. A counter blade
system, with both cleaning blade and brush, clean the drum.
Two sensors mounted near the drum, an ID sensor and potential sensor, are used
for process control.
Toner is collected at the cleaning area and transported back to the development
unit via the toner collection coil and toner recycling pipe.
B140 Series
The PTL removes the charge on the drum. This makes better paper separation.
Also, with the PTL, pawl marks do not occur on the leading edges of copies. The
PTL only operates when the machine prints on plain or translucent paper. (6.8.4)
6-50
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
6.8.2 OPC DRUM

The OPC drum [A] contains ventilation
holes [B] to prevent overheating.
A ground (earth) brush [C] at the back
grounds the drum unit.
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140D932.WMF
6.8.3 DRUM DRIVE

The drum motor [A] drives both the OPC
drum and the cleaning unit.
[D]
A flywheel [B] on the drum drive shaft

[C] reduces drum vibration. The other
drive shaft [D] drives the cleaning unit.
[A]
The drum drive shaft [C] drives the drum

at 362 mm/s.
[B]
B140D933.WMF
6-51
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
[C]
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
6.8.4 DRUM CHARGE

[A]
[B]
[C]
B140D252.WMF
The charge power pack [A] provides an even negative charge to the two charge
corona wires in the charge corona unit [B].
(
Photocopying Process> Charge> Corona Charge> Scorotron Method)
B140 Series
The PTL [C] makes better paper separation from the drum, and stops pick-off pawl
marks on the leading edges of copies. The PTL removes the charge at the leading
edge when copying on plain paper or translucent paper.
(
Photocopying Processes - Image Transfer And Paper Separation - PreTransfer Potential Reduction)
NOTE: The PTL lamp does not operate when copying with OHP, index sheets, or
thick paper.
With SP2602 (PTL Setting), you can adjust the distance from the leading edge
where the PTL turns on to remove charge. There is an adjustment for the front side
and one for the back side. For more, see section 5. Service Tables.
6-52
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
6.8.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANING
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140D934.WMF
Air flowing around the charge corona unit deposits toner particles on the wires.
These particles interfere with charging and cause pale bands on copies.
To clean the wires, the charge corona wire cleaner motor [B] switches on and
drives the cleaner [A] to the rear, then back to the home position.
The wire cleaner rotates slightly on the forward pass to bring the cleaning pads [C]
into contact with the wires. Cleaning is done only on the forward pass. The pads do
not contact the wires on their return to home position.
The motor [B] switches on after the machine is switched on, but only after 5,000 or
more copies have been made since the last wire cleaning.
6-53
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
The wire cleaner [A] normally remains at the home position at the front end.
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
6.8.6 DRUM PICK-OFF MECHANISM
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B140D935.WMF
Pick-off pawls ride along the surface of the drum to peel off paper that has not
separated from the drum.
Weak spring pressure [A] keeps the pick-off pawls [B] against the surface of the
drum.
During copying, a shaft [C] turns a cam [D]. The cam moves the pick-off pawls from
side to side to prevent drum wear at any fixed location.
6-54
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
6.8.7 DRUM CLEANING

[C]
[A]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[F]
B140D937.WMF
This machine uses a counter blade and brush system.

The drum cleaning blade [A] contacts the drum, and is angled against the direction
of rotation to improve cleaning.
A cam [E] moves the cleaning blade [F] slightly from side to side to prevent it
from scouring the drum.
The cleaning brush [B] rotates and removes some toner from the drum, and
collects the toner removed by the cleaning blade.
The mylar [C] scrapes toner from the cleaning brush.
The toner collection coil [D] receives the toner that falls from the mylar and
transports it to the toner collection bottle.
At the end of every job, the drum reverses about 10 mm to remove toner that has
collected at the edge of the counter blade.
The drum motor drives the cleaning unit, as described in an earlier section.
6-55
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D936.WMF
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
6.8.8 DRUM VENTILATION AND OZONE FILTER
[F]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B140D938.WMF
Cooling prevents uneven buildup of negative ions which can lead to uneven charge
on the drum surface.
The drum cooling fan [A] draws cool air into the machine and sends it over the
charge corona unit [B] and down through the vents in the ends of the drum [C].
The PCU cooling fan [D] cools the drum and charge corona unit from the other end.
The dust filter [E] above the charge corona unit absorbs ozone in the air coming
from around the drum.
The exhaust fan [F] vents the hot filtered air from inside the machine.
Fan
Drum cooling fan
PCU cooling fan
Exhaust fan
Operation Timing
Turns on and off at the same time the polygon motor
Stays on when the fusing lamp temperature is being controlled (at all
times except in auto off or night mode).
Switches on after the main power switch is turned on, and remains on.
However, to reduce noise and conserve energy, this fan turns slower
when the drum motor is off.
6-56
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
6.8.9 TONER RECYCLING
[B]
[H]
[A]
[C]
B140D940.WMF
[B]
[E]
B140D941.WMF
[F]
B140D939.WMF
[G]
The toner collection coil inside the toner recycling pipe [A] carries toner collected
from the drum cleaning unit into the toner separation unit [B] (above the toner
hopper).
Re-usable toner is separated here from waste toner. Sieve [C] sifts the toner, and
brush [D] inside the sieve moves the toner forward.
Reusable toner [E] falls through the sieve into the toner hopper. A fine brush
outside the sieve prevents toner from plugging the mesh of the sieve.
Waste toner [F] does not fall through the sieve. It is pushed through opening
[G] to the waste toner transport coil [H]. The coil moves the toner towards the
back of the machine, where it is deposited in the waste toner bottle.
The toner separation unit and waste toner transport coil [H] are connected to the
same drive shaft (driven by the development motor).
6-57
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
[H]
[D]
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
6.8.10 WASTE TONER COLLECTION

[E]
[H]
[B]
[G]
[F]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B140D942.WMF
B140D943.WMF
Mechanism
The toner collection motor [A] drives the coils [B, C, and D].
Coil [B] brings waste toner from the toner hopper (which originally came from
the drum cleaning unit)
Coil [C] brings waste toner from the transfer unit.
Coil [D] transports waste toner from both sources to the toner collection
bottle.
The toner collection bottle can hold 5000 cc of waste toner, equivalent to about
1,000K copies.
Motor [A] switches on and off at the same time as the drum motor.
Error Detection
The toner collection motor sensor [E] monitors the gear driven by motor [A]. If the
sensor output does not change for 3 seconds while motor [A] is on, then SC590
(Toner Collection Motor Error) is logged.
If the toner collection coil sensor [F] (not shown) does not change within 3 seconds
after the drum motor turns on, the transport coil is clogged and cannot rotate, then
SC495 (Toner Recycling Unit Error) is logged.
When the toner overflow switch (not shown) detects that the toner collection bottle
[G] is full, operation halts after an additional 100 copies and the machine prompts
the user to replace the toner collection bottle.
The toner collection bottle set switch [H] detects when a new toner collection bottle
is installed. If installing a new bottle does not reset the machine, SC496 (Toner
Collection Bottle Error) is logged.
6-58
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
6.8.11 PROCESS CONTROL

Drum potential gradually changes for the following reasons:
Dirty optics, exposure glass
Dirty charge corona casing, grid plate
Deterioration of drum sensitivity
What Happens at Power On

Here is a description of what happens while the fusing temperature is below 100oC
immediately after the main power switch is switched on (process control must also
be enabled with SP3901, or this will not happen).
At any time, this process can also be executed manually by using SP2962.
However, process control must be enabled with SP3901 and the fusing
temperature must be below 100oC, or this will not work.
1. Potential sensor is calibrated.
2. Drum starts first rotation after fusing temperature reaches 140oC.
4. ID sensor is calibrated (Vsg).

5. TD sensor is calibrated (Vref).
NOTE: These calibrations are used to determine toner supply, so it is very
important that the developer be initialized with SP2963 (Installation
Mode) at installation and with SP2801 (TD Sensor Initialization) when
the developer is replaced.
Any SC codes that are generated during auto process control are logged in the
memory and do not appear. The machine will continue to operate.
B140 series: Steps 2, 4, and 5 are not done if SP3904 is set to 0 (default) or 1.
6-59
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
3. Readout from the potential sensor is used to adjust:

Development bias (Vb)
Grid voltage (Vg)
Laser diode (LD) power.
NOTE: This step occurs only if process control is enabled with SP3901 (Auto
Process Control On/Off Setting). If this SP is disabled, then:
Development bias is set to the value stored in SP 2201 001
Grid voltage is set to the value stored in SP 2001 001
Laser power is set to a fixed value
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
Drum Potential Sensor Calibration

The potential sensor output is affected by the distance of the sensor from the OPC,
paper dust or other matter on the surface of the sensor, and environmental
conditions. For these reasons, the potential sensor is calibrated often, as described
below.
1. 100 samples are taken at 100V and at 800V, and the readings are averaged.
Applied Bias
0V
-100V
-800V
Sampling
500 ms
100 rev.
100 ms intervals
Sampling
500 ms
100 rev.
100 ms intervals
B140D944.WMF
2. If the readings are within the normal range, then these readings are used to
calibrate the potential sensor.
If the variations in the readings exceed the specified range, then an SC is
logged (Sensor Calibration Error, SC310 to SC317) and automatic process
control halts. The charge grid voltage Vg, development bias, and LD power are
set as follows.
Development bias is set to the value stored in SP2201-001
Grid voltage is set to the value stored in SP2001-001
6-60
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
Development Bias, Bias Grid, and LD Adjustment

Development Bias (Vb)
First, the development bias that will be used for copying (Vb) is determined by
measuring the potential of a pattern made on the drum using a fixed grid voltage,
development bias, and laser power.
1. The drum motor starts.
2. The grid voltage, development bias, and laser power are set to the default
values that would be used if process control was disabled. These are as
follows:
Development bias is set to the value stored in SP2201-001
Grid voltage is set to the value stored in SP2001-001
3. A VL pattern is made on the drum, and VL is measured. The target value of VL
is 130V.
VL: Potential measured after exposing a white pattern
4. Vb is adjusted to a value that is calculated to bring the value of VL to 130V.
There are no limitations on the amount of change that can be made to Vb.
Grid Voltage (Vg)
1. A Vd pattern is exposed on the drum (if developed with toner, this will be
black).
Vd: Drum potential in black areas after exposure.
2. The potential sensor reads the potential, Vd, from this pattern.
3. Vd should be 800 10V. If it is within this range, the current value of Vg will
be used for copying.
If it is not, -(Vd + 800)V is added to Vg, and the process starts again from
step 1.
4. If Vd cannot be adjusted to this standard within 5 attempts, Vg is fixed to
1,000V and SC312 (Potential Sensor Calibration Error 3) is logged.
6-61
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Then, the machine determines the corona grid voltage (Vg) that will be used during
copying. This is done as follows:
DRUM UNIT
30 July 2004
LD Power
Finally, the machine determines the laser diode power that will be used during
copying. This is done as follows.
1. The laser power is changed to the value needed to write a halftone pattern to
the drum.
2. The potential sensor reads the potential, Vh, from this pattern.
Vh: Standard halftone drum potential
3. Vh should be 300 20 V. If it is within this range, the current value of the laser
power will be used for copying.
If it is not, the laser power changes by 3 units, and the process starts again
from step 1.
The laser power cannot be changed by more than 60 units.
4. If Vh cannot be adjusted to this standard within 25 attempts, LD power is set to
the most recent value and SC314 (Potential Sensor Calibration Error 4) is
logged.
6-62
30 July 2004
DRUM UNIT
ID Sensor Calibration (Vsg)

After power-on, Vsg (the ID sensor output from reading the bare drum) is set to
4.000.2 V by changing the intensity of the light from the sensor shining on the
drum. This can also be done at any time with SP3001-002 (ID Initial Setting Vsg).
The calibrated ID sensor output will be used for calibrating the TD sensor
(described below).
NOTE: If the ID sensor output cannot be adjusted to the standard, then after 20
seconds SC353 or SC354 is issued. Toner supply during copying will then
be controlled using the TD sensor only, until the machine is repaired.
TD Sensor Calibration (Vref)

Next, Vref (TD sensor reference voltage) is updated using the latest calibration
values from the ID sensor.
Vref is updated to stabilize the concentration of toner in the development unit. By
shifting the value of Vref, the density of the ID sensor pattern image is controlled.
Toner supply control is covered in the Development and Toner Supply section.
NOTE: If the ID sensor could not be calibrated during the latest process control
(when measuring Vsg), then the previous ID sensor value is used.
If the ID sensor output is abnormal when measuring Vsp, SC350, 351, or
352 is issued, and Vref is not updated (the machine uses the previous
value).
6-63
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Vref is determined from a table in the machine software, using the following values:
Vsp/Vsg
Vsp: ID sensor output when checking the ID sensor pattern.
Vsg: ID sensor output when checking the bare drum.
Vref-Vt:
Vref is the TD sensor reference voltage
Vt is the current output voltage of the TD sensor.
DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY
30 July 2004
6.9 DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY

6.9.1 OVERVIEW
Development Unit
1
2
7
6
4
5
B140D945.WMF
1. Development Filter
5. Paddle Roller
2. Toner Auger
6. Development Roller Sleeve
3. Developer Agitator
7. Separator
4. TD Sensor
This machine uses dual-component development.
The development unit has its own motor.
The toner concentration is monitored with the ID sensor and TD sensors.
The toner auger, separator, developer agitator, and paddle roller mix and transport
the developer and toner. The development power pack applies development bias
to the development roller.
6-64
30 July 2004
Toner Supply
1
6
5
B140D946.WMF
1. Toner Supply Motor

3. Toner Agitator
4. Toner Supply Roller
5. Toner Hopper
6. Toner End Sensor
The toner supply roller carries toner from front to back in the hopper and into the
development unit.
The toner supply motor rotates the toner bottle to supply toner. The cap of the
bottle seals itself immediately when the toner bottle is removed from its holder.
A toner recycling system separates waste toner from toner that can be re-used.
Reusable toner is carried to the development unit, and waste toner is sent to the
waste toner bottle.
6-65
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
2. Toner Bottle
30 July 2004
6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[C]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[A]
B140D947.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
Paddle roller
Development roller
Development roller sleeve
Doctor blade
OPC drum
Photocopying Process> Development> Dual-component Development)
6-66
30 July 2004
6.9.3 DEVELOPER/TONER MIXING (AGITATION)
[E]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[F]
[D]
B140D948.WMF
Development roller
Doctor blade
Backspill plate
Agitator
Mixing vanes
Auger
Photocopying Process> Development> Crossmixing)
6-67
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
30 July 2004
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B140D949.WMF
Development power pack [A] applies 550V through terminal [B] to the shaft [C] of
the development roller [D]
Bias is also applied to the lower casing to prevent toner from being attracted back
from the drum.
6-68
30 July 2004
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY
[B]
[A]
[C]
B140D950.WMF
When the toner supply clutch turns on, the agitator [B] mixes the toner in the
hopper and sends it to the toner supply roller [C].
Toner is caught in the grooves in the toner supply roller. Then, as the grooves turn
past the opening, the toner falls into the development unit.
6-69
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
The ID sensor and TD sensor control toner density. The output of these two
sensors determines when to switch the toner supply clutch [A] on. The clutch
transfers drive from the development motor to the toner supply mechanism.
30 July 2004
6.9.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT DRIVE AND VENTILATION
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B140D951.WMF
[F]
B140D952.WMF
The development motor [A] (a dc motor) drives the following units through three
drive shafts: toner separation unit [B], toner supply unit [C], and development unit
[D].
The knob [E] attached to the paddle roller can be rotated in one direction only. Use
this knob just after adding new developer, to apply an even coating of developer to
the development roller sleeve.
Two cooling fans [F] above the bypass tray draw in air to cool the development
unit. Both fans switch on when the drum motor switches on, then both switch off
110 seconds after the drum motor switches off.
6-70
30 July 2004
6.9.7 TONER END SENSOR
[A]
B140D953.WMF
The toner end sensor [A], a piezoelectric sensor (a sensor sensitive to pressure) is
attached to the toner hopper.
6.9.8 SHUTTER MECHANISM

[C]
Detailed
Descriptions
[D]
[B]
[A]
B140D954.WMF
When the toner bottle holder is opened, a self-sealing shutter prevents toner spill.
The top of the shutter [A] has a semi-circular opening [B]. Normally, toner from the
toner bottle [C] flows through this opening into the hopper below.
However, pulling out the shutter cover [D] closes the cover automatically to prevent
toner spill from the hopper.
6-71
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
6.9.9 TONER BOTTLE SUPPLY AND VENTILATION

[C]
[A]
[B]
B140D955.WMF
[D]
B140D956.WMF
The toner supply motor [A] (a dc motor) and gears [B] rotate the toner bottle [C].
The toner cooling fan [D] (below the operation panel) ventilates the area around the
bottle. This fan always switches off and on with the polygonal mirror motor.
6-72
30 July 2004
6.9.10 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL

There are two toner supply modes: Sensor Control and Image Pixel Count. The
mode can be changed with SP2208-001 (Toner Supply Mode). The factory setting
is sensor control mode. This setting automatically changes if the TD sensor or ID
sensor is defective.
Sensor Control Mode

In sensor control mode, the machine uses the outputs of the TD sensor and the ID
sensor.
Every copy, the following occurs.
1. The TD sensor reads the density of the toner in the developer once every copy
cycle, after the trailing edge of the image passes the development roller, and
outputs this reading as Vt. The current Vt value can be displayed with SP2223001 (Vt display).
2. For every copy, Vt (TD sensor output) is subtracted from Vref (the targeted
control reference voltage for the TD sensor) to set the value of GAIN (0, 1, 2,
3, or 4).
3. The following equation is used to calculate how long the toner supply clutch
switches on.
GAIN x Image Pixel Count x Target Density
+ Clutch Startup Time
Toner Supply Rate
Factor
GAIN
Image Pixel Count
Target Density
Toner Supply Rate
Clutch Startup Time
Description
With GAIN = 0, Clutch On Time is 0 ms
The density for every dot in the output data for the page is
calculated. Example: 255 for A3 all black, for comparison.
0.7 mg/cm2
850 mg/s This default setting can be adjusted with SP2209
Toner Supply Rate
16 ms
The actual time required for the toner to arrive at the
hopper after the clutch switches on.
If we substitute the default settings, then:

GAIN x Image Pixel Count x 0.7 mg/cm2
850 mg/s
+ 16 ms
B140D958.WMF
But if GAIN is 0, the +16 ms part of the equation is not used, and the time interval
that the clutch is turned on becomes zero.
6-73
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D957.WMF
30 July 2004
At the end of the job, if Vref has not been updated for 10 copies or more, the
following occurs:
1. Vref is updated, as follows (also done just after the machine is switched on):
The charge corona and laser diode write the ID sensor pattern on the drum.
The ID sensor reads the reflectivity of the ID sensor pattern and outputs this
reading as Vsp.
The ID sensor also reads the reflectivity of the bare surface of the drum and
outputs this reading as Vsg.
NOTE: 1) The 10 copy interval can be extended with SP2210-001 (ID Sensor
Pattern Interval).
2) SP2507-002 (ID Sensor Interval Page Setting) is available for
customers who are concerned about changes in toner density during
long copy jobs and may want to specify an interval to force creating
and reading the ID sensor pattern. However, enabling this SP will
pause copying for 2 or 3 seconds every time the ID sensor pattern is
created and read.
2. The CPU uses the Vsp/Vsg readings to calculate a new value for Vref (TD
sensor reference voltage).
3. Finally, Vt and Vref are compared. If Vt is higher than Vref, the CPU switches
on the toner supply clutch to supply more toner to the development unit.
Pixel Count Toner Supply Mode

This mode should only be used as a temporary countermeasure while waiting for
replacement parts, such as a TD sensor.
For each copy, the CPU adds up the image data value of each pixel and converts
the sum to a value between 0 and 255 (0 = blank page, 255= black page).
The toner supply clutch on time is calculated using the same formula, but the GAIN
value is fixed at 0.7.
6-74
30 July 2004
TD Sensor Initialization
The TD sensor must be initialized with SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting) at the
following times:
The first time the development unit is filled with developer
Every time the developer is replaced.
The sensor control voltage is adjusted until the output is 3.00.1V. Then, after
setting the control voltage, Vt is sampled 100 times, these samplings are averaged,
then the average is used to set the standard value for Vt.
NOTE: 1) After developer is replaced, you must execute SP2801.
2) After the TD sensor is replaced, you must execute SP2801.
3) After a partially used development unit from another machine is
installed, you must use SP2220 (Vref Manual Setting) to enter the Vref
value for that unit, and use SP2906-001 (TD Sensor Control Voltage
Setting) to enter the TD sensor control voltage.
4) These initial values are stored in NVRAM. Before replacing the NVRAM,
print an SMC report so you can re-enter these settings manually after
the NVRAM is replaced.
Determining Vref
At certain intervals (see Sensor Control Mode, step 4), the ID sensor reads the
bare drum and the ID sensor pattern on the drum.
ID sensor pattern creation parameters depend on whether automatic process

control is switched on or off with SP3901-001 (Auto Process Control).
If automatic process control is switched on:
Charge corona grid voltage: Set automatically for the existing conditions around
the drum.
LD power: The value Vh is used to adjust the laser power. The laser diode writes
the Vh halftone pattern on the drum. The reading from this pattern is Vh.
Development bias: The potential sensor checks the bias voltage when the ID
sensor pattern is created (target voltage: -230V) and boosts the voltage by 280,
the voltage set for SP2201-004 (ID Sensor Pattern Development Potential), to
bring the bias to the target voltage of 510.
If automatic process control is switched off:
Charge corona grid voltage: Set to 800V, the default setting for SP2001-002 (ID
Sensor Pattern: Adj. to Applied Voltage).
LD power: 185 W (target drum potential 130V)
Development bias: -360V, default for SP2201 002 (ID Sensor Pattern: Adj. to
Applied Voltage).
6-75
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Vref is calculated from Vsp and Vsg as explained in the Process Control section of
the manual.
30 July 2004
Toner Supply without ID Sensor and TD Sensors

Toner supply can continue even if either or both sensors fails:
Failed Sensor
TD sensor
ID sensor
TD and ID sensors
Toner Supply Method

ID sensor + Image Pixel Count
TD sensor (but Vref is nor updated)
Image Pixel Count
Abnormal TD Sensor Output

If this occurs, toner supply is controlled using pixel count and Vsp/Vsg.
Abnormal output detected during initialization of the developer: An SC is
logged and SP2906 (TD Sensor Control Voltage & Check) will display 0.00V.
During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD sensor output voltage (Vt) is 2.5
volts or higher even though the control voltage is set to the minimum value
(PWM = 0). The machine logs SC341 TD Sensor Adjustment Error 1.
During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD sensor output voltage (Vt) does
not come in the target range (3.0 0.1V) within 20 seconds. The machine logs
SC342.
Abnormal output detected during copying: If one of the following conditions is
detected more than 10 times consecutively:
Then SC340 (TD Sensor Output Error) is logged.
Abnormal ID Sensor Output

Abnormal output detected during process control at power-on: SC353 or
SC354 is issued. Toner supply during copying will then be controlled using the TD
sensor only, until the machine is repaired.
Abnormal output detected when updating Vref: SC350, 351, or 352 is issued,
and Vref is not updated (the machine uses the current value).
6-76
30 July 2004
Toner End Detection

The toner end sensor is checked every copy.
Toner near end. When the toner end sensor remains on for two consecutive
pages, the toner supply motor turns on for 1.1 s. If the toner supply motor has
turned on more than 30 times during the last 100 prints, the Toner Near End
warning is issued. The warning is cleared if the toner end sensor turns off.
Toner end. If the toner end sensor remains on for about 1,000 copies (A4 size
with 6% coverage), the "Toner End warning is issued. If the toner end sensor
switches off twice consecutively, the toner end sensor copy counter is reset to
zero.
Toner End Recovery

If the front door is opened and closed while a toner near end or toner end condition
exists, the machine attempts to recover using measurements from the toner end
sensor and TD sensor, based on the possibility that the toner bottle has been
replaced.
1. The drum development motor, charge grid, and development bias switch on.
3. If the toner end sensor is OFF, i.e. there is toner in the hopper, the CPU
compares Vt and Vref.
If Vt is less than or equal to Vref, there is sufficient toner in the development
unit. The CPU waits 20 s for the toner in the developer to mix evenly, the
above components switch off, and the machine is released from the toner
end or toner near end status.
If Vt is more than Vref, the CPU turns on the toner supply clutch for 1 s again
until Vt becomes less than or equal to Vref.
If the toner end sensor output remains on even after seven attempts of the
above procedure, the components switch off and the machine remains in the
Toner End status.
6-77
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
2. The toner supply motor switches on for 1.1 s, the toner supply clutch switches
on for 1 s, and the CPU checks the toner end sensor output.
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
30 July 2004
6.10 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.10.1 OVERVIEW
9
1
6
3
5
4
B140D959.WMF
1. Transfer Roller
6. Cleaning Blade
2. Transfer Belt Drive Roller
7. Drive Roller
3. Belt Lift Lever
8. Cleaning Roller
4. Waste Toner Agitator
9. Transfer Belt
5. Waste Toner Collection Coil

A transfer belt system transfers the image from the OPC drum to paper.
A solenoid lifts the belt against the OPC drum at the correct time.
The transfer belt system is driven by the drum motor, through a shaft and a gear.
A cleaning blade and a cleaning roller clean the surface of the transfer belt.
Easy access to the transfer belt from behind the front door allows quick removal of
paper jams.
A heater near the transfer belt unit ensures that the area around the belt is always
dry.
6-78
30 July 2004
6.10.2 TRANSFER BELT LIFT

Mechanism
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B140D960.WMF
The transfer belt lift solenoid [A] lifts the belt into contact with the drum using the
link [B], which is connected to the front [C] and rear [D] belt lift levers.
This mechanism raises the transfer belt unit against the OPC drum only when
needed, and keeps it separated at all other times because:
The transfer belt is between the drum unit and the ID sensor, so it would rub off
the ID sensor pattern if it remained in contact with the drum.
Allowing toner to transfer to the belt when making sensor patterns would
increase the load on the transfer roller cleaning blade.
The transfer belt would cause the drum to wear, if it were allowed to remain in
contact with the drum.
6-79
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Springs attached to the front of the solenoid reduce the load on the solenoid as it
lifts the drum.
30 July 2004
Timing
[B]
[C]
[A]
B140D961.WMF
[E]
8 mm
[D]
B140D962.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
Registration roller
Transfer belt
OPC drum
Front and back levers
Nip width (about 8 mm)
The transfer belt stays away from the OPC drum until 500 ms after the drum motor
starts. Then the transfer belt lift solenoid switches on to lift the belt.
At the end of the job, the solenoid switches off, and the transfer belt unit lowers
away from the drum.
6-80
30 July 2004
6.10.3 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE
[C]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[A]
[G]
[D]
B140D963.WMF
The transfer power pack [A], inside the transfer belt unit, applies the following
charges:
Transfer Roller: Max. +7.0 kV through terminal [B] to the transfer roller [C].
Cleaning Roller: About +1.0 kV max. through terminal [D] to the cleaning
roller [E].
Detailed
Descriptions
Drive rollers [F, G] are grounded so that the cleaning unit can clean the belt easily.
6-81
manuals4you.com
30 July 2004
6.10.4 TRANSFER CURRENT SETTINGS

Here is a list of the default current settings for each paper feed station.
SP No.
SP2301-001
SP2301-002
SP2301-003
SP2301-004
SP2301-005
SP2301-006
SP2301-007
SP2301-008
SP2301-009
SP2301-010
SP2301-011
Station/Mode
Trays 1, 2, 3: Front Side
Trays 1, 2, 3: Back Side
Bypass: Front Side
Postcard: Front Side
Paper Interval
Tab Paper
Thick Paper: Front Side
OHP: Front Side
Tracing Paper: Front Side
Image Leading Edge
Image Trailing Edge
Transfer Current (Initial Value)

80 A
80 A
75 A
165 A
15 A
75 A
120 A
75 A
120 A
65 A
65 A
NOTE: 1) For postcards, use the by-pass tray and set the side fences for A6
width.
2) The charge for cleaning is applied even during the interval between
sheets of copy paper.
3) At the following times, the transfer roller output changes to 2.6 kV, and
the cleaning roller output is fixed at 1.0 kV:
When the job ends
Whenever the drum motor is turning, except during copying and during
process control
6-82
30 July 2004
6.10.5 TRANSFER CURRENT CIRCUIT
[D]
[B]
I3
[C]
It
I2
[D]
I1
[F]
[E]
[A]
B140D964.WMF
The transfer power pack does the following:

Monitors the currents I1 and I2
Adjusts its output (It) to keep the current I3 constant, regardless of changes in
temperature or humidity which can affect the surface resistance of the paper.
A varistor [E] keeps the voltage at the cleaning roller constant [F].
6-83
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]: Transfer power pack

[B]: Transfer roller
[C]: Nip between drum and transfer belt
[D]: Drive rollers
30 July 2004
6.10.6 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE AND PAPER TRANSPORT
[B]
[C]
[A]
B140D965.WMF
The drum motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] through belts and gears.
The transfer belt by its electrostatic charge attracts the paper [B], so a transport fan
is not required.
At the turn in the transfer belt, the transfer belt drive roller [C] discharges the belt to
reduce paper attraction, and the paper separates from the belt as a result of its
own stiffness.
The tapered parts [D] at both ends of the roller [E] help keep the transfer belt [F] in
the center, so that it does not run off the rollers.
[F]
[D]
[E]
B140D966.WMF
6-84
30 July 2004
6.10.7 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING
[C]
[B]
[A]
B140D967.WMF
[D]
B140D968.WMF
Toner collects on the transfer belt in the following cases. This toner causes
streaking on the reverse sides of copies.
As a result of a paper jam
If the by-pass feed tray side fences are set in the wrong position
The cleaning roller [A] has a positive charge, so it can collect negatively charged
toner and paper dust from the transfer belt [B]. The cleaning roller always contacts
the transfer belt.
The cleaning blade [C] scrapes toner off the cleaning roller and drops it onto the
agitator plate [D]. The plate [D] moves the toner into the collection coil [E]. The coil
takes the toner to the toner collection bottle.
6-85
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
[E]
30 July 2004
6.10.8 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[A]
B140D969.WMF
The anti-condensation heater [A] is directly below the transfer belt drive roller.
This anti-condensation heater turns on automatically at the following times:
When the main power switch is turned off
When the machine enters auto off mode
6-86
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
6.11 PAPER FEED

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1. Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
9. By-pass Tray
2. Left Tray Paper Sensor
10. Relay Sensor
11. Lower Relay Roller
4. 3rd Paper Size Switch
12. Pick Up Roller
13. Feed Roller
6. Registration Roller
14. Grip Roller
15. Paper Feed Sensor
8. Upper Relay Roller
16. Separation Roller
NOTE: Items (12)~(16) comprise the standard FRR feed system, which is used for
Trays 1, 2, and 3. This machine uses motor on/off time (not clutches) to
control paper feed.
6-87
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D970.WMF
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
Tray Capacities
The machine has three built-in paper trays:
Tandem LCT (Tray 1). 1550 + 1550 sheets
Universal Tray (Tray 2) 550 sheets
Universal Tray (Tray 3) 550 sheets
The machine also has a by-pass feed tray which can hold 100 sheets (T-6200).
Built-in Feed Stations
Paper feed and separation. Standard FRR system with a torque limiter for
paper separation and feed. Each tray has an independent stepper motor to drive
its paper feed mechanisms.
Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller
(FRR)
Tray Lift motors. Provided for each tray, easily disengage when a tray is
removed and engage once again when the tray is re-installed. In trays 2 and 3,
the lift of the motors on the bottom plates is also used for paper near-end
detection.
Tandem tray paper end. A sensor mounted near the top of the right rail signals
paper near end and another sensor under the bottom tray signals paper end after
the last sheet is fed. Three paper height sensors, mounted on the left rail, are
actuated as the actuator rises with the bottom plate. The combinations of
actuating and de-actuating these sensors as the plate rises are used to signal
the paper supply display on the operation panel.
Paper size detection. For the tandem tray (Tray 1), an SP setting is required
(SP 5959 001). For the universal trays (Tray 2, 3), there is a 5-step manual
switch on each tray.
Vertical Transport. A grip roller at each feed station feeds the paper into the
vertical paper path.
Heaters. Two anti-condensation heaters are provided for the built-in paper feed
stations.
By-pass Feed
Capacity: 100 sheets.
Paper feed and separation: Standard FRR system with a torque limiter for
paper separation and feed. By-pass tray motor and clutch.
Paper end detection: Photointerrupter and feeler.
Size detection: Side fence is used for width detection, registration sensor pulse
count is used for length detection.
Thick paper feed: By-pass feed clutch switches on twice.
Paper Registration
Paper is guided to the registration roller from five sources: the 3 built-in paper
trays, 1 by-pass tray, and 1 duplex tray.
There is a mylar strip over the entire length of the registration roller.
Jam Removal
Pulling out a paper tray releases the pressure on the rollers, making it easy to
remove paper jams.
6-88
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
6.11.2 DRIVE
[A]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[H]
An independent paper feed motor [A] drives the rollers in each tray. It also drives
grip rollers [B], which pull the paper out of the tray. The mechanism is identical for
each tray.
A vertical transport sensor [C] at each feed station detects paper jams.
The paper feed motors on the trays drive the vertical transport rollers, which are
opposite each feed station (not shown here).
The lower relay motor [D] drives the lower relay roller [E], halfway between trays 1
and 2. The relay motor is added here due to the length of the paper path.
The upper relay roller [F] feeds each sheet to the registration roller. The by-pass
feed motor (not shown here) drives the upper relay roller [F].
The relay sensor [G], at the top of the vertical transport path, triggers the start of
image exposure on the OPC drum, and detects jams in the paper path.
The transport guide plate [H] swings against the side of the machine and locks in
place.
6-89
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D971.WMF
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
6.11.3 TRAY AND PAPER LIFT MECHANISM TRAY 2,3

Bottom Plate Lift
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B140D972.WMF
Tray lift motor [A]

bottom plate).
Coupling [B]
Pin [C]
Shaft [D]
Lift arm [E] (under the
The universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) are not provided with near end sensors. The
pulse count of the tray lift motor is used to signal near end.
6-90
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
Lift Sensor
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B140D973.WMF
[I]
[F]
[G]
[H]
When the tray lift motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid [A] turns on, and pick-up
roller [B] lowers.
When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, actuator [C] on
the pick-up roller support [D] activates the tray lift sensor [E], and the lift motor
stops.
After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers and the lift sensor is deactivated. Then the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor is activated again.
When the tray is drawn out of the feed unit: gear [F] disengages pin [G] on shaft [H],
then the tray bottom plate [I] drops by its own weight.
6-91
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D974.WMF
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
6.11.4 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM

Paper Feed and Separation: No Paper Present
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
B140D975.WMF
While waiting for the first sheet to feed and between sheets, the feed roller [A] must
not rotate. However, the grip roller [B] must turn, so that any paper coming up the
vertical transport path continues to feed. To do this, the paper feed motor [C]
rotates in reverse. The separation roller [D] is free to rotate in the direction shown
by the arrow, because the separation roller solenoid is off.
When the feed motor reverses:
Feed roller [A]
No rotation
Separation roller [D]
Free to rotate
Grip roller [B]
Rotates
6-92
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
Paper Feed and Separation
[I]
[C]
[G]
[H]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[B]
B140D976.WMFF
When the paper feed station is selected and the start key is pressed, the following
mechanisms activate:
Separation roller solenoid [A] separation roller [B] contacts feed roller [E]
Pick-up solenoid [C] pick-up roller [F] lowers to contact the paper
Paper feed motor [D] turns feed roller [E] turns pick-up roller [F] via
gear [G]
When the paper feed sensor [H] detects the leading edge of the paper:
Pick-up solenoid [C] switches off, and pick-up roller [F] lifts.
The feed roller [E] then feeds the sheet to the registration roller.
Note the three one-way clutches [I]: One for the grip roller, one for the feed roller,
and one for the separation roller.
When the feed motor rotates forward:
Feed roller
Rotates
Separation roller
Rotates in accordance with the FRR principle

Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward
and Reverse Roller (FRR)
Grip roller
Rotates
6-93
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
If a paper feed station is not selected, its separation roller solenoid [A] stays off and
the separation roller [B] can turn freely in the opposite direction to feed paper.
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
Separation Roller Release Mechanism
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
B140D977.WMF
B140D978.WMF
Normally, the separation roller [A] and feed roller [B] are not in contact. However,
when the feed station is selected, the separation roller solenoid [C] pushes the
separation roller against the feed roller.
This mechanism has these advantages:
When the paper feed motor turns on, the separation roller rotates. If the
separation roller is away from the feed roller, it reduces the load on the paper
feed motor and drive mechanism, and it also reduces wear to the rubber surface
of the separation roller caused by friction between the separation roller and the
feed roller.
After a job, paper sometimes remains between the feed and separation rollers. If
the paper tray is pulled out of the machine, this paper might be torn if the two
rollers do not separate.
The user can easily pull out jammed paper between the feed and separation
rollers if the separation roller is away from the feed roller.
Normally, the feed and separation roller separate when the separation roller
solenoid switches off.
However, if the rollers stick together after paper passes between them, the
separation roller could rotate the feed roller in reverse before the motor and
solenoid switch off. To prevent this, if the feed roller starts to reverse, a small brake
arm [D] on the feed roller shaft rotates down, strikes a stopper, and drives the feed
roller forward slightly to separate it from the reverse roller below.
The rollers are composed of rubber and may stick occasionally. This mechanism
prevents excessive wear on the rollers.
6-94
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
6.11.5 PAPER NEAR-END AND PAPER END TRAYS 2 AND 3
[A]
[B]
B140D979.WMF
The machine detects paper near end by counting the number of pulses the motor
makes when lifting the bottom plate.
Detailed
Descriptions
The paper end sensor [A] receives light reflected from the paper below [B] until the
last sheet has been fed. Then, paper end is detected.
6-95
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
6.11.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
The tandem tray does not have paper size detection switches. Every time the
paper size is changed by moving the front and back fences, you must enter the
selected paper size using SP5959-001.
[A]
[B]
Universal Cassettes (Tray 2, 3)
The paper size switch [A] detects the
paper size with 5 microswitches. The
actuator plate [B], attached to the rear
of the paper tray, actuates the paper
size switch.
The output from the sensor depends on
the position of the dial, as shown in the
table.
Sensor Outputs
01111
00111
10011
01001
00100
00010
00001
10000
11000
11100
11110
0: Actuated
A4/A3 Version
A3 SEF
81/4" x 13" SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
81/2" x 13" SEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
B140D980.WMF
LT/DLT Version
11" x 17" SEF
81/2" x 14" SEF
81/2" x 11" SEF
81/2" x 11" LEF
51/2" x 81/2" SEF
51/2" x 81/2" LEF
8" x 101/2" SEF
71/4" x 10" SEF
Set by SP 5129
Not used
*
1: Deactuated
SP5129: The machine can detect 8" x 13" (default), 8" x 13", or 8" x 13".
If the switch is set to the asterisk (*), a range of paper sizes (illustrated below) can
be selected, but the size must be entered with a UP mode.
Special Size Setting Range
210 ~ 432 mm (8.3~17")
148 ~ 297 mm (5.8~11.7")

Direction of Feed
B140D981.WMF
6-96
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
6.11.7 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS
[A]
[B]
B140D982.WMF
This anti-condensation heater turns on automatically at the following times:

When the main power switch is turned off
When the machine enters auto off mode
6-97
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Two heaters, one below the tandem tray [A] and one below the bottom tray [B],
prevent condensation around the feed rollers and keep paper dry.
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
6.11.8 TANDEM TRAY TRAY 1

Overview
[B]
[A]
B140D983.WMF
1,550 sheets of paper can be set in each of the left [A] and right trays [B]. Paper is
fed from the right tray. When the paper in the right tray runs out, the paper in the
left tray automatically transfers to the right tray. After the paper transfers to the right
tray, paper feeding resumes.
Normally, both the right and the left trays are joined together. However, during
copying, if there is no paper in the left tray, the left tray can be pulled out to load
paper. During that time, the right tray stays in the machine and paper feed
continues.
6-98
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray
[A]
[B]
[C]
B140D984.WMF
B140D985.WMF
[A]
[D]
When there is paper in the left tray:

Lock lever [A] in the left tray catches the pin [B] in the right tray.
During copying, if there is no paper in the left tray:
Right tray lock solenoid [C] turns on, which releases lock lever [A].
The left tray can now be pulled out to load paper, even while paper is being
fed into the machine from the right tray.
When the tandem tray is drawn out fully:
Projection [D] pushes up lock lever [A] so that both trays separate. This
makes paper loading easier.
6-99
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D986.WMF
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection

The machine detects when the 1st tray has been placed in the machine by
monitoring the tray set signal through the connector.
[F]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[D]
[I]
[A]
[E]
[H]
B140D987.WMF
When the machine detects that the tray is in the machine, the right tray paper
sensor [A] (under the tray) checks whether there is paper in the right tandem tray.
NOTE: If sensor [A] was not present and the tray was empty, the bottom plate
would have to lift until the 1st tray lift paper end sensor (at the top of the
tray) detected that there was no paper, and this would waste several
seconds.
If paper is detected, the lift mechanism starts:
1st tray Lift motor [B] Coupling gear [C] Pin [D] on the lift shaft [E]
Wires [F] Slots at the ends of the tray support rods [G, H] Tray bottom
plate [I].
The tray goes up until both of the following occur:
The paper pushes up the pick-up roller and the lift sensor is activated
The paper end sensor at the top of the tray is deactivated.
6-100
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
[C]
[E]
[A]
[G]
[H]
[J]
[D]
[B]
[I]
[F]
Paper remaining: The amount of paper remaining in the tray is detected by which
combination of the three paper height sensors [A] are actuated by the actuator on
the left rail as the bottom plate rises.
With the actuator below paper height sensor 1 (the bottom sensor), no sensor is
actuated and the display indicates the tray is full.
When the actuator passes paper height sensor, the display indicates 50% of the
paper supply remaining.
When the actuator passes paper height sensor 2 (the middle sensor), the display
indicates 30% of the paper supply remaining.
When the actuator passes paper height sensor 3 (the top sensor), the display
does not change. This prevents the signal from returning to the off state, which
would indicate 100% of the paper remaining (the same state as when the sensor
is below paper sensor 1.
Paper near-end: Detected when the actuator [B] on the right rail activates the
paper near end sensor [C]. When the actuator passes this sensor, the display
indicates 10% of the paper supply remaining.
Paper end: After the last sheet feeds, the right tray paper sensor [D] below the
bottom of the tray actuates and signals paper end.
When paper runs out in the right tray, the stack must be moved across from the left
tray. To do that, the tray must first be lowered. The 1st tray lift motor [E] reverses
until actuator [B] activates the right tray down sensor [F].
When removing the tray manually, if paper is still present, the tray lowers under its
own weight as follows:
Coupling [G] separates from pin [H]
Tray bottom plate [I] moves down.
Damper [J] lets the tray bottom plate drop slowly.
6-101
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D988.WMF
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
Fence Drive
[D]
[A]
[C]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[B]
B140D989.WMF
The side fences [A] of the right tray open only when paper in the left tray goes to
the right tray.
The side fence solenoids [B] turn on to open the side fences, until the side fence
open sensors [C] activate.
After the stack has been moved into the right tray: The side fence solenoids turn off
to close the side fences, until the side fence close sensors [D] activate. Then, the
LCD prompts the user to set some paper in the left side of the tandem tray.
6-102
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
Rear Fence Drive

[E]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
B140D990.WMF
[G]
[F]
When the left tray paper sensor [A] detects paper but the right tray paper sensor
does not, the following happens.
Rear fence motor [B] (a DC motor, in the left tray) turns counter-clockwise
Rear fence [C] pushes the paper stack into the right tray.
When rear fence return sensor [D] detects the actuator on the rear fence,
motor [B] turns clockwise until rear fence HP sensor [E] detects the actuator.
While the rear fence is moving, the left tray lock solenoid [F] turns on and the lock
lever [G] locks the left tray.
6-103
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D991.WMF
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
Tray Side-to-side Positioning
[A]
[B]
B140D992.WMF
B140D993.WMF
When the feed tray is set in the paper feed unit, the side-to-side positioning plate
[A] presses the feed tray against the stopper [B]. By moving the positioning plate,
the tray position can be changed to adjust the side-to-side registration.
6-104
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
6.11.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM TRAYS 1 TO 3
[B]
[A]
B140D994.WMF
Detailed
Descriptions
When the tray is placed in the paper feed unit, the lock lever [A] drops behind the
lock plate [B] on the support bracket to lock the tray in the proper position.
6-105
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
6.11.10 BY-PASS TRAY

By-pass Feed and Separation
[A]
[C]
[B]
[E]
B140D995.WMF
[D]
[F]
B140D996.WMF
The by-pass tray [A] opens from the right side of the machine.
By-pass feed motor [B] By-pass feed clutch [C] Pick-up roller [D] (pick-up
solenoid see the next page) Feed roller [E] and separation roller [F]
The by-pass tray uses a standard FRR feed system.
(
Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller (FRR)
or By-pass Feed Tray)
NOTE: The direction of feed in the by-pass tray is opposite from that of the other
paper trays, so their parts (with the exception of the separation roller) are
not interchangeable.
6-106
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
By-pass Tray Paper End Detection
[A]
[B]
B140D997.WMF
Detailed
Descriptions
When the paper runs out, the paper end feeler [A] drops through the cutout in the
by-pass paper end sensor [B].
6-107
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
By-pass Paper Size Detection
[A]
[B]
B140D998.WMF
The positions of the side fences [A], connected to the by-pass paper size sensor
[B] determine the paper width.
Paper length is determined with pulse counts read from the registration sensor.
(
Handling Paper> Paper Feed> Paper Size Detection> By-pass Size
Detection)
NOTE: Use SP1007 (By-pass Feed Paper Size Display) to confirm the size of the
paper detected in the by-pass tray if paper is skewing during feeding.
The user can specify non-standard paper sizes for feeding from the by-pass tray.
The size must be within the range shown in the illustration.
140~432 mm (5.5" ~ 17")
100 ~ 300 mm (3.9" x 11.8")
B140D999.WMF
NOTE: SP1904-001~002 (By-pass Paper Size Selection): Use this to calibrate the
minimum and maximum size positions of the by-pass tray side fences.
Refer to Replacement and Adjustment> Paper Feed> By-pass Paper Size
Detector.
SP1905 (Thick Paper Bypass Tray): Use this to adjust the by-pass feed
clutch operation if thick paper often jams at the registration roller. See 5.
Service Tables for details.
6-108
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
6.11.11 PAPER REGISTRATION

Overview
[A]
[E]
[B]
[H]
[D]
[F]
[C]
[G]
The registration rollers [A] and registration sensor [B] handle paper fed from four
directions:
Tandem tray and universal trays below [C]
Duplex unit [D]
By-pass tray [E]
Optional LCT [F]
The grip rollers [G] feed paper from the trays into the vertical transport path to the
registration rollers.
The upper relay roller [H] feeds all paper exiting the vertical transport path. It also
feeds paper from the duplex unit and LCT.
The by-pass tray feeds paper directly to the registration rollers.
6-109
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B140D9A1.WMF
PAPER FEED
30 July 2004
Paper Registration Drive
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B140D9A2.WMF
When the registration sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the paper, the
registration motor [B] stops the paper at the registration rollers [C, D] for a short
while to correct the skew in the paper.
Mylar [E] touches the upper surface of roller [C]. This mylar removes dust from the
paper while it passes the registration rollers.
NOTE: Use SP1003 (Registration Buckle Adjustment) to adjust the registration
motor timing for each paper feed station or the duplex tray. For details see
5. Service Tables.
6-110
30 July 2004
PAPER FEED
Jam Removal at Paper Registration
[C]
[B]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[G]
[A]
B140D9A3.WMF
Guide plate solenoid [B] turns on Lever [C] raises Lock lever [D] (on the guide
plate) releases from pin [E] (on the rear side frame) Guide plate [A] falls open
Paper coming along the feed path is diverted into the duplex tray.
Actuator [F] on the guide plate activates the guide plate position sensor [G] when
the guide plate opens.
The user must remove jammed paper in the feed path, the sheet in the duplex tray,
and manually close the guide plate.
To prevent the guide plate from being left open, if the guide plate position sensor is
activated, copying is disabled and a caution is displayed on the LCD panel.
6-111
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
If a paper misfeed occurs between the vertical transport rollers and the registration
rollers, the next sheet is already on its way up from the paper tray, and must be
stopped, or there will be a pile-up of jammed paper.
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
30 July 2004
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

6.12.1 OVERVIEW
14
15
16
3
4
13
12
6
11
10
8
B140D001.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
*1
*2
*3
*4
Thermistor (Center) *1
Thermostats *2
Thermistors *3
Web Cleaning Unit
Pressure Spring
Entrance Guide Plate
Pressure Roller
Pressure Arm
9. Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller

10. Fusing Exit Sensor
11. Exit Junction Gate
12. Paper Exit Sensor
13. Exit Unit Entrance Sensor
14. Hot Roller Strippers
15. Hot Roller
16. Fusing Lamps *4
Non-contact thermistor (B064 Series only)

Non-contact thermostats (B064 Series x2, B140 Series x3).
Contact thermistors (B064 Series x1 end, B0140 Series x 2, end and center)
B064 Series x2, B140 Series x3
The fusing unit is a hot roller/pressure roller system.
B064 Series
Two 550W fusing lamps switch on and off at the same time to keep the hot roller
temperature steady at 185C.
The center thermistor (1) (not in direct contact with the hot roller) controls the
temperature at the center of the hot roller. The end thermistor (3) directly contacts
the hot roller surface and prevents overheating. The two thermostats (2) also
prevent overheating.
6-112
30 July 2004
B140 Series
Many changes were made to make sure that the fusing unit can get to the target
operation temperature in 30 seconds or less.
There are three fusing lamps:
650 W Fusing Lamp: Applies heat to the center of the hot roller.
550 W Fusing Lamp: Applies heat to the ends of the hot roller.
280 W Fusing Lamp: Also applies heat to the ends of the hot roller, but only
during the warmup (after the machine is turned on, or when it recovers from the
energy save mode).
NOTE: Only the 650 W and 550 W fusing lamps turn on and off to keep the hot
roller temperature steady at 185C.
These changes were made to the hot roller and the pressure roller:
To make the roller surface become hot more quickly, the thickness and diameter
of the hot roller were decreased.
The pressure roller surface was changed to a bubble-type material. This gives
the correct nip width between the hot roller and the pressure roller.
The center and end thermistors touch the hot roller. They monitor the temperature
of the hot roller and give feedback for fusing-temperature control.
The thermistor at the center of the hot roller makes temperature detection better.
But its service life is shorter because it always touches the hot roller. For more, see
section 2. Preventive Maintenance.
The three thermostats also monitor the temperature of the hot roller, to prevent
overheating. These thermostats do not touch the hot roller.
The web cleaning unit (web roller, cleaning roller, and take up roller) applies a light
coat of silicone oil to the hot roller to prevent toner and paper dust from sticking to
the hot roller.
The fusing exit sensor detects concertina jams at the fusing unit exit. This sensor is
required because the user may not see this type of jam in the machine when
removing a jam at the exit.
The fusing unit and exit unit can be separated, making it easier to service.
6-113
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Both Series
30 July 2004
6.12.2 FUSING MECHANISM

[F]
B064 Series
[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140D9A4.WMF
The hot roller [A] and pressure roller [B] fuse the toner to the paper.
The hot roller, constructed of soft silicone rubber, is about 0.3 mm thick and coated
with a thin coat of Teflon (30 ).
Two fusing lamps [C] (550 W) are inside the hot roller.
Two thermostats [D] are positioned above the hot roller near the center.
One thermistor [E] is also positioned above the hot roller near the center.
Another thermistor [F] is in contact with the end of the hot roller.
Thermistors
Center (non-contact) thermistor
End (contact) thermistor
Thermostats*1
Center (non-contact) thermostats
*1
Temperature control
Overheating protection
If the thermostats trigger an alert, the thermostat requires replacement.
A fusing exit sensor, located between the hot roller and paper exit roller, detects
paper jams inside the fusing unit.
6-114
30 July 2004
B140 Series
[F]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140D003.WMF
The hot roller [A] and pressure roller [B] fuse the toner to the paper.
The hot roller, made of soft silicone rubber, has a thin layer of Teflon on the surface.
There are three fusing lamps [C] in the hot roller.
There are three thermostats [D] above the hot roller, near the center.
Another thermistor [F] touches the end of the hot roller.
Thermistors
Center (contact) thermistor
End (contact) thermistor
Thermostats*1
Center (non-contact) thermostats
*1
Temperature control
Temperature control
If the thermostats trigger an alert, the thermostats must be replaced.
6-115
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
One thermistor [E] touches the hot roller near the center.
30 July 2004
6.12.3 PRESSURE ROLLER

B064 Series
[D]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[F]
[A]
B140D9A5.WMF
Heavy springs [A], attached to pressure arms [B] below both ends of the pressure
roller [C], keep the roller pressed against the hot roller [D] above.
Release the springs [E] in order to release the pressure from the rollers for
maintenance.
Two holes [F] are provided on each pressure arm for the springs.
NOTE: Normally, the springs should be attached to the lower holes. Attaching the
springs to the upper holes exerts less pressure on the hot roller. Attach the
springs to the upper holes only for especially thin paper.
6-116
30 July 2004
B140 Series
5
10
6
8
11
4
3
B140D002.WMF
While the machine is turned on:

The fusing pressure release motor [1] comes on and turns the cams [2] until the
cam position actuator [3] is at the home position. This turns the cams down and
pushes the pressure arms [4] below the ends of the pressure roller [5].
This expands the heavy springs [6] and pulls the pressure roller away from the
hot roller [7].
When a job starts:
The pressure release motor turns on.
The vertical worm gear [8] turns the sequence of gears [9], and this turns the
cam shaft [10].
The cam shaft turns the actuator into the gap in the fusing pressure release HP
sensor [11].
The actuator goes out of the gap in the fusing pressure release HP sensor when
the cam is in the up position. This turns the motor off. This lets the heavy
springs pull the pressure roller against the hot roller.
When the job ends and the machine goes back to the ready condition:
The pressure release motor comes on again and turns the cams to the down
position. This pulls the pressure roller away from the hot roller.
When the cams are in the 'down' position again, and the actuator goes out of the
gap, the sensor turns the motor off.
At paper jam or SC error:
The pressure roller is again pulled away from the hot roller.
6-117
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
This mechanism makes sure that the hot roller and pressure roller touch only when
the machine makes copies. This prevents distortion of the pressure roller.
30 July 2004
6.12.4 HOT ROLLER CLEANING

Overview
[A]
[B]
[C]
B140D9A6.WMF
The cleaning web is saturated with silicone oil.

Inside the web cleaning unit, the web take-up roller [A] pulls the web from the web
supply roller [B] past the cleaning roller [C]. The cleaning roller is pressed against
the hot roller.
6-118
30 July 2004
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
B140D9A7.WMF
Web Drive
The web motor drives the web supply roller [A] and web take-up roller [B]. The web
motor switches on for 0.8 to 2.8 s at 15 s intervals during copying.
The machine monitors how much of the roll has been fed since it was installed. The
setting of SP1902-004 (Fusing Web Motor Control) determines the amount of web
remaining on the web roll when the near end alert is issued. (The default setting is
after 80% of the web has been used, which is about 266K A4 LEF.)
Web End
A light-tension spring holds the feeler [C] against the top of the feed roll. When the
roll runs out, the actuator on the end of the feeler [D] enters the web end sensor [E].
When all of the web has been used (after about another 30k copies), the actuator
rotates, its feeler actuates the web end sensor, and SC550 (Fusing Unit Web End)
is logged. After replacing the web with a new one, reset SP1902-001 to 0 to
release SC550.
6-119
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Web Near-end
30 July 2004
6.12.5 FUSING UNIT ENTRANCE GUIDE
[A]
B140D9A8.WMF
The height of the entrance guide [A] can be adjusted.

Normal or thick paper. For normal or thick paper, the guide should be up with
the screws in the outer holes (this is the standard or default position). Thick
paper does not bend easily and is less likely to crease. The standard position
also allows direct access to the gap between the hot roller and pressure roller.
This prevents thick paper from buckling against the hot roller, which can lead to
blurring at the leading edge of the copy.
Thin paper. If wrinkling occurs with thin paper, adjust the guide down by
removing both screws and moving them to the inner holes. This lengthens the
paper path slightly to prevent the paper from wrinkling in the unit.
NOTE: 1) Before shipping, the screws are set in the outer holes.
2) If the customer is experiencing problems with paper sizes larger than
A4, then use the inner holes.
6-120
30 July 2004
6.12.6 FUSING UNIT DRIVE
[B]
[A]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[D]
B140D9A9.WMF
Fusing/exit motor [A] timing belt [B] gear coupling [C] fusing unit
Inserting the fusing unit engages the coupling [C].
The fusing unit exit rollers [F] are driven through some gears.
6-121
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
The pressure roller [D] is driven by friction between the pressure roller and the hot
roller [E].
30 July 2004
6.12.7 CPM DOWN MODE

CPM (Copies Per Minute) Down Control adjusts the copy speed automatically
when printing OHP (transparencies) or extremely thick paper from the bypass tray.
Slowing down the paper as it goes through the fusing unit makes the paper spend
more time in the fusing unit. This compensates for the loss of temperature caused
by the demand on the hot roller.
When feeding special paper such as tab paper or thick paper from a paper station
other than the by-pass tray, the copy speed can be adjusted with SP1901 (CPM
Down Setting for Special Paper). A slower speed selection ensures better fusing.
Adjusting SP1901 does not affect fusing temperature control.
B140 Series
[B]
[A]
B140D9B0.WMF
There is a temperature and humidity sensor [A] below the toner collection bottle [B].
If this sensor detects that the ambient temperature is less than 15C (59F) and the
center thermistor detects that the hot roller temperature is less than 153C, CPM
down automatically decreases speed to 80% (60 to 48 cpm). The speed goes back
to 100% when the fusing temperature gets to 156C (153C+3C).
At normal room temperature, if the center thermistor detects that the hot roller
temperature is less than 148C, CPM down automatically decreases speed to 80%
(60 to 48 cpm). The speed goes back to 100% when the fusing temperature gets to
151C (148C +3C).
6-122
30 July 2004
6.12.8 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

This machine uses either on/off control or phase control to control the temperature
of the hot roller. Before shipping, the machine is set for on/off control.
Generally, phase control is used only if the customer has a problem with electrical
noise or interference on the power line. Phase control can be selected with
SP1104-001 (Fusing Temperature Control).
The thermistor contacting the center of the hot roller surface monitors the
temperature of the hot roller. The CPU turns the fusing lamps on and off to keep
the hot roller surface at the target temperature. The target temperature depends on
the paper type.
Paper
Normal
B064 Series
185C5 (365F9
B140 Series
195C5 (383F9
OHP
Thick Paper
165C (329F)
190C (374F)
374C (329F)
200C (392F)
Adjust With
SP1105-001, 002,
007, 008
SP1105-003, 004
SP1105-005, 006
SP1105: See the SP table for details.
NOTE: 1) SP1103 (Fusing Idling) adjusts the fusing idling time if fusing on the first
and second copies is incomplete due to low room temperature. This
function is available for the B064 Series only.
2) SP1106 (Fusing Temperature Display) displays the current center and
end temperatures for the hot roller.
3) B140 series: SP1907 (Pre Fusing Idling On/Off). If fusing is not
completed on the first few copies with thick paper or OHP, turn idling on
for these paper types with this SP.
6-123
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
B064 only: As shown in the illustration, at power on when the temperature is less
than 100C, there is an interval of 70 s during which the hot roller rotates before
printing starts (this is called fusing idling). This interval allows the hot roller to
reach the control temperature. At power on when the temperature is over 100C,
printing can start as soon as the hot roller reaches the warm-up temperature of
182C.
30 July 2004
Power On (Below 100 oC)

Temp.oC
200oC
After Warm-up
200 C
185oC
Before Rotation
70 s
100oC
Main SW ON
Power On (Above 100oC)

Temp.oC
200oC
Control Temperature: 185oC

Warm-up Temperature: 182oC
100oC
B140D9B1.WMF
Here is a list of SC codes issued if a fusing unit error occurs. For details, see
Troubleshooting.
SC541
SC542
SC543
SC544
SC545

NOTE: To release the machine after one of these SC codes is issued, just enter
the SP mode.
6-124
30 July 2004
6.12.9 EXIT
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B140D9B2.WMF
B140D9B3.WMF
Fusing/exit motor [A] timing belt [B] exit roller [C] via gears and timing belts.
The de-curler rollers [D] remove curl from the paper before it exits. This improves
feed through the duplex unit and finishers.
6-125
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
[D]
30 July 2004
6.12.10 EXIT JUNCTION GATE
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B140D9B4.WMF
The exit junction gate [A] is controlled by the exit junction gate solenoid [B].
If the solenoid is on: The gate opens, and paper [C] goes straight through [D]
to the output tray (for face-up delivery) or the finisher.
If the solenoid is off: The gate remains closed and forces the paper down [E]
to the duplex unit.
6-126
30 July 2004
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT

6.13.1 OVERVIEW
3
4
14
13
12
11
10
7
B140D9B5.WMF
8. Transport Roller 2
2. Inverter Entrance Roller
9. Duplex Transport Sensor 2
3. Reverse Trigger Roller
10. Transport Roller 1
4. Jogger Fences
12. Duplex Inverter Sensor
6. Trailing Edge Guide Plate
13. Inverter Exit Roller
7. Duplex Transport Rollers 3, 4
14. Duplex Junction Gate
Normally the page is fed out directly face-up to the output tray. If the user selected
face-down output, the exit junction gate sends the page to the inverter. The inverter
inverts the page for face-down output.
If the user selected duplex mode, after the inverter inverts the page, the duplex
junction gate directs the page into the duplex unit, then the duplex unit feeds the
page back to the machine for printing the second side.
NOTE: When the duplex unit is removed, the trailing edge guide plate (6) drops to
the horizontal position to make it easier to remove.
6-127
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
1. Duplex Entrance Sensor
DUPLEX UNIT
30 July 2004
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE

[A]
[B]
[C]
[K]
[F]
[D]
[H]
[E]
[I]
[G]
B140D9B6.WMF
[J]
[E]
[H]
B140D9B7.WMF
Fusing/exit motor [A] Timing belt [B] Inverter entrance roller [C]
Duplex inverter motor [D] Timing belt Transport rollers 1, 2 [E] and reverse
trigger rollers [F]
Duplex Inverter motor [D] Inverter exit roller [K]
Duplex transport motor [G] Timing belt transport rollers 3, 4 [H]
Duplex transport clutch [I]:
Stops transport rollers 1, 2 [E] when there are two sheets in the duplex paper
path (when interleaving is used) Allows the sheet in front to be fed out of
the duplex unit by motor [G] and rollers [H].
Controlled by the duplex inverter sensor [J]
6-128
30 July 2004
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13.3 INVERTER OPERATION

Inverter Feed-in and Jogging
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
B140D9B8.WMF
B140D9B9.WMF
Just after the main switch is turned on:

Jogger motor [D] (a stepper motor) moves the jogger fences [C] to home
position (determined by the duplex jogger HP sensor [E]).
When the Start key is pressed:
Motor [D] positions fences [C] 20 mm away from the selected paper size to
wait for the paper.
Inverter entrance roller [A] feeds paper to the jogger section The paper
pushes down the gate [B].
After the paper passes through the gate:
Motor [D] (a stepper motor) moves the jogger fences [C] in to square the
paper. This happens every page.
After this, the jogger fences move back to the previous position (12 mm away
from the paper)
A spring pushes the gate back up again after the paper has gone (there is no
solenoid).
6-129
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
[E]
DUPLEX UNIT
30 July 2004
Inverter Feed-out
[A]
[B]
B140D9C0.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[F]
B140D9C1.WMF
Reverse trigger roller solenoid

Reverse trigger roller
Reverse roller
Paper
Inverter exit roller
After jogging, each page is fed back as follows:

Solenoid [A] pushes down roller [B].
Roller [B] contacts roller [C], catching the paper between the two rollers.
Roller [C] always turns counter-clockwise, and feeds the paper [D]
backwards to roller [E].
When the leading edge of the paper, now caught by roller [E], passes sensor [F],
solenoid [A] switches off and roller [B] returns to its home position.
6-130
30 July 2004
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13.4 DUPLEX TRAY FEED
[A]
[B]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[C]
[D]
B140D9C2.WMF
For details of how the transport rollers [C, D], duplex transport clutch [E (not shown
here)], and duplex inverter sensor [F] control duplex feed, see 6.13.2.
Duplex transport sensors 1, 2, 3 [G] detect jams in the paper path.
6-131
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
After inversion:
If duplex mode is not selected, the duplex junction gate solenoid [A] does not
switch on to open the duplex junction gate [B]. The paper goes to the output
tray or finisher face down.
If duplex mode is selected, after the paper leaves the inverter, the solenoid
[A] switches on and opens the junction gate [B]. The paper goes down to the
duplex tray.
DUPLEX UNIT
30 July 2004
6.13.5 DUPLEX INTERLEAVE FEED

The number of sheets that can be processed at a time depends on the size of the
paper.
The table below shows the order of page processing for a 14-page job. Odd
numbers are the front sides of the pages, even numbers are the back sides.
Scanning Order
A4/LT LEF or
smaller *1
Longer than
A4/LT(LEF) *2
Order of Page Processing

5
6
7
8
9
10 11
11
11
12
13
14
13
10
12
14
10
13
12
14
*1
: 3 pages can be interleave processed at once.

: Only 2 pages can be interleave processed at once.
*2
The following diagrams show where the 7 sheets are located at every step during a
14-page duplex print job with A4/LT LEF paper (three pages can be in the feed
path at once).
1. First 3 sheets fed.
1) 1st sheet, front page printed (pg. 1)
2) 2nd sheet, front page printed (pg. 3)
3) 3rd sheet, front page printed (pg. 5)
B140D9C3.WMF
2. 1st, 2nd, 3rd sheet fed to duplex tray

and inverter table.
3. 4th sheet feeds.
B140D9C4.WMF
6-132
30 July 2004
DUPLEX UNIT
4. 1st sheet, back page printed (pg. 2)
B140D9C5.WMF
5. 4th sheet feeds, front page printed

(pg.7)
6. 1st sheet exits (pp. 1, 2)
7. 4th sheet feeds to duplex tray.
8. 2nd sheet, back page printed (pg. 4)
9. 5th sheet feeds.
B140D9C6.WMF
10. 2nd sheet exits.

Detailed
Descriptions
11. 5th sheet, back page printed (pg. 9),

feeds to duplex tray.
12. 3rd sheet, back page printed (pg. 6)
13. 6th sheet, front page printed (pg.
11)
14. 4th sheet, back page, (pg. 8), 7th
sheet front page (pg. 13) copied in
order, the process above repeats.
B140D9C7.WMF
6-133
manuals4you.com
ENERGY SAVER MODES
30 July 2004
6.14 ENERGY SAVER MODES

6.14.1 OVERVIEW
Operation
Stand-by Mode
Auto Off Mode
Energy
Saver Key
Auto Off
Timer
PC Signal
Fusing lamp off.

Energy Saver LED On System
5V On
Night Mode
System 5V Off
+5VE On
Panel off
Timer
Energy
Saver Key
Selected by
UP mode
Energy Saver Mode

Fusing lamp to low temp.
Energy Saver LED On
System 5V On
Within 3s
to return
Within 30s
to return
Energy Saver
Timer
Low Power Mode

Operation
Operation
Switch Off
Operation
Operation
Switch Off
Printer ready
conditons
PC signal
Fusing lamp to low temp.

Energy Saver LED On
System 5V On
Operation
Switch Off
Night Stand-by
Mode
System 5V On
Operation
B140D9C8.WMF
When the machine is not used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by lowering the fusing temperature.
This machine has four types of energy saver mode as follows.
1) Energy saver mode (called panel off mode in the operation manual)
2) Low power mode (called energy saver mode in the operation manual)
3) Auto off mode (copier configuration only)
4) Night mode (copier/printer/scanner configuration only)
These modes are controlled by the following User Tools:
Panel off timer
Energy saver timer
Auto off timer
Auto off disabling
The way that the machine operates depends on the combination of installed
equipment (copier only, or whether a printer/scanner is installed).
6-134
30 July 2004
ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.14.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE

Entering the energy saver mode
The machine enters energy saver mode when one of the following is done.
The Energy Saver Key is held down for a second.
The panel off timer runs out after the last job (User Tools - System Settings Timer Setting - Panel Off Timer: default setting is 60 s).
What happens in energy saver mode

When the machine enters energy saver mode, the fusing lamps drops to a certain
temperature and the operation panel indicators are turned off except for the Energy
Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the CPU receives the image print out command from an application (e. g. to print
data from a PC), the fusing temperature rises to print the data. However, the
operation indicators stay off.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
The Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
An original is placed in the ADF
The ADF is lifted
A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
Energy Saver
LED
On
Fusing Temp.
182 C
Approx.
Recovery Time
3s
6-135
manuals4you.com
System +5V
On
Detailed
Descriptions
Operation
Switch
On
ENERGY SAVER MODES
30 July 2004
6.14.3 LOW POWER MODE

Entering the low power mode
The machine enters low power mode when:
The energy saver timer runs out after the last job.
(User Tools - System Settings - Timer Setting - Energy Saver Timer: default setting
is 15 min)
What happens in low power mode

The fusing lamp drops to the prescribed temperature, as shown in the table below
(the temperature drops more than that in energy saver mode). The other conditions
are the same as for the energy saver mode.
Return to stand-by mode

The machine returns to standby mode in the same way as from the energy saver
mode.
Operation
Switch
On
Energy Saver
LED
On
Fusing Temp.
165 C
6-136
Approx.
Recovery Time
30 s
System +5V
On
30 July 2004
ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.14.4 AUTO OFF MODE

Auto off mode is used only if no optional printer/scanner unit is installed.
Entering auto off mode

The machine enters auto off mode when one of the following is done.
The auto off timer runs out after the last job (User Tools System Settings
Timer Setting Auto Off Timer: default setting is 90 min)
The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off
What happens in auto off mode

When the machine enters auto off mode, the main power switch turns off
automatically. The fusing lamp and all dc supplies except +5VE (+5V for energy
saver mode) turn off.
Returning to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode when the main power switch is turned on.
Energy
Saver LED
Fusing Temp.
Off
Off
Room Temp.
(Fusing lamp off)
Approx.
Recovery
Time
300 s
System
+5V
Note
Off
Only +5VE is
supplied to the BICU.
Disabling auto off mode

If the user wishes to disable auto off mode, use the following user tool: User Tools
System Settings AOF (change the setting to OFF).
6-137
manuals4you.com
Detailed
Descriptions
Operation
Switch
ENERGY SAVER MODES
30 July 2004
6.14.5 NIGHT MODE

This is used instead of auto off mode when an optional scanner/printer unit is
installed.
There are two types of night mode: Night Stand-by Mode and Night Mode. The
difference between night stand-by mode and night mode is the machines condition
when the machine enters auto off mode.
Entering night stand-by and night modes

The machine enters the night stand-by mode and night modes when one of the
following is done.
The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off
The auto off timer runs out (the operation switch is then turned off, but the main
power switch stays on)
If the machine is in one or more of the following conditions, the machine enters
night stand-by mode. If not, the machine enters night mode.
Error or SC condition
Image data is stored in the memory
An original is in the ADF
The ADF is open
Paper is left in the duplex unit or staple tray
What happens in night stand-by and night modes

When the machine enters either of these modes, the fusing lamp and operation
switch turn off, and only the main power LED is lit.
Night stand-by mode

The system +5V and +24 V are supplied to all components.
Night mode
The system +5V supply is also turned off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a signal from the PC, the
machine goes back to night stand-by mode and the system +5V and +24V supplies
are activated. Then the machine receives the incoming message and prints it.
Returning to stand-by mode
The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
recovery time is about 45 s.
Mode
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver
LED
Night standby mode
Off
Off
Night mode
Off
Off
Fusing Temp.
Room Temp.
(Fusing lamp off)
Room Temp.
(Fusing lamp off)
6-138
System
+5V
Note
On
Off
Only +5VE is supplied to

the printer controller.
30 July 2004
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration
Original
Original Size
Original Alignment
Copy Paper Size
Copy Paper Weight
Reproduction Ratios
Copying Speed
First Copy Time
Warm-up Time
(under 20C room temp.)
Continuous Copy
Paper Capacity
Paper Output
Power Source
Console
Sheet/Book/Objects
Max. A3/11" x 17"
Min. B5 SEF/5.5" x 8.5" (using ADF)
Rear left corner
Paper tray, Duplex
A3/11" x 17" A5 SEF/5.5" x 8.5"
By-pass tray
A3/11" x 17" A6 SEF/5.5" x 8.5"
Non-standard sizes
Width: 100 305 mm (4" x 12")
Length: 140 - 600 mm (5.5" x 23.4")
Paper Tray
52.3 ~ 127.9 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb.)
Duplex
64 ~ 127.9 g/m2 (17 ~ 34 lb.)
By-pass: Standard
52.3 ~ 157 g/m2 (14 ~ 43 lb.)
Thick Paper mode 52.3 ~ 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb.)
6 reduction ratios,
Metric (%)
400, 200, 141, 122, 115,
5 enlargement ratios
93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50
Inch (%)
400, 200, 155, 129, 121,
93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50
Zoom
25 ~ 400% in 1% steps
B163/B228
51 cpm (A4/11" x 8.5" LEF)
B064/B140/B142
60 cpm (A4/11" x 8.5" LEF)
B065/B141/B143
75 cpm (A4/11" x 8.5" LEF)
B064/B065
3.5 s
B141/B143
(1st Tray, A4/11" x 8.5" LEF Face-up mode)
B140/B142
4.2 s
B163/B228
(1st Tray, A4/11" x 8.5" LEF Face-up mode)
B064/B065
5.3 s
B141/B143
(1st Tray, A4/11" x 8.5" LEF Face-down mode)
B140/B142
6.3 s
B163/B228
(1st Tray, A4/11" x 8.5" LEF Face-down mode)
B064/B065
Less than 300 s from Off mode
Less than 25 s from low power mode
B140/B141
Less than 30 s
B142/B1B16
B163/B228
1 ~ 999 (Operation panel entry)
Tray 1 (tandem tray)
3100 sheets
Tray 2
550 sheets
Tray 3
550 sheets
By-pass Tray
100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
A4/81/2" x 11" and
500 sheets
smaller
B4 and larger
250 sheets
North America
120 V / 60 Hz 20 A or more
Europe/Asia
220 ~ 240 V / 50/60 Hz 10 A or more
Taiwan
110 V / 60 Hz 20 A or more
Spec-1
manuals4you.com
Spec.
1.1 COPIER
SPECIFICATIONS
Allowed voltage
fluctuation
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
Resolution
Gradation
Original Archive
Toner Replenishment
Total Counter
30 July 2004
10%
B064/B065
690 x 750 x 1165 mm

(27.2" x 29.6" x 45.9")
690 x 760 x 1165 mm
(27.2" x 29.9" x 45.9")
Approx. 200 kg (440.9 lb.)
Approx. 203 kg (447.6 lb.)
B140/B141/B142
B143/B163/B228
B064/B065
B140/B141/B142
B143/B163/B228
1200 dpi (printing) 600 dpi (scanning)
256 levels (scanning and printing)
10,000 A4/81/2" x 11" pages for document server
Cartridge exchange (1100 g)
Electric Counter
1.2 ADF
Original Size
Original Weight
A3/11" x 17" B6/5.5" x 8.5"

1-sided original
40 ~ 128 g/m2 (11 ~ 34 lb.)
2-sided original
52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb.)
Table Capacity
100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.) or less than 12 mm (0.4") original

stack height
Rear left corner
Feed belt and separation roller
Roller transport
From top original
100%
DC 24 V from the main machine
Less than 110 W
Max. DC 24 V
Original Standard Position

Separation
Original Transport
Original Feed Order
Reproduction Range
Power Source
Power Consumption
Rated Voltage of Output
Connector
Permissible voltage
fluctuation
Weight
10%
680 x 560 x 180 mm (26.8" x 22.0" x 7.1")
18 kg (39.6 lb.)
Spec-2
30 July 2004
SPECIFICATIONS
1.3 POWER CONSUMPTION

B064/B065 Copier (120V Model)
Warm-up
Stand-by
Copying
Maximum
Mainframe Only
Approx. 1.20 kW
Approx. 0.30 kW
Approx. 1.55 kW
Less than 1.60 kW
Full System
Approx. 1.25 kW
Approx. 0.32 kW
Approx. 1.65 kW
Less than 1.70 kW
B064/B065 Copier (220V to 240V Model)

Warm-up
Stand-by
Copying
Maximum
Mainframe Only
Approx. 1.25 kW
Approx. 0.27 kW
Approx. 1.60 kW
Less than 1.75 kW
Full System
Approx. 1.26 kW
Approx. 0.27 kW
Approx. 1.60 kW
Less than 1.75 kW
B140/B141/B163 Copier (120V Model)

Warm-up
Stand-by
Copying
Maximum
Mainframe Only
Approx. 1.761 kW
Approx. 0.329 kW
Approx. 1.274 kW
Less than 1.386 kW
Full System
Approx. 1.761 kW
Approx. 1.842 kW
Less than 1.850 kW
B140/B141/B163 Copier (220V to 240V Model)

Mainframe Only
Approx. 1.750 kW
Approx. 0.333 kW
Approx. 1.281 kW
Less than 1.401 kW
Full System
Approx. 1.750 kW
Approx. 1.782 kW
Less than 1.850 kW
Spec.
Warm-up
Stand-by
Copying
Maximum
Spec-3
manuals4you.com
SPECIFICATIONS
30 July 2004
Noise Emission: Sound Power Level

B064 (60 CPM)
Mainframe Only
Standby
Copying
Complete System
Standby
Copying
B065 (75 CMP)
Less than 48 dB (A)

Less than 71 dB (A)
Less than 48 dB (A)

Less than 71 dB (A)
Less than 49 dB (A)

Less than 74 dB (A)
Less than 49 dB (A)

Less than 74 dB (A)
B163/B228
(51 CPM)
Mainframe Only
Standby
Copying
Complete System
Standby
Copying
B140/B142
(60 CPM)
B141/B143
(75 CMP)
Less than 49 dB (A)

Less than 70 dB (A)
Less than 49 dB (A)

Less than 70 dB (A)
Less than 49 dB (A)

Less than 71 dB (A)
Less than 49 dB (A)

Less than 74 dB (A)
Less than 49 dB (A)

Less than 74 dB (A)
Less than 49 dB (A)

Less than 74 dB (A)
Noise Emission: Sound Pressure Level

B064 (60 CPM)
Mainframe Only
Standby
Copying
Complete System
Standby
Copying
B065 (75 CMP)
Less than 38 dB (A)

Less than 57 dB (A)
Less than 38 dB (A)

Less than 57 dB (A)
Less than 39 dB (A)

Less than 64 dB (A)
Less than 39 dB (A)

Less than 64 dB (A)
B163(51 CPM)
Mainframe Only
Standby
Copying
Complete System
Standby
Copying
B064 (60 CPM)
B065 (75 CMP)
Less than 44 dB (A)

Less than 65 dB (A)
Less than 44 dB (A)

Less than 65 dB (A)
Less than 44 dB (A)

Less than 67 dB (A)
Less than 44 dB (A)

Less than 69 dB (A)
Less than 44 dB (A)

Less than 69 dB (A)
Less than 44 dB (A)

Less than 69 dB (A)
NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779. Full
system measurements include the Finisher, LCT, and Mailbox. In the
above stand-by condition, the polygon mirror motor is not rotating.
Spec-4
30 July 2004
SPECIFICATIONS
2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
9
1
4
2
B140v500
A3/DLT Kit
Tab Sheet Kit
LCT (Large Capacity Tray)
LG/B4 Kit
Copy Tray
Z-Folding Unit
Cover Interposer Tray
Finisher with 100-sheet stapler
Finisher with 50-sheet Stapler
Finisher with saddle-stitching
and 50-sheet Stapler
Finisher with 50-sheet Stapler for
Z-folding
9-Bin Mailbox
Punch Unit for 50-staple Finisher
Punch Unit for 100-staple
Finisher (NA 3/2, EU 2/4)
Punch Unit for 100-staple
Finisher (SC)
Jogger Unit
Copy Connector Kit
File Format Converter
Machine code
B140
B065
B141
B064
B163
B475
B499
B473
B474
B476
B660
B470
B478
B706
B469
B468
1
Inside mainframe
2
Inside LCT
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
B674
Letter
B471
B377
9
Inside Finisher No. 7 or 8
B531
Inside Finisher No. 6
B812
B513
B525
B328
B519
B609

Inside mainframe
Inside mainframe
Inside mainframe
Inside mainframe
Spec-5
manuals4you.com
Spec.
Item
Mainframe
SPECIFICATIONS
30 July 2004
3. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
3.1 A3/DLT KIT (B475)
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Tray Capacity
A3, B4, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 14", A4 SEF, A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11"
SEF, 11" x 81/2" LEF
52 ~ 163 g/m2
16 ~ 40 lb. Bond
50 ~ 60 lb. Cover
90 lb. Index (no Tab)
1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb)
3.2 LCT (LARGE CAPACITY TRAY) (B473)

Paper capacity
Paper Sizes
Paper Weight
Pick-up and Feed
Power Consumption
Power Supply
Connector
Weight
4,000 sheets3
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF*1
52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb)
FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller)
Less than 50 W (Max.)
DC24 V, 5V (powered by the main unit)
Max. DC 24 V
314 x 458 x 659 mm (12.4" x 18.1" x 25.9")
20.0 kg (44 lb.)
*1
: In platen mode, APS (Auto Paper Select) with the original length and original width sensors
are not used.
Spec-6
30 July 2004
SPECIFICATIONS
3.3 3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH SADDLE-STITCH AND 50-SHEET

STAPLER (B468)
General
Connector
Weight
Power Consumption
Power Supply
Max. DC 24 V
700 x 620 x 960 mm (27.6" x 24.4" x 37.8")
Approx. 63 kg (139 lb.)
72 W (3 A/24 V)
DC 24 V
Upper Tray
Tray Capacity
(80 g/m2)
Unstapled
Stapled
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Mixed Sizes
500 sheets (A4, A5 LEF, B5, 81/2" x 11")

250 sheets (A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17")
100 sheets (A5 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 51/2" x 81/2")
Max docs.
Total sheets
Size
50 docs.
500 sheets
A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF
25 docs.
250 sheets
A3, A4 SEF, B4, B5, 12" x 18",
11" x 17", 81/2" x 11"
A3 ~ A5, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 12" x 18", 11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"
52 g/m2 ~ 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
A3 and A4 LEF, B4 and B5 LEF, 11" x 17" and 81/2" x 11" LEF
(Max: 16 docs, Max sheets: 30 sheets or less)
Lower Tray
Tray Capacity
(80 g/m2)
Unstapled
Stapled
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Mixed Sizes
2,500 sheets (A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF)

500 sheets (A5 LEF)
Max docs.
Total sheets
Size
50 docs.
2,500 sheets
A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF
50 docs.
1,250 sheets
A4 SEF, B5, 81/2" x 11" SEF
30 docs.
1,250 sheets
A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17"
A3 ~ A5, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 12" x 18", 11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"
52 g/m2 ~ 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
Tray Capacity
Paper Weight
250 sheets (A4, 81/2" x 11" or smaller)

50 sheets (B4, 81/2" x 14" or larger)
52 g/m2 ~ 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
Spec-7
manuals4you.com
Spec.
Proof Tray
SPECIFICATIONS
30 July 2004
Staple Specifications
Binding
Capacity
(80 g/m2)
Same
Size
Mixed
Size
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Stapling Position
Stapling Capacity

30 sheets (A3 and A4 LEF, B4 and B5 LEF, 11" x 17" and 81/2"
x 11" LEF)
A3-B5, 11" x 17" ~ 81/2" x 11"
64 g/m2 ~ 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb)
Front (1), Back (1), Back (1: diagonal), Duplex Binding
5,000 staples/Cartridge
Saddle-Stitch Staple Specifications

Binding Capacity
(80 g/m2)
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Stapling Position
Staple Capacity
Fold Position
Saddle-Stitch Capacity
15 sheets
A3, B4, A4 SEF, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 11" SEF
64 g/m2 ~ 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb)
Center, 2 locations
Center, half-folding
Max docs.
Total sheets
Size
A4 SEF, 81/2" x 11" SEF
25 docs.
2 ~ 5 sheets
15 docs.
6 ~ 10 sheets
10 docs.
11 ~ 15 sheets
A3, B4, 11" x 17"
30 docs.
2 ~ 5 sheets
20 docs.
6 ~ 10 sheets
10 docs.
11 ~ 15 sheets
Spec-8
30 July 2004
SPECIFICATIONS
3.4 3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH 50-SHEET STAPLER (B469)

General
Connector
Weight
Power Consumption
Power Supply
Max. DC 24 V
700 x 620 x 960 mm (27.6" x 24.4" x 37.8")
Approx. 65 kg (143 lb.)
72 W (3 A/24 V)
DC 24 V
Lower Tray
Tray Capacity
(80 g/m2)
Unstapled
Stapled
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Mixed Sizes
3,000 sheets (A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF)

1,500 sheets (A3, A4 SEF, B4, B5, 12" x 18", 11" x 17",
81/2" x 14", 81/2" x 11" SEF)
500 sheets (A5 LEF)
Max docs.
Total sheets
Size
50 docs.
3,000 sheets
A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF
50 docs.
1,500 sheets
A4 SEF, B5, 81/2" x 11" SEF
30 docs.
1,500 sheets
A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17"
A3 ~ A5, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 12" x 18", 11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"
52 g/m2 ~ 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
Proof Tray
Tray Capacity

52 g/m2 ~ 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
Paper Weight
Same Size
Mixed Size
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Stapling Position
Stapling Capacity

30 sheets (A3 and A4 LEF, B4 and B5 LEF, 11" x 17" and
81/2" x 11" LEF)
A3 ~ B5, 11" x 17" ~ 81/2" x 11"
64 g/m2 ~ 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb)
Spec.
Binding
Capacity
(80 g/m2)
Spec-9
manuals4you.com
SPECIFICATIONS
30 July 2004
3.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH SADDLE-STITCH AND 50-SHEET

STAPLER (B674)
General
Connector
Weight
Power Consumption
Power Supply
Max. DC 24 V
700 x 620 x 960 mm (27.6" x 24.4" x 37.8")
Approx. 65 kg (143 lb.) (with punch unit)
72 W (3 A/24 V)
DC 24 V
Upper Tray
Tray Capacity
(80 g/m2)
Unstapled
500 sheets (A4, A5 LEF, B5, 81/2" x 11")

250 sheets (A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 12" x 18", 11" x 17" SEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF, B6 SEF, 51/2" x 81/2")
Max docs.
Total sheets
Size
Stapled
50 docs.
500 sheets
A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF
25 docs.
250 sheets
A3, A4 SEF, B4, B5, 12" x
18", 11" x 17", 81/2" x 11"
Paper Size
A3 ~ A5, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 12" x 18", 11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"
Paper Weight
52 g/m2 ~ 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
Mixed Sizes
Note: Z-folded paper cannot be output to the upper tray.
Spec-10
30 July 2004
SPECIFICATIONS
Lower Tray
Tray Capacity
(80 g/m2 20 lb)
Unstapled
Stapled
Stapled
and
Z-folded
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Mixed Sizes
No Z-folded paper
2,500 sheets (A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF)
1,250 sheets (A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5, 11" x 17" SEF,
81/2" x 14" SEF, 81/2" x 11" SEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF, B6 SEF, B6 SEF, 51/2" x 81/2")
Z-folded sheets only
30 sheets
20 sheets
Max docs
Total sheets
Size
50 docs.
2,500 sheets A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF
50 docs.
1,250 sheets A4 SEF, B5, 81/2" x 11" SEF
30 docs.
1,250 sheets A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17"
5 docs
30 sheets
A3 (Z) and A4 LEF
B4 (Z) and B5 LEF,
11" x 17" (Z) and 81/2" x 11" LEF
No Z-folded
A3 ~ A5, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 12" x 18"
11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"
Z-folded
A3 SEF ~ A4 SEF
11" x 17" SEF ~ 51/2" x 81/2" SEF
No Z-folded
52 g/m2 ~ 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
Z-folded
64 g/m2 ~ 80 g/m2 (17 ~ 20 lb)
No Z-folded
A3 and A4 LEF, B4 and B5 LEF
11" x 17" and 81/2" x 11" LEF
Z-folded
A3 (Z) and A4 LEF, B4 (Z) and B5 LEF
11" x 17" (Z) and 81/2" x 11" LEF
Proof Tray
Tray Capacity
No Z- folded
Z-folded
Mixed
No Z- folded
Z-folded
Spec.
Paper Weight

(One Z-folded sheet is counted as 10
unfolded sheets.)
52 g/m2 ~ 163 g/m2 (14 ~ 43 lb)
64 g/m2 ~ 80 g/m2 (17 ~ 20 lb)
Spec-11
manuals4you.com
SPECIFICATIONS
30 July 2004
Binding
Capacity
(80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Same
Size
Mixed
size
Z-folded
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Stapling Position
Stapling Capacity

30 sheets (A3 and A4 LEF, B4 and B5 LEF, 11" x 17" and 81/2"
x 11" LEF)
Z-folded Sheets
5
4
3
2
1
No Z-folded shees
0
0 ~ 10
0 ~ 20
0 ~ 30
0 ~ 40
One Z-folded sheet is counted as 10 unfolded sheets.

No Z- folded
A3-B5, 11" x 17" ~ 81/2" x 11"
Z-folded
A3SEF, B4SEF, 11" x 17" SEF
No Z- folded
64 g/m2 ~ 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb)
Z-folded
64 g/m2 ~ 80 g/m2 (17 ~ 20 lb)
Saddle-Stitch Staple Specifications

15 sheets
A3, B4, A4 SEF, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 11" SEF
64 g/m2 ~ 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb)
Center, 2 locations
Max docs.
Total sheets
Size
A4 SEF, 81/2" x 11" SEF
25 docs.
2 ~ 5 sheets
15 docs.
6 ~ 10 sheets
10 docs.
11 ~ 15 sheets
A3, B4, 11" x 17"
30 docs.
2 ~ 5 sheets
20 docs.
6 ~ 10 sheets
10 docs.
11 ~ 15 sheets
Spec-12
manuals4you.com
Binding Capacity
(80 g/m2)
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Stapling Position
Staple Capacity
Fold Position
Saddle-Stitch Capacity
30 July 2004
SPECIFICATIONS

The Punch Unit B377 is installed in the 3000 Sheet Finisher B468/B469/B674.
Punch Specifications
Punch Position
Punching Allowed
Allowed Paper Sizes
North America (NA)

Europe (E)
Northern Europe (NE)
All modes
Holes
2 holes (E)
2 holes (NA)
3 holes (NA)
4 holes (E)
4 holes (NE)
Hopper Capacity
Connector
Weight
Power Consumption
Power Supply
B377-17
B377-27
B377-31
Feed
Paper Size
SEF
LEF
SEF
LEF
SEF
LEF
SEF
LEF
SEF
LEF
A3 ~ A5, 11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"

A4 ~ A5, 81/2" x 11", 51/2" x 81/2"
A3 ~ A5, 11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"
A4 ~ A5, 81/2" x 11", 51/2" x 81/2"
A3, B4, 11" x 17"
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11"
A3, B4, 81/2" x 11"
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11"
A3 ~ A5, 11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"
A3 ~ A5, 81/2" x 11", 51/2" x 81/2"
Holes
Weight
2
2 holes
52 ~ 163 g/m
(14 ~ 43 lb.)
3 holes
4 holes (E)
4 holes (NE)
2 holes (NA)
North America (2/3 hole)
More than 60 K prints
Europe, Europe (4 holes)
More than 80 K prints
Max. DC 24 V
700 x 620 x 960 mm (27.6" x 24.4" x 37.8")
Approx. 65 kg (143 lb.) (with punch unit)
72 W (3 A/24 V)
DC 24 V
Spec.
Allowed Paper Weight
2/3 holes
2/4 holes
4 holes
Spec-13
manuals4you.com
SPECIFICATIONS
30 July 2004
3.7 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)

Configuration
Paper Separation
Paper Transport
Paper Sizes
Paper Weight
Capacity
Paper Set Detection
Power Supply
(from main machine)
Power Consumption
Weight
Attached to 3000-sheet finisher B468, B469, B478, B674 and

B706.
FRR system with feed belt.
Feed from top tray via vertical roller transport to finisher.
A3 ~ A5, 11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"
64 ~ 216 g/m2 (17 ~ 58 lb)
200 sheets (80 g/m2)
Provided
24 V 10%, 5 V 5%
Less than 48 W
500 x 620 x 200 mm (19.7" x 24.4" x 7.9")
12 kg (26.4 lb.)
Spec-14
30 July 2004
SPECIFICATIONS
3.8 3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706)
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Upper Tray Full Detection
SHIFT TRAY
Paper Capacity (80 g/m2)
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Shift Tray Full Detection
STAPLER
Stapling Stack Size
Stapling Paper Size
Stapling Paper Weight
Staple Position
Staple Capacity
Staple Supply
Stapled Stack Size
Trim Waste Staple Capacity

Waste Staple Hopper Full
Detection
Power Consumption
Power Source
Size (W x D x H)
Weight
Compatible Machines
500 sheets (A4, 81/2" x 11" and smaller)

250 sheets (B4, 81/2" x 14" and larger)
A3 to A6 SEF, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2", 12" x 18"
52 to 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
Provided
3000 sheets (A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF)
1500 sheets (A3, A4 SEF, B4 and B5 SEF, 11" x 17",
81/2" x 14", 81/2" x 11" SEF, 12" x 18")
500 sheets (A5 LEF, 51/2" x 81/2" LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF, 51/2" x 81/2" SEF)
A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2", 12" x 18" (including
tab paper)
52 to 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
Provided
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (Max. 100 Sheets)
A3, B4, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 14" (Max. 50 sheets)
A3 to B5
11" x 17" to 81/2" x 11"
64 to 80 g/m2 (17 ~ 20 lb)
4 Modes
1 Staple: Front, Rear, Rear-Oblique
2 Stapes: 2 locations
5000 staples/cartridge
Cartridge or Staple Replacement
Sheets
Sets
Sizes
A4 SEF, B5 SEF, 81/2" x 11"
10 ~ 100
200 ~ 30
SEF
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2" x 11"
2~9
150
LEF
10 ~ 50
150 ~ 30
A3, B4, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 14"
2~9
150
30,000 or more
Provided
Less than 100 W
DC 24 V (From Mainframe)
800 x 730 x 980 mm (31.5" x 28.7" x 38.6)
Less than 65 kg (143 lb.)
B478: B064/B065, B070 (90 cpm), B071 (105 cpm)
B706: B070 (90 cpm), B071 (105 cpm)
Spec-15
manuals4you.com
Spec.
UPPER TRAY
Paper Capacity (80 g/m2)
SPECIFICATIONS
30 July 2004

The Punch Unit B531 is installed in the 3000 Sheet Finisher B478/B706.
Punch Hole Positions
2/3-hole (North America)

2/4-hole (Europe)
Punch Paper Size

2-Hole (NA)
A5 ~ A3 SEF, 11" x 17"~5 1/2" x 81/2" SEF

A5 ~ A4 LEF, 8 1/2" x 11" LEF, 51/2" x 81/2" LEF
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11" x 17" SEF
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2" x11" LEF
A3 SEF, 11" x 17" SEF
A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF
3-Hole (NA)
4-Hole ( EUR/A)
Paper Weight
2-Hole (NA)
3-Hole (NA)
4-Hole ( EUR/A)
Punch Waste Hopper Capacity
2-Hole (NA)
3-Hole (NA)
4-Hole ( EUR/A)
Operation Modes
52 g/m2 ~ 163 g/m2 (14 ~ 43 lb)

52 g/m2 ~ 163 g/m2 (14 ~ 43 lb)
52 g/m2 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb)
10K
15K
15K
All (Shift, Proof, Staple)
DIP SW Settings
The correct DIP SW settings of the Punch Unit 531 are provided in the table below
for your reference only. The DIP switches of these punch units do not need to be
changed at installation, or adjusted for operation.
Punch Unit
2/3-Hole (NA)
2/4-Hole ( EUR/A)
Unit No.
B531-17
B531-27
1
1
1
0: OFF
1: ON
Spec-16
DIP SW Settings
2
3
0
1
0
0
4
0
1
30 July 2004
SPECIFICATIONS
3.10 PUNCH UNIT (A812)

The Punch Unit A812 is installed in the 3000 Sheet Finisher B478/B706.
Punch Hole Positions
2-hole, 3-hole (NA)

4-hole (EUR/A)
4-hole (North Europe)
Punch Paper Size

2-Hole
A5 ~ A3 SEF, 11" x 17" ~ 81/2" x 11" SEF

A5 ~ A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF
A3 SEF, 11" x 17" SEF
A4 LEF, 11" x 17" LEF
B5 ~ A3 SEF, 81/2" x 11" ~ 11" x 17" SEF
A5 ~ A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 51/2" x 81/2" LEF
3-Hole (NA)
4-Hole ( EUR/A)
4-Hole (North Europe)
Paper Weight
2-Hole, 3-Hole (NA)
4-Hole (Europe/North Europe)
Punch Waste Hopper Capacity
2-Hole
3-Hole (NA)
4-Hole ( EUR/A)
Power Supply
Power Consumption
Weight
Operation Modes
52 g/m2 ~ 163 g/m2 (14 ~ 43 lb)

52 g/m2 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb)
40K
15K
15K
15K
DC 24 V (From Finisher)
60 W
Less than 2.4 K (5.3 lb.)
All (Shift, Proof, Staple)
DIP SW Settings
Punch Unit
2-Hole ( EUR/A)
3-Hole (NA)
4-Hole ( EUR/A)
2-Hole (NA)
Unit No.
A812-40/A812-67
A812-57
A812-30
A812-31
A812-32
1
0
1
0
0
0
DIP SW Settings
2
3
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0: OFF
1: ON
Spec-17
manuals4you.com
4
0
0
0
0
1
Spec.
The correct DIP SW settings of the Punch Unit A812 are provided in the table
below for your reference only. The DIP switches of these punch units do not need
to be changed at installation, or adjusted for operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
30 July 2004
3.11 JOGGER UNIT (B513)

The Jogger Unit B513 is installed above the shift tray of the 3000 Sheet Finisher
B478/B706.
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Weight
Power Supply
Power Consumption

A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF
52 g/m2 ~ 216 g/m2 (14 ~ 58 lb)
Less than 1.7 kg (3.7 lb.)
125 mm x 450 mm x 100 mm (5" x 17.7" x 4")
DC 24 V, DC 5V (From Finisher)
24 W
3.12 9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)

Bin Capacity
Allowed Paper Sizes
Allowed Paper Thickness
Power Consumption
Power Supply
Weight
100 sheets per bin (80 g/m2)

A3 ~ A5
11" x 17" ~ 51/2" x 81/2"
52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb)
Less than 48W (average)
DC 24 V, 5 V
480 x 600 x 660 mm (18.9" x 23.6" x 26")
15 kg (33 lb.)
3.13 LG/B4 KIT (B474)

Paper Size
Paper Weight
Tray Capacity
B4, 81/2" x 14", A4 SEF,81/2" x 11" SEF

52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb)
1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb)
3.14 Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)

Paper Size
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
Weight
Power Consumption
Power Supply
Compatible Finishers
No Folding
(52 - 216 g/m2)
(17 ~ 58 lb)
Folding
(64-80 g/m2)
(17 ~ 20 lb)
177 x 620 x 960 mm
(7" x 24.5" x 37.8")
50 kg (110 lb.)
100 W max.
North America
Europe/Asia
B674
Spec-18
A3, A4, A5, A6 SEF, B4, B5, B6 SEF

11" x 17", 81/2" x 14", 81/2" x 11"
81/2" x 51/2", 12" x 18"
A3, B4, A4 SEF
11" x 17", 81/2" x 14", 81/2" x 11" SEF
12" x 18"
120 V, 60 Hz
220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
30 May, 2002
APPENDIX 1 (FOR MODEL MT)

1. RSS (REMOTE SERVICE SYSTEM)
1.1 RSS SET UP
[A]
[B]
B064X101.WMF
!CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the left upper cover [A] (2 screws).
When connecting only one machine to the line adapter, skips step 2.
2. Set the jumper switch [B] on the RSS board as shown (default setting is 1-2).
APPENDIX-1
manuals4you.com
30 May, 2002
[A]
B064X109.WMF
Line Adapter
B064X554.WMF
Machine No.
Jumper Set
PI device code
1
2-3
0
2
2-3
1
3
2-3
2
4
2-3
3
5
1-2
4
3. Re-install the upper left cover.

4. Install the core [A] and connect the modular cord to the line adapter as shown.
5. Install the line adapter (refer to chapter 2-1 L-ADP Installation Procedure in the
CSS Service Manual).
6. Turn on the machine.
When connecting only one machine to the line adapter, skips step 7.
7. Enter the Copier SP mode and set the PI device code with SP5-821 (default 0).
NOTE: After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on to
enable the PI device code.
APPENDIX-2
30 May, 2002
1.2 SP MODE SETTING

After installing the machine and line adapter, perform SP5-816-1 (CSS Function
On/Off).
Check the value of the following SP modes. Ensure they are set correctly.
NOTE: SP5-507 is only for the Japanese version. Do not change.
SP5-504-1 (Jam Alarm Level): 3

SP5-504-2 (Jam Auto Call): 1 (on)
SP5-505 (Error Alarm): 100
SP5-811 (Machine No. Setting)
SP5-812 (Service Tel. No. Setting)
1.3 CHECKING ITEMS USING RSS

1.3.1 READ ONLY ITEMS
Item
Paper end
Paper jam information
Toner end
Toner near end
Web near end
Staple end
Door open
Unit connection condition (Fusing and PCU)
Paper size information
System configuration
Vsg, Vsp, Vsdp, Vt data
Copy counter for user codes
SP7-001, -003, -101, -204 ~ -206, -301, -304, -305,
-320 ~ -328, -401, -502 ~ -508, -801, -803
Printer controller firmware version
Printer bit SW information
APPENDIX-3
manuals4you.com
30 May, 2002
1.3.2 AUTO CALL AND READ ITEMS

SC Calls
The SC calls are generated according to the SC level as follows. Please note that
the SC level of this copier is defined differently from the other copiers.
SC Level
A
B
C
D
Definition
Fuser unit SCs which cannot be reset
by customer.
SCs caused by incorrect sensor
detection which can be reset by
turning main power switch off and on.
SCs that are not shown on the
operation panel.
SCs that disable only the features
which use the defective item.
SC Auto Call Condition

SC call is generated immediately
SC call is generated when SC occurs
two times within 10 copies.
SC call is not generated.
SC call is generated when SC occurs
two times within 10 copies.
CC Calls
There are three types of CC calls as follows.
CC Code
CC 101
CC 201
CC 202
Definition
When paper jam is detected five times consecutively without completing any
copy job, a CC101 is automatically generated.
When a paper jam condition is not reset for 15 minutes, CC201 is automatically
generated.
When a cover open condition is not reset for 15 minutes, CC202 is
automatically generated.
Alarm Calls
There are four types of Alarm Calls as follows:
Type
PM
Original
Count
SC
Jam
Definition
When the PM counter reaches 80000, a PM Alarm Call is automatically reported
to the Concorde system.
Alarm call is generated after the specified total number of originals goes through
the ARDF.
When 3 SCs (Any level) occur during 1500 sheets copying, an SC Alarm Call is
automatically reported to the Concorde system.
When paper jamming occurs 10 times during 1000 sheets copying, a Jam Alarm
Call is automatically reported to the Concorde system.
APPENDIX-4
30 May, 2002
1.3.3 READ AND WRITE ITEMS

All data for SP modes and UP modes except few modes.
1.3.4 EXECUTE ITEMS

Item
Item
Memory Clear
SC reset
PM counter reset
SC/jam counters rest
Counters reset (except total counter)
Original Counter Clear
Copy counter reset

Reset counter by each paper tray
Total operation time reset
Key operator code reset
Access Code Clear
Print Counter Clear
1.4 JAM HISTORY

The jam history is read in this way.
The last 5 digits of the total counter

value at jam occur
Paper Size
Jam Condition
B064X555.WMF
1.4.1 JAM CONDITION TABLE
Copier
Code
01
03
04
05
07
08
09
0A
0C
Meaning
Jams at power on.
Paper does not reach the 1st Paper Feed Sensor
Paper does not reach the 2nd Paper Feed Sensor
Paper does not reach the 3rd Paper Feed Sensor
Paper does not reach the LCT Paper Feed Sensor
Paper does not reach the 1st Vertical Transport Sensor
Paper does not reach the 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor
Paper does not reach the 3rd Vertical Transport Sensor
Paper does not reach the Relay Sensor
APPENDIX-5
manuals4you.com

Code
0D
0E
0F
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
22
35
36
37
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
42
45
47
48
4A
65 (79*)
66 (7A*)
67 (7B*)
68 (7C*)
69 (7D*)
6A (7E*)
6E (82*)
F (83*)
70 (84*)
71 (85*)
73 (87*)
74 (88*)
(7F*)
(80*)
(86*)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
30 May, 2002
Meaning
Paper does not reach the Registration Sensor
Paper does not reach the Fusing Exit Sensor
Paper does not reach the Exit Unit Entrance Sensor
Paper does not reach the Exit Sensor
Paper does not reach the Duplex Entrance Sensor
Paper does not reach the Duplex Transport Sensor 1
Paper does not reach the Duplex Exit Sensor
Paper does not reach the Exit Tray Sensor
Paper caught at he By-pass Paper End Sensor
Paper caught at the 1st Paper Feed Sensor
Paper caught at the 2nd Paper Feed Sensor
Paper caught at the 3rd Paper Feed Sensor
Paper caught at the LCT Paper Feed Sensor
Paper Jam at Finisher Exit
Paper Jam at Mailbox Entrance
Paper caught at the 1st Vertical Transport Sensor
Paper caught at the 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor
Paper caught at the 3rd Vertical Transport Sensor
Paper caught at the Exit Sensor
Paper caught at the Duplex Entrance Sensor
Paper caught at the Duplex Transport Sensor 2
Paper caught at the Duplex Transport Sensor 3
Paper caught at the Exit Tray Sensor
Paper caught or does not reach the Finisher Entrance Sensor
Paper caught or does not reach the Finisher Proof Tray Exit Sensor
Paper caught or does not reach the Exit Sensor
Paper caught or does not reach the Booklet Exit Sensor
Paper caught or does not reach the Paper Height Sensor
Staple Jam
Paper Jam for the Jogger Motor
Paper Jam for the Shift Motor
Paper Jam for the Stapler Movement Motor
Paper Jam for the Stapler Rotation Motor
Paper Jam for the Exit Motor
Paper Jam for the Punch Motor
Staple Jam (Booklet)
Paper Jam at the Saddle Stitch
Paper Jam for the Booklet Stapler Motor
Paper caught or does not reach the Mailbox Transport Sensor 1
*: B468 Finisher
APPENDIX-6
30 May, 2002
1.4.2 PAPER SIZE

Code
05
06
07
0E
0F
11
12
24
26
2C
84
85
Paper Size
A4 sideways
A5 sideways
A6 sideways
B5 sideways
B6 sideways
Return post card sideways
Post card sideways
8.5" x 14" sideways
8.5" x 11" sideways
8.5" x 5.5" sideways
A3
A4 lengthwise
Code
86
87
8D
8E
8F
91
92
A0
A4
A6
AC
Paper Size
A5 lengthwise
A6 lengthwise
B4
B5 lengthwise
B6 lengthwise
Return post card lengthwise
Post card lengthwise
11" x 17"
8.5" x 14" lengthwise
8.5" x 11" lengthwise
8.5" x 5.5" lengthwise
1.5 OTHERS
1.5.1 SC630 [RDS COMMUNICATION ERROR]
Frequent occurrence of SC630 indicates a problem in the customers
communication line or line adapter. To maintain the communications environment
in good working order, it is necessary to contact planned inspections periodically.
1.5.2 PM PROCEDURE OR OTHER MAINTENANCE

Before beginning PM or other maintenance procedures, SP5-816-2 should be set
to 0. This will disable the RDS function. When maintenance is completed, SP5816-2 should be set to 1. This will re-enable the RDS function.
NOTE: The RDS function will remain disabled for four hours. Therefore, if
maintenance for longer than four hours is required, SP5-816-2 should be
set to 0 again to disable RDS.
APPENDIX-7
manuals4you.com
M8
M9
PFC
B-10 (2/2)
CN263
s
Active High
t
Active Low
Voltage
Pulse Signal
Signal Direction
715
716
717
687
688
689
M19
687
M20
688
L1
689
714
M21
SOL
4
CN697
CN603
PP3
CO
2
743
723
721
722
902
724
747
700 701 672 702 703
704
707
CN207
745
705
726
706
709
MC SOL M22 SOL M17

6
5
2
708
24V
1
2
CN216
-1
-2
-3
CN347-36
CN347-35
CN347-34
CN347-33
CN347-32
CN347-31
CN347-30
CN347-29
CN347-28
CN347-27
CN347-26
CN347-25
CN347-24
CN347-23
CN347-22
CN347-21
CN347-20
CN347-19
CN347-18
CN347-17
CN347-16
CN347-15
CN347-14
CN347-13
CN347-12
CN347-11
CN347-10
CN347-9
CN347-8
CN347-7
CN347-6
CN347-5
CN347-4
CN347-3
CN347-2
CN347-1
[0] PGND
ON
[24] 24V
CN207-1
CN207-2
CN207-3
CN207-4
CN207-5
CN207-6
CN207-7
CN207-8
CN207-9
CN207-10
CN207-11
CN207-12
CN207-13
CN207-14
CN207-15
CN207-16
CN207-17
CN207-18
CN207-19
CN207-20
CN207-21
CN207-22
CN207-23
CN207-24
CN207-25
CN207-26
CN207-27
CN207-28
CN207-29
CN207-30
CN207-31
CN207-32
CN207-33
CN207-34
CN207-35
CN207-36
CN217
-1
-2
-3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DAC3
GND
DAC2
GND
DAC1
GND
DAC0
PMCLK
XSCRDY
XPMON
GND
XDETP1
5V [5]
GND [0]
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
XSDCLK+
XSDCLK
GND
XSDC+
XSDC
GND
XSDB+
XSDB
GND
XSDA+
XSDA
GND
CN340
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
CN342
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
861
PCB13
742
LSD1
1
2
3
4
Polygonal Mirror Motor

2
1
Laser Synchronization Detector
4
3
2
1
714
Lamp Regulator
749 663
M3
1
2
3
SW
SW: GND
N.C.
Front Cover Safety Switch

CN213
-1
-2
-3
CN404
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
CIS
711
Exposure Lamp
L2
CN740
S24
CN741
RD10
RD42
RD11
RD43
+3V
+3V
RD12
RD44
RD13
RD45
RD14
RD46
RD15
RD47
GND
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
D1CLK
MCKE0
+3V
+3V
/RAS
/CAS
/RWE
MCKE1
/RCS2
RA12
/RCS3
GND
Copy Tray Full

(Option)
873
Guide Plate Position

Sensor
872
3
2
1
3
2
1
871
S23
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[5] Close 5V_SW
LDB
Duplex Cooling Fan Motor
CN401
-1
-2
1 -3
3
PCB8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
By-pass Paper Size

Sensor
VIB (CN431) SBU (CN103)
Toner Supply Motor
1
2
871
Guide Plate Solenoid
1
2
HDD Cooling Fan
By-pass Feed Clutch
SW2
SW1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
By-pass Pick-up Solenoid
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
[t24]
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] GND
Paper Size
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5] Open
[5] 5V
[0]GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
N.C.
N.C.
GND
GND
RD0
RD32
RD1
RD33
RD2
RD34
RD3
RD35
+3V
+3V
RD4
RD36
RD5
RD37
RD6
RD38
RD7
RD39
GND
GND
DQM0
DQM4
DQM1
DQM5
+3V
+3V
RA0
RA3
RA1
RA4
RA2
RA5
GND
GND
RD8
RD40
RD9
RD41
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
744
S22
748
Relay Sensor
CN205
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
GND
GND
SYDI
GND
SYDO
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
GND
GND
LAMPGT
XSLEAD
XSSCAN
XSDSCAN
GND
SYCLK
GND
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
SW
G2 (2/2)
S21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
DROPEN
LDOFF
GND
XLDERR1
XLDERR0
GND
APC3
APC2
APC1
APC0
GND
HDD
1
2
3
CN344
-18
-17
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CN304
CN300
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3
2
1
901 674
S20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Registration Sensor
CN406
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
2
1
S19
CN692
CN403
-1
11
-2
10
9
-3
-4
8
-5
7
-6
6
-7
5
-8
4
-9
3
-10
2
-11
1
896
Toner Density Sensor
CN695
GND
XSYCS
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
S18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Toner End Sensor
GND
GND
GND
TXLOUT1
TXLOUT1+
GND
GND
TXLOUT2
TXLOUT2+
GND
GND
TXLCLK
TXLCLK+
GND
GND
[t24]
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[s24]
[5] 5V
[s5]
[0] GND
VCNT
[12] 12V
Sensor Out
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0 ro 5]
[5] 5V
M1
CN223
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
GND
LDD0+
LDD0
GND
LDD1+
LDD1
GND
LDD2+
LDD2
GND
LDD3+
LDD3
N.C.
-1
-2
-3
-4
CN314 -1
-2
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN343
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
CN306
-1
-2
-3
-4
Mechanical Counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN402
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
CN345
-1
-2
-3
-4
CN300
CN320
CN305
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
-18
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-31
-32
-33
-34
-35
-36
-37
-38
-39
-40
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
VIB (CN430)
SBU (CN102)
T3
694
TB
CN602
FB
PP2
893
CN400
-1
-2
-3
-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
1
SGND
3.3V
3.3V
SGND
3.3VE
SGND
5V
SGND
CN346
+5V
GND
T2
CN736
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
CN348
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
TXFCLK+
TXFCLK
TXFOUT2+
TXFOUT2
TXFOUT1+
TXFOUT1
GND
SYCLK
GND
SYDO
GND
SYDI
GND
XSYCS
TXLCLK+
TXLCLK
TXLOUT2+
TXLOUT2
TXLOUT1+
TXLOUT1
12V
PGND
GND
5V
T1
734
/RESET
GND
DD7
DD8
DD6
DD9
DD5
DD10
DD4
DD11
DD3
DD12
DD2
DD13
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
GND
(KEYPIN)
DMARQ
GND
/DIOW
GND
/DIOR
GND
/IORDY
CSEL
/DMACK
GND
INTRQ
(RESERVE)
DA1
/PDIAG
DA0
DA2
/CS0
/CS1
/DASP
GND
Transfer P.P.
713
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
712
GND
GND
GND
TXFOUT1
TXFOUT1+
GND
GND
TXFOUT2
TXFOUT2+
GND
GND
TXFCLK
TXFCLK+
GND
GND
B2
711
690
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
CN730
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
Toner Cooling Fan

Motor
CN433
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
890
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN341
-20
-19
-18
-17
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
PCB3
Controller
Transfer Belt Lift Sol.
M4
D31
/CARDCS
RSV
RSV
RSV
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
+5V
+5V
A22
A23
RSV
RSV
RSV
RSV
RSV
RSV
+5V
RSV
RSV
D24
D25
D26
RSV
GND
Devlopment P.P.
PCB7
OPU
[0] GND
[0 or 5]
[5] 5V
[s5] Drum Earth
[s5] Counter Bias
FB: Bias
PWM: Bias
[24] 24V-INT
[0] PGND
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] PGND
[24] 24V-INT
FB: Transfer Voltage
FB: Transfer Current
PWM: Transfer
N.C.
VIB (CN432)
SBU (CN101)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
CN204
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
PCB5
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
GND
LD3_MTR
LD2_MTR
LD1_MTR
LD0_MTR
GND
GND
?????
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
VIB
PSU
H2 (2/2)
B1
1
2
3
3
2
1
CN435
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
S17
710
CN117
898
14
30
15
31
16
32
PCB6
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
Jogger Motor
14
30
15
31
16
32
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN105
OPU: XPW_SW
OPU: +5VE
OPU: OP_REQ
OPU: GND
OPU: OP_RXD
OPU: OP_RCLK
OPU: GND
OPU: OP_TCLK
OPU: OP_TXD
OPU: +5V
OPU: +5V
OPU: +24V
CN437
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
-18
-19
-20
PCB1
GND
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
/CARDCS
A10
/OE
A11
A9
A8
A13
A14
/WEB2
RSV
+5V
+5V
A16
A15
A12
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
/B3
GND
D16
D17
D18
NC
GND
GND
NC
D27
D28
D29
D30
1
2
3
4
5
6
PSU
H5 (2/2)
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
[24] 24V
[t24]
Scanner Motor
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
CN434
-1
-2
CN430
CN431
CN432
RAM_DIMM
128MB
Mother Board
3
2
1
S15
Duplex Transport Sensor 2
735
2
1
CN441
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
FFC
FFC
FFC
CN321
5VE
5VE
PETXD
PERXD
GND
GND
1
2
3
S14
SBU
1
2
CN102
CN103
CN101
CN438
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
+24V
PGND
S16
S13
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Key Counter
CN436
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
899
IC -Card connector (CN312)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Duplex Transport
Sensor 3
S12
SOL SOL MC
2
3
1
738 739 737
S11
686
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN202
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
897
Duplex Transport Clutch
CN684
[24] 24V
[t24] 24
[24] 24V
Zero Cross
[t24] 24
Fusing Lamp 1 ON [t5]
[24] 24V
[t24]
Power Tray TRG [t24]
N.C.
24V-INT [24]
[5] 5V
PGND [0]
[t5]
24V [24]
[0] GND
Test (+)
[5] 5V
Test ()
[t5]
N.C.
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[t5] Duplex Unit Set
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[s5]
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
N.C.
[24] 24V
[240/24] A
[240/24] -A
[240/24] -B
[240/24] B
[24] 24V
891
CN206
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
-A16
-A17
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
-B16
-B17
658
Duplex Janction Gate Sol.
733
CO1
XPW_SW
OP_REQ
GND
OP_RXD
OP_RCLK
GND
OP_TCLK
OP_TXD
GND
?????
5VE
N.C.
3.3VE
SGND
5V
SGND
12VH
PGND
PGND
24V
N.C.
N.C.
Reverse Trigger Roller Sol.
732
CN683
1
17
2
18
3
19
PCB12
1
17
2
18
3
19
SDRB
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN325
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
(PEACE)
784
854
RSS: +5VE
RSS: RXD
RSS: TXD
RSS: GND
RSS: XCTS
RSS: XRST
2
1
2
1
2
1
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M12
GND [0]
Set [t5]
24V [24]
ON [t24]
[24]
[t24]
XSLEAD
XSSCAN
XDSCAN
XLAMPGATE
GND
LD0 Current Monitor
LD1 Current Monitor
LD2 Current Monitor
LD3 Current Monitor
LDCUT
Finisher
[t5] () CCW
[t5] (+) CW
[5] 5V
CNT
OUT
[24] 24V
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
[12] 12V
[0] GND
OUT
PGND
+24V
PCB9
2
1
3
2
1
730 731
CN173
-1
-2
CNB
1
2
1
2
3
CN728
12 1
11 2
10 3
9 4
8 5
7 6
6 7
5 8
4 9
3 10
2 11
1 12
PHASE-A
PHASE-B
PHASE-C
PHASE-D
PHASE-E
CN640
CN175
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
2 1
1 2
3 3
2 4
1 5
2 6
1 7
5 8
4 9
3 10
2 11
1 12
682
5V
12V
GND
24V
PGND
Charge Corona Wire Cleaner

Motor
Image Density
S9
Sensor
657
CN182
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
CN180
-1
-2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ADF
5VE
5VE
SGND
SGND
5VE
5VE
SGND
SGND
N.C.
CN210
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
652
CN181
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Scanner HP
Sensor
CN323
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
SW-TRG
SGND
CN211
12 -1
11 -2
10 -3
9 -4
8 -5
7 -6
6 -7
5 -8
4 -9
3 -10
2 -11
1 -12
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
S4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S8
729
5V [5]
GND [0]
CLK [0/5]
Direction
Mag.
Out Enable
Reset
Motor Ref V. 1
Motor Ref V. 2
Motor Ref V. 3
3
2
1
1
2
3
114
CN322
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
14
15
8
9
10
11
12
13
[5] 5V
[s5]
[0] GND
[t5] CW
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
N.C.
[t5] Exit Unit Set
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
CN115
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S7
14
15
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN203
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
CN116
CN324
-2
-1
1
2
1
2
1
2
M18 SOL
1
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FIN: T24V
FIN: RXD
FIN: TGND
FIN: TXD
FIN: 5V
FIN: 5V
FIN: GND
FIN: GND
N.C.
FIN: PGND
FIN: PGND
FIN: PGND
FIN: PGND
FIN: 24V
FIN: 24V
FIN: 24V
FIN: 24V
N.C.
P1
P2
P3
G
1
2
S10
M17
CN327
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Drum Potential
Sensor
676 675
1
2
3
1
2
3
PP1
Web Motor
CN601
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN639
CN328
-1
-2
Exit Janction Gate

Solenoid
681
1
2
3
2
1
2
1
CN651
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
CN655
1
2
3
S3
CN654
S6
Original Length
Sensor 2
S2
LCT
S5
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN174
-1
-2
-3
-4
CN633
2
1
Quenching Fan
M14 M15 M16
Original Length
Sensor 1
S1
GND [0]
5V [5]
24V [24]
GND [0]
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
CN120
PSU
F3 (2/2)
1
2
PCU Cooling Fan
AC Line
CN677
M1
CN326
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Paper Exit Sensor
SYMBOL TABLE
Original Width
Sensor
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND [0]
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND [0]
RXD
GND [0]
TXD
ASIC Cooling Fan
6
5
4
3
2
1
Exit Unit Entrance

Sensor
M13
678
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
1
CN610
T2
CN679
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J5 (2/2)
1
2
3
4
5
6

Sensor
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN638
CN212
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-B1
-B2
-B3
CN637
GND [0]
5V [5]
Width 3 [t5]
Width 2 [t5]
Width 1 [t5]
GND [0]
5V [5]
[t5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
5V [5]
[t5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
7
12
13
6
11
5
10
9
14
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PCB2
CN404
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Web End Sensor
DC Line
RSS
T1
CN625
AB (18)
AB (19)
AB (20)
AB (21)
5V
DB (8)
DB (9)
DB (10)
XCD2
GND
CN636
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
N.C.
LCT: RXD
N.C.
LCT: TXD
LCT: 5V
LCT: 5V
LCT: GND
LCT: GND
N.C.
N.C.
LCT: PGND
LCT: PGND
LCT: PGND
LCT: PGND
LCT: 24V
LCT: 24V
LCT: 24V
LCT: 24V
N.C.
N.C.
CN168
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
CN635
1
2
IC Card Connector (CN208)
Thermistor 1
GND [0]
Thermistor 1
Thermistor 2
GND [0]
Fusing Exit sensor
GND [0]
NA
GND [0]
N.C.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PGND [0]
24V [24]
12V [12]
5V [5]
GND [0]
XLAMPGT
GND [0]
XSSCAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Controller (CN304) MB (CN320)
Charge P.P.
M24
AB (6)
AB (5)
AB (4)
AB (3)
AB (2)
AB (1)
AB (0)
DB (0)
DB (1)
DB (2)
GND
GND
XCD1
DB (11)
DB (12)
DB (13)
DB (14)
DB (15)
GND
AB (17)
AD30
XGNT4
RSV
XGNT1
XINTD
XINTA
XRST
GND
GND
RSV
GND
GND
+5VE
+5VE
+5VE
+5VE
PERXD
CSSRST
CSSRXD
XSYSBOT
PGND
PGND
GND
OPMRXD
OPMTCLK
CSSRTS
GND
GND
+5VH
+5VH
Drum Cooling Fan
2
1
2
1
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CN209
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
635
[24] 24V
[t24] ON
[s5]
[H: High, L: Low] Speed
[24] 24V
[t24] ON
[24] 24V
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
N.C.
[24] 24V
[t24]
FB: Grid
PWM: Grid
[t5] Leak: Charge
PWM: Grid
[0] PGND
[24] 24V-INT
[0] GND
[0/5]
[5] 5V
GND
DB (3)
DB (4)
DB (5)
DB (6)
DB (7)
GND
AB (10)
XOECRD
AB (11)
AB (9)
AB (8)
AB (13)
AB (14)
XWECRD
5V
AB (16)
AB (15)
AB (12)
AB (7)
[0] GND
[24] 24V
24V [24]
24V [24]
PGND [0]
PGND [0]
5V [5]
SGND [0]
24V [24]
PGND [0]
3.3V [3.3]
CN162
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Toner Supply Clutch
PSU
H5 (2/2)
CN119
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
CN165
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
CN170
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
[0] GND
[12] 12V
[12] +12V
[0] GND
[3.3] 3.3V
DFSCAN
XLAMPGT
ADF: TXD
ADF: RXD
FIN: TXD
FIN: RXD
LCT: TXD
LCT: RXD
N.C.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PSU
I5 (2/2)
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SW_DT
AD0
AD2
AD4
AD6
GND
AD8
AD10
AD12
AD14
GND
PAR
XPERR
XDEVSEL
XIRDY
GND
GND
AD16
AD18
AD20
AD22
GND
AD24
AD26
AD28
CN215
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
1
2
1
2
4
3
2
1
2
1
4
3
2
1
Lower Relay Motor Current

[55/0] A : Lower Relay Motor
[55/0] B : Lower Relay Motor
[55/0] A : Duplex Inverter Motor
[55/0] B : Duplex Inverter Motor
[55/0] A : Duplex Transport Motor
[55/0] B : Duplex Transport Motor
[55/0] A : Registration Motor
[55/0] B : Registration Motor
Registration Motor Current
[5] 5V Key Card

[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
Key Card Set
[24] 24V Key Card
Key Card Data 7
Key Card Data 6
Key Card Data 5
Key Card Data 4
Key Card Data 3
Key Card Data 2
Key Card Data 1
Key Card Data 0
[0] GND
Key Card Count
CN166
-A13
-A12
-A11
-A10
-A9
-A8
-A7
-A6
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
-A1
-B13
-B12
-B11
-B10
-B9
-B8
-B7
-B6
-B5
-B4
-B3
-B2
-B1
CN161
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
CN163
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
AD31
XREQ4
XPWRCTL1
XREQ1
GND
RSV
XPME
GND
PCLK4
GND
PCLK5
GND
SW_TRG
ENGRDY
GND
GND
PETXD
CSSCTS
CSSTXD
XOPPWR_SW
GND
GND
OPMRCLK
OPMRREQ
OPMTXD
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
+12V
Development Unit
Cooling Fan 1
Development Unit
Cooling Fan 2
M10
CN219
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
PCB10
CN141
-A9
-A8
-A7
-A6
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
-A1
-B9
-B8
-B7
-B6
-B5
-B4
-B3
-B2
-B1
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Charge P.P. Cooling Fan
CN624
MC
3
+5VE
+5VE
+5VE
+5VE
+5VE
+5VE
AD1
AD3
AD5
AD7
C/BE0
AD9
AD11
AD13
AD15
C/BE1
XSERR
XSTOP
XTRDY
XFRAME
GND
C/BE2
AD17
AD19
AD21
AD23
C/BE3
AD25
AD27
AD29
CN218
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
Drive Board (DRB)

24V [24]
PGND [0]
12V [12]
12V [12]
PGND [0]
24V [24]
24V [24]
PGND [0]
PGND [0]
5V [5]
SGND [0]
24VS [24]
PGND [0]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
ON [t5]
Toner Supply CL [t5]
Lock [s5]
M7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CN222
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
[24] 24V
[0] PGND
[s24] 24VS
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s24] 24VS
[0] PGND
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[0] GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fusing/Exit Motor Development Motor
PFC: TXD
GND
PFC: RXD
GND
CN164
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
CN172
-1
-2
CN171
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
CN632
GND
PCI_IRDYB
PCI_DEVSELB
PCI_PERRB
PCI_PAR
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD10
PCI_AD8
GND
PCI_AD6
PCI_AD4
PCI_AD2
PCI_AD0
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CN221
-1
-2
-3
-4
2
1
[24] 24V
[s24] 24VS
N.C.
N.C.
[24] 24V
[s24] 24VS
24VS [24]
PGND [0]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
ON [t5]
CW/CCW
Lock
24VS [24]
PGND [0]
+5V [t5]
GND [0]
ON [t5]
Lock [t5]
M6
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Exhaust Fan
CN772
PCI_CBE0
PCI_AD7
PCI_AD5
PCI_AD3
PCI_AD1
GND
GND
GND
GND
SLEPON
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
PCI_INTB
GND
GND
PCI_GNTB
PCI_AD30
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD24
GND
PCI_AD22
PCI_AD20
PCI_AD18
PCI_AD16
GND
CN201
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
CN140
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
CN167
-1
-6
-3
-4
-2
-5
MB (CN321) IPU (CN346)
4
3
2
1
CN731
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Lower Relay
Motor
CN738

J2 (1/2)
1
T15 (2A)
T16 (2B)
1 (1A)
-1
SW3
[240/24] -B
[24] 24V-INT
[240/24] B
[240/24] A
[24] 24V-INT
[240/24] -A
[24] 24V-INT
[240/24] A
[240/24] -A
[24] 24V INT
[240/24] B
[240/24] -B
N.C.
[24] 24V
[2424/0] A
[2424/0] -A
[24] 24V
[2424/0] B
[2424/0] -B
[24] 24V
[224/0] A
[224/0] -A
[24] 24V
[2424/0] B
[224/0] -B
CN631
CN142
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
CN143
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
M5
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
7
8
9
6
5
4
12
11
10
Drum Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
6
5
4
12
11
10
634
GND
ENGRDY
PCI_CLK
GND
GDN
GND
GND
GND
GND
PCI_REQB
PCI_AD31
PCI_AD29
PCI_AD27
PCI_AD25
PCI_CBE3
PCI_AD23
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD17
PCI_CBE2
PCI_RSTB
PCI_FRAMEB
PCI_TRDYB
PCI_STOPB
PCI_SERRB
PCI_CBE1
PCI_AD15
PCI_AD13
PCI_AD11
PCI_AD9
Registration
Motor
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Duplex Transport
Motor
Duplex Inverter
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
B064/B065 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 1/2
CNB
A5 (1/2)
862
PCB4
IPU
CN374
872
BCU (CN207) IPU (CN347)

EXAB (0)
EXAB (2)
EXAB (4)
EXAB (6)
EXAB (8)
EXAB (10)
EXAB (12)
GND
XRSTCDIC
XINTCDIC
BCU_STATE
SLEEP_OFF
GND
EXDB (1)
EXDB (3)
EXDB (5)
GND
EXDB (7)
3.3VE
GND
EXDB (6)
EXDB (4)
EXDB (2)
EXDB (0)
GND
XERD_IPU
XEWR_IPU
XCSCDIC
PWR_CTL0
GND
EXAB (11)
EXAB (9)
EXAB (7)
EXAB (5)
EXAB (3)
EXAB (1)
PCB11
BCU
720
2nd Paper Feed Motor
M27
SW5
2nd Tray Lift Motor
CN815
CN829
3rd Paper Size Switch
SW4
CN822
2nd Paper Size Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN815
CN828
CN269
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
M28
CN823
1st Tray Lift Motor
M29
Toner Collection Bottle Set Switch
SW6
Toner Overflow Switch
SW7
M31
2
1
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN830
3rd Tray Lift Motor
820
M27
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN270
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
2
CN264
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-12
CN268
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
[0] GND
[t5] Paper Size 5
[t5] Paper Size 4
[t5] Paper Size 3
[t5] Paper Size 2
[t5] Paper Size 1
[0] GND
[t5] Paper Size 5
[t5] Paper Size 4
[t5] Paper Size 3
[t5] Paper Size 2
[t5] Paper Size 1
Near End
[0] CGND
Paper Height
[t5] Up
[t5] Down
Near End
[0] CGND
Paper Height
[t24] Up
[t24] Down
[t24] Up
[t24] Down
Lower Tray Heater
Upper Tray Heater
H4
L [Main Sw. ON: 230 or1150]

N [Main Sw. ON: 230 or1150]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN117
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
SGND [0]
3.3V [3.3]
3.3V [3.3]
SGND [0]
3.3VE [3.3]
SGND [0]
5V [5]
SGND [0]
1
2
1
2
-4
CN104
-1
1
2
1
2
CN103
-1
-4
-2
-5
-2
-5
T7

N-ON [0230 or115]

L-ON [0230 or115]
N
L
CN111
-2
-1
CN101
-2
-1
T102
ACIN-L
[5] 5VE
[5] 5VE
[0] SGND
[0] SGND
[5] 5VE
[5] 5VE
[0] SGND
[0] SGND
N.C.
Exposure Lamp 2
L4
Exposure Lamp 1
L3
T8
T5
Thermostat 2
TS2
TH
S50
TH2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
TH1
Thermistor 2
Drum, Scanner, Tray Heater (115V only)

Main
5V: PFC, ADF
5V: VIB, DRB, BCU, Development
24V: PFC, MB
24V: ADF
24V: SDRB, DRB
24V: Finisher
24V: BCU, Drum Motor, Fusing/Exit Motor
24V: DRB, Development Motor
24V: VIB, BCU, Polygonal Mirror Motor
7
12
13
6
11
5
10
9
14
T101
CN103-1, -2, CN104-1, -2
CN111-1
CN119-1, CN113-4
CN119-2
CN113-1, CN115-8
CN120-1
CN120-2
CN120-3
CN120-4
CN120-5
CN120-6
CN610
7
12
13
6
11
5
10
9
14
20A
12A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
CB1
FU1
FU101
FU103
FU104
FU105
FU106
FU107
FU108
FU109
FU110
FU111
Comment
Thermistor 1
Fuse
Fusing Exit Sensor
FG
SW-TRG
SGND
CN266
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
Right Tray Set [t5]

GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[t5]
5V [5]
24V [24]
[t24]
24V [24]
[t24]
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Left Tray Set [t5]

[t24]
[t24]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
[t5]
GND [0]
5V [5]
CN265
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
-A16
-A17
-A18
-A19
-A20
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
-B16
-B17
-B18
-B19
-B20
T30
CN267
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-B1
-B2
-B3
T31
[0] GND
[t5]
[0] GND
[tt5]
[t5] Lock
[t5] ON
[0] PGND
[24] 24V
-3
CN120
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
2
1
ACIN-N
T101
CN261
-1
-2
Lower Front Door Safety Switch

SW8
[240/24] B
[240/24] B
[24] COM
[240/24] A
[240/24] A
[24] COM
[240/24] B
[240/24] B
[24] COM
[240/24] A
[240/24] A
[24] COM
CN276
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24V-INT [s24]
[24]
CN116
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-1
TH
-4
PCB15
[3.3] 3.3VE
[0] SGND
[5] 5V
[0] SGND
[12] 12VH
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[24] 24V
N.C.
N.C.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PSU
Thermostat 1
TS1
-1
-2
-2
2N
1N
[5] 5V
[5] 5V
[0] SGND
[0] SGND
[12] 12V
[12] 12V
[0] PGND
[3.3] 3.3V
CN850
CN850
[240/24] B
[240/24] B
[24] COM
[240/24] A
[240/24] A
[24] COM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN115
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
CN102
-4
-3
L
L
24V [24]
[t24]
24V [24]
[t24]
GND [0]
[t5]
N.C.
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
14
15
16
17
18
19
38
39
40
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
-B4
-B5
2
1
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
2
1
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
14
15
16
17
18
19
38
39
40
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
T32
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
S37
S38
S39
S40
S41
Right Tray Down Sensor
S42
Near End Sensor
S43
S44
S45
S46
1
2
1
2
1
2
CN202
BCU
F5 (1/2)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
M26
CN274
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
PCB14
CN114
-1
-2
Fusing Unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3rd Paper Feed Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN850
CN853
M25
CN850
CN852
1st Paper Feed Motor
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
6
5
4
3
2
1
324
PFC
CN275
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
MB
D2 (1/2)
Key Counter L
Key Counter N
2
1
CN348
M34
CN119
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
841
1
2
PSU Cooling Fan
M33
612 613
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
S36
SOL
12
VIB
H4 (1/2)
[0] T-GND
[0] T-24V
[24] 24V
[0] GND
[24] 24V-INT
[t24] Relay ON
[s5] Fusing Lamp 2 ON
[0/5] Zero Cross
840

3rd Separation Roller Solenoid
893
CN105
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
S35
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
614 615
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
842
SOL
11
CN112
-1
-2
PSU Cooling Fan
CN352
-1
-2
CN322
844
1
2
3rd Pick-up Solenoid
24V
GND
GND
5V
CN351
-1
-2
CN323
S34
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
-B16
CN113
-1
-2
-3
-4
CN814
845
3rd Vertical Transport Sensor
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
CN801
CN803
T2
T1
T6
IPU
G4 (1/2)
CN260
-1
-2
-3
-4
818
S33
24V
GND
GND
5V
CN813
846
SOL
10
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
CN814
1
2
2nd Separation Roller Solenoid
CN271
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
-A16
CN161
CN162
CN210
CNB
C2 (1/2)
CNB
B2 (1/2)
BCU
D4 (1/2)
Right Tray Paper Sensor

SOL
13
Front Side Fence Solenoid
SOL
14
Rear Side Fence Solenoid
M32
Rear Fence Motor
SYMBOL TABLE
AC Line
DC Line
Pulse Signal
Signal Direction
1
2
1
2
[
SOL
15
Right Tray Lock Solenoid
SOL
16
Active High
T34
816
S32
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
819
840
754 753
SOL
8
S31
755
1
2
S28
842
1st Separation Roller Solenoid
S27
SOL
7
841
1
2
S26
846
840
1st Pick-up Solenoid
1st Vertical Transport Sensor
844
845
S25
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
841
2nd Pick-up Solenoid
SOL
9
842
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN809
CN809
CN809
CN811
844
1
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN801
CN801
CN801
CN804
S30
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
CN809
CN812
2nd Vertical Transport Sensor
845
S29
846
CN272
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
CN273
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
2nd Paper Feed Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Scanner Heater
(Option)
BCU
B7 (1/2)
1
2
3
4
T4
T3
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t5]
RXD: PFC
GND
TXD: PFC
GND
CN221
FG
H2
Main Switch
SW9
AC IN
CN263
-4
-3
-2
-1
H3
Drum Heater
H1
B064/B065 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 2/2
Left Tray Lock Solenoid
manuals4you.com
Active Low
]
Voltage
B064/B065 ADF POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
Bottom Plate
Position Sensor
S3
CN422-3
-2
-1
Feed Cover
Sensor
S4
CN423-3
-2
-1
S5
CN416-3
-2
-1
S6
CN415-3
-2
-1
Original Width 3
Sensor
S7
CN414-3
-2
-1
Original Width 4
Sensor
S8
CN413-3
-2
-1
Pick-up Roller
HP Sensor
S9
CN412-3
-2
-1
Original Width 1
Sensor
Original Width 2
Sensor
S10
S11
S12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Original Length 1
Sensor
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN410-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
CN430-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
CN432-4
-3
-2
-1
Original Length 3
Sensor
T1
CN433-4
-3
-2
-1
Original Length 2
Sensor
T2
DF Position
Sensor
S13
APS Start Sensor
S14
CN440-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
CN441-3
-2
-1
Exit Sensor
Registration
Sensor
CN403-3
-2
-1
S16
CN404-3
-2
-1
S17
S18
CN406-3
-2
-1
CN405-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN401
S15
CN402
Skew Correction
Sensor
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[st5]
[0] GND
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[0] GND
N.C.
CN431-4
-3
-2
-1
CN442-3
-2
-1
Interval Sensor
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5] close
[5] 5V
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN400-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
[0] GND
[t5] Lift Up
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
CN110-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
CN1-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
N.C.
RXD
GND [0]
TXD
GND [0]
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
CN120-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
CN2-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
GND [0]
5V [5]
24V [24]
GND [0]
CN100-1
-2
-3
-4
CN3-P1
-P2
-P3
-G
DFGATE
GND [0]
XLAMPGT
GND [0]
5V [5]
12V [12]
24V [24]
GND [0]
DF Main Board
Copier
T1
PCB1
24V [24]
24V [24]
N.C.
A [240/24]
A [240/24]
B [240/24]
B [240/24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
N.C.
A [240/24]
A [240/24]
B [240/24]
B [240/24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
N.C.
A [240/24]
A [240/24]
B [240/24]
B [240/24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
N.C.
A [240/24]
A [240/24]
B [240/24]
B [240/24]
N.C.
24V [24]
A [240/24]
A [240/24]
B [240/24]
B [240/24]
24V [24]
CGND [0]
XSCLK
CGND [0]
XSOUT
CGND [0]
XSIN
XCS
CGND [0]
XLAMPC
N.C.
XSSCAN
CGND [0]
XSLEAD
24V [24]
GLAMP
12V [12]
GND [0]
5V [5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
5V [5]
CN310-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
3
9
1
5
7
11
CN330-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
3
9
1
5
7
11
Feed Motor
M2
Transport Motor
M3
Exit Motor
Pick-up Motor
M5
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN320-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
M1
M4
3
9
1
5
7
11
CN311
CN425-3
-2
-1
CN420-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
CN312
S2
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN331
Bottom Plate
HP Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN321
CN320
CN424-3
-2
-1
CN411
S1
CN421
Original Set
Sensor
Bottom Plate
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN340-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
CN200-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
CN210-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
CN201-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN211-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
GND
XSDA
XSDA+
GND
XSDB
XSDB+
GND
XSDC
XSDC+
GND
XSDCLK+
CIS Board
F.G.
PCB2
VLAMP
LAMPC
GLAMP
CN1-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
CN4-1
-2
-3
CN2-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN1-1
-2
-3
CIS
Power
Supply
V0
V0
CN2-1
-6
Copier
IPU
SYMBOL TABLE
CIS
AC Line
L1
DC Line
PCB3
LEDC
5V
Pulse Signal
CN6-1
-2
Signal Direction
s
Active High
t
[
Active Low
]
Voltage
B064/B065 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (1/2)

Main Machine
11
10
13
52
49
48
14
15
16
51
50
12
26
27
28
29
53
30
31
17
54
32
18
47
33
46
34
45
35
19
25
20
55
57
58
36
44
24
56
63
43
7
8
37
42
23
22
B064V003.WMF
40
41
21
39
59
38
60
62
61
B064V954.WMF
B064V951.WMF
B064V955.WMF
86
85
84
71
87
64
88
72
83
89
100
90
82
73
81
65
74
91
99
75
80
93
76
70
94
98
95
66
77
96
67
69
92
78
68
97
79
B064V008.WMF
B064V956.WMF
B064V957.WMF
103
116
102
101
115
143
117
126
ADF
128
129
25
142
104
23
141
105
114
127
144
106
108
119
110
120
123
109
5
6
7
8
20
121
122
131
138
137
136
B064V910.WMF
10
11
17
133
135
9
19
18
132
12
16
134
B064V959.WMF
24
124
107
111
130
139
112
21
118
113
27
22
140
125
26
13
15
B064V958.WMF
manuals4you.com
14
B064V996.WMF
B064/B065 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (2/2)

Main Machine
Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
Index No.
M14
87
M15
19
M16
20
M17
M18
88
107
M19
67
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
99
121
64
98
32
47
41
42
96
97
95
73
138
59
60
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
92
89
22
100
85
84
90
122
120
94
93
17
86
24
14
15
11
72
108
113
112
69
70
124
126
123
118
115
117
71
66
ADF
Description
HDD Cooling Fan
ASIC Cooling Fan
Polygonal Mirror
Toner Cooling Fan
Drum
Fusing/Exit
Development
Duplex Inverter
Duplex Transport
Registration
By-pass Feed
Scanner
Exhaust Fan
Charge Power Pack
Cooling Fan
Development Unit Cooling
Fan 1
Fan 2
Drum Cooling Fan
Web
Charge Corona Wire
Cleaner
PCU Cooling Fan
Jogger
Toner Supply
Duplex Cooling Fan
Lower Relay
1st Paper Feed
3rd Paper Feed
2nd Paper Feed
2nd Tray Lift
3rd Tray Lift
1st Tray Lift
Toner Collection
Rear Fence
PSU Cooling Fan 1
PSU Cooling Fan 2
Original Width
Original Length 1
Original Length 2
Scanner HP
Web End
Exit Unit Entrance
Paper Exit
Image Density (ID)
Drum Potential
Duplex Entrance
Duplex Inverter
Duplex Transport 1
Duplex Jogger HP
Duplex Transport 2
Duplex Transport 3
Toner Collection Coil
Toner End
P to P
H3 (1/2)
D1 (1/2)
J2 (1/2)
G5 (1/2)
A2 (1/2)
A2 (1/2)
A2 (1/2)
A7 (1/2)
A7 (1/2)
A7 (1/2)
E4 (1/2)
D7 (1/2)
D7 (1/2)
D7 (1/2)
D7 (1/2)
D7 (1/2)
E7 (1/2)
E7
F7 (1/2)
G7 (1/2)
I7 (1/2)
J7 (1/2)
A7 (1/2)
C3 (2/2)
C4 (2/2)
C4 (2/2)
C6 (2/2)
C6 (2/2)
C7 (2/2)
C7 (2/2)
F6 (2/2)
G2 (2/2)
G2 (2/2)
D5 (1/2)
D5 (1/2)
D5 (1/2)
D5 (1/2)
D6 (1/2)
E7 (1/2)
E7 (1/2)
E7 (1/2)
F7 (1/2)
F7 (1/2)
F7 (1/2)
F7 (1/2)
G7 (1/2)
G7 (1/2)
G7 (1/2)
G7 (1/2)
G7 (1/2)
H7 (1/2)
Symbol
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
S33
S34
S35
S36
S37
S38
S39
S40
S41
S42
S43
S44
S45
S46
S47
S48
S49
S50
Index No.
65
1
7
8
6
2
26
27
28
29
43
44
45
46
40
39
38
37
137
140
127
144
134
132
141
133
135
131
142
143
139
111
Description
Toner Density (TD)
Registration
By-pass Paper End
Relay
By-pass Paper Size
1st Paper Feed
1st Vertical Transport
1st Paper End
1st Tray Lift
2nd Paper Feed
2nd Vertical Transport
2nd Paper End
2nd Tray Lift
3rd Paper Feed
3rd Vertical Transport
3rd Paper End
3rd Tray Lift
Front Side Fence Open
Front Side Fence Close
Rear Side Fence Open
Rear Side Fence Close
Right Tray Down
Near End
Paper Height 1
Paper Height 2
Paper Height 3
Right Tray Paper
Rear Fence HP
Rear Fence Return
Left Tray Paper
Fusing Exit
P to P
I7 (1/2)
I7 (1/2)
I7 (1/2)
I7 (1/2)
J7 (1/2)
J7 (1/2)
A2 (2/2)
A2 (2/2)
A2 (2/2)
A2 (2/2)
C2 (2/2)
C2 (2/2)
C2 (2/2)
C2 (2/2)
C2 (2/2)
C2 (2/2)
C3 (2/2)
C3 (2/2)
F5 (2/2)
F5 (2/2)
F5 (2/2)
F5 (2/2)
F5 (2/2)
F5 (2/2)
F5 (2/2)
F5 (2/2)
F6 (2/2)
F6 (2/2)
F6 (2/2)
F7 (2/2)
F7 (2/2)
J2 (2/2)
Switches
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
80
82
81
77
78
75
74
79
83
Front Door Safety 1

Front Door Safety 2
Front Door Safety 3
2nd Paper Size
3rd Paper Size
Toner Collection Bottle Set
Toner Overflow
Lower Front Door Safety
Main
I5 (1/2)
I5 (1/2)
A5 (1/2)
C6 (2/2)
C6 (2/2)
C7 (2/2)
C7 (2/2)
E3 (2/2)
G1 (2/2)
Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
SOL3
SOL4
SOL5
SOL6
SOL7
SOL8
SOL9
SOL10
SOL11
SOL12
SOL13
SOL14
109
117
125
105
3
4
30
31
32
34
35
36
136
128
Exit Junction Gate

Reverse Trigger Roller
Duplex Junction Gate
Transfer Belt Lift
By-pass Pick-up
Guide Plate
1st Pick-up
1st Separation Roller
2nd Pick-up
2nd Separation Roller
3rd Pick-up
3rd Separation Roller
Front Side Fence
Rear Side Fence
E7 (1/2)
F7 (1/2)
F7 (1/2)
H7 (1/2)
I7 (1/2)
J7 (1/2)
A2 (2/2)
A2 (2/2)
C2 (2/2)
C2 (2/2)
C3 (2/2)
C3 (2/2)
F6 (2/2)
F6 (2/2)
Symbol
SOL15
SOL16
Index No.
Description
130
Right Tray Lock
129
Left Tray Lock
Magnetic Clutches
MC1
122
MC2
5
MC3
91
PCBs
PCB1
PCB2
PCB3
52
48
53
PCB4
54
PCB5
PCB6
PCB7
PCB8
PCB9
PCB10
18
16
25
23
49
56
PCB11
50
PCB12
13
PCB13
PCB14
PCB15
12
58
57
Lamps
L1
L2
L3
L4
68
10
110
106
Power Packs
PP1
51
PP2
55
PP3
104
Others
CO1
CO2
H1
H2
H3
H4
76
63
9
61
62
LSD1
21
TH1
TH2
TS1
TS2
101
114
102
103
P to P
F7 (2/2)
F7 (2/2)
Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Index No.
Description
P to P
Mother
RSS
Controller
IPU (Image Processing
Control Unit)
Operation Panel
LDB (Laser Drive Board)
DRB (Drive Board)
BCU (Base Engine Control
Unit)
SDRB (Scanner Drive
Board)
Lamp Regulator
PSU
Quenching Lamp
Exposure Lamp
Fusing Lamp 1
Fusing Lamp 2
F7 (1/2)
I7 (1/2)
B2 (1/2)
E2 (1/2)
D1 (1/2)
G2 (1/2)
H3 (1/2)
G4 (1/2)
F5 (1/2)
G5 (1/2)
I4 (1/2)
D4 (1/2)
A5 (1/2)
H6 (1/2)
E5 (1/2)
J7 (1/2)
D2 (2/2)
H2 (2/2)
F7 (1/2)
J7 (1/2)
J2 (2/2)
J2 (2/2)
Charge
Development
Transfer
D6 (1/2)
H6 (1/2)
H7 (1/2)
Key Counter (Option)

Mechanical Counter
Drum
Scanner (Option)
Lower Tray
Upper Tray
Laser Synchronization
Detector
Thermistor 1
Thermistor 2
Thermostat 1
Thermostat 2
E5 (1/2)
H7 (1/2)
H1 (2/2)
H1 (2/2)
H1 (2/2)
H1 (2/2)
J2 (1/2)
J3 (2/2)
J3 (2/2)
J2 (2/2)
J2 (2/2)
Feed
Transport
Exit
Pick-up
Bottom Plate
J3
J4
J4
J5
J5
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
14
15
3
2
24
23
22
21
1
8
7
6
9
10
26
16
17
25
Original Set
Bottom Plate HP
Bottom Plate Position
Feed Cover
Original Width 1
Original Width 2
Original Width 3
Original Width 4
Pick-up Roller HP
Original Length 3
Original Length 2
Original Length 1
DF Position
APS Start
Interval
Skew Correction
Exit
Registration
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A3
A3
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A5
A6
A6
A6
A7
A7
PCBs
PCB1
PCB2
PCB3
11
20
19
DF Main
CIS
CIS Power Supply
E4
G7
H7
Lamps
L1
Duplex Transport
By-pass Feed
Toner Supply
4
13
12
27
5
18
CIS
I7
LCT (B473) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM

1
Cover Open ["5]

CGND [0]
VAAR [+24]
VAAS [+24]
Cover Open ["24]
VCC [5]
["5]
CGND [0]
Near End
Sensor
CN135-1
-2
-3
S6
CN105-12
-11
-10
[5]V
[!5]
[0] CGND
VCC [5]
["5]
CGND [0]
-9
-8
-7
[5] VCC
[!5]
[0] CGND
VCC [5]
[!5]
CGND [0]
CN120
CN122-1
-2
-3
SW3
-5
-4
CN124-1
-2
-3
SW1
Tray Cover
Switch
SW4
Feed Unit
Cover Switch
S4
Paper Position
Sensor
S1
Paper Feed
Sensor
3
2
1
-3
-2
-1
3
2
1
CN103-11
-10
-9
CN132-1
-2
-3
8
-7
-6
1
2
3
-5
-4
-3
1
2
3
-2
-1
CN131-1
-2
3
2
1
CN128-1
-2
-3
3
2
1
CN130-1
-2
-3
Paper Height
Sensor 2
S8
CN137-1
-2
-3
-6
-5
-4
[5] VCC
[!5]
[0] CGND
["24]
VAA [24]
Paper Height
Sensor 3
S9
CN138-1
-2
-3
-3
-2
-1
[5] VCC
[!5]
[0] CGND
VCC [5]
[!5]
CGND [0]
CN104-10
-9
-8
CN129-1
-2
-3
CGND [0]
[!5]
VCC [5]
-7
-6
-5
CGND [0]
Down SW ["5]
VCC [5]
Indicator [!5]
-4
-3
-2
-1
DC Line
Signal Direction
!
"
Active Low
[ ]
Active High
Voltage
CN142
S7
Pulse Signal
2
1
S3
SOL
1
Lift Sensor
Pick-up
Solenoid
S2
Paper End
Sensor
CN133-1
-2
-3
S5
Down Sensor
CN134-1
-2
-3
-4
SW5
Down Switch
PCB1
LCT Interface Broad
C
Lift Switch
CN136-1
-2
-3
SYMBOL TABLE
Lift Motor
CN102-8
-7
-6
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Feed
M2
CN125
() [!24]
(+) [24]
AGND [0]
M1
CN106-1
-2
CN140
[24] N.C.
[24] VAA
[24] VAA
[24] VAA
[24] VAA
[0] AGND
[0] AGND
[0] AGND
[0] AGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN127
COPIER
CN111-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
Lift Motor () [!24]

Lift Switch (+) [!24]
CN126
[0] CGND
[0] CGND
[5] VCC
[5] VCC
RXD
N.C.
TXD
N.C.
N.C.
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
CN110-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN141
CN5-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
VAAS [24]
A [24 0/24]
A [24 24/0]
VAAS [24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 24/0]
CN101-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
manuals4you.com
LCT (B473) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
4
5
Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
Index No.
Description
P to P
9
17
10
16
15
14
11
13
12
B473V002.WMF
2
12
Paper Feed
Lift
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
1
6
3
17
13
7
8
9
10
Paper Feed
Paper End
Lift
Paper Position
Down
Near End
Paper Height1
Paper Height2
Paper Height3
Switches
SW1
SW3
SW4
SW5
15
14
5
16
Tray Cover
Lift
Feed Unit Cover
Down
G3
G2
G3
G6
Solenoids
SOL1
G1
G2
Pick-up
G5
PCBs
PCB1
11
LCT Interface
G4
G5
G4
G3-G4
G5
B4
B4
B5
B5
D1-D6
S14
CN245-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
3
2
1
CN129-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
[0] GND2
[s5] Upper Tray Position 1
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[5] 5V
N.C.
N.C.
[5] 5V
[s5] Proof Tray Full
[0] GND2
2
1
CN248-3
-2
-1
Upper Tray Paper

Height Sensor
S16
Lower Tray Paper

Height Sensor 1
S17
CN249-3
-2
-1
Lower Tray Paper

Height Sensor 2
S18
CN250-3
-2
-1
Lower Tray
Full Sensor
S19
CN251-3
-2
-1
Lower Tray
Encoder
S20
Punch Hopper
Full Sensor
S21
CN253-3
-2
-1
Punch H.P.
Sensor
S22
1
2
3
CN254-3
-2
-1
M22
S30
CN261-3
-2
-1
Stapler Motor M+ [s24]

Stapler Motor M- [0]
FG [0]
FG [0]
GND2 [0]
5V [5]
Stapler Rotation [t5]
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Folder Roller M COM [24]

N.C.
Folder Roller Motor A [24 0/24]
Folder Roller Motor B [24 0/24]
N.C.
Folder Plate Motor COM [24]
N.C.
Folder Plate Motor A [24 0/24]
Folder Plate Motor B [24 0/24]
[24] 24V SW
[t24] Upper Tray Lift
[5] 5V
[s5] Upper Tray Paper Height
[0] GND2
Pressure Plate Motor COM [24]
[0] GND2
Pressure Plate Motor A [24 0/24]
[t5] Upper Tray Paper
[5] 5V
Pressure Plate Motor B [24 0/24]
Pressure Plate Motor COM[24]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN220-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN131-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
6
5
4
3
2
1
[0] GND2
[s5] Lower Tray Paper Height 1
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Lower Tray paper Height 2
[5] 5V
CN132-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
CN226-2
-1
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN415
CN414
CN226-1
-2
CN255-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN133-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
[5] 5V
[s5] Hopper sensor
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[s5] H.P. Sensor
[5] 5V
N.C.
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[s5] Punch Unit Detection
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN120-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN142-1
-2
-3
-4
[24] 24V SW
[t24] Punch Clutch
[t5] LD
[t5] MTON
[24] 24V SW
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[t24] Hole Change Motor

[24] 24V SW
[t5] Hole Change Switch
[0] GND2
S26
Stapler Tray
Paper Sensor
S27
CN232-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
SW1
Lower Tray
Full Sensor
S23
CN257-3
-2
-1
S24
CN258-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S28
CN103-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-9
CN102-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
CN305-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
M5
Exit Motor
M6
Pre-stack Motor
M7
Shift Roller
Motor
M8
Jogger Fence
Motor
M9
Stapler
movement
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M10
Stapler
Rotation
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M11
Feed Out
Belt Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M12
Guide Plate
Motor
Exit Motor COM [24]

Exit Motor COM [24]
N.C.
Exit Motor A [24 0/24]
Exit Motor B [24 0/24]
N.C.
Pre-stack Motor COM [24]
Pre-stack Motor A [24 0/24]
Pre-stack Motor B [24 0/24]
CN107-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
N.C.
Shift Roller Motor COM [24]
N.C.
Shift Roller Motor A [24 0/24]
Shift Roller Motor B [24 0/24]
CN108-8
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Jogger Fence Motor COM [24]

N.C.
Jogger Fence Motor A [24 0/24]
Jogger Fence Motor B [24 0/24]
CN109-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
[0] GND2
Stapler Movement Motor COM [24]
[s5] Jogger Feed H.P. Sn.
[5] 5V
N.C.
[0] GND2
Stapler Movement Motor A [24 0/24]
[s5] Stapler H.P. Sn.
[5] 5V
Stapler Movement Motor B [24 0/24]
[0] GND2
[t5] Stapler Tray paper Sn.Stapler Movement Motor B [24 0/24]
[5] 5V
CN110-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN134-1
-2
Stapler Rotation Motor COM [24]

N.C.
Stapler Rotation Motor A [24 0/24]
Stapler Rotation Motor B [24 0/24]
CN111-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Feed out Belt Motor COM [24]

N.C.
Feed out Belt Motor A [24 0/24]
Feed out Belt Motor B [24 0/24]
CN112-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN113-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND2 [0]
GND2 [0]
5V [5]
5V [5]
RXD
N.C.
TXD
5VE [5]
CN101-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
GND2
GND2
5V
5V
RD
ZESM
TXD
5VE
N.C.
24V [24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
CN100-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
NC
24V
24V
24V
24V
GND1
GND1
GND1
Folder Roller
Motor
M18
M19
Folder Plate
Motor
M20
Pressure
Plate Motor
T2
T3
UL1007 AWG20
(W)
(W)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN140-1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
[24] 24V
[s24] 24V SW
[5] 5V
[s5] Lower Tray position Sn. 1
[0] GND2
[5] 5V
[s5] Lower Tray Position Sn. 2
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[s5] Booklet Exit Sn.
[5] 5V
CN304-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
24V [24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
N.C.
Shift Motor
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN259-3
-2
-1
GND2 [0]
5V [5]
5V [5]
TXD
N.C.
RXD
5VE [5]
GND2 [0]
M4
CN106-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
Door Switch
Booklet Exit
Sensor
Proof Tray Motor
Shift Motor COM [24]

N.C.
Shift Motor A [24 0/24]
Shift Motor B [24 0/24]
M17
CN231-3
-2
-1
Lower Tray
Position
Sensor 2
M3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Booklet stapler
Motor 2
CN230-3
-2
-1
Stapler H.P.
Sensor
[0] GND2
[s5] Lower Tray Full
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[0 or 5 0/5] Lower Tray Encoder
[5] 5V
CN252-3
-2
-1
S25
Jogger Fence
H.P. Sensor
Stapler Transport
Motor
CN105-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
B468 only
[0] GND2
[t5] Lower Tray Paper
[5] 5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN303
SYMBOL TABLE
s
t
[
DC Line
Pulse Signal
Signal Direction
Active High
Active Low
Voltage
PCB1
Main Board
6
5
4
3
2
1
M4
T1
manuals4you.com
Entrance Motor
M2
Guide Plate Motor COM [24]

N.C.
Guide Plate Motor A [24 0/24]
Guide Plate Motor B [24 0/24]
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN124-1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Stapler Rotation
Sensor
M1
Proof tray Motor COM [24]

N.C.
Proof Tray Motor A [24 0/24]
Proof Tray Motor B [24 0/24]
T7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN200
CN222
CN223
CN219-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN114-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
CN115-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
CN225
1
2
3
4
5
M16
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN201
5
4
3
2
1
CN218-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Booklet stapler
Motor 1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN202
CN123-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
T6
CN143-1
-2
-3
CN416
Punch Hole
Motor
M21
S29
Lower Tray
paper Sensor
CN227
Punch Motor
CL1
3
2
1
Upper Tray
paper Sensor
CN256
Punch Clutch
CN130-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
CN260-3
-2
-1
CN401
1
2
SOL5
CN400
CN246-3
-2
-1
CN228
Upper Tray
Lift solenoid
GND2[0]
N.C.
Staple Detection [t5]
5V [0]
READY [s5]
CN217-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN104-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
CN203
[0] GND2
[s5] Pressure Plate H.P.
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Pressure Plate Upper Limit
[5] 5V
1
2
3
4
5
Entrance Motor COM [24]

N.C.
Entrance Motor A [24 0/24]
Entrance Motor B [24 0/24]
N.C.
Stapler Transport Motor COM [24]
N.C.
Stapler Transport Motor A [24 0/24]
Stapler Transport Motor B [24 0/24]
CN204
Proof Tray
Full Sensor
CN128-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Upper tray
Lift Motor
CN205
S13
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(W)
(W)
CN206
Upper Tray
Full Sensor
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
M15
S15
UL1007 AWG22
1
2
CN207
S12
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
CN232-3
-2
-1
CN208
Upper Tray
Limit Sensor
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN244-3
-2
-1
CN413
S11
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN243-3
-2
-1
Pressure Plate
Lift
CN122-1
-2
-3
-4
-5

FG [0]
FG [0]
GMD 2 [0]
5V [5]
[0] GND2
[t5] Feed out Belt H.P.
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Folder Plate H.P.
[5] 5V
Upper Limit Switch <Upper Tray>

Guide Plate Limit Switch
SW5
CN141-1
-2
-3
M13
CN209
CN242-3
-2
-1
CN116-1
-2
T12
T13
T14
T15
(W)
(W)
CN216-4
-3
-2
-1
CN210
S10
CN241-3
-2
-1
(W)
(W)
SW4
GND2 [0]
Stapler Rotation Sensor [s5]
5V [5]
Lower Tray
Lift Motor
UL1007 AWG22
1
2
Staple Unit
EH-530
CN215-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN211
CN127-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
CN135-1
-2
-3
2
1
CN229
CN406
CN240-3
-2
-1
CN119-1 UL3385 AWG20

-2
CN212
3
2
1
GND2 [0]
N.C.
5V [5]
READY [s5]
CN404
S9
Pressure Plate
H.P. Sensor
Upper Tray Lift Motor [s24]

Pressure Plate Limit Switch
T5
CN121-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
Pre-stack
Junction Gate
Solenoid
M14
(W)
(W)
CN213
1
2
3
AMP CT 3P
Folder Plate
H.P. Sensor
Upper Tray Limit [24]

Upper Tray Limit [s24]
[0] GND2
[t5] Shift Timing
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Shift Roller H.P.
[5] 5V
N.C.
[0] GND2
[s5] Guide Position
[5] 5V
SOL3
UL1007 AWG22
2
1
T4
5V [5]
S-RDY [s5]
GND2 [0]
Stapler
Junction
Gate solenoid
Upper Limit Switch <Lower Tray>
SW3
T10
T11
1
2
SOL2
(W)
(W)
CN214
CN126-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
CN239-3
-2
-1
S8
Feed out Belt

H.P. Sensor
3
2
1
(W)
(W)
SW2
1
2
CN403
Guide Plate
Position Sensor
1
2
3
CN238-3
-2
-1
S7
CN136-1
-2
Lower Tray Lift Motor [s24]

CN237-3
-2
-1
S6
Shift Roller H.P.

Sensor
Lower Tray Upper Limit [24]

Lower Tray Upper Limit [s24]
CN236-3
-2
-1
2
1
SOL4 Positioning
Roller
solenoid
CN139-1
-2

CN235-3
-2
-1
Prollf Junction
SOL1 Gate Solenoid
(W)
(W)
UL1007 AWG22
CN118-1
-2
UL3385 AWG20
CN137-1
T8
(W)
T9
-2
(W)
24V SW [24]
Pre-stack Junction Gage [t24]
1
2
CN409
S5
24V SW [24]
Positioning Solenoid [t24]
2
1
CN117-1
-2
-3
-4
CN419
Shift Timing
Sensor
24V SW [24]
Proof Junction Gate [t24]
24V SW [24]
Staple Junction Gate [t24]
CN411
S4
3
2
1
[0] GND2
[t5] Entrance Sensor
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[t5] Exit Sensor
[5] 5V
N.C.
[t5] Proof Exit Sensor
[0] GND2
[5] 5V
[t5] Staple Exit
[0] GND2
[5] 5V
CN412
Staple Entrance
Sensor
1
2
3
CN125-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
3
2
1
CN408
S3
CN234-3
-2
-1
CN407
Proof Tray
Exit Sensor
1
2
3
CN405
S2
Exit Sensor
CN233-3
-2
-1
CN402
S1
Entrance Sensor
CN221
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B468) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN300
GND1
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B468) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

47
12
5
6
46
13
25
3
15
45
14
48
26
44
27
43
24
16
28
42
41
17
22
18
11
21
19
40
30
39
23
10
29
31
38
32
37
33
34
20
B468V002.WMF
52
49
53
54
55
56
62
61
57
60
59
58
B468V007.WMF
B468V006.WMF
B468V003.WMF
51
50
35
36
Symbol Index No.

Motors
M1
40
M2
38
M3
45
M4
46
M5
29
M6
39
M7
30
M8
55
M9
57
M10
58
M11
54
M12
5
M14
47
M15
27
M16
48
M17
50
M18
51
M19
53
M20
21
M21
44
Entrance Motor
Stapler Transport Motor
Proof Tray Motor
Shift Drive Motor
Exit Motor
Pre-Stack Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Jogger Motor
Stapler Movement Motor
Feed Out Belt Motor
Guide Plate Motor
Lower Tray Lift Motor
Upper Tray Lift Motor
Booklet Stapler Motor 1*
Folder Roller Motor*
Folder Plate Motor*
Pressure Plate Motor*
Punch Motor
J2
J2
J3
J3
J3
J4
J4
J5
J5
J5
J6
J6
G2
G2
G3
G3
G4
G4
G4
A7
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
Finisher Entrance Sensor

Exit Sensor
Stapler Entrance Sensor
Shift Timing Sensor
Shift Roller HP Sensor
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
8
2
7
11
1
31
Description
P to P
Symbol Index No.

Description
S7
4
Sensor
S8
62
Feed Out Belt HP Sensor
S9
52
Folder Plate HP Sensor*
S10
18
Pressure Plate HP Sensor
S11
22
Pressure Plate Lift
Sensor*
S12
12
S13
32
Upper Tray Full Sensor
S14
6
Proof Tray Full Sensor
S15
60
Stapler Rotation Sensor
S16
13
Upper Tray Paper Height
Sensor*
S17
15
Paper Height Sensor 1*
(Lower Tray)
S18
24
(Lower Tray)
S19
35
Lower Tray Full Sensor
(Saddle Stitch Mode)
S20
48
Lower Tray Encoder
S21
9
Punch Hopper Full Sensor
S22
42
Punch HP Sensor
S23
23
(Sort/Shift mode)
S24
26
Lower Tray Position
Sensor
S25
56
Jogger Fence HP Sensor
S26
59
Stapler HP Sensor
S27
61
S28
17
Booklet Exit Sensor
P to P
A2
A3
A3
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
J2
A5
A5
Symbol Index No.

Description
Upper Tray Paper Sensor*
S29
25
Lower Tray Paper Sensor*
S30
20
Switches
SW1
SW2
10
16
SW3
19
SW4
28
SW5
Door Switch
Upper Limit Switch (Lower
Tray)
Pressure Plate Limit
Switch*
Upper Limit Switch*
(Upper Tray)
F5
E1
Proof Junction Gate

Solenoid
Stapler Junction Gate
Solenoid
Pre-Stack Junction Gate
Solenoid
Upper Tray Lift Solenoid *
G1
Magnetic Clutches
CL1
43
Punch Clutch
A6
PCBs
PCB1
Main Board
Solenoids
SOL1
41
A5
SOL2
33
SOL3
34
SOL4
SOL5
37
14
A5
A6
A6
A6
E6
E6
E5
E5
E5
E6
P to P
B5
B5
36
E1
E2
E2
G1
G1
E1
A4
D, H
+24V SW [24]
S9
CN208-3
-2
-1
CN107-1
-2
-3
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
Shift Tray Lower

Limit 2 Sensor
S10
CN209-3
-2
-1
-4
-5
-6
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
Shift Tray Lower

Limit 3 Sensor
S11
CN210-3
-2
-1
-7
-8
-9
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
Shift Lower LimitLarge Paper Sensor
S12
CN211-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
10
9
8
CN108-1
-2
-3
Stacking Roller H.P.
S13
CN212-3
-2
-1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
3
2
1
CN109-1
-2
-3
S14
CN213-3
-2
-1
Pre-Stack Tray
Paper Sensor
S15
CN214-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN215-3
-2
-1
S17
S18
CN217-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
Stapler Tray Paper

Sensor
S19
CN218-3
-2
-1
4
5
6
3
2
1
CN216-3
-2
-1
Stapler Tray
Entrance Sensor
Positioning Roll er
HP Sensor
CN313
S16
Stack Feed-Out Belt

HP Sensor
CN312
Shift Tray Half-Turn

Sensor
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN311
Shift Tray Paper

Height Sensor
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
CN110-1
-2
-3
3
2
1
S20
CN219-3
-2
-1
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
S21
CN220-3
-2
-1
CN111-1
-2
-3
Stack Plate-Front HP
Sensor
S22
CN221-3
-2
-1
-4
-5
-6
Stack Plate-Rear HP
Sensor
S23
CN222-3
-2
-1
-7
-8
-9
Jogger HP Sensor
Stack Plate-Center
HP Sensor
CN314
6
5
4
CN223-3
-2
-1
CN112-1
-2
-3
Stapler Rotation HP
Sensor
S25
CN224-3
-2
-1
Stapler Return
Sensor
S26
CN225-3
-2
-1
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
S27
CN226-3
-2
-1
Shift Tray Lift

Motor
M1
M2
2
1
Exit Guide Motor
M3
CN227
Shift Tray Exit

Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN315
Staple Waste
Hopper Sensor
1
2
3
CN315
S24
CN315
Stapler HP Sensor
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
-11
-12
-13
CN115-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-2
-3
-4
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
["5]
[5] +5V
N.C.
[0] GND
["5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
N.C.
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
["5]
[0] GND
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
N.C.
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
N.C.
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
["24]
+24V SW [24]
[!24] +24V
N.C.
[24] +24V SW
["5]
CN133-1
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
N.C.
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
N.C.
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
N.C.
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
N.C.
CN121-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
GND [0]
+5V [5]
+5V [5]
TXD [0/5]
N.C.
RXD [0/5]
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
+24V [24]
+24V [24]
+24V [24]
GND [0]
GND [0]
GND [0]
GND [0]
N.C.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN122-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN122-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN124-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN125-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
T5
Pre-Stack Junction
Gate Solenoid
Positioning Roll er
Motor
SOL
4
-2
["24]
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
[24] COM
[24] COM
N.C.
[24 0/24] A
[24 0/24] A
[24 0/24] B
[24 0/24] B
N.C.
[!24] +24V
CN120-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
Stapler Junction
Gate Solenoid
M6
-2
Upper Tray Junction

Gate Solenoid
SOL
3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
T6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN318-1
-2
-2
CN128-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
CN319-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Pre-Stack Paper
Stopper Solenoid
Stacking Roller Drug

Motor
M7
GND [0]
S-RDY ["5]
Cartridge Sensor ["5]
Staple End ["5]
GND [0]
Hammer HP ["5]
+5V [5]
+24V SW [24]
GND [0]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
Clock [0/5]
Drection [0]
ON ["5]
Type1
Type2
HP Scanner [!5]
Installed ["5]
Hopper Sensor ["5]
GND [0]
["5]
+5V [5]
Stacking Rolloer
Motor
M8
M9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M10
Stack Feed-Out Belt

Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M11
Stack Plate-Center
Motor
Jogger Motor
+24V SW [24
+24V SW [24]
GND [0]
GND [0]
Speed [0/5]
N.C.
N.C.
Clock [0/5]
Direction [5]
ON ["5]
GND [0]
5V [5]
+24V SW [24]
GND [0]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
Stapler Jogger Motor Clock [0/5]
Jogger Motor Direction ["5]
Jogger Motor ON [!5]
Lift Motor Clock [0/5]
Lift Motor Dirction ["5]
Lift Motor ON [!5]
Jogger Motor HP ["5]
Lift Motor HP ["5]
["5]
M12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M13
CN600-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Stapler Motor
T3
Punch
CN103-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
CN304-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN102-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
CN305-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-2
[0] GND
[5] +5V
[5] +5V
[0/5] TXD
N.C.
[0/5] RXD
N.C.
Stapler
CN620-1
-2
-3
CN245-3
-2
-1
S28
Punch Waste
Hopper Sensor
GND [0]
["5]
+5V [5]
-4
-5
-6
CN246-3
-2
-1
S29
Punch HP
Sensor 1
M17
Punch Motor
CN620-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
CN130-1
2
-3
CN246-3
-2
-1
CN113-1
-2
-3
-4
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
CN620-4
-3
-2
-1
Punch HP
Sensor 2
S30
CN131-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13

(SW3)
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN114-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
CN104-1
T4
SW2
Stapler Hammer
+5V [5]
[!5]
GND [0]
Stack Plate-Rear
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Stapler Return
Solenoid
M16
T6
Stack Plate-Front
Motor
M14
CN129-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
SOL
5
Stapler Rotation
Motor
Punch Unit
GND [0]
["5]
["5]
GND [0]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
T5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Front Door
Safety Switch
CN127-1
["24]
Shift Tray Upper

Limit Switch
SOL
2
["24]
SOL
1
CN119-1
["24]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
-10
+ [!24]
Shift Motor
SW1
T2
2
["24]
T1
CN118-1
+24V SW [24]
[0] GND
["5]
[5] +5V
1
2
3
M5
M15
CN700-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Upper Transport
Motor
M18
Jogger
GND [0]
[!5]
+5V [5]
CN720-1
-2
-3
CN249-3
-2
-1
S31
Shift Jogger HP
Sensor
-4
-5
-6
CN250-3
-2
-1
S32
Shift Jogger Lift

HP Sensor
GND [0]
[!5]
+5V [5]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
N.C.
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
CN710-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN251
[0] GND
["5]
[5] +5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN252
-10
-11
-12
+24V SW [24]
3
2
1
CN243
3
2
1
Stapling Paper
Height Sensor
[0] GND
["5]
[5] +5V
-3
-4
-5
CN244
7
8
9
Shift Paper Height

Sensor
Exit Guide Open

Sensor
+24V [24]
N.C.
["24]
Lower Transport
Motor
CN248
CN206-3
-2
-1
S5
CN204-3
-2
-1
[0] GND
["5]
[5] +5V
-2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN320
S7
1
2
3
CN117-1
CN126-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
N.C.
+24V SW [24]
CN322
-7
-8
-9
CN203-3
-2
-1
["24]
CN230
6
5
4
S4
+24V SW [24]
CN231
4
5
6
Shift Tray Exit

Sensor
[5] +5V
["5]
[0] GND
CN232
S6
CN205-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
CN235
-4
-5
-6
CN202-3
-2
-1
CN236
9
8
7
S3
M4
CN237
1
2
3
Upper Tray Limit

Sensor
["5]
[0] GND
[5] +5V
CN238
CN106-1
-2
-3
1
2
3
CN239
3
2
1
CN201-3
-2
-1
CN240
-7
-8
-9
S2
CN116-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
CN241
CN308
3
2
1
Upper Tray Exit

Sensor
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
[0] GND
[!5]
[5] +5V
CN242
-4
-5
-6
1
2
3
CN316
CN307
3
2
1
CN200-3
-2
-1
CN317
CN105-1
-2
-3
S1
CN318
CN306
3
2
1
Entrance Sensor
CN310
CN309
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B478) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M19
Shift Jogger
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M20
Shift Jogger Lift

Motor
Jogger Unit
Main Board
CN303
SYMBOL TABLE
DC Line
Pulse Signal
Signal Direction
N.C.
[24] +24V
[24] +24V
[24] +24V
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
!
"
Active Low
[ ]
Active High
Voltage
manuals4you.com
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B478) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
Symbol
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
12
33
13
15
1
32
31
30
29
3
4
10
16
17
18
19
20
28
27
22 21
23
26
25
24
7
8
53
40
54
41
42
52
51
34
43
39
38
44
37
P to P
11
41
42
44
53
54
51
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
A7
A7
A7
F1
F1
F3
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F5
F6
I1
I2
I3
I4
J6
J6
38
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
Solenoids
36
35
45
47
39
10
9
8
30
32
33
19
20
16
28
26
27
7
-
Entrance Sensor
Upper Tray Exit Sensor
Shift Tray Exit Sensor
Exit Guide Open Sensor
Shift Paper Height Sensor
Stapling Paper Height Sensor
Shift Lower Limit - Large Paper
Sensor
Shift Lower Limit 2 Sensor
Shift Lower Limit 3 Sensor
Shift Tray Paper Height Sensor
Stacking Roller HP
Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor
Pre-Stack Tray Paper Sensor
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
Positioning Roller HP Sensor
Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
Jogger HP Sensor
Stack Plate-Center HP Sensor
Stack Plate-Front HP Sensor
Stack Plate-Rear HP Sensor
Stapler HP Sensor
Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
Stapler Return Sensor
Staple Waste Hopper Sensor
Punch Waste Hopper Sensor
Punch HP Sensor 1
Punch HP Sensor 2
Shift Jogger HP Sensor
Shift Jogger Lift HP Sensor
50
40
52
4
37
5
48
49
15
14
18
31
21
17
29
24
1
-
Shift Tray Exit Motor

Shift Tray Lift Motor
Exit Guide Motor
Lower Transport Motor
Shift Motor
Positioning Roller Motor
Stacking Roller Drug Motor
Stacking Roller Motor
Jogger Motor
Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
Stack Plate-Center Motor
Stapler Motor
Stack Plate-Front Motor
Stack Plate-Rear Motor
Stapler Hammer Motor
Punch Motor
Shift Jogger Motor
Shift Jogger Lift Motor
SOL1
46
49
48
47
SOL4
45
12
SOL3
50
13
SOL2
36
35
Description
S9
14
11
Index No.
SOL5
Switches
SW1
SW2
SW3
PCBs
PCB
22
Upper Tray Junction Gate

Solenoid
Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
Solenoid
Pre-Stack Paper Stopper
Solenoid
Stapler Return Solenoid
46
34
43
Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch

Main Board
A3
A3
A3
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A6
A6
A6
A6
I3
I3
I3
J5
J5
F2
F2
F2
F3
I2
F2
E6
I4
-
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
SYMBOL TABLE
DC Line
Voltage
CN100-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
CN200-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
[24]
[24]
GND1 [0]
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
N.C.
[0] GND2
[5]
[N.C.]
RXD
ZESM
TXD
[5] VE
3
A [24
A [24
B [24
B [24
CN300
Near End
Sensor
S2
S3
Feed Sensor
S4
Bottom Plate
H.P. Sensor
S5
6
Pull-out Sensor
Guide Plate
Set Sensor
Exit Sensor
S6
S7
S8
CN205-3
-2
-1
CN105-1
-2
-3
CN206-3
-2
-1
-4
-5
-6
CN207-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
CN208-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
CN209-3
-2
-1
4
5
6
CN210-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
CN211-3
-2
-1
4
5
6
CN212-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
CN301
Bottom Plate
Position Sensor
S1
CN302
Cover Set
Sensor
CN303
CN101-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
CN306
CN201-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
N.C.
[24]
[24]
[24]
[24]
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[24]
[24]
GND1 [0]
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
-7
-8
-9
6
5
4
CN106-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
6
5
4
3
2
1
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
Transport
Motor
M2
1
2
3
4
5
6
M3
CN107-1
-2
-3
13
12
11
1
2
3
CN213-3
-2
-1
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN214-3
-2
-1
-11
-12
-13
3
2
1
CN108-1
-2
-3
-4
Bottom Plate
Motor
M4
CN104-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
[5]
["5]
GND2 [0]
EXGND [0]
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
3
2
1
CN103-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
1
5
7
11
[5]
["5]
GND2 [0]
EXGND [0]
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
3
2
1
3
9
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
[5]
["5]
GND2 [0]
EXGND [0]
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
6
5
4
GND2 [0]
["5]
[5]
["5]
[0] GND2
[5]
Feed Motor
M1
GND2 [0]
["5]
[5]
N.C.
GND2 [0]
["5]
[5]
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
3
2
1
1
5
7
11
GND2 [0]
[!5]
[5]
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
3
2
1
[24]
0/24]
0/24]
0/24]
0/24]
[24]
CN202
Active Low
[ ]
3
9
CN203
Active High
CN102-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
Relay Motor
S9
S10
Paper Width
Sensor 1
CN215-3
-2
-1
S11
Paper Width
Sensor 2
11
12
13
CN216-3
-2
-1
S12
Paper Width
Sensor 3
12
11
10
9
1
2
3
4
CN217-4
-3
-2
-1
S13
Paper Length
Sensor 1
-5
-6
-7
-8
8
7
6
5
5
6
7
8
CN218-4
-3
-2
-1
S14
Paper Length
Sensor 2
-9
-10
-11
-12
4
3
2
1
9
10
11
12
CN219-4
-3
-2
-1
S15
Paper Set
Sensor
Paper Length
Sensor 3
CN304
Signal Direction
"
[24]
[24]
GND1 [0]
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
CN204
PCB1
Main Board
CN305
Pulse Signal
manuals4you.com
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
4
3
2
Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
7
8
Description
P to P
10
9
10
7
15
Feed
Transport
Bottom Plate
Relay
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
8
20
11
18
12
17
13
16
19
3
2
1
6
5
4
Cover Set
Near End
Feed
Bottom Plate HP
Pull-out
Guide Plate Set
Exit
Paper Set
Paper Width 1
Paper Width 2
Paper Width 3
Paper Length 1
Paper Length 2
Paper Length 3
B5
B5
B5
B6
B6
B6
B6-B7
B7
I5
I5
I5
I6
I6
I6
I7
PCBs
PCB1
Index No.
I2
I2-I3
I3
I4
14
Main
E2-E7
11
12
13
20
19
18
14
17
15
16
B470V002.WMF
9-BIN MAILBOX (B471) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM

[24]
[24]
N.C. (GND1 [0])
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
N.C.
[24]
[24]
[24]
[24]
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[24]
[!24]
CN300
Paper Detect
Sensor 9
Paper Overflow
Sensor 8
S21
Transport
Sensor 5
S20
Paper Detect
Sensor 8
S19
Paper Overflow
Sensor 7
S18
Paper Overflow
Sensor 6
CN113-1
-2
-3
[24]
[!24]
CN106-1
-2
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
[24]
[!24]
CN115-1
-2
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
[24]
[!24]
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
SOL6
SOL4
4
CN116-1
-2
[24]
[!24]
CN107-1
-2
[24]
[!24]
-3
-4
[24]
[!24]
-5
-6
2
1
2
1
-7
-8
-9
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
CN218-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
6
5
4
CN112-1
-2
-3
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
CN217-3
-2
-1
4
5
6
3
2
1
-4
-5
-6
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
GND2 [0]
[!5]
[5]
CN109-1
-2
-3
6
5
4
S17
CN216-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
9
8
7
-7
-8
-9
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
GND2 [0]
["5]
[5]
-4
-5
-6
3
2
1
S16
CN215-3
-2
-1
4
5
6
6
5
4
-10
-11
-12
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
GND2 [0]
[!5]
[5]
-7
-8
-9
CN214-3
-2
-1
7
8
9
3
2
1
-13
-14
-15
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
GND2 [0]
["5]
[5]
CN213-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
6
5
4
CN111-1
-2
-3
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
CN212-3
-2
-1
4
5
6
3
2
1
-4
-5
-6
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
CN211-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
9
8
7
CN110-1
-2
-3
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
CN210-3
-2
-1
4
5
6
6
5
4
-4
-5
-6
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
CN209-3
-2
-1
7
8
9
3
2
1
-7
-8
-9
[0] GND2
[!5]
[5]
S14
Paper Overflow
Sensor 5
S13
Paper Detect
Sensor 6
S12
Paper Overflow
Sensor 4
S11
S10
CN231
[0] GND2
["5]
[5]
PCB 1
Main Board
2
1
SOL2
1
2
CN243
CN232
3
2
1
-4
-5
-6
1
2
SOL9
Turn Gate
Solenoid 5
Turn Gate
Solenoid 3
Turn Gate
Solenoid 1
1
2
3
CN208-3
-2
-1
4
5
6
CN207-3
-2
-1
9
8
7
1
2
3
CN206-3
-2
-1
S7
Paper Detect
Sensor 3
-10
-11
-12
6
5
4
4
5
6
CN205-3
-2
-1
S6
Paper Overflow
Sensor 2
-13
-14
-15
3
2
1
7
8
9
CN204-3
-2
-1
S5
Transport
Sensor 2
CN108-1
-2
-3
6
5
4
1
2
3
CN203-3
-2
-1
S4
Paper Detect
Sensor 2
GND2 [0]
["5]
[5]
-4
-5
-6
3
2
1
4
5
6
CN202-3
-2
-1
S3
Paper Overflow
Sensor 1
GND2 [0]
[!5]
[5]
-7
-8
-9
6
5
4
1
2
3
CN201-3
-2
-1
S2
Transport
Sensor 1
GND2 [0]
[!5]
[5]
-10
-11
-12
3
2
1
4
5
6
CN200-3
-2
-1
S1
Paper Detect
Sensor 1
DC Line
Signal Direction
"
Active Low
[ ]
Active High
Voltage
Junction Gate
Solenoid
GND2 [0]
[!5]
[5]
Pulse Signal
Turn Gate
Solenoid 2
GND2 [0]
[!5]
[5]
SYMBOL TABLE
Turn Gate
Solenoid 4
SOL1
1
2
Turn Gate
Solenoid 7
Turn Gate
Solenoid 6
SOL3
7
8
9
6
5
4
Turn Gate
Solenoid 8
SOL5
CN219-3
-2
-1
Paper Overflow
Sensor 6
9
8
7
CN105-1
-2
4
5
6
S15
Transport
Sensor 3
1
2
3
[24]
[!24]
Main Motor
SOL7
CN220-3
-2
-1
Transport
Sensor 4
CN221-3
-2
-1
CN230
-4
-5
-6
CN229
Paper Detect
Sensor 7
CN222-3
-2
-1
CN228
S22
CN114-1
-2
-3
CN104-1
-2
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[5]
[5]
RXD
ZESM (GND2)
TXD
[5] VE (N.C.)
CN242
S23
CN223-3
-2
-1
[24]
[!24]
SOL8
CN244
Paper Overflow
Sensor 9
S24
CN103-1
-2
CN227
Door Safety
M1
CN226
CN301-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN100-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
CN102-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
CN225
CN101-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
CN302-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN224
manuals4you.com
S9
S8
Paper Detect
Sensor 4
Paper Overflow
Sensor 3
9-BIN MAILBOX (B471) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

Symbol
Index No.
Description
Motors
M1
35
9
10
11
34
12
33
13
14
32
15
16
31
17
18
30
19
20
29
21
28
27
22
26
23
25
24
B471V001.WMF
Main
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
26
24
25
23
20
22
21
19
18
16
17
15
14
13
11
12
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
9
Paper Detect 1
Transport 1
Paper Overflow 1
Paper Detect 2
Transport 2
Paper Overflow 2
Paper Detect 3
Paper Overflow 3
Paper Detect 4
Transport 3
Paper Overflow 4
Paper Detect 5
Paper Overflow 5
Paper Detect 6
Transport 4
Paper Overflow 6
Paper Detect 7
Paper Overflow 7
Paper Detect 8
Transport 5
Overflow Sensor 8
Paper Detect 9
Paper Overflow 9
Door Safety
Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
SOL3
SOL4
SOL5
SOL6
SOL7
SOL8
SOL9
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
2
27
Turn Gate 1
Turn Gate 2
Turn Gate 3
Turn Gate 4
Turn Gate 5
Turn Gate 6
Turn Gate 7
Turn Gate 8
Junction Gate
PCBs
PCB1
35
Main
P to P
H1
I7
I7
I6
I6
I6
I5-I6
I5
I5
I5
B7
B7
B6
B6
B6
B5-B6
B5
B5
B5
B4
B4
B4
B3
B3
B3
I4
I4
I3
I3
I3
I2
I2
I2
I4
E1-E7
7
CN772
M8
M9
A
M10
M24
Lower Relay
Motor
CN624
B-8 (2/3)
CN263
CN738
CN625
CN225
-A11
-A10
-A9
-A8
-A7
-A6
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
-A1
-B11
-B10
-B9
-B8
-B7
-B6
-B5
-B4
-B3
-B2
-B1
-4
-3
-2
-1
-1
-2
-3
-4
GND
N.C.
N.C
N.C
[5]5V
[5]5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND
N.C.
GND
N.C.
GND
B
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
[5] 5V Key Card
Key Card Set
[24] 24V Key Card
Key Card Data 7
Key Card Data 6
Key Card Data 5
Key Card Data 4
Key Card Data 3
Key Card Data 2
Key Card Data 1
Key Card Data 0
[0] GND
Key Card Count
[5] 5V
N.C.
N.C.
[0] GND
CN220
-1
-2
-3
-4
C
M13
M14 M15 M16
676 675
M17
G
M35
PFC: TxD
GND
PFC: TxD
GND
D
M18
715
716
717
E
688
M19
M20
689
686
687
L1
689
688
731
733
S14
S15

F
714
M21
G
TB
CN697
CN603
PP3
manuals4you.com
H
CO
2
723
722
CN698
749 663
700 701 672 702 703
1
2
861
CN347-36
CN347-35
CN347-34
CN347-33
CN347-32
CN347-31
CN347-30
CN347-29
CN347-28
CN347-27
CN347-26
CN347-25
CN347-24
CN347-23
CN347-22
CN347-21
CN347-20
CN347-19
CN347-18
CN347-17
CN347-16
CN347-15
CN347-14
CN347-13
CN347-12
CN347-11
CN347-10
CN347-9
CN347-8
CN347-7
CN347-6
CN347-5
CN347-4
CN347-3
CN347-2
CN347-1
H-11(2/3)
CN105
742
704
707
745
705
726
706
709
MC SOL M22 SOL M17

6
2
5
708
Lamp Regulator
BCU
LSD1
1
2
3
4

2
1
Laser Synchronization Detector
4
3
2
1
714
+5V
GND
CN207-1
CN207-2
CN207-3
CN207-4
CN207-5
CN207-6
CN207-7
CN207-8
CN207-9
CN207-10
CN207-11
CN207-12
CN207-13
CN207-14
CN207-15
CN207-16
CN207-17
CN207-18
CN207-19
CN207-20
CN207-21
CN207-22
CN207-23
CN207-24
CN207-25
CN207-26
CN207-27
CN207-28
CN207-29
CN207-30
CN207-31
CN207-32
CN207-33
CN207-34
CN207-35
CN207-36
M3
[0] PGND
ON
[24] 24V
CN520
711
1
2
3
CIS
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
AC Line
Exposure Lamp
L2
CN740
CN340
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
CN342
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
DC Line
PCB13
873
CN200
-1
-2
871
PMCLK
XSCRDY
XPMON
GND
XDETP1
5V [5]
GND [0]
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
XSDCLK+
XSDCLK
GND
XSDC+
XSDC
GND
XSDB+
XSDB
GND
XSDA+
XSDA
GND
CN217
-1
-2
-3
DAC3
GND
DAC2
GND
DAC1
GND
DAC0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
Signal Direction
Copy Tray Full

(Option)
CN207
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Front Cover Safety Switch

CN202
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
CN133
S24
PCB11
Zero Cross
Power Tray TRG [t24]
24V-INT [24]
PGND [0]
24V [24]
Test (+)
Test ()
N.C.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
M-15(2/3)

Sensor
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN404
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
CN348
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
Voltage
S23
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[5] 5V_SW
LDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Duplex Cooling Fan Motor
CN401
-1
-2
1 -3
3
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
GND
+3.3VE
GND
+5V
GND
Active Low
By-pass Paper Size

Sensor
CN693
Toner Supply Motor
1
2
PCB8
1
2
872
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
SW2
SW1
DROPEN
LDOFF
GND
XLDERR1
XLDERR0
GND
APC3
APC2
APC1
APC0
GND
GND
LDD0+
LDD0
GND
LDD1+
LDD1
GND
LDD2+
LDD2
GND
LDD3+
LDD3
GND
J-14 (3/3)
By-pass Pick-up Solenoid
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
[t24]
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] GND
Paper Size
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5] Open
[5] 5V
[0]GND
[s5]
N.C.
[5] 5V
N.C.
NC(GND)
871
By-pass Feed Clutch
747
S22
724
744
Relay Sensor
748
S21
CN205
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
VIB (CN431) SBU (CN103)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
SW
C-13 (2/3)
S20
721
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN741
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN344
-18
-17
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CN343
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
Registration Sensor
743
GND
GND
SYDI
GND
SYDO
GND
GND
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
GND
GND
LAMPGT
XSLEAD
XSSCAN
XSDSCAN
GND
SYCLK
GND
1
2
3
674
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3
2
1
CN406
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
2
1
S52
CN692
CN403
-1
11
-2
10
-3
9
8
-4
-5
7
-6
6
-7
5
-8
4
3
-9
-10
2
-11
1
896
4
3
2
1
[t24]
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[s24]
[5] 5V
[s5]
[0] GND
VCNT
[12] 12V
Sensor Out
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0 ro 5]
[5] 5V
Tout
[0] GND
NC
[5] 5V
CN402
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
CN349
-1
-2
-3
-4
CN346
CN223
-A1
-A2
-B7
-B6
-B5
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
CN223
893
4
3
2
1
CN120
Thermal / Humidity Sensor
CN695
GND
XSYCS
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
S19
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
GND
GND
GND
TXLOUT1
TXLOUT1+
GND
GND
TXLOUT2
TXLOUT2+
GND
GND
TXLCLK
TXLCLK+
GND
GND
S18
2
1
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
CN216
-1
-2
-3
VIB (CN430)
SBU (CN102)
Toner End Sensor
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
24V
1
2
1
2
3
4
Mechanical Counter
T3
SOL
4
FB
694
CN602
T2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
T1
PP2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
890
CN400
-1
-2
-3
-4
Transfer P.P.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
GND
GND
TXFOUT1
TXFOUT1+
GND
GND
TXFOUT2
TXFOUT2+
GND
GND
TXFCLK
TXFCLK+
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Transfer Belt Lift Sol.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN213
-1
-2
TXFCLK+
TXFCLK
TXFOUT2+
TXFOUT2
TXFOUT1+
TXFOUT1
GND
SYCLK
GND
SYDO
GND
SYDI
GND
XSYCS
TXLCLK+
TXLCLK
TXLOUT2+
TXLOUT2
TXLOUT1+
TXLOUT1
CN325
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
CN736
SW
SW: GND
CN341
-20
-19
-18
-17
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
L-15(3/3)
1
2
3
734
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B2
690
B1
CN730
CN214
-1
-2
-3
FAN
5V
N.C.
GND
Toner Cooling Fan

Motor
[0] GND
[0 or 5]
[5] 5V
[s5] Drum Earth
[s5] Counter Bias
FB: Bias
PWM: Bias
[24] 24V-INT
[0] PGND
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] PGND
[24] 24V-INT
FB: Transfer Voltage
FB: Transfer Current
PWM: Transfer
N.C.
PCB7
OPU
CN204
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
898
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
VIB (CN432)
SBU (CN101)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
CN433
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
Devlopment P.P.
1
2
3
3
2
1
OPU: XPW_SW
OPU: +5VE
OPU: OP_REQ
OPU: GND
OPU: OP_RXD
OPU: OP_RCLK
OPU: GND
OPU: OP_TCLK
OPU: OP_TXD
OPU: +5V
OPU: +5V
OPU: +24V
[24] 24V
[t24]
PCB5
S17
14
30
15
31
16
32
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
CN434
-1
-2
VIB
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
GND
LD3_MTR
LD2_MTR
LD1_MTR
LD0_MTR
GND
GND
?????
Jogger Motor
14
30
15
31
16
32
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN224
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
CN351
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-2
-1
CN430
CN437
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
-18
-19
-20
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
24V
2
GND
N.C.
N.C.
5V
3
PCB6
1
2
3
SBU
-1
-2
FFC
CN431
CN432
Scanner Motor
S16
5V
N.C.
GND
CN226
-1
-2
-3
CN102
FFC
FFC
M12
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
897
CN103
CN101
658
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
CNB
Duplex Transport
Sensor 3
732
S13
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
CN980
3
2
1
771
S12
L5
735
SOL SOL MC
2
3
1
770 739 737
991
S11
990
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
Active High
CN684
[24] 24V
[t24] 24
[24] 24V
[t24] 24
[24] 24V
[t24]
N.C.
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[t5] Duplex Unit Set
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[s5]
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
N.C.
[24] 24V
[240/24] A
[240/24] -A
[240/24] -B
[240/24] B
[24] 24V
891
CN206
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
-A16
-A17
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
-B16
-B17
CN438
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Duplex Transport Clutch
CN683
1
17
2
18
3
19
XPW_SW
OP_REQ
GND
OP_RXD
OP_RCLK
GND
OP_TCLK
OP_TXD
GND

5VE
Duplex Janction Gate Sol.
CN728
CN436
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Key Counter
CN435
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
1
17
2
18
3
19
CN144
CO1
P1
P2
P3
G
ADF
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN174
-1
-2
-3
-4
Reverse Trigger Roller Sol.
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PCB9
PTL
CN210
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
PGND
+24V
GND [0]
5V [5]
24V [24]
GND [0]
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
S10
687
GND [0]
Set [t5]
24V [24]
ON [t24]
Toner Cooling Fan[24]
Toner Cooling Fan[t24]
XSLEAD
XSSCAN
XDSCAN
XLAMPGATE
GND
LD0 Current Monitor
LD1 Current Monitor
LD2 Current Monitor
LD3 Current Monitor
LDCUT
PHASE-A
PHASE-B
PHASE-C
PHASE-D
PHASE-E
CN173
-1
-2
FIN: T24V
FIN: RXD
FIN: TGND
FIN: TXD
FIN: 5V
FIN: 5V
FIN: GND
FIN: GND
N.C.
FIN: PGND
FIN: PGND
FIN: PGND
FIN: PGND
FIN: 24V
FIN: 24V
FIN: 24V
FIN: 24V
N.C.
GND [0]
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND [0]
RXD
GND [0]
TXD
CN168
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
PSU
H-13 (2/3)
Quenching Lamp
[t5] () CCW
[t5] (+) CW
[5] 5V
CNT
OUT
[24] 24V
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
[12] 12V
[0] GND
OUT
[24] 24V
PLT_ON
CN182
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
CN180
-1
-2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN170
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
PGND [0]
24V [24]
12V [12]
5V [5]
GND [0]
XLAMPGT
GND [0]
XSSCAN
B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 1/3
Drum Potential
Sensor
CN211
14 -1
13 -2
12 -3
11 -4
10 -5
9 -6
8 -7
7 -8
6 -9
5 -10
4 -11
3 -12
2 -13
1 -14
CN181
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
PCB12
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
SDRB
1
2
1
2
3
733
CN175
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
PCU Cooling Fan
732
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
5V [5]
GND [0]
CLK [0/5]
Direction
Mag.
Out Enable
Reset
Motor Ref V. 1
Motor Ref V. 2
Motor Ref V. 3
Finisher
2 1
1 2
3 3
2 4
1 5
2 6
1 7
5 8
4 9
3 10
2 11
1 12
2 1
1 2
3
1
13
2
17
6
5
Scanner HP
Sensor
CN640
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
682
5V
12V
GND
24V
PGND
Charge Corona Wire Cleaner

Motor
Image Density
S9
Sensor
730
S8
729
Paper Exit Sensor
3
2
1
3
2
1
SOL
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
657
S7
731
8
4
652
8
4
CN656
8
9
10
11
12
13
CN655
1
2
S4
Original Length
Sensor 2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
N.C.
LCT: RXD
N.C.
LCT: TXD
LCT: 5V
LCT: 5V
LCT: GND
LCT: GND
N.C.
N.C.
LCT: PGND
LCT: PGND
LCT: PGND
LCT: PGND
LCT: 24V
LCT: 24V
LCT: 24V
LCT: 24V
N.C.
N.C.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Toner Supply Clutch
Exit Unit Entrance

Sensor
2
1
S3
CN639
Web Motor
3
2
1
1
2
3
CN654
S6
19
CN651
20
18
16
[5] 5V
[s5]
[0] GND
[t5] CW
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
N.C.
[t5] Exit Unit Set
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[t5]
[0] GND
S2
Original Length
Sensor 1
Original Width
Sensor 1-3
LCT
1
2
3
CN203
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
S1
CN165
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
CN636
Web End Sensor
750
9
21
7
15
14
3
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN638
Exit Janction Gate

Solenoid
3
2
1
CN751
14
3
15
6
7
14
15
1
2
3
L-2 (1/3)
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
1
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN610
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
3
CN212
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-B1
-B2
-B3
C-18 (2/3)
S51
GND [0]
5V [5]
Width 3 [t5]
Width 2 [t5]
Width 1 [t5]
GND [0]
5V [5]
[t5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
5V [5]
[t5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN162
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
CN635
Fusing Pressure
Release Sensor
PP1
10
22
11
23
12
24
18
19
10
11
12
13
14(22)
CN637
10
22
11
23
12
24
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
CN209
1
2
4
5
6
7
CN601
S5
681

Sensor
CN677
678
T2
CN679
AB (18)
AB (19)
AB (20)
AB (21)
5V
DB (8)
DB (9)
DB (10)
XCD2
GND
T1
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
CN218
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Charge P.P.
AB (6)
AB (5)
AB (4)
AB (3)
AB (2)
AB (1)
AB (0)
DB (0)
DB (1)
DB (2)
GND
GND
XCD1
DB (11)
DB (12)
DB (13)
DB (14)
DB (15)
GND
AB (17)
Drum Cooling Fan
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
N.C. (GND)
Thermistor (Center)
Thermistor (Center): GND
Fusing Exit Sensor
Fusing Exit Sensor: GND
Fusing Set
N.C. (+5V)
N.C. (GND)
Thermistor (Edge)
Thermistor (Edge): GND
IC Card Connector (CN208)
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
893
1
2
24V [24]
24V [24]
PGND [0]
PGND [0]
5V [5]
SGND [0]
24V [24]
PGND [0]
3.3V [3.3]
CN633
CN119
[0] GND
[24] 24V
[0] GND
[12] 12V
[12] +12V
[0] GND
[3.3] 3.3V
DFSCAN
XLAMPGT
ADF: TXD
ADF: RXD
FIN: TXD
FIN: RXD
LCT: TXD
LCT: RXD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fusing Pressure
Release Motor
Lower Relay Motor Current

[55/0] A : Fusing Pressure Release
[55/0] A : Fusing Pressure Release
[55/0] B : Fusing Pressure Release
[55/0] B : Fusing Pressure Release
Registration Motor Current
GND
DB (3)
DB (4)
DB (5)
DB (6)
DB (7)
GND
AB (10)
XOECRD
AB (11)
AB (9)
AB (8)
AB (13)
AB (14)
XWECRD
5V
AB (16)
AB (15)
AB (12)
AB (7)
2
1
2
1
CN728
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
[24] 24V
[t24] ON
[s5]
[H: High, L: Low] Speed
[24] 24V
[t24] ON
[24] 24V
[t24]
[24] 24V
[t24]
N.C.
[24] 24V
[t24]
FB: Grid
PWM: Grid
[t5] Leak: Charge
PWM: Grid
[0] PGND
[24] 24V-INT
[0] GND
[0/5]
[5] 5V
M-10 (1/3)
Pressure Release Motor
1
2
1
2
PCB10
CN219
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
CN161
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
CN163
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN632
24V [24]
PGND [0]
12 [12]
-12 [-12]
PGND [0]
24V [24]
24V [24]
PGND [0]
PGND [0]
5V [5]
SGND [0]
24VS [24]
PGND [0]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
ON [t5]
Toner Supply CL [t5]
Lock [t5]
Clock
24VS [24]
PGND [0]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
ON [t5]
Lock [t5]
Clock
CN171
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
CN631
MC
3
Development Unit
Cooling Fan 1
Development Unit
Cooling Fan 2
Drive Board (DRB)

[0]GND
[24] 24V
[0] PGND
[s24] 24VS
[0] GND
[5] 5V
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s24] 24VS
[0] PGND
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[0] GND
N.C.
N.C.
GND
24VS [24]
PGND [0]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
ON [t5]
CW/CCW
Lock
Clock
M7
Charge P.P. Cooling Fan
5
CN141
-A11
-A10
-A9
-A8
-A7
-A6
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
-A1
-B11
-B10
-B9
-B8
-B7
-B6
-B5
-B4
-B3
-B2
-B1
CN166
-A15
-A14
-A13
-A12
-A11
-A10
-A9
-A8
-A7
-A6
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
-A1
-B15
-B14
-B13
-B12
-B11
-B10
-B9
-B8
-B7
-B6
-B5
-B4
-B3
-B2
-B1
CN164
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
CN172
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
[24] 24V
[s24] 24VS
N.C.
N.C.
[24] 24V
[s24] 24VS
M6
Development Motor
CN215
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
2
1
3
2
1
CN167
-1
-6
-3
-4
-2
-5
M5
CN222
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
CN201
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5

B-21 (1/3)
1
T15 (2A)
T16 (2B)
1 (1A)
-1
Fusing/Exit Motor
4
3
2
1
2
1
4
3
2
1
10
22
11
23
12
24
Drum Motor
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
CN140
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Exhaust Fan
24V
24V
A
-A
B
-B
CN144
635
Registration
Motor
CN731
[240/24] -B
[24] 24V-INT
[240/24] B
[240/24] A
[24] 24V-INT
[240/24] -A
[24] 24V-INT
[240/24] A
[240/24] -A
[24] 24V INT
[240/24] B
[240/24] -B
N.C.
[24] 24V
[2424/0] A
[2424/0] -A
[24] 24V
[2424/0] B
[2424/0] -B
[24] 24V
[224/0] A
[224/0] -A
[24] 24V
[2424/0] B
[224/0] -B
SW3
CN142
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
CN143
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
634
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
7
8
9
6
5
4
12
11
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
6
5
4
12
11
10
Duplex Transport
Motor
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
Duplex Inverter
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
J
SYMBOL TABLE
Pulse Signal
CNB
F-2 (1/3)
406
PCB4
IPU
CN374
872
BCU (CN207) IPU (CN347)

EXAB (0)
EXAB (2)
EXAB (4)
EXAB (6)
EXAB (8)
EXAB (10)
EXAB (12)
GND
XRSTCDIC
XINTCDIC
BCU_STATE
SLEEP_OFF
GND
EXDB (1)
EXDB (3)
EXDB (5)
GND
EXDB (7)
3.3VE
GND
EXDB (6)
EXDB (4)
EXDB (2)
EXDB (0)
GND
XERD_IPU
XEWR_IPU
XCSCDIC
PWR_CTL0
GND
EXAB (11)
EXAB (9)
EXAB (7)
EXAB (5)
EXAB (3)
EXAB (1)
C-16(2/3)
CN117
720
B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 2/3
Upper Tray Heater
Lower Tray Heater
H4
H3
Scanner Heater
(Option)
Drum Heater
H2
H1
AC IN
BCU
J-8 (1/3)
FG
M28
1st Tray Lift Motor
Toner Overflow Switch
SW7
M31
754 753
SW6
755
Toner Collection Bottle Set Switch
M29
2
1
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-12
CN268
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
[t24] Down
CN267
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-B1
-B2
-B3
T31
[0] GND
[t5]
[0] GND
[tt5]
[t5] Lock
[t5] ON
[0] PGND
[24] 24V
24V [24]
[t24]
24V [24]
[t24]
GND [0]
[t5]
N.C.
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
-B4
-B5
2
1
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
2
1
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Main SW, AC Counter

5V: PFC, BCU, ADF
5V: VIB, DRB, Development Motor
24V: PFC
24V: ADF
24V: SDRB, DRB
24V: Finisher
24V: VIB, BCU, Polygonal Motor
CN101
1
2
VIB
L-17(1/3)
-1
-2
CN111
-1
-2
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
2
1
-A4
-A5
-B1
CN5
CN7
CN6
T7
T6
T1
T2
Main Switch
T3
T4
CN107
3
1
CN114
-1
-2
-2
-1
-3
-1
-1
-2
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[24] 24V
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
SW-TRG
FG
MB
L-11(3/3)
Right Tray Down Sensor

Near End Sensor
1
2
1
2
Right Tray Paper Sensor

SOL
13
SOL
14
CN202
Front Side Fence Solenoid

Rear Side Fence Solenoid
CN161
BCU
J-22 (1/3)
CN162
CNB
E-8 (1/3)
GND
33VS
33VS
GND
33VSE
GND
51VS
GND
S46
PCB18
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
S45
CTL_PSU
CN133
S44
PWR-IN
GND
GND
PWR-OUT
S43
51VSE
51VSE
51VSE
51VSE
51VSE
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
S42
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
S41
CN132
S40
AC_L
AC_N
CN130
-1
-2
S39
CN134
-1
-2
-3
-4
S38
-2
-1
CN317
S37
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
M32
Rear Fence Motor
CN316
MB
L-10(3/3)
SYMBOL TABLE
AC Line
CN315
MB
L-9(3/3)
CN520
CN520
DC Line
Pulse Signal
Signal Direction
s
SOL
15
Right Tray Lock Solenoid
SOL
16
Active High
CN348
T34
1
2
12
13
15(23)
Comment
T101
CN111-1, CN112-1
CN113-4, CN117-1, CN119-1
CN119-2
CN113-1, CN115-8
CN120-1
CN120-2
CN120-3
CN120-4
CN120-5
CN120-6
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
Left Tray Set [t5]

[t24]
[t24]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
[t5]
GND [0]
5V [5]
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
T1
CN521
10A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
T32
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
Fusing Lamp 3 (280W)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
Near End
[0] CGND
Paper Height
[t5] Up
[t5] Down
Near End
[0] CGND
Paper Height
[t24] Up
[t24] Down
[t24] Up
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
14
15
16
17
18
19
38
39
40
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
12VSE
12VSE
12VSE
GND
GND
GND
[0] GND
[t5] Paper Size 5
[t5] Paper Size 4
[t5] Paper Size 3
[t5] Paper Size 2
[t5] Paper Size 1
[0] GND
[t5] Paper Size 5
[t5] Paper Size 4
[t5] Paper Size 3
[t5] Paper Size 2
[t5] Paper Size 1
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
14
15
16
17
18
19
38
39
40
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
FG
CN131
[240/24] B
[240/24] B
[24] COM
[240/24] A
[240/24] A
[24] COM
[240/24] B
[240/24] B
[24] COM
[240/24] A
[240/24] A
[24] COM
T30
TS3
TS2
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
[240/24] B
[240/24] B
[24] COM
[240/24] A
[240/24] A
[24] COM
CN265
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
-A16
-A17
-A18
-A19
-A20
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
-B16
-B17
-B18
-B19
-B20
TS1
CN917
Fuse
CB1
FU101
FU103
FU104
FU105
FU106
FU107
FU108
FU109
FU110
FU111
Lower Front Door Safety Switch

SW8
Right Tray Set [t5]

GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[s5]
5V [5]
GND [0]
[t5]
5V [5]
24V [24]
[t24]
24V [24]
[t24]
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
T5
Thermistor 1
4
1
-7
CN106
-2
-1
5
2
-4
-1
-2
-1
Thermistor 2
TH1
Thermostat
-8
-5
-2
CN120
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
2
1
-B4
-B5
10
11
VHT3 Fusing Lamp N
VHT3 (Fusing Lamp 3) N
MAIN SW ON N
MAIN-PSU ON N
VHT6 (CTL-PSU ON) N
MAIN SW ON L
MAIN-PSU ON L
VHT6 (CTL-PSU ON) L
+24V-INT [s24]
[24]
18
19
10
11
Fusing Exit Sensor
TH2
200V, China
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
CN261
-1
-2
12
13
15(23)
-A2
-A3
1
2
CN117
-1
-2
VCC2
FG
-2
-5


-4
CN104
-1
CN103
-1
-4
-2
-5
T102
ACIN-L
ACIN-N
Drum, Scanner, Tray Heater

Main SW, AC Counter
5V: PFC, BCU, ADF
5V: VIB, DRB, Development Motor
24V: PFC
24V: ADF
24V: SDRB, DRB
24V: Finisher
24V: VIB, BCU, Polygonal Motor
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
3rd Tray Lift Motor
T101
CN103-1, -2, CN104-1, -2
CN111-1, CN112-1
CN113-4, CN117-1, CN119-1
CN119-2
CN113-1, CN115-8
CN120-1
CN120-2
CN120-3
CN120-4
CN120-5
CN120-6
[5] 5V
[5] 5V
[0] SGND
[0] SGND
[12] 12V
[12] 12V
[0] PGND
[3.3] 3.3V
CN801
CN803
CN809
CN809
M27
[5] 5VE
[5] 5VE
[0] SGND
[0] SGND
20A
2A
12A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
S50
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
2nd Tray Lift Motor
CN815
CN828
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
2
CN264
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
CB1
FU1
FU101
FU103
FU104
FU105
FU106
FU107
FU108
FU109
FU110
FU111
CN102
-4
-3
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
[3.3] 3.3VE
[0] SGND
[5] 5V
[0] SGND
[12] 12VH
[0] PGND
[0] PGND
[24] 24V
N.C.
N.C.
VHT2 Fusing Lamp L

VHT1 Fusing Lamp L
Comment
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
CN850
CN850
SW5
CN815
CN829
SW4
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN822
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN270
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
CN823
M27
CN274
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
820
2nd Paper Feed Motor
M26
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN830
3rd Paper Feed Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN850
CN853
M25
CN850
CN852
1st Paper Feed Motor
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fuse
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
PCB14
3
1
CN108
-1
-2
893
PFC
CN275
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN221
CN116
-1
-2
-3
-4
2
1
2
1
PSU
100V
CN115
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
Fusing Unit
T2
PCB15
Key Counter L
Key Counter N
CN119
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
SOL
12
CN801
CN801
T101
1
2
CN610
VHT5 (CAP-PSU ON) N

VHT5 (CAP-PSU ON) L
Fusing Lamp 3 ON
[0] T-GND
[0] T-24V
[24] 24V
[0] GND
[24] 24V-INT
[t24] Relay ON
[0/5] Zero Cross
3rd Separation Roller Solenoid
S36
CN200
M34
CN105
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
PSU Cooling Fan
M33
-B5
-B4
-B3
-B2
-B1
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
-A1
S35
CN112
-1
-2
CN814
846
SOL
11
842
3rd Pick-up Solenoid
1
2
CN352
-1
-2
BCU
L-5 (1/3)
PSU Cooling Fan
818
S34
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
-B11
-B12
-B13
-B14
-B15
-B16
-1
-2
-3
-4
24V
GND
GND
5V
CN351
-1
-2
CN813
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
CN263
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN814
S33
CN271
-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-A10
-A11
-A12
-A13
-A14
-A15
-A16
RXD: PFC
GND
TXD: PFC
GND
CN113
-1
-2
-3
-4
816
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[t5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t24]
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[0] GND
[s5]
[5] 5V
[24] 24V
[t5]
CN260
-1
-2
-3
-4
819
842
SOL
10
CN809
CN811
841
1
2
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
CN801
CN804
S32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN273
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN809
CN812
844
846
S31
SOL
9
2nd Separation Roller Solenoid
1
2
845
2nd Pick-up Solenoid
S30
844
840
S29
845
1
2
SOL
8
1st Separation Roller Solenoid
845
S28
840
S27
841
844
1
2
SOL
7
841
1st Pick-up Solenoid
S26
846
S25
840
842
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
24V
GND
GND
5V
1
2
1
2
612 613
1
2
1
2
614 615
18
19
CN209
BCU
J-23 (1/3)
Active Low
IPU
D-17(1/3)
Left Tray Lock Solenoid
Voltage
CPU Cooling
FAN
SLOT2
SLOT1
CN314
CN160
SD CARD
GND
GND
VCC12VR
VCC12VR
CN131
CN314
CTL_PSU
K-15 (2/3)
M1
Bottom Side
Cooling FAN
PANEL I/F
GND
+5V (Back Light)
OP4CS
OP4DSA
OPPREQ
OP4RST
OP4_LED_ON
OPCLK
+5VE
GND
IDE Power
12VHDD
GND
GND
5VHDD
XPW_SW
OPREQ
GND
OPRXD
OPRCLK
GND
OPTCLK
OPTXD
GND
SW_DT
5VPA
OPMHDD
CN325
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
IDE I/F
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN404
CN980
N-PI Board
PCB17
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
HDD 1
CN326
HDD CONTROL I/F
CN438
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
VIB
G-13 (1/3)
Pin A#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Signal Name
GND
_INTC
GND
RESERVED
GND
CLKRUN
GND
_PCIRST1
GND
PCICLK(3)
GND
_GNT(1)
GND
_REQ(1)
GND
_PCI_PME
AD(31)
AD(30)
AD(29)
AD(28)
AD(27)
AD(26)
GND
AD(25)
AD(24)
_C_BE(3)
GND
IDSEL
AD(23)
AD(22)
GND
AD(21)
AD(20)
AD(19)
GND
AD(18)
AD(17)
AD(16)
GND
_C_BE(2)
_FRAME
_IRDY
GND
_TRDY
_DEVSEL
_STOP
GND
_PERR
_SERR
PAR
GND
_C_BE(1)
AD(15)
AD(14)
GND
AD(13)
AD(12)
AD(11)
GND
AD(10)
AD(9)
AD(8)
GND
_C_BE(0)
AD(7)
AD(6)
AD(5)
AD(4)
AD(3)
AD(2)
VCC3.3
AD(1)
VCC3.3
AD(0)
VCC3.3
RESERVED
VCC3.3
RESERVED
VCC3.3
RESERVED
Pin B#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Signal Name
GND
_INTD
GND
RESERVED
GND
CLKRUN
GND
_PCIRST1
GND
PCICLK(5)
GND
_GNT(2)
GND
_REQ(2)
GND
_PCI_PME
AD(31)
AD(30)
AD(29)
AD(28)
AD(27)
AD(26)
GND
AD(25)
AD(24)
_C_BE(3)
GND
IDSEL
AD(23)
AD(22)
GND
AD(21)
AD(20)
AD(19)
GND
AD(18)
AD(17)
AD(16)
GND
_C_BE(2)
_FRAME
_IRDY
GND
_TRDY
_DEVSEL
_STOP
GND
_PERR
_SERR
PAR
GND
_C_BE(1)
AD(15)
AD(14)
GND
AD(13)
AD(12)
AD(11)
GND
AD(10)
AD(9)
AD(8)
GND
_C_BE(0)
AD(7)
AD(6)
AD(5)
AD(4)
AD(3)
AD(2)
VCC3.3
AD(1)
VCC3.3
AD(0)
VCC3.3
RESERVED
VCC3.3
RESERVED
VCC3.3
RESERVED
CN314
RAPI OPTION I/F
CN326
CN327
-1
-2
-3
-4
USB I/F
CN325
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
PEACE I/F
USBA_5V
USBNX
USBPX
GND
CSS I/F
CN322
-1
-2
-3
-4
Power
Control
CTL_PSU
M-13 (2/3)
Signal Name
XPWRCTL1
XPWRCTL0
GND
GND
GND
GND
XINT1
GND
GND
XGNT1
AD30
AD28
AD26
AD24
GND
AD22
AD20
AD18
AD16
GND
GND
XIRDY
XDEVSEL
XPERR
PAR
GND
AD14
AD12
AD10
AD8
GND
AD6
AD4
AD2
AD0
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
CN132
CTL_PSU
M-14 (2/3)
Power Sousrce
(12V)
+5VE
+5VE
PETXD
PERXD
GND
GND
Power Sousrce
(5V)
CN321
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Signal Name
MDQ22
MDQ54
MDQ23
MDQ55
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MA6
MA7
MA8
BA0
GND
GND
MA9
BA1
MA10
MA11
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ2
MDQ6
MDQ3
MDQ7
GND
GND
MDQ24
MDQ56
MDQ25
MDQ57
MDQ26
MDQ58
MDQ27
MDQ59
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ28
MDQ60
MDQ29
MDQ61
MDQ30
MDQ62
MDQ31
MDQ63
GND
GND
SDA1
SCL
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
+5VE
CSSRXD
CSSTXD
GND
CSSCTS
XCSSRST
WUP_CSS
Pin#
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
CN320
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
Signal Name
MDQ13
MDQ45
MDQ14
MDQ46
MDQ15
MDQ47
GND
GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
CLK2
CKE3
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
XRAS
XCAS
XRWE
CKE2
XCS2
MA12
XCS3
GND
NC
CLK3
GND
GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ16
MDQ48
MDQ17
MDQ49
MDQ18
MDQ50
MDQ19
MDQ51
GND
GND
MDQ20
MDQ52
MDQ21
MDQ53
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Pin#
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
VCC_12
FAN2
Signal Name
GND
GND
MDQ0
MDQ32
MDQ1
MDQ33
MDQ2
MDQ34
MDQ3
MDQ35
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ4
MDQ36
MDQ5
MDQ37
MDQ6
MDQ38
MDQ7
MDQ39
GND
GND
MDQ0
MDQ4
MDQ1
MDQ5
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MA0
MA3
MA1
MA4
MA2
MA5
GND
GND
MDQ8
MDQ40
MDQ9
MDQ41
MDQ10
MDQ42
MDQ11
MDQ43
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ12
MDQ44
VCC_12
FAN1
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Pin#
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
CN323
GND
VCC12
SENSE
SLOT3
SLOT1
SLOT2
CN150
CN313
CCK,1394 Power
CN317
-1
-2
Signal Name
MDQ22
MDQ54
MDQ23
MDQ55
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MA6
MA7
MA8
BA0
GND
GND
MA9
BA1
MA10
MA11
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ2
MDQ6
MDQ3
MDQ7
GND
GND
MDQ24
MDQ56
MDQ25
MDQ57
MDQ26
MDQ58
MDQ27
MDQ59
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ28
MDQ60
MDQ29
MDQ61
MDQ30
MDQ62
MDQ31
MDQ63
GND
GND
SDA0
SCL
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
Signal Name
GND
XENGRDY
CLK1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
XREQ1
AD31
AD29
AD27
AD25
C/BE3
AD23
AD21
AD19
AD17
C/BE2
XRST
XFRAME
XTRDY
XSTOP
XSERR
C/BE1
AD15
AD13
AD11
AD9
C/BE0
AD7
AD5
AD3
AD1
GND
GND
GND
GND
NC
Pin A#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Signal Name
GND
_INTC
GND
RESERVED
GND
CLKRUN
GND
_PCIRST2
GND
PCICLK(2)
GND
_GNT(3)
GND
_REQ(3)
GND
_PCI_PME
AD(31)
AD(30)
AD(29)
AD(28)
AD(27)
AD(26)
GND
AD(25)
AD(24)
_C_BE(3)
GND
IDSEL
AD(23)
AD(22)
GND
AD(21)
AD(20)
AD(19)
GND
AD(18)
AD(17)
AD(16)
GND
_C_BE(2)
_FRAME
_IRDY
GND
_TRDY
_DEVSEL
_STOP
GND
_PERR
_SERR
PAR
GND
_C_BE(1)
AD(15)
AD(14)
GND
AD(13)
AD(12)
AD(11)
GND
AD(10)
AD(9)
AD(8)
GND
_C_BE(0)
AD(7)
AD(6)
AD(5)
AD(4)
AD(3)
AD(2)
VCC3.3
AD(1)
VCC3.3
AD(0)
VCC3.3
RESERVED
VCC3.3
RESERVED
VCC3.3
RESERVED
Pin A#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Signal Name
GND
INTA_SL1#
GND
RESERVED
GND
CLKRUN
GND
RST#
GND
PCLK_SL1
GND
GNT_SL1#
GND
REQ_SL1#
GND
PME#
AD31
AD30
AD29
AD28
AD27
AD26
GND
AD25
AD24
C_BE3
GND
IDSEL_SL1
AD23
AD22
GND
AD21
AD20
AD19
GND
AD18
AD17
AD16
GND
FRAME#
IRDY#
GND
C_BE2
TRDY#
DEVSEL#
STOP#
GND
PERR#
SERR
PAR
GND
C_BE1
AD15
AD14
GND
AD13
AD12
AD11
GND
AD10
AD9
AD8
GND
C_BE0
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
+3.3V
AD1
+3.3V
AD0
+3.3V
RESERVED
+3.3V
RESERVED
+3.3V
RESERVED
Pin B#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Signal Name
GND
_INTD
GND
RESERVED
GND
CLKRUN
GND
_PCIRST2
GND
PCICLK(1)
GND
_GNT(4)
GND
_REQ(4)
GND
_PCI_PME
AD(31)
AD(30)
AD(29)
AD(28)
AD(27)
AD(26)
GND
AD(25)
AD(24)
_C_BE(3)
GND
IDSEL
AD(23)
AD(22)
GND
AD(21)
AD(20)
AD(19)
GND
AD(18)
AD(17)
AD(16)
GND
_C_BE(2)
_FRAME
_IRDY
GND
_TRDY
_DEVSEL
_STOP
GND
_PERR
_SERR
PAR
GND
_C_BE(1)
AD(15)
AD(14)
GND
AD(13)
AD(12)
AD(11)
GND
AD(10)
AD(9)
AD(8)
GND
_C_BE(0)
AD(7)
AD(6)
AD(5)
AD(4)
AD(3)
AD(2)
VCC3.3
AD(1)
VCC3.3
AD(0)
VCC3.3
RESERVED
VCC3.3
RESERVED
VCC3.3
RESERVED
CN151
RAPI OPTION EXT I/F
Mother Board
(PCB1)
CN311
SO-DIMM I/F
Pin#
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Signal Name
_AG_ADS(0)
GND
GND
AGP_AD(10)
_A_CBE(0)
AGP_AD(12)
GND
AGP_AD(7)
AGP_AD(9)
AGP_AD(8)
AGP_AD(4)
GND
AGP_AD(2)
AGP_AD(5)
AGP_AD(0)
AGP_AD(6)
GND
AGP_AD(1)
AGPCLK1
AGP_AD(3)
VCC5VR
VCC12VR
VCC5VR
VCC12VR
VCC5VR
VCC5VR
VCC_AGP
GND
GND
3VDUAL
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
RAPI OPTION
IPU (CN346)
D-15 (1/3)
-2
-1
Signal Name
MDQ13
MDQ45
MDQ14
MDQ46
MDQ15
MDQ47
GND
GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
CLK0
CKE1
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
XRAS
XCAS
XRWE
CKE0
XCS0
MA12
XCS1
GND
NC
CLK1
GND
GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ16
MDQ48
MDQ17
MDQ49
MDQ18
MDQ50
MDQ19
MDQ51
GND
GND
MDQ20
MDQ52
MDQ21
MDQ53
(CN111)
CN107
CN108
CN109
SO-DIMM
PC133 128MB
Pin#
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
DIMM SLOT1 DIMM SLOT2
Controller Board
(PCB 14)
+12VE
+12VE
+12VE
GND
GND
GND
Pin#
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
Signal Name
AGP_AD(27)
AGP_AD(25)
GND
XAGP_TPDET
_A_CBE(3)
GND
AGP_AD(22)
_AG_ADS(1)
GND
AG_ADS(1)
AGP_AD(20)
GND
AGP_AD(18)
AGP_AD(21)
AGP_AD(16)
AGP_AD(23)
AGP_AD(17)
AGP_AD(19)
GND
_AGP_IRDY
_AGP_FRAME
GND
_AGP_DEVSL
NC
_AGP_STOP
VREF4X_IN
_AGP_TRDY
GND
AGP_PAR
_A_CBE(2)
GND
GND
AGP_AD(13)
_A_CBE(1)
AGP_AD(11)
_AGP_SERR
GND
AGP_AD(14)
AG_ADS(0)
AGP_AD(15)
CN114
CN316
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Signal Name
GND
GND
MDQ0
MDQ32
MDQ1
MDQ33
MDQ2
MDQ34
MDQ3
MDQ35
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ4
MDQ36
MDQ5
MDQ37
MDQ6
MDQ38
MDQ7
MDQ39
GND
GND
MDQ0
MDQ4
MDQ1
MDQ5
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MA0
MA3
MA1
MA4
MA2
MA5
GND
GND
MDQ8
MDQ40
MDQ9
MDQ41
MDQ10
MDQ42
MDQ11
MDQ43
VCC_3.3
VCC_3.3
MDQ12
MDQ44
Pin#
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
CN312
Signal Name
SD3_DT(3)
SD_CMD(3)
GND
3VDUAL
SDCLK3
GND
SD3_DT(0)
SD3_DT(1)
SD3_DT(2)
-SD_CD(3)
GND
-SD_WP(3)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Signal Name
GND
GND
USBP0
USBN0
GND
GND
_EDGE1
_EDGE2
GND
GND
_CSS_WUP
_USBOC0
PWRC0
_PWRC1
_PCI_PME
_WUP_PWRSW
GND
NC
_PCIRST0
_INTA
GND
GND
_AGP_GNT
_AGP_PIPE
GND
_AGP_REQ
AGP_ST(1)
GND
AGP_ST(0)
AGP_ST(2)
GND
_AGP_RBF
NC
GND
AGP_AD(30)
AGP_AD(31)
AGP_AD(28)
AGP_AD(29)
AGP_AD(26)
AGP_AD(24)
PCI OPTION
CN107
SD CARD I/F
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
+5VE
+5VE
+5VE
+5VE
+5VE
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Signal Name
SD2_DT(3)
SD_CMD(2)
GND
3VDUAL
SDCLK2
GND
SD2_DT(0)
SD2_DT(1)
SD2_DT(2)
-SD_CD(2)
GND
-SD_WP(2)
CN315
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
CN109
SD CARD I/F
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Pin#
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
CN102
M2
SD CARD
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
Signal Name
SD1_DT(3)
SD_CMD(1)
GND
3VDUAL
SDCLK1
GND
SD1_DT(0)
SD1_DT(1)
SD1_DT(2)
-SD_CD(1)
GND
-SD_WP(1)
DC Supply Board
CN310
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Signal Name
GND
GND
GND
GND
_COREFB
GND
GND
COREFB
VID(0)
GND
GND
VID(1)
VID(2)
GND
GND
VID(3)
VID(4)
GND
GND
_THERM
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC12
VCC12
VCC12
VCC12
VCC12
VCC12
Signal Name
SD0_DTOUT1
SD0_DTOUT0
SD0_DTOUT3
SD0_DTOUT2
GND
GND
SDCLK
SD0_CMDOUT
GND
SD0_CMDIN
SD0_WP
SD0_DTDIR
SD0_DTIN3
SD0_CD
BSCLK
SD0_CMDDIR
GND
BSDATA
SD0_DTIN2
POWERGOOD
SD0_DTIN1
OPMRCLK
_OPMTCLK
GND
GND
OPMLED
_OPMTXD
OPMRXD
SD0_DTIN0
_OPMRREQ
PEACE_TXD
PEACE_RXD
GND
GND
CSS_RXD
XCSS_RST
GND
CSS_CTS
CSS_TXD
CSS_RTS
SO-DIMM
Pin#
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
CN311
Signal Name
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
VCC_K7CORE
CN101
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CN324
-1
-2
-3
-4
Signal Name
MDT(42)
MDT(46)
MDT(43)
MDT(47)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
CLKOTL(5)
GND
CLKOTH(5)
GND
GND
MDT(48)
MDT(52)
MDT(49)
MDT(53)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
DQS_SR(6)
DM_SR(6)
MDT(50)
MDT(54)
GND
GND
MDT(51)
MDT(55)
MDT(56)
MDT(60)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MDT(57)
MDT(61)
DQS_SR(7)
DM_SR(7)
GND
GND
MDT(58)
MDT(62)
MDT(59)
MDT(63)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
SMBUSD
SA0
SMBUSC
SA1
VCC2.5
SA2
VDDID
NC
CN151B
Pin#
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
CN105
PCI OPTION I/F
CN151A
Signal Name
MAB_SR(9)
MAB_SR(8)
GND
GND
MAB_SR(7)
MAB_SR(6)
MAB_SR(5)
MAB_SR(4)
MAB_SR(3)
MAB_SR(2)
MAB_SR(1)
MAB_SR(0)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MAB_SR(10)
MAB_SR(14)
MAB_SR(13)
_RASB_SR
_WEB_SR
_CASB_SR
_CS_SR(2)
_CS_SR(3)
NC
NC
GND
GND
MDT(32)
MDT(36)
MDT(33)
MDT(37)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
DQS_SR(4)
DM_SR(4)
MDT(34)
MDT(38)
GND
GND
MDT(35)
MDT(39)
MDT(40)
MDT(44)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MDT(41)
MDT(45)
DQS_SR(5)
DM_SR(5)
GND
GND
External Controller
Interface Board
(PCB 16)
Pin#
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
SLOT4
Signal Name
GND
GND
MDT(19)
MDT(23)
MDT(24)
MDT(28)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MDT(25)
MDT(29)
DQS_SR(3)
DM_SR(3)
GND
GND
MDT(26)
MDT(30)
MDT(27)
MDT(31)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MECC_SR(0)
MECC_SR(4)
MECC_SR(1)
MECC_SR(5)
GND
GND
DQS_SR(8)
DM_SR(8)
MECC_SR(2)
MECC_SR(6)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MECC_SR(3)
MECC_SR(7)
NC
NC
GND
GND
CLKOTH(3)
GND
CLKOTL(3)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
_CKEB_SR
_CKEB_SR
A13:NC
NC
MAB_SR(12)
MAB_SR(11)
CN103
PCI OPTION I/F
MB (CN313) - MB (CN346)
CN105B
Pin#
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
SO-DIMM
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CN310
SO-DIMM I/F
CN105A
Signal Name
VREF
VREF
GND
GND
MDT(0)
MDT(4)
MDT(1)
MDT(5)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
DQS_SR(0)
DM_SR(0)
MDT(2)
MDT(6)
GND
GND
MDT(3)
MDT(7)
MDT(8)
MDT(12)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MDT(9)
MDT(13)
DQS_SR(1)
DM_SR(1)
GND
GND
MDT(10)
MDT(14)
MDT(11)
MDT(15)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
CLKOTH(4)
VCC2.5
CLKOTL(4)
GND
GND
GND
MDT(16)
MDT(20)
MDT(17)
MDT(21)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
DQS_SR(2)
DM_SR(2)
MDT(18)
MDT(22)
SLOT3
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
CN103B
Signal Name
MDT(42)
MDT(46)
MDT(43)
MDT(47)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
CLKOTL(2)
GND
CLKOTH(2)
GND
GND
MDT(48)
MDT(52)
MDT(49)
MDT(53)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
DQS_SR(6)
DM_SR(6)
MDT(50)
MDT(54)
GND
GND
MDT(51)
MDT(55)
MDT(56)
MDT(60)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MDT(57)
MDT(61)
DQS_SR(7)
DM_SR(7)
GND
GND
MDT(58)
MDT(62)
MDT(59)
MDT(63)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
SMBUSD
SA0
SMBUSC
SA1
VCC2.5
SA2
VDDID
NC
CN103A
Pin#
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
DDR_SDRAM_DIMM 2
Signal Name
MAB_SR(9)
MAB_SR(8)
GND
GND
MAA_SR(7)
MAA_SR(6)
MAA_SR(5)
MAA_SR(4)
MAA_SR(3)
MAA_SR(2)
MAA_SR(1)
MAA_SR(0)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MAA_SR(10)
MAA_SR(14)
MAA_SR(13)
_RASA_SR
_WEA_SR
_CASA_SR
_CS_SR(0)
_CS_SR(1)
NC
NC
GND
GND
MDT(32)
MDT(36)
MDT(33)
MDT(37)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
DQS_SR(4)
DM_SR(4)
MDT(34)
MDT(38)
GND
GND
MDT(35)
MDT(39)
MDT(40)
MDT(44)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MDT(41)
MDT(45)
DQS_SR(5)
DM_SR(5)
GND
GND
DDR_SDRAM_DIMM 1
Pin#
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
CN319
-1
-2
Signal Name
GND
GND
MDT(19)
MDT(23)
MDT(24)
MDT(28)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MDT(25)
MDT(29)
DQS_SR(3)
DM_SR(3)
GND
GND
MDT(26)
MDT(30)
MDT(27)
MDT(31)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MECC_SR(0)
MECC_SR(4)
MECC_SR(1)
MECC_SR(5)
GND
GND
DQS_SR(8)
DM_SR(8)
MECC_SR(2)
MECC_SR(6)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MECC_SR(3)
MECC_SR(7)
NC
NC
GND
GND
CLKOTH(0)
GND
CLKOTL(0)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
_CKEA_SR
_CKEA_SR
A13:NC
NC
MAB_SR(12)
MAB_SR(11)
VCC_12
FAN1
Pin#
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
CN318
-1
-2
Signal Name
VREF
VREF
GND
GND
MDT(0)
MDT(4)
MDT(1)
MDT(5)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
DQS_SR(0)
DM_SR(0)
MDT(2)
MDT(6)
GND
GND
MDT(3)
MDT(7)
MDT(8)
MDT(12)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
MDT(9)
MDT(13)
DQS_SR(1)
DM_SR(1)
GND
GND
MDT(10)
MDT(14)
MDT(11)
MDT(15)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
CLKOTH(1)
VCC2.5
CLKOTL(1)
GND
GND
GND
MDT(16)
MDT(20)
MDT(17)
MDT(21)
VCC2.5
VCC2.5
DQS_SR(2)
DM_SR(2)
MDT(18)
MDT(22)
CN112
-1
-2
-3
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
CN108
SD CARD I/F
Controller (CN114) - MB (CN312)
CN111
CPU CORE I/F
CN102
S
CN113
-1
-2
-3
B140/B141/B142/B163/B228 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 3/3

CN101
DDR-SDRAM DIMM I/F
GND
VCC12
SENSE
Signal Name
XIDE1RST
GND
DD7
DD8
DD6
DD9
DD5
DD10
DD4
DD11
DD3
DD12
DD2
DD13
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
GND
KEYPIN
Pin#
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Signal Name
IDE1DRQ
GND
XIDE1IOW
GND
XIDE1IOR
GND
IDE1IORDY
CSEL
XIDE1DACK
GND
IDE1INT
RESERVED
IDE1AD1
XPDIAG
IDE1AD0
IDE1AD2
XIDE1CS0
XIDE1CS1
XDASP
GND
CN323
SD CARD I/F
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal Name
GND
SD0_DT2
SD0_DT3
GND
SD0_CMD
SDCLK
GND
SD0_DT0
SD0_DT1
GND
XSD0_WP
XSD0_CD
GND
3VDUAL
3VDUAL
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Signal Name
RESERVE
RESERVE
PCLK_EXT3
XPCIREQ2
XPCIGNT2
XPCIINTB
AD0
IDSEL2
AD2
AD1
AD6
AD4
AD8
C/BE0
AD11
AD10
AD14
AD13
GND
GND
PAR
C/BE1
XSTOP
XPERR
XIRDY
XTRDY
AD16
C/BE2
AD19
AD18
AD22
AD21
C/BE3
IDSEL_SL2(LOW)
:IDESL4
AD26
AD25
AD30
AD28
XPME
GND
GND
GND
CKLKRUN
XRST
XREQ_SL2(LOW)
GND
PCLK_SL2(LOW)
XGNT_SL2(LOW)
XINTA_SL2(LOW)
NC(XINTB_SL2)
manuals4you.com
Pin#
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
Signal Name
1284BUF(+5V)
+3.3VAUX
+3.3V
1284BUF(+5V)
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
AD3
+3.3V
AD7
AD5
AD9
GND
AD12
GND
AD15
GND
GND
GND
XSERR
GND
XDEVSEL
GND
XFRAME
GND
AD17
GND
AD20
GND
AD23
GND
AD24
IDSEL_SL1(UP)
:IDSEL3
AD27
GND
AD31
AD29
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
XREQ_SL1(UP)
GND
PCLK_SL1(UP)
XGNT_SL1(UP)
XINTA_SL1(UP)
NC(XINTB_SL1)
Pin B#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Signal Name
GND
INTA_SL2#
GND
RESERVED
GND
CLKRUN
GND
RST#
GND
PCLK_SL2
GND
GNT_SL2#
GND
REQ_SL2#
GND
PME#
AD31
AD30
AD29
AD28
AD27
AD26
GND
AD25
AD24
C_BE3
GND
IDSEL_SL2
AD23
AD22
GND
AD21
AD20
AD19
GND
AD18
AD17
AD16
GND
FRAME#
IRDY#
GND
C_BE2
TRDY#
DEVSEL#
STOP#
GND
PERR#
SERR
PAR
GND
C_BE1
AD15
AD14
GND
AD13
AD12
AD11
GND
AD10
AD9
AD8
GND
C_BE0
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
+3.3V
AD1
+3.3V
AD0
+3.3V
RESERVED
+3.3V
RESERVED
+3.3V
RESERVED
3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER (B674) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
CN240-3
-2
-1
CN242-3
-2
-1
CN244-3
-2
-1
CN245-3
-2
-1
CN248-3
-2
-1
CN249-3
-2
-1
Punch Clutch
Punch Motor
Punch Hole
Motor
CL1
M21
M22
S30
CN261-3
-2
-1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
[0] GND2
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[5] 5V
N.C.
N.C.
[5] 5V
[s5] Proof Tray Full
[0] GND2
CN218-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
CN219-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN220-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Booklet stapler
Motor 1
M16
CN104-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
CN421
CN422
CN263-3
-2
-1
S32
Bottom Fence
HP Sensor
CN424
1
2
3
4
CN266-3
-2
-1
S33
Lower Tray Paper

Height Sensor 3
1
2
3
CN267-3
-2
-1
S34
Proof Tray
Full Sensor
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN105-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

N.C.
CN106-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Exit Motor COM [24]

Exit Motor COM [24]
N.C.
N.C.
CN107-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
N.C.
N.C.
CN108-8
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

N.C.
CN109-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN110-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

N.C.
CN111-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

N.C.
CN112-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

N.C.
M17
1
2
3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

N.C.
Booklet stapler
Motor 2
Top Fence
HP Sensor
CN425
CN221
CN222
CN223
CN225
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
T6

N.C.
N.C.
GND2 [0]
Stapler Rotation Sensor [s5]
5V [5]
N.C.
[24] 24V SW
[t24] Upper Tray Lift
[5] 5V
[s5] Upper Tray Paper Height
[0] GND2
Pressure Plate Motor COM [24]
[0] GND2
[t5] Upper Tray Paper
[5] 5V
Pressure Plate Motor COM[24]
CN229
CN217-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
3
2
1
S31
CN113-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN144-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Entrance Motor
M2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Stapler Transport
Motor
M3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
Proof Tray Motor
M4
Shift Motor
M5
Exit Motor
T7
CN114-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN115-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
M18
M19
M20
Folder Roller
Motor
Folder Plate
Motor
Pressure
Plate Motor
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pre-stack Motor
M6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M7
Shift Roller
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN143-1
-2
-3
CN131-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
6
5
4
3
2
1
[0] GND2
[t5] Lower Tray Paper
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Lower Tray Paper Height 1
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Lower Tray paper Height 2
[5] 5V
CN132-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
CN252-3
-2
-1
CN253-3
-2
-1
CN254-3
-2
-1
CN226-1
-2
CN255-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN226-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN133-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN120-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN142-1
-2
-3
-4
Jogger Fence
H.P. Sensor
[5] 5V
[s5] Hopper sensor
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[s5] H.P. Sensor
[5] 5V
N.C.
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[24] 24V SW
[t24] Punch Clutch
[t5] LD
[t5] MTON
[24] 24V SW
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[t24] Hole Change Motor

[24] 24V SW
[t5] Hole Change Switch
[0] GND2
CN230-3
-2
-1
Stapler H.P.
Sensor
S26
CN231-3
-2
-1
Stapler Tray
Paper Sensor
S27
Guide Plate
Position Sensor
S23
CN257-3
-2
-1
Pressure Plate
Shutter Position
Sensor
[0] GND2
[s5] Lower Tray Full
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[0 or 5 0/5] Lower Tray Encoder
[5] 5V
S25
S24
CN258-3
-2
-1
Booklet Exit
Sensor
GND2 [0]
5V [5]
5V [5]
TXD
N.C.
RXD
5VE [5]
GND2 [0]
CN103-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-9
24V [24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
N.C.
CN305-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN259-3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
T2
T3
UL1007 AWG20
(W)
(W)
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
[0] GND2
[s5] Jogger Feed H.P. Sn.
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Stapler H.P. Sn.
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[t5] Stapler Tray paper Sn.
[5] 5V
CN134-1
-2
CN301
GND1

N.C.
[24] 24V
[s24] 24V SW
CN140-1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
[5] 5V
[s5] Lower Tray position Sn. 1
[0] GND2
[5] 5V
[s5] Lower Tray Position Sn. 2
[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[s5] Booklet Exit Sn.
[5] 5V
GND2
GND2
5V
5V
RD
ZESM
TXD
5VE
CN304
Door Switch
SW1
CN124-1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
2
1
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
-2
-1
S28
CN304-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN102-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
CN232-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
CN101-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
GND2 [0]
GND2 [0]
5V [5]
5V [5]
RXD
N.C.
TXD
5VE [5]
NC
24V
24V
24V
24V
GND1
GND1
GND1
CN100-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
N.C.
24V [24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
24V [24]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
GND1 [0]
M4
Jogger Top Fence Motor COM [24]

Jogger Top Fence Motor COM [24]
N.C.
Jogger Top Fence Motor A [24 0/24]
Jogger Top Fence Motor A [24 0/24]
Jogger Top Fence Motor B [24 0/24]
Jogger Top Fence Motor B [24 0/24]
N.C.
Jogger Bottom Fence Motor COM [24]
Jogger Bottom Fence Motor COM [24]
N.C.
Jogger Bottom Fence Motor A [24 0/24]
Jogger Bottom Fence Motor A [24 0/24]
Jogger Bottom Fence Motor B [24 0/24]
Jogger Bottom Fence Motor B [24 0/24]
N.C.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN207
B468 only
CN400
Lower Tray
paper Sensor
CN251-3
-2
-1
S22
Punch H.P.
Sensor
CN260-3
-2
-1
CN250-3
-2
-1
S21
Punch Hopper
Full Sensor
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
1
2
3
4
5
M15
Upper tray
Lift Motor
4
3
2
1
CN262-3
-2
-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Jogger Fence
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M9
Stapler
movement
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M10
Stapler
Rotation
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M11
Feed Out
Belt Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M12
Guide Plate
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M23
Jogger Top
Fence Motor
M24
Jogger Bottom
Fence Motor
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M8
CN265
S20
S29
CN415
Lower Tray
Encoder
3
2
1
CN414
S19
CN130-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
CN416
Lower Tray
Full Sensor
S18
1
2
3
Upper Tray
paper Sensor
CN227
Lower Tray Paper

Height Sensor 2

FG [0]
FG [0]
GND2 [0]
5V [5]
CN146-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
3
2
1
1
2
3
CN208
S17
5
4
3
2
1
(W)
(W)
CN209
S16
2
1
CN401
1
2
SOL5
Lower Tray Paper

Height Sensor 1
CN141-1
-2
-3
CN232-3
-2
-1
Upper Tray Paper

Height Sensor
CN129-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
CN228
Upper Tray
Lift solenoid
CN123-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
3
2
1
CN210
S15
GND2[0]
N.C.
5V [0]
READY [s5]
CN145-1
2
3
4
5
6
CN211
Stapler Rotation
Sensor
[0] GND2
[s5] Pressure Plate H.P.
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Pressure Plate Upper Limit
[5] 5V
Lower Tray
Lift Motor
GND2 [0]
STOPPER_HP
5V [5]
GND2 [0]
FENCE_HP
5V [5]
DC Line
Pulse Signal
Signal Direction
Active High
Active Low
Voltage
s
t
M13
CN264
S13
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M14
PCB1
Main Board
SYMBOL TABLE
Staple Unit
EH-530
CN216-4
-3
-2
-1
CN423
Upper Tray
Full Sensor
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
Pre-stack
Junction Gate
Solenoid
CN215-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
GND2 [0]
LT_PF3
5V [5]
GND2 [0]
P_FULL2
5V [5]
GND2 [0]
P_P_CHK
5V [5]
SOL3
CN121-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
UL1007 AWG22
1
2
CN420 CN417
S12
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
CN418
Upper Tray
Limit Sensor
CN243-3
-2
-1
[0] GND2
[t5] Feed out Belt H.P.
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Folder Plate H.P.
[5] 5V
CN128-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN116-1
-2
(W)
(W)
Upper Limit Switch <Upper Tray>

SW5
T14
T15
Stapler
Junction
Gate solenoid
UL1007 AWG22
1
2
CN427
S11
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN404
S10
Pressure Plate
Lift Sensor
Pressure Plate
H.P. Sensor
T12
T13
(W)
(W)

FG [0]
FG [0]
GMD 2 [0]
5V [5]
CN127-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
CN241-3
-2
-1
SW4
CN122-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
GND2 [0]
N.C.
5V [5]
READY [s5]
CN256
S9

CN135-1
-2
-3
2
1
CN212
1
2
3
AMP CT 3P
Folder Plate
H.P. Sensor
Upper Tray Limit [24]

Upper Tray Limit [s24]
[0] GND2
[t5] Shift Timing
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[s5] Shift Roller H.P.
[5] 5V
N.C.
[0] GND2
[s5] Guide Position
[5] 5V
Pressure Plate Limit Switch
CN119-1 UL3385 AWG20

-2
CN213
3
2
1
CN126-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
CN239-3
-2
-1
S8
Feed out Belt

H.P. Sensor
3
2
1
(W)
(W)
CN214
CN238-3
-2
-1
S7
Guide Plate
HP Sensor
1
2
3
CN237-3
-2
-1
S6
Shift Roller H.P.

Sensor

SOL2
UL1007 AWG22
2
1
T5
5V [5]
S-RDY [s5]
GND2 [0]
Prollf Junction
SOL1 Gate Solenoid
Upper Limit Switch <Lower Tray>
SW3
T10
T11
(W)
(W)
1
2
(W)
(W)
CN403
CN136-1
-2
SW2
1
2
CN409
S5
Shift Timing
Sensor

CN236-3
-2
-1
2
1
SOL4 Positioning
Roller
solenoid
CN139-1
-2

CN235-3
-2
-1
(W)
(W)
UL1007 AWG22
CN118-1
-2
UL3385 AWG20
CN137-1
T8
(W)
T9
-2
(W)
24V SW [24]
Pre-stack Junction Gage [t24]
1
2
CN419
S4
24V SW [24]
Positioning Solenoid [t24]
T4
2
1
CN117-1
-2
-3
-4
CN411
Staple Entrance
Sensor
3
2
1
24V SW [24]
Proof Junction Gate [t24]
24V SW [24]
Staple Junction Gate [t24]
CN412
S3
1
2
3
[0] GND2
[t5] Entrance Sensor
[5] 5V
[0] GND2
[t5] Exit Sensor
[5] 5V
N.C.
[t5] Proof Exit Sensor
[0] GND2
[5] 5V
[t5] Staple Exit
[0] GND2
[5] 5V
CN408
Proof Tray
Exit Sensor
CN234-3
-2
-1
CN406
S2
Exit Sensor
CN125-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
3
2
1
CN405
1
2
3
CN402
Entrance Sensor
CN233-3
-2
-1
CN407
S1
CN200
CN201
CN202
CN203
CN204
CN205
CN206
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (1/2)

Main Machine
9
10
11
12
13
49
14
15
16
26
28
29
25
20
54
55
53
47
33
46
34
35
56
57
151
22
B064V003.WMF
58
42
23
21
40
41
B064V951.WMF
39
37
59
60
62
61
B140V955A.WMF
84
71
85
147
86
92
87
88
83
82
89
100
72
73
81
65
38
B064V954.WMF
64
149
150
63
36
43
74
90
91
99
92
75
80
93
76
66
94
98
95
70
77
69
67
68
96
78
153
97
79
B140V008.WMF
B064V956.WMF
B064V957A.WMF
103
102
116
115
101
104
143
117
126
127
144
ADF
128
129
142
105
141
140
114
21
113
106
107
109
152
145 146
B140V959.WMF
124
111
108
24
25
27
123
122
121
120
B064V910.WMF
119
138
20
139
112
22
23
26
130
118
125
110
155
32
44
24
52
31
45
19
51
30
18
154
27
17
50
131
137
136
18
132
135
9
19
17
133
16
134
15
B064V958.WMF
manuals4you.com
14
13
12
11
10
B064V996.WMF
B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (2/2)

Main Machine
Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
Index No.
M14
87
M15
19
M16
20
M17
M18
88
107
M19
67
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
99
121
64
98
32
47
41
42
96
97
95
73
138
59
60
M35
145
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
92
89
22
100
85
84
90
122
120
94
93
17
86
24
14
15
11
72
108
113
112
69
70
124
126
123
118
115
117
71
Description
P to P
Bottom Side Cooling Fan

CPU Cooling Fan
Polygonal Mirror
Toner Cooling Fan
Drum
Fusing/Exit
Development
Duplex Inverter
Duplex Transport
Registration
By-pass Feed
Scanner
Exhaust Fan
Charge Power Pack
Cooling Fan
Fan 1
Fan 2
Drum Cooling Fan
Web
Charge Corona Wire
Cleaner
PCU Cooling Fan
Jogger
Toner Supply
Duplex Cooling Fan
Lower Relay
1st Paper Feed
3rd Paper Feed
2nd Paper Feed
2nd Tray Lift
3rd Tray Lift
1st Tray Lift
Toner Collection
Rear Fence
PSU Cooling Fan 1
PSU Cooling Fan 2
Fusing Pressure Release
Motor
E6 (3/3)
E3 (3/3)
J1 (1/3)
G4 (1/3)
A2 (1/3)
B2 (1/3)
B2 (1/3)
A7 (1/3)
A7 (1/3)
A6 (1/3)
Original Width
Original Length 1
Original Length 2
Scanner HP
Web End
Exit Unit Entrance
Paper Exit
Image Density (ID)
Drum Potential
Duplex Entrance
Duplex Inverter
Duplex Transport 1
Duplex Jogger HP
Duplex Transport 2
Duplex Transport 3
D4 (1/3)
D4 (1/3)
E4 (1/3)
E4 (1/3)
D6 (1/3)
E6 (1/3)
E6 (1/3)
E6 (1/3)
E6 (1/3)
F6 (1/3)
F6 (1/3)
F6 (1/3)
F6 (1/3)
G6 (1/3)
G6 (1/3)
G6 (1/3)
G6 (1/3)
E4 (1/3)
C6 (1/3)
C6 (1/3)
C6 (1/3)
C6 (1/3)
D6 (1/3)
E6 (1/3)
E6
E6 (1/3)
G6 (1/3)
J6 (1/3)
J6 (1/3)
A6 (1/3)
C5 (2/3)
C5 (2/3)
C5 (2/3)
B6 (2/3)
B6 (2/3)
B7 (2/3)
B7 (2/3)
E6 (2/3)
E2 (2/3)
E2 (2/3)
D6 (1/3)
Symbol
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
S33
S34
S35
S36
S37
S38
S39
S40
S41
S42
S43
S44
S45
S46
S47
S48
S49
S50
Index No.
66
65
1
7
8
6
2
26
27
28
29
43
44
45
46
40
39
38
37
137
140
127
144
134
132
141
133
135
131
142
143
139
111
S51
146
S52
Switches
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
SOL3
SOL4
SOL5
SOL6
SOL7
SOL8
SOL9
SOL10
P to P
H6 (1/3)
H6 (1/3)
I6 (1/3)
I6 (1/3)
I6 (1/3)
J6 (1/3)
J6 (1/3)
B2 (2/3)
B2 (2/3)
B2 (2/3)
B2 (2/3)
B3 (2/3)
B3 (2/3)
B3 (2/3)
B3 (2/3)
B4 (2/3)
B4 (2/3)
B4 (2/3)
B4 (2/3)
E5 (2/3)
E5 (2/3)
E5 (2/3)
E5 (2/3)
E5 (2/3)
E5 (2/3)
E5 (2/3)
E5 (2/3)
E6 (2/3)
E6 (2/3)
E6 (2/3)
E7 (2/3)
E7 (2/3)
I2 (2/3)
147
Description
Toner End
Toner Density (TD)
Registration
By-pass Paper End
Relay
By-pass Paper Size
1st Paper Feed
1st Vertical Transport
1st Paper End
1st Tray Lift
2nd Paper Feed
2nd Vertical Transport
2nd Paper End
2nd Tray Lift
3rd Paper Feed
3rd Vertical Transport
3rd Paper End
3rd Tray Lift
Front Side Fence Open
Front Side Fence Close
Rear Side Fence Open
Rear Side Fence Close
Right Tray Down
Near End
Paper Height 1
Paper Height 2
Paper Height 3
Right Tray Paper
Rear Fence HP
Rear Fence Return
Left Tray Paper
Fusing Exit
Fusing Pressure Release
Sensor
Thermal / Humidity Sensor
80
82
81
77
78
75
74
79
83
Front Cover Safety 1

Front Cover Safety 2
Front Door Safety
2nd Paper Size
3rd Paper Size
Toner Collection Bottle Set
Toner Overflow
Lower Front Door Safety
Main
I4 (1/3)
I4 (1/3)
A4 (1/3)
B6 (2/3)
B6 (2/3)
B7 (2/3)
B7 (2/3)
D4 (2/3)
I4 (2/3)
109
117
125
105
3
4
30
31
32
34
Exit Junction Gate

Reverse Trigger Roller
Duplex Junction Gate
Transfer Belt Lift
By-pass Pick-up
Guide Plate
1st Pick-up
1st Separation Roller
2nd Pick-up
2nd Separation Roller
D6 (1/3)
I6 (1/3)
D6 (1/3)
F6 (1/3)
F6 (1/3)
H6 (1/3)
I6 (1/3)
J6 (1/3)
A2 (2/3)
A3 (2/3)
B3 (2/3)
B3 (2/3)
Symbol
SOL11
SOL12
SOL13
SOL14
SOL15
SOL16
Index No.
35
36
136
128
130
129
Magnetic Clutches
MC1
122
MC2
5
MC3
91
Description
3rd Pick-up
3rd Separation Roller
Front Side Fence
Rear Side Fence
Right Tray Lock
Left Tray Lock
P to P
B4 (2/3)
B4 (2/3)
E6 (2/3)
E6 (2/3)
E7 (2/3)
E7 (2/3)
Duplex Transport
By-pass Feed
Toner Supply
F6 (1/3)
I6 (1/3)
B1 (1/3)
PCBs
PCB1
PCB3
52
53
PCB4
54
PCB5
PCB6
PCB7
PCB8
PCB9
PCB10
18
16
25
23
49
56
PCB11
50
PCB12
13
PCB13
PCB14
PCB15
12
58
57
PCB16
149
PCB17
PCB18
150
151
Mother
Controller
IPU (Image Processing
Control Unit)
Operation Panel
LDB (Laser Drive Board)
DRB (Drive Board)
BCU (Base Engine Control
Unit)
SDRB (Scanner Drive
Board)
Lamp Regulator
PSU
External Controller
Interfase Board
CSS
Controller PSU
68
10
110
106
152
153
Quenching Lamp
Exposure Lamp
Fusing Lamp 1
Fusing Lamp 2
Fusing Lamp 3
PTL
F6 (1/3)
J6 (1/3)
I3 (2/3)
I3 (2/3)
I3 (2/3)
F6 (1/3)
Charge
Development
Transfer
D6 (1/3)
H6 (1/3)
H6 (1/3)
Key Counter (Option)

Mechanical Counter
Drum
Scanner (Option)
Lower Tray
Upper Tray
Laser Synchronization
Detector
Thermistor 1
Thermistor 2
Thermostat 1
E4 (1/3)
H6 (1/3)
G1 (2/3)
G1 (2/3)
G1 (2/3)
G1 (2/3)
Lamps
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
Power Packs
PP1
51
PP2
55
PP3
104
Others
CO1
CO2
H1
H2
H3
H4
76
63
9
61
62
LSD1
21
TH1
TH2
TS1
101
114
102
E5 (3/3)
E4 (3/3)
H2 (1/3)
G4 (1/3)
F4 (1/3)
G4 (1/3)
H3 (1/3)
C3 (1/3)
A5 (1/3)
H5 (1/3)
E4 (1/3)
J6 (1/3)
C3 (2/3)
F2 (2/3)
G4 (3/3)
F6 (3/3)
I5 (3/3)
J2 (1/3)
I2 (2/3)
I2 (2/3)
I3 (2/3)
Symbol
TS2
TS3
HDD1
Index No.
Description
103
Thermostat 2
154
Thermostat 3
155
HDD
P to P
I3 (2/3)
I3 (2/3)
Index No.
P to P
ADF
Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Description
4
13
12
27
5
Feed
Transport
Exit
Pick-up
Bottom Plate
J3
J4
J4
J5
J5
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
14
15
3
2
24
23
22
21
1
8
7
6
9
10
26
16
17
25
Original Set
Bottom Plate HP
Feed Cover
Original Width 1
Original Width 2
Original Width 3
Original Width 4
Pick-up Roller HP
Original Length 3
Original Length 2
Original Length 1
DF Position
APS Start
Interval
Skew Correction
Exit
Registration
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A3
A3
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A5
A6
A6
A6
A7
A7
PCBs
PCB1
PCB2
PCB3
11
20
19
DF Main
CIS
CIS Power Supply
E4
G7
H7
Lamps
L1
18
CIS
I7
3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER (B674) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

47
12
46
13
25
45
14
26
44
15
27
43
23
24
22
18
21
19
29
40
30
39
31
38
32
37
*(Not work)
26
11
41
17
10
28
42
16
63
1
48
33
34
20
B468V103.WMF
B468V102.WMF
64
51
52
50
49
65
53
54
55
56
62
61
66
67
57
60
59
58
B468V107.WMF
35
36
Symbol Index No.

Motors
M1
40
M2
38
M3
45
M4
46
M5
29
M6
39
M7
30
M8
55
M9
57
M10
58
M11
54
M12
5
M14
47
M15
27
M16
48
M17
50
M18
51
M19
53
M20
21
M21
44
M23
65
M24
67
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
8
2
7
11
1
Description
P to P
Entrance Motor
Stapler Transport Motor
Proof Tray Motor
Shift Drive Motor
Exit Motor
Pre-Stack Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Jogger Motor
Stapler Movement Motor
Feed Out Belt Motor
Guide Plate Motor
Lower Tray Lift Motor
Upper Tray Lift Motor
Folder Roller Motor*
Folder Plate Motor*
Pressure Plate Motor*
Punch Motor
Jogger Top Fence Motor
Jogger Bottom Fence Motor
J2
J3
J3
J3
J4
J4
J5
J5
J5
J6
J6
J6
G2
G2
G3
G3
G4
G4
G4
A7
J7
J7
Finisher Entrance Sensor

Exit Sensor
Stapler Entrance Sensor
Shift Timing Sensor
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
B468V006.WMF
Symbol Index No.

S6
31
S7
4
S8
62
S9
52
S10
18
S11
22
S12
12
S13
32
S15
60
S16
13
S17
15
S18
24
S19
35
S20
S21
S22
48
9
42
S23
23
S24
26
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
56
59
61
17
25
20
Description
Shift Roller HP Sensor
Guide Plate HP Sensor
Feed Out Belt HP Sensor
Folder Plate HP Sensor*
Pressure Plate HP Sensor
Pressure Plate Lift Sensor*
Upper Tray Full Sensor
Stapler Rotation Sensor
Upper Tray Paper Height
Sensor*
(Lower Tray)
(Lower Tray)
(Saddle Stitch Mode)
Lower Tray Encoder
Punch Hopper Full Sensor
Punch HP Sensor
Sensor
Pressure Plate Sutter
Position Sensor
Jogger Fence HP Sensor
Stapler HP Sensor
Booklet Exit Sensor
Upper Tray Paper Sensor*
Lower Tray Paper Sensor*
P to P
A2
A2
A3
A3
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
A5
A5
A5
A5
A6
A6
A6
E6
E6
E5
E5
E5
E6
B5
B5
Symbol Index No.

Description
S31
64
Top Fence HP Sensor
S32
66
Bottom Fence HP Sensor
Lower Tray Paper Height
S33
63
Sensor 3
S34
6
Proof Tray Full Sensor
Switches
SW1
10
SW2
16
SW3
19
SW4
28
SW5
Door Switch
Upper Limit Switch (Lower
Tray)
Pressure Plate Limit
Switch*
Upper Limit Switch* (Upper
Tray)
P to P
J1
J2
J2
J2
F5
E1
E1
E2
E2
Solenoids
SOL1
41
SOL2
33
SOL3
34
SOL4
SOL5
37
14
Proof Junction Gate

Solenoid
Stapler Junction Gate
Solenoid
Solenoid
Upper Tray Lift Solenoid *
Magnetic Clutches
CL1
43
Punch Clutch
PCBs
PCB1
Main Board
36
manuals4you.com
G1
G1
G1
E1
A4
A6
D, H
Model MT C1b/C1c
(B064/B065)
Model MT C2a/C2b/C2c
(B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228)
PARTS CATALOG
Second edition, August 2004
Ricoh Company, LTD.
Model MT C1b/C1c
(B064/B065)
(B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228)
PARTS CATALOG
This catalog gives the numbers and names of parts on this machine.
Model MT C1b/C1c
Copy Tray Type 1075
Copy Connector Cable Type 2105
LCT RT43/
81/2"x14" Paper Size Trya Type 1075
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type 1075
Z-folding Unit Type 2105
Jogger Unit Type 1075
Cover Interposer Tray Type1075
(B064/B065)
(B140/B141/B142/
B143/B163/B228)
(B476)
(B328)
(B473/B474/B475)
(B660)
(B513)
(B470)
manuals4you.com
Model MT C1b/C1c/C2a/C2b/C2c
(B064/B065/B163/B140/B141)
PARTS CATALOG
SR840
SR841
SR860/SR850
SR861
Punch Unit Type 850
Punch Kit Type 1045
Punch Unit Type 1075
Mail Box CS390
Printer/Scanner Kit Type 1075
IEEE 1394/IEEE802.11B
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2075
IEEE1394/IEEE802.11B/Security Unit
Key Counter Bracket Type 1027
(B478)
(B706)
(B468/B469)
(B674)
(A812)
(B377)
(B531)
(B471)
(G338/G339)
(G336/b525)
(B659)
(B581/B582/B735)
(B452)
Model MT C1b/C1c
(B064/B065)
(B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228)
manuals4you.com
Model MT C1b/C1c
(B064/B065)
(B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228)
PARTS CATALOG
Location of Unit....................................................... 2
1.EXTERIOR 1....................................................... 14
2.EXTERIOR 2....................................................... 16
3.OPERATION PANEL .......................................... 18
4.DF EXTERIOR .................................................... 20
5.DF ORIGINAL FEED 1 ....................................... 22
6.DF ORIGINAL FEED 2 ....................................... 24
7.DF ORIGINAL TRANSFER 1.............................. 26
10.DF ORIGINAL TRANSFER 4............................. 32
11.DF ORIGINAL EXIT ........................................... 34
12.DF DRIVE/ELECTRICAL 1 ................................ 36
13.DF DRIVE/ELECTRICAL 2 ................................ 38
14.DF FRAME SECTION........................................ 40
15.OPTICS SECTION 1.......................................... 42
16.OPTICS SECTION 2.......................................... 44
17.OPTICS SECTION 3.......................................... 46
18.OPTICS SECTION 4.......................................... 48
19.LASER UNIT ...................................................... 50
20.TANDEM TRAY 1 ..............................................

21.TANDEM TRAY 2 ..............................................
22.TANDEM TRAY 3 ..............................................
23.UNIVERSAL TRAY ............................................
24.BY-PASS FEED TRAY ......................................
25.PAPER FEED UNIT 1 ........................................
26.PAPER FEED UNIT 2 ........................................
27.VERTICAL TRANSPORT ..................................
28.PAPER REGISTRATION 1................................
31.TONER HOPPER SECTION .............................
32.TONER SUPPLY UNIT ......................................
33.DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 ...................................
34.DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 ...................................
35.PCU 1.................................................................
36.PCU 2.................................................................
37.PCU 3.................................................................
38.PCU 4.................................................................
39.TRANSFER BELT UNIT 1 .................................
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
August ,10 ' 2004
Model MT C1b/C1c
(B064/B065)
(B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228)
PARTS CATALOG
40.TRANSFER BELT UNIT 2 ................................. 92

41.FUSING UNIT 1 ................................................. 94
42.FUSING UNIT 2 ................................................. 96
43.FUSING UNIT 3 (Model C1) .............................. 98
44.FUSING UNIT 3 (Model C2) ............................. 100
47.PAPER EXIT SECTION 1................................. 106
50.DUPLEX UNIT 1 ............................................... 112
51.DUPLEX UNIT 2 ............................................... 114
52.DUPLEX UNIT 3 ............................................... 116
53.DUPLEX UNIT 4 ............................................... 118
54.DUPLEX UNIT 5 ............................................... 120
55.DRIVE SECTION 1 ........................................... 122
56.DRIVE SECTION 2 ........................................... 124
57.TONER COLLECTION ..................................... 126
58.ELECTRICAL SECTION 1................................ 128
59.ELECTRICAL SECTION 2 (Model C1) ............. 130

62.ELECTRICAL SECTION 5 ................................ 136
66.UPPER FRAME 1 ............................................. 144
67.UPPER FRAME 2 ............................................. 146
68.UPPER FRAME 3 ............................................. 148
69.LOWER FRAME 1 ............................................ 150
70.LOWER FRAME 2 ............................................ 152
71.BCU BOARD (Model C1) .................................. 154
72.BCU BOARD (Model C2) .................................. 164
73.IPU BOARD (Model C1) ................................... 174
74.IPU BOARD(Model C2) .................................... 182
75.GW BOARD (Model C1) ................................... 194
76.GW BOARD (Model C2) ................................... 202
77.DECAL AND DOCUMENTS ............................. 218
78.SPECIAL TOOLS.............................................. 222
PARTS INDEX ........................................................ 225
manuals4you.com
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
1. EXTERIOR 1
See Page 15
4. DF EXTERIOR
See Page 21
2. EXTERIOR 2
3. OPERATION PANEL
See Page 17
5. DF ORIGINAL FEED 1
See Page 23
See Page 19
6. DF ORIGINAL FEED 2
See Page 25
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
7. DF ORIGINAL TRANSFER 1
See Page 27
See Page 33
See Page 29
11. DF ORIGINAL EXIT
See Page 31
12. DF DRIVE/ELECTRICAL 1
See Page 35
See Page 37
manuals4you.com
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
13. DF DRIVE/ELECTRICAL 2
See Page 39
16. OPTICS SECTION 2
See Page 45
14. DF FRAME SECTION
See Page 41
See Page 47
See Page 43
See Page 49
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
19. LASER UNIT
See Page 51
22. TANDEM TRAY 3
See Page 57
20. TANDEM TRAY 1
21. TANDEM TRAY 2
See Page 53
23. UNIVERSAL TRAY
See Page 55
24. BY-PASS FEED TRAY
See Page 59
See Page 61
manuals4you.com
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
25. PAPER FEED UNIT 1
See Page 63
28. PAPER REGISTRATION 1
See Page 69
26. PAPER FEED UNIT 2
See Page 65
See Page 71
27. VERTICAL TRANSPORT
See Page 67
See Page 73
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
31. TONER HOPPER SECTION
32. TONER SUPPLY UNIT
See Page 77
See Page 75
34. DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2
See Page 81
33. DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1
35. PCU 1
See Page 79
36. PCU 2
See Page 83
See Page 85
manuals4you.com
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
37. PCU 3
38. PCU 4
See Page 87
40. TRANSFER BELT UNIT 2
See Page 93
39. TRANSFER BELT UNIT 1
See Page 89
41. FUSING UNIT 1
See Page 91
42. FUSING UNIT 2
See Page 95
See Page 97
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
43. FUSING UNIT 3 (Model C1)
See Page 99
See Page 105
See Page 101
See Page 103
47. PAPER EXIT SECTION 1
See Page 107
See Page 109
manuals4you.com
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
See Page 111

52. DUPLEX UNIT 3
See Page 117
50. DUPLEX UNIT 1
See Page 113

53. DUPLEX UNIT 4
See Page 119
10
51. DUPLEX UNIT 2
See Page 115

54. DUPLEX UNIT 5
See Page 121
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
55. DRIVE SECTION 1
See Page 123

58. ELECTRICAL SECTION 1
See Page 129
56. DRIVE SECTION 2
57. TONER COLLECTION
See Page 125
See Page 127
59. ELECTRICAL SECTION 2 (Model C1)
See Page 131
See Page 133
11
manuals4you.com
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
See Page 135

See Page 141
See Page 137

See Page 143
12
See Page 139

66. UPPER FRAME 1
See Page 145
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
67. UPPER FRAME 2
See Page 147
68. UPPER FRAME 3
69. LOWER FRAME 1
See Page 149
See Page 151
70. LOWER FRAME 2
See Page 153
13
manuals4you.com
1.EXTERIOR 1
32
14
35
13
28
31
36
33
29
104
30
104
18
102
2
15
104
101
17
4
16
6
3
102
1
19
103
103
20
105
12
102
25
104
20
106
7
104
102
10
26
21
22
104
23
105
24
102
27
34
9
101
104
11
14
1.EXTERIOR
Index
No.
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Part No.
A294 1292
B065 1361
B140 1361
B065 1329
B098 1342
B065 1366
B065 1301
B065 1327
B065 1325
B140 1223
B065 1323
B065 1326
B064 7012
B064 7015
B064 7016
B064 7017
B064 7018
B064 7019
B065 7012
B065 7015
B065 7016
B065 7017
B065 7018
B065 7019
B065 1363
B065 1364
B065 1315
B065 1316
B065 3699
B065 1313
AX64 0137
B065 1318
A060 2512
A294 1378
B065 1367
Description
Door Switch Bracket
Decal - Misfeed Removal (Model C1)
Decal:Misfeed Removal:Main (Model C2)
Upper Right Door Seal
Hinge:Upper
Decal - Toner Supply
Front Door
Door Catch
Main Switch Cover
Hinge Lower Ass'y
Guide Plate Lever
Micro Switchlever
Model Name Plate - Aficio 1060
Model Name Plate- GES 6002
Model Name Plate- NSH 6005
Model Name Plate- REX 6008
Model Name Plate - Lanier LD060
Model Name Plate - Infotec IS2060
Decal - Main Switch (NA/ASIA/KOR)
Decal - Main Switch (EU/CHN/TWN)
Inner Cover - Main Switch
Fusing Inner Cover
Decal - Release Lever
PCU Inner Cover
Cooling Fan - 24V
PCU Duct Inner Cover
Registration Roller Knob
Decal - Total Counter
Decal - Front Door
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
Part No.
Description
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
32
33
34
35
35
35
35
35
36
B065 1314
A229 3290
A229 3291
AA10 0006
B065 6184
B027 8521
B023 1101
B065 8490
B070 1307
B477 4371
B065 7133
B065 7134
B477 4431
GA00 3035
B065 3342
B065 3345
B065 3346
B065 3347
B065 3348
B065 4276
Lower Right Inner Cover

Right Inner Cover
Right Inner Cover
Nut - M3.6
Paper Feed Inner Cover
O/I Holder
Stand Holder
Decal Sheet - Paper Size
Decal - Caution Chart Paper Set
Decal - Cleaning
Decal - Cleaning (CHN)
Decal - Cleaning (TWN)
Decal - Original Table
Energy Decal (Model C2)
Toner Supply Decal - German
Toner Supply Decal - French
Toner Supply Decal - Italian
Toner Supply Decal - Spanish
Decal:D1/E1:Multi
101
102
103
104
105
106
0450 3008N
0450 4010N
0354 0080N
0451 4008N
0951 4008N
0951 4012N
Tapping Screw - M3x8

Tapping Screw - 4x10
Screw - M4X8
Philips Tapping Screw - M4x8
Philips Screw With Washer - M4x8
Philips Screw With Flat Washer
15
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.EXTERIOR 2
(Model C2)
26
101
16
17
12
9
36
19
18
105
101
20
103
7
15
106
102
14
13
23
104
101
25
24
101
106
104
21
106
27
22
12
11
28
26
101
10
29
8
101
101
101
101
12
5
35
30
101
3
1
32
101
31
2
33
101
16
34
2.EXTERIOR 2
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
26
27
28
29
30
31
Part No.
B065 3689
A096 3712
B065 3681
AA00 0059
AA00 0550
A007 3751
B065 1334
B065 4480
B065 1344
B065 1304
B140 1304
B065 1311
B477 4391
AA14 3416
B065 1312
AX64 0110
B065 1345
B065 1309
AA15 2701
AA01 2128
B065 1332
B065 1243
B065 1305
B140 1305
AA01 0108
AA01 0114
A293 1332
B065 1237
B065 1308
B140 1308
B065 1244
B065 1302
B065 1343
B065 1303
B065 1310
Description
Toner Collection Bottle Bracket
Ratch
Toner Collection Bottle
Caution Decal - English
Caution Decal - CHN
Large Cap - Toner Collection Tank
Lower Left Cover
Decal - Cover
G4 Cap
Upper Left Cover (Model C1)
Left Upper Cover (Model C2)
Upper Left Cover
Decal - Exposure Glass Cleaning
Stepped Screw - M4x3
Operation Inner Cover
Axial Fan - Mm40 24V
Fan Bracket
Upper Rear Cover
Duct Seal
Machine Or Copier Filter
Louver
Operation Panel Inner Cover
Upper Rear Cover (Model C1)
Rear Upper Cover (Model C2)
Ozone Filter
Front Ozone Filter
Duct Holder
Exhaust Cover Duct
Lower Rear Cover (Model C1)
Rear Lower Cover (Model C2)
Upper Left Cover
Upper Right Cover
NCU Cap
LCT Cover
Upper Right Cover
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
Description
32
33
34
35
36
B065 1333
B065 1341
B065 1342
AA15 2315
B140 1309
Lower Right Cover

Connector Cap
Coupling Cap
Tank Seal
Control Board Louver (Model C2)
101
102
103
104
105
106
0451 4010N
0450 3008N
0451 3012N
0313 0100N
0450 4008N
0451 4008N

Philips Pan Head Screw - M3x10
Tapping Screw - 4x8
17
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
2
1
1
1
3.OPERATION PANEL
27
24
26
25
23
5
15
14
13
16
101
4
17
10
18
20
10
101
22
9
11
19
21
101
12
101
7
101
6
101
101
18
101
3.OPERATION PANEL
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
B065 1406
B065 1404
B065 1418
B065 1416
B065 1408
B065 1414
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
13
14
B140 1404
B140 1406
B140 1408
B065 1448
B065 1456
B065 1440
B065 1423
B140 1423
B065 5173
B163 5173
B065 5174
B163 5174
B065 5239
B163 5180
B065 5240
B065 5241
B065 1470
B140 1430
B065 1459
B065 1458
B065 1454
B065 1422
B140 1422
A229 5216
B065 1457
Description
Operation Panel Ass'y - A4 (Model C1 EU)
Operation Panel Ass'y - LT (Model C1)
Operation Panel A'ssy - A4
(Model C1 KOR)
Operation Panel Ass'y - A4
(Model C1 CHN)
(Model C1 TWN)
(Model C1 ASIA)
Operation Panel:Mat:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
Operation Panel:Mat:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
Operation Panel:ASIA:Ass'y (Model C2)
Cap - Application
Sheet - Left Operation
Keytop - 10key
Left Operation PCB (Model C1)
PCB Left Operation Sub-ass'y (Model C2)
LCDC Board - LT (Model C1)
PCB:OPU:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
LCDC Board - A4 (Model C1)
PCB:OPU:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
LCDC Board - A4 (Model C1 TWN/ASIA)
PCB:OPU:TWN:Ass'y (Model C2)
LCDC Board - A4 (Model C1 CHN)
LCDC Board - A4 (Model C1 KOR)
LCDC Bracket
LCD:EXP:Sub-Ass'y
LCD Short Sheet
LCD Long Sheet
Sheet - Right Operation
Right Operation PCB Ass'y (Model C1)
PCB Right Operation Sub-ass'y (Model C2)
Touch Panel
Sheet - Touch Panel
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
23
24
24
25
26
26
27
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
101
Part No.
B065 1447
B065 1439
B065 1446
B065 1444
B065 1455
B065 1443
B065 1441
B065 1442
B065 1460
B065 1462
G338 1449
B065 1461
B065 1463
B065 1451
B065 1425
B065 1427
G338 1421
Description
Keytop - Counter
Keytop - Reset Switch
Keytop - Function
Keytop - Power Source
Sheet - Power Source
Keytop - Sample Print
Keytop - Start
Keytop - Clear/Stop
Keytop - Application - LT
Keytop - Application - A4
Keytop:PRT/SCN:NA (B142/B143/B228)
Keytop - Display - LT
Keytop - Display - A4
Lens - Application
Operation Panel Case - LT
Operation Panel Case - A4
Keytop - Printer/Scanner - US
(B142/B143/B228)
0451 3006N Tapping Screw - M3x6
19
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4.DF EXTERIOR
8
102
12
102
7
6
102
102
102
5
102
101
11
9
1
101
2
10
10
4
4
102
4
4
20
102
4.DF EXTERIOR
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Part No.
B477 1891
B477 2711
B477 1922
B477 2715
B477 1861
B477 4911
B477 1912
B477 4431
B477 4381
A859 7211
B477 4362
B477 4361
B065 7002
Description
Front Cover
Pressure Plate
Lower Cover
Pressure Plate Tape
Exit Cover
Rear Cover Sponge
Rear Cover
Caution Decal - CIS
Stepped Screw
Decal - Misfeed Removal - Exit
X/X MB10
SADF DOM Ass'y (Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
8
1
4
1
1
1
2
1
101
102
Part No.
Description
0951 5010N Philips Screw With Washer - M5x10

0451 3006N Tapping Screw - 3x6
21
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
5.DF ORIGINAL FEED 1
22

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Part No.
B477 2272
A376 4599
G564 4151
B477 4311
5206 2686
A806 1351
B477 2286
B477 2262
B477 2263
AW02 0086
B477 2281
B477 2323
B477 2322
5053 0447
A806 1335
B477 2264
B477 5741
5053 0223
A806 2281
B477 1731
5215 2621
5447 2681
B477 2291
5415 4145
B477 1765
B477 1761
B477 1755
AW01 0087
B477 5631
Description
Table Side Fence
Side Fence Pad
Rail - Side Fence
Decal - Original Base
Snap Ring
Original Sensor Feeler
Original Sensor Feeler Stud
Original Table Base
Cushion
Photointerruptor
Original Sensor Bracket
Base Lift Lever
Base Lift Shaft
Bushing - 6mm
Original Table Guide Plate
Base Cushion Sheet
Original Connecting Harness
Bushing - 8mm
Gear - Z47
Face Original Table
Snap Ring - M6
Snap Ring
Original Table Stay
Stud
Spring Plate - Original Table Stopp
Original Table Stopper
Back Original Table
Photo Sensor - Ass'y
Original Table Harness
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
0450 3008N
0450 3006N
0802 5279
0632 0140G
0720 0040E
0720 0060E
1105 0310
Description
Tapping Screw - With Washer - M3X8
Parallel Pin
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
Harness Clamp - LWS-1S
23
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
24

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Part No.
A806 2271
A806 2151
B477 2222
5447 2681
5053 0447
B477 2225
AA13 2171
A806 4118
B477 2231
B477 2182
A806 1163
A806 2153
A628 1225
B477 2191
A806 1293
A680 1621
B477 2172
AA13 2013
AA06 3315
A418 1158
B301 1286
A806 1295
A806 4261
A806 1292
A806 1298
A806 1294
B477 2226
Description
Gear - Z18
Timing Pulley - T19/Z23 S2M/M0.6
Pick-up Roller Bracket
Snap Ring
Bushing - 6mm
Pick-up Roller
Spacer - 6x20x1
Timing Belt - B40S2M148
Pick-up Roller Lever
Rear Entrance Guide
Guide Plate Cushion
Timing Pulley - T27 S2M
Bushing - 8mm
Separation Shaft
Feed Belt Drive Roller
Feed-in Unit Stopper
Front Entrance Guide
Spacer
Spring - Belt Drive Shaft
Spacer - M6.5x1
Bushing - 6x10x6
Feed Belt
Spring Belt Guide Roller
Feed Belt Bracket
Transport Belt Roller Shaft
Feed Belt Driven Roller
Pickup Roller:Coupling
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
101
102
Part No.
Description
0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6

25
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
7.DF ORIGINAL TRANSFER 1

103
103
12
105
14
15
106
101
5
11
9
10
20
19
103
16
20
104
21
107
104
19
22
17
18
23
13
6
25
24
102
4
102
3
101
26
27
22
29
28
1
26
103

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Part No.
5446 2824
B477 1841
B477 4912
B477 1851
B477 1825
B477 4117
B477 1831
G564 6077
B477 4341
B477 4342
B477 4352
B477 1821
B477 4331
B477 2361
B477 1791
B477 2391
B477 5651
AW02 0104
AW02 0095
B477 2382
AA08 0037
B477 4111
B477 2351
AW01 0049
B477 2373
B477 2372
B477 4113
B477 2342
B477 5671
B065 1371
B065 1374
Description
Screw - Duplex Guide Plate
Front Cover Bracket
Paper Feed Cover Sponge
Rear Cover Bracket
Paper Feed Release Lever
Spring
Grip Shaft
Decal:Exposure Glass:5-lang
Decal - Exposure Glass (CHN)
Decal - Exposure Glass (TWN)
Decal - Misfeed Removal
Paper Feed Cover Grip
Decal - Original Size
Pull Out Roller Bracket
Paper Feed Cover
Paper Feed Grounding Plate
Paper Size Relay Harness
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Paper Size Sensor Bracket
Bushing - 6mm
Spring
Driven Pull Out Roller
Photo Reflection Sensor
Relay Roller Arm
Driven Paper Feed Roller
Spring
Guide:Paper Feed:Upper
Registration Relay Harness
Cloth Holder
Cloth - DF Exposure Glass
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
8
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
2
2
1
2
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
0805 0089
0451 3008N
0450 3008N
0720 0040E
0451 3006N
1105 0310
1105 0511
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
27
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
28

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Part No.
B477 2581
B477 2145
B477 4115
B477 2577
5324 1658
A374 2181
B477 2575
B477 2574
A422 1063
B477 2561
AA08 2141
B477 1775
AA14 3074
B477 2111
B477 2411
B477 2121
AW01 0049
B477 2665
A859 3225
B477 2471
5206 2684
B477 2143
B477 2141
B477 2151
B477 2161
B477 5681
Description
Entrance Scanning Guide
Guide Bracket
Spring
Driven Entrance Scanning Roller
Bushing- 4x8x4.5mm
Spacer
Entrance Scanning Roller Shaft
Roller Arm
Seal - 0.7x13x20
Entrance Scanning Base
Bushing - 16x18x5
Paper Feed Cover Bracket
Pull Out Roller
Drive Entrance Scanning Roller
Drive Relay Roller
Registration Sensor Bracket
Discharge Brush
Entrance Scanning Guide Plate
Shoulder Screw - M3
Lower Anti-static Brush
Lower Paper Feed Guide
Separation Cap
Lower Grounding Plate
Registration Sensor Relay Harness
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
4
2
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
0451 3006N
0720 0060E
0742 3808
0450 3008N
0453 3006N
1105 0514
Description
Retaining Ring - M6
Ball Bearing - 8x16x5
Edge Saddle - EDS-0607l
29
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
30

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Part No.
B477 1191
5415 4145
B477 4121
B477 4123
B477 1131
B477 2517
5053 0447
B477 2511
B477 2431
B477 2425
B477 2421
B477 1141
A697 2131
B477 2453
B477 2452
B477 4125
B477 2455
B477 2495
AW01 0049
B477 2491
B477 2481
B477 2487
B477 2521
B477 3817
B477 2516
B477 2451
B477 2480
Description
Front Left Stopper
Stud
Spring
Spring
Front Scanning Bracket
Scanning Guide Plate
Bushing - 6mm
Scanning Roller
Front Scanning Arm
Front Scanning Roller Arm
Drive Scanning Roller
Rear Scanning Bracket
Antistatic Brush
Rear Lock Hook - CIS
Lever Shaft - Misfeed Removal
Spring
Front Lock Hook - CIS
Paper Feed Sensor Bracket
Anti-static Brush
Upper Exit Scanning Sheet
Scanning Roller Cover
Timing Belt
Discharge Brush
Rear Lever Shaft - Misffed Removal
Upper Exit Scanning Guide Plate
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
0451 3006N
0720 0060E
0742 3808
0805 0089
1105 0511
Description
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M4
31
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
32

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Part No.
A422 1078
B477 2621
B477 3245
B477 3819
B477 3243
B477 3933
B477 3931
B477 2683
B477 2682
5447 2681
A859 2241
A294 6700
B477 3131
B477 2131
B477 5840
B477 5820
B477 2441
B477 2811
B477 2820
B351 3835
AW02 0075
Description
Bushing - 6x12x4mm
Anti-static Brush
Pulley
Timing Belt
Pulley
Cis Invertor Bracket
X/X MB14
CIS Sheet
CIS Sheet Bracket
Snap Ring
Reverse Roller
Torque Limiter - 53mnxm
Reverse Roller Shaft
Inverter Roller Stay
Contact Image Sensor
X/X MB43
Exit Cis Roller
Drive Exit Roller
Upper Exit Guide Plate
Discharge Brush - Exit
Photointerruptor
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
0451 3006N
1105 0159
0720 0040E
0632 0120G
0805 0089
0720 0060E
0742 3808
0741 3706
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
PCB Stud
Retaining Ring - M4
Parallel Pin - 2x12
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
1
1
1
1
2
33
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
11.DF ORIGINAL EXIT
34
11.DF ORIGINAL EXIT

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Part No.
B477 3241
B477 2661
B477 2641
B477 2631
B477 2645
B477 2636
B477 4127
B477 2637
B477 2653
B477 4129
B477 2651
B477 2621
B477 2715
B477 2611
B477 2881
A697 2131
A859 4836
B477 4131
B477 2861
B477 2872
B477 4132
B477 2851
B477 2841
B477 2875
A422 1063
Description
Gear - 21Z
Back Scanning Positioning Pin
Long Arm Shaft
Lower Exit Guide Plate
Short Arm Shaft
Driven Exit Scanning Roller
Exit Arm Spring
Driven Exit Arm
Bushing - 6mm
Spring - 12n
Back Scanning Roller
Anti-static Brush
Pressure Plate Tape
Lower Exit
Guide Plate Bracket
Antistatic Brush
Bushing- Exit Driven Roller
Spring
Driven Exit Roller
Exit Arm
Spring
Lower Exit Guide Plate Sheet
Lower Exit Guide
Exit Shaft
Seal - 0.7x13x20
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
8
4
4
1
2
1
1
4
1
1
1
4
4
2
4
4
4
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
0805 0089
0720 0030E
0450 3008N
0451 3006N
0802 5276
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M3
Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6
35
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
12.DF DRIVE/ELECTRICAL 1
36
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Part No.
B477 3711
B477 3115
B477 3111
AA06 0842
B477 3163
B477 3161
B477 3151
A548 2139
5447 2681
B477 3121
B477 3123
A806 2244
AW02 0075
A859 2230
B477 3820
5053 0447
B477 3811
B477 3145
B477 3181
A680 2262
B477 3251
B477 3141
B477 3812
B477 3143
AX04 0096
B477 3177
B477 3173
B477 3821
B477 3813
B477 3171
B301 2141
Description
Paper Feed Motor
Paper Feed Motor Stay
Paper Feed Motor Bracket
Tension Spring
Gear - 50Z
Gear - 37Z
Gear - 31Z
Pulley
Snap Ring
Separation Roller Shaft
Gear - 24Z
Separation Shaft Stopper
Photointerruptor
Timing Belt
Bushing - 6mm
Timing Belt
Pulley
Paper Feed Drive Bracket
Feeler - Pick-up Roller Cam
Pick-up Roller Cam
Gear - 23Z
Timing Belt
Gear - 20Z
Stepping Motor - DC 18W
Pulley
Pulley
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Pulley
Pulley - 39Z
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
0451 4006N
0451 3006N
0632 0120G
0720 0040E
0720 0060E
1105 0310
1105 0511
Description
Tapping Screw - 4x6
Parallel Pin - 2x12
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
37
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
109
3 4
101
108
6
7
101
101
101
37
9
10
101
101
101
107
18
101
11
19
20
22
16
101
17
20
104
101
23
14
12
15
101
17
104
24
21
101
28
34
30
25
103
26
27
101
103
36
35
101
29
102
13
101
102
106
101
38
32
31
33
105
33
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Part No.
B477 5751
A680 1171
B477 5601
B477 5611
B477 5621
B477 5731
B477 5711
B477 5581
B477 5691
B477 5721
B477 3731
A697 1125
B477 3721
B477 3215
B477 3211
AA06 0846
B477 3217
B477 3815
B477 3818
5936 2321
B477 3814
B477 3816
A806 2285
A806 2287
A806 2283
A806 2161
AA13 2152
A806 4117
B477 2332
A806 2911
B477 4141
5215 2621
B477 3175
5419 5714
B477 3231
Description
Interface Harness
Harness Holder
Registration Sensor Harness
Detection Sensor Harness
Original Sensor Harness
ADF-CIS Harness
Pick-up Motor Harness
ADF Main Control Board Ass'y
Paper Feed Motor Harness
CIS Harness
Exit Motor
Stepped Screw - Lever
Scanning Motor
Scanning Motor Stay
Scanning Motor Bracket
Tension Spring
Pulley
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Rubber Bushing - Vibration Damper
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Gear - Z20/Z47
Gear - Z20/Z47
Gear - Z20/Z47
Spacer - 8x20x1
Motor Bracket
Stepper Motor Ass`y - DC 13W
Spring - 12.6n
Snap Ring - M6
Pulley
Stepped Screw - M4
Tighter
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
36
37
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
Part No.
Description
B477 5761
B477 5515
CIS Harness
Main ROM
0451 3006N
1607 0623
0451 4006N
0720 0040E
0720 0060E
0353 0050N
1105 0310
1107 0884
1607 0622

Ferrite Core - TFC-16-8-13
Tapping Screw - 4x6
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
Philips Truss Head Screw - M3x5
Fuse - 5A 250V
Ferrite Core TFC16816
39
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
14.DF FRAME SECTION
40
14.DF FRAME SECTION

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Part No.
B477 1111
B477 1121
B477 2333
B477 1171
AA14 3039
B301 1136
B477 1152
A351 4281
B477 1550
A806 1135
B477 1161
B477 1520
B477 1185
AW02 0075
B477 1181
B477 4921
Description
Front Side Plate
Rear Side Plate
Motor Bracket Cushion
Arm Shaft
Spring Holder
Spring Plate - 0.4mm
Stay:Frame:Left
Anti-vibration Cushion
Hinge:Left:Ass'y
Contact Point Shaft
Right Frame Stay
Right Hinge
Sensor Feeler
Photointerruptor
Sensor Bracket
Clamp
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
101
102
103
104
105
0720 0030E
0451 3006N
1105 0310
1105 0290
1105 0511
Description
Retaining Ring - M3
Harness Clamp - HORIZONTAL
41
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
15.OPTICS SECTION 1
10
Option
11
102
12
107
106
22
106
106
102
13
106
8
15
14
7
5
8
4
23
101
6
5
106
103
19
18
105
17
20
105
104
106
104
101
23
20
104
20
101
20
101
2
102
21
16
42
15.OPTICS SECTION 1
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Part No.
AW01 0034
AA15 0704
B065 1787
B065 1782
B065 1784
BC01 2003
B065 1772
AA14 3520
AX40 0063
AX40 0064
B065 1775
B065 1776
B065 1779
B065 1778
A628 3112
AC01 2067
B065 1093
B065 1070
B065 1785
B065 1841
AW01 0059
B065 1788
5442 1924
B477 5741
B065 1843
B065 1773
Description
Original Width Sensor
Seal - 90x29.5x0.2
Scale Bracket
Seal
Ground Plate
Sheet Through Exposure Glass
Left Scale
Shoulder Screw - M3
Anticondensation Heater - 120V 9W
Sheet Through Scale (LT)
Sheet Through Scale (A4)
Decal - Scale (LT)
Decal - Scale (A4)
Shielding Sheet
Exposure Glass
ADF Bracket
Upper Front Stay
Right Stay
Inner Cover
Original Sensor - H=1-66
Printing Rear Scale
Exposure Glass Cushion
Grounding Plate
Scale Bracket Seal
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
2
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
0353 0040N
0353 0060N
0450 3008N
0353 0080N
0354 0080N
0451 4008N
0453 3006N
Description
Screw - M3X4
Screw - M3X8
Screw - M4X8
43
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
16.OPTICS SECTION 2
44
16.OPTICS SECTION 2
Index
No.
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Part No.
B140 1691
G029 1982
AA00 0250
B065 1798
B065 1791
B065 1801
B065 1721
B140 5469
B140 5470
B065 1171
B065 1833
B065 1698
B065 5401
B065 5650
B065 5405
B065 5195
B065 5501
AX64 0135
B065 1172
B065 1834
Description
Cover:Polygon Mirror Motor:Ass'y
LD - Decal
LD - Decal (CHN)
Filter:Duct:Scanner
Left Scanner Duct
Right Scanner Duct
Image Scanning Board
Harness - FFC SBU 15WICK/120mm
Development Fan Bracket
Harness Bracket
Development Cooling Duct
20p Cable - LVDS SBU
Scanner Unit Harness
LCDC Harness
VIB Board
VIB Power Source Harness
Cooling Fan - 24V
Development Fan Harness
Insulating Sheet
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
1105 0516
0353 0060N
0354 0080N
0951 3008N
0451 4020N
1105 0306
1105 0516
0451 4008N
1105 0511
Description
Clamp
Screw - M4X8
Philips Screw With Flat Washer - M3x8
Tapping Scrw - M4x20
Metal Clamp - Al-4
Clamp
45
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
17.OPTICS SECTION 3
46
17.OPTICS SECTION 3
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
24
25
25
Part No.
AB03 2717
AA13 2174
A096 1873
A293 1766
A069 1883
B065 1766
B065 1753
B065 1751
AX50 0081
A294 1712
B065 1735
B065 1736
B065 1741
B065 1733
B065 1737
B065 1740
B065 1734
B065 1743
B065 1732
B065 1738
B065 5610
B140 5610
B065 5220
AZ50 0060
B065 1742
B065 1731
B140 1731
Description
Pulley - 26Z
Spacer - M8
Scanner Shoe Pin
2nd Mirror Plate
Shoe - Scanner
Seconf Mirror
Adjusting Plate
2nd Scanner Unit
Exposure Lamp
Rear Holder - Lamp
Reflector
Invertor Cover
Harness Guide
1st Scanner Front Side Plate
Clamp
Harness Plate
1st Scanner Rear Side Plate
1st Mirror
1st Scanner Frame
Spring Plate
1st Scanner Harness (Model C1)
Harness - Scanner No.1 (Model C2)
Relay Board
Exposure Lamp Inverter
Insulator
1st Scanner Unit (Model C1)
Carriage No.1 Ass'y (Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
4
2
8
4
8
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
0452 3006P
0453 3006N
0954 4008N
0951 3006N
0954 3008N
0720 0060E
0951 3006
Description
Philips Screw - M4x8
Retaining Ring - M6
Philips Screw With Flat Washer M3x6
47
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
18.OPTICS SECTION 4
10
103
11
12
103
103
105
107
103
14
13
106
1
2
17
103
102
110
109
103
103
5
103
101
101
104
15
107
109
110
105
103
29
18
103
103
104
102
20
6
19
30
19
2
110
5
101
21
26
7
103
22
28
108
103
27
103
19
103
18
101
25
48
108
23
24
23
16
18.OPTICS SECTION 4
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
28
29
30
Part No.
A293 1674
AB03 2717
B065 1830
B065 1831
B140 1715
B065 1713
AA06 0221
B065 1685
B065 5454
AW02 0056
B065 1825
A267 1820
B065 5180
B065 1706
A134 1724
B065 1708
AA06 0763
B140 1680
B065 1718
B065 1717
AB03 0727
AB03 2070
B065 1688
B065 1711
AB03 2069
B065 1712
B065 1682
AA00 0250
G029 1982
B065 5471
B140 1837
Description
Front Slide Rail
Pulley - 26Z
Scanner Board Guide
Scanner Board Bracket
Scanner Drive Were
Rear Wire Tension Bracket
Gripper Solenoid Spring
Rear Frame
HP Sensor Relay Harness
Photointerruptor - EE-SX4235A-P1
H.P. Sensor Bracket
Sheet - Photointerrupter
SDRD Board
Bracket - Scanner Motor
Cushion - Stepper Motor
Stepper Motor
Tension Spring
Idler Pulley Ass'y
Screw - M4X8
Timing Belt
Pulley - 58Z
Pulley
Lens Holder Block
Drive Shaft
Pulley
Front Wire Tension Bracket
Front Frame
LD - Decal (CHN/TWN)
LD - Decal
Grounding Wire
FFC Insulating Sheet (Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
0354 0080N
0720 0060E
0353 0060N
0314 0080N
0314 0120N
0314 0060N
0354 0060N
0805 3368
1105 0487
1105 0489
Description
Screw - M4X8
Retaining Ring - M6
Screw - M4X6
Ball Bearing - 8x16x5mm
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp - LWS 1316
49
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
19.LASER UNIT
105
104
103
102
101
16
13
101
18
101
101
5
10
9
4
101
6
101
102
20
101
17
11
12
21
19
14
101
20
15
22
30
3
103
23
24
103
101
29
25
26
101
28
27
101
50
19.LASER UNIT
Index
No.
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Part No.
B065 5403
B065 5489
B140 5491
B065 1951
B065 5477
B065 5437
B065 1859
B065 1950
B065 1912
AC02 4007
AC03 0147
B065 1915
B065 5453
AX06 0277
B065 1955
B065 1952
G570 2827
B065 1925
B065 1926
GC02 5010
B065 1930
B065 1932
AC03 0148
B065 1953
B065 1946
B065 1944
B065 1945
B065 1940
AC01 5037
B140 5301
B140 1852
Description
12P Cable - LVDS LIDB
Harness (B065/B141/B143)
Harness:60 (B140/B142)
Seal - 2
LD Relay Harness
LD Control Harness
LD Unit
Seal - 1
Lens Holder - L0
Lens - L0
1st Mirror
1st Mirror Holder
Relay Polygon Motor Harness
Polygon Mirror Motor Ass'y
Seal - Lens L1
Seal - 3
Supporting Plate
Lens Holder - L2 Right
Lens Holder - L2 Left
Lens L2
2nd Mirror Holder
Middle Mirror Holder
2nd Mirror
Seal - 4
Seal - Shield Glass Holder
Shield Glass Holder
Seal - Shield Glass
Shield Glass Rail
Shield Glass
PCB:Sync Detector
Imaging Unit:Ass'y
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
0353 0080N
0354 0080N
0451 4010N
1105 0306
0353 0060N
Description
Screw - M3X8
Screw - M4X8
Metal Clamp - Al-4
51
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
20.TANDEM TRAY 1
37
104
104
104
16
12
104
109
17
104
104
104
109
104
104
108
14
104
15
104
104
6
20
10
104
9
104
31
32
104
106
104
21
24
22
104
110
110
104
4
104
111
29
33
34
28
106
111
107
103
26
35
106
28
102
110
104
23
27
30
104
18
19
106
11
25
106
101
104
36
104
104
35
13
2
1
101
105
52
20.TANDEM TRAY 1
Index
No.
Part No.
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
7
B065 6630
B065 6635
AW02 0008
A248 6646
B098 6646
B065 6846
A293 6647
B098 6647
A248 6645
B098 6645
8
8
A293 6643
B098 6643
9
9
10
10
A293 6640
B098 6640
A248 6639
B065 6833
10
B098 6639
11
11
12
12
13
14
15
15
A293 6642
B098 6642
A096 6678
B065 6879
B065 6831
AA00 2010
A293 6644
B098 6644
16
16
17
18
19
A293 6646
B098 6649
A293 6649
A248 6624
B065 6823
Description
Tandem Cover
Decal - Paper Tray 1
Photointerruptor
Cover Bracket (Model C1)
Bracket:Cover:Tandem LCT (Model C2)
Decal - Paper Set - Left
Support Bracket - End Fence (Model C1)
End Fence:Auxiliary (Model C2)
Side Plate - Left (Model C1)
Side Plate:Tandem LCT:Left Sideways
(Model C2)
Side Fence - Left Front (Model C1)
Side Fence:Tandem LCT:Left Front
(Model C2)
Tray Bottom Plate - Left Front (Model C1)
Tray Bottom Plate:Left Front (Model C2)
Tray Bottom Plate - Left Middle (Model C1)
Tray Bottom Plate - Left Middle
(KOR/CHN/TWN)
Tray Bottom Plate:Left Middle:Ass'y
(Model C2)
Tray Bottom Plate - Left Rear (Model C1)
Tray Bottom Plate:Left Rear (Model C2)
Decal - Left Paper Set
Decal - Left Paper Set (KOR/CHN/TWN)
Sensor Bracket
Decal - Paper Level
Side Fence - Left Rear (Model C1)
Side Fence:Tandem LCT:Left Rear
(Model C2)
Rear Cover - Tandem LCT (Model C1)
Cover:Rear:Tandem LCT:Ass'y (Model C2)
Rear Cover Cushion - Tandem LCT
Left Back Fence
Timing Belt Cover
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
Part No.
Description
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
37
37
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timing Pulley - 15T

Shaft - Back Fence Slider
Slider - Left Back Fence
Pulley Bracket
Timing Belt S3M196T
Coupling Lever - Left
DC Harness - Left
Timing Pulley - 15T
Bushing - 6mm
Shaft - Timing Pulley
Gear - 48T
Tension Spring
Pulley Braket
Left DC Motor Bracket
DC Motor - 19.2W
Gear - Z18
Left Tandem Tray A'ssy (Model C1)
Tandem LCT:Left:Letter:Ass'y (Model C2)
Left Tandem LCT Ass'y (Model C2 A4)
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
1
1
AB03 3085
AA14 0685
A248 6623
B065 6830
AA04 3271
A248 6615
A247 5428
AB03 3084
5053 0447
AA14 0686
AB01 9475
AA06 0759
B065 6821
B070 6666
AX04 0107
AW02 0056
AB01 3798
B065 6614
B140 6615
B140 6603
1105 0230
1105 0328
0313 0080N
0434 0060N
0314 0060N
0720 0040E
0801 0146
0452 4008N
0452 4010N
0965 3008P
0951 4008N
Clamp
Harness Clamp - ES-0505
Pan Head Self-tapping Screw - M4x6
Retaining Ring - M4
Screw - M4X4
Binding Self Tapping Screw - M4x8
Tapping Bind Screw - M4x10
Tapping Screw With Flat Washer - M3x8
53
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
21.TANDEM TRAY 2
102
104
12
13
23
15
104
10
102
16
102
11
17
14
102
8
7
18
10
9
102
103
19
6
102
101
106
5
20
102
106
21
101
102
107
105
3
105
10
2
4
108
1
24
22
108
107
54
21.TANDEM TRAY 2
Index
No.
Part No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
12
13
13
13
14
15
15
16
16
B065 6873
B065 6859
AA00 2246
A248 6745
B065 6875
B065 6877
A096 6671
A293 6736
B098 6736
B065 6706
AW02 0120
5201 2858
A096 6677
B065 6878
A294 6670
B098 6670
B065 6885
B065 6874
A248 6738
B098 6738
A293 6739
B098 6739
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
23
24
AA15 3063
AA15 3138
A176 6695
B065 6672
AA00 2010
A248 6666
B065 6605
B140 6606
B140 6605
B065 6814
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Sensor Bracket
Right Stopper
Decal - Caution
Inner Cover - Tandem LCT
Protection - Inner Cover
Decal - Paper Set - Right
Paper Guide Plate
Side Fence - Right Front (Model C1)
Side Fence:Tandem LCT:Right Front (Model C2)
Paper Volume Sensor Bracket
Photointerruptor - Flat
Friction Pad
Decal - Right Paper Set
Decal - Right Paper Set (KOR/CHN/TWN)
Base - Right Tandem Tray (Model C1)
Base:Tandem LCT:Right:Ass'y (Model C2)
Base - Right Tandem Tray (KOR/CHN/TWN)
Bracket - Paper Volumesensor
Side Fence - Right Rear (Model C1)
Side Fence:Tandem LCT:Right Rear (Model C2)
Inner Cover - Right Rear (Model C1)
Supporting Plate:Tandem:Right Rear
(Model C2)
Seal - 4x10x70
Inner Cover Cushion - Right Rear
Misfeed Removal Guide
Tandem Connecting Guide
Decal - Paper Level
Side Plate
Right Tandem Tray Ass'y (Model C1)
Tandem LCT:Right:Letter:Ass'y (Model C2)
Right Tandem LCT Ass'y (Model C2 A4)
Inner Cover:Tandem LCT:Ass'y (Model C2)
Index
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
0801 0146
0434 0060N
0451 4008N
0951 4006N
0314 0060N
0452 4008N
0951 4008N
0453 4008N
Description
Screw - M4X4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
55
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
22.TANDEM TRAY 3
56
22.TANDEM TRAY 3
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Part No.
A248 6714
B070 6683
AA06 0758
A248 6713
AA06 0757
A293 6713
B065 6712
B065 6881
AW02 0056
A293 6714
B065 6884
A248 6727
B065 6811
B070 6684
AB03 2058
A248 6695
AB03 2719
A248 6687
A293 6684
A248 6684
5053 0223
B065 6744
B065 6743
B065 6862
AA13 2203
A010 5700
AA16 1129
B065 6851
AF02 2105
AA16 1130
B065 6864
A248 6694
B065 6870
A294 6690
B065 6717
Description
DC Solenoid - Front End Fence
Lever:Release:Front
Tension Spring - Short
Hook - Tension Sprong
Tension Spring - Long
Front End Fence
End Fence Guide (A4)
Detector Bracket
Rear End Fence
Detector Bracket
DC Solenoid - Rear End Fence
Side Plate - Right Rear
Lever:Release:Rear
Wire Pulley - M10
Guide - Pulley
Pulley - M10
Right Drive Shaft
Pulley:Drive Were:Ass'y
X/X MB42
Bushing - 8mm
Right Tandem Harness
Right Connecting Bracket
Large Lever
Spacer - 6mm
Sensor
Cushion - Large
Right Base - Tandem LCT
Roller - Slide Rail
Cushion - Small
Small Lever
Wire Ring
Stay - Rightbase
Feeler - Paper Height Sensor
Paper Volume Shield Plate
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
2
1
2
Part No.
Description
35
36
37
38
39
Front Right Side Plate

Oil Damper
Gear - 30Z
Oil Damper Bracket
Front Roller - Slide Rail
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
2
1
1
B065 6710
A248 6701
AB01 3781
B065 6872
A294 6655
0633 0200G
0720 0040E
0720 0060E
0434 0060N
0313 0080N
1105 0267
1105 0291
1106 0411
0951 3006N
0313 0120N
0452 3006N
Pin - M3x20
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
Pan Head Self- Tapping Screw - M4x6
Harness Clamp - YMC-10-0
Bushing - 11.5mm
57
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
23.UNIVERSAL TRAY
58
23.UNIVERSAL TRAY
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Part No.
B065 6502
B065 6504
B140 6502
B140 6504
B065 6576
A293 6585
AF01 0092
AF01 0091
A293 6579
AA00 2258
AA00 2259
AA00 2261
B065 6545
AF01 6079
A096 6553
B065 6534
A134 2978
B065 6538
B065 6533
AF01 7029
A048 2838
AF01 3005
AF01 1043
AB01 3868
B065 6591
AA00 2010
B065 6543
A267 2859
A267 2860
A267 2857
A176 6570
B065 6542
B065 6571
A293 6574
B065 6524
Description
Paper Tray Assembly (LT)(Model C1)
Paper Tray Assembly (A4)(Model C1)
Paper Tray:Universal:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
Paper Tray:Universal:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
Coupling Link
Knob - Paper Size Selection
Paper Tray - LT
Paper Tray (A4)
Link Guide
Decal - Paper Size - LT
Decal - Paper Size - A4
Decal - Universal Tray
Decal - Positioning
Left Rear Side Fence
Side Fence Pad
Front Side Fence
Spring Plate
Positioning Stopper Lever
Front Side Fence Ass'y
Paper End Fence
Nylon Rivet
Bottom Plate Pad
Bottom Plate
Gear - 16Z
Paper Tray Holder Base
Decal - Paper Level
Side Fence:Inner Back:Adhesion
Side Fence Stopper
Rear Lever Stopper
Spring Plate - Side Fence
Paper Stopper
Side Fence:Inner Back:Ass'y
Paper Size Detection
Actuator Guide
Bottom Plate Lift Shaft
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
31
32
33
34
34
35
35
36
37
38
38
39
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
Part No.
Description
B065 6526
A176 6695
B065 6581
B065 6633
B065 6632
A229 6556
B098 6557
B065 6588
B065 6589
B065 6636
B065 6637
B065 6579
Lift Lever
Paper Tray Holder Stay
Paper Tray Cover - Short (2nd)
Paper Tray Cover - Long (3rd)
Tray Bottom Plate (Model C1)
Right Support Plate
Left Support Plate
0451 3008N
0451 4008N
0453 4008N
0360 4008N
0720 0060E
0450 4008N
0450 3008N

Screw - M3 X 8
Retaining Ring - M6
Tapping Screw - 4x8
59
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
24.BY-PASS FEED TRAY
60
24.BY-PASS FEED TRAY

Index
No.
Part No.
1
2
3
4
B065 2743
5206 2686
B065 2729
B065 2721
4
5
5
B140 2721
B065 2660
B140 2660
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B065 2662
B140 2662
A096 2780
B065 2730
B065 2746
B065 2737
B351 4135
B065 2735
B065 2732
B065 2738
B065 2740
B065 2741
B098 3492
A096 5335
B065 2733
Description
Front Shaft - By-pass
Snap Ring
Paper End Feeler
Paper Feed Guide Plate - By-pass
(Model C1)
Manual Feed Guide Plate (Model C2)
Paper Feed Cover (Model C1)
Machine Or Copier Paper Feed Cover
(Model C2)
Magnet Catch Bracket (Model C1)
Feed Guide Gear
By-pass Table
Decal - Paper Set
Front Side Fence - By-pass
Magnet Catch - Original Table
Rear Side Fence - By-pass
Manual Feed Table
Front Support Stay - By-pass
Rear Support Stay - By-pass
Sensor Bracket
Gear:Manual Feed Table
Paper Size Switch
By-pass Table Cover
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
0450 3008N
0453 3006N
0452 3008N
0451 4008N
Description
Binding Self-tapping Screw - 3x8
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
61
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
manuals4you.com
25.PAPER FEED UNIT 1
62

Index
No.
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Part No.
AF03 0051
AF03 0081
5447 2681
AF03 1065
AF03 1082
B065 6350
AB01 1465
B065 6357
AA08 2118
AA06 0898
AA14 0828
B065 6445
AA06 0899
B065 6358
AW01 0098
B065 6364
B065 6375
AB01 7617
B065 6318
AA06 0897
B065 6488
B065 6487
B065 6345
AW02 0056
B065 6339
B140 6339
AF02 0562
AB01 1466
B065 6353
B065 6366
5894 2540
B065 6457
AA06 0896
B065 6334
B065 6337
Description
Pick-up Roller (Model C1)
Paper Feed Roller:Pickup (Model C2)
Snap Ring
Pare Feed Roller (Model C1)
Paper Feed Roller:Feed (Model C2)
Pick-up Gear Cover
Idler Gear
Pick-up Arm
Bushing - M6
Spring
Feed Roller Shaft
Feed Lever
Spring
Photointerruptor
Feed Stay
Paper Feed Unit Stay
Gear - 21Z/38Z
Pick-up Solenoid
Spring
Upper Paper Feed Harness
Lower Paper Feed Harness
Paper End Sensor Bracket
Feed Guide Plate (Model C1)
Paper Feed Guide Plate (Model C2)
Transport Roller
Gear - 35Z
Feed Gear Cover
Drive Bracket
Arm Screw
Driven Pressure Lever
Spring
Heat Sink Base
Heat Sink
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
Description
33
34
B065 6338
AA06 3889
Heat Sink Sheet

Heat Sink Spring
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
0451 4008N
1105 0328
1105 0511
0353 0040N
0720 0040E
0720 0060E
0742 3808
1102 6249
1102 6251
1102 6252
1105 0542

Screw - M3X4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
Relay Connector - 6P
Connector - 8P
Connector - 9P
Harness Clamp - MSBS-1207
63
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1

16
2
15
14
11
7
3
18
10
19
103
13
103
12
20
103
10
104
107
31
108
104
22
102
108
104
27
32
26
104
101
39
103
103
101
40
33
29
41
10
103
34
104
37
35
36
64
109
25
45
42
38
103
10
43
104
44
21
105
30
104
106
17
24
23

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Part No.
B065 6372
AF02 2149
AA08 0327
AA14 0829
B065 6453
AA14 3402
AA14 3812
B065 6454
B065 6455
B065 6317
AA08 2118
AB01 1469
B065 6330
AB01 1470
B065 6452
B065 6346
AA14 3718
AA06 0901
AA04 3575
AB01 7690
B065 6456
AA06 0900
AB03 0734
AB01 1490
AB01 1491
B065 6306
AB01 1471
AB01 1391
B140 6321
B065 6333
B065 6371
B065 6336
B065 6416
B065 6307
B065 6399
Description
Guide Plate
Transport Roller
Bushing - M4
Driven Shaft
Transport Roller Lever
Screw - Scale
Screw - Scale (B142/B143/B228)
Driven Release Lever
Relay Shaft
Bushing - M6
Gear - 19Z
Rear Side Plate - Paper Feed
Gear - 18Z
Tray Link Guide
Paper Tray Link
Stepped Screw - M4
Spring
Timing Belt
Pulley:Idler:30t/24z
Vertical Transport Link
Spring
Pulley - 30Z
Gear - 38Z
Gear - 21Z
Reverse Drive Shaft
Reverse Gear
Driven Reverse Gear - 21Z
Reverse Roller:Pressure Release
Reverse Haousing
Support Guide Plate
Front Side Plate - Paper Feed
Ball Bearing - 6x12x4.5
Reverse Driven Shaft
Torquelimiter
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
36
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
AF03 2050
AF03 2080
5447 2681
B065 6323
B065 6394
AA06 0904
AB03 0733
AA04 3576
B065 6415
B140 6378
B140 6377
Separation Roller (Model C1)

Paper Feed Roller:Separate (Model C2)
Snap Ring
Paper Feed Motor
Motor Bracket
Spring
Pulley - 20T
Timing Belt
Motor Base
Ground Plate:Stepper Motor:Paper Feed Unit
Ground Plate:Reverse:Paper Feed Unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
0353 0040N
0573 0030E
0720 0040E
0451 4008N
1105 0522
1105 0328
0720 0060E
0450 4008N
Screw - M3X4
Hexagon Headless Set Screw - M3x3
Retaining Ring - M4
Edge Saddle - Les0510
Retaining Ring - M6
Tapping Screw - 4x8
65
manuals4you.com
27.VERTICAL TRANSPORT
101
2
6
104
104
105
107
5
101
101
18
19
101
101
103
30
101
105
104
26
101
102
27
17
106
28
101
25
101
13
12
24
16
11
23
10
24
101
21
15
101
20
14
66
22
31
29
27.VERTICAL TRANSPORT
Index
No.
Part No.
Description
B065 6201
1
2
2
B140 6200
B065 6361
B140 6361
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
B065 6489
B065 6323
AF02 0562
AB01 1466
AA04 3575
AB01 7619
B065 6472
B140 6472
AA06 3878
B065 6429
A029 2984
B065 6426
B065 6428
B065 6427
5201 1796
B065 6403
B065 6405
B065 6404
AF02 0295
AA08 0241
AA06 3487
B065 6407
AA14 3715
B065 6402
A096 5528
B065 6122
A423 4433
AA14 3809
B065 6078
Paper Feed Unit:Paper Bank:Ass'y

(Model C1)
Paper Feed Unit Ass'y (Model C2)
Relay Guide Plate - Paper Feed (Model C1)
Paper Bank Connecting Guide Plate
(Model C2)
Relay Unit Harness
Paper Feed Motor
Transport Roller
Gear - 35Z
Timing Belt
Gear - 24Z/40Z
Relay Unit Guide Plate (Model C1)
Joint Unit Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Spring
Release Cover - Vertical Transport
Decal - Grip
Release Lever - Vertical Transport
Release Button - Vertical Transport
Stepped Screw - M4
Front Side Plate - Vertical Transpo
Guide Plate - Vertical Transport
Rear Side Plate - Vertical Transpor
Vertical Driven Roller
Bushing - M4
Spring - 10mm
Transport Pressure Plate
Stepped Screw - M5
Micro Switch Sheet
Micro Switchbracket
Spring
Shoulder Screw - M2.5
LCT Stay
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
31
Part No.
Description
B140 6420
Vertical Transport Unit Ass'y (Model C2)
0451 4008N
1204 2521
0353 0040N
0720 0060E
0742 3808
1102 6249
1105 0511

Micro Switch
Screw - M3X4
Retaining Ring - M6
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
4
8
8
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
67
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
28.PAPER REGISTRATION 1
68
Index
No.
Part No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
8
9
10
11
11
B065 2763
AW01 0098
B065 2621
B065 2620
AA15 2441
B065 2608
B065 2614
B140 2614
A096 2622
B140 2622
B065 2682
5447 2681
AF03 1066
AF03 1083
12
13
14
15
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
22
AB01 1478
AA08 2116
AA06 0888
B065 2688
5447 2706
AF03 0050
AF03 0080
AA14 0819
AA06 0887
B065 2690
AA08 3019
AX20 0242
Description
Relay Registration Harness
Photointerruptor
Sensor Bracket
Paper Dust Removal Case
Case Seal
Development Connector Bracket
Front Upper Guide Plate (Model C1)
Upper Front Registration Guide (Model C2)
Front Lower Registration Guide (Model C1)
Lower Front Registration Guide (Model C2)
Paper Feed Stay
Snap Ring
Paper Feed Roller (Model C1)
Paper Feed Roller:Feed:Manual Feed
(Model C2)
Gear - 18Z
Bushing - M8
Spring
Pick-up Roller Arm
Gear - 15T
Feed Roller Shaft
Spring
Pick-up Roller Solenoid
Bushing
Magnetic Clutch
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
1102 6247
1102 6260
1102 6279
0451 4008N
1105 0511
0720 0060E
0805 0088
Description
Connector - 4P
Connector - 3P
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
69
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
2
101
3
20
21
103
30
103
102
102
31
102
6
102
101
8
4
19
32
101
103
108
102
13
104
12
10
13
109
101
101
101
27
107
101
26
18
31
101
32
102
105
13
102
28
11
102
(Model C1)
29
10
10
17
25
34
33
103
103
102
16
22
15
24
14
109
106
70
23
102
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Part No.
5205 2697
5442 2754
A247 2800
AA13 2025
B065 2627
B065 2617
B065 2623
B065 2613
B140 2612
B065 2701
A053 2916
G011 1058
AB01 7608
B110 2713
B065 2713
AA08 2118
5447 2681
AF03 2050
AF03 2080
B065 6399
B065 2714
B065 2699
AB01 7609
AB01 4077
AA04 3944
AW01 0098
B065 2708
B065 2707
AW02 0056
AA06 0911
B065 2709
B065 2752
B065 6323
AB01 7606
B065 6445
Description
Bushing - Upper Registration Roller
Spring - Registration Roller
Spacer - 1x8x12
Lower Registration Roller
X/X MB32
Upper Registration Roller
X/X MB32
Lower Registration Guide
Lower Guide Plate - By-pass (Model C1)
Friction Pad - B (Model C1)
Snap Ring
Reverse Gear
Shaft:Reverse:Drive:Ass'y
X/X MB68
Bushing - M6
Snap Ring
Torquelimiter
Separation Roller Stay
Reverse Gear
Registration Roller Gear
Timing Belt
Photointerruptor
Middle Sensor Bracket
Spring
Reverse Pressure Lever
Motor Bracket
Paper Feed Motor
Gear - 24Z/46Z
Feed Lever
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
2
2
2
2
1
32
Part No.
Description
B140 2700
Reverse Stay Ass'y (Model C2)
0720 0040E
0451 4008N
0720 0060E
0632 0100G
0805 3145
1105 0487
1105 0511
1105 0522
0453 3006N
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
Pin - 2x10mm
Harness Clamp
Edge Saddle - LES0510
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
71
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
72
Index
No.
Part No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
26
5205 2697
AA06 3254
A229 2717
AA00 1213
AA14 0486
5443 2668
A229 2655
AA06 6211
B065 2647
B140 2647
A096 2633
AA08 2116
AF02 0564
AB01 1457
A469 2123
B065 2671
B140 2671
AA08 0034
AA06 3255
A294 2678
AF02 2110
B065 2665
B140 2665
B065 2762
AW02 0120
B065 2675
B140 2675
A048 2838
AA16 2079
B065 2673
B140 2673
27
28
29
B065 2761
AB03 0722
AA06 0890
Description
Driven Roller Spring
Lock Lever
Decal - B2
Lock Shaft
Bushing - 4x6x7mm
Read Rock
Rear Lock Spring
Registration Guide Plate (Model C1)
Open And Close Guide Ass'y (Model C2)
Front Lock
Bushing - M8
Connecting Roller
Transport Roller Gear
Rubber Cushion - 1x10x10mm
Duplex Exit Guide Plate (Model C1)
Exit Duplex Guide Ass'y (Model C2)
Bushing - 4x5x7
Exit Roller Spring
Roller - Duplex Exit
Transport Driven Roller
Relay Guide Plate (Model C1)
Paper Bank Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Relay Paper Feed Harness
LCT Guide Plate (Model C1)
Option Tray Guide Ass'y (Model C2)
Nylon Rivet
Cushion
Upper Exit Guide Plate (Model C1)
Open And Close Option Tray Exit Guide
(Model C2)
By-pass Harness
Pulley - 13mm
Spring
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
Part No.
Description
30
31
32
33
34
35
DC Solenoid:Guide Plate
Tightener Bracket
Gear - 22Z/39Z
Front Support Plate
Front Paper Feed Side Plate
Rear Paper Feed Side Plate
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
1
B140 2655
B065 2754
AB01 7607
B065 2607
B065 2605
B065 2600
1102 6246
1102 6257
1102 6258
1105 0328
1105 0487
1105 0511
1105 0518
1105 0522
0720 0040E
0453 3006N
0720 0030E
0720 0060E
0720 0040E
0742 3808
0451 4008N
Harness Clamp
Edge Saddle - LES-1010
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M4
73
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
31.TONER HOPPER SECTION

25
18
19
20
42
22
23 24
38
17
15
36
21
16
107
27
26
33
14
34
37
35
28
13
105
1
106
103
12
10
102
39
11
9
105
41
101
104
8
7
101
29
101
101
31
30
101
108
6
32
74
104
105
31.TONER HOPPER SECTION

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Part No.
A293 3231
B065 3309
AA06 0291
A229 3240
AA14 5817
B065 3311
A229 3263
A229 3261
A229 3262
A229 3266
A229 3264
A229 3285
A229 3219
B065 3304
A096 3224
B065 3307
A293 3234
A293 3230
A293 3227
AA14 3816
AA14 3758
A229 3232
A134 3179
AA06 3366
A293 3220
A293 3282
AA06 3575
B065 3273
B065 3316
A222 2724
B065 3271
A229 3258
AA13 2024
A229 3243
A229 3242
Description
Shield Holder
Toner Bottle Drive Bracket
Spring
DC Motor
Idler Shaft - Toner Bottle
Toner Bottle Turn Bracket
Outer Shutter Shield
Outer Shutter
Inner Shutter
Upper Shutter Shield
Shutter Lever
Shutter Cover
Rubber Bushing - Toner Supply Unit
Bottle Holder
Bottle Roller
Toner Bottle Gear
Shield Plate - Toner Bottle
Toner Bottle Chuck
Toner Slider
Flat Screw:Chuck:Bottle
Setepped Screw
Chuck Roller
Chuck Shaft
Chuck Spring
Toner Bottle Stopper
Toner Bottle Pawl
Toner Bottle Spring
Upper Stay
Hinge Bracket
External Circlip - Mm8
Lower Stay
Toner Catchpan
Spacer - M6
Motor Joint Gear
Toner Bottle Joint Gear
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
Description
36
37
38
39
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
42
A134 3192
AA00 1394
A229 3217
B065 3301
B065 3342
B065 3343
B065 3344
B065 3345
B065 3346
B065 3347
B065 3348
B065 3306
Seal - Toner Bottle

Retaining Ring Seal
Drive Bottle
Decal - Toner Supply (CHN)
Decal - Toner Supply (TWN)
Gear:Toner Bottle:Ass'y
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
0450 3008N
0800 0072
0720 0040E
1105 0229
0451 4008N
0805 0072
0450 3006N
0354 0080N

Philips Pan Head Screw - M2.6x4
Retaining Ring - M4
Clamp
CS Ring
Screw - M4X8
75
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
32.TONER SUPPLY UNIT
76
32.TONER SUPPLY UNIT

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Part No.
B065 3161
B065 3122
B065 3123
B065 3125
5053 0447
B065 3120
B065 3720
B065 3710
A229 3154
B065 3138
B065 3139
AW31 0003
A096 3181
AA15 0361
B065 3146
B065 3152
B065 3153
B065 3151
B065 3111
B065 3110
B065 3140
B065 3141
B065 3143
B065 3142
A096 3175
AA06 0291
AB01 3748
AB01 3747
AB01 3749
A096 3176
B065 3121
Description
Toner Separation Case
Toner Separation Joint Seal
Rear Toner Separation Joint Seal
Toner Separation Drive Shaft
Bushing - 6mm
Right Upper Case Seal
Transport Collection Coil - Exit
X/X MB11
Case Seal
Idle Gear
Toner Collection Gear
Toner End Sensor
Slitter
Slitter Cover Seal
Nut
Lower Front Case Seal - Rear
Lower Filter Case Filter
Lower Right Case Seal
Toner Supply Unit
X/X MB11
Upper Cover
Exit Toner Pile
Toner Separation Spring
Toner Separation Shutter
Bushing 8x14x8
Spring
Joint Gear - 15Z
Gear - 16Z
Gear - 15Z
Bushing - 6x12x8.5
Left Upper Case Seal
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
0452 3008P
0727 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0040E
0450 4008N
0727 0060E
0314 0060N
0354 0080N
Description
Retaining Ring C - 6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M4
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Retaining Ring - M6
Screw - M4X8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
77
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
33.DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1
103
103
16
1
15
2
103
102
103
14
13
104
6
11
105
12

105
3
4
19
5
17
103
20
7
102
101
10
78
18
Index
No.
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Part No.
B110 3050
B140 3050
B065 3095
B110 3099
B140 3099
B110 3091
B065 3082
B110 3100
B140 3100
B065 3071
B065 3076
B065 3065
AW23 0015
B065 3098
B065 3073
AB01 3790
B065 3096
B065 3081
B065 3079
AA01 2060
A096 3141
B065 3108
A294 3116
Description
Development Unit (Model C1)
Development Guide Rail
Seal:Drum:Front (Model C1)
Shield - Drum Front (Model C2)
Entrance Seal Ass'y
Development Bias Plate
Seal:Drum:Rear (Model C1)
Shield - Drum Rear (Model C2)
Development Knob
Gear - 41Z
Toner Sensor Guide
Gear - 17Z
Gear - 31Z
Gear - 25Z
Gear - 20Z
Gear - 21Z
Ball Bearing Bracket
Development Filter
Development Filter Case
Filter Plate
Development Screw
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
0353 0060N
0951 4008N
0452 3010N
0720 0030E
0354 0080N
Description
Retaining Ring - M3
Screw - M4X8
79
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
80
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part No.
B065 3062
B065 3080
B065 3069
B065 3077
AA14 3426
AA08 0152
B065 3060
Description
Development Roller
Bushing - 8mm
Development Roller Adjuster
Stopped Screw - M4x17
Bushing - 4x12x13
Lower Development Casing
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
4
1
2
2
1
101
102
103
Part No.
Description

0354 0120N Screw - M4X12
81
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
35.PCU 1
82
35.PCU 1
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Part No.
B065 2410
B065 3258
B070 2010
B070 2365
AA08 0147
A176 2054
A096 2063
A096 2062
A096 2065
A176 2061
AA16 1158
B140 2291
B140 2292
AA06 3248
AA06 3249
AD02 2285
AD02 2307
A096 2051
B070 2364
AA06 2284
AD02 2283
AA16 1159
AX04 0061
AB01 0087
AD02 2306
A134 2363
A096 2052
A096 2057
Description
Drum Shaft Knob
Development Drum Stay
Charge Corona Unit
Cleaner Motor Cover
Front Bushing
Grounding Plate
Corona Wire Cleaner
Wire Cleaner Slider
Slider Ring
Screw Shaft
Cushion - Spacer
Bushing:Screw Shaft:Rear
Case:Charge Corona
Charge Terminal Spring
Grid Terminal Spring
Rear End Block
Cover - Rear End Block
Rear Grid Anchor
Charge Corona Wire
Pressure Spring
Front End Block
Cushion - Wire
Cleaner Motor - DC 0.5W
Gear - 20Z
Cover - Front End Block
Terminal Plate
Front Grid Anchor
Charge Corona Grid
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
0354 0080N
0720 0025E
0450 3008N
0971 4006A
Description
Screw - M4X8
Retaining Ring - M2.5
Philips Polycarbonate Screw - M4x6
83
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
36.PCU 2
102
1
2
102
102
7
101
32
102
6
102
10
4
11
12
103
106
102
13
14
15
105
104
13 29 18 19
104
20
21 104
101
102
102
22
16
23
29
105
26
24
84
25
36.PCU 2
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
25
25
26
29
32
32
Part No.
A293 2418
B065 2391
B065 2494
A096 5320
A096 2301
AW33 0003
B065 2392
B065 2270
AA01 2060
B065 2426
AA06 0891
AB01 1461
AB01 1462
B065 2377
AA08 2122
B065 2371
AA08 0176
AA15 3157
B065 2400
B065 2401
B065 2399
B065 2406
AD04 3078
A294 9610
B070 9510
A294 9510
B064 9510
B065 1957
AA13 2208
B110 2261
B140 2260
Description
Upper Unit Cover
Upper PCU Casing
Upper PCU Harness
Quenching Lamp
Grounding Plate
Receptacle
Upper PCU Ass'y
Development Filter
Pressure Release Lever
Spring
Toner Recycling Connecting Gear
Toner Recycling Gear
Toner Recycling Connecting Shaft
Bushing
Drum Stay
Bushing
Joint Seal
Toner Recycling Joint
Joint - Toner Separation
OPC Drum - Infotec
OPC Drum
MB69
X/X MB51
Shield Glass Cover
Spacer - M6
PCU Lower Ass'y (Model C1)
PCU:Lower:C2:Ass'y (Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
107
0354 0080N
0452 3008N
0951 3006N
0451 4008N
0720 0040E
1105 0534
0451 4014N
0451 4014N
Description
Screw - M4X8
Retaining Ring - M4
Clamp
MB51 DELETED
MB17 ADDED
1
2
1
1
85
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
37.PCU 3
102
6
4
101
103
3
7
1
102
15
2
9
13
8 104
103
3
102
22
17
16
21
20
13
104
10
105
14
18
23
104
12
11
25
24
19
105
86
37.PCU 3
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Part No.
Description
B110 2326
B110 2322
B065 2421
AA08 2121
B065 2428
B065 2425
AA08 2119
AD04 2038
B065 2347
B065 2366
AA13 2024
AA08 2101
AA08 2094
AA15 2431
AA15 3085
AA15 3088
B065 2300
B065 2353
AB01 1459
A294 3572
B065 2413
B140 2413
AB01 7612
AB01 1460
B065 2427
B140 2382
B140 2421
5206 2684

Agitator Shaft
X/X MB51
Toner Collection Coil Bushing
Agitator Gear
Brush Roller Gear
Roller Bushing
Cleaning Brush
X/X MB51
Front Shaft
Spacer - M6
Bushing - 6x10x6
Bushing - Brush Roller
Front Drum Seal
Inner Case Seal
Cleaning Entrance Seal - 3x345x2
Lower PCU Casing
Blade Bracket
Toner Collection Coil Gear
Rear Drum Seal
Entrance Transfer Stay (Model C1)
Entrance Transfer Stay Ass'y (Model C2)
Gear
Idler Gear
Cam - Blade
Pre-transfer Lamp Case Ass'y (Model C2)
Pre-transfer Lamp Harness Plate (Model C2)
Shoulder Screw - M3
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
0951 3006N
0452 3008N
0452 3010N
0720 0040E
0951 3008N
2
1
1
1
1
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
87
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
38.PCU 4
33
5
102
14
101
12
8
103
101
103
13
27
15
26
28
102
18
29
31
30
103
10
102
32
25
11
105
16
17
24
21
104
19
18
20
23
22
102
88
103
38.PCU 4
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Part No.
G020 3566
A048 2276
AA06 0892
AD02 5024
AA14 3523
B065 2337
AB01 7611
AD04 1083
AA13 2208
AA06 3610
B065 2316
B065 2314
B065 2317
AA08 2120
B065 2386
B065 2389
B065 2342
AB01 1459
AA08 2101
B065 2495
B140 2495
A134 5251
B065 2364
B065 2361
B065 2362
B065 2381
B065 2344
AB01 1460
AA08 2121
B065 2369
AA06 3576
AA14 3432
B065 2358
B065 2336
Description
Nut - 2.4mm
Ring - Transport Bracket
Pick-off Pawl Spring
Pick-off Pawl
Shoulder Screw - M3
Pick-off Pawl Holder
Pick-off Pawl Cam
Cleaning Blade
Spacer - M6
Spring - 4060mN
Front Blade Seal
Blade Bracket
Rear Blade Seal
Bushing
Middle PCU Casing
Shaft Bracket
Pick-off Pawl Shaft
Bushing - 6x10x6
Lower PCU Harness (Model C1)
Harness - PCU Lower (Model C2)
ID Sensor
Pick-off Pawl Positioning Plate
Entrance Seal Holder
Grounding Plate
Pick-off Pawl Bracket
Idler Gear
Grounding Plate - Entrance Seal
Spring
Stepped Screw - M3
Bracket Grounding Bracket
Pickoff Pawl:Drum:Ass'y (Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
0314 0060N
0452 3008N
0452 3010N
0951 3006N
0951 3008N
Description
89
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
39.TRANSFER BELT UNIT 1
90

Index
No.
*
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Part No.
B065 3850
B140 3850
B065 3818
B065 3873
A229 3861
A229 3875
A293 3899
B065 3866
A229 3862
B065 3872
B065 3870
B065 3875
B065 3874
B065 3868
A229 3865
B065 3865
B065 3876
B065 3878
B065 3950
H053 1150
AA06 3310
B065 3942
B065 3947
B065 3945
Description
Transfer Unit (Model C1)
Transfer Unit:EXP:Ass'y (Model C2)
Transfer Unit Guide Plate
Front Arm
Drive Electrode
Transfer Belt - Mojito Service
Drive Roller
Rear Arm
Transfer Unit Joint
Bias Roller
Terminal
Electrode Plate
Pressure Arm
Transfer Belt Frame
Bias Electrode Plate
Bias Terminal
Grounding Bracket
Stepped Screw - Locking
Guide Plate Spring
Guide Plate
Anti-static Plate
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
0450 3008N
0623 0120E
0633 0180G
0720 0060E
0951 3008N
0951 4014N
Description
Spring Pin - M3x12
Parallel Pin - 3x18mm
Retaining Ring - M6
91
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
92

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Part No.
AD04 1076
B065 3962
B065 3965
B065 3963
B065 3964
B065 3961
AA06 3877
A293 3916
AA13 2024
B065 3911
AD04 7025
A229 3934
B065 3914
AA08 2101
B065 3918
B065 3928
A229 3910
B065 3922
B065 3920
B065 3921
B065 3906
AA08 2058
A229 3911
AB01 4176
B065 3955
AZ32 0107
B065 3976
B065 3966
Description
Cleaning Roller Cleaning Blade
Spring Plate
Lever Shaft
Lever
Bushing
Shaft
Spring
Cleaning Roller - Transfer Belt
Spacer - M6
Toner Collection Coil - Transfer
Exit Seal
Tape
Transfer Agitator
Bushing - 6x10x6
Toner Collection Gear Coil
Cleaning Roller Terminal
Front Bushing
Electrode Plate Cover
Idle Gear - 1
Idle Gear - 2
Transfer Unit Casing
Bushing - 6x10x9mm
Rear Bushing
Cam Gear - 37z
Transfer Power Pack
Transfer Harness
Solenoid
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
0951 3006N
0450 3008N
1105 0487
0951 3004P
Description
Harness Clamp
Philips Screw With Flat Washer - M3
93
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
41.FUSING UNIT 1
41
109
2
101
8
105
110
7
109
105
16
101
110
6
5
102
17
109
103
106
108
22
26
27
20
24
25
28 107
34
21
30
20
104
35
39
33
19
19
108
15
11
12
106
32
37
36
38
103
10
18
14
107 104 103
29
40
103
20
108
106
104
20
106
23
106
20
19
10
9
19
42 31
94
13
41.FUSING UNIT 1
Index
No.
1
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
13
14
14
15
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Part No.
Description
B065 4255
B065 4274
B065 4253
B065 4256
B065 4257
B065 4481
B065 4268
B065 4167
AG05 0092
AG05 0098
B065 4200
B140 4093
B065 4207
AE03 1026
B140 4191
AA06 3886
B140 4209
B065 4209
B065 4212
B065 4211
B065 4217
B140 4193
AE04 0038
B140 4182
B065 4202
AE04 5046
B140 4181
B065 4242
B065 4239
AE03 1036
B065 4222
B065 4241
B065 4247
B065 4232
B065 4246
Insulator
Decal - Misfeed Removal (KOR)
Decal - Misfeed Removal (CHN)
Decal - Misfeed Removal (TWN)
Decal - Exit
Fusing Inner Cover
Decal - Fusing Knob
Knob:fusing (Model C1)
Knob:Fusing (Model C2)
Web Unit (Model C1)
Cleaning Unit:Hot Roller:Ass'y (Model C2)
Web Shaft
Bushing - Oil Supply Roller (Model C1)
Front Oil Supply Bushing (Model C2)
Spring
Bracket:Stopper:Ass'y
X/O MB68
X/X MB29
Pressure Roller Gear
Web Bracket (Model C1)
Cleaning Unit Cover (Model C2)
Cleaning Web Pressure Roller (Model C1)
Pressure Roller:Cleaning Felt (Model C2)
Web Bracket
Cleaning Web (Model C1)
Cleaning Felt Roller Ass'y (Model C2)
Rolling Drive Gear
Web Drive Shaft
Bushing - 6mm
Gear - 37Z
Gear
Brake Pad
Feeler Guard Bracket
Spring Plate (Model C1)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
B140 4190
B065 4226
B140 4188
B065 4231
AX04 0136
B065 4225
AW02 0120
B065 4223
B065 4244
B065 4238
B065 4235
B065 4248
B065 4234
AA06 3851
B065 4221
B065 4219
B140 4195
B065 4251
B065 4210
40
41
42
B140 4192
B140 4266
B140 4187
Brake Spring Plate (Model C2)

Drive Bracket (Model C1)
Drive Bracket Ass'y (Model C2)
Web Cover
Cleaning Motor
Motor Plate Bracket
Motor Gear
Gear - 23Z
Gear - 50Z
Web Idle Gear
Web Harness
Stopper Gear
Pressure Spring
Feeler Spring
Web End Feeler (Model C1)
Feeler:Oil End Sensor (Model C2)
Positioning Plate - Web Unit
Rear Bushing - Oil Supply Roller
(Model C1)
Inner Back:Oil Supply Bushing (Model C2)
Inner Cover:Fusing:EXP:Ass'y (Model C2)
Cleaning Unit Drive Positioning Plate
(Model C2)
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
5
1
1
1
1
Description
24
25
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
38
39
40
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
Part No.
0360 4006N
0951 4008N
0720 0040E
0720 0030E
0954 4008N
0353 0060N
1105 0511
0354 0060N
0354 0080N
Hexagonal Head Screw - M4x6

Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M3
Screw - M4X6
Screw - M4X8
95
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
42.FUSING UNIT 2
110
0453 3008N Bind Tapping Screw - M3x8 10
101
11
12
101
15
30
13
12
14
20
21
18
14
102
7
22
101
102
25
102
16
17
18
101
19
28
10
23
24
102
26
25
8
27
9
101
101
29
3
101
6
101
31
101
5
101
4
(Model C2)
101
96
42.FUSING UNIT 2
Index
No.
Part No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
2
B065 4016
B065 4029
B065 4021
B140 4001
B140 4002
B065 4133
B065 4135
2
2
B140 4131
B140 4135
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
B065 4116
B140 4203
B065 4138
B065 4175
B140 4174
B065 4176
B110 4117
B140 4117
AA06 0894
B065 4185
AA14 3037
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
AA14 3810
B065 4398
AA06 0539
AA06 0916
H084 1501
B065 4397
B065 4188
B065 4184
AA08 0274
B110 4391
AA06 6352
Fusing Unit - 120V (Model C1)

Fusing Unit (TWN) (Model C1)
Fusing Unit:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
Fusing Unit:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
Lower Fusing Entrance Plate - 120V
(Model C1)
Lower Fusing Entrance Plate - 230V
(Model C1)
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate (Model C2)
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate Ass'y
(Model C2)
Lower Fusing Cover (Model C1)
Side Plate Cover
Front Fusing Grip (Model C1)
Grip:Fusing Unit:Front:Ass'y (Model C2)
Grip Sheet
Upper Fusing Cover (Model C1)
Upper Fusing Cover Ass'y (Model C2)
Spring
Exit Plate
Development Cover Screw
(B064/B065/B140/B142/B163)
Development Cover Screw (B142/B143/B228)
Slider Cover
Stripper Pawl Spring
Slider Spring
Trast Screw
Release Slider
Front Lock Pawl
Stripper Pawls Grip
Bushing
Guide Plate Bracket
Spring
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
5
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
B065 4189
AA14 0824
A096 4319
B140 4141
AF04 0561
AA06 0914
AA14 9746
AE04 4043
AE04 4060
B065 4390
B140 4234
B065 4129
B140 4080
31
Description
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
27
27
28
28
29
30
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
B140 4113
Rear Lock Pawl

Stripper Pawl Release Shaft
Exit Roller Holder (Model C1)
Fusing Exit Roller Holder (Model C2)
Fusing Exit Roller - Upper
Stripper Pawls Spring
Stripper Shaft
Hot Roller Stripper (Model C1)
Stripper Pawls (Model C2)
Fusing Exitguide Plate (Model C1)
Upper Fusing Exit Guide Plate (Model C2)
Side Plate Sheet
Stripper Pawls Open And Close Ass'y
(Model C2)
Bracket:Cover:Connector:Ass'y (Model C2)
101
102
0360 4006N Hexagonal Head Screw - M4x6

97
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
2
2
2
10
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
43.FUSING UNIT 3 (Model C1)
98

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
23
24
24
25
26
27
28
Part No.
AE03 2014
AE03 0017
B065 4124
A413 1670
B065 4132
AW10 0084
B065 4130
B065 4142
B065 4127
AW11 0026
AW11 0027
B065 4150
B065 4121
B065 4151
AW10 0076
B065 4131
B065 4170
B065 4159
B065 4157
B065 4155
B065 4156
A247 4249
AB01 2316
AB01 3792
AB01 2316
AE01 1087
AX44 0163
AX44 0164
B065 4180
AE03 0018
AE02 0112
AA14 0823
Description
Bushing - 30x35x13.5
Front Heater Holder
Antistatic Brush
Middle Thermistor Cover
Middle Thermistor
Thermostat Housing - Middle
Upper Fusing Stay
Thermostat Housing
Thermostat - 180 C
Thermostat - 179 C
Front Harness
Thermostat Terminal
Rear Harness
Thermistor:inner Back
Rear Thermistor Bracket
Rear Heater Holder
Harness Holder
Connector Bracket
Fusing Harness (120V)
Connector - 3P
Fusing Gear
X/X MB59
X/X MB53
Hot Roller
Fusing Lamp - 120V 550W
Spacer - 16mm
Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller Shaft
Index
No.
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
Part No.
0954 3012N
0954 3006N
0360 4006N
0954 3010N
0951 3005N
0313 0080N
0314 0120N
0314 0100N
0313 0050N
0725 0120E
0725 0300E
0954 4006N
Description
Screw - M3X12
Screw - M3X6
X/X MB60
Retaining Ring C - M12
Screw - M4X6
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
99
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly

102
102
11
102
12
102
104
105
17
20
104
104
104
104
29
34
30
104
10103 104
18
103 13
104
31
4
103
25
33
16
104
15
104 105
21 17
19
14
108
107
32
104
22
2
5
109
103
23
24
106
101
8
7
3
5
27
28
101
26
100

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
30
31
32
Part No.
AE01 1095
AE03 0054
AE03 2026
AA06 0894
B140 4172
B140 4194
AE02 0145
AE03 0053
AW11 0040
AW11 0052
B110 4223
B140 4169
B140 4128
B065 4151
B140 4150
B140 4144
B140 4179
B140 4197
AW10 0096
AW10 0052
B140 4196
B140 4142
B140 4171
A413 1670
B140 4170
AX44 0213
AX44 0216
AX44 0214
AX44 0217
AX44 0215
AX44 0218
B140 4159
B140 4167
B065 4185
A247 4249
Description
Hot Roller - Mm40
Thermal Insulating Bushing
Spring
Hot Roller External Circlip
Gear - 40Z
Pressure Roller - Mm40
Thermostat - 192C
Thermostat:211C
Electrode Plate:Thermostat:Coupling
Thermostat Electrode Plate
Housing:Thermostat:EXP
Rear Harness
Harness:Front:EXP
Thermostat Bracket
Plate:Thermistor
Middle Thermistor Bracket
Inner Back Fusing Thermistor
Thermistor - Center
Inner Back Thermistor Bracket
Upper Stay Ass'y
Front Heater Holder
Antistatic Brush
Rear Heater Holder
Heater:120v:550w
Heater:230v:550w
Heater:120v:650w
Heater:230v:650w
Heater:120v:280w:Auxiliary
Harness Plate
Connector Cover Bracket
Exit Plate
Connector - 3P
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
33
33
34
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
Part No.
Description
B140 4162
B140 4164
B140 4157
Harness:Fusing Unit:NA
Harness:Fusing Unit:EU
Drawer Bracket Ass'y
0720 0060E
0950 3006M
0954 4008N
0360 4006N
0954 3012N
0353 0050N
0354 0120N
0353 0080N
0954 3006N
Retaining Ring - M6
Philips Screw With Lock Washer
Screw - M3X12
Screw - M4X12
Screw - M3X8
Screw - M3X6
101
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
102

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Part No.
AA06 0893
B065 4145
B065 4177
A232 3566
B065 4101
AF04 0055
AB01 2319
B065 4164
AE03 1024
AE04 2052
B065 4161
B065 4160
B065 4141
B065 4139
AW20 0005
AA14 3810
B065 4140
B065 4114
B065 4112
B065 4105
AB01 2318
AB01 2317
AB01 7357
B065 4178
B065 4147
Description
Spring
Front Release Lever
Front Pressure Lever
Front Side Plate
Fusing Exit Roller
Exit Gear
Right Support Bracket
Bushing - M4x7
Cleaning Roller
Left Support Bracket
Cleaning Roller Guide Plate
Spring Plate - Switch
Switch Holder
Reed Switch
Lower Guide Plate - Exit
Left Stay
Right Stay
Rear Side Plate
Idler Gear
Fusing Drive Gear
X/X MB59
Rear Pressure Lever
Rear Release Lever
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
0360 4006N
0720 0060E
1105 0283
0720 0040E
0727 0080G
0807 5056
Description
Retaining Ring - M6
Clamp
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M8
Washer - 8.1mm
1
1
103
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
104

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Part No.
AA06 0946
B065 4145
B140 4228
A232 3566
B140 4101
AF04 0055
AB01 2319
AE03 1026
B140 4200
AE04 2066
AE03 0056
B140 4198
B065 4141
B065 4074
AW20 0005
AA14 3810
B140 4140
B065 4114
B140 4112
B140 4105
AB01 2318
AB01 2317
B140 4229
B065 4147
B065 4129
AW02 0056
AA08 2117
B140 4254
B140 4256
B140 4264
B140 4320
B140 4258
B140 4498
B140 4205
B065 4139
Description
Pressure Tension Spring
Front Release Lever
Front Lever Ass'y
Front Fusing Side Plateass'y
Fusing Exit Roller
Exit Gear
Bushing - Oil Supply Roller
Pressure Cleaning Roller Spring
Fusing Cleaning Roller
Fusing Cleaning Roller Bracket
Exit Switch
Reed Switch
Lower Fusing Exit Guide
Left Stay
Right Fusing Stay
Rear Fusing Side Plate Ass'y
Idler Gear
Fusing Drive Gear
Rear Lever Ass'y
Rear Release Lever
Sheet:Fiber:Side Plate
Photointerruptor - Ee-sx4235a-p1
Bushing - M6
Shaft - Turn
Pressure Release Eccentric Cam
Gear - 23Z
Sensor Feeler
Sensor Bracket Ass'y
Harness - Positioning Sensor
Pressure Oil Supply Roller Bracket
Switch Holder
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
Description
36
AE03 0055
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
0360 4006N
0720 0060E
1105 0283
0720 0040E
0727 0080G
0807 5056
0954 4008N

Retaining Ring - M6
Clamp
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M8
Washer - 8.1mm
105
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
2
47.PAPER EXIT SECTION 1

104
22
21
104
10
17
18
12
103
13
11
9
10
103
20
15
14
102
23
24
106
105
13
19
27
(Model C2)
102
102
101
21
101
18
25
108
108
106
101
26
29
4
5
107
101
7
101
108
101
108
6
3
101
107
101
30
16
101
26
28
17
25
103
106
106
106
31

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Part No.
B065 4258
B065 4262
B065 4260
B065 4259
AA06 0903
B065 4266
B065 4470
B140 4470
B065 4273
AA08 0034
AA06 3577
AF02 2126
B065 4358
AW02 0133
B065 4496
B065 4354
B140 4354
B065 4363
B065 4359
AA08 0184
B065 4361
B065 4373
5447 2681
AA06 6592
B065 4374
B065 4495
AA06 3879
AA08 0240
B065 4360
B065 4378
B065 4453
B065 4381
B065 4154
Description
Fusing Grip
Lock Lever Bracket
Lever Shaft
Lock Lever
Spring
Lever Contact Bracket
Support Bracket (Model C1)
Protect Bracket Ass'y (Model C2)
Exit Grip Cover
Bushing - 4x5x7
Compression Spring
Exit Roller - Driven
Photointerruptor
Relay Harness - Exit
Upper Exhaust Guide Plate (Model C1)
Upper Grip
Grip Supporter
Bushing - Fusing Exit
Grip Shaft
Snap Ring
Spring
Exit Entrance Sensor Bracket
Relay Harness - Guide Plate
Spring
Bushing - MM5
Spring Plate
Driven Decura Roller
Middle Exit Guide Plate
Contact Point Shaft
Rear Fusing Plate
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
0451 4008N
0353 0060N
0452 3008N
0453 3006N
1105 0522
1105 0511
0720 0040E
0353 0080N
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
Screw - M3X8
107
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
3 102
102
16
17
102
10
9
7
17
11
12
13
4
101
101
101
101
26
102
102
106
25
15
102
14
24
18
105
103
22
104
21
101
101
23
101
1
19
101
101
2
18
108
27
20
(Model C2)
102

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
13
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Part No.
AA06 0902
B065 4415
AA08 2117
B065 4441
AF02 0565
AB01 2028
AA04 0056
A229 4482
A229 4479
A229 4477
B065 4413
AF02 0579
AF02 0605
AF02 0578
AF02 0604
A077 4162
B065 4254
A048 2838
AB03 0578
B140 4306
B140 4304
B140 4317
B140 4322
B140 4325
B140 4329
B140 4336
B140 4324
B140 4474
B140 4300
Description
Spring
Gate Pawl Solenoid
Bushing - M6
Exit Drum Stay
Inverter Roller
Gear - 19Z
Driven Roller
Exit Roller Holder
Reverse Guide Plate - Right
Reverse Guide Plate
Exit Gate Pawl
Exitdecura Roller (Model C1)
Exit Decura Roller (Model C2)
Entrancedecura Roller (Model C1)
Entrance Decura Roller (Model C2)
Shoulder Screw - M3
Lower Entrance Guide Plate
Nylon Rivet
Timing Pulley - 18Z
Gear - 21/35Z
Gear - 21/35Z
Gear - SWIVEL ASS'Y
Gear - 21/33Z
Drive Bracket Ass'y
Front Drive Bracket Ass'y
Gear - IDLER WORM GEAR
Stepper Motor Mm42
Heat Insulating Plate Bracket
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
6
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
0451 4008N
0720 0040E
0720 0060E
1105 0511
1105 0516
0313 0060N
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
Clamp
109
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
110

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
17
18
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24
25
26
27
Part No.
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
B065 4429
B065 4252
AF02 0581
B065 4308
B140 4308
AA04 0056
A229 4467
B065 4424
B065 4422
B065 4421
B065 4460
B065 4459
B065 4249
B065 4433
AB01 2031
B065 4400
AB01 9197
B065 4497
B140 4497
B065 4458
B140 4458
B065 4315
H521 1336
AA06 0718
B065 4317
AB01 9200
AA04 3290
AA04 3315
A470 1704
A470 1703
AB03 0579
Exit Front Side Plate

Left Exit Tray
Exit Drive Roller
Left Release Guide Plate (Model C1)
Eft Reverse Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Driven Roller
Pressure Arm
Exit Arm Pad
Guide Plate Lever
Pressure Shaft
Front Harness Bracket
Rear Harness Bracket
Right Exit Stay
Exit Rear Side Plate
Gear
Bracket
Exit Gear
Exit Harness (Model C1)
Harness - Paper Exit Unit Drawer (Model C2)
Exit Drawer Bracket (Model C1)
Exit Tightener
Lock Spring
Tension Spring
Idle Pulley - 11mm
Gear
Timing Belt (Model C1)
Timing Belt:S2m:40x426 (Model C2)
Spring - Lower Exit Roller
Shift Clutch
Timing Pulley - 27Z
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
1105 0290
1105 0328
1105 0518
1105 0511
0451 4008N
0720 0060E
0807 4146
0742 3906
0720 0040E
0453 3008N
0353 0060N
0805 3480
Description
Edge Saddle - Les-1010
Retaining Ring - M6
Flat Washer - 6.3x18x1
Retaining Ring - M4
Bind Tapping Screw - M3x8
Bushing - 6mm
111
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
50.DUPLEX UNIT 1
112
50.DUPLEX UNIT 1
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Part No.
B065 4525
B065 4797
B065 4674
B065 4673
B065 4671
B065 4675
AA06 2320
B065 4672
5447 2681
B065 4987
A229 4800
B140 4800
AA06 6353
B065 4728
B065 4726
B065 4501
B140 4500
B065 4725
AA14 3811
B065 4727
A229 5442
AW02 0130
AF02 2077
B065 4731
B065 4730
A096 4928
AA06 3581
A229 4727
AF02 2067
B065 4933
B065 4867
B065 4531
B065 4648
Description
Duplex Inner Cover
Caution Decal - Duplex
Release Grip
Release Lever Shaft
Duplex Lock Arm
Duplex Release Bracket
Spring
Release Lever Bracket
Snap Ring
Upper Duplex Stay
Exit Guide Plate (Model C1)
Exit Duplex Guide Plate (Model C2)
Spring
Spring Plate - Right Table Guide
Right Guide Table
Duplex Unit (Model C1)
Duplex Unit Ass'y (Model C2)
Right Duplex Bracket
Stepped Screw - M3X4
Right Sensor Bracket
Duplex Connecting Harness
Photointerruptor
Driven Roller
Spring Plate - Driven Roller
Lower Transport Guide Plate
Guide Plate Band
Compression Spring
Guide Plate Pressure Holder
Guide Stopper Roller
Guide Plate Lever Hook
Decal - Guide Plate Lever
Guide Plate Lever
Lever Cam
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
8
8
1
1
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
0451 4008N
0451 4006N
0450 3008N
0450 4008N
0720 0040E
Description
Tapping Screw - 4x6
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Retaining Ring - M4
113
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
51.DUPLEX UNIT 2
114
51.DUPLEX UNIT 2
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
25
26
27
Part No.
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
B065 4866
AA06 2318
AA14 3129
B065 4647
A229 4623
AA06 3579
AA08 0034
A229 4624
AA08 2118
AA08 2116
B065 4627
AA06 0728
A293 4615
A293 4613
A293 4611
A293 4614
AF02 1074
B065 4620
B065 4632
AA06 3582
A229 4740
B065 4644
A229 4617
AW01 0058
B065 4640
B140 4640
AA14 3426
5447 2681
Reverse Knob
Spring
Shoulder Screw - Front Cover
Invertor Lever
Compression Spring
Bushing - 4x5x7
Duplex Driven Roller
Bushing - M6
Bushing - M8
Front Side Plate
Tension Spring
Spacer
Front Gate Pawl
Reverse Roller
Rear Gate Pawl
Entrance Inverter Roller
Rear Side Plate
Joint Holder
Compression Spring
Drive Joint
Sensor Bracket
Duplex Discharge Brush
Photosensor
Upper Entrance Guide Plate (Model C1)
Upper Entrance Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Snap Ring
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
1105 0328
0720 0060E
0720 0040E
0353 0050N
0450 3008N
0354 0060N
0451 4008N
Description
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M4
Screw - M4X6
115
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
52.DUPLEX UNIT 3
116
52.DUPLEX UNIT 3
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Part No.
B065 4780
B065 4810
AB01 7616
AA04 3291
B065 4745
B065 4785
A232 4666
B065 4789
AA04 3292
B065 4696
B065 4650
AA02 1025
AA14 3183
5447 2681
A294 4754
AA06 0806
AA08 2118
B065 4720
B065 4681
B065 4683
B065 4682
AA08 0034
AA06 3655
AF02 0484
B065 4655
AA14 3811
Description
Reverse Motor
Reverse Motor Bracket
Gear
Timing Belt
Reverse Solenoid
Transport Motor
Transport Motor Bracket
Timing Belt
Jogger Motor Bracket
Jogger Motor
Magnet Catch
Stepped Screw
Snap Ring
Roller Lever
Spring
Bushing - M6
Left Duplex Table
Front Jogger Fence
Spring Plate - Rear Jogger Fence
Rear Jogger Fence
Bushing - 4x5x7
Spring
Driven Reverse Roller
Driven Reverse Bracket
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
0720 0030E
0720 0040E
0450 3006N
0353 0050N
1105 0508
1105 0511
1105 0522
0450 3008N
0451 4006N
0353 0040N
Description
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M4
Harness Clamp - LWS-0711
Tapping Screw - 4x6
Screw - M3X4
117
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
53.DUPLEX UNIT 4
101
2
15
10
15
10
101
15
3
101
2
101
11
12
13
3
102
101
3
14
5
3
6
102
3
7
16
(Model C2)
118
15
53.DUPLEX UNIT 4
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Part No.
AB01 1464
A232 3566
AA08 2118
AB01 7614
AB01 1463
AX20 0243
AB01 1496
AB03 0731
AF02 1075
AF02 1077
AA04 3293
AF02 1076
AF02 1078
B065 4694
AF02 1079
AB03 0583
5447 2681
Description
Turn Gear
Bushing - M6
Pulley
Connecting Gear
Magnetic Clutch (Model C1)
Gear - 32Z (Model C2)
Pulley - 29Z
Duplex Turn Roller
Driven Transport Roller
Timing Belt
Drive Inverter Roller
Left Drive Roller
Jogger Guide Rod
Right Drive Roller
Timing Pulley - 24Z
Snap Ring (Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
4
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
4
1
101
102
Part No.
Description

119
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
54.DUPLEX UNIT 5
26
101
28
5
110
25
108
108
105
101
101
108
24
105
101
104
109
101
101
101
22
102
106
7
101
21
101
23
12
107
105
101
103
11
20
110
27
19
101
104
10
108
14
104
104
13
105
15
16
17
101
12
101
3
101
14
104
18
1
101
120
101
54.DUPLEX UNIT 5
Index
No.
Part No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
18
B065 4699
B065 2762
AW02 0120
B065 4733
B065 4738
B065 4860
B065 4865
A294 4723
AA04 3294
B065 4692
B065 4693
A096 4595
AW02 0128
AW02 0130
B065 4715
A294 4669
AB01 7615
B065 4710
B140 4710
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
AA06 2318
AB03 0732
B065 4791
B065 4981
B065 4790
B065 4980
B065 4619
B065 4736
B065 4820
AA06 2319
Description
Jogger H.P. Sensor Bracket
Duplex Gate Pawl
Gate Pawl Cushion
Lower Duplex Bracket
Spacer
Belt Holder Fixing Plate
Timing Belt
Front Jogger Fence Slider
Rear Jogger Fence Slider
Duplex Guide
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Exit Reverse Sensor Bracket
Cushion
Gear
Upper Transport Guide Plate (Model C1)
Upper Transport Guide Plate Ass'y
(Model C2)
Spring
Jogger Pulley
Drawer Bracket - 12P
Duplex Harness - 12P
Support Bracket
Exit Solenoid
Jogger Bracket
Spring
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
0451 4006N
1105 0328
1105 0522
1105 0511
1105 0508
0451 4008N
0720 0040E
0453 3008N
1105 0518
1105 0516
Description
Tapping Screw - 4x6
Retaining Ring - M4
Clamp
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
121
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
55.DRIVE SECTION 1
122
55.DRIVE SECTION 1
Index
No.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
27
Part No.
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
B110 5305
B141 5305
AX06 0151
AA16 1122
B140 1132
AA04 3269
AB01 7449
B140 1133
AA06 0720
AB03 0427
A229 1135
B065 1168
A229 1136
AA06 3490
B140 1173
B065 1157
B140 1157
AA06 6651
B065 1160
AA04 3946
AB03 2716
B065 1164
AA06 6309
B065 1162
AX06 0253
AX06 0275
AB03 0725
A293 1155
B065 1166
B065 1167
Development Drive Motor (Model C1)

Development Drive Motor Ass'y (Model C2)
Stepper Motor
Motor Cushion
Stepper Motor Bracket
Timing Belt - S2M114
Gear - 21Z/24T
Stepper Motor Base Ass'y
Tension Spring - 7.75N
Pulley - 81Z
Ring - 55
Fusing Drive Bracket
Fusing Drive Shaft
Spring - 21.6mm
Fusing Drive Sub-unit Joint
Toner Recycling Bracket (Model C1)
Toner Recycling Bracket Ass'y (Model C2)
Spring
Toner Recycling Tightener
Timing Belt
Idle Pulley - M18
Tightener
Torsion Spring
Fusing Motor Bracket
Fusing Motor (Model C1)
Fusing/Exit Motor - DC24V 2.4W (Model C2)
Pulley - 89Z
Duplex Drive Bracket
Duplex Drive Shaft
Duplex Drive Joint
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
0451 4010N
0720 0060E
0951 4008N
0451 4008N
0720 0040E
0354 0050N
0720 0060E
0623 0140E
Description
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M4
Bind Screw - M4x5
Retaining Ring - M6
Spring Pin - 3x14mm
123
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
56.DRIVE SECTION 2
124
56.DRIVE SECTION 2
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Part No.
B065 5808
B065 2481
B065 2482
A294 2051
A294 2052
B065 1154
B065 3262
B065 1137
B065 1140
A134 1135
B065 1134
B065 1145
AB01 2315
AB01 1482
AA04 3948
AB01 7640
AA06 0792
B065 1122
B065 1110
B140 1110
B065 1084
AB03 0458
AA04 3945
A229 1135
AB03 0724
B065 1147
B065 1149
AA06 3654
B065 1131
AA13 2025
Description
LCT Cable Bracket
Grid Receptacle Terminal
Charge Receptacle Terminal
Rear Receptacle
Receptacle Pin
Electrode Plate
Electrode Plate
Bracket
Drum Shaft
Fly Wheel
Partition Plate
Boss
Gear - 156Z
Gear - 40Z
Timing Belt
Gear - 38Z/59Z
Tension Spring
Tightener Bracket
Main Motor (Model C1)
Brushless Motor DC24V 2.5W (Model C2)
Positioning Plate
Pulley - 28Z
Timing Belt
Ring - 55
Pulley - 74Z
Transfer Drive Bracket
Transfer Drive Joint
Spring
Joint
Spacer
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
0451 4008N
0453 3008N
1102 8504
0725 0120E
0450 3008N
0951 5010N
0720 0040E
0720 0060E
0450 4008N
0951 4005N
0633 0180G
1105 0490
1105 0489
1105 0516
Description
Connector
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Philips Screw With Flat Wash - M4x5
Harness Clamp - IWS-2218
Clamp
125
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
57.TONER COLLECTION
40
37
41
31
42
14
38
1
12
36
103
101
39
3
102
26
11
4
33
6
10
31
35
16
34
32
18
15
14
43
103
19
30
101
29
28
27
13
20
12
101
21
103
17
101
22
26
24
104
126
25
23
57.TONER COLLECTION
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Part No.
B065 3568
B065 3573
B065 3565
AW50 0023
B065 3566
B065 3557
B065 3609
B065 3588
B065 3590
5053 0447
B065 3585
AA13 2208
B065 3561
B065 3587
B065 3581
B065 3570
B065 3583
B065 3586
AX06 0235
H053 2208
B065 3559
B065 3593
B065 3552
B065 3656
B065 3654
B065 3601
B065 3660
B065 3652
B065 3649
B065 3650
AW02 0120
B065 2762
B065 3670
B065 3638
A096 3712
Description
Case Cap
Toner Collection Agitator
Toner Collection Case
Push Switch
Toner Receiving Spring
Toner Catchpan
Toner Separation Shaft - Long
Toner Collection Idle Gear
Toner Collection Shaft
Bushing - 6mm
Screw Gear
Spacer - M6
Spring
Bushing
Toner Transport Coil
Spring Guide
Screw Gear
DC Motor
Bushing - M4
Base
Toner Collection Discharge Harness
Toner Outlet Sub-unit:Transfer:Ass'y
Toner Collection Seal - Transport
Toner Collection Cap
Toner Collection Pipe
Pulley
Shield Plate
Toner Collection Case - Transport
Toner Collection Joint
Transport Screw
X/X MB11
Ratch
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
101
102
103
104
Part No.
Description
B065 3610
5447 2681
B065 3554
B065 3551
B065 3604
B065 3629
B065 3636
B065 3645
B065 3637
B065 3633

Snap Ring
Toner Collection Ass'y - Transfer
X/X MB11
Toner Separation Shaft
Toner Collection Seal
Gear - 22Z
Seal - 40x68
Transport Screw
0451 4008N
1105 0046
0354 0080N
1105 0511

Harness Band
Screw - M4X8
127
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
58.ELECTRICAL SECTION 1
114
110
114
16
19
106
114
110
106
17
14
109
114
114
15
108
106
107
114
6
109
18
106
107
109
106
111
110
114
9
106
20 114
(Model C2)
109
106
109
114
111
101
114
109
3
106
113
6
10
104
101
11
10
6
12
104
103
13
113
112
101
105
102
1
101
104
2
101
101
101
113
(Model C2)
128
101
101
6
21
Index
No.
Part No.
Description
1
1
B065 5417
B140 5416
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B065 5416
B140 5417
B065 5120
B163 5122
B064 5855
B140 5850
B065 5827
AA14 3801
B065 5826
5447 2681
B065 5874
B065 5791
B065 5865
AX64 0137
B065 5860
B065 5447
B065 5503
B140 5891
B065 5807
B065 5445
B140 5827
B140 5829
B140 5876
Left Harness (Model C1)

Harness - Machine Or Copier Upper
(Model C2)
Upper Harness (Model C1)
Harness - Machine Or Copier Left (Model C2)
BCU Board (Model C1)
PCB:BCU:EXP:Service (Model C2)
PCB Cover (Model C1)
Control Unit Cover Ass'y (Model C2)
Upper Hinge
Screw:M4:Exterior
Lower Hinge Bracket
Snap Ring
Lower Hinge
Fan Motor Gasket
Fan Cover
Cooling Fan - 24V
BCU Board Bracket
ADF Power Source Harness
ADF/CNB Harness
Bracket:Plug:ADF
Finisher Cable Bracket
Finisher Cnb Harness
Upper Control Unit Arm Ass'y (Model C2)
Lower Control Unit Arm (Model C2)
Cover:BCU (Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
0451 3008N
1105 0316
1105 0516
1105 0489
1105 0518
0451 4008N
0453 3008N
1102 8502
0360 3006N
1105 0511
1105 0521
0451 4020N
0360 3008N
0802 5276
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Clamp
Clamp
Connector - 54679-1615
Screw - M3X6
Clamp - LES-1017
Screw - M3X8
129
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
59.ELECTRICAL SECTION 2 (Model C1)
130

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Part No.
B004 5853
B065 5837
B065 5863
B065 5752
B065 5754
B065 5838
G331 5700
B065 5790
B065 5111
B065 5867
AX64 0098
B065 5861
B514 5970
AA14 3781
B066 5116
B065 5115
B065 5858
AA16 1125
AA14 3499
B065 5868
B065 5821
B065 5508
B065 5202
B065 5883
B065 5846
B065 5507
B065 5510
B110 5140
B065 5450
B065 5841
B065 5844
B065 5869
B064 9099
B065 5795
A669 1827
Description
Bracket Grip
NIB Cover
IC Card Cover
Control Unit Side Plate
Centronics Cover
IEEE1394 Cover
SDRAM - 128MB
Panel Gasket
Controller Board
Fan Cover
Fan Motor - DC5V 1.2W
HDD Side Plate
HDD:Hitachi:40GB:Vancouver3
Binding Screw - M3x3.5
Power Source Harness
HDD Harness
HDD Bracket
Rubber Cushion
Stepped Screw
Clamp
Control Unit Base
IPU/PSU Harness
Mother Board
Fan Relay Harness
Mother Board Cover
MB/PSU Harness
MB2/PSU Harness
PCB:Image Processing Unit
IPU/BCU Harness
IPU Cover
IPU Connector Cover
Base Sheet
NVRAM - Minus Counter
Controller Grounding Bracket
Spacer - 16mm
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
36
37
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
Part No.
Description
B066 5400
B066 5501
MLB Board
Spacer - 13mm
0451 3006N
0451 4008N
0451 3014N
1105 0511
1105 0488
0353 0040N
0360 3006N

Tapping Screw - M3-14
Harness Clamp
Screw - M3X4
Screw - M3X6
131
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
3
3
21
103
7
4
101
19
11
17
5
101
5
6
101
101
101
101
22
101
27
104
101
13
10
25
24
101
101
9
101
10
18
26
102
12
104
23
14
13
15
20
101
102
101
16
101
132

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Part No.
B514 5970
B140 5857
AA14 3815
AA14 3534
AA16 1125
AA14 3499
B140 5856
B070 5685
B070 5684
B140 5830
B140 5834
B140 5824
B070 6877
B141 5835
B584 5010
B140 9590
B140 5144
B065 5450
B140 5841
B140 5842
B140 5877
B140 5878
B065 1843
B140 5897
B070 6882
B140 5895
B140 5896
Description
HDD Ground Plate
Screw - M3X3.5
Screw - M3X4.2
Rubber Cushion
Stepped Screw
HDD Bracket
Harness:Power Source:HDD
Harness:HDD:IDE
Panel:Interface:Ass'y
Control Board Drum Stay Ass'y
Option Panel Ass'y
Large Drum Stay Ground Plate
PCB:Control Board:EXP:Ass'y
PCB:DDR-DIMM:128MB:Ass'y
PCB:IPU:Basic:Martini-c2
IPU/BCU Harness
Cover:Image Processing Unit:Ass'y
Ipu Connector Cover
Base:Ground Plate:HDD
Cover:SD-Card
Grounding Plate
Bracket:Control Unit
Spacer:SD-Card
Gasket:Drum Stay:A
Gasket:Drum Stay:B
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
4
3
7
4
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
0802 5276
0360 4006N
1105 0511
0451 3006N
Description
133
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
134

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
12
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Part No.
B140 5515
G331 5720
B140 5218
B140 5440
B140 5846
B070 5686
B138 5154
B070 5625
B140 5460
B140 5516
B140 5622
B140 5625
AZ23 0140
AZ23 0141
B140 5859
B140 5822
AX64 0147
B140 5461
B140 5517
B065 5868
B140 5873
Description
Harness - DC Power Supply MB
PCB SDRAM-DIMM 128Mb Ass'y
PCB:Ass'y
Harness:MB:Connecting
Mother Board Bracket Ass'y
Harness:CSS
PCB N-PI Ass'y
PCB:Interface:Ass'y
Harness - Pwrctl
Harness - DC Power Supply
Harness - AC Power Supply CTL-PSU
Harness:AC Power Supply:CTL-PSU:EU
Power Supply Unit DOM/NA
Power Supply Unit:CTL:EU/AA
Insulating Sheet
Control Unit Frame Ass'y
Fan Motor - 12V
Harness - Pwrctl Connecting
Clamp
Arm:Cover:BCU
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
0360 3006N
0802 5276
0451 3020N
1105 0511
1105 0487
1105 0488
0954 3008N
1105 0582
Description
Screw - M3X6
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Clamp:RBWS-0510D-V0
135
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
136
Index
No.
Part No.
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
AA16 1104
B065 1178
AA15 3155
B065 1175
A293 1095
AA15 1775
B065 1177
B065 1194
B065 1192
B065 1193
AA15 3156
AX65 0030
AZ32 0139
B065 5804
B065 5500
B140 5500
16
16
B065 5509
B140 5509
17
18
18
19
19
B065 5421
B065 5230
B140 5230
B065 5420
B140 5420
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
24
25
B065 5802
B140 5802
B065 5185
B140 5185
B065 5803
B140 5803
B065 5805
A265 5154
A293 5871
Cushion - Motor
Fan Bracket - IPS
Duct Seal - IPS
Entrance IPS Duct
Sirocco Fan - DC24V
Seal - Fan
Upper Ips Duct
Exhaust Bracket
Upper Exhaust Duct
Lower Exhaust Duct
Exhaust Duct Seal
Cooling Fan - 24V
Charactor Generator Power Pack
Charge Power Pack Bracket
CNB/PSU Harness (Model C1)
Harness - DC Power Supply Cnb BCU
(Model C2)
DRB/BCU Power Sorce Harness (Model C1)
Harness - Power Source BCU DRB
(Model C2)
Safety Switch Harness
CNB Board (Model C1)
PCB:CNB (Model C2)
CNB Board Harness (Model C1)
Harness - Cnb Machine Or Copier Upper
(Model C2)
CNB Board Bracket (Model C1)
CNB Bracket (Model C2)
DRB Board (Model C1)
PCB:DRB (Model C2)
DRB Board Bracket (Model C1)
DRB Bracket (Model C2)
CSS Bracket
PCB:CSS
Css Board Bracket
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
26
Part No.
Description
B065 5468
Css Relay Harness
0951 4010N
0707 4050E
1102 6245
0450 4008N
0450 4016N
0451 4008N
0451 3008N
1105 0488
1105 0516
1105 0522

Bushing - 4x5
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Harness Clamp
Clamp
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
137
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
102
2
101
11
10
108
21
101
9
101
1
8
103
104
101
101
106
105
103
101
12
105
101
13110
101
5
101
107
111
111
18
112
101
101
101
105
14 109
23
15
101
16
101
109
17
16
15
15
23
22
16
101
15
110
101
101
16
138
20
16
19
16
16
15
Index
No.
Part No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
22
22
AA15 3154
B065 1183
B065 1184
AX64 0136
AZ30 0053
B065 5892
B065 5815
AA15 3151
AA15 3152
AA15 3153
B065 1180
B065 5814
B065 5890
B065 5868
AA06 3880
5446 5832
B065 5817
B065 5819
B065 5422
B065 5418
B140 5418
B065 5818
B065 5600
B065 5651
B140 5615
22
B140 5617
23
AA06 3901
Description
Duct Seal - PCU
Fan Bracket
Entrance PCU Duct
Cooling Fan - 24V
Development Power Pack
Power Pack Bracket
Duct Seal - PCU A
Duct Seal - PCU B
Duct Seal - PCU C
PCU Duct
Harness Guide
Upper Hinge Stay
Clamp
Spring
Connector Guide Pin
Slide Rail Cover
Lower Hinge Bracket
Duplex DRB Harness
Duplex/Exit Harness (Model C1)
Harness - Exit Duplex (Model C2)
Main Switch Harness Guide
AC Harness - 120V (Model C1)
Harness:Ac Power Supply:Main:NA
(Model C2)
Harness:Ac Power Supply:Main:EU
(Model C2)
Compression Spring:Drawer
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
0451 4008N
0450 4008N
0450 4035N
1102 6245
0451 3008N
1105 0522
1105 0532
1105 0489
1105 0516
1105 0490
1105 0518
1105 0314
Description
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Edge Saddle - LES-25l
Clamp
Metal Clamp - AL-5
1
2
139
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
101
20
18
107
20
107
101
103
3
19
101
21
101
101
1
101
22
4
2
105
104
102
102
101
14
9
17
7
101
109
101
101
103
101 12 101
108
101
17
15
101
101
13
101
109
101
101
101
16
110
108
108
10
108
101
120V
106
11
140
21
11
101
101
Index
No.
Part No.
Description
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
B065 5701
B111 5701
B065 5483
B065 5139
B140 5132
B065 5871
B065 5873
B065 5872
AZ24 0073
AZ24 0078
AZ24 0079
7
7
8
9
10
11
11
11
12
13
13
14
15
AZ24 0092
AZ24 0093
B065 5502
B065 3695
B065 5601
B065 5672
AZ00 0070
B065 5673
B065 5879
B065 5898
B065 5877
B065 5700
B110 3777
16
17
AW14 0010
B140 5880
Front Paper Bank Harness (Model C1)

Harness:Bank:Front:Three Way (Model C2)
Safety Switch
pFC Board (Model C1)
PCB pFc Three Way (Model C2)
pFC Board Bracket
Upper pFC Board Stay
Lower pFC Board Stay
DC Power Supply Board - 120V (Model C1)
DC Power Supply Board - 240V
(Model C1 CHN)
Power Supply Unit Main DOM/NA (Model C2)
Power Supply Unit:Main:EU/AA (Model C2)
pFC/PSU Harness
Bottle Guide
Paper Bank Heater Harness
Power Supply Cord - 120V
Power Supply Cord - 230V (CHN)
Right PSU Stay
Power Supply Board Holder - 120V
Rear Paper Bank Harness
Cover Temperature & Humidity Sensor
Model C2)
Temperature/humidity Sensor (Model C2)
Control Unit Lower Hinge Ass'y
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
109
0451 4008N
0451 3008N
1105 0487
1105 0488
1105 0489
0801 0142
1105 0532
1107 1022
1107 0864
1107 0880
Description
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Screw - Spring Washer - M5X8
Fuse
Fuse - 12A (120V)
Fuse - 6.3A 250V (240V)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
141
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
19
102
21
102
20
102
102
3
102
105
102
102
104
6
7
102
102
102
102
101
102
9
10
102
8
15
16
13
103
102
17
11
12
14
24
102
22
23
18
102
102
142
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Part No.
B065 6771
AA13 2203
B065 6769
AA06 2252
AA06 2251
A248 6168
A248 6167
AX04 0135
B065 6767
B065 5700
AA06 3880
5446 5832
A248 6757
B140 6757
B065 6177
A096 5416
AW50 0010
AA16 1096
B065 6173
B065 5878
B065 6755
A248 6758
AA06 3268
0803 0058
B065 6172
Description
Armbracket
Spacer - 6mm
Lock Arm
Spring - Small
Spring - Large
Bracket - Lift Motor
DC Motor - 19.2W
Paper Tray Motor
Spring
Connector Guide Pin
Left Connector Bracket (Model C1)
Paper Size Harness
Push Switch
Stopper Cushion
Stopper Bracket
Upper PSU Stay
Solenoid
DC Lock Solenoid
Connector Spring
Stepped Screw
Paper Tray Stopper (Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
101
102
103
104
105
1105 0488
0451 4008N
0451 3008N
0414 0102N
0720 0040E
Description
Harness Clamp
Tapping Screw M4x10
Retaining Ring - M4
143
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
66.UPPER FRAME 1
144
66.UPPER FRAME 1
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Part No.
B065 5430
B065 5041
B065 5811
B065 1320
B065 5816
B065 5813
B065 1188
AA15 3150
B070 2114
B065 1185
AA15 3148
AA15 3149
5919 2201
B065 3267
B065 3266
B065 1328
AA06 3052
A096 1355
B065 1077
AA15 3144
AA15 3145
AA15 3146
AA15 3147
B065 1173
B065 1845
B065 1844
B065 5899
Description
LD Switch Harness
Safety Switch Lever
Safety Switch Bracket
Receiving Tray - Operation Panel
Safety Switch Harness Cover
Main Switch Bracket
Duct - Fusing
Duct Seal - Fusing
Filter - Toner
Duct - Charge
Duct Seal - Charge A
Duct Seal - Charge B
Shoulder Screw - M4
Inner Back Cam
Toner Bottle Cam
Upper Hinge Guide Plate
Turret Spring
Hinge Shaft
Right Stay
Duct Seal - IPS A
Duct Seal - IPS B
Duct Seal - IPS C
Duct Seal - IPS D
Ips Duct
Grounding Plate
Grounding Plate
Bushing
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
6
3
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
0720 0040E
0451 4008N
1105 0518
1204 2598
0353 0120N
1204 2390
1204 2521
0453 3008N
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
Switch
Bind Screw - M3x12
Interlock Switch - FA8l-AB24
Micro Switch
145
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
67.UPPER FRAME 2
20
21
22
19
18
101
101
101
17
15
102
103
14
13
16
107
103
106
104
10
12
101
106
24
23
101
101
11
9
101
101
105
101
10
3
104
105
2
25
5
101
26
1 101
101
101
146
101
101
67.UPPER FRAME 2
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
Part No.
B065 3832
AA08 2064
B065 1096
B140 3253
B065 3251
A096 1679
AX31 0047
B065 5893
B065 3252
6754 2866
B065 3827
AX40 0160
AX40 0161
B065 3837
B065 3838
B065 3811
B065 3812
AA07 0058
B065 1094
B065 1091
B065 1095
B065 2496
B140 2496
B065 1098
B065 3815
B065 3820
B065 3831
B065 3833
Description
Transfer Unit Lever
Bushing - 10mm
Front Transfer Stay
Drum Stay:Development:Upper:Peen
Development Unit Rail
Development Grounding Plate
Total Counter:7FIG:24V:MI2
Counter Bracket
Right Rail - Drum Unit
Roller - Positioning Guide
Handle Stay
Heater - 120V 9W
Heater - 230V 9W
Heater Holder
Heat Insulation Heater
Transfer Unit Stay
Transfer Rely Harness
Right Slide Rail
Duct Clip
Left Duct - PCU
Heat Insulation
PCU Connecting Harness (Model C1)
Harness - PCU (Model C2)
Left Rail
Front Middle Channel
Positioning Plate - Transfer Unit
Release Positioning Plate
Decal - Transfer Unit Lever
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
0451 4008N
0453 4008N
1105 0487
0720 0040E
0360 4008N
0451 3006N
1105 0522
Description
Harness Clamp
Retaining Ring - M4
Screw - M3x8
147
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
68.UPPER FRAME 3
148
68.UPPER FRAME 3
Index
No.
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Part No.
AA12 0067
B065 4319
B140 4311
B065 4300
B140 4313
B065 4306
AA07 0061
B065 4304
B140 4312
B065 4263
B065 1197
AG07 1011
B065 4835
A300 2134
6754 2866
B065 1092
5447 2681
B065 4179
B065 4168
B065 4591
B065 1198
AX64 0136
B065 1200
B065 4830
B065 1075
B065 1078
B065 4307
B065 4499
AA16 1104
Description
Anti Static Brush
Exhaust Cover (Model C1)
Exhaust Cover Ass'y (Model C2)
Front Exhaust Side Plate
Leftslide Rail
Left Plate Guide (Model C1)
Left Rise Guide Plate (Model C2)
Lock Lever Shaft Bracket
Magnet Catch Bracket
Magnet Catch
Rail
Guide Roller - B
Bracket
Snap Ring
Stripper Pawls Plate
Fusing Positioning Plate
Right Duplex Rail
Duplex Fan Harness
Cooling Fan - 24V
Bracket:Fan:Duplex
Holder Bracket
Base Cover
Left Stay
Rear Exhaust Side Plate
Exit Detection Harness
Cushion - Motor
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
0451 4008N
0951 4010N
1105 0511
1102 6245
0451 4010N
0720 0040E
0434 0080N
0451 3006N
1105 0328
1105 0283
0354 0300N
0707 4050E
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
Pan Head Self - Tapping Screw - M4x8
Clamp
Screw - M3x30
Bushing - 4x5
149
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
69.LOWER FRAME 1
150
69.LOWER FRAME 1
Index
No.
Part No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
13
B065 6776
AA06 0592
B065 6235
B065 6792
B065 6135
B065 6265
B065 6116
AX40 0150
AX40 0151
A248 6103
AA07 0044
B065 6774
B065 6264
B065 6266
B140 6266
14
B065 6777
Description
Tandem Tray Stay
Lock Spring - Tandem Tray
Left Rail Bracket
Slide Rail Base - Tandem
Lock Arm - Tandem Tray
Left Tandem Slide Rail
Upper Heat Sink
Heater - 115V 18W
Heater - 240V 18W
Guide Plate - Upper Heat Sink
Slide Rail - Tandem LCT
Slidebracket
Guide Stay
Right Tandem Slide Rail (Model C1)
Right Slide Rail Tandem LCT Ass'y
(Model C2)
Supporting Plate
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
0720 0040E
0451 4008N
0313 0040N
0314 0040N
0360 4006N
1105 0516
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
Clamp
151
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
70.LOWER FRAME 2
104
105
104
104
104
14
104
15
1
104
18
13
104
104
104
3
17
103
101
104
104
16
11
104
12
102
104
5
104
104
6
104
7
7
9
104
10
152
70.LOWER FRAME 2
Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
13
13
13
14
15
16
17
18
18
Part No.
Description
B065 6076
AA06 0534
B065 6136
B065 6241
B065 6783
B065 6260
B140 6260
AH01 2029
AH01 2016
AA14 3803
AA14 3798
B098 6693
B065 6191
B065 6166
AX40 0156
AX40 0157
AX40 0176
AX40 0178
B065 6221
B065 6174
B065 6075
5201 1796
B140 6225
B140 6226
Support Plate
Tray Lock Spring - 19mm
Tray Lock Arm
Left Rail - Paper Feed
Slide Rail Base
Right Slide Rail (Model C1)
Right Slide Rail Ass'y (Model C2)
Caster:1470n
Caster - G60 (TWN)
Flanged Hexagonal Head Bolt:Caster
Hexagonal Bolt:M12x35
Shield:Frame:Paper Bank:Upper
Side Plate - Paper Tray
Rear Support Plate
Heater - 115V 18W (Model C1)
Heater:115V:18W:Upper (Model C2)
Lower Heat Sink
Paper Tray Positioning Bracket
Side Plate Stay - Lower Rear
Stepped Screw - M4
Heat Sink:Heater:Lower:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
Heat Sink:Heater:Lower:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
101
102
103
104
105
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
12
4
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
Part No.
0451 3006N
0453 3006N
0720 0040E
0451 4008N
1105 0516
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
Clamp
153
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
71.BCU BOARD (Model C1)
154
155
manuals4you.com
156
157
manuals4you.com
158
159
manuals4you.com
160

Index
No.
*
1
2
3
Part No.
B065 5120
A232 5355
B004 5120
B065 5128
Description
BCU Board
IC - GATEX
IC - HG71C114FL
IC - GASTM
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
1100 1474
1102 3597
1102 5304
1102 5943
1102 6295
1102 6296
1102 6297
1102 6325
1102 6393
1102 6395
1102 6396
1102 6397
1102 6399
1102 6401
1102 6403
1102 6515
1102 8210
1102 8472
1102 8476
1102 8480
1102 8553
1102 9037
1103 1317
1109 0007
1204 1537
1400 0619
1400 0728
1400 0731
1400 0775
1401 0972
1402 1041
1402 1112
1402 1142
1402 1336
1402 1432
Description
Test Pin
Pin Header - 4P
Connector - 5P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 3P
Connector - 4P
Connector - 4P
Connector - 10P
Connector - 1P
Connector - 1P
Box Header
Connector - 22P
Connector - 26P
Connector - 30P
Connector - 34P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 3-353308-6
Connector - WR-50P-VF-1
Connector
IC - MINISMDC100-02
DIP Switch
Transistor - DTA143EKA
Transistor - 2SD2170
Transistor - 2SC4081
Transistor - 2SB1260
Diode - DA204U
Diode - ERA83-004
Diode Array - DAN217
Diode - 1SS355
Diode - HZS18-1
161
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
1402 1447
1402 1663
1403 0907
1403 0944
1403 0978
1407 1535
1407 2187
1407 2218
1407 2219
1407 3357
1407 4649
1407 4947
1407 4948
1407 4959
1407 4963
1407 5344
1407 5351
1407 5369
1407 5374
1407 5398
1407 5427
1408 0810
1408 0826
1408 0827
1408 0942
1408 1206
1408 1730
1503 0460
1503 0946
1503 1004
1601 5319
1601 7751
1601 7752
1601 7757
1601 7781
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
Diode - PTZ5.1B
Diode - ZTP12B
Diode - SML-310LT
Photocoupler - PC817X1
LED - SML-310DT
IC - TD62308AP
TTLIC - SN74LS07NS
TTLIC - SN74LS06NS
IC - TD62003AP
Comparator - BA10393F
IC - TC7S32FU
IC - 74LCX244
IC - 74LCX245 TSSOP
IC - MC68334GCFC20
IC - MBM29F800TA-70pFTN
IC - SN74LV02APW
IC - SN74LV14APW
IC - SN74AHCT32PW
IC - SN74LV4052APW
IC - CD4066BNS
IC - 74ACH1G32DCK
IC - BA10358F
IC - TA8428K
IC - TA8429H
IC - BA4558F
Transistor-array - TD62M4700F
IC - MM1096BF
Oscillator - 32.768Khz
Crystal Oscillator - 9.8304MHz
Oscilator - 19.6608MHz
Resistor-3.9 5% 2W
Resistor - 4.7K 5%
Resistor Array - 10K 5%
Resistor 0
Resistor - 10 5%
162
Part No.
1601 7814
1601 7866
1601 7867
1601 7871
1601 7879
1601 7899
1604 4553
1605 1135
1605 1137
1607 0732
1607 0758
1607 0852
1607 1021
1610 1374
1610 1638
1631 0000
1640 2330
1640 2470
1640 3101
1640 5330
1640 5470
1650 2101
1650 2151
1650 3221
1650 4100
1650 4102
1650 4103
1650 4112
1650 4132
1650 4151
1650 4154
1650 4222
1650 4223
1650 4330
1650 4332
Description
Resistor - 3.3K 5%
Resistor Array - 150 5%
Resistor - 33 5% 1/16W
Resister Array - 56 5% 1/16W
Capacitor - 220F20% 35V
Capacitor - 0.47F1% 10V
Capacitor - 470pF 10% 50V
Noise Filter - AEF321825-470
Filter - DSS710D223A12-22
Filter - BLM41P750SPB
Filter - MM1608D800B
Resistor - 2.2K 5% 1/2W
Resistor - 10M1%10W
Resistor - 0 1/4W
Capacitor - 33UF+80%-20%25V
Resistor - 2205%1/8W
Resistor - 1K 5% 1/10W
Resisotr - 1.1k 5% 1/10w 1608
Resistor - 1.3K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 150 5%1/10W
Resistor 150K 5% 1/10W
Resistor - 2.2K5%1/10W
Resistor - 22K5%1/10W
Chip Resistor - 33 5% 1/10W
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
1650 4362
1650 4392
1650 4472
1650 4560
1650 4562
1650 4751
1650 4910
1654 1001
1654 1002
1654 1003
1654 1004
1654 1102
1654 1303
1654 1401
1654 1501
1654 1542
1654 1911
1654 3601
1654 3602
1654 3903
1654 4702
1654 4990
1654 5231
1654 5360
1654 8203
1654 9109
1660 2101
1660 2150
1660 2220
1660 2270
1660 2330
1660 2391
1660 2470
1660 4102
1660 4222
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
241
242
243
244
245
Chip Resistor - 3.9k5%1/10W
Resistor - 750 5% 1/10W
Chip Resistor - 1m 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 130K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.4K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.5K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 15.4K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.91K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 36K 1% 1/10W 1608
Chip Resistor - 47k 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 499 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 536 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 820K 1% 1/10W 1608
Capacitor - 100pF - 10% - 50V
Part No.
1660 4472
1660 6103
1660 6473
1660 8104
1902 0042
Description
Capacitor - 4700pF10% 50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 47000pF +80,-20% 50V
Capacitor - 0.1F+80-20% 25V
RAM-1M X8 70NS TSOP G2
163
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly

INDEX
NO.
SYMBOL
NO.
INDEX
NO.
SYMBOL
NO.
INDEX
NO.
SYMBOL
NO.
INDEX
NO.
SYMBOL
NO.
INDEX
NO.
SYMBOL
NO.
INDEX
NO.
%

%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

%

%
%
%
%
%
%
%

INDEX
NO.
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL
NO.
SYMBOL
NO.

INDEX
NO.
INDEX
NO.
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL
NO.
SYMBOL
NO.

INDEX
NO.
INDEX
NO.
%
%
%

%

%
%

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL
NO.
SYMBOL
NO.

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

INDEX
NO.
manuals4you.com
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL
NO.

%
%
%
%

164
%
%
%
%
%
INDEX
NO.

SYMBOL
NO.
CAPACITOR
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL
NO.
INDEX
NO.
CAPACITOR

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

manuals4you.com
165

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%

%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%

%
%
%

%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%

%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%

%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
0%
0%
0%
0%
7(
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
IC

.+(
.+(
.+(
.+(

.+(
.+(
.+(
.+(

0%
0%
0%
0%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
FUSE
%
%
%

&
&
&
&
&

&
&

#&
#&
#&
#&
#&
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
166
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
FILTER
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

DA
%
%
%
%
%

%

%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
DIODE
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%

0%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CONNECTOR
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

manuals4you.com
167

3
3
3
3
3

3
3
3
3

3
3
3
3
3
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

%+
%+

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
2,

2,

2,
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%+
%+

%+
%+

%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
&'.
&'.

Q

%+
%+
%+
%+

%+

%+
%+

%2
%51
%51
%51
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

%+
%+
%+
%+

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
JP

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
PC
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
OSC
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
IC
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
LED
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4

168

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4

4
4
4
4

4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4

4

4
4
4

4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4

4

4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR

4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4

4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4

4
4

4

4

4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR
04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

manuals4you.com
169

04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RN
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR

4
4
4
4

4

4

4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR

26

26

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
95
170
&<
&<
&<
&<
&<

&<
&<

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

26
26
26
26

26

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04

04

04
04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

26

26

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

26

26

26

ZD
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04

04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04

04

04
04
04

SWITCH

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
TP
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RN
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
TP

Index
No.
*
1
2
3
Part No.
B163 5122
A232 5355
B004 5120
B065 5128
Description
IC - GATEX
IC - HG71C114FL
IC - GASTM
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
1100 1475
1102 5301
1102 5302
1102 6295
1102 6296
1102 6297
1102 6311
1102 6393
1102 6395
1102 6397
1102 6398
1102 6399
1102 6401
1102 6403
1102 6515
1102 8210
1102 8467
1102 8471
1102 8478
1102 8480
1102 8489
1102 8553
1102 9037
1102 9120
1103 1317
1104 0764
1109 0007
1204 1537
1400 0556
1400 0728
1400 0731
1400 0768
1400 0775
1400 0909
1401 0972
Description
Test Pin
Connector - 2P
Connector - 3P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 3P
Connector - 4P
Connector:53324-0462
Connector - 10P
Connector - 1P
Box Header
Connector - 22P
Connector - 26P
Connector - 30P
Connector - 34P
Connector - 2P
Connector
IC Socket - 1-390261-2
IC - MINISMDC100-02
DIP Switch
Transistor - DTB143EK
Transistor - DTC124EUA
Transistor - DTA143EUA
171
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
1402 1041
1402 1112
1402 1142
1402 1336
1402 1432
1402 1447
1402 1530
1402 1663
1403 0944
1403 0978
1403 0996
1407 1535
1407 2187
1407 2218
1407 2219
1407 3357
1407 4959
1407 5344
1407 5351
1407 5353
1407 5369
1407 5374
1407 5388
1407 5414
1407 5415
1407 5427
1407 5463
1407 5712
1408 0826
1408 0942
1408 1206
1408 1680
1408 1730
1503 0460
1503 1004
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
Diode - DA204U
Diode - ERA83-004
Diode - 1SS355
Diode - HZS18-1
Diode - PTZ5.1B
Diode - RB520S-30
Diode - ZTP12B
LED - SML-310DT
LED - SML-310VT
IC - TD62308AP
TTLIC - SN74LS07NS
TTLIC - SN74LS06NS
IC - TD62003AP
IC - MC68334GCFC20
IC - SN74LV02APW
IC - SN74LV14APW
IC - SN74LV244APW
IC - SN74AHCT32PW
IC - SN74LV4052APW
CMOS IC - SN74LV08ANS
IC - 74ACH1G32DCK
CMOS IC - SN74LV245APW
IC - TA8428K
IC - BA4558F
IC - LM358D
IC - MM1096BF
Oscilator - 19.6608Mhz
172
Part No.
1503 1213
1601 5319
1601 7752
1601 7757
1601 7760
1601 7781
1601 7791
1601 7796
1601 7867
1601 7879
1601 7899
1604 4779
1605 1135
1605 1137
1605 1148
1605 1187
1605 1190
1605 1225
1607 0758
1607 1014
1607 1020
1607 1021
1607 1251
1607 1495
1609 0005
1609 0006
1609 0008
1609 0011
1609 0012
1609 0013
1609 0014
1609 0016
1609 0018
1609 0019
1609 0020
Description
Resistor-3.9 5% 2W
Resistor 0
Resistor - 100:5%:1/16W
Resistor - 10 5%
Resistor Array:1K:5%:1/16W
Resistor Array:2.2K:5%:1/16W
Capacitor:220MF:20%:35V
Ceramic Capacitor:0.1uF:+80-20%:50V
Ceramic Capacitor:0.047F10% 50V
Ceramic Capacitor:0.022UF:10%:50V
Ceramic Capacitor:0.1UF:10%:50V
EMI Filter - BLM11P600SPB
Filter:MMZ1608Y121B
EMI Filter:Chip:MPZ2012S221A
Filter:ACF321825-332
Resistor:33:5%:1/16W
Resistor:10K:5%:1/16W
Resistor:4.7K:5%:1/16W
Resistor:0:1608
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
1609 0025
1610 1374
1610 1638
1631 0000
1634 0000
1640 2330
1640 2470
1640 3101
1640 5330
1650 2101
1650 2151
1650 3221
1650 4100
1650 4101
1650 4102
1650 4103
1650 4112
1650 4132
1650 4154
1650 4220
1650 4222
1650 4223
1650 4330
1650 4331
1650 4332
1650 4362
1650 4392
1650 4472
1650 4560
1650 4751
1654 1001
1654 1002
1654 1003
1654 1004
1654 1102
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
Resistor - 10M1%10W
Resistor - 0 1/4W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Capacitor - 33UF+80%-20%25V
Resisotr - 1.1k 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.3K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor 150k 5% 1/10W
Resistor:330:5%:1/10W:1608
Resistor - 750 5% 1/10W
Part No.
1654 1303
1654 1401
1654 1501
1654 1542
1654 1911
1654 2001
1654 2002
1654 2401
1654 3601
1654 3741
1654 3903
1654 4301
1654 4702
1654 4990
1654 8203
1654 9109
1660 2101
1660 2120
1660 2150
1660 2180
1660 2330
1660 2391
1660 2470
1660 4102
1660 4103
1660 4472
1660 6103
1660 8104
1902 0068
1906 0040
Description
Resistor - 130K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.4K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.5K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 15.4K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.91K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor:2.4k:1%:1/10W:1608
Resistor:3.74K:1%:1/10W:1608
Resistor:390K:1%:1/10W:1608
Resistor:4.3k:1%:1/10W:1608
Chip Resistor - 47k1%1/10W
Resistor - 499 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 820K 1% 1/10W 1608
Capacitor:12pF:50V:1608
Capacitor:18pF:5%:50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - 10% - 50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
SRAM:1M:X8:TSOP:G4
RAM:8M:X8/X16:70ns:B:5V
173
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
73.IPU BOARD (Model C1)
174
175
manuals4you.com
176
177
manuals4you.com
178
179
manuals4you.com
180
manuals4you.com

Index
No.
*
1
2
3
102
103
104
106
107
Part No.
Description
B110 5140
B065 5147
B065 5158
B065 5169

IC - CDIC3
IC - RF5C608
IC - GARAC
B065 5147
B065 5158
B065 5169
0313 0100B
0710 0030B
IC - CDIC3
IC - RF5C608
IC - GARAC
Hexagon Nut - M3
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
1005 0955
1005 0978
1100 1649
1102 6600
1102 7626
1102 8553
1102 8725
1102 8727
1102 8774
1102 8775
1102 8776
1102 8777
1102 8779
1102 9066
1204 1542
1204 2373
1204 2507
1401 1202
1402 1503
1402 1578
1403 0907
1403 0953
1407 5090
1407 5287
1407 5334
1407 5347
1407 5351
1407 5353
1407 5361
1407 5364
1407 5469
1407 5705
1407 5709
1407 5742
1407 5743
Description
Heat Sink
SP513K
Testpin - HK-3-S
Connector - 8P
Connector - TX25-80P-LT-N1
Connector - FFC/FPC-FH12-10S-0.5SH
DIP Switch
Key Board Switch - SKQDPA
Switch SSSS810700
Fet - HAT1023R
Diode - 1SS400
Diode - YG802C04R
Diode - SML-310LT
LED - SML-310MT
IC - DS90CF364MTD
Clock Generator - W180-03G
IC - CMOS LOGIC 74LVC244A TSSOP
IC - SN74LV08APW
IC - SN74LV14APW
IC - SN74LV244APW
IC - 74LVC157A TSSOP
IC - SN74AHCT244PW
IC - SN74LV07APW
IC - SN74LVC06APW
IC - MK1705A
IC - ICS553MI
IC - RF5V860
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
1408 1095
1408 1508
1408 1746
1408 1747
1503 1089
1503 1090
1503 1091
1601 7877
1601 7887
1601 7898
1601 7900
1601 7913
1601 7914
1601 7943
1601 7959
1601 7960
1601 7981
1604 4306
1604 4848
1604 4987
1604 5082
1605 0976
1605 1161
1605 1167
1605 1181
1605 1187
1605 1224
1607 0861
1607 1061
1610 1218
1633 0000
1650 4100
1650 4101
1650 4102
1650 4103
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
IC - BA10324AF
Series Regulator - PQ07VZ012Z
IC - PST623XW
Regulator - PQ5EV7L
Oscilator - 85.2MHz
Oscilator - 10MHz
Resistor Array 4.7k 5% 1/32W
Resistor Array - 10K 5% 1/32W
Resistor Array
Resistor 22 5% 1/32w
Resistor Array - 68 5% 1/32W
Resistor
Resistor Array - 100K 5%1/16W
Capacitor
Capacitor - 330F20% 6.3V
Capacitor - 1F+80% -20% 10V
Capacitor - 10F+80-20% 10V
Ceramic Capacitor 0.047F10% 50V
Capacitor 4.7F10% 6.3V
Filter - BK2125HS101
Resistor
Resistor - 0 1/10W
Part No.
1650 4104
1650 4114
1650 4150
1650 4200
1650 4202
1650 4220
1650 4242
1650 4330
1650 4470
1650 4472
1650 4510
1650 4511
1650 4621
1650 4680
1650 4750
1654 0000
1654 1001
1654 1201
1654 2201
1654 4420
1654 4990
1660 0100
1660 2101
1660 2221
1660 2330
1660 2331
1660 2470
1660 2471
1660 4102
1660 4103
1660 4222
1660 4472
1660 6103
1660 8104
1907 0015
Description
Resistor - 110K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 2.4K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 620 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 0 1608
Resistor - 2.2K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor 442 1% 1/10w 1608
Resistor - 499 1% 1/10W
Capacitor - 10PF 0.5pF 50V
Capacitor - 220pF +80-20% 50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - 10% - 50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
SDRAM - 256MB 4MX16X4 100MHz
181
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%

182

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%

%

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

manuals4you.com
183
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%

%
%

%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR
%
%
%

%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%

%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

%
%

%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%

184

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%

%

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%

%
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%

%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR

%+
%+
%+
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

.+(
.+(
.+(
.+(
.+(

.+(
.+(
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

manuals4you.com
185

.+(
.+(
.+(
.+(
.+(

.+(
.+(
.+(
.+(
.+(
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

.+(
.+(
.+(

.+(

.+(

.+(
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

.+(
.+(
.+(
.+(

.+(

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

.+(

.+(

.+(

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
IC
0%
0%

0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%

0%
0%
0%
0%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%

%
%
%

%
%
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
&
&
&
%
%

%
%

%
%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CONNECTOR

FILTER
%
%
%
%
%

%
%
%
%

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
DIODE
4

4
4
4
4

4
4

4
4
4

4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

3
3
3
3
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR

2,

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

2,
2,

2,
2,

2,
2,
2,
2,
2,

2,
2,

2,
2,
2,
2,
2,

2,
2,
2,
2,
2,

&'.
&'.
&'.
&'.
2,

2,
2,
2,

.
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,

2,

2,
2,
2,

%51
%51
%51
Q
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

186
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
OSC
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
LED
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
2,

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
L
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

%+
%+
%+
%+
%+

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
JP
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
JP
IC

4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

manuals4you.com
187

4
4
4
4

4

4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4

4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4

4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4

188

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
4

4

4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4

4

4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR

4

4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
4
4

4
4

4

4
4

4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4

4

4

4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RESISTOR

04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04

04

04
04

04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

manuals4you.com
189

04
04
04

04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RN

04
04

04
04
04

04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04

04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

)'4
)'4
)'4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
REG

4
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04
4
4

4

4
4

4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

4
4

4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RN
RESISTOR
$6
$6
$6
$6

95
95
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04

04

04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
TB
04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04

04
04
04

04

04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
04
04
04
04
04

04
04
04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.

04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SWITCH
RN
04
04

04
04

04
04
04
04

SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RN
TP
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
26
26
26
26
26
26

26
26
26
26
26

190
manuals4you.com

Index
No.
*
1
2
3
Part No.
B140 5144
B065 5147
B065 5158
B065 5169
Description
PCB:IPU:Basic:Martini-C2
IC - CDIC3
IC - RF5C608
IC - GARAC
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
1100 1649
1102 5944
1102 6600
1102 7626
1102 8553
1102 8725
1102 8727
1102 8774
1102 8775
1102 8776
1102 8777
1102 8779
1102 9066
1104 0683
1204 2306
1204 2373
1400 0810
1401 1202
1401 1207
1402 1342
1402 1503
1402 1648
1403 0907
1403 0953
1407 5090
1407 5287
1407 5334
1407 5347
1407 5350
1407 5351
1407 5353
1407 5364
1407 5367
1407 5469
1407 5705
191
Description
Testpin - Hk-3-s
Connector - 3P
Connector - 8P
Socket - IMSA-9206H-GF
Dip Switch:CHS-04B
Key Board Switch - Skqdpa
Transistor:DTC114EUA
FET - HAT1023R
FET:HAT2070R
Diode - 1SR154-400
Diode - 1SS400
Diode:RB05
Diode - SML-310LT
LED - SML-310MT
IC - DS90CF364MTD
IC - SN74LV08APW
CMOS IC:SN74LV00APW
IC - SN74LV14APW
IC - SN74LV244APW
IC - SN74AHCT244PW
CMOS IC:74LVC74A:TSSOP
IC - SN74LV07APW
IC - SN74LVC06APW
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
1407 5709
1407 5742
1407 5896
1408 1095
1408 1508
1408 1664
1408 1746
1408 1945
1503 1089
1503 1090
1503 1091
1600 1880
1601 7877
1601 7887
1601 7898
1601 7900
1601 7913
1601 7914
1601 7943
1601 7959
1601 7960
1601 7981
1604 4306
1604 4848
1604 4987
1604 5042
1604 5047
1604 5082
1605 0976
1605 1106
1605 1161
1605 1167
1605 1181
1605 1187
1605 1224
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
IC - MK1705A
IC - ICS553MI
IC - RF5V861
IC - BA10324AF
Series Regulator:LM1117MP-ADJ/NOPB
IC - PST623XW
IC:SI-85
Oscilator - 85.2Mhz
Oscilator - 10Mhz
Resistor - 25M 1% 1W
Resistor Array
Resistor 22 5% 1/32W
Resistor
Capacitor
Capacitor:330UF:20%:4V
Capacitor:330UF:20%:10
Capacitor - 1F+80% -20% 10V
Ceramic Capacitor 0.047F10% 50V
Capacitor 4.7F10% 6.3V
Part No.
1605 1246
1605 1347
1605 1355
1607 0861
1607 1061
1607 1326
1607 1351
1610 1218
1633 0000
1634 0000
1650 4100
1650 4101
1650 4102
1650 4103
1650 4104
1650 4114
1650 4150
1650 4151
1650 4200
1650 4202
1650 4220
1650 4242
1650 4330
1650 4470
1650 4472
1650 4473
1650 4510
1650 4511
1650 4621
1650 4680
1650 4750
1653 3309
1653 7509
1654 1001
1654 1101
Description
Capacitor:3.3UF:20%:25V
Capacitor:1UF:+80-20%:16V
Inductor:SLF12575-2R7N7R0-pF
EMI Filter:BLM21PG221SN1B
Resistor
Resistor - 0 1/10W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Resistor - 110K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 2.4K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor:47k:5%:1/10W:1608
Resistor - 620 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor:33:1%:1/8W:2125
Resistor:75:1%:1/8W:2125
Resistor:1.1K:1%:1/10W:1608
192
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
>
Index
No.
Part No.
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
1654 1401
1654 1800
1654 4420
1654 4990
1660 0100
1660 2101
1660 2221
1660 2330
1660 2331
1660 2470
1660 2471
1660 4102
1660 4103
1660 4222
1660 6103
1660 6473
1660 8104
1907 0013
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Resistor - 1.4K 1% 1/10W 1608

Resistor:180:1%:1/10W:1608
Resistor 442 1% 1/10w 1608
Resistor - 499 1% 1/10W
Capacitor - 10000pF - 10% - 50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 47000pF +80,-20% 50V
SDRAM:256M:4MX16X4:133MHZ:G1
193
Part No.
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
75.GW BOARD (Model C1)
194
manuals4you.com
195
196
manuals4you.com
197
198
manuals4you.com
199
200
manuals4you.com

Index
No.
*
1
Part No.
B065 5111
B065 5113
Description
Controller Board
IC - ASIC MARIMBA3
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
Part No.
1102 3566
1102 5303
1102 6295
1102 6328
1102 8091
1102 8153
1102 8357
1102 9349
1102 8566
1102 8631
1102 8656
1102 8832
1102 8988
1104 0589
1107 0555
1204 2571
1401 1136
1401 1175
1402 1265
1402 1342
1402 1343
1402 1546
1403 0987
1407 2187
1407 2218
1407 5275
1407 5300
1407 5321
1407 5334
1407 5364
1407 5366
1407 5485
1407 5517
1407 5523
1407 5694
Description
Connector - S8B-XH-A(8PIN)
Connector - 4P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 2P
Connector - FCN-568P068-G/05A-V4
Connector - DIMM
X/O MB7
Connector
Connector - TX25-120P-LT-H1
Connector - DM-3D4-B3210
Connector
DIP Socket - 32P
Fuse - 4A
DIP Switch - 2.54P
Fet - HAT1020R
Fet - HAT1043M
Diode - RB411D
Diode - 1SR154-400
Diode - RB106L-40
Diode - RB081
LED SML-211UT
TTLIC - SN74LS07NS
TTLIC - SN74LS06NS
CMOS Logic - 74LVCHR16245A TSSOP
CMOS Logic - 74LVC16244A TSSOP
CMOS Logic - 74LVCH16374A TSSOP
IC - SN74AHCT244PW
IC - 74LVC08A TSSOP
IC - SN74VC574APW
IC - 74AHCT14PW
ROM - I2C SOP 3V
CPU RM7000A-400T-REV1.34
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
1407 5717
1408 1273
1408 1398
1408 1507
1408 1528
1408 1529
1408 1596
1408 1640
1408 1657
1503 0842
1503 1045
1600 1880
1601 7915
1601 7918
1601 7926
1601 7929
1601 7987
1604 4728
1604 4994
1605 1081
1605 1124
1605 1132
1605 1181
1605 1200
1605 1201
1605 1202
1605 1205
1605 1207
1605 1211
1605 1214
1605 1216
1605 1221
1605 1224
1605 1252
1607 1061
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
IC - ICS960001AF
IC - RN5VD28A
Detector - RN5VD42A
Regulator - PQ05VY3H3Z
Regulator - PQ05VY053Z
DC Converter - ITC1622CSB
IC - RN5VD15A
Series Regulator - PQ070XH02Z
IC - RN5VD20A
Oscillator - 14.31818MHz
Oscilator - 24MHz
Resistor - 68 5% 1/16W 8
Capacitor - 10 F+80-20% 25V
Capacitor - 4.7F+80 -20% 10V
Capacitor - 2200pF10%50V
Capacitor - 0.1 UF+80-20%16V
Capacitor 4.7F10% 6.3v
Capacitor - 0.01F+80-20% 50V
Part No.
1607 1206
1607 1212
1607 1225
1632 0000
1634 0000
1650 4101
1650 4102
1650 4103
1650 4104
1650 4109
1650 4120
1650 4150
1650 4182
1650 4220
1650 4222
1650 4330
1650 4470
1650 4472
1650 4562
1650 4680
1650 4820
1650 5680
1654 1001
1654 1201
1654 2001
1654 7502
1654 9532
1660 2221
1660 2331
1660 2471
1660 4102
1660 6103
1660 8104
1906 0017
Description
Filter - ACC2012L-250
Inductor - CDRH6D38-5R0NC
Resistor - 0 1/8W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Resistor - 98.3K 1% 1/10W 1608
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Flash Memory - LH28F320BJ-PBTL70
201
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
BAT
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
116
117
C1
---------
281
---------
--C12
C13
C14
C15
--281
167
171
270
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
189
187
275
281
172
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
187
187
281
281
187
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
179
187
187
281
281
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
281
188
188
188
188
----C8
-----
BAT1
BAT1
----281
-----
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
281
281
281
281
275
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
270
281
173
270
281
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
187
281
167
167
281
C46
C47
C48
C49
C50
281
187
187
281
281
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
188
188
281
187
281
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
C61
C62
C63
C64
C65
187
281
187
187
281
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
167
188
188
188
273
C81
C82
C83
C84
C85
273
277
176
173
167
C91
C92
C93
C94
C95
281
281
281
281
281
C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
281
281
174
281
281
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
275
281
281
275
179
C121
C122
C123
-----
277
265
265
-----
C66
C67
C68
-----
179
281
281
-----
C76
C77
C78
C79
C80
275
188
188
188
275
C86
C87
C88
C89
C90
188
281
275
281
281
C96
C97
C98
C99
C100
281
281
281
281
281
C106
C107
C108
C109
C110
281
275
281
275
281
C116
C117
-------
281
281
-------
C126
C127
C128
C129
C130
167
275
281
281
281
202
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
C131
C132
C133
C134
C135
281
187
187
179
270
C141
C142
C143
C144
C145
268
268
265
281
275
C151
C152
C153
C154
C155
179
273
184
184
184
C161
C162
C163
C164
C165
184
184
188
273
273
C171
C172
C173
C174
C175
179
273
184
184
277
C181
C182
C183
C184
C185
179
184
273
277
179
C191
C192
C193
C194
C195
184
184
277
184
179
C136
C137
C138
C139
C140
281
187
187
281
179
C146
C147
C148
C149
C150
281
275
271
271
281
C156
C157
C158
C159
C160
184
179
184
277
184
C166
C167
C168
C169
C170
275
179
273
273
273
C176
C177
C178
C179
C180
279
184
184
277
184
C186
C187
C188
C189
C190
184
273
184
188
184
C196
C197
C198
C199
C200
184
184
277
273
273
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
C201
C202
C203
C204
C205
179
188
188
275
277
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215
277
271
271
271
271
C221
C222
C223
C224
C225
169
275
281
281
275
C231
C232
C233
C234
C235
275
275
281
277
281
--------C245
--------281
C251
C252
C253
C254
C255
188
281
277
281
281
C261
C262
C263
C264
C265
270
270
281
188
281
C206
C207
C208
C209
C210
273
273
275
277
188
C216
C217
C218
C219
C220
169
183
183
169
169
C226
C227
C228
C229
C230
275
179
281
275
275
C236
C237
C238
-----
281
281
281
-----
C246
C247
C248
C249
C250
281
277
277
188
281
C256
C257
C258
C259
C260
281
270
270
188
188
C266
C267
C268
C269
C270
281
281
277
277
188
203
manuals4you.com
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
C271
C272
C273
C274
C275
281
188
277
277
277
C281
C282
C283
C284
C285
275
281
281
275
189
C291
C292
C293
C294
C295
265
278
278
278
281
C301
C302
C303
C304
C305
179
281
188
281
281
C311
C312
C313
C314
C315
277
277
270
188
184
C321
C322
C323
C324
C325
273
273
277
184
188
C331
C332
C333
C334
C335
184
277
273
188
184
C276
C277
C278
C279
C280
281
281
277
179
281
C286
C287
C288
C289
C290
188
188
278
281
265
C296
C297
C298
C299
C300
278
188
278
278
275
C306
C307
C308
C309
C310
277
277
277
277
277
C316
C317
C318
C319
C320
277
273
188
184
277
C326
C327
C328
C329
C330
273
277
184
188
188
C336
C337
C338
C339
C340
277
273
273
277
184
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
C341
C342
C343
C344
C345
188
273
277
184
188
C351
C352
C353
C354
C355
177
177
177
182
279
C361
C362
C363
C364
C365
270
281
270
281
281
C371
C372
C373
C374
C375
270
281
281
281
281
C381
C382
C383
C384
C385
277
281
281
277
281
C391
C392
C393
C394
C395
270
281
270
281
281
C401
C402
C403
C404
C405
281
277
281
281
281
C346
C347
C348
C349
C350
188
269
269
281
177
C356
C357
C358
C359
C360
281
281
270
281
281
C366
C367
C368
C369
C370
281
281
270
270
281
C376
C377
C378
C379
C380
277
277
277
277
281
C386
C387
C388
C389
C390
277
277
270
270
281
C396
C397
C398
C399
C400
281
270
281
270
281
C406
C407
C408
C409
C410
281
188
188
281
267
204
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
C411
C412
C413
C414
C415
179
179
179
179
281
C421
C422
C423
C424
C425
281
281
281
275
189
C431
C432
C433
C434
C435
188
277
275
281
281
C441
C442
C443
C444
C445
281
275
277
188
275
C451
C452
C453
C454
C455
281
281
281
281
281
C461
C462
C463
C464
C465
281
187
187
277
275
C471
C472
C473
C474
C475
277
188
275
277
188
C416
C417
C418
C419
C420
275
281
275
187
187
C426
C427
C428
C429
C430
279
279
188
277
275
C436
C437
C438
C439
C440
281
281
281
281
281
C446
C447
C448
C449
C450
277
188
281
281
281
C456
C457
C458
C459
C460
281
281
281
281
281
C466
C467
C468
C469
C470
188
275
277
188
275
C476
C477
C478
C479
C480
281
281
281
281
281
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CONNECTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
C481
C482
C483
C484
C485
281
281
281
281
281
C491
C492
C493
C494
C495
281
188
173
281
175
C501
C502
C503
C504
C505
270
275
269
187
188
C511
C512
C513
C514
C515
188
188
189
281
281
C486
C487
C488
C489
C490
281
281
281
281
188
C496
C497
C498
C499
C500
281
281
270
270
281
C506
C507
C508
--C510
188
188
188
--172
C516
C517
C518
275
269
281
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CN101
CN102
CN103
--CN105
--CN107
CN108
CN109
-----
103
103
107
--107
--105
105
105
-----
DIODE
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
CN112
CN113
CN114
205
manuals4you.com
102
102
106
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
------D3
--D5
--D7
D8
D9
D10
------128
--127
--129
131
131
129
DIODE
FILTER
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
IC
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
D11
D12
D13
D14
---
128
128
130
128
---
FIL1
FIL2
FIL3
D16
D17
D18
D19
131
131
129
129
192
191
190
FUSE
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
FU1
111
JP
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
IC1
IC2
IC3
IC4
IC5
138
108
153
142
3
IC6
IC7
IC8
IC9
IC10
282
282
148
146
151
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
IC11
IC12
IC13
IC14
IC15
(Socket)
IC16
IC17
IC18
IC19
IC20
149
4
136
137
150
110
140
144
155
139
155
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
IC21
IC22
IC23
IC24
IC25
145
152
147
152
141
JP1
JP2
----JP5
204
204
----206
JP11
JP12
JP13
JP14
---
206
206
206
206
---
IC26
IC27
IC28
147
143
156
--JP7
--JP9
JP10
--206
--204
204
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
---
204
204
206
206
---
JP
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
JP21
JP22
JP23
--JP25
206
206
206
--206
JP31
------JP35
206
------206
JP41
----JP44
---
206
----206
---
----JP53
JP54
---
----206
206
---
--JP62
----JP65
--206
----206
JP71
JP72
JP73
JP74
JP75
206
206
206
206
206
--L2
L3
L4
L5
--197
196
194
193
JP26
JP27
JP28
JP29
---
206
206
204
204
---
JP36
JP37
JP38
JP39
JP40
206
206
206
206
206
-----------
-----------
JP56
JP57
JP58
JP59
JP60
206
206
206
206
206
JP66
JP67
JP68
JP69
JP70
206
206
206
206
206
--JP77
JP78
--206
206
L6
L7
L8
L9
L10
193
193
193
193
193
206
LED
L
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
OSC
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
193
193
195
199
--LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
--134
134
134
134
LED6
LED7
LED8
LED9
LED10
L11
L12
L13
L14
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
134
134
134
134
OSC1
OSC2
OSC3
161
159
160
135
134
134
134
134
Q1
----Q4
Q5
120
----121
124
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
120
119
118
121
120
Q21
Q22
Q23
Q24
Q25
120
118
118
120
120
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
LED11
LED12
LED13
LED14
123
123
121
120
118
Q16
Q17
Q18
--Q20
120
120
118
--118
Q26
Q27
Q28
Q29
Q30
120
120
120
120
120
RESISTOR
Q
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
Q31
Q32
Q33
Q34
Q35
120
120
120
120
120
Q41
Q42
----Q45
120
120
----120
Q51
Q52
Q53
Q54
Q55
118
118
118
118
118
Q61
Q62
Q63
Q64
Q65
120
120
120
120
123
R1
R2
R3
R4
---
211
211
248
211
---
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
211
248
248
248
248
R21
R22
R23
R24
R25
248
248
248
248
200
Q36
--Q38
--Q40
120
--120
--120
--Q47
--Q49
Q50
--118
--120
118
Q56
Q57
Q58
Q59
Q60
120
120
120
120
120
Q66
Q67
Q68
Q69
126
126
123
120
----R8
R9
R10
----211
211
240
R16
R17
R18
R19
R20
248
209
248
248
248
R26
R27
R28
R29
R30
211
261
231
226
242
207
manuals4you.com
RESISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R31
R32
R33
R34
R35
211
215
215
248
248
R41
--R43
R44
R45
248
--248
248
248
R51
R52
R53
-----
248
211
248
-----
R61
R62
R63
R64
R65
248
248
248
209
248
R71
--R73
--R75
248
--219
--211
R81
R82
R83
R84
R85
240
240
240
240
240
R91
R92
R93
R94
R95
240
264
264
264
240
R36
--R38
R39
---
248
--248
248
---
R46
R47
R48
R49
---
248
248
248
248
---
----R58
R59
R60
----248
248
201
R66
R67
R68
R69
R70
248
258
210
259
232
R76
R77
R78
R79
R80
230
230
230
230
230
R86
R87
R88
R89
R90
240
240
240
240
240
R96
R97
R98
R99
R100
240
240
240
264
264
RESISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R101
R102
R103
-----
240
240
235
-----
R111
R112
R113
R114
R115
211
211
211
211
211
R121
--R123
R124
R125
211
--209
230
209
R131
R132
R133
R134
R135
230
230
230
230
230
R141
R142
--R144
R145
230
248
--211
248
R151
R152
R153
R154
R155
248
211
230
211
211
R161
--R163
R164
---
248
--211
211
---
R106
R107
R108
R109
R110
240
215
211
211
211
R116
R117
R118
R119
R120
211
248
248
248
248
R126
R127
R128
R129
R130
230
230
230
230
230
R136
R137
R138
R139
R140
211
215
215
215
215
R146
R147
R148
R149
R150
248
211
248
248
248
R156
R157
R158
R159
---
209
240
240
211
---
--R167
R168
R169
R170
--248
248
248
248
208
RESISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R171
R172
R173
R174
R175
211
211
215
215
215
R181
R182
R183
R184
R185
211
211
215
215
215
--R192
R193
R194
R195
--211
230
240
240
--R202
R203
R204
R205
--223
223
208
211
R211
R212
R213
R214
R215
230
230
230
230
230
R221
R222
R223
R224
R225
251
251
249
249
249
R231
--R233
R234
---
211
--230
211
---
R176
R177
R178
R179
R180
215
215
215
240
240
R186
---------
215
---------
R196
R197
R198
R199
R200
247
248
248
248
248
R206
R207
--R209
R210
248
240
--209
230
R216
R217
R218
R219
R220
230
230
230
248
230
R226
R227
R228
R229
R230
249
249
249
249
249
R236
R237
R238
R239
R240
248
232
248
248
211
RESISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R241
R242
--R244
R245
254
254
--227
211
R251
R252
R253
R254
---
211
248
248
211
---
R261
R262
R263
R264
R265
253
253
211
210
209
R271
R272
R273
R274
R275
209
209
209
248
219
R281
R282
R283
R284
R285
263
263
263
209
209
R291
R292
R293
R294
R295
257
257
209
209
211
R301
R302
R303
R304
R305
263
263
225
225
225
R246
R247
R248
R249
R250
211
211
248
248
215
R256
R257
R258
R259
R260
211
211
211
211
253
R266
R267
R268
R269
R270
209
209
209
209
209
--R277
R278
R279
R280
--211
215
263
263
--R287
R288
R289
R290
--244
237
209
209
R296
R297
R298
R299
R300
211
211
211
256
256
R306
R307
R308
R309
R310
225
225
225
225
225
209
manuals4you.com
RESISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R311
R312
R313
R314
R315
225
248
248
209
248
R321
R322
R323
R324
R325
240
240
240
248
230
R331
R332
R333
R334
R335
211
211
209
211
209
R341
R342
R343
R344
R345
211
211
241
241
241
R351
R352
R353
R354
R355
263
263
263
211
263
R361
R362
R363
R364
R365
263
263
263
222
222
--R372
----R375
--210
----210
R316
R317
R318
R319
R320
240
240
240
219
210
R326
R327
R328
R329
R330
230
240
240
230
209
R336
R337
R338
R339
R340
211
241
241
241
241
R346
R347
R348
R349
R350
241
241
253
253
263
R356
R357
R358
R359
R360
211
244
263
263
263
R366
R367
R368
R369
R370
222
222
263
263
210
R376
R377
R378
R379
R380
248
248
230
240
240
RESISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R381
R382
R383
R384
R385
215
248
248
211
215
--R392
--R394
R395
--240
--248
248
R401
R402
R403
R404
R405
248
248
248
248
211
R411
R412
R413
R414
R415
248
211
230
211
230
R386
R387
R388
R389
R390
215
215
215
240
240
--R397
R398
R399
R400
--211
211
211
248
R406
R407
R408
R409
R410
248
213
211
211
211
R416
R417
R418
R419
R420
230
211
211
211
211
210
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R421
R422
R422
R423
R424
R425
211
238
211
211
211
211
R430
R431
R432
R433
R434
R435
248
211
211
211
248
225
R426
R427
--R429
248
250
--210
R436
R437
R438
---
225
225
225
---
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R440
R441
--R443
--R445
R446
R447
R448
--R450
248
248
--240
--215
215
248
215
--211
RESISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
----R453
R454
R455
----223
223
223
R461
R462
R463
R464
R465
211
230
230
248
248
R471
R472
R473
R474
R475
211
209
209
249
210
R481
R482
R483
R484
R485
233
232
217
220
220
R491
R492
R493
R494
R495
248
248
248
211
211
R501
R502
R503
R504
R505
215
215
215
215
211
R511
R512
R513
R514
R515
239
239
230
248
248
R456
R457
R458
R459
R460
223
248
211
223
223
R466
R467
R468
R469
R470
211
209
240
240
211
R476
R477
R478
R479
R480
210
249
210
212
248
R486
R487
R488
R489
R490
229
236
228
264
228
R496
R497
R498
R499
R500
211
224
216
218
218
R506
R507
R508
R509
R510
211
211
211
239
239
R516
R517
R518
R519
R520
248
248
230
230
230
RESISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R521
R522
R523
R524
R525
230
230
246
245
211
R531
R532
R533
R534
R535
215
215
218
218
240
R541
R542
R543
R544
R545
264
264
264
264
264
R551
R552
R553
R554
R555
264
264
264
240
240
R561
R562
R563
R564
R565
264
264
215
215
215
R571
R572
----R575
252
211
----223
R581
--R583
R584
R585
211
--211
211
211
R526
R527
R528
R529
R530
243
221
209
215
215
R536
R537
R538
R539
R540
240
240
230
230
264
R546
R547
R548
R549
R550
264
264
264
264
264
R556
R557
R558
R559
R560
240
240
240
240
264
R566
R567
R568
R569
R570
215
221
209
218
218
R576
----R579
R580
223
----211
211
R586
R587
R588
-----
211
211
211
-----
211
manuals4you.com
RESISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
REG
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
------R594
R595
------211
211
-----------
-----------
R611
R612
R613
R614
R615
241
241
241
241
241
R621
R622
R623
R624
R625
230
215
211
215
211
R631
R632
R633
R634
R635
261
231
223
248
211
--R597
R598
R599
R600
--211
211
248
211
R606
R607
R608
R609
R610
240
240
264
264
248
R616
R617
R618
R619
R620
230
230
230
230
230
R626
R627
R628
R629
R630
255
202
231
223
203
R636
R637
RN
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
--157
154
154
157
211
211
RN1
RN2
RN3
RN4
RN5
166
166
166
166
166
RN6
RN7
RN8
RN9
RN10
--REG2
REG3
REG4
REG5
166
166
166
165
165
RN
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RN11
RN12
RN13
RN14
RN15
165
165
165
165
165
RN21
RN22
RN23
RN24
RN25
165
165
165
165
165
RN31
RN32
RN33
RN34
RN35
163
163
163
165
165
RN41
RN42
RN43
RN44
RN45
166
166
166
165
165
RN51
RN52
RN53
RN54
RN55
165
166
166
166
166
RN61
RN62
RN63
RN64
RN65
165
165
165
166
166
RN71
RN72
RN73
RN74
RN75
165
165
165
165
165
RN16
RN17
RN18
RN19
RN20
165
165
165
165
165
RN26
RN27
RN28
RN29
RN30
165
165
165
165
165
RN36
RN37
RN38
RN39
RN40
163
163
163
163
166
RN46
RN47
RN48
RN49
RN50
165
165
165
165
165
RN56
RN57
RN58
RN59
RN60
166
166
166
166
165
RN66
RN67
RN68
RN69
RN70
166
166
165
165
165
RN76
RN77
RN78
RN79
RN80
165
165
164
164
164
212
RN
SWITCH
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
TB
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
RN81
RN82
RN83
RN84
RN85
164
164
164
164
164
RN91
RN92
RN93
RN94
RN95
164
164
164
164
164
RN101
RN102
RN103
RN104
RN105
164
164
164
164
164
RN111
RN112
RN113
RN114
RN115
165
165
165
165
165
------SW4
SW5
------115
113
RN86
RN87
RN88
RN89
RN90
164
164
164
164
164
RN96
RN97
RN98
RN99
RN100
164
164
164
164
164
RN106
RN107
RN108
RN109
RN110
164
164
164
164
164
RN116
RN117
RN118
165
165
165
SW6
SW7
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
TB1
TB1
114
112
213
manuals4you.com
101
109
CAPACITOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
DIODE
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
------C4
---
------168
---
C11
C12
C13
C14
---
185
180
185
280
---
C21
C22
C23
--C25
280
274
274
--280
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
186
274
266
266
274
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
168
276
266
272
272
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
170
170
178
280
181
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
186
280
186
274
266
C36
DA
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
D1
D2
133
133
(CORE:SUPPLY BOARD)
L
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
DA1
132
178
JP
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP4
JP5
JP7
205
205
205
205
205
205
REGISTOR
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
122
122
122
122
122
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
122
122
122
125
125
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
Q11
Q12
125
125
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
162
162
162
162
234
R6
R9
R7
R8
---
260
207
214
214
---
214
REG
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
214
214
214
214
262
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
REG1
158
SYMBOL INDEX
NO.
NO.
L1
L2
198
198

Index
No.
Part No.
Description
*
3
4
B140 5832
B070 5740
B140 5742
PCB Control Board Ass'y

ASIC:Bassoon
RAM:BIOS
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
1102 5944
1102 9164
1102 9185
1102 9187
1102 9336
1102 9337
1102 9686
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
1
1
1
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
1104 0589
1104 0683
1104 0803
1107 0862
1204 1385
1204 1541
1204 1542
1204 1543
1206 0085
1206 0086
1400 0730
1400 0743
1401 0902
1401 1203
1401 1214
1401 1220
1401 1221
1401 1222
1401 1235
1402 1265
1402 1336
1402 1343
1402 1365
1402 1530
1402 1660
1402 1661
1403 0987
1403 1100
1403 1101
1407 5181
1407 5197
1407 5275
1407 5321
1407 5327
1407 5366
Connector - 3P
Connector:6410-03A
Connector:DM-6D4-B2410
Connector:IMSA-9210B-2-60l-GF
Connector:FPS009-2300-0
Connector:14016PS-JUK-G-B-1
Connector - RHM-176P-SDK11-U1L1C
Description
DIP Socket - 32p
Socket
Fuse - TE5T 19396/5A
Push Switch
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
Lithium Cell:Cr2032
Dry Cell Holder:20H-1T
Transistor - 2SD1782K
Transistor - 2SB1198K
Fet:2SK1590
Fet:HAT1048R
Fet:HAT2064R
Fet:FDS6614A
Fet:FDS6961A
Fet:HAT2068R
Fet:HAT2071R
Diode - RB411D
Diode - 1SS355
Diode - RB106L-40
Diode-RB751V-40
Diode - RB520S-30
Diode:BA
Diode:MBRS3
LED SML-211UT
LED:SML-211YT
Thermo Sensor :LM87CIMT
CMOS Logic:TC7W53FU
IC - TC7SZ126FU
IC - 74LVC08A TSSOP
215
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
1407 5482
1407 5485
1407 5511
1407 5523
1407 5631
1407 5733
1407 5798
1407 5800
1407 5801
1407 5803
1407 6244
1408 1551
1408 1595
1408 1784
1408 1785
1408 1787
1503 0773
1503 0842
1503 0876
1600 1920
1601 7887
1601 7896
1601 7898
1601 7913
1604 4994
1604 5044
1604 5044
1604 5122
1604 5123
1604 5124
1604 5125
1604 5126
1604 5127
1604 5128
1605 0781
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
IC - SN74LVC07APW
IC - SN74VC574APW
IC - SN74LVC14APW
ROM - I2C SOP 3V
IC:SN74LVC86APW
IC:SN74ALVC244PW
Clock Generator:ICS9248AF-64
CPU:DHG0800AVS1B
Southbridge:AMD-766AC2
IC:SN74LV132APW
Northbridge:AMD-761AC2(B2)
Regulator:TA76431F
IC:PST9231N
IC:ML6554CU
IC:LTC1628CG
IC:LTC1709EG-7
Crystal Oscilator:32.768Khz:7pF
Oscillator - 14.31818MHZ
Crystal Oscilator:33.3Mhz
Resistor:0.003 :1%:3W
Resistor Array
Capacitor:1000uf:20%:2.5V
Capacitor:100uf:20%:16V
Capacitor - 5pF 50V
216
Part No.
1605 1081
1605 1124
1605 1132
1605 1154
1605 1161
1605 1165
1605 1167
1605 1176
1605 1181
1605 1282
1605 1295
1605 1306
1607 0524
1607 1014
1607 1027
1607 1430
1607 1431
1607 1432
1607 1433
1607 1434
1607 1435
1607 1468
1610 1639
1610 1640
1610 1683
1610 1685
1633 0000
1634 0000
1634 0000
1650 4105
1650 4106
1654 1000
1654 1001
1654 1002
1654 1003
Description
Capacitor - 10 F+80-20% 25V
Capacitor - 4.7F+80 -20% 10V
Capacitor- 1F10%16v
Ceramic Capacitor 0.47F+80-20%16V
Capacitor:22uf:+80-20%:10V
Capacitor:10uf:+80-20%:10V
Capacitor - BLM31B601SPB
Filter:HF30ACC321611
Inductor:NL252018-010J
Inductor:CDRH125-3R1NC
Inductor:CDRH124-3R9MC
Inductor:CDRH6D38-120NC
Inductor:CDEP149-1R0MC-H
Inductor:CDRH6D38-8R7NC
Resistor - 0.0331% 1/2W
Resistor - 0.011% 1/2W
Resistor - 0.0251% 1/2W
Resistor - 0.0061% 1W
Resistor - 0 1/10W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Resistor - 1M 5% 1/10W
Resistor - 10M5%1/10W
Resistor - 100 1% 1/10W
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
Part No.
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
1654 1004
1654 1009
1654 1009
1654 1100
1654 1102
1654 1200
1654 1201
1654 1212
1654 1500
1654 1501
1654 1502
1654 1620
1654 1801
1654 1802
1654 2000
1654 2001
1654 2002
1654 2209
1654 2402
1654 2432
1654 2700
1654 2701
1654 2879
1654 2942
1654 3010
1654 3300
1654 3301
1654 3309
1654 3901
1654 3902
1654 3929
1654 4029
1654 4129
1654 4539
1654 4700
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282

Resistor - 101% 1/10W
Resistor - 120 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 12.1K1% 1/10W
Resistor - 1501 %1/10W
Resistor - 1.5K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 15K1% 1/10W
Resistor - 1621% 1/10
Chip Resistor:24k:1%:1/10W
Resistor:24.3k:1%:1/10W
Resistor:270::1%:1/10W
Resistor - 28.71%1/10W
Chip Resistor:330:1%:1/10W
Resistor - 39.21% 1/10W
Resistor - 40.21% 1/10W
Resistor - 41.21% 1/10W
Resistor - 45.31% 1/10W
Part No.
1654 4701
1654 4709
1654 5100
1654 5109
1654 5111
1654 5600
1654 5601
1654 5602
1654 5609
1654 6049
1654 6200
1654 6801
1654 6981
1654 7502
1654 7503
1654 8200
1654 8201
1660 0100
1660 2101
1660 2101
1660 2150
1660 2221
1660 2331
1660 2390
1660 2471
1660 2680
1660 4102
1660 4102
1660 6103
1660 6103
1660 6223
1660 6473
1660 8104
1660 8104
1906 0045
Description
Resistor - 60.41% 1/10W
Ceramic Capacitor - 39pF 50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 22000pF +80 -20% 50V
Capacitor - 47000pF +80,-20% 50V
Flash Memory:MBM29LV650UE90TN
217
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
77.DECAL AND DOCUMENTS
218
219
manuals4you.com
220

Index
No.
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
11
12
13
13
14
15
16
16
17
18
19
20
20
20
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Part No.
A029 2984
A096 6677
B065 6878
A096 6678
B065 6879
A294 1378
AA00 0059
AA00 0550
AA00 1213
AA00 1394
AA00 2010
AA00 2246
AA00 2258
AA00 2259
AA00 2261
B065 1361
B065 1363
B065 1364
B065 1366
B065 1367
B065 1779
B065 1778
B065 2746
B065 3699
B065 4167
B065 4274
B065 4253
B065 4256
B065 4257
B065 4480
B065 4481
B065 4797
B065 4867
B065 6545
B065 6635
Description
Decal - Grip
Caution Decal - CHN
Decal - B2
Decal - Paper Level
Decal - Caution
Decal - Paper Size LT
Decal - Main Switch
Decal - Main Switch
Decal - Front Door
Decal - Scale (LT)
Decal - Scale (A4)
Decal - Paper Set
Decal - Fusing Knob
Decal - Cover
Decal - Exit
Decal - Positioning
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Index
No.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Part No.
36
37
38
39
39
40
40
40
41
41
41
42
43
B065 6636
B065 6637
B065 6846
B065 6877
B065 8490
B477 4311
B477 4331
B477 4352
B477 4351
B477 4362
B477 4361
B477 4381
B477 4391
B477 4431
G029 1982
AA00 0250
G564 6077
B477 4341
B477 4342
B477 4371
B065 7133
B065 7134
B070 1307
B064 6607
43
B064 7207
43
B064 6606
43
B064 6608
43
B064 6609
43
B064 7206
35
Description
X/X MB10
X/X MB10
Caution Decal - CIS
LD - Decal
Decal:Exposure Glass:5-Lang
Decal - Cleaning
Caution Decal - Paper Set
Operating Instructions - Copy NA English
(Model C1)
Operating Instructions - Main NA English
(Model C1)
Operating Instructions - Copy Chinese
(Model C2)
Operating Instructions - Copy Aa English
(Model C2)
Operating Instructions - Copy Taiwanese
(Model C2)
Operating Instructions - Main Chinese
(Model C2)
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Index
No.
Part No.
43
B064 7208
43
B064 7209
44
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
46
47
B065 3833
B065 3342
B065 3343
B065 3344
B065 3345
B065 3346
B065 3347
B065 3348
AA00 0542
B082 6403
Description
Operating Instructions - Main Aa English
(Model C2)
Operating Instructions - Main Taiwanese
(Model C2)
Decal - Laser Class 1 (EU)
Decal:Power Source:Off:EXP
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
221
Part No.
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
78.SPECIAL TOOLS
222
manuals4you.com
78.SPECIAL TOOLS (B064/B065/B163/B140/B141)

Index
No.
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
Part No.
A006 9104
A292 9500
VSST 9500
N803 6701
N803 1000
A257 9300
5203 9502
5203 9501
5442 9101
Description
Adjusting Scanner Pin (4pcs/set)
Test Chart - S5S (10 Pcs/set)
Test Chart - S5s- Df (10 Sheet/set)
Flash Memory Card-4MB
Case - Flash Memory Card
Grease - Barrierta S552R
Grease 501
Grease 501
Setting Powder
Qty Per
Assembly
Index
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
223
Part No.
Description
Qty Per
Assembly
Parts Index
manuals4you.com
PM Parts Index
Section Name
EXTERIOR 2
DF ORIGINAL FEED 2
DF ORIGINAL TRANSFER 4
PAPER FEED UNIT 1
PAPER FEED UNIT 2

PAPER REGISTRATION 2
PAPER REGISTRATION 1
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1
PCU 1
PCU 2
PCU 3
PCU 4
TRANSFER BELT UNIT 1
TRANSFER BELT UNIT 2
FUSING UNIT 1
Part No.
Description in Service Manual
AA01 0114
B477 2225
A806 1295
A859 2241
AF03 1065
AF03 1082
AF03 0051
AF03 0081
AF03 2050
AF03 2080
AF03 1066
AF03 1083
Ozone Filter (TOP)

Pick-up Roller
Paper Feed Belt
Separation Roller
Feed Roller
Feed Roller
Pick-up Roller
Pick-up Roller
Separation Roller
Separation Roller
Paper Feed Rollers
Paper Feed Rollers
AF03 0050
AF03 0080
B065 3161
AA01 2060
A096 2063
AD02 0053
B070 2364
A096 2057
AA01 2060
AD04 2038
AD04 1083
A293 3899
B065 3947
AD04 1076
AE03 1026
B140 4191
AE04 0038
Pick-up Roller
Pick-up Roller
Development Filter
Charge Wire Cleaning Pad
Charge Corona Wire
Charge Corona Wire
Charge Corona Grid
Development Filter
Cleaning Brush
Cleaning Blade
Transfer Belt
Discharge Plate
Cleaning Web Pressure Roller
B140 4182
AE04 5046
B140 4181
Cleaning Web
Cleaning Web
226
Description in Parts Catalog

Front Ozone Filter
Pick-up Roller
Feed Belt
Reverse Roller
(Model C2)
Development Filter
Corona Wire Cleaner
Charge Corona Wire (Model C1)
Charge Corona Wire (Model C2)
Charge Corona Grid
Development Filter
Cleaning Brush
Cleaning Blade
Anti-static Plate
(Model C1)
Pressure Roller:Cleaning Felt
(Model C2)
Qty Per
Assembly
Page and
Index No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
17
25
25
33
63
63
63
63
65
65
69
69
23
6
22
10
3
3
1
1
36
15
11
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
69
69
77
79
83
83
83
83
85
87
89
91
91
93
95
95
95
17
17
1
17
7
19
19
28
97
7
8
5
21
1
9
9
14
95 - 14
1
1
95 - 16
95 - 16
Section Name
FUSING UNIT 1
Part No.
Description in Service Manual
FUSING UNIT 3 (Model C2)

Bushing
B140 4192
FUSING UNIT 2
FUSING UNIT 2
B065 4210
Bushing
AE04 4043
AE04 4060
AE03 0017
AE01 1087
AE03 0018
AE02 0112
AE01 1095
AE03 0054
AE02 0145
AE03 0053
AW10 0096
AW10 0052
AE03 1024
AE04 2052
AE03 1026
AE04 2066
AE04 2052

Hot Roller Bearing
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller Bearing
Pressure Roller
Hot Roller
Ball Bearing
Pressuer Roller
Ball Bearing
Thermistor
Thermistor
Pressure Cleaning Roller Bearings
Bushing
Cleaning Roller
Description in Parts Catalog

Rear Bushing - Oil Supply Bushing
(Model C1)
Inner Back:Oil Supply Bushing
(Model C2)
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
Hot Roller - Mm40
Pressuer Roller - Mm40
Thermistor - Center
Bushing - M4x7
Cleaning Roller
Cleaning Roller
227
manuals4you.com
Qty Per
Assembly
Page and
Index No.
95 - 40
95 - 40
5
5
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
97 - 27
97 - 27
99 - 2
99 - 23
99 - 26
99 - 27
101- 1
101- 2
101- 7
101- 8
101- 19
101- 20
103- 9
103- 10
105- 8
105- 10
103- 10
Parts Index
Part No.
B064 5855
B064 6606
B064 6607
B064 6608
B064 6609
B064 7012
B064 7015
B064 7016
B064 7017
B064 7018
B064 7019
B064 7206
B064 7207
B064 7208
B064 7209
B064 9099
B064 9510
B065 1070
B065 1075
B065 1077
B065 1078
B065 1084
B065 1091
B065 1092
B065 1093
B065 1094
B065 1095
B065 1096
B065 1098
B065 1110
B065 1122
B065 1131
B065 1134
B065 1137
B065 1140
Description
PCB Cover (Model C1)
Operating Instructions - Copy Chinese
Operating Instructions - Copy NA English
Operating Instructions - Copy Aa English
Operating Instructions - Copy Taiwanese
Operating Instructions - Main Chinese
Operating Instructions - Main NA English
Operating Instructions - Main Aa English
Operating Instructions - Main Taiwanese
X/X MB51
Upper Front Stay
Base Cover
Right Stay
Left Stay
Positioning Plate
Left Duct - PCU
Bracket
ADF Bracket
Duct Clip
Heat Insulation
Front Transfer Stay
Left Rail
Main Motor (Model C1)
Tightener Bracket
Joint
Partition Plate
Bracket
Drum Shaft
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
129 - 4
221 - 43
221 - 43
221 - 43
221 - 43
15 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 12
221 - 43
221 - 43
221 - 43
221 - 43
131 - 33
85 - 25
43 - 15
149 - 22
145 - 19
149 - 23
125 - 20
147 - 19
149 - 13
43 - 14
147 - 18
147 - 20
147 - 3
147 - 22
125 - 19
125 - 18
125 - 28
125 - 11
125 - 8
125 - 9
B065 1145
B065 1147
B065 1149
B065 1154
B065 1157
B065 1160
B065 1162
B065 1164
B065 1166
B065 1167
B065 1168
B065 1171
B065 1172
B065 1173
B065 1175
B065 1177
B065 1178
B065 1180
B065 1183
B065 1184
B065 1185
B065 1188
B065 1192
B065 1193
B065 1194
B065 1197
B065 1198
B065 1200
B065 1237
B065 1243
B065 1244
B065 1301
B065 1302
B065 1303
B065 1304
228
Description
Boss
Transfer Drive Bracket
Transfer Drive Joint
Electrode Plate
Toner Recycling Bracket (Model C1)
Toner Recycling Tightener
Fusing Motor Bracket
Tightener
Duplex Drive Shaft
Duplex Drive Joint
Fusing Drive Bracket
Development Fan Bracket
Development Fan Harness
Ips Duct
Entrance IPS Duct
Upper Ips Duct
Fan Bracket - IPS
PCU Duct
Fan Bracket
Entrance PCU Duct
Duct - Charge
Duct - Fusing
Upper Exhaust Duct
Lower Exhaust Duct
Exhaust Bracket
Magnet Catch Bracket
Duplex Fan Harness
Bracket:Fan:Duplex
Exhaust Cover Duct
Operation Panel Inner Cover
Upper Left Cover
Front Door
Upper Right Cover
LCT Cover
Upper Left Cover (Model C1)
Page and
Index No.
125 - 12
125 - 25
125 - 26
125 - 6
123 - 15
123 - 17
123 - 22
123 - 20
123 - 26
123 - 27
123 - 11
45 - 9
45 - 18
145 - 24
137 - 4
137 - 7
137 - 2
139 - 11
139 - 2
139 - 3
145 - 10
145 - 7
137 - 9
137 - 10
137 - 8
149 - 8
149 - 18
149 - 20
17 - 25
17 - 20
17 - 27
15 - 6
17 - 28
17 - 30
17 - 9
Part No.
B065 1305
B065 1308
B065 1309
B065 1310
B065 1311
B065 1312
B065 1313
B065 1314
B065 1315
B065 1316
B065 1318
B065 1320
B065 1323
B065 1325
B065 1326
B065 1327
B065 1328
B065 1329
B065 1332
B065 1333
B065 1334
B065 1341
B065 1342
B065 1343
B065 1344
B065 1345
B065 1361
B065 1361
B065 1363
B065 1363
B065 1364
B065 1364
B065 1366
B065 1366
B065 1367
Description
Upper Rear Cover (Model C1)
Lower Rear Cover (Model C1)
Upper Rear Cover
Upper Right Cover
Upper Left Cover
Operation Inner Cover
PCU Inner Cover
Lower Right Inner Cover
Inner Cover - Main Switch
Fusing Inner Cover
PCU Duct Inner Cover
Receiving Tray - Operation Panel
Guide Plate Lever
Main Switch Cover
Micro Switchlever
Door Catch
Upper Hinge Guide Plate
Upper Right Door Seal
Louver
Lower Right Cover
Lower Left Cover
Connector Cap
Coupling Cap
NCU Cap
G4 Cap
Fan Bracket
Decal - Misfeed Removal (Model C1)
Decal - Main Switch
Decal - Main Switch (NA/ASIA/KOR)
Decal - Main Switch (EU/CHN/TWN)
Decal - Main Switch
Decal - Front Door
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
17 - 21
17 - 26
17 - 16
17 - 31
17 - 10
17 - 13
15 - 17
15 - 23
15 - 14
15 - 15
15 - 19
145 - 4
15 - 10
15 - 8
15 - 11
15 - 7
145 - 16
15 - 3
17 - 19
17 - 32
17 - 6
17 - 33
17 - 34
17 - 29
17 - 8
17 - 15
221 - 12
15 - 2
221 - 13
15 - 13
15 - 13
221 - 13
15 - 5
221 - 14
15 - 22
B065 1367
B065 1371
B065 1374
B065 1404
B065 1406
B065 1408
B065 1414
B065 1416
B065 1418
B065 1422
B065 1423
B065 1425
B065 1427
B065 1439
B065 1440
B065 1441
B065 1442
B065 1443
B065 1444
B065 1446
B065 1447
B065 1448
B065 1451
B065 1454
B065 1455
B065 1456
B065 1457
B065 1458
B065 1459
B065 1460
B065 1461
B065 1462
B065 1463
B065 1470
B065 1682
Description
Decal - Front Door
Cloth Holder
Operation Panel Ass'y - LT (Model C1)
Operation Panel Ass'y - A4 (Model C1 EU)
Operation Panel A'ssy - A4
Right Operation PCB Ass'y (Model C1)
Left Operation PCB (Model C1)
Operation Panel Case - LT
Operation Panel Case - A4
Keytop - Reset Switch
Keytop - 10key
Keytop - Start
Keytop - Clear/Stop
Keytop - Sample Print
Keytop - Power Source
Keytop - Function
Keytop - Counter
Cap - Application
Lens - Application
Sheet - Right Operation
Sheet - Power Source
Sheet - Left Operation
Sheet - Touch Panel
LCD Long Sheet
LCD Short Sheet
Keytop - Application - LT
Keytop - Display - LT
Keytop - Application - A4
Keytop - Display - A4
LCDC Bracket
Front Frame
229
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
221 - 15
27 - 28
27 - 29
19 - 1
19 - 1
19 - 1
19 - 1
19 - 1
19 - 1
19 - 12
19 - 5
19 - 26
19 - 26
19 - 16
19 - 4
19 - 21
19 - 22
19 - 20
19 - 18
19 - 17
19 - 15
19 - 2
19 - 25
19 - 11
19 - 19
19 - 3
19 - 14
19 - 10
19 - 9
19 - 23
19 - 24
19 - 23
19 - 24
19 - 7
49 - 27
Part No.
B065 1685
B065 1688
B065 1698
B065 1706
B065 1708
B065 1711
B065 1712
B065 1713
B065 1717
B065 1718
B065 1721
B065 1731
B065 1732
B065 1733
B065 1734
B065 1735
B065 1736
B065 1737
B065 1738
B065 1740
B065 1741
B065 1742
B065 1743
B065 1751
B065 1753
B065 1766
B065 1772
B065 1773
B065 1775
B065 1776
B065 1778
B065 1778
B065 1779
B065 1779
B065 1782
Description
Rear Frame
Lens Holder Block
Development Cooling Duct
Bracket - Scanner Motor
Stepper Motor
Drive Shaft
Front Wire Tension Bracket
Rear Wire Tension Bracket
Timing Belt
Screw - M4X8
Image Scanning Board
1st Scanner Unit (Model C1)
1st Scanner Frame
1st Scanner Front Side Plate
1st Scanner Rear Side Plate
Reflector
Invertor Cover
Clamp
Spring Plate
Harness Plate
Harness Guide
Insulator
1st Mirror
2nd Scanner Unit
Adjusting Plate
Seconf Mirror
Left Scale
Scale Bracket Seal
Sheet Through Scale (LT)
Sheet Through Scale (A4)
Decal - Scale (A4)
Decal - Scale (A4)
Decal - Scale (LT)
Decal - Scale (LT)
Seal
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
49 - 8
49 - 23
45 - 11
49 - 14
49 - 16
49 - 24
49 - 26
49 - 6
49 - 20
49 - 19
45 - 6
47 - 25
47 - 19
47 - 14
47 - 17
47 - 11
47 - 12
47 - 15
47 - 20
47 - 16
47 - 13
47 - 24
47 - 18
47 - 8
47 - 7
47 - 6
43 - 7
43 - 23
43 - 10
43 - 10
43 - 11
221 - 16
43 - 11
221 - 16
43 - 4
B065 1784
B065 1785
B065 1787
B065 1788
B065 1791
B065 1798
B065 1801
B065 1825
B065 1830
B065 1831
B065 1833
B065 1834
B065 1841
B065 1843
B065 1843
B065 1844
B065 1845
B065 1859
B065 1912
B065 1915
B065 1925
B065 1926
B065 1930
B065 1932
B065 1940
B065 1944
B065 1945
B065 1946
B065 1950
B065 1951
B065 1952
B065 1953
B065 1955
B065 1957
B065 2270
230
Description
Ground Plate
Right Stay
Scale Bracket
Printing Rear Scale
Left Scanner Duct
Filter:Duct:Scanner
Right Scanner Duct
H.P. Sensor Bracket
Scanner Board Guide
Scanner Board Bracket
Harness Bracket
Insulating Sheet
Inner Cover
Grounding Plate
Grounding Plate
Grounding Plate
Grounding Plate
LD Unit
Lens Holder - L0
1st Mirror Holder
Lens Holder - L2 Right
Lens Holder - L2 Left
2nd Mirror Holder
Middle Mirror Holder
Shield Glass Rail
Shield Glass Holder
Seal - Shield Glass
Seal - Shield Glass Holder
Seal - 1
Seal - 2
Seal - 3
Seal - 4
Seal - Lens L1
Shield Glass Cover
Upper PCU Ass'y
Page and
Index No.
43 - 5
43 - 16
43 - 3
43 - 19
45 - 4
45 - 3
45 - 5
49 - 11
49 - 3
49 - 4
45 - 10
45 - 19
43 - 17
43 - 22
133 - 23
145 - 26
145 - 25
51 - 6
51 - 8
51 - 11
51 - 17
51 - 18
51 - 20
51 - 21
51 - 27
51 - 25
51 - 26
51 - 24
51 - 7
51 - 3
51 - 15
51 - 23
51 - 14
85 - 26
85 - 8
Part No.
B065 2300
B065 2314
B065 2316
B065 2317
B065 2336
B065 2337
B065 2342
B065 2344
B065 2347
B065 2353
B065 2358
B065 2361
B065 2362
B065 2364
B065 2366
B065 2369
B065 2371
B065 2377
B065 2381
B065 2386
B065 2389
B065 2391
B065 2392
B065 2399
B065 2400
B065 2401
B065 2406
B065 2410
B065 2413
B065 2421
B065 2425
B065 2426
B065 2427
B065 2428
B065 2481
Description
Lower PCU Casing
Blade Bracket
Front Blade Seal
Rear Blade Seal
Pickoff Pawl:Drum:Ass'y (Model C2)
Pick-off Pawl Holder
Pick-off Pawl Shaft
Pick-off Pawl Bracket
X/X MB51
Blade Bracket
Bracket Grounding Bracket
Pick-off Pawl Positioning Plate
Front Shaft
Grounding Plate - Entrance Seal
Drum Stay
Toner Recycling Connecting Shaft
Grounding Plate
Middle PCU Casing
Shaft Bracket
Upper PCU Casing
Receptacle
Joint - Toner Separation
Toner Recycling Joint
Drum Shaft Knob
Entrance Transfer Stay (Model C1)
X/X MB51
Brush Roller Gear
Pressure Release Lever
Cam - Blade
Agitator Gear
Grid Receptacle Terminal
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
87 - 15
89 - 12
89 - 11
89 - 13
89 - 33
89 - 6
89 - 17
89 - 26
87 - 7
87 - 16
89 - 32
89 - 23
89 - 24
89 - 22
87 - 8
89 - 29
85 - 16
85 - 14
89 - 25
89 - 15
89 - 16
85 - 2
85 - 7
85 - 22
85 - 20
85 - 21
85 - 23
83 - 1
87 - 19
87 - 2
87 - 5
85 - 10
87 - 22
87 - 4
125 - 2
B065 2482
B065 2494
B065 2495
B065 2496
B065 2600
B065 2605
B065 2607
B065 2608
B065 2613
B065 2614
B065 2617
B065 2620
B065 2621
B065 2623
B065 2627
B065 2647
B065 2660
B065 2662
B065 2665
B065 2671
B065 2673
B065 2675
B065 2682
B065 2688
B065 2690
B065 2699
B065 2701
B065 2707
B065 2708
B065 2709
B065 2713
B065 2714
B065 2721
B065 2729
B065 2730
Description
Charge Receptacle Terminal
Upper PCU Harness
Lower PCU Harness (Model C1)
PCU Connecting Harness (Model C1)
Rear Paper Feed Side Plate
Front Paper Feed Side Plate
Front Support Plate
Development Connector Bracket
X/X MB32
Front Upper Guide Plate (Model C1)
X/X MB32
Paper Dust Removal Case
Sensor Bracket
Registration Guide Plate (Model C1)
Paper Feed Cover (Model C1)
Relay Guide Plate (Model C1)
Duplex Exit Guide Plate (Model C1)
LCT Guide Plate (Model C1)
Paper Feed Stay
Pick-up Roller Arm
Pick-up Roller Solenoid
Separation Roller Stay
Lower Guide Plate - By-pass (Model C1)
Middle Sensor Bracket
Reverse Pressure Lever
X/X MB68
Paper Feed Guide Plate - By-pass
Paper End Feeler
By-pass Table
231
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
125 - 3
85 - 3
89 - 20
147 - 21
73 - 35
73 - 34
73 - 33
69 - 6
71 - 6
69 - 7
71 - 5
69 - 4
69 - 3
71 - 6
71 - 5
73 - 9
61 - 5
61 - 6
73 - 20
73 - 15
73 - 26
73 - 23
69 - 9
69 - 15
69 - 20
71 - 18
71 - 8
71 - 24
71 - 23
71 - 27
71 - 12
71 - 17
61 - 4
61 - 3
61 - 8
Part No.
B065 2732
B065 2733
B065 2735
B065 2737
B065 2738
B065 2740
B065 2741
B065 2743
B065 2746
B065 2746
B065 2752
B065 2754
B065 2761
B065 2762
B065 2762
B065 2762
B065 2763
B065 3060
B065 3062
B065 3065
B065 3069
B065 3071
B065 3073
B065 3076
B065 3077
B065 3079
B065 3080
B065 3081
B065 3082
B065 3095
B065 3096
B065 3098
B065 3108
B065 3110
B065 3111
Description
Manual Feed Table
By-pass Table Cover
Rear Side Fence - By-pass
Front Side Fence - By-pass
Front Support Stay - By-pass
Rear Support Stay - By-pass
Sensor Bracket
Front Shaft - By-pass
Decal - Paper Set
Decal - Paper Set
Motor Bracket
Tightener Bracket
By-pass Harness
Relay Registration Harness
Lower Development Casing
Development Roller
Toner Sensor Guide
Bushing - 8mm
Development Knob
Gear - 31Z
Gear - 41Z
Development Roller Adjuster
Ball Bearing Bracket
Gear - 21Z
Development Bias Plate
Development Guide Rail
Gear - 20Z
Gear - 17Z
Filter Plate
X/X MB11
Toner Supply Unit
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
61 - 13
61 - 19
61 - 12
61 - 10
61 - 14
61 - 15
61 - 16
61 - 1
61 - 9
221 - 17
71 - 28
73 - 31
73 - 27
73 - 21
127 - 32
121 - 2
69 - 1
81 - 7
81 - 1
79 - 9
81 - 3
79 - 7
79 - 12
79 - 8
81 - 4
79 - 16
81 - 2
79 - 15
79 - 5
79 - 2
79 - 14
79 - 11
79 - 19
77 - 18
77 - 18
B065 3120
B065 3121
B065 3122
B065 3123
B065 3125
B065 3138
B065 3139
B065 3140
B065 3141
B065 3142
B065 3143
B065 3146
B065 3151
B065 3152
B065 3153
B065 3161
B065 3251
B065 3252
B065 3258
B065 3262
B065 3266
B065 3267
B065 3271
B065 3273
B065 3301
B065 3304
B065 3306
B065 3307
B065 3309
B065 3311
B065 3316
B065 3342
B065 3342
B065 3342
B065 3343
232
Description
Right Upper Case Seal
Left Upper Case Seal
Toner Separation Joint Seal
Rear Toner Separation Joint Seal
Toner Separation Drive Shaft
Idle Gear
Upper Cover
Exit Toner Pile
Toner Separation Spring
Nut
Lower Right Case Seal
Lower Front Case Seal - Rear
Lower Filter Case Filter
Development Unit Rail
Right Rail - Drum Unit
Development Drum Stay
Electrode Plate
Toner Bottle Cam
Inner Back Cam
Lower Stay
Upper Stay
Drive Bottle
Bottle Holder
Gear:Toner Bottle:Ass'y
Toner Bottle Gear
Toner Bottle Drive Bracket
Toner Bottle Turn Bracket
Hinge Bracket
Page and
Index No.
77 - 6
77 - 29
77 - 2
77 - 3
77 - 4
77 - 9
77 - 10
77 - 19
77 - 20
77 - 22
77 - 21
77 - 14
77 - 17
77 - 15
77 - 16
77 - 1
147 - 5
147 - 9
83 - 2
125 - 7
145 - 15
145 - 14
75 - 31
75 - 28
75 - 39
75 - 14
75 - 42
75 - 16
75 - 2
75 - 6
75 - 29
15 - 35
75 - 41
221 - 45
221 - 45
Part No.
B065 3343
B065 3344
B065 3344
B065 3345
B065 3345
B065 3345
B065 3346
B065 3346
B065 3346
B065 3347
B065 3347
B065 3347
B065 3348
B065 3348
B065 3348
B065 3551
B065 3552
B065 3554
B065 3557
B065 3559
B065 3561
B065 3565
B065 3566
B065 3568
B065 3570
B065 3573
B065 3581
B065 3583
B065 3585
B065 3586
B065 3587
B065 3588
B065 3590
B065 3593
B065 3601
Description
X/X MB11
Toner Outlet Sub-unit:Transfer:Ass'y
Toner Collection Ass'y - Transfer
Toner Catchpan
Base
Spring
Toner Collection Case
Toner Receiving Spring
Case Cap
Toner Transport Coil
Toner Collection Agitator
Bushing
Spring Guide
Screw Gear
Screw Gear
Toner Collection Idle Gear
Toner Collection Discharge Harness
Toner Collection Pipe
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
75 - 41
221 - 45
75 - 41
15 - 35
75 - 41
221 - 45
75 - 41
15 - 35
221 - 45
221 - 45
15 - 35
75 - 41
221 - 45
15 - 35
75 - 41
127 - 37
127 - 23
127 - 37
127 - 6
127 - 21
127 - 13
127 - 3
127 - 5
127 - 1
127 - 16
127 - 2
127 - 15
127 - 17
127 - 11
127 - 18
127 - 14
127 - 8
127 - 9
127 - 22
127 - 26
B065 3604
B065 3609
B065 3610
B065 3629
B065 3633
B065 3636
B065 3637
B065 3638
B065 3645
B065 3649
B065 3650
B065 3652
B065 3654
B065 3656
B065 3660
B065 3670
B065 3681
B065 3689
B065 3695
B065 3699
B065 3699
B065 3710
B065 3720
B065 3811
B065 3812
B065 3815
B065 3818
B065 3820
B065 3827
B065 3831
B065 3832
B065 3833
B065 3833
B065 3837
B065 3838
Description
Toner Separation Shaft
Toner Separation Shaft - Long
Transport Screw
Seal - 40x68
X/X MB11
Gear - 22Z
Toner Collection Case - Transport
Toner Collection Joint
Shield Plate
Toner Collection Cap
Toner Collection Seal - Transport
Pulley
Transport Screw
Toner Collection Bottle
Toner Collection Bottle Bracket
Bottle Guide
X/X MB11
Transport Collection Coil - Exit
Transfer Unit Stay
Transfer Rely Harness
Front Middle Channel
Transfer Unit Guide Plate
Positioning Plate - Transfer Unit
Handle Stay
Release Positioning Plate
Transfer Unit Lever
Heater Holder
Heat Insulation Heater
233
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
127 - 38
127 - 7
127 - 35
127 - 39
127 - 43
127 - 40
127 - 42
127 - 33
127 - 41
127 - 29
127 - 30
127 - 28
127 - 25
127 - 24
127 - 27
127 - 33
17 - 3
17 - 1
141 - 9
221 - 18
15 - 16
77 - 7
77 - 7
147 - 15
147 - 16
147 - 23
91 - 1
147 - 24
147 - 11
147 - 25
147 - 1
147 - 26
221 - 44
147 - 13
147 - 14
Part No.
B065 3850
B065 3865
B065 3866
B065 3868
B065 3870
B065 3872
B065 3873
B065 3874
B065 3875
B065 3876
B065 3878
B065 3906
B065 3911
B065 3914
B065 3918
B065 3920
B065 3921
B065 3922
B065 3928
B065 3942
B065 3945
B065 3947
B065 3950
B065 3955
B065 3961
B065 3962
B065 3963
B065 3964
B065 3965
B065 3966
B065 3976
B065 4016
B065 4021
B065 4029
B065 4074
Description
Transfer Unit (Model C1)
Transfer Belt Frame
Drive Roller
Pressure Arm
Bias Roller
Transfer Unit Joint
Electrode Plate
Terminal
Bias Electrode Plate
Bias Terminal
Transfer Unit Casing
Toner Collection Coil - Transfer
Transfer Agitator
Toner Collection Gear Coil
Idle Gear - 1
Idle Gear - 2
Electrode Plate Cover
Cleaning Roller Terminal
Guide Plate
Anti-static Plate
Grounding Bracket
Shaft
Spring Plate
Lever
Bushing
Lever Shaft
Solenoid
Transfer Harness
Fusing Unit (TWN) (Model C1)
Exit Switch
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
91 - *
91 - 14
91 - 6
91 - 12
91 - 9
91 - 8
91 - 2
91 - 11
91 - 10
91 - 15
91 - 16
93 - 21
93 - 10
93 - 13
93 - 15
93 - 19
93 - 20
93 - 18
93 - 16
91 - 20
91 - 22
91 - 21
91 - 17
93 - 25
93 - 6
93 - 2
93 - 4
93 - 5
93 - 3
93 - 28
93 - 27
97 - 1
97 - 1
97 - 1
105 - 14
B065 4101
B065 4105
B065 4112
B065 4114
B065 4114
B065 4116
B065 4121
B065 4124
B065 4127
B065 4129
B065 4129
B065 4130
B065 4131
B065 4132
B065 4133
B065 4135
B065 4138
B065 4139
B065 4139
B065 4140
B065 4141
B065 4141
B065 4142
B065 4145
B065 4145
B065 4147
B065 4147
B065 4150
B065 4151
B065 4151
B065 4154
B065 4155
B065 4156
B065 4157
B065 4159
234
Description
Front Side Plate
Rear Side Plate
Right Stay
Left Stay
Left Stay
Thermostat Terminal
Front Heater Holder
Thermostat Housing
Side Plate Sheet
Sheet:Fiber:Side Plate
Thermostat Housing - Middle
Rear Thermistor Bracket
Middle Thermistor Cover
Lower Fusing Entrance Plate - 120V (Model C1)
Lower Fusing Entrance Plate - 230V (Model C1)
Side Plate Cover
Switch Holder
Switch Holder
Lower Guide Plate - Exit
Upper Fusing Stay
Front Release Lever
Front Release Lever
Rear Release Lever
Rear Release Lever
Front Harness
Rear Harness
Rear Harness
Rear Fusing Plate
Connector Bracket
Harness Holder
Page and
Index No.
103 - 5
103 - 20
103 - 19
105 - 18
103 - 18
97 - 3
99 - 13
99 - 3
99 - 9
97 - 29
105 - 25
99 - 7
99 - 16
99 - 5
97 - 2
97 - 2
97 - 4
105 - 35
103 - 14
103 - 17
105 - 13
103 - 13
99 - 8
103 - 2
105 - 2
103 - 24
105 - 24
99 - 12
101 - 14
99 - 14
107 - 31
99 - 20
99 - 20
99 - 19
99 - 18
Part No.
B065 4160
B065 4161
B065 4164
B065 4167
B065 4167
B065 4168
B065 4170
B065 4175
B065 4176
B065 4177
B065 4178
B065 4179
B065 4180
B065 4184
B065 4185
B065 4185
B065 4188
B065 4189
B065 4200
B065 4202
B065 4207
B065 4209
B065 4210
B065 4211
B065 4212
B065 4217
B065 4219
B065 4221
B065 4222
B065 4223
B065 4225
B065 4226
B065 4231
B065 4232
B065 4234
Description
Cleaning Roller Guide Plate
Left Support Bracket
Right Support Bracket
Decal - Fusing Knob
Decal - Fusing Knob
Fusing Positioning Plate
Rear Heater Holder
Front Fusing Grip (Model C1)
Grip Sheet
Front Pressure Lever
Rear Pressure Lever
Stripper Pawls Plate
Spacer - 16mm
Stripper Pawls Grip
Exit Plate
Exit Plate
Front Lock Pawl
Rear Lock Pawl
Web Unit (Model C1)
Web Bracket
Web Shaft
X/O MB68
Rear Bushing - Oil Supply Roller (Model C1)
Pressure Roller Gear
X/X MB29
Web Bracket (Model C1)
Web End Feeler (Model C1)
Feeler Spring
Gear - 37Z
Motor Gear
Motor Plate Bracket
Drive Bracket (Model C1)
Web Cover
Feeler Guard Bracket
Stopper Gear
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
103 - 12
103 - 11
103 - 8
221 - 19
95 - 5
149 - 16
99 - 17
97 - 5
97 - 6
103 - 3
103 - 23
149 - 15
99 - 25
97 - 17
97 - 9
101 - 31
97 - 16
97 - 21
95 - 7
95 - 15
95 - 8
95 - 11
95 - 40
95 - 12
95 - 11
95 - 13
95 - 38
95 - 37
95 - 20
95 - 30
95 - 28
95 - 25
95 - 26
95 - 23
95 - 35
B065 4235
B065 4238
B065 4239
B065 4241
B065 4242
B065 4244
B065 4246
B065 4247
B065 4248
B065 4249
B065 4251
B065 4252
B065 4253
B065 4253
B065 4254
B065 4255
B065 4256
B065 4256
B065 4257
B065 4257
B065 4258
B065 4259
B065 4260
B065 4262
B065 4263
B065 4266
B065 4268
B065 4273
B065 4274
B065 4274
B065 4276
B065 4300
B065 4304
B065 4306
B065 4307
Description
Web Idle Gear
Gear - 50Z
Web Drive Shaft
Gear
Rolling Drive Gear
Gear - 23Z
Spring Plate (Model C1)
Brake Pad
Web Harness
Right Exit Stay
Positioning Plate - Web Unit
Left Exit Tray
Insulator
Fusing Grip
Lock Lever
Lever Shaft
Lock Lever Bracket
Lock Lever Shaft Bracket
Lever Contact Bracket
Fusing Inner Cover
Exit Grip Cover
Decal:D1/E1:Multi
Exhaust Cover (Model C1)
Left Plate Guide (Model C1)
Front Exhaust Side Plate
Rear Exhaust Side Plate
235
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
95 - 33
95 - 32
95 - 18
95 - 21
95 - 17
95 - 31
95 - 24
95 - 22
95 - 34
111 - 12
95 - 39
111 - 2
221 - 20
95 - 2
109 - 15
95 - 1
95 - 2
221 - 20
95 - 2
221 - 20
107 - 1
107 - 4
107 - 3
107 - 2
149 - 7
107 - 6
95 - 4
107 - 8
95 - 2
221 - 20
15 - 36
149 - 3
149 - 6
149 - 4
149 - 24
Part No.
B065 4308
B065 4315
B065 4317
B065 4319
B065 4354
B065 4358
B065 4359
B065 4360
B065 4361
B065 4363
B065 4373
B065 4374
B065 4378
B065 4381
B065 4390
B065 4397
B065 4398
B065 4400
B065 4413
B065 4415
B065 4421
B065 4422
B065 4424
B065 4429
B065 4433
B065 4441
B065 4453
B065 4458
B065 4459
B065 4460
B065 4470
B065 4480
B065 4480
B065 4481
B065 4481
Description
Left Release Guide Plate (Model C1)
Exit Tightener
Idle Pulley - 11mm
Grip Supporter
Spring Plate
Grip Shaft
Upper Grip
Exit Entrance Sensor Bracket
Driven Decura Roller
Contact Point Shaft
Fusing Exitguide Plate (Model C1)
Release Slider
Slider Cover
Bracket
Exit Gate Pawl
Gate Pawl Solenoid
Pressure Shaft
Guide Plate Lever
Exit Arm Pad
Exit Front Side Plate
Exit Rear Side Plate
Exit Drum Stay
Middle Exit Guide Plate
Rear Harness Bracket
Front Harness Bracket
Support Bracket (Model C1)
Decal - Cover
Decal - Cover
Decal - Exit
Decal - Exit
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
111 - 4
111 - 19
111 - 22
149 - 2
107 - 15
107 - 12
107 - 17
107 - 27
107 - 19
107 - 16
107 - 20
107 - 23
107 - 28
107 - 30
97 - 28
97 - 15
97 - 11
111 - 15
109 - 11
109 - 2
111 - 9
111 - 8
111 - 7
111 - 1
111 - 13
109 - 4
107 - 29
111 - 18
111 - 11
111 - 10
107 - 7
17 - 7
221 - 21
95 - 3
221 - 22
B065 4495
B065 4496
B065 4497
B065 4499
B065 4501
B065 4525
B065 4531
B065 4591
B065 4619
B065 4620
B065 4627
B065 4632
B065 4640
B065 4644
B065 4647
B065 4648
B065 4650
B065 4655
B065 4671
B065 4672
B065 4673
B065 4674
B065 4675
B065 4681
B065 4682
B065 4683
B065 4692
B065 4693
B065 4694
B065 4696
B065 4699
B065 4710
B065 4715
B065 4720
B065 4725
236
Description
Relay Harness - Guide Plate
Relay Harness - Exit
Exit Harness (Model C1)
Exit Detection Harness
Duplex Unit (Model C1)
Duplex Inner Cover
Guide Plate Lever
Right Duplex Rail
Support Bracket
Rear Side Plate
Front Side Plate
Joint Holder
Upper Entrance Guide Plate (Model C1)
Sensor Bracket
Invertor Lever
Lever Cam
Jogger Motor
Driven Reverse Bracket
Duplex Lock Arm
Release Lever Bracket
Release Lever Shaft
Release Grip
Duplex Release Bracket
Front Jogger Fence
Rear Jogger Fence
Spring Plate - Rear Jogger Fence
Front Jogger Fence Slider
Rear Jogger Fence Slider
Jogger Guide Rod
Jogger Motor Bracket
Jogger H.P. Sensor Bracket
Upper Transport Guide Plate (Model C1)
Exit Reverse Sensor Bracket
Left Duplex Table
Right Duplex Bracket
Page and
Index No.
107 - 24
107 - 14
111 - 17
149 - 25
113 - 15
113 - 1
113 - 30
149 - 17
121 - 25
115 - 18
115 - 11
115 - 19
115 - 25
115 - 22
115 - 4
113 - 31
117 - 11
117 - 25
113 - 5
113 - 8
113 - 4
113 - 3
113 - 6
117 - 19
117 - 21
117 - 20
121 - 10
121 - 11
119 - 13
117 - 10
121 - 1
121 - 18
121 - 15
117 - 18
113 - 16
Part No.
B065 4726
B065 4727
B065 4728
B065 4730
B065 4731
B065 4733
B065 4736
B065 4738
B065 4745
B065 4780
B065 4785
B065 4789
B065 4790
B065 4791
B065 4797
B065 4797
B065 4810
B065 4820
B065 4830
B065 4835
B065 4860
B065 4865
B065 4866
B065 4867
B065 4867
B065 4933
B065 4980
B065 4981
B065 4987
B065 5041
B065 5111
B065 5111
B065 5113
B065 5115
B065 5120
Description
Right Guide Table
Right Sensor Bracket
Spring Plate - Right Table Guide
Lower Transport Guide Plate
Spring Plate - Driven Roller
Duplex Gate Pawl
Exit Solenoid
Gate Pawl Cushion
Reverse Solenoid
Reverse Motor
Transport Motor
Transport Motor Bracket
Reverse Motor Bracket
Jogger Bracket
Holder Bracket
Rail
Lower Duplex Bracket
Spacer
Reverse Knob
Guide Plate Lever Hook
Upper Duplex Stay
Safety Switch Lever
Controller Board
Controller Board
IC - ASIC MARIMBA3
HDD Harness
BCU Board
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
113 - 14
113 - 18
113 - 13
113 - 23
113 - 22
121 - 4
121 - 26
121 - 5
117 - 5
117 - 1
117 - 6
117 - 8
121 - 23
121 - 21
113 - 2
221 - 23
117 - 2
121 - 27
149 - 21
149 - 10
121 - 6
121 - 7
115 - 1
221 - 24
113 - 29
113 - 28
121 - 24
121 - 22
113 - 10
145 - 2
201 - *
131 - 9
201 - 1
131 - 16
161 - *
B065 5120
B065 5128
B065 5128
B065 5139
B065 5147
B065 5147
B065 5147
B065 5158
B065 5158
B065 5158
B065 5169
B065 5169
B065 5169
B065 5173
B065 5174
B065 5180
B065 5185
B065 5195
B065 5202
B065 5220
B065 5230
B065 5239
B065 5240
B065 5241
B065 5401
B065 5403
B065 5405
B065 5416
B065 5417
B065 5418
B065 5420
B065 5421
B065 5422
B065 5430
B065 5437
Description
BCU Board (Model C1)
IC - GASTM
IC - GASTM
PFC Board (Model C1)
IC - CDIC3
IC - CDIC3
IC - CDIC3
IC - RF5C608
IC - RF5C608
IC - RF5C608
IC - GARAC
IC - GARAC
IC - GARAC
LCDC Board - LT (Model C1)
LCDC Board - A4 (Model C1)
SDRD Board
DRB Board (Model C1)
VIB Board
Mother Board
Relay Board
CNB Board (Model C1)
LCDC Board - A4 (Model C1 TWN/ASIA)
LCDC Board - A4 (Model C1 CHN)
LCDC Board - A4 (Model C1 KOR)
20p Cable - LVDS SBU
12P Cable - LVDS LIDB
LCDC Harness
Upper Harness (Model C1)
Left Harness (Model C1)
Duplex/Exit Harness (Model C1)
CNB Board Harness (Model C1)
Safety Switch Harness
Duplex DRB Harness
LD Switch Harness
LD Control Harness
237
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
129 - 3
161 - 3
171 - 3
141 - 3
181 -102
191 - 1
181 - 1
181 - 2
181 -103
191 - 2
181 -104
181 - 3
191 - 3
19 - 6
19 - 6
49 - 13
137 - 21
45 - 15
131 - 23
47 - 22
137 - 18
19 - 6
19 - 6
19 - 6
45 - 12
51 - 1
45 - 14
129 - 2
129 - 1
139 - 20
137 - 19
137 - 17
139 - 19
145 - 1
51 - 5
Part No.
B065 5445
B065 5447
B065 5450
B065 5450
B065 5453
B065 5454
B065 5468
B065 5471
B065 5477
B065 5483
B065 5489
B065 5500
B065 5501
B065 5502
B065 5503
B065 5507
B065 5508
B065 5509
B065 5510
B065 5600
B065 5601
B065 5610
B065 5650
B065 5651
B065 5672
B065 5673
B065 5700
B065 5700
B065 5701
B065 5752
B065 5754
B065 5790
B065 5791
B065 5795
B065 5802
Description
Finisher Cnb Harness
ADF Power Source Harness
IPU/BCU Harness
IPU/BCU Harness
Relay Polygon Motor Harness
HP Sensor Relay Harness
Css Relay Harness
Grounding Wire
LD Relay Harness
Safety Switch
Harness (B065/B141/B143)
CNB/PSU Harness (Model C1)
VIB Power Source Harness
PFC/PSU Harness
ADF/CNB Harness
MB/PSU Harness
IPU/PSU Harness
DRB/BCU Power Sorce Harness (Model C1)
MB2/PSU Harness
Paper Bank Heater Harness
1st Scanner Harness (Model C1)
Scanner Unit Harness
Power Supply Cord - 230V (CHN)
Front Paper Bank Harness (Model C1)
Control Unit Side Plate
Centronics Cover
Panel Gasket
Fan Motor Gasket
Controller Grounding Bracket
CNB Board Bracket (Model C1)
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
129 - 18
129 - 14
131 - 29
133 - 18
51 - 12
49 - 9
137 - 26
49 - 29
51 - 4
141 - 2
51 - 2
137 - 15
45 - 16
141 - 8
129 - 15
131 - 26
131 - 22
137 - 16
131 - 27
139 - 22
141 - 10
47 - 21
45 - 13
139 - 22
141 - 11
141 - 11
141 - 14
143 - 10
141 - 1
131 - 4
131 - 5
131 - 8
129 - 10
131 - 34
137 - 20
B065 5803
B065 5804
B065 5805
B065 5807
B065 5808
B065 5811
B065 5813
B065 5814
B065 5815
B065 5816
B065 5817
B065 5818
B065 5819
B065 5821
B065 5826
B065 5827
B065 5837
B065 5838
B065 5841
B065 5844
B065 5846
B065 5858
B065 5860
B065 5861
B065 5863
B065 5865
B065 5867
B065 5868
B065 5868
B065 5868
B065 5869
B065 5871
B065 5872
B065 5873
B065 5874
238
Description
DRB Board Bracket (Model C1)
CSS Bracket
Finisher Cable Bracket
LCT Cable Bracket
Safety Switch Bracket
Main Switch Bracket
Harness Guide
Safety Switch Harness Cover
Slide Rail Cover
Main Switch Harness Guide
Lower Hinge Bracket
Control Unit Base
Lower Hinge Bracket
Upper Hinge
NIB Cover
IEEE1394 Cover
IPU Cover
IPU Connector Cover
Mother Board Cover
HDD Bracket
BCU Board Bracket
HDD Side Plate
IC Card Cover
Fan Cover
Fan Cover
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Base Sheet
PFC Board Bracket
Lower PFC Board Stay
Upper PFC Board Stay
Lower Hinge
Page and
Index No.
137 - 22
137 - 14
137 - 23
129 - 17
125 - 1
145 - 3
145 - 6
139 - 12
139 - 7
145 - 5
139 - 17
139 - 21
139 - 18
131 - 21
129 - 7
129 - 5
131 - 2
131 - 6
131 - 30
131 - 31
131 - 25
131 - 17
129 - 13
131 - 12
131 - 3
129 - 11
131 - 10
139 - 14
131 - 20
135 - 18
131 - 32
141 - 4
141 - 6
141 - 5
129 - 9
Part No.
B065 5877
B065 5878
B065 5879
B065 5883
B065 5890
B065 5892
B065 5893
B065 5898
B065 5899
B065 6075
B065 6076
B065 6078
B065 6116
B065 6122
B065 6135
B065 6136
B065 6166
B065 6172
B065 6173
B065 6174
B065 6177
B065 6184
B065 6191
B065 6201
B065 6221
B065 6235
B065 6241
B065 6260
B065 6264
B065 6265
B065 6266
B065 6306
B065 6307
B065 6317
B065 6318
Description
Upper PSU Stay
Right PSU Stay
Fan Relay Harness
Upper Hinge Stay
Power Pack Bracket
Counter Bracket
Bushing
Side Plate Stay - Lower Rear
Support Plate
LCT Stay
Upper Heat Sink
Micro Switchbracket
Lock Arm - Tandem Tray
Tray Lock Arm
Rear Support Plate
Paper Tray Stopper (Model C2)
Stopper Bracket
Paper Tray Positioning Bracket
Paper Feed Inner Cover
Side Plate - Paper Tray
Paper Feed Unit:Paper Bank:Ass'y
Lower Heat Sink
Left Rail Bracket
Left Rail - Paper Feed
Right Slide Rail (Model C1)
Guide Stay
Left Tandem Slide Rail
Right Tandem Slide Rail (Model C1)
Reverse Drive Shaft
Reverse Driven Shaft
Relay Shaft
Pick-up Solenoid
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
141 - 13
143 - 19
141 - 12
131 - 24
139 - 13
139 - 6
147 - 8
141 - 13
145 - 27
153 - 16
153 - 1
67 - 30
151 - 7
67 - 27
151 - 5
153 - 3
153 - 12
143 - 24
143 - 18
153 - 15
143 - 14
15 - 27
153 - 11
67 - 1
153 - 14
151 - 3
153 - 4
153 - 6
151 - 12
151 - 6
151 - 13
65 - 25
65 - 34
65 - 9
63 - 17
B065 6323
B065 6323
B065 6323
B065 6330
B065 6333
B065 6334
B065 6336
B065 6337
B065 6338
B065 6339
B065 6345
B065 6346
B065 6350
B065 6353
B065 6357
B065 6358
B065 6361
B065 6364
B065 6366
B065 6371
B065 6372
B065 6375
B065 6394
B065 6399
B065 6399
B065 6402
B065 6403
B065 6404
B065 6405
B065 6407
B065 6415
B065 6416
B065 6426
B065 6427
B065 6428
Description
Paper Feed Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Rear Side Plate - Paper Feed
Reverse Haousing
Heat Sink Base
Front Side Plate - Paper Feed
Heat Sink
Heat Sink Sheet
Feed Guide Plate (Model C1)
Paper Tray Link
Pick-up Gear Cover
Feed Gear Cover
Pick-up Arm
Relay Guide Plate - Paper Feed (Model C1)
Feed Stay
Drive Bracket
Support Guide Plate
Guide Plate
Paper Feed Unit Stay
Motor Bracket
Torquelimiter
Torquelimiter
Front Side Plate - Vertical Transpo
Rear Side Plate - Vertical Transpor
Guide Plate - Vertical Transport
Motor Base
Ball Bearing - 6x12x4.5
Release Button - Vertical Transport
239
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
65 - 38
67 - 4
71 - 29
65 - 12
65 - 30
63 - 31
65 - 32
63 - 32
63 - 33
63 - 23
63 - 21
65 - 15
63 - 4
63 - 26
63 - 6
63 - 12
67 - 2
63 - 14
63 - 27
65 - 31
65 - 1
63 - 15
65 - 39
71 - 16
65 - 35
67 - 25
67 - 17
67 - 19
67 - 18
67 - 23
65 - 43
65 - 33
67 - 13
67 - 15
67 - 14
Part No.
B065 6429
B065 6445
B065 6445
B065 6452
B065 6453
B065 6454
B065 6455
B065 6456
B065 6457
B065 6472
B065 6487
B065 6488
B065 6489
B065 6502
B065 6504
B065 6524
B065 6526
B065 6533
B065 6534
B065 6538
B065 6542
B065 6543
B065 6545
B065 6545
B065 6571
B065 6576
B065 6579
B065 6581
B065 6588
B065 6589
B065 6591
B065 6605
B065 6614
B065 6630
B065 6632
Description
Release Cover - Vertical Transport
Feed Lever
Feed Lever
Tray Link Guide
Transport Roller Lever
Driven Release Lever
Vertical Transport Link
Relay Unit Guide Plate (Model C1)
Lower Paper Feed Harness
Upper Paper Feed Harness
Relay Unit Harness
Paper Tray Assembly (LT)(Model C1)
Paper Tray Assembly (A4)(Model C1)
Bottom Plate Lift Shaft
Lift Lever
Front Side Fence Ass'y
Front Side Fence
Positioning Stopper Lever
Side Fence:Inner Back:Ass'y
Side Fence:Inner Back:Adhesion
Decal - Positioning
Decal - Positioning
Paper Size Detection
Coupling Link
Paper Tray Holder Stay
Right Support Plate
Left Support Plate
Paper Tray Holder Base
Right Tandem Tray Ass'y (Model C1)
Left Tandem Tray A'ssy (Model C1)
Tandem Cover
Paper Tray Cover - Long (3rd)
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
67 - 11
63 - 10
71 - 31
65 - 14
65 - 5
65 - 7
65 - 8
65 - 20
63 - 29
67 - 9
63 - 20
63 - 19
67 - 3
59 - 1
59 - 1
59 - 30
59 - 31
59 - 14
59 - 11
59 - 13
59 - 27
59 - 22
221 - 25
59 - 8
59 - 28
59 - 2
59 - 39
59 - 33
59 - 36
59 - 37
59 - 20
55 - 23
53 - 37
53 - 1
59 - 34
B065 6633
B065 6635
B065 6635
B065 6636
B065 6636
B065 6637
B065 6637
B065 6672
B065 6706
B065 6710
B065 6712
B065 6717
B065 6743
B065 6744
B065 6755
B065 6767
B065 6769
B065 6771
B065 6774
B065 6776
B065 6777
B065 6783
B065 6792
B065 6811
B065 6814
B065 6821
B065 6823
B065 6830
B065 6831
B065 6833
B065 6846
B065 6846
B065 6851
B065 6859
B065 6862
240
Description
Paper Tray Cover - Short (2nd)
Tandem Connecting Guide
Paper Volume Sensor Bracket
Front Right Side Plate
End Fence Guide (A4)
Paper Volume Shield Plate
Right Tandem Harness
Solenoid
Lock Arm
Armbracket
Slidebracket
Tandem Tray Stay
Supporting Plate
Slide Rail Base
Slide Rail Base - Tandem
Side Plate - Right Rear
Inner Cover:Tandem LCT:Ass'y (Model C2)
Pulley Braket
Timing Belt Cover
Pulley Bracket
Sensor Bracket
Right Base - Tandem LCT
Right Stopper
Large Lever
Page and
Index No.
59 - 34
221 - 26
53 - 2
59 - 38
221 - 27
59 - 38
221 - 28
55 - 20
55 - 9
57 - 35
57 - 7
57 - 34
57 - 22
57 - 21
143 - 20
143 - 9
143 - 3
143 - 1
151 - 11
151 - 1
151 - 14
153 - 5
151 - 4
57 - 13
55 - 24
53 - 32
53 - 19
53 - 23
53 - 13
53 - 10
53 - 5
221 - 29
57 - 27
55 - 2
57 - 23
Part No.
B065 6864
B065 6870
B065 6872
B065 6873
B065 6874
B065 6875
B065 6877
B065 6877
B065 6878
B065 6878
B065 6879
B065 6879
B065 6881
B065 6884
B065 6885
B065 7002
B065 7012
B065 7015
B065 7016
B065 7017
B065 7018
B065 7019
B065 7133
B065 7133
B065 7134
B065 7134
B065 8490
B065 8490
B140 1110
B140 1132
B140 1133
B140 1157
B140 1173
B140 1223
B140 1304
Description
Small Lever
Stay - Rightbase
Oil Damper Bracket
Sensor Bracket
Bracket - Paper Volumesensor
Protection - Inner Cover
Detector Bracket
Detector Bracket
Base - Right Tandem Tray (KOR/CHN/TWN)
SADF DOM Ass'y (Model C2)
Brushless Motor DC24V 2.5W (Model C2)
Stepper Motor Base Ass'y
Toner Recycling Bracket Ass'y (Model C2)
Fusing Drive Sub-unit Joint
Hinge Lower Ass'y
Left Upper Cover (Model C2)
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
57 - 30
57 - 32
57 - 38
55 - 1
55 - 14
55 - 5
221 - 30
55 - 6
221 - 2
55 - 12
53 - 12
221 - 3
57 - 8
57 - 11
55 - 13
21 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 12
15 - 32
221 - 41
15 - 32
221 - 41
15 - 30
221 - 31
125 - 19
123 - 4
123 - 7
123 - 15
123 - 14
15 - 9
17 - 9
B140 1305
B140 1308
B140 1309
B140 1361
B140 1404
B140 1406
B140 1408
B140 1422
B140 1423
B140 1430
B140 1680
B140 1691
B140 1715
B140 1731
B140 1837
B140 1852
B140 2260
B140 2291
B140 2292
B140 2382
B140 2413
B140 2421
B140 2495
B140 2496
B140 2612
B140 2614
B140 2622
B140 2647
B140 2655
B140 2660
B140 2662
B140 2665
B140 2671
B140 2673
B140 2675
Description
Rear Upper Cover (Model C2)
Rear Lower Cover (Model C2)
Control Board Louver (Model C2)
Decal:Misfeed Removal:Main (Model C2)
Operation Panel:Mat:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
Operation Panel:Mat:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
Operation Panel:ASIA:Ass'y (Model C2)
PCB Right Operation Sub-ass'y (Model C2)
PCB Left Operation Sub-ass'y (Model C2)
LCD:EXP:Sub-Ass'y
Idler Pulley Ass'y
Cover:Polygon Mirror Motor:Ass'y
Scanner Drive Were
Carriage No.1 Ass'y (Model C2)
FFC Insulating Sheet (Model C2)
Imaging Unit:Ass'y
PCU:Lower:C2:Ass'y (Model C2)
Bushing:Screw Shaft:Rear
Case:Charge Corona
Pre-transfer Lamp Case Ass'y (Model C2)
Entrance Transfer Stay Ass'y (Model C2)
Pre-transfer Lamp Harness Plate (Model C2)
Harness - PCU Lower (Model C2)
Harness - PCU (Model C2)
Lower Registration Guide
Upper Front Registration Guide (Model C2)
Lower Front Registration Guide (Model C2)
Open And Close Guide Ass'y (Model C2)
DC Solenoid:Guide Plate
Machine Or Copier Paper Feed Cover
Paper Bank Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Exit Duplex Guide Ass'y (Model C2)
Open And Close Option Tray Exit Guide
Option Tray Guide Ass'y (Model C2)
241
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
17 - 21
17 - 26
17 - 36
15 - 2
19 - 1
19 - 1
19 - 1
19 - 12
19 - 5
19 - 8
49 - 18
45 - 1
49 - 5
47 - 25
49 - 30
51 - 30
85 - 32
83 - 12
83 - 13
87 - 23
87 - 19
87 - 24
89 - 20
147 - 21
71 - 7
69 - 7
69 - 8
73 - 9
73 - 30
61 - 5
61 - 6
73 - 20
73 - 15
73 - 26
73 - 23
Part No.
B140 2700
B140 2721
B140 3050
B140 3099
B140 3100
B140 3253
B140 3850
B140 4001
B140 4002
B140 4080
B140 4093
B140 4101
B140 4105
B140 4112
B140 4113
B140 4117
B140 4128
B140 4131
B140 4135
B140 4140
B140 4141
B140 4142
B140 4144
B140 4150
B140 4157
B140 4159
B140 4162
B140 4164
B140 4167
B140 4169
B140 4170
B140 4171
B140 4172
B140 4174
B140 4179
Description
Reverse Stay Ass'y (Model C2)
Manual Feed Guide Plate (Model C2)
Shield - Drum Front (Model C2)
Shield - Drum Rear (Model C2)
Drum Stay:Development:Upper:Peen
Transfer Unit:EXP:Ass'y (Model C2)
Fusing Unit:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
Fusing Unit:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
Stripper Pawls Open And Close Ass'y
Cleaning Unit:Hot Roller:Ass'y (Model C2)
Front Fusing Side Plateass'y
Rear Fusing Side Plate Ass'y
Right Fusing Stay
Bracket:Cover:Connector:Ass'y (Model C2)
Upper Fusing Cover Ass'y (Model C2)
Housing:Thermostat:EXP
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate (Model C2)
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Lower Fusing Exit Guide
Fusing Exit Roller Holder (Model C2)
Upper Stay Ass'y
Thermostat Bracket
Harness:Front:EXP
Drawer Bracket Ass'y
Harness Plate
Harness:Fusing Unit:NA
Harness:Fusing Unit:EU
Connector Cover Bracket
Thermostat Electrode Plate
Rear Heater Holder
Front Heater Holder
Hot Roller External Circlip
Grip:Fusing Unit:Front:Ass'y (Model C2)
Plate:Thermistor
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
71 - 32
61 - 4
79 - 1
79 - 3
79 - 6
147 - 4
91 - *
97 - 1
97 - 1
97 - 30
95 - 7
105 - 5
105 - 20
105 - 19
97 - 31
97 - 7
101 - 13
97 - 2
97 - 2
105 - 17
97 - 23
101 - 22
101 - 16
101 - 15
101 - 34
101 - 29
101 - 33
101 - 33
101 - 30
101 - 12
101 - 25
101 - 23
101 - 5
97 - 5
101 - 17
B140 4181
B140 4182
B140 4187
B140 4188
B140 4190
B140 4191
B140 4192
B140 4193
B140 4194
B140 4195
B140 4196
B140 4197
B140 4198
B140 4200
B140 4203
B140 4205
B140 4209
B140 4228
B140 4229
B140 4234
B140 4254
B140 4256
B140 4258
B140 4264
B140 4266
B140 4300
B140 4304
B140 4306
B140 4308
B140 4311
B140 4312
B140 4313
B140 4317
B140 4320
B140 4322
242
Description
Pressure Roller:Cleaning Felt (Model C2)
Cleaning Unit Drive Positioning Plate
Drive Bracket Ass'y (Model C2)
Brake Spring Plate (Model C2)
Inner Back:Oil Supply Bushing (Model C2)
Cleaning Unit Cover (Model C2)
Gear - 40Z
Feeler:Oil End Sensor (Model C2)
Inner Back Thermistor Bracket
Middle Thermistor Bracket
Fusing Cleaning Roller Bracket
Pressure Cleaning Roller Spring
Pressure Oil Supply Roller Bracket
Bracket:Stopper:Ass'y
Front Lever Ass'y
Rear Lever Ass'y
Upper Fusing Exit Guide Plate (Model C2)
Shaft - Turn
Pressure Release Eccentric Cam
Sensor Bracket Ass'y
Gear - 23Z
Inner Cover:Fusing:EXP:Ass'y (Model C2)
Gear - 21/35Z
Gear - 21/35Z
Eft Reverse Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Left Rise Guide Plate (Model C2)
Exhaust Cover Ass'y (Model C2)
Gear - SWIVEL ASS'Y
Sensor Feeler
Gear - 21/33Z
Page and
Index No.
95 - 16
95 - 14
95 - 42
95 - 25
95 - 24
95 - 9
95 - 40
95 - 13
101 - 6
95 - 38
101 - 21
101 - 18
105 - 12
105 - 9
97 - 3
105 - 34
95 - 11
105 - 3
105 - 23
97 - 28
105 - 28
105 - 29
105 - 32
105 - 30
95 - 41
109 - 27
109 - 19
109 - 18
111 - 4
149 - 2
149 - 6
149 - 3
109 - 20
105 - 31
109 - 21
Part No.
B140 4324
B140 4325
B140 4329
B140 4336
B140 4354
B140 4458
B140 4470
B140 4474
B140 4497
B140 4498
B140 4500
B140 4640
B140 4710
B140 4800
B140 5132
B140 5144
B140 5144
B140 5185
B140 5218
B140 5230
B140 5301
B140 5416
B140 5417
B140 5418
B140 5420
B140 5440
B140 5460
B140 5461
B140 5469
B140 5470
B140 5491
B140 5500
B140 5509
B140 5515
B140 5516
Description
Stepper Motor Mm42
Drive Bracket Ass'y
Front Drive Bracket Ass'y
Gear - IDLER WORM GEAR
Protect Bracket Ass'y (Model C2)
Heat Insulating Plate Bracket
Harness - Paper Exit Unit Drawer (Model C2)
Harness - Positioning Sensor
Duplex Unit Ass'y (Model C2)
Upper Entrance Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Upper Transport Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Exit Duplex Guide Plate (Model C2)
PCB Pfc Three Way (Model C2)
PCB:IPU:Basic:Martini-C2
PCB:IPU:Basic:Martini-c2
PCB:DRB (Model C2)
PCB:Ass'y
PCB:CNB (Model C2)
PCB:Sync Detector
Harness - Machine Or Copier Upper (Model C2)
Harness - Machine Or Copier Left (Model C2)
Harness - Exit Duplex (Model C2)
Harness - Cnb Machine Or Copier Upper
Harness:MB:Connecting
Harness - Pwrctl
Harness - Pwrctl Connecting
Harness:60 (B140/B142)
Harness - DC Power Supply Cnb BCU (Model C2)
Harness - Power Source BCU DRB (Model C2)
Harness - DC Power Supply MB
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
109 - 25
109 - 22
109 - 23
109 - 24
107 - 15
111 - 18
107 - 7
109 - 26
111 - 17
105 - 33
113 - 15
115 - 25
121 - 18
113 - 11
141 - 3
191 - *
133 - 17
137 - 21
135 - 3
137 - 18
51 - 29
129 - 1
129 - 2
139 - 20
137 - 19
135 - 4
135 - 9
135 - 16
45 - 7
45 - 8
51 - 2
137 - 15
137 - 16
135 - 1
135 - 10
B140 5517
B140 5610
B140 5615
B140 5617
B140 5622
B140 5625
B140 5742
B140 5802
B140 5803
B140 5822
B140 5824
B140 5827
B140 5829
B140 5830
B140 5832
B140 5834
B140 5841
B140 5842
B140 5846
B140 5850
B140 5856
B140 5857
B140 5859
B140 5873
B140 5876
B140 5877
B140 5878
B140 5880
B140 5891
B140 5895
B140 5896
B140 5897
B140 6200
B140 6225
B140 6226
Description
Harness - Scanner No.1 (Model C2)
Harness:Ac Power Supply:Main:NA (Model C2)
Harness:Ac Power Supply:Main:EU (Model C2)
Harness - AC Power Supply CTL-PSU
Harness:AC Power Supply:CTL-PSU:EU
RAM:BIOS
CNB Bracket (Model C2)
DRB Bracket (Model C2)
Control Unit Frame Ass'y
Option Panel Ass'y
Upper Control Unit Arm Ass'y (Model C2)
Lower Control Unit Arm (Model C2)
Panel:Interface:Ass'y
PCB Control Board Ass'y
Control Board Drum Stay Ass'y
Cover:Image Processing Unit:Ass'y
Ipu Connector Cover
Mother Board Bracket Ass'y
Control Unit Cover Ass'y (Model C2)
HDD Bracket
HDD Ground Plate
Insulating Sheet
Arm:Cover:BCU
Cover:BCU (Model C2)
Base:Ground Plate:HDD
Cover:SD-Card
Control Unit Lower Hinge Ass'y
Bracket:Plug:ADF
Gasket:Drum Stay:A
Gasket:Drum Stay:B
Bracket:Control Unit
Paper Feed Unit Ass'y (Model C2)
Heat Sink:Heater:Lower:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
Heat Sink:Heater:Lower:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
243
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
135 - 17
47 - 21
139 - 22
139 - 22
135 - 11
135 - 11
215 - 4
137 - 20
137 - 22
135 - 14
133 - 12
129 - 19
129 - 20
133 - 10
215 - *
133 - 11
133 - 19
133 - 20
135 - 5
129 - 4
133 - 7
133 - 2
135 - 13
135 - 19
129 - 21
133 - 21
133 - 22
141 - 17
129 - 16
133 - 26
133 - 27
133 - 24
67 - 1
153 - 18
153 - 18
Part No.
B140 6260
B140 6266
B140 6321
B140 6339
B140 6361
B140 6377
B140 6378
B140 6420
B140 6472
B140 6502
B140 6504
B140 6603
B140 6605
B140 6606
B140 6615
B140 6757
B140 9590
B163 5122
B163 5122
B163 5173
B163 5174
B163 5180
Description
Right Slide Rail Ass'y (Model C2)
Right Slide Rail Tandem LCT Ass'y
Reverse Roller:Pressure Release
Paper Feed Guide Plate (Model C2)
Paper Bank Connecting Guide Plate
Ground Plate:Reverse:Paper Feed Unit
Ground Plate:Stepper Motor:Paper Feed Unit
Vertical Transport Unit Ass'y (Model C2)
Joint Unit Guide Plate Ass'y (Model C2)
Paper Tray:Universal:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
Paper Tray:Universal:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
Left Tandem LCT Ass'y (Model C2 A4)
Right Tandem LCT Ass'y (Model C2 A4)
Tandem LCT:Right:Letter:Ass'y (Model C2)
Tandem LCT:Left:Letter:Ass'y (Model C2)
PCB:OPU:NA:Ass'y (Model C2)
PCB:OPU:EU:Ass'y (Model C2)
PCB:OPU:TWN:Ass'y (Model C2)
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
153 - 6
151 - 13
65 - 29
63 - 23
67 - 2
65 - 45
65 - 44
67 - 31
67 - 9
59 - 1
59 - 1
53 - 37
55 - 23
55 - 23
53 - 37
143 - 13
133 - 16
171 - *
129 - 3
19 - 6
19 - 6
19 - 6
A006 9104
A007 3751
A010 5700
A029 2984
A029 2984
A048 2276
A048 2838
A048 2838
A048 2838
A053 2916
A060 2512
A069 1883
A077 4162
A096 1355
A096 1679
A096 1873
A096 2051
A096 2052
A096 2057
A096 2062
A096 2063
A096 2065
A096 2301
A096 2622
A096 2633
A096 2780
A096 3141
A096 3175
A096 3176
A096 3181
A096 3224
A096 3712
A096 3712
A096 4319
A096 4595
244
Description
Adjusting Scanner Pin (4pcs/set)
Large Cap - Toner Collection Tank
Sensor
Decal - Grip
Decal - Grip
Ring - Transport Bracket
Nylon Rivet
Nylon Rivet
Nylon Rivet
Friction Pad - B (Model C1)
Registration Roller Knob
Shoe - Scanner
Shoulder Screw - M3
Hinge Shaft
Development Grounding Plate
Scanner Shoe Pin
Rear Grid Anchor
Front Grid Anchor
Charge Corona Grid
Wire Cleaner Slider
Corona Wire Cleaner
Slider Ring
Grounding Plate
Front Lower Registration Guide (Model C1)
Front Lock
Feed Guide Gear
Development Filter Case
Bushing 8x14x8
Bushing - 6x12x8.5
Slitter
Bottle Roller
Ratch
Ratch
Exit Roller Holder (Model C1)
Duplex Guide
Page and
Index No.
223 - 1
17 - 5
57 - 25
221 - 1
67 - 12
89 - 2
73 - 24
59 - 16
109 - 16
71 - 9
15 - 20
47 - 5
109 - 14
145 - 18
147 - 6
47 - 3
83 - 18
83 - 27
83 - 28
83 - 8
83 - 7
83 - 9
85 - 5
69 - 8
73 - 10
61 - 7
79 - 18
77 - 23
77 - 28
77 - 12
75 - 15
127 - 34
17 - 2
97 - 23
121 - 12
Part No.
A096 4928
A096 5320
A096 5335
A096 5416
A096 5528
A096 6553
A096 6671
A096 6677
A096 6677
A096 6678
A096 6678
A134 1135
A134 1724
A134 2363
A134 2978
A134 3179
A134 3192
A134 5251
A176 2054
A176 2061
A176 6570
A176 6695
A176 6695
A222 2724
A229 1135
A229 1135
A229 1136
A229 2655
A229 2717
A229 3154
A229 3217
A229 3219
A229 3232
A229 3240
A229 3242
Description
Guide Plate Band
Quenching Lamp
Paper Size Switch
Paper Size Harness
Micro Switch Sheet
Side Fence Pad
Paper Guide Plate
Fly Wheel
Terminal Plate
Spring Plate
Chuck Shaft
Seal - Toner Bottle
ID Sensor
Grounding Plate
Screw Shaft
Paper Stopper
External Circlip - Mm8
Ring - 55
Ring - 55
Fusing Drive Shaft
Read Rock
Lock Lever
Case Seal
Retaining Ring Seal
Rubber Bushing - Toner Supply Unit
Chuck Roller
DC Motor
Toner Bottle Joint Gear
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
A229 3243
A229 3258
A229 3261
A229 3262
A229 3263
A229 3264
A229 3266
A229 3285
A229 3290
A229 3291
A229 3861
A229 3862
A229 3865
A229 3875
A229 3910
A229 3911
A229 3934
A229 4467
A229 4477
A229 4479
A229 4482
A229 4617
A229 4623
A229 4624
A229 4727
A229 4740
A229 4800
A229 5216
A229 5442
A229 6556
A232 3566
A232 3566
A232 3566
A232 4666
A232 5355
113 - 24
85 - 4
61 - 18
143 - 15
67 - 26
59 - 10
55 - 7
221 - 2
55 - 12
53 - 12
221 - 3
125 - 10
49 - 15
83 - 26
59 - 12
75 - 23
75 - 36
89 - 21
83 - 6
83 - 10
59 - 26
59 - 32
55 - 19
75 - 30
123 - 10
125 - 23
123 - 12
73 - 7
73 - 3
77 - 8
75 - 38
75 - 13
75 - 22
75 - 4
75 - 35
Description
Motor Joint Gear
Toner Catchpan
Outer Shutter
Inner Shutter
Outer Shutter Shield
Shutter Lever
Upper Shutter Shield
Shutter Cover
Right Inner Cover
Right Inner Cover
Front Arm
Rear Arm
Drive Electrode
Front Bushing
Rear Bushing
Tape
Pressure Arm
Reverse Guide Plate
Reverse Guide Plate - Right
Exit Roller Holder
Duplex Discharge Brush
Duplex Driven Roller
Guide Plate Pressure Holder
Drive Joint
Exit Guide Plate (Model C1)
Touch Panel
Duplex Connecting Harness
IC - GATEX
245
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
75 - 34
75 - 32
75 - 8
75 - 9
75 - 7
75 - 11
75 - 10
75 - 12
15 - 24
15 - 25
91 - 3
91 - 7
91 - 13
91 - 4
93 - 17
93 - 23
93 - 12
111 - 6
109 - 10
109 - 9
109 - 8
115 - 23
115 - 5
115 - 8
113 - 26
115 - 21
113 - 11
19 - 13
113 - 19
59 - 35
119 - 2
103 - 4
105 - 4
117 - 7
161 - 1
Part No.
A232 5355
A247 2800
A247 4249
A247 4249
A247 5428
A248 6103
A248 6167
A248 6168
A248 6615
A248 6623
A248 6624
A248 6639
A248 6645
A248 6646
A248 6666
A248 6684
A248 6687
A248 6694
A248 6695
A248 6701
A248 6713
A248 6714
A248 6727
A248 6738
A248 6745
A248 6757
A248 6758
A257 9300
A265 5154
A267 1820
A267 2857
A267 2859
A267 2860
A292 9500
A293 1095
Description
IC - GATEX
Connector - 3P
Connector - 3P
DC Harness - Left
Guide Plate - Upper Heat Sink
DC Motor - 19.2W
Bracket - Lift Motor
Coupling Lever - Left
Slider - Left Back Fence
Left Back Fence
Tray Bottom Plate - Left Middle (Model C1)
Side Plate - Left (Model C1)
Cover Bracket (Model C1)
Side Plate
X/X MB42
Right Drive Shaft
Wire Ring
Guide - Pulley
Oil Damper
Hook - Tension Sprong
DC Solenoid - Front End Fence
DC Solenoid - Rear End Fence
Side Fence - Right Rear (Model C1)
Inner Cover - Tandem LCT
DC Lock Solenoid
Grease - Barrierta S552R
PCB:CSS
Sheet - Photointerrupter
Spring Plate - Side Fence
Side Fence Stopper
Rear Lever Stopper
Test Chart - S5S (10 Pcs/set)
Sirocco Fan - DC24V
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
171 - 1
71 - 3
99 - 21
101 - 32
53 - 26
151 - 9
143 - 7
143 - 6
53 - 25
53 - 22
53 - 18
53 - 10
53 - 7
53 - 4
55 - 22
57 - 19
57 - 18
57 - 31
57 - 16
57 - 36
57 - 4
57 - 1
57 - 12
55 - 15
55 - 4
143 - 13
143 - 21
223 - 5
137 - 24
49 - 12
59 - 25
59 - 23
59 - 24
223 - 2
137 - 5
A293 1155
A293 1332
A293 1674
A293 1766
A293 2418
A293 3220
A293 3227
A293 3230
A293 3231
A293 3234
A293 3282
A293 3899
A293 3916
A293 4611
A293 4613
A293 4614
A293 4615
A293 5871
A293 6574
A293 6579
A293 6585
A293 6640
A293 6642
A293 6643
A293 6644
A293 6646
A293 6647
A293 6649
A293 6684
A293 6713
A293 6714
A293 6736
A293 6739
A294 1292
A294 1378
246
Description
Duplex Drive Bracket
Duct Holder
Front Slide Rail
2nd Mirror Plate
Upper Unit Cover
Toner Bottle Stopper
Toner Slider
Toner Bottle Chuck
Shield Holder
Shield Plate - Toner Bottle
Toner Bottle Pawl
Cleaning Roller - Transfer Belt
Reverse Roller
Front Gate Pawl
Rear Gate Pawl
Spacer
Css Board Bracket
Actuator Guide
Link Guide
Knob - Paper Size Selection
Tray Bottom Plate - Left Front (Model C1)
Tray Bottom Plate - Left Rear (Model C1)
Side Fence - Left Front (Model C1)
Side Fence - Left Rear (Model C1)
Rear Cover - Tandem LCT (Model C1)
Support Bracket - End Fence (Model C1)
Rear Cover Cushion - Tandem LCT
Pulley:Drive Were:Ass'y
Front End Fence
Rear End Fence
Side Fence - Right Front (Model C1)
Inner Cover - Right Rear (Model C1)
Door Switch Bracket
Page and
Index No.
123 - 25
17 - 24
49 - 1
47 - 4
85 - 1
75 - 25
75 - 19
75 - 18
75 - 1
75 - 17
75 - 26
91 - 5
93 - 8
115 - 15
115 - 14
115 - 16
115 - 13
137 - 25
59 - 29
59 - 5
59 - 3
53 - 9
53 - 11
53 - 8
53 - 15
53 - 16
53 - 6
53 - 17
57 - 19
57 - 6
57 - 10
55 - 8
55 - 16
15 - 1
15 - 21
Part No.
A294 1378
A294 1712
A294 2051
A294 2052
A294 2678
A294 3116
A294 3572
A294 4669
A294 4723
A294 4754
A294 6655
A294 6670
A294 6690
A294 6700
A294 9510
A294 9610
A300 2134
A351 4281
A374 2181
A376 4599
A413 1670
A413 1670
A418 1158
A422 1063
A422 1063
A422 1078
A423 4433
A469 2123
A470 1703
A470 1704
A548 2139
A628 1225
A628 3112
A669 1827
A680 1171
Description
Rear Holder - Lamp
Rear Receptacle
Receptacle Pin
Roller - Duplex Exit
Development Screw
Rear Drum Seal
Cushion
Belt Holder Fixing Plate
Roller Lever
Front Roller - Slide Rail
Base - Right Tandem Tray (Model C1)
Feeler - Paper Height Sensor
Torque Limiter - 53mnxm
MB69
OPC Drum - Infotec
Guide Roller - B
Anti-vibration Cushion
Spacer
Side Fence Pad
Antistatic Brush
Antistatic Brush
Spacer - M6.5x1
Seal - 0.7x13x20
Seal - 0.7x13x20
Bushing - 6x12x4mm
Spring
Rubber Cushion - 1x10x10mm
Shift Clutch
Spring - Lower Exit Roller
Pulley
Bushing - 8mm
Shielding Sheet
Spacer - 16mm
Harness Holder
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
221 - 4
47 - 10
125 - 4
125 - 5
73 - 18
79 - 20
87 - 18
121 - 16
121 - 8
117 - 15
57 - 39
55 - 13
57 - 33
33 - 11
85 - 25
85 - 25
149 - 11
41 - 8
29 - 6
23 - 2
99 - 4
101 - 24
25 - 20
29 - 9
35 - 25
33 - 1
67 - 28
73 - 14
111 - 26
111 - 25
37 - 8
25 - 13
43 - 12
131 - 35
39 - 2
A680 1621
A680 2262
A697 1125
A697 2131
A697 2131
A806 1135
A806 1163
A806 1292
A806 1293
A806 1294
A806 1295
A806 1298
A806 1335
A806 1351
A806 2151
A806 2153
A806 2161
A806 2244
A806 2271
A806 2281
A806 2283
A806 2285
A806 2287
A806 2911
A806 4117
A806 4118
A806 4261
A859 2230
A859 2241
A859 3225
A859 4836
A859 7211
B004 5120
B004 5120
B004 5853
Description
Feed-in Unit Stopper
Feeler - Pick-up Roller Cam
Stepped Screw - Lever
Antistatic Brush
Antistatic Brush
Contact Point Shaft
Guide Plate Cushion
Feed Belt Bracket
Feed Belt Drive Roller
Feed Belt Driven Roller
Feed Belt
Transport Belt Roller Shaft
Original Table Guide Plate
Original Sensor Feeler
Timing Pulley - T27 S2M
Separation Shaft Stopper
Gear - Z18
Gear - Z47
Gear - Z20/Z47
Gear - Z20/Z47
Gear - Z20/Z47
Stepper Motor Ass`y - DC 13W
Spring Belt Guide Roller
Reverse Roller
Discharge Brush
Bushing- Exit Driven Roller
Stepped Screw
IC - HG71C114FL
IC - HG71C114FL
Bracket Grip
247
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
25 - 16
37 - 20
39 - 12
31 - 13
35 - 16
41 - 10
25 - 11
25 - 24
25 - 15
25 - 26
25 - 22
25 - 25
23 - 15
23 - 6
25 - 2
25 - 12
39 - 26
37 - 12
25 - 1
23 - 19
39 - 25
39 - 23
39 - 24
39 - 30
39 - 28
25 - 8
25 - 23
37 - 14
33 - 10
29 - 19
35 - 17
21 - 10
171 - 2
161 - 2
131 - 1
Part No.
Description
B023 1101
B027 8521
B066 5116
B066 5400
B066 5501
B070 1307
B070 1307
B070 2010
B070 2114
B070 2364
B070 2365
B070 5625
B070 5684
B070 5685
B070 5686
B070 5740
B070 6666
B070 6683
B070 6684
B070 6877
B070 6882
B070 9510
B082 6403
B098 1342
B098 3492
B098 6557
B098 6639
B098 6640
B098 6642
B098 6643
B098 6644
B098 6645
B098 6646
B098 6647
B098 6649
Stand Holder
O/I Holder
Power Source Harness
MLB Board
Spacer - 13mm
Caution Decal - Paper Set
Decal - Caution Chart Paper Set
Charge Corona Unit
Filter - Toner
Charge Corona Wire
Cleaner Motor Cover
PCB:Interface:Ass'y
Harness:HDD:IDE
Harness:Power Source:HDD
Harness:CSS
ASIC:Bassoon
Left DC Motor Bracket
Lever:Release:Front
Lever:Release:Rear
Large Drum Stay Ground Plate
Spacer:SD-Card
OPC Drum
Decal:Power Source:Off:EXP
Hinge:Upper
Gear:Manual Feed Table
Tray Bottom Plate:Left Middle:Ass'y
Tray Bottom Plate:Left Front (Model C2)
Tray Bottom Plate:Left Rear (Model C2)
Side Fence:Tandem LCT:Left Front
Side Fence:Tandem LCT:Left Rear (Model C2)
Side Plate:Tandem LCT:Left Sideways
Bracket:Cover:Tandem LCT (Model C2)
End Fence:Auxiliary (Model C2)
Cover:Rear:Tandem LCT:Ass'y (Model C2)
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
15 - 29
15 - 28
131 - 15
131 - 36
131 - 37
221 - 42
15 - 31
83 - 3
145 - 9
83 - 19
83 - 4
135 - 8
133 - 9
133 - 8
135 - 6
215 - 3
53 - 33
57 - 2
57 - 14
133 - 13
133 - 25
85 - 25
221 - 47
15 - 4
61 - 17
59 - 35
53 - 10
53 - 9
53 - 11
53 - 8
53 - 15
53 - 7
53 - 4
53 - 6
53 - 16
B098 6670
B098 6693
B098 6736
B098 6738
B098 6739
B110 2261
B110 2322
B110 2326
B110 2713
B110 3050
B110 3091
B110 3099
B110 3100
B110 3777
B110 4117
B110 4223
B110 4391
B110 5140
B110 5140
B110 5305
B111 5701
B138 5154
B141 5305
B141 5835
B301 1136
B301 1286
B301 2141
B351 3835
B351 4135
B477 1111
B477 1121
B477 1131
B477 1141
B477 1152
B477 1161
248
Description
Base:Tandem LCT:Right:Ass'y (Model C2)
Shield:Frame:Paper Bank:Upper
Side Fence:Tandem LCT:Right Front (Model C2)
Side Fence:Tandem LCT:Right Rear (Model C2)
Supporting Plate:Tandem:Right Rear
PCU Lower Ass'y (Model C1)
Agitator Shaft
Shaft:Reverse:Drive:Ass'y
Entrance Seal Ass'y
Seal:Drum:Front (Model C1)
Seal:Drum:Rear (Model C1)
Cover Temperature & Humidity Sensor
Upper Fusing Cover (Model C1)
Electrode Plate:Thermostat:Coupling
Guide Plate Bracket
Development Drive Motor (Model C1)
Harness:Bank:Front:Three Way (Model C2)
PCB N-PI Ass'y
Development Drive Motor Ass'y (Model C2)
PCB:Control Board:EXP:Ass'y
Spring Plate - 0.4mm
Bushing - 6x10x6
Pulley - 39Z
Discharge Brush - Exit
Magnet Catch - Original Table
Front Side Plate
Rear Side Plate
Front Scanning Bracket
Rear Scanning Bracket
Stay:Frame:Left
Right Frame Stay
Page and
Index No.
55 - 13
153 - 10
55 - 8
55 - 15
55 - 16
85 - 32
87 - 2
87 - 1
71 - 12
79 - 1
79 - 4
79 - 3
79 - 6
141 - 15
97 - 7
101 - 11
97 - 19
131 - 28
181 - *
123 - 1
141 - 1
135 - 7
123 - 1
133 - 14
41 - 6
25 - 21
37 - 31
33 - 18
61 - 11
41 - 1
41 - 2
31 - 5
31 - 12
41 - 7
41 - 11
Part No.
B477 1171
B477 1181
B477 1185
B477 1191
B477 1520
B477 1550
B477 1731
B477 1755
B477 1761
B477 1765
B477 1775
B477 1791
B477 1821
B477 1825
B477 1831
B477 1841
B477 1851
B477 1861
B477 1891
B477 1912
B477 1922
B477 2111
B477 2121
B477 2131
B477 2141
B477 2143
B477 2145
B477 2151
B477 2161
B477 2172
B477 2182
B477 2191
B477 2222
B477 2225
B477 2226
Description
Arm Shaft
Sensor Bracket
Sensor Feeler
Front Left Stopper
Right Hinge
Hinge:Left:Ass'y
Face Original Table
Back Original Table
Original Table Stopper
Spring Plate - Original Table Stopp
Paper Feed Cover Bracket
Paper Feed Cover
Paper Feed Cover Grip
Paper Feed Release Lever
Grip Shaft
Front Cover Bracket
Rear Cover Bracket
Exit Cover
Front Cover
Rear Cover
Lower Cover
Pull Out Roller
Drive Relay Roller
Inverter Roller Stay
Lower Paper Feed Guide
Lower Anti-static Brush
Guide Bracket
Separation Cap
Lower Grounding Plate
Front Entrance Guide
Rear Entrance Guide
Separation Shaft
Pick-up Roller
Pickup Roller:Coupling
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
41 - 4
41 - 15
41 - 13
31 - 1
41 - 12
41 - 9
23 - 20
23 - 27
23 - 26
23 - 25
29 - 12
27 - 13
27 - 10
27 - 5
27 - 7
27 - 2
27 - 4
21 - 5
21 - 1
21 - 7
21 - 3
29 - 14
29 - 16
33 - 13
29 - 23
29 - 22
29 - 2
29 - 24
29 - 25
25 - 17
25 - 10
25 - 14
25 - 3
25 - 6
25 - 27
B477 2231
B477 2262
B477 2263
B477 2264
B477 2272
B477 2281
B477 2286
B477 2291
B477 2322
B477 2323
B477 2332
B477 2333
B477 2342
B477 2351
B477 2361
B477 2372
B477 2373
B477 2382
B477 2391
B477 2411
B477 2421
B477 2425
B477 2431
B477 2441
B477 2451
B477 2452
B477 2453
B477 2455
B477 2471
B477 2480
B477 2481
B477 2487
B477 2491
B477 2495
B477 2511
Description
Pick-up Roller Lever
Original Table Base
Cushion
Base Cushion Sheet
Table Side Fence
Original Sensor Bracket
Original Sensor Feeler Stud
Original Table Stay
Base Lift Shaft
Base Lift Lever
Motor Bracket
Motor Bracket Cushion
Guide:Paper Feed:Upper
Driven Pull Out Roller
Pull Out Roller Bracket
Driven Paper Feed Roller
Relay Roller Arm
Paper Feed Grounding Plate
Drive Entrance Scanning Roller
Drive Scanning Roller
Front Scanning Roller Arm
Front Scanning Arm
Exit Cis Roller
Rear Lever Shaft - Misffed Removal
Lever Shaft - Misfeed Removal
Rear Lock Hook - CIS
Front Lock Hook - CIS
Entrance Scanning Guide Plate
Upper Exit Scanning Guide Plate
Upper Exit Scanning Sheet
Anti-static Brush
Scanning Roller
249
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
25 - 9
23 - 8
23 - 9
23 - 16
23 - 1
23 - 11
23 - 7
23 - 23
23 - 13
23 - 12
39 - 29
41 - 3
27 - 26
27 - 21
27 - 12
27 - 24
27 - 23
27 - 18
27 - 14
29 - 15
31 - 11
31 - 10
31 - 9
33 - 15
31 - 26
31 - 15
31 - 14
31 - 17
29 - 20
31 - 27
31 - 21
31 - 22
31 - 20
31 - 18
31 - 8
Part No.
B477 2516
B477 2517
B477 2521
B477 2561
B477 2574
B477 2575
B477 2577
B477 2581
B477 2611
B477 2621
B477 2621
B477 2631
B477 2636
B477 2637
B477 2641
B477 2645
B477 2651
B477 2653
B477 2661
B477 2665
B477 2682
B477 2683
B477 2711
B477 2715
B477 2715
B477 2811
B477 2820
B477 2841
B477 2851
B477 2861
B477 2872
B477 2875
B477 2881
B477 3111
B477 3115
Description
Discharge Brush
Scanning Guide Plate
Scanning Roller Cover
Entrance Scanning Base
Roller Arm
Entrance Scanning Roller Shaft
Driven Entrance Scanning Roller
Lower Exit
Anti-static Brush
Anti-static Brush
Lower Exit Guide Plate
Driven Exit Scanning Roller
Driven Exit Arm
Long Arm Shaft
Short Arm Shaft
Back Scanning Roller
Bushing - 6mm
Back Scanning Positioning Pin
Registration Sensor Bracket
CIS Sheet Bracket
CIS Sheet
Pressure Plate
Pressure Plate Tape
Pressure Plate Tape
Drive Exit Roller
Lower Exit Guide
Lower Exit Guide Plate Sheet
Driven Exit Roller
Exit Arm
Exit Shaft
Guide Plate Bracket
Paper Feed Motor Bracket
Paper Feed Motor Stay
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
31 - 25
31 - 6
31 - 23
29 - 10
29 - 8
29 - 7
29 - 4
29 - 1
35 - 14
33 - 2
35 - 12
35 - 4
35 - 6
35 - 8
35 - 3
35 - 5
35 - 11
35 - 9
35 - 2
29 - 18
33 - 8
33 - 7
21 - 2
21 - 4
35 - 13
33 - 16
33 - 17
35 - 23
35 - 22
35 - 19
35 - 20
35 - 24
35 - 15
37 - 3
37 - 2
B477 3121
B477 3123
B477 3131
B477 3141
B477 3143
B477 3145
B477 3151
B477 3161
B477 3163
B477 3171
B477 3173
B477 3175
B477 3177
B477 3181
B477 3211
B477 3215
B477 3217
B477 3231
B477 3241
B477 3243
B477 3245
B477 3251
B477 3711
B477 3721
B477 3731
B477 3811
B477 3812
B477 3813
B477 3814
B477 3815
B477 3816
B477 3817
B477 3818
B477 3819
B477 3820
250
Description
Gear - 24Z
Reverse Roller Shaft
Gear - 23Z
Gear - 20Z
Pulley
Gear - 31Z
Gear - 37Z
Gear - 50Z
Pulley
Pulley
Pulley
Pulley
Paper Feed Drive Bracket
Scanning Motor Bracket
Scanning Motor Stay
Pulley
Tighter
Gear - 21Z
Pulley
Pulley
Pick-up Roller Cam
Paper Feed Motor
Scanning Motor
Exit Motor
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Page and
Index No.
37 - 10
37 - 11
33 - 12
37 - 22
37 - 24
37 - 18
37 - 7
37 - 6
37 - 5
37 - 30
37 - 27
39 - 33
37 - 26
37 - 19
39 - 15
39 - 14
39 - 17
39 - 35
35 - 1
33 - 5
33 - 3
37 - 21
37 - 1
39 - 13
39 - 11
37 - 17
37 - 23
37 - 29
39 - 21
39 - 18
39 - 22
31 - 24
39 - 19
33 - 4
37 - 15
Part No.
B477 3821
B477 3931
B477 3933
B477 4111
B477 4113
B477 4115
B477 4117
B477 4121
B477 4123
B477 4125
B477 4127
B477 4129
B477 4131
B477 4132
B477 4141
B477 4311
B477 4311
B477 4331
B477 4331
B477 4341
B477 4341
B477 4342
B477 4342
B477 4351
B477 4352
B477 4352
B477 4361
B477 4361
B477 4362
B477 4362
B477 4371
B477 4371
B477 4381
B477 4381
B477 4391
Description
Timing Belt
X/X MB14
Cis Invertor Bracket
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Exit Arm Spring
Spring - 12n
Spring
Spring
Spring - 12.6n
X/X MB10
X/X MB10
X/X MB10
Decal - Cleaning
Decal - Cleaning
Caution Decal - CIS
Caution Decal - CIS
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
37 - 28
33 - 6
33 - 6
27 - 20
27 - 25
29 - 3
27 - 6
31 - 3
31 - 4
31 - 16
35 - 7
35 - 10
35 - 18
35 - 21
39 - 31
221 - 32
23 - 4
27 - 11
221 - 33
27 - 8
221 - 40
221 - 40
27 - 8
221 - 34
221 - 34
27 - 9
21 - 11
221 - 35
21 - 11
221 - 35
221 - 41
15 - 32
221 - 36
21 - 9
17 - 11
B477 4391
B477 4431
B477 4431
B477 4431
B477 4911
B477 4912
B477 4921
B477 5515
B477 5581
B477 5601
B477 5611
B477 5621
B477 5631
B477 5651
B477 5671
B477 5681
B477 5691
B477 5711
B477 5721
B477 5731
B477 5741
B477 5741
B477 5751
B477 5761
B477 5820
B477 5840
B514 5970
B514 5970
B584 5010
G011 1058
G020 3566
G029 1982
G029 1982
G029 1982
G331 5700
Description
Rear Cover Sponge
Paper Feed Cover Sponge
Clamp
Main ROM
ADF Main Control Board Ass'y
Detection Sensor Harness
Original Sensor Harness
Original Table Harness
Paper Size Relay Harness
Registration Sensor Relay Harness
Paper Feed Motor Harness
Pick-up Motor Harness
CIS Harness
ADF-CIS Harness
Interface Harness
CIS Harness
X/X MB43
PCB:DDR-DIMM:128MB:Ass'y
Snap Ring
Nut - 2.4mm
LD - Decal
LD - Decal
LD - Decal
SDRAM - 128MB
251
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
221 - 37
21 - 8
15 - 33
221 - 38
21 - 6
27 - 3
41 - 16
39 - 37
39 - 8
39 - 3
39 - 4
39 - 5
23 - 29
27 - 15
27 - 27
29 - 26
39 - 9
39 - 7
39 - 10
39 - 6
43 - 21
23 - 17
39 - 1
39 - 36
33 - 14
33 - 14
131 - 13
133 - 1
133 - 15
71 - 10
89 - 1
45 - 2
49 - 28
221 - 39
131 - 7
Part No.
G331 5720
G338 1421
G338 1449
G564 4151
G564 6077
G564 6077
G570 2827
H053 1150
H053 2208
H084 1501
H521 1336
Description
PCB SDRAM-DIMM 128Mb Ass'y
Keytop - Printer/Scanner - US
Keytop:PRT/SCN:NA (B142/B143/B228)
Rail - Side Fence
Decal:Exposure Glass:5-Lang
Decal:Exposure Glass:5-lang
Supporting Plate
Stepped Screw - Locking
Bushing - M4
Trast Screw
Lock Spring
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
135 - 2
19 - 27
19 - 23
23 - 3
221 - 40
27 - 8
51 - 16
91 - 18
127 - 20
97 - 14
111 - 20
N803 1000
N803 6701
252
Description
Case - Flash Memory Card
Flash Memory Card-4MB
Page and
Index No.
223 - 4
223 - 3
Part No.
AA00 0059
AA00 0059
AA00 0250
AA00 0250
AA00 0250
AA00 0542
AA00 0550
AA00 0550
AA00 1213
AA00 1213
AA00 1394
AA00 1394
AA00 2010
AA00 2010
AA00 2010
AA00 2010
AA00 2246
AA00 2246
AA00 2258
AA00 2258
AA00 2259
AA00 2259
AA00 2261
AA00 2261
AA01 0108
AA01 0114
AA01 2060
AA01 2060
AA01 2128
AA02 1025
AA04 0056
AA04 0056
AA04 3269
AA04 3271
AA04 3290
Description
LD - Decal (CHN)
Decal - Laser Class 1 (EU)
Caution Decal - CHN
Caution Decal - CHN
Decal - B2
Decal - B2
Decal - Paper Level
Decal - Paper Level
Decal - Paper Level
Decal - Paper Level
Decal - Caution
Decal - Caution
Decal - Paper Size LT
Decal - Paper Size - LT
Ozone Filter
Front Ozone Filter
Development Filter
Development Filter
Machine Or Copier Filter
Magnet Catch
Driven Roller
Driven Roller
Timing Belt - S2M114
Timing Belt S3M196T
Timing Belt (Model C1)
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
221 - 5
17 - 4
49 - 28
45 - 2
221 - 39
221 - 46
221 - 5
17 - 4
73 - 4
221 - 6
75 - 37
221 - 7
53 - 14
55 - 21
59 - 21
221 - 8
55 - 3
221 - 9
221 - 10
59 - 6
59 - 6
221 - 10
221 - 11
59 - 7
17 - 22
17 - 23
79 - 17
85 - 9
17 - 18
117 - 12
109 - 7
111 - 5
123 - 5
53 - 24
111 - 24
AA04 3291
AA04 3292
AA04 3293
AA04 3294
AA04 3315
AA04 3575
AA04 3575
AA04 3576
AA04 3944
AA04 3945
AA04 3946
AA04 3948
AA06 0221
AA06 0291
AA06 0291
AA06 0534
AA06 0539
AA06 0592
AA06 0718
AA06 0720
AA06 0728
AA06 0757
AA06 0758
AA06 0759
AA06 0763
AA06 0792
AA06 0806
AA06 0842
AA06 0846
AA06 0887
AA06 0888
AA06 0890
AA06 0891
AA06 0892
AA06 0893
Description
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt:S2m:40x426 (Model C2)
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Gripper Solenoid Spring
Spring
Spring
Tray Lock Spring - 19mm
Stripper Pawl Spring
Lock Spring - Tandem Tray
Tension Spring
Tension Spring - 7.75N
Tension Spring
Tension Spring - Long
Tension Spring - Short
Tension Spring
Tension Spring
Tension Spring
Spring
Tension Spring
Tension Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Pick-off Pawl Spring
Spring
253
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
117 - 4
117 - 9
119 - 10
121 - 9
111 - 24
65 - 18
67 - 7
65 - 42
71 - 21
125 - 22
123 - 18
125 - 15
49 - 7
75 - 3
77 - 24
153 - 2
97 - 12
151 - 2
111 - 21
123 - 8
115 - 12
57 - 5
57 - 3
53 - 31
49 - 17
125 - 17
117 - 16
37 - 4
39 - 16
69 - 19
69 - 14
73 - 29
85 - 11
89 - 3
103 - 1
Part No.
AA06 0894
AA06 0894
AA06 0896
AA06 0897
AA06 0898
AA06 0899
AA06 0900
AA06 0901
AA06 0902
AA06 0903
AA06 0904
AA06 0911
AA06 0914
AA06 0916
AA06 0946
AA06 2251
AA06 2252
AA06 2284
AA06 2318
AA06 2318
AA06 2319
AA06 2320
AA06 3052
AA06 3248
AA06 3249
AA06 3254
AA06 3255
AA06 3268
AA06 3310
AA06 3315
AA06 3366
AA06 3487
AA06 3490
AA06 3575
AA06 3576
Description
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Stripper Pawls Spring
Slider Spring
Spring - Large
Spring - Small
Pressure Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Turret Spring
Charge Terminal Spring
Grid Terminal Spring
Driven Roller Spring
Exit Roller Spring
Connector Spring
Guide Plate Spring
Spring - Belt Drive Shaft
Chuck Spring
Spring - 10mm
Spring - 21.6mm
Toner Bottle Spring
Spring
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
97 - 8
101 - 4
63 - 30
63 - 18
63 - 8
63 - 11
65 - 21
65 - 17
109 - 1
107 - 5
65 - 40
71 - 26
97 - 25
97 - 13
105 - 1
143 - 5
143 - 4
83 - 20
115 - 2
121 - 19
121 - 28
113 - 7
145 - 17
83 - 14
83 - 15
73 - 2
73 - 17
143 - 22
91 - 19
25 - 19
75 - 24
67 - 22
123 - 13
75 - 27
89 - 30
AA06 3577
AA06 3579
AA06 3581
AA06 3582
AA06 3610
AA06 3654
AA06 3655
AA06 3851
AA06 3877
AA06 3878
AA06 3879
AA06 3880
AA06 3880
AA06 3886
AA06 3889
AA06 3901
AA06 6211
AA06 6309
AA06 6352
AA06 6353
AA06 6592
AA06 6651
AA07 0044
AA07 0058
AA07 0061
AA08 0034
AA08 0034
AA08 0034
AA08 0034
AA08 0037
AA08 0147
AA08 0152
AA08 0176
AA08 0184
AA08 0240
254
Description
Compression Spring
Compression Spring
Compression Spring
Compression Spring
Spring - 4060mN
Spring
Spring
Pressure Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Heat Sink Spring
Compression Spring:Drawer
Rear Lock Spring
Torsion Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Spring
Slide Rail - Tandem LCT
Right Slide Rail
Leftslide Rail
Bushing - 4x5x7
Bushing - 4x5x7
Bushing - 4x5x7
Bushing - 4x5x7
Bushing - 6mm
Front Bushing
Bushing - 4x12x13
Bushing
Bushing - Fusing Exit
Bushing - MM5
Page and
Index No.
107 - 10
115 - 6
113 - 25
115 - 20
89 - 10
125 - 27
117 - 23
95 - 36
93 - 7
67 - 10
107 - 25
139 - 15
143 - 11
95 - 10
63 - 34
139 - 23
73 - 8
123 - 21
97 - 20
113 - 12
107 - 22
123 - 16
151 - 10
147 - 17
149 - 5
107 - 9
73 - 16
115 - 7
117 - 22
27 - 19
83 - 5
81 - 6
85 - 18
107 - 18
107 - 26
Part No.
AA08 0241
AA08 0274
AA08 0327
AA08 2058
AA08 2064
AA08 2094
AA08 2101
AA08 2101
AA08 2101
AA08 2116
AA08 2116
AA08 2116
AA08 2117
AA08 2117
AA08 2118
AA08 2118
AA08 2118
AA08 2118
AA08 2118
AA08 2118
AA08 2119
AA08 2120
AA08 2121
AA08 2121
AA08 2122
AA08 2141
AA08 3019
AA10 0006
AA12 0067
AA13 2013
AA13 2024
AA13 2024
AA13 2024
AA13 2025
AA13 2025
Description
Bushing - M4
Bushing
Bushing - M4
Bushing - 6x10x9mm
Bushing - 10mm
Bushing - Brush Roller
Bushing - 6x10x6
Bushing - 6x10x6
Bushing - 6x10x6
Bushing - M8
Bushing - M8
Bushing - M8
Bushing - M6
Bushing - M6
Bushing - M6
Bushing - M6
Bushing - M6
Bushing - M6
Bushing - M6
Bushing - M6
Roller Bushing
Bushing
Bushing
Bushing - 16x18x5
Bushing
Nut - M3.6
Anti Static Brush
Spacer
Spacer - M6
Spacer - M6
Spacer - M6
Spacer - 1x8x12
Spacer
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
67 - 21
97 - 18
65 - 3
93 - 22
147 - 2
87 - 11
89 - 19
93 - 14
87 - 10
73 - 11
115 - 10
69 - 13
109 - 3
105 - 27
65 - 10
71 - 13
63 - 7
117 - 17
119 - 3
115 - 9
87 - 6
89 - 14
89 - 28
87 - 3
85 - 15
29 - 11
69 - 21
15 - 26
149 - 1
25 - 18
75 - 33
93 - 9
87 - 9
71 - 4
125 - 29
AA13 2152
AA13 2171
AA13 2174
AA13 2203
AA13 2203
AA13 2208
AA13 2208
AA13 2208
AA14 0486
AA14 0685
AA14 0686
AA14 0819
AA14 0823
AA14 0824
AA14 0828
AA14 0829
AA14 3037
AA14 3039
AA14 3074
AA14 3129
AA14 3183
AA14 3402
AA14 3416
AA14 3426
AA14 3426
AA14 3432
AA14 3499
AA14 3499
AA14 3520
AA14 3523
AA14 3534
AA14 3715
AA14 3718
AA14 3758
AA14 3781
Description
Spacer - 8x20x1
Spacer - 6x20x1
Spacer - M8
Spacer - 6mm
Spacer - 6mm
Spacer - M6
Spacer - M6
Spacer - M6
Lock Shaft
Shaft - Back Fence Slider
Shaft - Timing Pulley
Feed Roller Shaft
Pressure Roller Shaft
Stripper Pawl Release Shaft
Feed Roller Shaft
Driven Shaft
Spring Holder
Shoulder Screw - Front Cover
Stepped Screw
Screw - Scale
Stepped Screw - M3
Stepped Screw
Stepped Screw
Shoulder Screw - M3
Shoulder Screw - M3
Screw - M3X4.2
Stepped Screw - M5
Stepped Screw - M4
Setepped Screw
Binding Screw - M3x3.5
255
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
39 - 27
25 - 7
47 - 2
143 - 2
57 - 24
89 - 9
85 - 29
127 - 12
73 - 5
53 - 21
53 - 29
69 - 18
99 - 28
97 - 22
63 - 9
65 - 4
97 - 10
41 - 5
29 - 13
115 - 3
117 - 13
65 - 6
17 - 12
115 - 26
81 - 5
89 - 31
131 - 19
133 - 6
43 - 8
89 - 5
133 - 4
67 - 24
65 - 16
75 - 21
131 - 14
Part No.
AA14 3798
AA14 3801
AA14 3803
AA14 3809
AA14 3810
AA14 3810
AA14 3810
AA14 3811
AA14 3811
AA14 3812
AA14 3815
AA14 3816
AA14 5817
AA14 9746
AA15 0361
AA15 0704
AA15 1775
AA15 2315
AA15 2431
AA15 2441
AA15 2701
AA15 3063
AA15 3085
AA15 3088
AA15 3138
AA15 3144
AA15 3145
AA15 3146
AA15 3147
AA15 3148
AA15 3149
AA15 3150
AA15 3151
AA15 3152
AA15 3153
Description
Hexagonal Bolt:M12x35
Screw:M4:Exterior
Flanged Hexagonal Head Bolt:Caster
Development Cover Screw (B142/B143/B228)
Screw - Scale (B142/B143/B228)
Screw - M3X3.5
Flat Screw:Chuck:Bottle
Idler Shaft - Toner Bottle
Stripper Shaft
Slitter Cover Seal
Seal - 90x29.5x0.2
Seal - Fan
Tank Seal
Front Drum Seal
Case Seal
Duct Seal
Seal - 4x10x70
Inner Case Seal
Cleaning Entrance Seal - 3x345x2
Inner Cover Cushion - Right Rear
Duct Seal - IPS A
Duct Seal - IPS B
Duct Seal - IPS C
Duct Seal - IPS D
Duct Seal - Charge A
Duct Seal - Charge B
Duct Seal - Fusing
Duct Seal - PCU A
Duct Seal - PCU B
Duct Seal - PCU C
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
153 - 9
129 - 6
153 - 8
67 - 29
103 - 16
105 - 16
97 - 10
117 - 26
113 - 17
65 - 6
133 - 3
75 - 20
75 - 5
97 - 26
77 - 13
43 - 2
137 - 6
17 - 35
87 - 12
69 - 5
17 - 17
55 - 17
87 - 13
87 - 14
55 - 18
145 - 20
145 - 21
145 - 22
145 - 23
145 - 11
145 - 12
145 - 8
139 - 8
139 - 9
139 - 10
AA15 3154
AA15 3155
AA15 3156
AA15 3157
AA16 1096
AA16 1104
AA16 1104
AA16 1122
AA16 1125
AA16 1125
AA16 1129
AA16 1130
AA16 1158
AA16 1159
AA16 2079
AB01 0087
AB01 1391
AB01 1457
AB01 1459
AB01 1459
AB01 1460
AB01 1460
AB01 1461
AB01 1462
AB01 1463
AB01 1464
AB01 1465
AB01 1466
AB01 1466
AB01 1469
AB01 1470
AB01 1471
AB01 1478
AB01 1482
AB01 1490
256
Description
Duct Seal - PCU
Duct Seal - IPS
Exhaust Duct Seal
Joint Seal
Stopper Cushion
Cushion - Motor
Cushion - Motor
Motor Cushion
Rubber Cushion
Rubber Cushion
Cushion - Large
Cushion - Small
Cushion - Spacer
Cushion - Wire
Cushion
Gear - 20Z
Driven Reverse Gear - 21Z
Transport Roller Gear
Idler Gear
Idler Gear
Toner Recycling Connecting Gear
Toner Recycling Gear
Connecting Gear
Turn Gear
Idler Gear
Gear - 35Z
Gear - 35Z
Gear - 19Z
Gear - 18Z
Reverse Gear
Gear - 18Z
Gear - 40Z
Gear - 38Z
Page and
Index No.
139 - 1
137 - 3
137 - 11
85 - 19
143 - 17
137 - 1
149 - 26
123 - 3
133 - 5
131 - 18
57 - 26
57 - 29
83 - 11
83 - 22
73 - 25
83 - 24
65 - 27
73 - 13
89 - 18
87 - 17
89 - 27
87 - 21
85 - 12
85 - 13
119 - 5
119 - 1
63 - 5
67 - 6
63 - 25
65 - 11
65 - 13
65 - 26
69 - 12
125 - 14
65 - 23
Part No.
AB01 1491
AB01 1496
AB01 2028
AB01 2031
AB01 2315
AB01 2316
AB01 2316
AB01 2317
AB01 2317
AB01 2318
AB01 2318
AB01 2319
AB01 2319
AB01 3747
AB01 3748
AB01 3749
AB01 3781
AB01 3790
AB01 3792
AB01 3798
AB01 3868
AB01 4077
AB01 4176
AB01 7357
AB01 7449
AB01 7606
AB01 7607
AB01 7608
AB01 7609
AB01 7611
AB01 7612
AB01 7614
AB01 7615
AB01 7616
AB01 7617
Description
Gear - 21Z
Gear - 32Z (Model C2)
Gear - 19Z
Gear
Gear - 156Z
X/X MB53
Fusing Gear
Fusing Drive Gear
Fusing Drive Gear
Idler Gear
Idler Gear
Exit Gear
Exit Gear
Gear - 16Z
Joint Gear - 15Z
Gear - 15Z
Gear - 30Z
Gear - 25Z
X/X MB59
Gear - Z18
Gear - 16Z
Registration Roller Gear
Cam Gear - 37z
X/X MB59
Gear - 21Z/24T
Gear - 24Z/46Z
Gear - 22Z/39Z
Reverse Gear
Reverse Gear
Pick-off Pawl Cam
Gear
Pulley
Gear
Gear
Gear - 21Z/38Z
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
65 - 24
119 - 6
109 - 6
111 - 14
125 - 13
99 - 22
99 - 22
103 - 22
105 - 22
105 - 21
103 - 21
105 - 7
103 - 7
77 - 26
77 - 25
77 - 27
57 - 37
79 - 13
99 - 22
53 - 36
59 - 19
71 - 20
93 - 24
103 - 22
123 - 6
71 - 30
73 - 32
71 - 11
71 - 19
89 - 7
87 - 20
119 - 4
121 - 17
117 - 3
63 - 16
AB01 7619
AB01 7640
AB01 7690
AB01 9197
AB01 9200
AB01 9475
AB03 0427
AB03 0458
AB03 0578
AB03 0579
AB03 0583
AB03 0722
AB03 0724
AB03 0725
AB03 0727
AB03 0731
AB03 0732
AB03 0733
AB03 0734
AB03 2058
AB03 2069
AB03 2070
AB03 2716
AB03 2717
AB03 2717
AB03 2719
AB03 3084
AB03 3085
AC01 2067
AC01 5037
AC02 4007
AC03 0147
AC03 0148
AD02 2283
AD02 2285
Description
Gear - 24Z/40Z
Gear - 38Z/59Z
Pulley:Idler:30t/24z
Exit Gear
Gear
Gear - 48T
Pulley - 81Z
Pulley - 28Z
Timing Pulley - 18Z
Timing Pulley - 27Z
Timing Pulley - 24Z
Pulley - 13mm
Pulley - 74Z
Pulley - 89Z
Pulley - 58Z
Pulley - 29Z
Jogger Pulley
Pulley - 20T
Pulley - 30Z
Wire Pulley - M10
Pulley
Pulley
Idle Pulley - M18
Pulley - 26Z
Pulley - 26Z
Pulley - M10
Timing Pulley - 15T
Timing Pulley - 15T
Exposure Glass
Shield Glass
Lens - L0
1st Mirror
2nd Mirror
Front End Block
Rear End Block
257
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
67 - 8
125 - 16
65 - 19
111 - 16
111 - 23
53 - 30
123 - 9
125 - 21
109 - 17
111 - 27
119 - 15
73 - 28
125 - 24
123 - 24
49 - 21
119 - 7
121 - 20
65 - 41
65 - 22
57 - 15
49 - 25
49 - 22
123 - 19
49 - 2
47 - 1
57 - 17
53 - 27
53 - 20
43 - 13
51 - 28
51 - 9
51 - 10
51 - 22
83 - 21
83 - 16
Part No.
AD02 2306
AD02 2307
AD02 5024
AD04 1076
AD04 1083
AD04 2038
AD04 3078
AD04 7025
AE01 1087
AE01 1095
AE02 0112
AE02 0145
AE03 0017
AE03 0018
AE03 0053
AE03 0054
AE03 0055
AE03 0056
AE03 1024
AE03 1026
AE03 1026
AE03 1036
AE03 2014
AE03 2026
AE04 0038
AE04 2052
AE04 2066
AE04 4043
AE04 4060
AE04 5046
AF01 0091
AF01 0092
AF01 1043
AF01 3005
AF01 6079
Description
Cover - Front End Block
Cover - Rear End Block
Pick-off Pawl
Cleaning Blade
Cleaning Brush
Exit Seal
Hot Roller
Hot Roller - Mm40
Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller - Mm40
Bushing - M4x7
Bushing - 6mm
Bushing - 30x35x13.5
Thermal Insulating Bushing
Cleaning Web Pressure Roller (Model C1)
Cleaning Roller
Paper Tray (A4)
Paper Tray - LT
Bottom Plate
Bottom Plate Pad
Left Rear Side Fence
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
83 - 25
83 - 17
89 - 4
93 - 1
89 - 8
87 - 7
85 - 24
93 - 11
99 - 23
101 - 1
99 - 27
101 - 7
99 - 2
99 - 26
101 - 8
101 - 2
105 - 36
105 - 11
103 - 9
105 - 8
95 - 9
95 - 19
99 - 1
101 - 3
95 - 14
103 - 10
105 - 10
97 - 27
97 - 27
95 - 16
59 - 4
59 - 4
59 - 18
59 - 17
59 - 9
AF01 7029
AF02 0295
AF02 0484
AF02 0562
AF02 0562
AF02 0564
AF02 0565
AF02 0578
AF02 0579
AF02 0581
AF02 0604
AF02 0605
AF02 1074
AF02 1075
AF02 1076
AF02 1077
AF02 1078
AF02 1079
AF02 2067
AF02 2077
AF02 2105
AF02 2110
AF02 2126
AF02 2149
AF03 0050
AF03 0051
AF03 0080
AF03 0081
AF03 1065
AF03 1066
AF03 1082
AF03 1083
AF03 2050
AF03 2050
AF03 2080
258
Description
Paper End Fence
Vertical Driven Roller
Driven Reverse Roller
Transport Roller
Transport Roller
Connecting Roller
Inverter Roller
Entrancedecura Roller (Model C1)
Exitdecura Roller (Model C1)
Exit Drive Roller
Entrance Decura Roller (Model C2)
Exit Decura Roller (Model C2)
Entrance Inverter Roller
Duplex Turn Roller
Drive Inverter Roller
Driven Transport Roller
Left Drive Roller
Right Drive Roller
Guide Stopper Roller
Driven Roller
Roller - Slide Rail
Exit Roller - Driven
Transport Roller
Page and
Index No.
59 - 15
67 - 20
117 - 24
63 - 24
67 - 5
73 - 12
109 - 5
109 - 13
109 - 12
111 - 3
109 - 13
109 - 12
115 - 17
119 - 8
119 - 11
119 - 9
119 - 12
119 - 14
113 - 27
113 - 21
57 - 28
73 - 19
107 - 11
65 - 2
69 - 17
63 - 1
69 - 17
63 - 1
63 - 3
69 - 11
63 - 3
69 - 11
65 - 36
71 - 15
71 - 15
AF03 2080
AF04 0055
AF04 0055
AF04 0561
AG05 0092
AG05 0098
AG07 1011
AH01 2016
AH01 2029
AW01 0034
AW01 0049
AW01 0049
AW01 0049
AW01 0058
AW01 0059
AW01 0087
AW01 0098
AW01 0098
AW01 0098
AW02 0008
AW02 0056
AW02 0056
AW02 0056
AW02 0056
AW02 0056
AW02 0056
AW02 0075
AW02 0075
AW02 0075
AW02 0086
AW02 0095
AW02 0104
AW02 0120
AW02 0120
AW02 0120
Description
Fusing Exit Roller
Fusing Exit Roller
Fusing Exit Roller - Upper
Knob:fusing (Model C1)
Knob:Fusing (Model C2)
Magnet Catch
Caster - G60 (TWN)
Caster:1470n
Original Width Sensor
Photosensor
Original Sensor - H=1-66
Photo Sensor - Ass'y
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor - Ee-sx4235a-p1
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
65 - 36
103 - 6
105 - 6
97 - 24
95 - 6
95 - 6
149 - 9
153 - 7
153 - 7
43 - 1
27 - 22
29 - 17
31 - 19
115 - 24
43 - 18
23 - 28
71 - 22
69 - 2
63 - 13
53 - 3
71 - 25
63 - 22
57 - 9
53 - 35
105 - 26
49 - 10
41 - 14
37 - 13
33 - 19
23 - 10
27 - 17
27 - 16
95 - 29
55 - 10
127 - 31
AW02 0120
AW02 0120
AW02 0128
AW02 0130
AW02 0130
AW02 0133
AW10 0052
AW10 0076
AW10 0084
AW10 0096
AW11 0026
AW11 0027
AW11 0040
AW11 0052
AW14 0010
AW20 0005
AW20 0005
AW23 0015
AW31 0003
AW33 0003
AW50 0010
AW50 0023
AX04 0061
AX04 0096
AX04 0107
AX04 0135
AX04 0136
AX06 0151
AX06 0235
AX06 0253
AX06 0275
AX06 0277
AX20 0242
AX20 0243
AX31 0047
Description
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Photointerruptor
Thermistor - Center
Thermistor:inner Back
Middle Thermistor
Thermostat - 180 C
Thermostat - 179 C
Thermostat - 192C
Thermostat:211C
Temperature/humidity Sensor (Model C2)
Reed Switch
Reed Switch
Toner End Sensor
Push Switch
Push Switch
Cleaner Motor - DC 0.5W
Stepping Motor - DC 18W
DC Motor - 19.2W
Paper Tray Motor
Cleaning Motor
Stepper Motor
DC Motor
Fusing Motor (Model C1)
Fusing/Exit Motor - DC24V 2.4W (Model C2)
Magnetic Clutch
Magnetic Clutch (Model C1)
Total Counter:7FIG:24V:MI2
Part No.
259
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
73 - 22
121 - 3
121 - 13
113 - 20
121 - 14
107 - 13
101 - 20
99 - 15
99 - 6
101 - 19
99 - 10
99 - 11
101 - 9
101 - 10
141 - 16
103 - 15
105 - 15
79 - 10
77 - 11
85 - 6
143 - 16
127 - 4
83 - 23
37 - 25
53 - 34
143 - 8
95 - 27
123 - 2
127 - 19
123 - 23
123 - 23
51 - 13
69 - 22
119 - 6
147 - 7
Part No.
AX40 0063
AX40 0064
AX40 0150
AX40 0151
AX40 0156
AX40 0157
AX40 0160
AX40 0161
AX40 0176
AX40 0178
AX44 0163
AX44 0164
AX44 0213
AX44 0214
AX44 0215
AX44 0216
AX44 0217
AX44 0218
AX50 0081
AX64 0098
AX64 0110
AX64 0135
AX64 0136
AX64 0136
AX64 0137
AX64 0137
AX64 0147
AX65 0030
AZ00 0070
AZ23 0140
AZ23 0141
AZ24 0073
AZ24 0078
AZ24 0079
AZ24 0092
Description
Heater - 115V 18W
Heater - 240V 18W
Heater - 120V 9W
Heater - 230V 9W
Heater:120v:550w
Heater:120v:650w
Heater:230v:550w
Heater:230v:650w
Exposure Lamp
Fan Motor - DC5V 1.2W
Axial Fan - Mm40 24V
Cooling Fan - 24V
Cooling Fan - 24V
Cooling Fan - 24V
Cooling Fan - 24V
Cooling Fan - 24V
Fan Motor - 12V
Cooling Fan - 24V
Power Supply Unit DOM/NA
Power Supply Unit:CTL:EU/AA
DC Power Supply Board - 240V
Power Supply Unit Main DOM/NA (Model C2)
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
43 - 9
43 - 9
151 - 8
151 - 8
153 - 13
153 - 13
147 - 12
147 - 12
153 - 13
153 - 13
99 - 24
99 - 24
101 - 26
101 - 27
101 - 28
101 - 26
101 - 27
101 - 28
47 - 9
131 - 11
17 - 14
45 - 17
139 - 4
149 - 19
15 - 18
129 - 12
135 - 15
137 - 12
141 - 11
135 - 12
135 - 12
141 - 7
141 - 7
141 - 7
141 - 7
AZ24 0093
AZ30 0053
AZ32 0107
AZ32 0139
AZ50 0060
BC01 2003
GA00 3035
GC02 5010
260
Description
Power Supply Unit:Main:EU/AA (Model C2)
Development Power Pack
Transfer Power Pack
Charactor Generator Power Pack
Exposure Lamp Inverter
Sheet Through Exposure Glass
Energy Decal (Model C2)
Lens L2
Page and
Index No.
141 - 7
139 - 5
93 - 26
137 - 13
47 - 23
43 - 6
15 - 34
51 - 19
Part No.
VSST 9500
Description
Test Chart - S5S- DF (10 Sheet/set)
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
223 - 2
0313 0040N
0313 0050N
0313 0060N
0313 0080N
0313 0080N
0313 0080N
0313 0100N
0313 0100N
0313 0120N
0314 0040N
0314 0060N
0314 0060N
0314 0060N
0314 0060N
0314 0060N
0314 0080N
0314 0100N
0314 0120N
0314 0120N
0353 0040N
0353 0040N
0353 0040N
0353 0040N
0353 0040N
0353 0040N
0353 0050N
0353 0050N
0353 0050N
0353 0050N
0353 0060N
0353 0060N
0353 0060N
0353 0060N
0353 0060N
0353 0060N
Description
X/X MB60
Screw - M3X4
Screw - M3X4
Screw - M3X4
Screw - M3X4
Screw - M3X4
Screw - M3X4
261
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
151 -103
99 -108
109 -106
53 -103
57 -105
99 -106
181 -106
17 -104
57 -110
151 -104
55 -105
89 -101
49 -106
53 -105
77 -107
49 -104
99 -107
49 -105
99 -107
131 -106
43 -101
117 -110
67 -103
63 -104
65 -101
101 -106
39 -106
117 -104
115 -104
95 -106
107 -102
111 -111
43 -102
51 -105
45 -102
0353 0060N
0353 0060N
0353 0080N
0353 0080N
0353 0080N
0353 0080N
0353 0120N
0354 0050N
0354 0060N
0354 0060N
0354 0060N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0080N
0354 0120N
0354 0120N
0354 0300N
0360 3006N
0360 3006N
0360 3006N
0360 3008N
0360 4006N
0360 4006N
0360 4006N
0360 4006N
0360 4006N
Description
Screw - M3X8
Screw - M3X8
Screw - M3X8
Screw - M3X8
Bind Screw - M3x12
Bind Screw - M4x5
Screw - M4X6
Screw - M4X6
Screw - M4X6
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X8
Screw - M4X12
Screw - M4X12
Screw - M3x30
Screw - M3X6
Screw - M3X6
Screw - M3X6
Screw - M3X8
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
79 -101
49 -103
107 -108
43 -104
101 -108
51 -101
145 -105
123 -106
49 -107
95 -108
115 -106
95 -109
85 -101
127 -103
83 -101
51 -102
43 -105
15 -103
79 -105
45 -103
75 -108
77 -108
49 -101
101 -107
81 -103
149 -111
129 -109
135 -101
131 -107
129 -113
95 -101
133 -102
151 -105
105 -101
97 -101
0360 4006N
0360 4006N
0360 4006N
0360 4008N
0360 4008N
0414 0102N
0434 0060N
0434 0060N
0434 0060N
0434 0080N
0450 3006N
0450 3006N
0450 3006N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 3008N
0450 4008N
0450 4008N
0450 4008N
0450 4008N
0450 4008N
262
Description
Screw - M3x8
Screw - M3 X 8
Tapping Screw M4x10
Pan Head Self- Tapping Screw - M4x6
Pan Head Self - Tapping Screw - M4x8
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Page and
Index No.
103 -101
101 -104
99 -103
147 -105
59 -104
143 -104
53 -104
55 -102
57 -104
149 -107
23 -102
75 -107
117 -103
17 -102
35 -103
23 -101
93 -102
91 -101
117 -108
61 -101
113 -103
59 -107
83 -103
15 -101
125 -105
27 -103
29 -104
43 -103
75 -101
115 -105
139 -102
137 -104
65 -108
17 -105
59 -106
manuals4you.com
Part No.
Part No.
0450 4008N
0450 4008N
0450 4008N
0450 4010N
0450 4016N
0450 4035N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3006N
0451 3008N
0451 3008N
0451 3008N
0451 3008N
0451 3008N
0451 3008N
0451 3008N
0451 3012N
0451 3014N
0451 3020N
0451 4006N
0451 4006N
0451 4006N
0451 4006N
Description
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Tapping Screw - 4x8
Tapping Screw - 3x6
Tapping Screw - M3-14
Tapping Screw - 4x6
Tapping Screw - 4x6
Tapping Screw - 4x6
Tapping Screw - 4x6
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
77 -105
113 -104
125 -109
15 -102
137 -105
139 -103
33 -101
29 -101
133 -104
31 -101
37 -102
131 -101
41 -102
27 -105
147 -106
19 -101
149 -108
153 -101
21 -102
39 -101
35 -104
59 -101
141 -102
137 -107
139 -105
129 -101
27 -102
143 -103
17 -103
131 -103
135 -103
117 -109
39 -103
113 -102
121 -101
0451 4006N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
0451 4008N
Description
Tapping Screw - 4x6
263
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
37 -101
17 -106
43 -106
111 -105
63 -101
15 -104
61 -104
153 -104
65 -104
75 -105
125 -101
139 -101
67 -101
137 -106
131 -102
73 -115
127 -101
85 -104
143 -102
141 -101
121 -106
69 -104
147 -101
145 -102
55 -103
113 -101
109 -101
115 -107
123 -104
59 -102
149 -101
71 -102
45 -108
107 -101
151 -102
Part No.
0451 4008N
0451 4010N
0451 4010N
0451 4010N
0451 4010N
0451 4014N
0451 4014N
0451 4020N
0451 4020N
0452 3006N
0452 3006P
0452 3008N
0452 3008N
0452 3008N
0452 3008N
0452 3008N
0452 3008P
0452 3010N
0452 3010N
0452 3010N
0452 4008N
0452 4008N
0452 4010N
0453 3006N
0453 3006N
0453 3006N
0453 3006N
0453 3006N
0453 3006N
0453 3006N
0453 3006N
0453 3008N
0453 3008N
0453 3008N
0453 3008N
Description
MB17 ADDED
MB51 DELETED
Binding Self-tapping Screw - 3x8
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
129 -106
123 -101
17 -101
51 -103
149 -105
85 -107
85 -107
45 -105
129 -112
57 -111
47 -101
89 -102
107 -103
61 -103
85 -102
87 -102
77 -101
87 -103
89 -103
79 -103
55 -106
53 -108
53 -109
47 -102
43 -107
71 -109
107 -104
153 -102
61 -102
29 -105
73 -110
95 -110
111 -110
125 -102
145 -108
0453 3008N
0453 3008N
0453 4008N
0453 4008N
0453 4008N
0573 0030E
0623 0120E
0623 0140E
0632 0100G
0632 0120G
0632 0120G
0632 0140G
0633 0180G
0633 0180G
0633 0200G
0707 4050E
0707 4050E
0710 0030E
0720 0025E
0720 0030E
0720 0030E
0720 0030E
0720 0030E
0720 0030E
0720 0030E
0720 0030E
0720 0030E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
264
Description
Hexagon Headless Set Screw - M3x3
Spring Pin - M3x12
Spring Pin - 3x14mm
Pin - 2x10mm
Parallel Pin - 2x12
Parallel Pin - 2x12
Parallel Pin
Pin - M3x20
Bushing - 4x5
Bushing - 4x5
Hexagon Nut - M3
Retaining Ring - M2.5
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M3
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Page and
Index No.
121 -108
129 -107
59 -103
55 -108
147 -102
65 -102
91 -102
123 -108
71 -104
33 -104
37 -103
23 -104
91 -103
125 -111
57 -101
137 -102
149 -112
181 -107
83 -102
73 -111
41 -101
97 -102
79 -104
117 -101
81 -102
95 -104
35 -102
121 -107
151 -101
153 -103
95 -103
65 -103
147 -104
75 -103
119 -102
Part No.
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0040E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
Description
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
63 -105
71 -101
37 -104
143 -105
123 -105
145 -101
39 -104
77 -104
73 -109
103 -104
111 -109
105 -104
73 -113
113 -105
107 -107
27 -104
57 -102
33 -103
85 -105
149 -106
23 -105
87 -104
25 -102
115 -103
117 -102
109 -102
125 -107
53 -106
101 -101
111 -106
123 -102
77 -103
125 -108
23 -106
25 -101
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0720 0060E
0725 0120E
0725 0120E
0725 0300E
0727 0060E
0727 0060E
0727 0080G
0727 0080G
0741 3706
0742 3808
0742 3808
0742 3808
0742 3808
Description
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring C - 6
Retaining Ring - M8
Retaining Ring - M8
265
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
81 -101
39 -105
103 -102
49 -102
105 -102
115 -102
73 -112
123 -107
47 -106
37 -105
63 -106
33 -106
31 -102
59 -105
57 -103
65 -107
67 -104
109 -103
119 -101
91 -104
69 -106
29 -102
71 -103
125 -104
99 -109
99 -110
77 -106
77 -102
105 -105
103 -105
33 -108
63 -107
73 -114
29 -103
31 -103
Part No.
0742 3808
0742 3808
0742 3906
0800 0072
0801 0142
0801 0146
0801 0146
0802 5276
0802 5276
0802 5276
0802 5276
0802 5279
0803 0058
0805 0072
0805 0088
0805 0089
0805 0089
0805 0089
0805 0089
0805 3145
0805 3368
0805 3480
0807 4146
0807 5056
0807 5056
0950 3006M
0951 3004P
0951 3005N
0951 3006
0951 3006N
0951 3006N
0951 3006N
0951 3006N
0951 3006N
0951 3006N
Description
Philips Pan Head Screw - M2.6x4
Screw - Spring Washer - M5X8
Screw - M4X4
Screw - M4X4
Tapping Screw - With Washer - M3X8
Stepped Screw
CS Ring
Retaining Ring - M6
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M4
Bushing - 6mm
Flat Washer - 6.3x18x1
Washer - 8.1mm
Washer - 8.1mm
Philips Screw With Lock Washer
Philips Screw With Flat Washer - M3
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
33 -107
67 -105
111 -108
75 -102
141 -106
55 -101
53 -107
35 -105
133 -101
135 -102
129 -114
23 -103
143 - 23
75 -106
69 -107
27 -101
31 -104
33 -105
35 -101
71 -105
49 -108
111 -112
111 -107
103 -106
105 -106
101 -102
93 -104
99 -105
47 -107
87 -101
89 -104
85 -103
47 -104
57 -109
93 -101
0951 3008N
0951 3008N
0951 3008N
0951 3008N
0951 4005N
0951 4006N
0951 4008N
0951 4008N
0951 4008N
0951 4008N
0951 4008N
0951 4008N
0951 4010N
0951 4010N
0951 4012N
0951 4014N
0951 5010N
0951 5010N
0954 3006N
0954 3006N
0954 3008N
0954 3008N
0954 3010N
0954 3012N
0954 3012N
0954 4006N
0954 4008N
0954 4008N
0954 4008N
0954 4008N
0965 3008P
0971 4006A
1005 0955
1005 0978
1100 1474
266
Description
Philips Screw With Flat Wash - M4x5
Philips Screw With Flat Washer
Screw - M3X6
Screw - M3X6
Screw - M3X12
Screw - M3X12
Screw - M4X6
Tapping Screw With Flat Washer - M3x8
Philips Polycarbonate Screw - M4x6
Heat Sink
SP513K
Test Pin
Page and
Index No.
89 -105
87 -105
91 -105
45 -104
125 -110
55 -104
123 -103
95 -102
15 -105
55 -107
53 -111
79 -102
137 -101
149 -102
15 -106
91 -106
21 -101
125 -106
101 -109
99 -102
135 -107
47 -105
99 -104
101 -105
99 -101
99 -111
47 -103
101 -103
95 -105
105 -107
53 -110
83 -104
181 -108
181 -109
161 -101
Part No.
Description
1100 1475
1100 1649
1100 1649
1102 3566
1102 3597
1102 5301
1102 5302
1102 5303
1102 5304
1102 5943
1102 5944
1102 5944
1102 6245
1102 6245
1102 6245
1102 6246
1102 6247
1102 6249
1102 6249
1102 6251
1102 6252
1102 6257
1102 6258
1102 6260
1102 6279
1102 6295
1102 6295
1102 6295
1102 6296
1102 6296
1102 6297
1102 6297
1102 6311
1102 6325
1102 6328
Test Pin
Testpin - Hk-3-s
Testpin - HK-3-S
Connector - S8B-XH-A(8PIN)
Pin Header - 4P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 3P
Connector - 4P
Connector - 5P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 3P
Connector - 3P
Connector - 4P
Connector - 8P
Connector - 9P
Connector - 3P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 2P
Connector - 3P
Connector - 3P
Connector - 4P
Connector - 4P
Connector:53324-0462
Connector - 4P
Connector - 2P
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
171 -101
191 -101
181 -110
201 -101
161 -102
171 -102
171 -103
201 -102
161 -103
161 -104
215 -101
191 -102
149 -104
139 -104
137 -103
73 -101
69 -101
67 -106
63 -108
63 -109
63 -110
73 -102
73 -103
69 -102
69 -103
171 -104
201 -103
161 -105
161 -106
171 -105
171 -106
161 -107
171 -107
161 -108
201 -104
1102 6393
1102 6393
1102 6395
1102 6395
1102 6396
1102 6397
1102 6397
1102 6398
1102 6399
1102 6399
1102 6401
1102 6401
1102 6403
1102 6403
1102 6515
1102 6515
1102 6600
1102 6600
1102 7626
1102 7626
1102 8091
1102 8153
1102 8210
1102 8210
1102 8357
1102 8467
1102 8471
1102 8472
1102 8476
1102 8478
1102 8480
1102 8480
1102 8489
1102 8502
1102 8504
Description
Connector - 10P
Connector - 10P
Connector - 1P
Connector - 1P
Connector - 1P
Box Header
Box Header
Connector - 22P
Connector - 22P
Connector - 26P
Connector - 26P
Connector - 30P
Connector - 30P
Connector - 34P
Connector - 34P
Connector - 8P
Connector - 8P
Connector - FCN-568P068-G/05A-V4
Connector - 2P
Connector - 2P
Connector
267
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
171 -108
161 -109
161 -110
171 -109
161 -111
161 -112
171 -110
171 -111
171 -112
161 -113
161 -114
171 -113
171 -114
161 -115
161 -116
171 -115
181 -111
191 -103
191 -104
181 -112
201 -105
201 -106
171 -116
161 -117
201 -107
171 -117
171 -118
161 -118
161 -119
171 -119
171 -120
161 -120
171 -121
129 -108
125 -103
Part No.
1102 8553
1102 8553
1102 8553
1102 8553
1102 8566
1102 8631
1102 8656
1102 8725
1102 8725
1102 8727
1102 8727
1102 8774
1102 8774
1102 8775
1102 8775
1102 8776
1102 8776
1102 8777
1102 8777
1102 8779
1102 8779
1102 8832
1102 8988
1102 9037
1102 9037
1102 9066
1102 9066
1102 9120
1102 9164
1102 9185
1102 9187
1102 9336
1102 9337
1102 9349
1102 9686
Description
X/O MB7
Connector
Connector - TX25-120P-LT-H1
Connector - DM-3D4-B3210
Connector
Connector:6410-03A
Connector:DM-6D4-B2410
Connector:IMSA-9210B-2-60l-GF
Connector:FPS009-2300-0
Connector:14016PS-JUK-G-B-1
Connector - DIMM
Connector - RHM-176P-SDK11-U1L1C
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
191 -105
161 -121
171 -122
181 -113
201 -108
201 -109
201 -110
191 -106
181 -114
181 -115
191 -107
181 -116
191 -108
181 -117
191 -109
181 -118
191 -110
181 -119
191 -111
191 -112
181 -120
201 -111
201 -112
171 -123
161 -122
181 -121
191 -113
171 -124
215 -102
215 -103
215 -104
215 -105
215 -106
201 -108
215 -107
1103 1317
1103 1317
1104 0589
1104 0589
1104 0683
1104 0683
1104 0764
1104 0803
1105 0046
1105 0159
1105 0229
1105 0230
1105 0267
1105 0283
1105 0283
1105 0283
1105 0290
1105 0290
1105 0291
1105 0306
1105 0306
1105 0310
1105 0310
1105 0310
1105 0310
1105 0310
1105 0314
1105 0316
1105 0328
1105 0328
1105 0328
1105 0328
1105 0328
1105 0328
1105 0328
268
Description
Connector
Connector
DIP Socket - 32p
DIP Socket - 32P
IC Socket - 1-390261-2
Socket
Harness Band
PCB Stud
Clamp
Clamp
Harness Clamp - YMC-10-0
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Metal Clamp - Al-4
Metal Clamp - Al-4
Metal Clamp - AL-5
Clamp
Page and
Index No.
161 -123
171 -125
215 -108
201 -113
191 -114
215 -109
171 -126
215 -110
127 -102
33 -102
75 -104
53 -101
57 -106
105 -103
103 -103
149 -110
41 -104
111 -101
57 -107
45 -106
51 -104
27 -106
37 -106
39 -107
23 -107
41 -103
139 -112
129 -102
63 -102
73 -104
149 -109
111 -102
53 -102
115 -101
121 -102
Part No.
1105 0328
1105 0487
1105 0487
1105 0487
1105 0487
1105 0487
1105 0487
1105 0487
1105 0488
1105 0488
1105 0488
1105 0488
1105 0488
1105 0489
1105 0489
1105 0489
1105 0489
1105 0489
1105 0490
1105 0490
1105 0508
1105 0508
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
Description
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Harness Clamp
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
65 -106
147 -103
135 -105
73 -105
49 -109
71 -106
93 -103
141 -103
131 -105
135 -106
137 -108
143 -101
141 -104
129 -104
49 -110
139 -108
141 -105
125 -113
139 -110
125 -112
121 -105
117 -105
129 -110
109 -104
111 -104
117 -106
107 -106
69 -105
71 -107
95 -107
121 -104
67 -107
131 -104
31 -105
37 -107
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0511
1105 0514
1105 0516
1105 0516
1105 0516
1105 0516
1105 0516
1105 0516
1105 0516
1105 0516
1105 0516
1105 0516
1105 0518
1105 0518
1105 0518
1105 0518
1105 0518
1105 0518
1105 0521
1105 0522
1105 0522
1105 0522
1105 0522
1105 0522
1105 0522
1105 0522
1105 0522
Description
Edge Saddle - EDS-0607l
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Clamp
Edge Saddle - LES-1010
Clamp - LES-1017
269
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
73 -106
127 -104
135 -104
63 -103
41 -105
133 -103
149 -103
45 -109
27 -107
29 -106
139 -109
109 -105
151 -106
137 -109
153 -105
125 -114
121 -110
45 -107
129 -103
45 -101
129 -105
111 -103
121 -109
145 -103
73 -107
139 -111
129 -111
71 -108
73 -108
65 -105
137 -110
121 -103
139 -106
117 -107
147 -107
Part No.
Description
1105 0522
1105 0532
1105 0532
1105 0534
1105 0542
1105 0582
1106 0411
1107 0555
1107 0862
1107 0864
1107 0880
1107 0884
1107 1022
1109 0007
1109 0007
1204 1385
1204 1537
1204 1537
1204 1541
1204 1542
1204 1542
1204 1543
1204 2306
1204 2373
1204 2373
1204 2390
1204 2507
1204 2521
1204 2521
1204 2571
1204 2598
1206 0085
1206 0086
1400 0556
1400 0619

Clamp
Harness Clamp - MSBS-1207
Clamp:RBWS-0510D-V0
Bushing - 11.5mm
Fuse - 4A
Fuse - TE5T 19396/5A
Fuse - 12A (120V)
Fuse - 6.3A 250V (240V)
Fuse - 5A 250V
Fuse
IC - MINISMDC100-02
IC - MINISMDC100-02
Push Switch
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
Dip Switch:CHS-04B
Key Board Switch - Skqdpa
Key Board Switch - SKQDPA
Interlock Switch - FA8l-AB24
Switch SSSS810700
Micro Switch
Micro Switch
DIP Switch - 2.54P
Switch
Lithium Cell:Cr2032
Dry Cell Holder:20H-1T
Transistor - DTB143EK
Transistor - DTA143EKA
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
107 -105
141 -107
139 -107
85 -106
63 -111
135 -108
57 -108
201 -114
215 -111
141 -109
141 -109
39 -108
141 -108
161 -124
171 -127
215 -112
161 -125
171 -128
215 -113
215 -114
181 -122
215 -115
191 -115
191 -116
181 -123
145 -106
181 -124
145 -107
67 -102
201 -115
145 -104
215 -116
215 -117
171 -129
161 -126
1400 0728
1400 0728
1400 0730
1400 0731
1400 0731
1400 0743
1400 0768
1400 0775
1400 0775
1400 0810
1400 0909
1401 0902
1401 0972
1401 0972
1401 1136
1401 1175
1401 1202
1401 1202
1401 1203
1401 1207
1401 1214
1401 1220
1401 1221
1401 1222
1401 1235
1402 1041
1402 1041
1402 1112
1402 1112
1402 1142
1402 1142
1402 1265
1402 1265
1402 1336
1402 1336
270
Description
Transistor - 2SD1782K
Transistor - 2SB1198K
Transistor - DTC124EUA
Transistor:DTC114EUA
Transistor - DTA143EUA
Fet:2SK1590
Fet - HAT1020R
Fet - HAT1043M
FET - HAT1023R
Fet - HAT1023R
Fet:HAT1048R
FET:HAT2070R
Fet:HAT2064R
Fet:FDS6614A
Fet:FDS6961A
Fet:HAT2068R
Fet:HAT2071R
Diode - DA204U
Diode - DA204U
Diode - ERA83-004
Diode - ERA83-004
Diode - RB411D
Diode - RB411D
Diode - 1SS355
Diode - 1SS355
Page and
Index No.
171 -130
161 -127
215 -118
161 -128
171 -131
215 -119
171 -132
171 -133
161 -129
191 -117
171 -134
215 -120
171 -135
161 -130
201 -116
201 -117
191 -118
181 -125
215 -121
191 -119
215 -122
215 -123
215 -124
215 -125
215 -126
161 -131
171 -136
161 -132
171 -137
161 -133
171 -138
201 -118
215 -127
161 -134
171 -139
Part No.
1402 1336
1402 1342
1402 1342
1402 1343
1402 1343
1402 1365
1402 1432
1402 1432
1402 1447
1402 1447
1402 1503
1402 1503
1402 1530
1402 1530
1402 1546
1402 1578
1402 1648
1402 1660
1402 1661
1402 1663
1402 1663
1403 0907
1403 0907
1403 0907
1403 0944
1403 0944
1403 0953
1403 0953
1403 0978
1403 0978
1403 0987
1403 0987
1403 0996
1403 1100
1403 1101
Description
Diode - 1SS355
Diode - 1SR154-400
Diode - 1SR154-400
Diode - RB106L-40
Diode - RB106L-40
Diode-RB751V-40
Diode - HZS18-1
Diode - HZS18-1
Diode - PTZ5.1B
Diode - PTZ5.1B
Diode - 1SS400
Diode - 1SS400
Diode - RB520S-30
Diode - RB520S-30
Diode - RB081
Diode - YG802C04R
Diode:RB05
Diode:BA
Diode:MBRS3
Diode - ZTP12B
Diode - ZTP12B
Diode - SML-310LT
Diode - SML-310LT
Diode - SML-310LT
LED - SML-310MT
LED - SML-310MT
LED - SML-310DT
LED - SML-310DT
LED SML-211UT
LED SML-211UT
LED - SML-310VT
LED:SML-211YT
Thermo Sensor :LM87CIMT
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
215 -128
191 -120
201 -119
215 -129
201 -120
215 -130
161 -135
171 -140
161 -136
171 -141
181 -126
191 -121
215 -131
171 -142
201 -121
181 -127
191 -122
215 -132
215 -133
161 -137
171 -143
161 -138
181 -128
191 -123
171 -144
161 -139
191 -124
181 -129
161 -140
171 -145
215 -134
201 -122
171 -146
215 -135
215 -136
1407 1535
1407 1535
1407 2187
1407 2187
1407 2187
1407 2218
1407 2218
1407 2218
1407 2219
1407 2219
1407 3357
1407 3357
1407 4649
1407 4947
1407 4948
1407 4959
1407 4959
1407 4963
1407 5090
1407 5090
1407 5181
1407 5197
1407 5275
1407 5275
1407 5287
1407 5287
1407 5300
1407 5321
1407 5321
1407 5327
1407 5334
1407 5334
1407 5334
1407 5344
1407 5344
Description
IC - TD62308AP
IC - TD62308AP
TTLIC - SN74LS07NS
TTLIC - SN74LS07NS
TTLIC - SN74LS07NS
TTLIC - SN74LS06NS
TTLIC - SN74LS06NS
TTLIC - SN74LS06NS
IC - TD62003AP
IC - TD62003AP
IC - TC7S32FU
IC - 74LCX244
IC - 74LCX245 TSSOP
IC - MC68334GCFC20
IC - MC68334GCFC20
IC - MBM29F800TA-70PFTN
IC - DS90CF364MTD
IC - DS90CF364MTD
CMOS Logic:TC7W53FU
IC - TC7SZ126FU
IC - SN74LV02APW
IC - SN74LV02APW
271
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
161 -141
171 -147
201 -123
161 -142
171 -148
161 -143
201 -124
171 -149
171 -150
161 -144
171 -151
161 -145
161 -146
161 -147
161 -148
171 -152
161 -149
161 -150
181 -130
191 -125
215 -137
215 -138
215 -139
201 -125
191 -126
181 -131
201 -126
201 -127
215 -140
215 -141
191 -127
201 -128
181 -132
171 -153
161 -151
Part No.
Description
1407 5347
1407 5347
1407 5350
1407 5351
1407 5351
1407 5351
1407 5351
1407 5353
1407 5353
1407 5353
1407 5361
1407 5364
1407 5364
1407 5364
1407 5366
1407 5366
1407 5367
1407 5369
1407 5369
1407 5374
1407 5374
1407 5388
1407 5398
1407 5414
1407 5415
1407 5427
1407 5427
1407 5463
1407 5469
1407 5469
1407 5482
1407 5485
1407 5485
1407 5511
1407 5517
IC - SN74LV08APW
IC - SN74LV08APW
CMOS IC:SN74LV00APW
IC - SN74LV14APW
IC - SN74LV14APW
IC - SN74LV14APW
IC - SN74LV14APW
IC - SN74LV244APW
IC - SN74LV244APW
IC - SN74LV244APW
IC - 74LVC157A TSSOP
IC - SN74AHCT244PW
IC - SN74AHCT244PW
IC - SN74AHCT244PW
IC - 74LVC08A TSSOP
IC - 74LVC08A TSSOP
CMOS IC:74LVC74A:TSSOP
IC - SN74AHCT32PW
IC - SN74AHCT32PW
IC - SN74LV4052APW
IC - SN74LV4052APW
IC - CD4066BNS
IC - 74ACH1G32DCK
IC - 74ACH1G32DCK
CMOS IC - SN74LV245APW
IC - SN74LV07APW
IC - SN74LV07APW
IC - SN74LVC07APW
IC - SN74VC574APW
IC - SN74VC574APW
IC - SN74LVC14APW
IC - 74AHCT14PW
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
181 -133
191 -128
191 -129
181 -134
161 -152
171 -154
191 -130
181 -135
171 -155
191 -131
181 -136
201 -129
181 -137
191 -132
201 -130
215 -142
191 -133
171 -156
161 -153
161 -154
171 -157
171 -158
161 -155
171 -159
171 -160
171 -161
161 -156
171 -162
191 -134
181 -138
215 -143
215 -144
201 -131
215 -145
201 -132
1407 5523
1407 5523
1407 5631
1407 5694
1407 5705
1407 5705
1407 5709
1407 5709
1407 5712
1407 5717
1407 5733
1407 5742
1407 5742
1407 5743
1407 5798
1407 5800
1407 5801
1407 5803
1407 5896
1407 6244
1408 0810
1408 0826
1408 0826
1408 0827
1408 0942
1408 0942
1408 1095
1408 1095
1408 1206
1408 1206
1408 1273
1408 1398
1408 1507
1408 1508
1408 1508
272
Description
ROM - I2C SOP 3V
ROM - I2C SOP 3V
IC:SN74LVC86APW
CPU RM7000A-400T-REV1.34
IC - SN74LVC06APW
IC - SN74LVC06APW
IC - MK1705A
IC - MK1705A
IC - ICS960001AF
IC:SN74ALVC244PW
IC - ICS553MI
IC - ICS553MI
IC - RF5V860
Clock Generator:ICS9248AF-64
CPU:DHG0800AVS1B
Southbridge:AMD-766AC2
IC:SN74LV132APW
IC - RF5V861
Northbridge:AMD-761AC2(B2)
IC - BA10358F
IC - TA8428K
IC - TA8428K
IC - TA8429H
IC - BA4558F
IC - BA4558F
IC - BA10324AF
IC - BA10324AF
IC - RN5VD28A
Detector - RN5VD42A
Regulator - PQ05VY3H3Z
Page and
Index No.
215 -146
201 -133
215 -147
201 -134
181 -139
191 -135
191 -136
181 -140
171 -163
201 -135
215 -148
181 -141
191 -137
181 -142
215 -149
215 -150
215 -151
215 -152
191 -138
215 -153
161 -157
161 -158
171 -164
161 -159
161 -160
171 -165
191 -139
181 -143
161 -161
171 -166
201 -136
201 -137
201 -138
191 -140
181 -144
Part No.
1408 1528
1408 1529
1408 1551
1408 1595
1408 1596
1408 1640
1408 1657
1408 1664
1408 1680
1408 1730
1408 1730
1408 1746
1408 1746
1408 1747
1408 1784
1408 1785
1408 1787
1408 1945
1503 0460
1503 0460
1503 0773
1503 0842
1503 0842
1503 0876
1503 0946
1503 1004
1503 1004
1503 1045
1503 1089
1503 1089
1503 1090
1503 1090
1503 1091
1503 1091
1503 1213
Description
Regulator - PQ05VY053Z
DC Converter - ITC1622CSB
Regulator:TA76431F
IC:PST9231N
IC - RN5VD15A
Series Regulator - PQ070XH02Z
IC - RN5VD20A
Series Regulator:LM1117MP-ADJ/NOPB
IC - LM358D
IC - MM1096BF
IC - MM1096BF
IC - PST623XW
IC - PST623XW
Regulator - PQ5EV7L
IC:ML6554CU
IC:LTC1628CG
IC:LTC1709EG-7
IC:SI-85
Crystal Oscilator:32.768Khz:7PF
Oscillator - 14.31818MHZ
Oscillator - 14.31818MHz
Crystal Oscilator:33.3Mhz
Crystal Oscillator - 9.8304MHz
Oscilator - 24MHz
Oscilator - 85.2Mhz
Oscilator - 85.2MHz
Oscilator - 10Mhz
Oscilator - 10MHz
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
201 -139
201 -140
215 -154
215 -155
201 -141
201 -142
201 -143
191 -141
171 -167
161 -162
171 -168
191 -142
181 -145
181 -146
215 -156
215 -157
215 -158
191 -143
171 -169
161 -163
215 -159
215 -160
201 -144
215 -161
161 -164
161 -165
171 -170
201 -145
191 -144
181 -147
191 -145
181 -148
191 -146
181 -149
171 -171
1600 1880
1600 1880
1600 1920
1601 5319
1601 5319
1601 7751
1601 7752
1601 7752
1601 7757
1601 7757
1601 7760
1601 7781
1601 7781
1601 7791
1601 7796
1601 7814
1601 7866
1601 7867
1601 7867
1601 7871
1601 7877
1601 7877
1601 7879
1601 7879
1601 7887
1601 7887
1601 7887
1601 7896
1601 7898
1601 7898
1601 7898
1601 7899
1601 7899
1601 7900
1601 7900
Description
Resistor:0.003 :1%:3W
Resistor-3.9 5% 2W
Resistor-3.9 5% 2W
Resistor - 4.7K 5%
Resistor 0
Resistor 0
Resistor - 100:5%:1/16W
Resistor - 10 5%
Resistor - 10 5%
Resistor Array:1K:5%:1/16W
Resistor Array:2.2K:5%:1/16W
Resistor - 3.3K 5%
Resistor Array
Resistor Array
Resistor Array
273
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
191 -147
201 -146
215 -162
161 -166
171 -172
161 -167
171 -173
161 -168
171 -174
161 -169
171 -175
161 -170
171 -176
171 -177
171 -178
161 -171
161 -172
161 -173
171 -179
161 -174
191 -148
181 -150
161 -175
171 -180
215 -163
181 -151
191 -149
215 -164
215 -165
181 -152
191 -150
171 -181
161 -176
181 -153
191 -151
Part No.
1601 7913
1601 7913
1601 7913
1601 7914
1601 7914
1601 7915
1601 7918
1601 7926
1601 7929
1601 7943
1601 7943
1601 7959
1601 7959
1601 7960
1601 7960
1601 7981
1601 7981
1601 7987
1604 4306
1604 4306
1604 4553
1604 4728
1604 4779
1604 4848
1604 4848
1604 4987
1604 4987
1604 4994
1604 4994
1604 5042
1604 5044
1604 5044
1604 5047
1604 5082
1604 5082
Description
Resistor 22 5% 1/32w
Resistor - 68 5% 1/16W 8
Resistor
Resistor
Capacitor
Capacitor
Capacitor - 220F 20% 35V
Capacitor:220F:20%:35V
Capacitor - 330F 20% 6.3V
Capacitor:1000F:20%:2.5V
Capacitor:330F:20%:10
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
181 -154
215 -166
191 -152
181 -155
191 -153
201 -147
201 -148
201 -149
201 -150
181 -156
191 -154
181 -157
191 -155
181 -158
191 -156
181 -159
191 -157
201 -151
181 -160
191 -158
161 -177
201 -152
171 -182
191 -159
181 -161
181 -162
191 -160
201 -153
215 -167
191 -161
215 -168
215 -169
191 -162
191 -163
181 -163
1604 5122
1604 5123
1604 5124
1604 5125
1604 5126
1604 5127
1604 5128
1605 0781
1605 0976
1605 0976
1605 1081
1605 1081
1605 1106
1605 1124
1605 1124
1605 1132
1605 1132
1605 1135
1605 1135
1605 1137
1605 1137
1605 1148
1605 1154
1605 1161
1605 1161
1605 1161
1605 1165
1605 1167
1605 1167
1605 1167
1605 1176
1605 1181
1605 1181
1605 1181
1605 1181
274
Description
Capacitor - 5pF 50V
Capacitor - 1F +80% -20% 10V
Capacitor - 1F +80% -20% 10V
Capacitor - 10 F +80-20% 25V
Capacitor - 10 F +80-20% 25V
Capacitor:2200PF:10%:50V
Capacitor - 4.7F +80 -20% 10V
Capacitor - 4.7F +80 -20% 10V
Capacitor - 2.2F +80-20% 16V
Capacitor - 2.2F +80-20% 16V
Capacitor - 0.47F 1% 10V
Ceramic Capacitor:0.1uF:+80-20%:50V
Capacitor- 1F 10%16v
Capacitor:680pf:5%:50V
Ceramic Capacitor 0.47F +80-20%16V
Capacitor - 10F +80-20% 10V
Page and
Index No.
215 -170
215 -171
215 -172
215 -173
215 -174
215 -175
215 -176
215 -177
181 -164
191 -164
201 -154
215 -178
191 -165
201 -155
215 -179
201 -156
215 -180
161 -178
171 -183
171 -184
161 -179
171 -185
215 -181
215 -182
181 -165
191 -166
215 -183
215 -184
181 -166
191 -167
215 -185
181 -167
191 -168
201 -157
215 -186
Part No.
1605 1187
1605 1187
1605 1187
1605 1190
1605 1200
1605 1201
1605 1202
1605 1205
1605 1207
1605 1211
1605 1214
1605 1216
1605 1221
1605 1224
1605 1224
1605 1224
1605 1225
1605 1246
1605 1252
1605 1282
1605 1295
1605 1306
1605 1347
1605 1355
1607 0524
1607 0622
1607 0623
1607 0732
1607 0758
1607 0758
1607 0852
1607 0861
1607 0861
1607 1014
1607 1014
Description
Ceramic Capacitor 0.047F 10% 50V
Ceramic Capacitor:0.047F 10% 50V
Ceramic Capacitor 0.047F 10% 50V
Ceramic Capacitor:0.022F:10%:50V
Capacitor - 2200PF10%50V
Capacitor - 0.1 F+80-20%16V
Capacitor 4.7F 10% 6.3V
Capacitor 4.7F 10% 6.3V
Capacitor 4.7F 10% 6.3v
Ceramic Capacitor:0.1F:10%:50V
Capacitor:3.3F:20%:25V
Capacitor - 0.01F +80-20% 50V
Capacitor:22F:+80-20%:10V
Capacitor:680PF:10%:50V
Capacitor - BLM31B601SPB
Ferrite Core - TFC-16-8-13
Noise Filter - AEF321825-470
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
191 -169
171 -186
181 -168
171 -187
201 -158
201 -159
201 -160
201 -161
201 -162
201 -163
201 -164
201 -165
201 -166
191 -170
181 -169
201 -167
171 -188
191 -171
201 -168
215 -187
215 -188
215 -189
191 -172
191 -173
215 -190
39 -109
39 -102
161 -180
171 -189
161 -181
161 -182
181 -170
191 -174
171 -190
215 -191
1607 1020
1607 1021
1607 1021
1607 1027
1607 1061
1607 1061
1607 1061
1607 1206
1607 1212
1607 1225
1607 1251
1607 1326
1607 1351
1607 1430
1607 1431
1607 1432
1607 1433
1607 1434
1607 1435
1607 1468
1607 1495
1609 0005
1609 0006
1609 0008
1609 0011
1609 0012
1609 0013
1609 0014
1609 0016
1609 0018
1609 0019
1609 0020
1609 0025
1610 1218
1610 1218
Description
Filter:MMZ1608Y121B
Filter:HF30ACC321611
Inductor - CDRH6D38-5R0NC
EMI Filter:Chip:MPZ2012S221A
Inductor:SLF12575-2R7N7R0-PF
EMI Filter:BLM21PG221SN1B
Inductor:NL252018-010J
Inductor:CDRH124-3R9MC
Inductor:CDRH6D38-120NC
Inductor:CDEP149-1R0MC-H
Inductor:CDRH6D38-8R7NC
Filter:ACF321825-332
Resistor:10K:5%:1/16W
Resistor:0:1608
Resistor
Resistor
275
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
171 -191
161 -183
171 -192
215 -192
201 -169
191 -175
181 -171
201 -170
201 -171
201 -172
171 -193
191 -176
191 -177
215 -193
215 -194
215 -195
215 -196
215 -197
215 -198
215 -199
171 -194
171 -195
171 -196
171 -197
171 -198
171 -199
171 -200
171 -201
171 -202
171 -203
171 -204
171 -205
171 -206
181 -172
191 -178
Part No.
1610 1374
1610 1374
1610 1638
1610 1638
1610 1639
1610 1640
1610 1683
1610 1685
1631 0000
1631 0000
1632 0000
1633 0000
1633 0000
1633 0000
1634 0000
1634 0000
1634 0000
1634 0000
1634 0000
1640 2330
1640 2330
1640 2470
1640 2470
1640 3101
1640 3101
1640 5330
1640 5330
1640 5470
1650 2101
1650 2101
1650 2151
1650 2151
1650 3221
1650 3221
1650 4100
Description
Resistor - 10M1%10W
Resistor - 10M1%10W
Resistor - 0.0331% 1/2W
Resistor - 0.011% 1/2W
Resistor - 0.0251% 1/2W
Resistor - 0.0061% 1W
Resistor - 0 1/4W
Resistor - 0 1/4W
Resistor - 0 1/8W
Resistor - 0 1/10W
Resistor - 0 1/10W
Resistor - 0 1/10W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Resistor - 0 1/16W
Capacitor - 33F+80%-20%25V
Capacitor - 33F+80%-20%25V
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
161 -184
171 -207
171 -208
161 -185
215 -200
215 -201
215 -202
215 -203
171 -209
161 -186
201 -173
215 -204
191 -179
181 -173
191 -180
201 -174
171 -210
215 -206
215 -205
171 -211
161 -187
171 -212
161 -188
171 -213
161 -189
171 -214
161 -190
161 -191
161 -192
171 -215
161 -193
171 -216
161 -194
171 -217
161 -195
1650 4100
1650 4100
1650 4100
1650 4101
1650 4101
1650 4101
1650 4101
1650 4102
1650 4102
1650 4102
1650 4102
1650 4102
1650 4103
1650 4103
1650 4103
1650 4103
1650 4103
1650 4104
1650 4104
1650 4104
1650 4105
1650 4106
1650 4109
1650 4112
1650 4112
1650 4114
1650 4114
1650 4120
1650 4132
1650 4132
1650 4150
1650 4150
1650 4150
1650 4151
1650 4151
276
Description
Resistor - 1M 5% 1/10W
Resistor - 10M5%1/10W
Resisotr - 1.1k 5% 1/10W 1608
Resisotr - 1.1k 5% 1/10w 1608
Resistor - 110K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 110K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.3K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.3K 5% 1/10W 1608
Page and
Index No.
181 -174
191 -181
171 -218
191 -182
201 -175
171 -219
181 -175
201 -176
191 -183
171 -220
181 -176
161 -196
181 -177
161 -197
201 -177
191 -184
171 -221
191 -185
201 -178
181 -178
215 -207
215 -208
201 -179
171 -222
161 -198
181 -179
191 -186
201 -180
171 -223
161 -199
181 -180
191 -187
201 -181
191 -188
161 -200
Part No.
1650 4154
1650 4154
1650 4182
1650 4200
1650 4200
1650 4202
1650 4202
1650 4220
1650 4220
1650 4220
1650 4220
1650 4222
1650 4222
1650 4222
1650 4223
1650 4223
1650 4242
1650 4242
1650 4330
1650 4330
1650 4330
1650 4330
1650 4330
1650 4331
1650 4332
1650 4332
1650 4362
1650 4362
1650 4392
1650 4392
1650 4470
1650 4470
1650 4470
1650 4472
1650 4472
Description
Resistor 150K 5% 1/10W
Resistor 150k 5% 1/10W
Resistor - 2.4K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 2.4K 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor:330:5%:1/10W:1608
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
161 -201
171 -224
201 -182
181 -181
191 -189
191 -190
181 -182
181 -183
201 -183
171 -225
191 -191
161 -202
201 -184
171 -226
161 -203
171 -227
191 -192
181 -184
181 -185
161 -204
201 -185
191 -193
171 -228
171 -229
161 -205
171 -230
171 -231
161 -206
161 -207
171 -232
191 -194
181 -186
201 -186
181 -187
171 -233
1650 4472
1650 4472
1650 4472
1650 4473
1650 4510
1650 4510
1650 4511
1650 4511
1650 4560
1650 4560
1650 4562
1650 4562
1650 4621
1650 4621
1650 4680
1650 4680
1650 4680
1650 4750
1650 4750
1650 4751
1650 4751
1650 4820
1650 4910
1650 5680
1653 3309
1653 7509
1654 0000
1654 1000
1654 1001
1654 1001
1654 1001
1654 1001
1654 1001
1654 1001
1654 1002
Description
Resistor:47k:5%:1/10W:1608
Resistor - 620 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 620 5% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 750 5% 1/10W
Resistor - 750 5% 1/10W
Resistor:33:1%:1/8W:2125
Resistor:75:1%:1/8W:2125
Resistor - 0 1608
Resistor - 100 1% 1/10W
277
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
191 -195
201 -187
161 -208
191 -196
191 -197
181 -188
181 -189
191 -198
161 -209
171 -234
201 -188
161 -210
191 -199
181 -190
191 -200
181 -191
201 -189
191 -201
181 -192
171 -235
161 -211
201 -190
161 -212
201 -191
191 -202
191 -203
181 -193
215 -209
215 -210
201 -192
161 -213
191 -204
171 -236
181 -194
215 -211
Part No.
1654 1002
1654 1002
1654 1003
1654 1003
1654 1003
1654 1004
1654 1004
1654 1004
1654 1009
1654 1009
1654 1100
1654 1101
1654 1102
1654 1102
1654 1102
1654 1200
1654 1201
1654 1201
1654 1201
1654 1212
1654 1303
1654 1303
1654 1401
1654 1401
1654 1401
1654 1500
1654 1501
1654 1501
1654 1501
1654 1502
1654 1542
1654 1542
1654 1620
1654 1800
1654 1801
Description
Resistor:1.1K:1%:1/10W:1608
Resistor - 120 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 130K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 130K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.4K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.4K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.4K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1501 %1/10W
Resistor - 1.5K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.5K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.5K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 15.4K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 15.4K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1621% 1/10
Resistor:180:1%:1/10W:1608
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
171 -237
161 -214
215 -212
171 -238
161 -215
171 -239
161 -216
215 -213
215 -214
215 -215
215 -216
191 -205
215 -217
171 -240
161 -217
215 -218
201 -193
181 -195
215 -219
215 -220
161 -218
171 -241
191 -206
161 -219
171 -242
215 -221
215 -222
171 -243
161 -220
215 -223
161 -221
171 -244
215 -224
191 -207
215 -225
1654 1802
1654 1911
1654 1911
1654 2000
1654 2001
1654 2001
1654 2001
1654 2002
1654 2002
1654 2201
1654 2209
1654 2401
1654 2402
1654 2432
1654 2700
1654 2701
1654 2879
1654 2942
1654 3010
1654 3300
1654 3301
1654 3309
1654 3601
1654 3601
1654 3602
1654 3741
1654 3901
1654 3902
1654 3903
1654 3903
1654 3929
1654 4029
1654 4129
1654 4301
1654 4420
278
Description
Resistor - 1.91K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 1.91K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 2.2K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor:2.4k:1%:1/10W:1608
Chip Resistor:24k:1%:1/10W
Resistor:24.3k:1%:1/10W
Resistor:270::1%:1/10W
Resistor - 28.71%1/10W
Chip Resistor:330:1%:1/10W
Resistor - 36K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor:3.74K:1%:1/10W:1608
Resistor:390K:1%:1/10W:1608
Resistor - 39.21% 1/10W
Resistor - 40.21% 1/10W
Resistor - 41.21% 1/10W
Resistor:4.3k:1%:1/10W:1608
Resistor 442 1% 1/10w 1608
Page and
Index No.
215 -226
161 -222
171 -245
215 -227
201 -194
215 -228
171 -246
171 -247
215 -229
181 -196
215 -230
171 -248
215 -231
215 -232
215 -233
215 -234
215 -235
215 -236
215 -237
215 -238
215 -239
215 -240
161 -223
171 -249
161 -224
171 -250
215 -241
215 -242
161 -225
171 -251
215 -243
215 -244
215 -245
171 -252
181 -197
Part No.
1654 4420
1654 4539
1654 4700
1654 4701
1654 4702
1654 4702
1654 4709
1654 4990
1654 4990
1654 4990
1654 4990
1654 5100
1654 5109
1654 5111
1654 5231
1654 5360
1654 5600
1654 5601
1654 5602
1654 5609
1654 6049
1654 6200
1654 6801
1654 6981
1654 7502
1654 7502
1654 7503
1654 8200
1654 8201
1654 8203
1654 8203
1654 9109
1654 9109
1654 9532
1660 0100
Description
Resistor 442 1% 1/10w 1608
Resistor - 45.31% 1/10W
Chip Resistor - 47k1%1/10W
Resistor - 499 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 499 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 499 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 499 1% 1/10W
Resistor - 536 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 60.41% 1/10W
Resistor - 820K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 820K 1% 1/10W 1608
Resistor - 98.3K 1% 1/10W 1608
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
191 -208
215 -246
215 -247
215 -248
171 -253
161 -226
215 -249
191 -209
171 -254
161 -227
181 -198
215 -250
215 -251
215 -252
161 -228
161 -229
215 -253
215 -254
215 -255
215 -256
215 -257
215 -258
215 -259
215 -260
215 -261
201 -195
215 -262
215 -263
215 -264
171 -255
161 -230
171 -256
161 -231
201 -196
215 -265
1660 0100
1660 0100
1660 2101
1660 2101
1660 2101
1660 2101
1660 2101
1660 2101
1660 2120
1660 2150
1660 2150
1660 2150
1660 2180
1660 2220
1660 2221
1660 2221
1660 2221
1660 2221
1660 2270
1660 2330
1660 2330
1660 2330
1660 2330
1660 2331
1660 2331
1660 2331
1660 2331
1660 2390
1660 2391
1660 2391
1660 2470
1660 2470
1660 2470
1660 2470
1660 2471
Description
Capacitor:12pF:50V:1608
Ceramic Capacitor - 39pF 50V
279
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
181 -199
191 -210
161 -232
215 -267
215 -266
171 -257
181 -200
191 -211
171 -258
171 -259
161 -233
215 -268
171 -260
161 -234
191 -212
181 -201
215 -269
201 -197
161 -235
181 -202
171 -261
191 -213
161 -236
215 -270
201 -198
181 -203
191 -214
215 -271
171 -262
161 -237
191 -215
181 -204
161 -238
171 -263
181 -205
Part No.
1660 2471
1660 2471
1660 2471
1660 2680
1660 4102
1660 4102
1660 4102
1660 4102
1660 4102
1660 4102
1660 4102
1660 4103
1660 4103
1660 4103
1660 4222
1660 4222
1660 4222
1660 4472
1660 4472
1660 4472
1660 6103
1660 6103
1660 6103
1660 6103
1660 6103
1660 6103
1660 6103
1660 6223
1660 6473
1660 6473
1660 6473
1660 8104
1660 8104
1660 8104
1660 8104
Description
Capacitor - 10000pF - 10% - 50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - 10% - 50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - 10% - 50V
Capacitor - 4700PF10% 50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
Capacitor - 22000pF +80 -20% 50V
Capacitor - 47000pF +80,-20% 50V
Capacitor - 47000pF +80,-20% 50V
Capacitor - 47000pF +80,-20% 50V
Capacitor - 0.1F +80-20% 25V
Capacitor - 0.1F +80-20% 25V
Capacitor - 0.1F +80-20% 25V
Capacitor - 0.1F +80-20% 25V
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
215 -272
191 -216
201 -199
215 -273
181 -206
191 -217
215 -274
215 -275
201 -200
171 -264
161 -239
191 -218
171 -265
181 -207
161 -240
181 -208
191 -219
161 -241
171 -266
181 -209
215 -276
201 -201
161 -242
215 -277
181 -210
171 -267
191 -220
215 -278
161 -243
215 -279
191 -221
181 -211
161 -244
215 -280
215 -281
1660 8104
1660 8104
1660 8104
1902 0042
1902 0068
1906 0017
1906 0040
1906 0045
1907 0013
1907 0015
280
Description
Capacitor - 0.1F +80-20% 25V
Capacitor - 0.1F +80-20% 25V
Capacitor - 0.1F +80-20% 25V
RAM-1M X8 70NS TSOP G2
SRAM:1M:X8:TSOP:G4
Flash Memory - LH28F320BJ-PBTL70
RAM:8M:X8/X16:70ns:B:5V
Flash Memory:MBM29LV650UE90TN
SDRAM:256M:4MX16X4:133MHZ:G1
SDRAM - 256MB 4MX16X4 100MHz
Page and
Index No.
201 -202
191 -222
171 -268
161 -245
171 -269
201 -203
171 -270
215 -282
191 -223
181 -212
Part No.
5053 0223
5053 0223
5053 0447
5053 0447
5053 0447
5053 0447
5053 0447
5053 0447
5053 0447
5201 1796
5201 1796
5201 2858
5203 9501
5203 9502
5205 2697
5205 2697
5206 2684
5206 2684
5206 2686
5206 2686
5215 2621
5215 2621
5324 1658
5415 4145
5415 4145
5419 5714
5442 1924
5442 2754
5442 9101
5443 2668
5446 2824
5446 5832
5446 5832
5447 2681
5447 2681
Description
Bushing - 8mm
Bushing - 8mm
Bushing - 6mm
Bushing - 6mm
Bushing - 6mm
Bushing - 6mm
Bushing - 6mm
Bushing - 6mm
Bushing - 6mm
Stepped Screw - M4
Stepped Screw - M4
Friction Pad
Grease 501
Grease 501
Shoulder Screw - M3
Shoulder Screw - M3
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring - M6
Snap Ring - M6
Bushing- 4x8x4.5mm
Stud
Stud
Stepped Screw - M4
Exposure Glass Cushion
Spring - Registration Roller
Setting Powder
Bushing - 4x6x7mm
Screw - Duplex Guide Plate
Connector Guide Pin
Connector Guide Pin
Snap Ring (Model C2)
Snap Ring
Page and
Index No.
Part No.
57 - 20
23 - 18
25 - 5
37 - 16
31 - 7
77 - 5
53 - 28
127 - 10
23 - 14
153 - 17
67 - 16
55 - 11
223 - 6
223 - 6
73 - 1
71 - 1
87 - 25
29 - 21
61 - 2
23 - 5
39 - 32
23 - 21
29 - 5
23 - 24
31 - 2
39 - 34
43 - 20
71 - 2
223 - 7
73 - 6
27 - 1
143 - 12
139 - 16
119 - 16
23 - 22
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2681
5447 2706
5894 2540
5919 2201
5936 2321
6754 2866
6754 2866
Description
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Snap Ring
Gear - 15T
Arm Screw
Shoulder Screw - M4
Rubber Bushing - Vibration Damper
281
manuals4you.com
Page and
Index No.
63 - 2
149 - 14
129 - 8
127 - 36
25 - 4
107 - 21
117 - 14
115 - 27
113 - 9
65 - 37
37 - 9
71 - 14
69 - 10
33 - 9
69 - 16
63 - 28
145 - 13
39 - 20
147 - 10
149 - 12
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Subject: ROM History (Martini-C1 LCDC/Language)
No.: RB064001
Prepared by: K. Miura
From: Technical Services sec. Service Planning Dept.

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Service manual revision
Transmit/receive
Retrofit information
Paper path
Other (
Firmware history for the Martini-C1 LCDC/Language.

USA
B0655176
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.08
1.12
F112
2C31
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
B0655177
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.08
1.12
49C4
7F92
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
B0655235
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.08
1.12
9959
C4FC
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
Europe
Asia/Taiwan
General (in Language folder)

B0655238
Version
C.SUM
Production
2.64
2.65
E914
5B62
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
Symptom Corrected
Display message in Printer mode changed:
Old: Quality of Print Sets
New: Copies
Several French translations appeared for Slip Sheet and Designate
(translations not consistent).
Corrected French translation errors for several display messages.
Display for IEEE802.11 inside User Tools ! System Settings ! Interface
Settings ! Network was incorrectly displayed as 801.11.
Official Taiwanese translation set added.
Official Russian translation set added.
USA
EU
Asia/
Twn
A
_
_
A
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
_
_
A
GEN
A
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Subject: Service Manual Revision
PAGE: 1/24
No.: RB064002
Prepared by: K.Miura

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
Please revise your Service Manuals as follows.

!
Please revise bold items in the New column.
Please delete bold items in the Old column, and items labeled (Delete) in the New column.
Please completely replace the 18 tables on pp. 13-16 below.
Page General
Location
1-13 Top
of
the page
Old
New
Feed Station
Allowed Size
Feed Station
Allowed Size
Tandem Tray (Tray 1) A4 LEF, LT LEF
Tandem Tray (Tray 1) A4 LEF, LT LEF
Universal Trays
A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT,
A3/DLT Kit
A3, B4, A4, DLT, LG,
(Trays 1, 2)
LG, LT SEF
LT
Connect the short connector [B] to the right
Connect the short connector [B] to the left tandem
1-18 Step 5
tandem tray terminal [C].
tray terminal [C].
1-59 Addition- 1.15 KEY COUNTER
al
1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the key
Installaticounter holder [C].
on
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket (2 screws).
3. Install the key counter cover [D] (2 screws).
4. Remove the caps [E, F] from the right cover with a screwdriver.
5. Install the stepped screw [G].
6. Join the connector [H].
7. Hook the key counter holder assembly [I] onto the stepped screw.
8. Change the setting of the Key Counter Management to the customer requirement (User Tools System Setting - Key Operator Tools).
9. If necessary, change the setting SP5121 (Counter Up Timing).
[E]
[A]
[B]
[F]
[D]
[C]
[H]
[G]
manuals4you.com
[I]
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
2-2 Upper
Table
Old
EM
300
K
450
K
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Deve
R
loper
2-3
Lower
Table
EM
300
K
600
K
3-5
2nd
Table
3.2.1
600
K

EM
80K
160K
Part No.
A0069104
A2929500
A0299387
N8036701
N8036701
G0219350
Expe
cted
K
450
K
No.: RB064002
New
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Hot
R
Roller
Hot
R
Roller
Beari
ngs
2-5
PAGE: 2/24
Note
(
3.7.1)
Expe
cted
K
Note
600
Repla
ce hot
roller,
beari
ng
toget
her.
1000
240K
Description
Digital Multimeter FLUKE 87
Loop Back Connector
3-15 3.4.5
Exposure glass (3.4.2)

Push the 1st scanner [A] to the cutout [B] in the scanner
frame.
[C]: Exposure lamp cover (! x2)
[D]: Exposure lamp (! x3, " x1)
Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare
fingers.
3-93 3.11.7
(NOTE)
1) Even though the operation of the FRR

mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1),
universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3), by-pass tray, and
ADF are similar, the rollers are not
interchangeable.
3112
3.13.4
3113
3.13.5
3114
3.13.6

Feed unit (3.5.2)
!
Use the tip of a screwdriver to push up the
cover.
[B]: C-Clamp (# x1)
Feed unit (3.5.2)
[A]: Guide plate (! x3)
[B]: Registration sensor bracket (! x1)
[C]: Registration sensor (" x1)
Rear cover (3.5.1)
[A]: ADF board (! x2, " x14)
EM
300
K
450
K
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Deve
R
loper
EM
300
K
600
K
Expe
cted
K
450
K
600
K
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Hot
R
Roller
Hot
R
Roller
Beari
ngs

EM
60K
120K
Expe
cted
K
Note
(
3.7.1)
PM
cycle
is
350K.
Note
600
1000
180K
Part No.
A0069104
A2929500
A0299387
N8036701
N8036701
G0219350
VSST9500
Description
Digital Multimeter FLUKE 87
Loop Back Connector
Test Chart S5S- DF (10
Sheet/Set)
Exposure glass (3.4.2)
Operation Panel (3.3.1)
Push the 1st scanner [A] to the cutout [B] in the scanner
frame.
[C]: Exposure lamp cover (! x2)
[D]: Exposure lamp (! x3, " x1)
Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare
fingers.
1) Even though the operation of the FRR

mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1),
universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3), by-pass tray, and
ADF are similar, the only rollers that are
interchangeable are the tandem and universal
trays (Trays 1, 2, 3).
Feed unit (3.13.2)

!
Use the tip of a screwdriver to push up the
cover.
[B]: C-Clamp (# x1)
Feed unit (3.13.2)
[A]: Guide plate (! x3)

[B]: Registration sensor bracket (! x1)
[C]: Registration sensor (" x1)
Rear cover (3.13.1)
[A]: ADF board (! x2, " x14)
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Old
Location
3- 3.13.9
Open the ADF.
117
ADF rear cover. (3.5.1)
[A]: Bracket (! x1)
[B]: ADF position sensor (" x1)
[C]: APS sensor (" x1)
3- 3.13.10 Open the feed cover.
118
Front/rear covers (! x4) (3.5.1)
[A]: C-Clamps (# x2)
[B]: Original tray (" x1)
[C]: Bottom plate (" x1)
[D]: Original set sensor (! x1)
[E]: Feed cover sensor (" x1)
[F]: Bottom plate HP sensor (" x1)
[G]: Pick-up roller HP sensor ( (" x1)
[H]: Bottom plate position sensor (" x1)
119
Rear cover (3.5.1)
[A]: Bottom plate lift motor bracket (harness x1,
" x1, ! x2, timing belt x1)
[B]: Bottom plate lift motor (! x2)
3- 3.13.12 Rear cover (3.5.1)
120
[A]: Feed motor bracket (! x2, " x1, spring x1,
belt x1)
[B]: Feed motor (! x2)
121
Rear cover (3.5.1)
Bottom plate lift motor (3.5.11)
[A]: Timing belt
[B]: Exit/transport motor unit (! x3, " x2)
[C]: Transport motor (! x2)
[D]: Exit motor (! x2)
122
Rear cover (3.5.1)
[A]: Pick-up roller lift motor (! x2, " x1)
[B]: Pick-up roller HP sensor (" x1)
123
Feed unit (3.5.2)
Guide plate ( 3.5.5)
3- 3.13.16 CIS Power Supply Board (3.5.15)
124
[A]: Exit sensor bracket (! x1)
[B]: Exit sensor (" x1)
3- 3.14.1
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3,
125 Step 2
No. 11 to print the test pattern for the following
procedures.
3- 3.14.2
NOTE: Use an OS-A3 chart to perform the
127 SCANN- following adjustments.
ING
(NOTE)
1. Use SP2902 003, No. 5 (Printing Test Pattern,
3- Main
Single-Dot Line) to print a single dot pattern.
127 Scan
Magnific- 2. Check magnification, and then SP2909 001
(Main Scan Magnification - Copy) to adjust
ation
magnification if required. Specification: 2%.
PAGE: 3/24
No.: RB064002
New
Open the ADF.

ADF rear cover. (3.13.1)
[A]: Bracket (! x1)

[B]: ADF position sensor (" x1)
[C]: APS sensor (" x1)
Front/rear covers (! x4) (3.13.1)
[A]: C-Clamps (# x2)

[B]: Original tray (" x1)
[C]: Bottom plate (" x1)
[D]: Original set sensor (! x1)
[E]: Feed cover sensor (" x1)
[F]: Bottom plate HP sensor (" x1)
[G]: Pick-up roller HP sensor ( (" x1)
[H]: Bottom plate position sensor (" x1)
Rear cover (3.13.1)
[A]: Bottom plate lift motor bracket (harness x1,

" x1, ! x2, timing belt x1)
[B]: Bottom plate lift motor (! x2)
Rear cover (3.13.1)
[A]: Feed motor bracket (! x2, " x1, spring x1,

belt x1)
[B]: Feed motor (! x2)
Rear cover (3.13.1)
Bottom plate lift motor (3.13.11)
[A]: Timing belt

[B]: Exit/transport motor unit (! x3, " x2)
[C]: Transport motor (! x2)
[D]: Exit motor (! x2)
Rear cover (3.5.1)
[A]: Pick-up roller lift motor (! x2, " x1)

[B]: Pick-up roller HP sensor (" x1)
Feed unit (3.13.2)

Guide plate (3.13.5)
CIS Power Supply Board (3.13.15)
[A]: Exit sensor bracket (! x1)

[B]: Exit sensor (" x1)
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3,
No. 18 to print the test pattern for the following
procedures.
NOTE: Use an S-5-S chart to perform the
following adjustments.
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass
and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check magnification, and then SP2909 001
(Main Scan Magnification - Copy) to adjust
magnification if required. Specification: 2%.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
4-10 Table
Old
Level
Definition
To prevent the
machine from being
damaged, the SC can
only be reset by a
service representative
(see the note below).
The copier cannot be
operated at all.
The SC can be reset
by turning the main
power switch off and
on if the SC was
caused by incorrect
sensor detection.
The copier can be

operated as usual
except for the unit
related to the service
call.
The SC history is
updated. The
machine can be
operated as usual.
PAGE: 4/24
No.: RB064002
New
Reset Procedure
Enter SP mode,
then turn the main
power switch off
and on.
Turn the operation

switch or main
power switch off
and on. A level B
SC can only be
reset by turning
the main power
switch off and on.
Turn the operation
switch off and on.
Level
The SC will not be

displayed. All that
happens is that
the SC history is
updated.
Definition
To prevent the
machine from being
damaged, the SC can
only be reset by a
service representative
(see the note below).
The copier cannot be
operated at all.
The SC can be reset
by turning the main
power switch off and
on if the SC was
caused by incorrect
sensor detection.
The copier can be

operated as usual
except for the unit
related to the service
call.
The SC history is
updated. The
machine can be
operated as usual.
Reset Procedure
Enter SP mode,
then turn the main
power switch off
and on.
Turn the operation

switch or main
power switch off
and on. A level B
SC can only be
reset by turning
the main power
switch off and on.
Turn the operation
switch off and on.
The SC will not be

displayed. All that
happens is that
the SC history is
updated.
(Correction: position of SC levels B,

C and D).
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
4-33 Additional New
SP
Old
SC No.
Symptom
853 D IEEE802 11b card startup error
The machine starts up. The IEEE802 11b card connection
board is recognized. The IEEE802 11b card is not recognized.
854 D IEEE802 11b card access error
The machine has been reading the data from the card. The
machine loses access to the card; the IEEE802 11b card
connection board is still recognized.
855 D IEEE802 11b card error
Some illegal data is found in the card.
856 D IEEE802 11b card connection board error
An error is detected in the IEEE802 11b card connection board.
Replace the hard disk (the user codes and counters are
recovered when the main switch is turned on).
920 D Printer error
The printer program cannot be continued.
925 D Net file error

The management file for net files is corrupted; net files are not
normally read.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC
and the DeskTopBinder software
992 C Other system SCs
The controller received an unknown SC code from the engine.
993 D Network error
The ASIC program of GW controller cannot be continued.
Super
SP
Mode
No.: RB064002
New
870 B Address book data error

The address book in the hard disk is accessed. An error is
detected in the address book data; address book data is not read;
or data is not written into the address book.
NOTE: To recover from the error, do any of the following
countermeasures:
Format the address book by using SP5-832-008 (all data in the
address bookincluding the user codes and countersis
initialized)
Initialize the user data by using SP5-832-006 and -007 (the user
codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned
on)
5-1
PAGE: 5/24
Possible Cause
Loose connection between the
card and the connection board
Loose connection between the
card and the connection board
Defective card
Defective card connection

board
Data corruption
Defective hard disk
Defective software
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
Contact your product specialist.
Defective ASIC
Defective GW controller
To Enter the Super SP Mode

1. Press Clear Modes !.
2. On the operation panel keypad, press "#$.
3. Hold down Clear/Stop % for more than 3 seconds.
4. The Copy SP or PM Counter items are displayed. If the printer or scanner/printer option is
installed, the Printer SP and Scanner SP items are also available.
5. Press Copy SP and # key at the same time.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-7 Table
(SP2902
001,
002)
Old
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Test Pattern
None
Vertical Stripes
Grayscale Horizontal
Grayscale Vertical
Density Patch
Argyle Pattern
Bandwidth Characteristics Horizontal
Trimming Area
Auto Create Argyle
Auto Create Argyle
Auto Create Grayscale Horiz. (20 mm)
Auto Create Grayscale Horiz. (40 mm)
PAGE: 6/24
No.: RB064002
New
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Test Pattern
None
Vertical Stripes
Grayscale Horizontal (16-level)
Grayscale Vertical (16-level)
Grayscale Vertical-Horizontal (16-level)
Cross Pattern
Argyle Pattern
Trimming Area
Auto Create Vertical Stripes
Auto Create Horizontal Stripes
Auto Create Argyle
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-8 Table
(SP2902
003)
Old
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
5-9
Table
(SP2902
004)
5-15 Title
5-15 1st
Sentence
No.: RB064002
New
Test Pattern
None
Horizontal Line (2 dot)
Independent Pattern (1-dot)
All Black Pattern
Belt Pattern
Trimming Area
Argyle Pattern
Grayscale Horizontal (16-Level)*1
Grayscale Vertical (16-Level)*1
Grayscale Vertical-Horizontal (16-Level)*1
Grayscale Grid (16-Level)*1
Horizontal Cross Stitch (1-dot Horizontal 400
dpi)
Horizontal Cross Stitch (1-dot Horizontal 600
dpi)
1-Dot Line (LD1, LD2 Reversed)
1-Dot Line Grid (LD1, LD2 Reversed)
1-Dot Paired Lines (LD1, LD2 Reversed)
Independent Pattern (1-dot)
White Paper
1-Dot Line Grid (External Data Composite)
Trimming Area (External Data Composite)
No.
0
1
2
3
Pattern
None
Grayscale Vertical (16-level/20 mm)
Grayscale Vertical (16-level/40 mm)
Grayscale Horizontal (16-level 20 mm)
17
PAGE: 7/24
NVRAM Firmware Update

This procedure describes updating the NVRAM
firmware. For details about replacing the NVRAM
see 3.4.7 NVRAM.
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
Test Pattern
None
Checkered Flag Pattern
Cross Stitch (Horizontal)
Cross Stitch (Vertical)
Argyle Pattern
Trimming Area
Full Dot Pattern
Black Band (Vertical)
Black Band (Horizontal)
Stair
Blank Image
Grid Pattern (1-dot): 0ch (with external data)
Trimming Area (with external data)
Argyle Pattern (with external data)
Outside Data
Pattern
None
Vertical Cross Stitch (4 beam)
Horizontal Cross Stitch (4 beam)
Grayscale OPC
Horizontal Grayscale 20 - 170lpi
NVRAM Update
This procedure describes updating the NVRAM
data. For details about replacing the NVRAM
see 3.12.7 NVRAM.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-20 5.5.4
PAGE: 8/24
No.: RB064002
Old
New
Paper Input
Bypass Paper Size
List/Test Print
Config. Page
Menu List
PCL Config./Font Page
PS Config./Font Page
Hex Dump
Maintenance
System
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Duplex
Quantity of Print Sets
Edge Smoothing
Spool Images
Resolution
Toner Saving
Reserved Job Waiting Time
Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
Edge to Edge Printing
Host Interface
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
Paper Input
Bypass Paper Size
List/Test Print
Config. Page
Menu List
PCL Config./Font Page
PS Config./Font Page
Hex Dump
Maintenance
Menu Protect
System
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Duplex
Quantity of Print Sets
Edge Smoothing
Spool Images
Resolution
Toner Saving
Reserved Job Waiting Time
Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
Edge to Edge Printing
Host Interface
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
PCL
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Extend A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-21 5.5.5
5-21 5.5.6
5-27 SP2114004
Old
Independent Dot Pixel

Level (600 dpi)
No.: RB064002
New
Basic Settings
Program Change
Initial Setup
1~9
Delete
1~9
System Settings
Send/Store Correction Timeout
Compression (Black & White)
Compression (Gray Scale)
Senders Name Default
Max. E-Mail Size
Divide & Send E-Mail
E-Mail Information Language
Job Reset Time in Adding Original
Original Setting
Original Orientation Priority
Mixed Original Sizes Priority
Switch to Batch
File Type Priority
Print & Delete Scanner Journal
Select Title
Subject Settings
Program Change
Delete
Machine Repair
Telephone No.
Serial No. of Machine
Telephone Number
Print Inquiry List
004
PAGE: 9/24
[0~15/15/1]
Basic Settings
Program/Change
Delete
System Settings
Send/Store Correction Timeout
Compression (Black & White)
Compression (Gray Scale)
Senders Name Default
Max. E-Mail Size
Divide & Send E-Mail
E-Mail Information Language
Job Reset Time in Adding Original
Original Setting
Original Orientation Priority
Mixed Original Sizes Priority
Switch to Batch
File Type Priority
Print & Delete Scanner Journal
Select Title
Subject Settings
Program/Change
Delete
Machine Repair
Telephone No.
Machine Serial No.
Telephone Number
Consumables
Toner
Staple
Staple (Centre)
004
Independent Dot Pixel
Level (1200 dpi)
manuals4you.com
[0~15/15/1]
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-28 SP2201
5-29 SP2209
5-29 SP2220
5-29 SP2223
5-29 SP2301001/-002
5-32 SP2931
PAGE: 10/24
No.: RB064002
Old
New

001 Dev. Bias
Adjusts the development
(Image)
bias for copying when
process control is off
[700~200/600/10V]
Adjust as a temporary
measure to compensate
for an aging drum until the
old drum can be replaced.
002 ID Sensor
Pattern
bias used to create the ID
sensor pattern. DFU
[700~200/380/10V]
This SP and SP2201 004
must be changed together
by the same amount.
003 OHP
bias for copying with OHP
sheets.
[700~200/380/10V]
004 ID Sensor
Pattern Dev.
potential to create the ID
Potential
sensor pattern. DFU
[700~200/380/10V]
by the same amount.
005 Vb Scale
Sets the Vb target
Voltage Setting
development bias voltage
(Vb). DFU

001 Dev. Bias
(Image)
bias for copying when
process control is off
[900~100/550/10V]
Adjust as a temporary
measure to compensate
for an aging drum until the
old drum can be replaced.
002 ID Sensor
Pattern
bias used to create the ID
sensor pattern. DFU
[900~100/360/10V]
by the same amount.
003 OHP
bias for copying with OHP
sheets.
[900~100/300/10V]
004 ID Sensor
Pattern Dev.
potential to create the ID
Potential
sensor pattern. DFU
[380~140/240/10V]
by the same amount.
005 Vb Scale
Sets the Vb target
Voltage Setting
development bias voltage
(Vb). DFU
[900~100/550/1V]
Toner Supply
Rate
[50~995/850/5 mg/s]
Increasing this value reduces
the time the toner supply clutch
remains on. Use a lower value if
the user tends to make many
copies that have large areas of
black.
Vref Manual
Adjusts the TD sensor reference
Setting
voltage (Vref) manually.
[1.00~4.00V/2.50/0.01V]
Vt Display
Displays the current TD sensor
output voltage.
[0~5.0V]
001 Front
[20~200/80/1 A]
002 Back
[20~200/80/1 A]
006 La2f
Adjusts the area where the transfer
current is applied for the leading edge
during rear side copying.
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
009 La3
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing
for copying thick paper from the LCT.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
010 La3f
Adjusts the transfer current OFF
timing for copying thick paper from
the LCT.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
Toner Supply
Rate

[10~800/30/5 mg/s]
Increasing this value reduces
the time the toner supply clutch
remains on. Use a lower value if
the user tends to make many
copies that have large areas of
black.
Vref Manual
Adjusts the TD sensor reference
Setting
voltage (Vref) manually.
[1.0~4.80V/4.00/0.01V]
Vt Display
Displays the current TD sensor
output voltage.
[0~5.0V/4.0V]
001 1st Copy
[20~200/80/1 A]
002 2nd Copy
[20~200/80/1 A]
006 La2f
Adjusts the area where the transfer
during front side copying.
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
009 La3
for copying from the LCT.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
010 La3f
timing for copying from the LCT.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-33 SP2932
Old
La2f
La3
010
La3f
011
Lc3r
012
Lc3
006
La2f
009
La3
010
La3f
011
Lc3r
012
5-35 SP2934
006
090
5-34 SP2933
PAGE: 11/24
Lc3
006
La2f
009
La3
010
La3f
011
Lc3r
012
Lc3
No.: RB064002
New
Adjusts the transfer current for the

leading edge during front side
copying.
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
for copying from the by-pass tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
timing for copying from the by-pass
tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
for copying with thick paper from the
by-pass tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
timing for copying with thick paper
from the by-pass tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
by-pass tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
by-pass tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
006
La2f
090
La3
010
La3f
011
Lc3r
012
Lc3
006
La2f
009
La3
010
La3f
011
Lc3r
012
Lc3
006
La2f
009
La3
010
La3f
011
Lc3r
012
Lc3
manuals4you.com
Adjusts the transfer current for the

leading edge during rear side copying.
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
for copying thick paper from Tray 1.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
the by-pass tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
for copying with thick paper from Tray
1.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
from Tray 1.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
Tray 2.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
2.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
from Tray 2.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
copying thick paper from Tray 3.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
timing copying thick paper from Tray
3.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
3.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
from Tray 3.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-35 SP2935
5-36
5-36 SP2936
5-37
5-37 SP2962
5-39 SP2968
PAGE: 12/24
Old
006
La2f

[0~+20/0/1 mm]
009 La3
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
010 La3f
tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
011 Lc3r
by-pass tray.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
012 Lc3
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
005 La2
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing
for back side copying.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
006 La2f
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
007 Lc2r
current is applied for the trailing edge
during back side copying.
[0~+20/0/1 mm]
008 Lc2
timing for back side copying.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
Adjustment of
Manually executes a process
Drum Conditions
control. However, this only
works if process control is
enabled with SP3901, and if the
fusing temperature is less
than 100C.
Toner Exit Mode

Press Execute to force used
toner into the toner collection
bottle. Blank paper will feed for
about 60 s with the transfer belt
released.
5-39 SP2970
Transfer Belt
Resistance: Disp.
Current Value
5-44 SP4605
002
Start
Uses the interval between

sheets to measure the
resistance of the transfer belt
and displays this value ().
Very High 190 High 90
Standard 25 Low 15
Very Low
Starts the density adjustment for the
CCD using the standard white board.
Place 5 sheets of A3 plain paper on
the exposure glass, then press
Execute. A message is displayed to
indicate the success or failure of the
adjustment.
No.: RB064002
New
006
La2f
009
La3
010
La3f
011
Lc3r
012
Lc3

[0~+20/0/1 mm]
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
Tray 4.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
from Tray 4.
[30~+30/0/1 mm]
(Delete)
Adjustment of
Drum Conditions
Toner Exit Mode
Manually executes a process

control. However, this only
works if process control is
enabled with SP3901.
Press Execute to force used

toner into the toner collection
bottle. The moving
components of the cleaning
and toner collection areas will
rotate for about 60 s with the
transfer belt released.
Transfer Belt
Uses the interval between
Resistance: Disp.
sheets to measure the
Current Value
resistance of the transfer belt
and displays this value (M).
Very High 190 High 90

Standard 25 Low 15
Very Low
002 Start Starts the density adjustment for the
CCD using the standard white board.
Place 5 sheets of A3 plain paper on
the exposure glass, then press
Execute. A message is displayed to
indicate the success or failure of the
adjustment. DFU
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-45 SP4705
5-46 SP4902
5-52 SP5113
5-63 SP5840
5-68 SP6006
PAGE: 13/24
Old
002
New
Starts the standard white density

adjustment for the CIS. Place 5 sheets
of A3 on the exposure glass, then
press Execute. A message is
displayed to indicate the success or
failure of the adjustment.
010 Back Scan Image Adj.
Changes the
*
Mode: Text
density of front
side (SBU)
scanned image
*
Mode: Photo
data and the MTF.
[0~2/0/1]
*
Mode: Text/Photo
0: Normal
1: Low Level
*
Mode: Pale
2: Medium Level
3: High Level
*
Mode: Generation
*
Scan Select Mode
Optional
Counter Type
0: None
1: Key card Japan only
2: Key card (countdown type)
3: Pre-paid card
4: Coin lock
5: MF key card
6: Not used
7: Not used
8: Key counter + Non-count
system
9: Barcode printer
020
003
004
005
006
007
008
No.: RB064002
Start
Determines the operation mode

of the WEP key.
[0~1/0/1]
0: Max. 64-bit (10 characters)
1: Max. 128-bit (10, 26
characters)
Adjusts the vertical
ADF Vertical
registration for the
Registration
front/back in ADF mode.
(Front)
[5~+5/0/0.1 mm]
ADF Vertical
Registration (Back)
ADF Buckle
Adjusts the roller timing
Adjustment 1
at the skew correction
sensor/entrance roller. A
higher setting causes
more buckling.
[3.0~+3.0/0/0.1mm]
ADF Buckle
Adjustment 2
at the interval
sensor/scanning roller.
A higher setting causes
more buckling.
[5.0~+5.0/0/0.1mm]
These settings adjust
ADF Trailing Edge
the erase margin for the
Erase Margin
trailing edges for the
(Front)
front/back.
ADF Trailing Edge
[10~+10/0/0.5 mm].
Erase Margin
(Back)
002
Start
Starts the standard white density

adjustment for the CIS. Place 5 sheets
of A3 on the exposure glass, then
press Execute. A message is
displayed to indicate the success or
failure of the adjustment. DFU
Back Scan Image Adj.
Changes the
density of the rear
Mode: Text
side (SBU)
scanned image
Mode: Photo
data and the MTF.
[0~2/0/1]
Mode: Text/Photo
0: Normal
1: Low Level
Mode: Pale
2: Medium Level
3: High Level
Mode: Generation
Scan Select Mode DFU
010
*
011
*
012
*
013
*
014
*
019
*
Optional
Counter Type

0: None
1: Key card Japan only
2: Key card (countdown type)
3: Pre-paid card
4: Coin lock
5: MF key card
WEP
Mode
(Delete)
003
004
005
ADF Vertical
Registration
(Front)
ADF Vertical
Registration (Back)
ADF Buckle
Adjustment 1
006
ADF Buckle
Adjustment 2
007
ADF Trailing Edge

Erase Margin
(Front)
ADF Trailing Edge
Erase Margin
(Back)
008
manuals4you.com
Adjusts the vertical

registration for the
front/back in ADF mode.
[30 (-5.1 mm)~+30
(5.1mm)/0/0.17 mm]
at the skew correction
sensor/entrance roller. A
higher setting causes
more buckling.
[12 (-3.0 mm)~+12
(3.0 mm)/0/0.25mm]
at the interval
sensor/scanning roller.
A higher setting causes
more buckling.
[8 (-2 mm)~+8 (2
mm)/0/0.25mm]
These settings adjust
the erase margin for the
trailing edges for the
front/back.
[20 (-10 mm)~+20 (10
mm)/0/0.5 mm].
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-72 SP7101
5-72 SP7204
5-75 SP7505
5-75 SP7506
Old
014 A5 LEF
007 Inserter
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
128 Other Size
132 A3
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT
164 LG
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
Total Jam Counter by
Paper Size
5-76 SP7808
Counters Reset
5-77 SP7910
~
SP7990
7910
7911
7990
Press # to reset all counters, with

the exception of the optional
card/key counter devices. The
following counts are reset:
Copy count
Print count
Duplex count
Staple count
A3/DLT count
P/O count
C/O count
ROM
Prints the ROM number in
Number
the SMC Report. The
number is not displayed on
Firmware
Displays the version
Version
numbers of all firmware in
the system.
Status of
Displays the following
Issued SC
information about the most
recently issued SC: 1)
Source file name, 2) SC
number, 3) Result
No.: RB064002
New
014
007
001
003
004
005
006
053
054
055
056
Displays the total number

of jams by paper size.
PAGE: 14/24
B5 LEF
Cover Interposer
At power on
Registration sensor check in failure
Nip-in sensor check in failure
Registration sensor (On check)
Relay Sensor (On check)
Registration sensor check out failure
Nip-in sensor check out failure
Registration sensor (Off check)
Relay sensor (Off check)
Total Jam Counter by Paper Size

Displays the total number of
005 A4 LEF
jams by paper size.
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
128 Other LEF
132 A3
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT
164 LG
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Other SEF
Pressing the # key will reset all
Counters Reset
counters, except for the
following:
Optional card/key counters
Copy count
Print count
Duplex count
Staple count
A3/DLT count
P/O count
C/O count
(Delete)
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
5-78 SP1001
PAGE: 15/24
Old
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
Bit SW 1
Bit SW 2
Bit SW 3
Bit SW 4
Bit SW 5
Bit SW 6
Bit SW 7
Bit SW 8
No.: RB064002
New
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
(These bit switches are

currently not being used).
Bit SW 1
Bit SW 2
Bit SW 3
Bit SW 4
Bit SW 5
Bit SW 6
Bit SW 7
Bit SW 8
Page 5-86 Input Check

Please completely replace the following 18 tables.
1. Paper Feed 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reading
0
1
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Description
Near End Sensor
(see tables below)
2. Paper Feed 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1500 sheets
bit-3
bit-2
bit-1
bit-0
Reading
Description
Not used
Not used
Not used
0
0
0
0
(see tables below)
1000 sheets
0
0
0
1
400 sheets
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
manuals4you.com
70 sheets
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 16/24
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
No.: RB064002
3. Paper Feed 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Not used
Not used
Not used
Reading
0
(see tables below)
Universal Tray Size Detection N.A. models only

Paper Size
11 x 17
8 1/2 x 14
8 1/2 x 11
11 x 8 1/2
5 1/2 x 8 1/2
8 1/2 x 5 1/2
8 x 10 1/2
7 1/4 x 10 1/2
8 x 13
*
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH

HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
Panel Display
11 x 17 SEF
8 1/2 x 14 SEF
8 1/2 x 11 SEF
8 1/2 x 11 LEF
5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF
8 1/2 x 5 1/2 LEF
8 x 10 1/2 SEF
7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF
8 x 13 SEF
(size set in User
Tools)
Universal Tray Size Detection EU/ASIA models

Paper Size
A3 SEF
8 1/4 x 13
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
8 1/2 x 13
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
*
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH

HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
Panel Display
A3 SEF
8 1/4 x 13 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
8 1/2 x 13 SEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
(size set in User
Tools)
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 17/24
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
No.: RB064002
4. Paper Feed 4
Bit
Description
7 1st Paper Height
6 Japan only
5 2nd Paper Height
4 3rd Paper Height
3 1st Paper Near End
2 Japan only
1 2nd Paper Near End
0 3rd Paper Near End
5. Paper Feed 5
Description
Bit
7 Japan only
6 Japan only
5 Japan only
4 Japan only
3 Japan only
2 Right Tray Paper Sensor
1 Tray Type
0 Not used
Reading
0
1
Less than 30%
30% or more
Less than 30%
Less than 30%
Near End
30% or more
30% or more
Not Near End
Near End
Near End
Not Near End

Not Near End
Reading
0
Paper not present

3 trays
Paper present
4 trays
6. Paper Feed 6
Reading
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Left Tandem Tray Set
Japan only
Japan only
Japan only
Right Tandem Tray Set
0
Set
1
Not set
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Paper present
Set
Activated
Paper not present
Not set
7. Paper Feed 7
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Japan only
Japan only
Reading
0
1
Paper present Paper not present
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Paper not present

Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper present
Paper present
Paper not present

Paper not present
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 18/24
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
No.: RB064002
8. Paper Feed 8
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Japan only
Japan only
Reading
0
1
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Paper present
Activated
Activated
Paper not present
Paper present
Paper present
Paper not present

Paper not present
9. Paper Feed 9
Reading
Bit
Description
7 Not used
6 Not used
5 Toner Overflow SW
4 Toner Collection Bottle Set SW
3
2
1
0
Switch not
pressed
Switch pressed
Switch pressed
Switch not
pressed
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
10. Paper Feed 10

Reading
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
DFU
11. Paper Feed 11

Reading
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
DFU
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 19/24
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
No.: RB064002
12. DIP Switches

Reading
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
DFU
13. Exit
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Toner Collection Motor Sensor
Toner End Sensor
Not used
Exit Unit Set
Paper Exit Sensor
Web End Sensor
Reading
0
1
Deactivated
Activated
Toner end
Not toner end
Deactivated
Activated
Set
Paper present
Paper present
Not web end
Not set
Paper not present
Paper not present
Web end
14. Duplex
Reading
Bit
Description
7 Not used
6 Duplex Unit Set
5 Duplex Transport 3 Sensor
2 Duplex Jogger HP Sensor
1 Duplex Inverter Sensor
0 Duplex Entrance Sensor
Set
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
Deactivated
Paper not present
Paper not present
Not set
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Activated
Paper present
Paper present

Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Key Card Set
Development Motor Lock
Fusing/Exit Motor Lock
Drum Motor Lock
CPM
Not used
Not used
Not used
Reading
0
1
Set
Not set
Not locked
Locked
Locked
Not locked
Not locked
Locked
60 CPM
75 CPM
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 20/24
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
No.: RB064002

Reading
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Charge Corona Leak
Not used
Toner Collection Motor Lock
Exhaust Fan Lock
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
0
Leaked
1
Not leaked
Locked
Locked
Not locked
Not locked

Reading
Bit
Description
7 Not used
6 Not used
5 Front Door Open
4 Copy Tray Full Sensor
3 Guide Plate Position Sensor
2 Relay Sensor
1 By-pass Paper End Sensor
0 Registration Sensor
Open
Not full
Closed
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Closed
Full
Open
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
18. Original Size Set Sensor

Reading
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Fusing Unit Set
Not used
Key Counter Set
0
Set
1
Not set
Set
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Not set
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
Paper not present
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 21/24
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
6-11 4. Drum 4.
Potential
Sensor
Old
No.: RB064002
New
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR

4. DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
The drum potential sensor detects the
The drum potential sensor detects the
change in drum potential, caused by variable
change in drum potential, caused by variable
conditions around the drum (heat, humidity,
conditions around the drum (heat, humidity,
drum service) and adjusts the following
drum service) and adjusts the following
voltages:
voltages:

Laser diode power
Laser diode power

The drum thermistor detects drum
temperature and this data is used to
control the above voltages.
6-45 Last
The strength of each beam is 10 mW/channel at a The strength of each beam is 10 mW/channel at a
Sentenc- wavelength of 788 mm.
wavelength of 788 nm.
e
The polygonal mirror motor [E] normally remains
The polygonal mirror motor [E] normally remains
6-48 Last
on. It shuts down when the machine is powered
Sentenc- on. It shuts down when the machine is powered
off or enters auto off mode or night mode.
off or enters the auto mode or night mode.
e
Factor
Description
Factor
Description
6-72 Table
GAIN
Image Pixel
Count
Target
Density
Toner
Supply Rate
Clutch
Startup
Time
6-75 Abnormal TD
Sensor
Output
With GAIN = 0, Clutch On Time is 16

ms
The density for every dot in the output
data for the page is calculated.
Example: 255 for A3 all black, for
comparison.
0.7 mg/cm2
850 mg/s
16 ms
This default setting can

be adjusted with
SP2209 Toner Supply
Rate
The actual time required
for the toner to arrive at
the hopper after the
clutch switches on.
Abnormal output detected during initialization of

the developer: An SC is logged and SP2906 (TD
Sensor Control Voltage & Check) will display
0.00V.
GAIN
Image Pixel
Count
Target
Density
Toner
Supply Rate
Clutch
Startup
Time
With GAIN = 0, Clutch On Time is 0

ms
The density for every dot in the output
data for the page is calculated.
Example: 255 for A3 all black, for
comparison.
0.7 mg/cm2
850 mg/s
16 ms
This default setting can

be adjusted with
SP2209 Toner Supply
Rate
The actual time required
for the toner to arrive at
the hopper after the
clutch switches on.
Abnormal output detected during initialization of

the developer: An SC is logged and SP2906 (TD
Sensor Control Voltage & Check) will display
0.00V.
During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD
sensor output voltage (Vt) is 2.5 volts or higher
sensor output voltage (Vt) is 2.5 volts or higher
even though the control voltage is set to the
even though the control voltage is set to the
minimum value (PWM = 0). The machine logs
minimum value (PWM = 0). The machine logs
SC341 TD Sensor Adjustment Error 1.
SC341 TD Sensor Adjustment Error 1.
During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD
sensor output voltage (Vt) does not come in the
sensor output voltage (Vt) does not come in the
target range (3.0 0.1V) within 20 seconds.
target range (2.5 0.1V) within 20 seconds.
The machine logs SC342.
The machine logs SC342.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Location
B468 1.11
-11 JAM
DETECT
ION
Old
Staple
Stapler exit
sensor
check in
failure
Stapler exit
sensor
check out
failure
Stapler tray
sensor
check out
failure
Shift tray exit
sensor
check in
failure
B468 2.1
-13 OVERVI
EW
PAGE: 22/24
No.: RB064002
New
Remains OFF after the

entrance sensor goes ON
and the paper has 760
mm.
Remains ON after the
stapler tray entrance
sensor goes ON, and
enough time has elapsed
for twice the length of the
paper to feed.
feed out belt motor
switches ON and pulse
count exceeded 466.
feed out belt motor
switches ON for 1260 ms.
Staple
Booklet exit
sensor
check in
failure
Booklet exit
sensor
check out
failure
Stapler tray
paper
sensor
check out
failure
Exit sensor
check in
failure

entrance sensor goes ON
and the paper has 760
mm.
stapler tray entrance
sensor goes ON, and
enough time has elapsed
for twice the length of the
paper to feed.
feed out belt motor
switches ON and pulse
count exceeded 466.
feed out belt motor
switches ON for 1260 ms.
1.
Proof Tray
9.
Stapler Unit
1. Proof Tray
10. Stapler Unit
2.
Guide Plate Motor
10.
Guide Plate
Pressure Plate
Unit*
2. Guide Plate Motor
3.
11. Pressure Plate

Unit*
4.
Shift Roller
5.
Tray Junction Gate
6.
Punch Unit
7.
Stapler Junction
Gate
8.
Pre-Stack Tray
3. Guide Plate
11.
Saddle Stitch
Stapler*
4. Shift Roller
12. Saddle Stitch

Stapler*
12.
Folder Plate*
5. Tray Junction Gate
8. Folder Plate*
13.
Lower Tray*
6. Punch Unit
13. Lower Tray*
14.
Folder Rollers*
7. Stapler Junction
Gate
14. Folder Rollers*
15.
Upper Tray
9. Pre-Stack Tray
15. Upper Tray
B468 2.5.3
-20 Lower
Tray
Just After the Power is Switched on

At power on, the upper tray moves to the start
position under the feed-out slot, as described
previously.
Just After the Power is Switched on

At power on, the lower tray moves to its start
position.
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Old
Location
Positioning the Lower Tray for Feed-out
B468 2.5.3
-20 Lower
If the lower tray is selected for a job, the upper
Tray
tray is moved away from the feed-out slot at the
start of the job. The motor [A] lifts the side fence
and upper tray to upper limit sensor [B], which
stops the motor. The upper tray remains locked in
position on the side fence (by the upper tray lift
solenoid) while the lower tray is in use.
If sensor [B] fails, switch [C] stops the tray.

While the upper tray is being raised, motor [D] lifts
the lower tray to the feed-out slot. The motor stops
when the upper tray paper height sensor detects
the tray.
G338 1.2.2
-4 Controller Board
DIP
Switches
No.
5
6
7
8
G338 Related
-11 SP
Mode
Function
Boot selection
1
2
3
4
OFF
DFU
DFU
DFU
Localization
setting
OFF
OFF
OFF
Model Setting
Model Setting
Model Setting
OFF
OFF
OFF
Comments
Switch ON only to
boot from an IC
card.*1
OFF
ON for export
models, OFF for
models for the
Japanese market
Currently these
switches are not
used.
Spec 3.3.5
-6
Spec 3.4
-7
Positioning the Lower Tray for Feed-out

If the lower tray is selected for a job, the upper
tray is moved away from the feed-out slot at the
start of the job. The motor [A] lifts the side fence
and upper tray to upper limit sensor [B], which
stops the motor. The upper tray remains locked in
position on the side fence (by the upper tray lift
solenoid) while the lower tray is in use.
If sensor [B] fails, switch [C] stops the tray.
While the lower tray is being raised, motor [D] lifts
the lower tray to the feed-out slot. The motor stops
when the upper tray paper height sensor detects
the tray.
No.
Function
Boot selection
5
6
7
8
OFF
DFU
DFU
DFU
Localization
setting
Model Setting
Model Setting
Model Setting
OFF
OFF
OFF
Comments
Switch ON only to
boot from an IC
card.*1
OFF
OFF
OFF
Data rates can also be adjusted using the UP

mode USB Setting in the Host Interface in the
System menu. This mode can be accessed only
when the Enter, Escape, then Menu keys are
pressed to enter the UP mode.
NOTE: The WEP key can be set using the Web

Status Monitor or Telnet.
No.: RB064002
New
2
3
4
(Last
Paragraph)
G338 WEP
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
-15
WEP is a coding system designed to protect
wireless data transmission. In order to unlock
encoded data, the same WEP key is required on
the receiving side. There are 64 bit and 128 bit
WEP keys. However, this machine supports
only 64 bit WEP.
Spec Copy
-1 Paper
Size
Spec Power
-1 Source
Spec Table
-2
PAGE: 23/24
ON
ON for export
models, OFF for
models for the
Japanese market
Currently these
switches are not
used.
(Delete)
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)

WEP is a coding system designed to protect
wireless data transmission. In order to unlock
encoded data, the same WEP key is required on
the receiving side. There are 64 bit and 128 bit
WEP keys.
NOTE: The WEP key can be set using the Web
Status Monitor or Telnet.
Non-standard
sizes
Width: 100 305 mm (3.9"x12")

Length: 148 - 432 mm (5.6"x17.0")
Non-standard
sizes
Width: 100 305 mm (3.9"x12")

Length: 148 - 600 mm (5.6"x23.4")
Europe/Asia
220 ~ 240 V/ 50/60 MHz 8 A
Europe/Asia
220 ~ 240 V/ 50/60 Hz 8 A
40 ~ 128 g/m2
(11 ~ 34 lb.)
52 ~ 128 g/m2
(14 ~ 34 lb.)
LOWER TRAY
40 ~ 128 g/m2
(11 ~ 34 lb.)
2-sided original
52 ~ 128 g/m2
(14 ~ 34 lb.)
SADDLE-STITCH STAPLE SPECIFICATIONS
3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH 50-SHEET STAPLER

B468
3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH 50-SHEET STAPLER

B469
Original
Size
1-sided original
2-sided original
Original
Weight
manuals4you.com
1-sided original
Technical Bulletin
Date: 13-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Page General
Old
Location
3.4.4 LOWER TRAY
Spec 3.4.4
-7
15 sheets
Binding
Capacity
(80 g/m2)
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Stapling
Position
Staple
Capacity
Fold Position
Saddle-Stich
Capacity
A3, B4, A4 SEF, 11"x17", 81/2"x11"

SE
64 g/m2 ~ 90 g/m2
Center, 2 locations
Max
Total
Size
docs.
sheets
25
2~5
A4 SEF,
docs.
sheets
81/2"x11" SEF
15
6 ~ 10
docs.
sheets
10
11 ~ 15
docs.
sheets
A3, B4, 11"x17"
30
2~5
docs.
sheets
20
6 ~ 10
docs.
sheets
10
11 ~ 15
docs.
sheets
PAGE: 24/24
No.: RB064002
New
(Delete)
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Subject: ROM History (Martini-C1 GW)
No.: RB064003

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
Firmware history for the Martini-C1 GW.
B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
1.11
1.12.2
B179
66AF
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
R9 jams (B478 Finisher) were displayed as R7 jams.

At the completion of Document Box scanning, a message was sometimes displayed asking the user to
remove the paper from the Finisher tray.
SC870 occurs after multiple groups are selected and assigned a number in the address book programming
screen.
SC819 occurs if Continue to Program is performed 196 times in the address book programming screen.
After the main power comes on with the Weekly Timer, and the Access Code screen prompts the user for
code entry, the screen can be cleared by simply opening and closing the cover.
Bond Paper does not appear as a selection for Tray 1 or the LCT in User Tools System Settings Tray
Paper Setting.
The machine serial number is not displayed with SC error codes.
Setting range for SP5501: PM Alarm Level corrected from 0-255K to 0-9999K.
SP2912-001 (Drum Reverse Rotation, Rotation Amount) default value changed from 2 ! 3, setting range
changed from 0-10 ! 1-3.
SP2210 (ID Sensor Pattern Interval) default value changed from 10 ! 100.
SP2201-001, 002, 003, 005 (Development Bias Adjustment) maximum setting changed from 900 ! 800.
SP2931/2/3/4/5/6-001 (Transfer Current On/Off Timing) default value changed from 0 ! 20.
SP1902-004 (Fusing Web Motor Control, Web Near End Value) default value changed from 90 ! 80.
Supports the Key Card, when used in combination with GW firmware 1.12.
Changes made to support the Key Card, as per field request:
"
Key Counter changed to Key Card in UP Mode display.
"
Use of the Interleaf function is allowed when Key Card is selected (SP mode).
"
Automatic jam when the counter reaches 0 has been disabled, so that all remaining pages are printed
out.
"
The following 2 selections have been added to SP5113 (Optional Counter Type):
Firmware modified so that when 2: Europe is selected in SP5131 (Paper Size Type Selection), it is possible
to select F-sized originals in User Tools System Settings General Features.
SC990 sometimes occurs if the signal timing during scanning and printing causes a delay in the scanning
process.
F
F
manuals4you.com
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Model: Martini-C1
Subject: ROM History (Martini-C1 BCU)
No.: RB064004

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
Firmware history for the Martini-C1 BCU.
B0655123
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
3.12a
3.14e
BFCC
64E0
1st Mass Prod.

September Prod 02
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
With DF 2-sided scanning, the edge of the original is sometimes visible on the rear side of the
copy when the image is shifted using Create Margin for stapling.
When making duplex copies from the exposure glass, sometimes both the front and rear sides
come out as the front side of the original.
SC990 sometimes occurs at power on.
When the main power is turned on, SP1902-002 sometimes changes to an illegal value, and the
Fusing Web End condition occurs much earlier than normal.
SC345 sometimes occurs during the initial paper feed just after the main power is turned on, or at
the end of a job while making the ID sensor pattern.
This version supports the Key Card, when used in combination with GW firmware 1.12.
Software modified to minimize developer carrier scattering.
Development bias output maximum changed from 900V to 800V.
SP2970 was not triggered when occurrence conditions were present.
Change in specification: Fusing Web End.
1. Web End detection priority given to the web end sensor (previously, the SP1902 value had
priority).
2. Near End now triggered at 80% (previous: 90%), and the default for SP1902-001 has been
changed to 80% accordingly.
Setting range for SP2912-001 changed from 0-10 to 1-3.
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
Date: 4-Oct-02
Model: Martini-C1
Subject: Finisher screw detaches from slide rail bracket
PAGE: 1/5
No.: RB064005

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
The screw shown below (Frame section 20, P/N #04533006B, pg. 45 #104) comes loose
and detaches from the slide rail bracket.
CAUSE
Vibration during transport.
SOLUTION
As a permanent solution, the screws have been equipped with spring-washers. As a
temporary solution in the field, please perform the procedure below.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Date: 4-Oct-02
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 2/5
No.: RB064005
Procedure for Adjusting the Slide Rail Fixing Screws

The following is a procedure for the re-attaching or additional tightening of the Stapler slide
rail unit fixing screws, which is necessary when the unit derails.
1. Remove the rear cover [A].
[A]
2. Remove the front door [B] by

lifting up the upper hinge area
[C], then removing the door
shaft from its pivoting hole.
[C]
3. Remove the front right cover

[D].
[D]
[B]
Technical Bulletin
Date: 4-Oct-02
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 3/5
No.: RB064005
4. Remove the end fence [E] by first

removing the 2 screws [F] on the front
and rear plates (2 screws [G]),
then pulling the lower portion of
the fence outward to
disconnect it from the machine.
[F]
[G]
[E]
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 4/5
Date: 4-Oct-02
No.: RB064005
[H]
5. Remove the fixing screws [H] for the
upper slide rail unit only.
NOTE: If the lower slide rail screws
[I] are also removed here, the
Stapler Unit will fall out.
[ I ]: Do not remove
[J]
6. Slide the slide rail unit [J] toward the
rear, then re-attach the fixing screws
[K].
NOTE: Secure the screws slightly
tighter than usual.
[K]
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Oct-02
PAGE: 5/5
No.: RB064005
7. After making sure that the

upper unit screws are tightened,
remove the fixing screws [L] for
the lower slide rail unit, slide the
unit toward the rear, then
reattach the screws [M].
NOTE: Secure the screws
slightly tighter than usual.
[M]
[L]
8. Secure the slide rail unit in place, then reattach all covers removed in the above steps.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/9
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006
Number Correction
This is a reissue RTB Number RB468001 was numbered incorrectly.
Subject: Booklet Skew or Parallel Shifting
Prepared by: M.Tsuyuki

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
SYMPTOM
Booklet skew or parallel shifting when using the B468
CAUSE
1. The front and rear jogger fences are not parallel.
2. The paper is not transported straight.
SOLUTION
Adjust the jogger fence position.
Action required
1. Adjusting the Jogger Fence

1. Move the belt hook down to the
position shown (in the photograph to
the right) by moving the stack feed out
belt on the rear side of the unit by
hand.
NOTE: Do not move the belt by the
hook itself. Also, be sure to
move the belt in the correct
direction, shown by the arrow
in the photograph below.
2. Insert about 10 A3 sheets between the

jogger fences.
manuals4you.com
3. By manually moving the stack-feed out

belt on the rear side of the unit, bring
the paper up until its edge is about at
the top edge of the upper stay.
4. Loosen the 2 screws for the lower

jogger shafts.
5. Rotate the R7 knob until the upper stay

lightly contacts the paper.
6. By turning the motor pulley (black

knob), bring the fences together until
they are roughly parallel to one
another.
NOTE: At this point, the fences should
not be tight against the papers
edge.
7. Bring the paper flush against the rear

jogger fence.
02073006.WMF
manuals4you.com
8. Adjust the rear jogger shaft position until the

top edge of the upper stay and the upper
edge of the paper are parallel to one
another. Then tighten the screw for the rear
jogger shaft all the way.
B View
Front
Rear
A View
ADD1.WMF
A View
B View
Upper Stay
Paper
8A.WMF
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Upper Stay
Paper
8B.WMF
9. Bring the front jogger fence flush against the paper edge, then adjust the fence shaft
until the fence and paper are parallel to one another (the rear side fence should
already be flush against the paper edge). Finally, tighten the screw for the front jogger
fence shaft all the way.
B View
Check Points
A View
ADD1.WMF
A View
Front
Jogger
Fence
Paper
Rear
9A.WMF
Front
Jogger
Fence
B View
Front
Rear
Front
Paper
9B.WMF
manuals4you.com
10. Print out 3 Booklet sets (2-3 sheets each).

11. Check the copies for booklet folding skew, i.e. all distances shown below (A, B, C, D)
should be 2mm or less.
A
D
B
C
Paper
Paper
13.WMF
12. If A/B or C/D are over 2 mm, adjust the folding position
using SP6120 until the two edges intersect in the middle
(point X).
Point X
Paper
ADD2.WMF
B View
A View
ADD1.WMF
13. 1) If A/B are over 2mm, raise the rear jogger fence shaft and re-secure the shaft in
place. Then, loosen the screw for the front jogger fence shaft, lower the shaft to
bring the front jogger fence flush against the paper, and re-secure the shaft in place.
B View
A
B
Paper
Rear
Front
14A.WMF
2) If C/D are over 2mm, lower the rear jogger fence shaft and re-secure the shaft in
place. Then, loosen the screw for the front jogger fence shaft, raise the shaft to
B View
D
C
Paper
Rear
Front
14B.WMF
manuals4you.com
14. Repeat from Step 10 until A, B, C and D are all 2mm or less.
15. Bring the belt hook to the position shown
in the photograph below, then adjust the
hook until it is parallel to the belt itself.
02073004.WMF
16. If the charge-removal brush is bent

upwards, adjust it so that its fibers are
perpendicular to the belt.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 25-Oct-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004a
RTB Correction
The items in bold italics have been corrected or added.

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
B0655123
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
3.12a
3.14e
3.16b
BFCC
64E0
2142
1st Mass Prod.

September Prod. 02
September Prod. 02
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
When copying originals for reduction through the DF with nearly 100% image area
coverage, part of the trailing edge shows dirtying.
SC181 occurs when the DF is opened and the main power is turned on with a specific
timing.
SC184 does not occur when the CIS harness is disconnected.
When a 1-page, non-stapling print job is sent between two stapling jobs, it is stapled with
the following (2nd stapling) job.
SC335/337 occur when BCU board warm-up is performed at a specific point (timing).
manuals4you.com
G
G
G
G
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 1-Nov-02
Subject: Transfer Belt Damage (NA Field Only)
PAGE: 1/2
No.: RB064007

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
This bulletin is for the NA (North America) field only.
SYMPTOM
The transfer belt moves to the far front edge, contacting and sometimes damaging the
edge of the transfer belt unit.
CAUSE
Due to a damaged special tool used on the production line, a 2.3mm gap developed
between the positioning plate securing the transfer belt unit and the right edge of the
machine frame (gap G1 on next page, which should normally be about 1.5mm).
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 1-Nov-02
PAGE: 2/2
No.: RB064007
Field action required

Check and adjust the side plate position at installation or at a service visit for units that are
experiencing transfer belt damage. Specifically:
1. Check whether or not the transfer belt has shifted toward the front of the transfer unit
case. If it has, reposition the belt to the center position (see S/M, pg. 3-53).
2. Remove the PCU Inner Cover (P/N B0651313), then remove the Transfer Unit Guide
Plate [A].
3. Loosen the 2 paint-locked screws [B].
4. Insert a 1.5mm feeler gauge into the gap between the positioning plate [C] and the right
edge of the machine frame (gap G1 in photo below), then tighten the two positioning
plate screws.
5. Open the front door and manually deactivate the upper left (power SW) and lower right
door switches. Then, feed 100 sheets duplex (copy) to confirm that the transfer belt
does not contact the front or rear sides of the case. If the belt contacts either edge,
stop the copy job and go on to Step 6. If the belt does not contact either edge after
completing the 100 duplex sheets, the adjustment is complete.
6. If the belt has contacted the front edge, decrease gap G1 to 1.5mm or less. If it has
contacted the rear edge, increase the gap starting at 1.5mm.
NOTE: Adjust the gap in increments of about 0.2mm. Then, repeat Steps 2 thru 6 until the
transfer belt does not contact either edge through 100 sheets of duplex copies.
[C]
[B]
[A]
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Nov-02
Subject: Installation note for printer/scanner DIMM
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064008

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
Important Installation Note:

The following is the correct procedure for connecting ROM DIMMs to the controller board.
Incorrect insertion can damage the controller board or cause a bad connection between
the DIMM and controller contacts. If the upper contact is pressed in and bent, the resulting
poor connection could cause the entire system not to operate.
[A]
[B]
[C]
Connecting the ROM DIMM:
1. Hold the ROM DIMM with the edge connector [A] pointing toward the slot and the notch
[B] on the DIMM in the upper right-hand corner.
2. Insert the edge connector [C] into the slot at a 30-degree angle from the surface of the
board.
3. Move the outside edge of the ROM DIMM up and down slightly until it works into the
connector, then gently press it down level with the controller board.
The above information is mentioned in Service Manual and on the sheet in the
Printer/Scanner Kit. Normally, the controller cannot be damaged if the above procedure is
followed correctly. However, to further ensure damage does not result, the connector has
been changed from September 02 production. An MB will be issued for this when the cutin serial numbers have been verified.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Nov-02
Subject: Fusing web wrapped to end condition
PAGE: 1/2
No.: RB064009

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
The fusing web is wrapped to the end condition.
Note: This occurs when using BCU Firmware v3.12 and the 9-bin Mailbox.
CAUSE
A firmware bug sometimes causes SP1902-002 (Fusing Web Motor Operation Interval) to
change to a value from 0 to 255 when the front door is opened/closed, or when the main
power/operation switch is turned off/on. If the value is changed to 0, it causes the machine
to wrap the web forward all the way to the end condition.
Note: This SP setting determines how long of a printing interval (cumulative) is allowed
before the machine runs the motor. The default is 18sec with the 60cpm model, and 15sec
with the 75cpm model.
SOLUTION
Modify BCU firmware (from v3.14).
ADDITIONAL DETAILS
Even with v3.12, SC550 will not be displayed on the panel. This is because along with the
modification to v3.14, another fusing web-related modification was also applied: SP1902001 displays the present amount of web that has been used (calculated value), which
v3.12 used as the determining factor for whether or not to display SC550. Therefore even
when the web reaches the actual web end due to this symptom (i.e. it is at the physical
"web end" position but the software value is still too low), the SC is not displayed. In order
to ensure the above symptom does not occur, e.g. when the SP value is not manually reinput in the field after a RAM clear (which would leave the value at 0), v3.14 has been
modified so that the deciding factor for web end is mechanical detection by the web end
sensor, regardless of the value of SP1902-001.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Nov-02
PAGE: 2/2
No.: RB064009
ACTION IN THE FIELD

If the BCU firmware is v3.12 at machine installation, update it to v3.14 or later before
installing the 9-bin mailbox.
For machines with the 9-bin mailbox installed, SC550 (Fusing Web End) may appear if
updating the BCU firmware from v3.12 to v3.14 or later. If it does, perform the following:
1. Update the BCU firmware to v3.14 or later.
2. Replace the fusing web.
3. Set SP1902-001 to a value of "0".
4. Check the value of SP1902-002. It should be 18 (60cpm machines) or 15 (75cpm
machines). If the value has been changed, input one of these values.
5. Check machine operation to see that the symptom does not occur.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/4
Reissued: 18-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Nov-02
No.: RB064010a
RTB Correction
The items in bold italics (Cause/Temporary Solution) have been corrected or added.
Subject: Noise from broken cleaning brush gears

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
SYMPTOM
Noise from the PCU brush roller gear (PCU3 section 37, pg. 87, index #4, 5; P/N
#B0652425, B0652428). In some cases the brush roller gear may break and black lines
may appear, because the brush roller does not rotate.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/4
Reissued: 18-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Nov-02
No.: RB064010a
CAUSE
The PCU brush wears down or becomes dirty, decreasing the friction between it and
the inner wall of the PCU. This friction normally stops the cam, but as it decreases,
the cam is rotated too far and contacts the stopper screw repeatedly. The gear can
be damaged by this alone, or when the cam overrides the screw and cannot be
turned back, applying an excessive load on the gear.
SOLUTION
Temporary:
1. Install 2 spacers to ensure that the cam does not override the stopper screw.
2. Install a cushion to ensure that the shock is absorbed even if the cam contacts
the screw.
The following parts are needed to install the cushion and spacers (procedure on next
page):
Damper Kit (B0649900, Damper, Spacer-M6, Tapping screw-M4x14).
Permanent:
The spacers and cushion have been added from the cut-in serial numbers listed below.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/4
Reissued: 18-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Nov-02
No.: RB064010a
Release Cam Cushion Installation Procedure

1. Turn the drum flange [A] clockwise until the cam [B] reaches the position as shown.
2. Add one spacer [C] to the release cam shaft, only if there is 1 spacer already installed
(1 e-ring [D]).
NOTE: If there are 2 spacers already installed, skip this step.
3. Remove the screw [E].
4. Apply grease G501 [F] to the release cam.
5. Attach the cushion [G] using the new M4x14 hexagonal screw [H].
NOTE: To ensure the screw does not rattle or come loose, be sure to tighten it at a 90
degree angle (not titled).
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/4
Reissued: 18-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Cut-in Serial Numbers

B064-17: J4225800853B064-19: J42210xxxxxB064-22: J4221000001B064-24: L1282100001B064-26: 7P1102xxxxB064-27: J4221000077B064-28: J42210xxxxxB064-29: J4221000365B064-69: J42210xxxxxB065-17: J4325800494B065-19: J43210xxxxxB065-22: J4321000001B065-24: L1292100001B065-26: 7P21020001B065-27: J4321000232B065-28: J43210xxxxxB065-29: J4321000442B065-69: J43210xxxxx-
Date: 7-Nov-02
No.: RB064010a
Technical Bulletin
Model: General RTB
Date: 8-Nov-02
Subject: Euro symbol not printed with PS driver
PAGE: 1/8
No.: RGene011
Prepared by: T. Itoh

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
When printing with the PS driver, the Euro currency symbol is not printed out with 112 of
136 fonts, which are stored in the font ROM in GW-based products.
The following are GW-based products:
Model-K3, Model-K P2, Russian-C2, Adonis- C2, Model-A P3, Model-J P1b, Model-J CF
Model-U P1, Model-U C1, Martini-C1.
CAUSE
The Euro currency symbol was not included in the font ROM.
SOLUTION
Temporary Solution (1)
A workaround for each operating system has been previously released on the FAQ page,
and is included on pp. 5-8 below.
Temporary Solution (2)
Although the font ROM will be modified as a permanent solution (details below), before
this can be applied, the controller firmware has been modified on the following GW-based
products:
Product
Model-K3
Model-K P2
Russian-C2
Adonis-C2
Model-A P3
Firmware Version
1.01 (Controller)
1.06.1 (Controller)
2.03 (Printer Application)
1.08 (Controller)
Product
Model-J P1b
Model-J CF
Model-U P1
Model-U C1
Martini-C1
Firmware Version
2.18 (Controller)
Specifically, the Euro currency symbol has been added along with the PS fonts download
feature, which allows the symbol to be downloaded to machine RAM. Enable this feature
by changing the setting of Bit SW#3-0 to 1 (ON) in SP mode (default: OFF).
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: General RTB
Date: 8-Nov-02
PAGE: 2/8
No.: RGene011
Remarks for Temporary Solution 2:

1. Switching PDL to PS takes approximate 7 to 10 seconds.
When PS fonts download is enabled, the Euro symbol is temporarily downloaded to
the machine RAM at the first PS printing job, and whenever the PDL is switched from
RPCS or PCL to PS. The total download time is approximately 7 to 10 seconds. This is
because once the data is downloaded, it will remain in the RAM until the PDL is
switched or the power turned off.
2. Printing high image area documents at 1200 dpi may cause a memory overflow error
in machines equipped only with 32MB of memory (ex. Model-K P2).
This is because the PS fonts download feature uses approximately 800kB, which can
bring the amount of available memory close to capacity with the above printing
conditions.
Workaround:
! Printing at 600dpi may prevent an overflow, even with just the 32MB memory
installed.
! Changing the memory usage setting from Frame Priority to Font Priority may
prevent an overflow.
Permanent Solution
Modification of the font ROM on the ROM DIMM or the Controller Board, from October 02,
production or later (details differ depending on the model). Specifically, the Euro currency
symbol has been added to the 112 fonts mentioned above.
Note:
1. When the new ROM DIMM or Controller Board is installed, it is not necessary to
disable the PS fonts download feature (temporary solution).
2. An MB will be issued separately announcing the P/N change for the ROMM DIMM and
Controller Boards, and cut-in serial number.
ROM DIMM and Controller Board P/N:
Model
Model-K P2
Where the font

ROM is soldered
Controller
Adonis-C2
ROM DIMM
Model-A P3
Controller
Russian-C2
ROM DIMM
Model-J P1b
ROM DIMM
Current
P/N
G0735712
G0745712
B3615117
B3625118
G0656022
G0656023
B4615117
B4535117
G0776120
Model
Model-J CF
Model-U P1
Model-U C1
Where the font

ROM is soldered
ROM DIMM
ROM DIMM
ROM DIMM
Martini-C1
ROM DIMM
Model-K3
Controller
Current
P/N
G5706687
G0705851
B5295117
B4635117
G3395117
G3385117
B5165750
Technical Bulletin
Model: General RTB
Date: 8-Nov-02
PAGE: 3/8
No.: RGene011
Font Table
Euro symbol is printed correctly.
This is a symbol font, so no countermeasure is applied.
Both temporary and permanent solutions work to print out the Euro
currency symbol correctly.
AlbertusMT
AlbertusMT-Italic
AlbertusMT-Light
AntiqueOlive-Bold
AntiqueOlive-Compact
AntiqueOlive-Italic
AntiqueOlive-Roman
Apple-Chancery
Arial-BoldItalicMT
Arial-BoldMT
Arial-ItalicMT
ArialMT
AvantGarde-Book
AvantGarde-BookOblique
AvantGarde-Demi
AvantGarde-DemiOblique
Bodoni
Bodoni-Bold
Bodoni-BoldItalic
Bodoni-Italic
Bodoni-Poster
Bodoni-PosterCompressed
Bookman-Demi
Bookman-DemiItalic
Bookman-Light
Bookman-LightItalic
Carta
Chicago
Clarendon
Clarendon-Bold
Clarendon-Light
CooperBlack
CooperBlack-Italic
Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC
Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC
Coronet-Regular
Courier
Courier-Bold
Courier-BoldOblique
Courier-Oblique
Eurostile
Eurostile-Bold
Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo
Eurostile-ExtendedTwo
Helvetica
Helvetica-Bold
Helvetica-BoldOblique
Helvetica-Condensed
Helvetica-Condensed-Bold
Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl
Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique
Helvetica-Narrow
Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
Helvetica-Oblique
HoeflerText-Black
HoeflerText-BlackItalic
HoeflerText-Italic
HoeflerText-Ornaments
HoeflerText-Regular
JoannaMT
JoannaMT-Bold
JoannaMT-BoldItalic
JoannaMT-Italic
LetterGothic
LetterGothic-Bold
LetterGothic-BoldSlanted
LetterGothic-Slanted
LubalinGraph-Book
LubalinGraph-BookOblique
LubalinGraph-Demi
LubalinGraph-DemiOblique
Marigold
MonaLisa-Recut
Monaco
NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
NewYork
Optima
Optima-Bold
Optima-BoldItalic
Optima-Italic
Oxford
Palatino-Bold
Palatino-BoldItalic
Univers
Univers-Bold
Univers-BoldExt
Univers-BoldExtObl
Univers-BoldOblique
Univers-Condensed
Univers-CondensedBold
Univers-CondensedBoldOblique
Univers-CondensedOblique
Univers-Extended
Univers-ExtendedObl
Univers-Light
Univers-LightOblique
Univers-Oblique
Wingdings-Regular
ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
ZapfDingbats
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: General RTB
Geneva
GillSans
GillSans-Bold
GillSans-BoldCondensed
GillSans-BoldItalic
GillSans-Condensed
GillSans-ExtraBold
GillSans-Italic
GillSans-Light
GillSans-LightItalic
Goudy
Goudy-Bold
Goudy-BoldItalic
Goudy-ExtraBold
Goudy-Italic
Date: 8-Nov-02
Palatino-Italic
Palatino-Roman
StempelGaramond-Bold
StempelGaramond-BoldItalic
StempelGaramond-Italic
StempelGaramond-Roman
Symbol
Tekton
Times-Bold
Times-BoldItalic
Times-Italic
Times-Roman
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT
TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT
TimesNewRomanPSMT
PAGE: 4/8
No.: RGene011
Technical Bulletin
Model: General RTB
Date: 8-Nov-02
PAGE: 5/8
No.: RGene011
Workaround Announced on the FAQ Page

Question:
Euro Fonts printing problem
Answer:
If Euro Fonts can't be printed by the PS driver, the following solutions may be effective.
Solution
MacOS 9.x / 8.x
Use the AdobePS 8.8 printer driver.
Get the printer driver from the Adobe site on the web.
http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/product.jsp?product=44&platform=Macintosh
Then select "ALL" for the "Font Inclusion" setting in the "PostScript Settings" window as follows.
Windows 95
Update Windows95 to "Euro Currency Support for Windows95".
You can get it from the following URL.
http://www.microsoft.com/windows95/downloads/contents/WURecommended/S_WUFeatured/
W95EuroPatch/Default.asp
Then the "Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts" check box is available.
Check "Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts". (Before update, the check box
doesn't work. )
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: General RTB
Date: 8-Nov-02
PAGE: 6/8
No.: RGene011
Windows95 after update
Windows 98 / ME / NT4.0 / XP
Check "Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts" .
Windows 98 / ME (Note: The AdobePS driver version 4.3.1 or later has "Add Euro Currency
Symbol to PostScript Fonts" in the "Fonts" tab.)
Technical Bulletin
Model: General RTB
Date: 8-Nov-02
Windows NT4.0
Windows XP
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 7/8
No.: RGene011
Technical Bulletin
Model: General RTB
Date: 8-Nov-02
PAGE: 8/8
No.: RGene011
Windows 2000
Update the printer driver to v5.5.2 or later.
You can get it from the printer driver v1.0.6 on the Adobe web site that includes the W2000 driver
v 5.5.2.
http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/product.jsp?product=44&platform=Windows
Then the "Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts" check box is displayed.
Check "Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts".
Windows 2000 after update
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 22-Nov-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003a
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
This is to inform you of the firmware history for the Martini-C1 GW.
B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
1.11
1.12.2
1.12.3
B179
66AF
AFC2
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
November Prod 02
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Supports the new Wireless LAN option released in October 02.

Default setting for DHCP changed to ON.
screen.
Paper Setting.
"
"
"
Automatic jam when counter reaches 0 has been disabled, so that all remaining pages are printed out.
"
process.
G
G
F
F
manuals4you.com
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 2-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001a

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
This is to inform you of the firmware history for the Martini-C1 LCDC/Language.
USA
B0655176
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.08
1.12
F112
2C31
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
B0655177
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.08
1.12
49C4
7F92
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
B0655235
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.08
1.12
9959
C4FC
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
B0655236
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
85C4
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
46B5
1st Mass Prod.
Europe
Asia/Taiwan
China
Korea
B0655237

B0655238
Version
C.SUM
Production
2.64
2.65
E914
5B62
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 2-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected
No.: RB064001a
USA
EU
_
A
_
A
Asia/
Twn
_
A
_
_
_
_
1st mass production for China and Korea.

New: Copies
Several French translations appeared for Slip Sheet and
Designate (translations not consistent).
Display for IEEE802.11 inside User Tools ! System Settings !
Interface Settings ! Network was incorrectly displayed as
801.11.
manuals4you.com
CHN
KOR
GEN
_
A
A
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Nov-02
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064011

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
Please add the following to your Service Manuals.

3.12.1 BCU BOARD
NOTE: Make sure that the DIP switch settings on the new board are the same as those on
the old board.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 2-Dec-02
Subject: Side Guide Plate for Cover Interposer Tray
No.: RB064012

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
Please add the following note to Step 19 of the installation procedure on page 1-38 of the
Service Manual (illustration below for reference).
Note: When installing the finisher with the cover interposer tray, be sure to release
(unlock) the entrance guide plate before docking the finisher with the machine. If the
finisher is docked with the plate in the locked position, the plate may be damaged or fall off.
Side Guide Plate
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 7-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Dec-02
No.: RB064013a
RTB Correction

From: Technical Services Sec. Service Planning Dept.
Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
Please apply the following correction to your Service Manuals (P. 5-59).
Old:
5828
Network Setting
012
Device Name
074
Delete Password
075
DNS Server From DHCP
076
DNS Server 1
077
DNS Server 2
078
DNS Server 3
079
080
Host Name (Ethernet)
New:
5828
Network Setting
012
Device Name
065
Job Spooling
069
Job Spooling
Protocol

Enables or disables Job Spooling.
Enables or disables LPR and IPP protocols.
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled (default)
Bit 0: LPR
Bit 2: IPP
All other bits: Not used
Note: A table is displayed for all 8 bits, numbered 0
to 7, along with their current settings (0 or 1).
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
Delete Password
DNS Server From DHCP
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
DNS Server 3
Host Name (Ethernet)
P. 5-68: Please note the following regarding SP6018:

This SP (Original Length Setting) does not operate, so please do not use this SP for
setting long originals. Instead, use the Special Original function at the operation panel.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/5
Date: 4-Dec-02
Subject: Waste Toner Clog
No.: RB064014

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
The following can occur due to clogs in the waste toner:
- Noise from the Toner Supply Unit (B0653110)
- Noise from the Toner Collection Assembly - Transfer (B0653551)
- Gears break (B0653138 and/or B0653139)
- Toner Collection Coil - Exit (B0653710) bends
- Toner leaks from the Development Filter (AA012060)
- Toner Collection Coil bends (AD043077)
CAUSE
Poor toner transportation in the Toner Transport Coil (P/C pg. 77-7).
SOLUTION
Production:
The shape of the Transport Coil in the toner supply unit and the Transport Screw in the
waste toner transport unit have been changed. Also, the steel ball in the lower waste toner
transport unit has been deleted. In the photograph below, the old Transport Coil is shown
on the right, and the new one on the left.
Note:
- The P/N for the coil of Toner Supply Unit has been changed from B0653710 to B0653720.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Dec-02
PAGE: 2/5
No.: RB064014
- As mentioned above, the transport screw used in the waste toner transport unit in the
rear of the machine has also been changed. This is because it is possible for the new coil
to interfere with the movement of the screw. The P/N change for the transport screw is:
from B0653638 to B0653670. Also, the steel ball (A0963736) has been deleted for the
same reason.
In the Field:
If this occurs in the field:
!
Replace the Gear (B0653138 and/or B0653139), and
Replace the Toner Supply Unit (B0653111) and Waste Toner Vertical Transport Unit
(B0653554), and
Remove the steel ball (A0963736).
Note: With gear replacement alone, the symptom will recur shortly thereafter. Also,
individual replacement of the coil can allow waste toner to be blown out of the unit, so at
the customer site, please be sure to replace the entire unit.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 3/5
Date: 4-Dec-02
No.: RB064014
Replacement Procedures
Replacing the Toner Supply Unit:
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the Development Unit (see Service Manual, section 3.6.1 Development Unit
Removal).
3. Replace the Toner Supply Unit to B0653111 (2 screws).
Note: Before installing the new Toner Supply Unit [A], make sure that the Development
Filter [B] is securely in place (surface is at or below the level of the Development Filter
Case [C]).
[A]
[B]
[C]
B064R306.WMF
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Dec-02
PAGE: 4/5
No.: RB064014
Replacing the Waste Toner Vertical Transport Unit:

1. Disconnect the connector.
2. Remove the snap ring.
3. Remove the drive rod.
4. Replace the Waste Toner Vertical Transport Unit (install B0653554, 1 screw, 1 snap-fit).
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Dec-02
PAGE: 5/5
No.: RB064014
Removing the Steel Ball:
Note: The length of the coil in the Waste Toner Vertical Transport Unit has been increased
as shown below (new coil on the left, old on the right). It is therefore necessary to remove
the steel ball to prevent the loud noise that will occur if the coil contacts the ball.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 6-Dec-02
Subject: ROM History (Martini-C1 NIB/NetFile)
No.: RB064015

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
This is to inform you of the firmware history for the Martini-C1 BCU.
B0655114
NIB (PHY)
Version
NetFile (NFA)
Version
C.SUM
Production
D
E
3.54
3.55
1.11
1.11
2658
4088
1st Mass Prod.

November Prod. 02
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Change in Specification:
1. Changed the default setting of DHCP to ON.
Note: When upgrading to this version, the DHCP setting will only change to ON if it is
manually set or a factory default clear is performed after update.
2. TCP ports can be opened/closed.
Note: After performing the setting to disable HTTP, it is not possible to access the target
device through the web browser. To change this setting, use telnet to open HTTP. When
the telnet port is disabled, it is necessary to clear the network settings (Memory Clear for
NCS) to open the telnet port.
3. Supports the new wireless LAN (IEEE802.11b).
Note: Since this is due to a vendor change, the new LAN cannot be used with suffix D
firmware.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
Subject: Fusing web is wrapped prematurely
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064016

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
The following is a supplement to the information previously announced in RTB #RB064009.

In the above RTB, it was announced that the fusing web may be wrapped prematurely
(forcibly used up) when BCU firmware v3.12 is used with the 9-bin mailbox installed. This
was due to a firmware bug, which sometimes changes SP1902-002 (Fusing Web Motor
Operation Interval) to a random value between 0 and 255 when the front door is
opened/closed or the main switch turned off/on.
Although it was previously announced to update to v3.14 or later if SC550 occurs (web
end), the value of SP1902-002 may be changed even without an SC550 occurrence,
causing early web end (lower than default) or offset images/fusing roller wrapping jams
(higher than default). Therefore, please do the following for this issue in the field:
Target machines: BCU firmware v3.12, 9-bin Mailbox installed.
1. If SC550 occurs:
!
Update to v3.14 or later, replace the Fusing Web and reset SP1902-001 to a value of
0 (as announced in the above RTB).
2. If SC550 does not occur, but firmware is still at v3.12:

!
Check the value of SP1902-002. If its default has not been changed (60cpm: 18,
75cpm: 15), simply update to v.314 or later.
If the default has been changed, this means the web has been advanced prematurely
at least once, so check the web itself and estimate the actual percent of web used.
Input the estimated % into SP1902-001, then update to v3.14 or later.
3. If SC500 does not occur, but firmware has already been updated to v3.14 or later:
!
Since the default for SP1902-002 has been set to its proper value with the firmware
update, check the web itself and input the estimated value into SP1902-001 as
described in #2 above.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/3
Date: 9-Dec-02
Subject: ROM History (Martini-C1 Printer/Scanner)
No.: RB064017

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
This is to inform you of the firmware history for the Martini-C1 Printer/Scanner.
Part Number
Printer
Version
Scanner
Version
C.SUM
Production
B0665205A
B
G3385204
A
B
1.00
1.02
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.13
1.13
1.13
1.20
1.20
9A16
0286
97B6
3C5F
EE07
1st Mass Prod.

August 02 Prod.
October 02 Prod.
November 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
[Printer]
With duplex jobs containing mixed printing orientations, the printing orientation may sometimes
be in reverse after changing back from landscape to portrait.
[Printer]
When specifying Front and Back Cover Sheet, the paper is not stapled/punched as expected.
[Printer]
Supports mixed binding orientations with duplex jobs using cover sheets (GFPR #RC02080003).
[Printer]
Some Chinese fonts do not print out correctly.
[Printer]
Some characters overlap with Booklet printing.
[Printer]
Printing may stop with files sent from INIFCO (GFPR #RE02090012).
[Printer]
The response to the PJL INFO CONFIG command does not include the serial number.
[Printer]
The Form Lines setting (PCL menu) is changed when the machine is rebooted (GFPR
#RA02090003).
[Printer]
With the PCL driver, in the event of an error, the location of the error (PDL name) is printed as
unknown on the system settings list/error history.
[Printer]
When performing forced print/error skip printing with the PCL driver, a delay occurs when
printing out each page, slowing down printing markedly.
[Scanner]
The Start key standby condition (machine waiting to scan second side of original) cannot be
cleared if the number of sheets specified for scanning is 1.
[Scanner]
Modified so that the machine does not enter Night Mode while printing out the scanner history
report.
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
PAGE: 2/3
No.: RB064017
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
[Scanner]
When selecting a 100-member group after selecting 1 destination inside the same Scanner
page, the destination initially selected is removed.
[Scanner]
No paper in the bypass tray is displayed if there is no paper in the LCT while printing out the
scanner history.
[Scanner]
Scanner jobs sometimes cannot be canceled midway through.
[Scanner]
The Stop key can be used with re-forwarding mode.
[Scanner]
When Sending is displayed during re-forwarding (Scanner), and the input registration number
button is pressed (machine prompts operator for number), the timer for the Sending message
comes on line and clears it, even though the registration number button is still active.
[Scanner]
If a reset occurs during Scanner password authentication, defaults cannot be restored.
[Scanner]
Sectors in shared memory for storing error alert information are damaged.
[Scanner]
A transmission error occurs during fragmented mail transmission, followed by a connection error
on the first retry, then SC990 (should not be displayed) on the second retry.
[Scanner]
Memory leak occurs after repeatedly canceling documents in standby for forwarding.
When the printer is in standby for printing out pre-set jobs, it displays both the job information
and Ready.
Display errors on pre-set job screen (user name, document name, last character in details
column).
If the host cancels the spool-printing job of a large file (10MB or more) while it is being printed
out, the display reads, Resetting job and does not change.
With PCL5e/PCL6 printing, the job name is not displayed on the LCD panel, and the job is not
listed in the job history.
If a slip-sheet size different from the original is specified (Bypass Tray printing), an alert is
displayed and does not clear.
The AP MAC address is displayed even when the wireless LAN is set for Ad hoc mode.
Spec change:
The default for the Custom Size (Printer initial settings ! Bypass Paper Size ! Custom Size)
has been changed from A4 ! letter for NA. Note: A4 is still the default for EU.
When specifying 4 holes to be punched in the right side of the paper, 4 holes are punched in the
left side.
After an SP operations error, the correct SP mode number is not logged in the error log.
With the Chinese display language, on the bypass tray size setting screen, the characters used
for the up/down scroll keys are displayed outside their boxes.
Display error on the B469 Finisher tray full screen:
Incorrect: Remove the paper from_$_Finisher shift tray 1._$__$_
Correct: Remove the paper from_$_Finisher shift tray._$__$_
When sending with Centronics, Waiting is displayed even after the I/F switching time has been
reached.
If program content printing is performed when there is no program, There is no program
registered is displayed, but only for a brief moment, and then clears (normal: 3 seconds).
On the forced printing screen when specifying LG (8 1/2 x 14) paper with no orientation, this size
is incorrectly displayed as 8 1/4 x 14.
If Clear is pressed on the error clear alert, the machine continues printing.
manuals4you.com
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 3/3
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
When locked printing or copy server printing is performed with screen spooling and user access
control both ON, the display reads, Printing.
When using job cancel while printing out multiple jobs with locked printing, only the current job is
canceled (all other jobs are printed out).
Bold may not work with some True Type fonts.
Slow printing from AutoCAD (GFRP #RC02070001).
Same line width when bit switch 3 #3 is ON in CAD printer (GFPR #RE02050016).
The Orientation, Edge to Edge Print and Extend A4 Width menu settings are lost when the
power is turned Off/On (not saved in NVRAM), and are returned to their defaults.
Processing time for SP memory clear (SP5-801-008) is too long.
G3385204
th
On the forced print screen, if the specified size is undefined, the size area (4 line) is not
displayed.
Mm "! inch conversion error with custom sizes for bypass tray feeding.
Summary wording change: Quantity of Print Sets Copies
When menu lock is enabled from WEB, the Printer initial settings key mark is not displayed.
Line spacing command, lochEsc&l#D loch causes incorrect output (GFPR #RC02050002).
Stall occurs when there is little memory installed (PCL).
Euro currency symbol is not printed.
When using bold fonts, short lines may appear around text characters.
Text characters appear too thick with some bold fonts, removing the fine detail.
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
Subject: Toner spill from the development filterr
PAGE: 1/2
No.: RB064018

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
Toner may spill from the development filter section.
CAUSE
A gap between the Development Filter Case (A0963141) and the Development Filter
(AA012060) allows toner to escape from the development unit and scatter inside the
machine.
SOLUTION
Production:
A Filter Case (B0653108, index #19 below) has been added on top of the Development
Filter to ensure the filter stays properly closed. This information has been announced in
MB064008, containing the cut-in serial numbers.
In the Field:
1. Whenever replacing the Development Filter, always make sure that the filter lies at or
below the level of the surrounding casing.
2. Add the new Filter Case on top of the Development Filter, referring to the following
procedure:
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
PAGE: 2/2
No.: RB064018
! Lay the new Filter Case on top of the Development Filter (in the Development
Filter Case).
" Set the entire Development Filter Case in the Development Unit. The
Development Guide Rail (B0653095) will then hold the new Filter Case in place.
# Attach the Toner Supply Unit, which will further secure the new Filter Case in
place.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
Subject: New Wireless LAN Option (IEEE802.11b)
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064019

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
This RTB has been issued to announce the necessary action for when installing the new
Wireless LAN option on machines produced before Nov 02 (802.11b Interface Unit Type
B: G515-17/EDP 405412, G515-27/EDP 405419).
Action Required
The IC chip on the new wireless LAN option has been changed (old chip discontinued),
making it necessary to update the GW controller firmware to v1.12.3 (B0655102G) or
newer and the NIB/NetFile firmware to v3.55/v1.1.1 (B0655114E) or newer when installing
the new wireless LAN option. This is because there is no interchangeability between the
new option and previous controller firmware versions.
Since the interchangeability is X/O, the new firmware versions mentioned above will work
with either the current or new wireless LAN options. Also, these new firmware versions
have been applied to the production line from November 02 (see RTB #RB064003a and
#RB064015).
Note:
1. Both wireless LAN options are compatible with all versions of engine firmware.
2. SC855 will occur if the new wireless LAN option is installed on a machine with
controller firmware older than v3.55/v1.1.1.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 25-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017a
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Part Number
Printer
Version
Scanner
Version
C.SUM
Production
B0665205A
B
G3385204
A
B
C
1.00
1.02
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.09
1.13
1.13
1.13
1.20
1.20
2.00
9A16
0286
97B6
3C5F
EE07
6A71
1st Mass Prod.

August 02 Prod.
October 02 Prod.
November 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Change in specification:
If the MIB cannot successfully retrieve the display language information from the
machine, the driver will be displayed in English.
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
#RA02090003).
[Printer]
With the PCL, in the event of an error, the location of the error (PDL name) is printed as
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 25-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017a
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
[Printer]
When performing forced print/error skip printing with the PCL, a delay occurs when printing out
each page, slowing down the printing speed markedly.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
report.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
scanner history.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
and Ready.
column).
The AP MAC address is displayed even when the wireless LAN is set for Adhoc mode.
Spec change:
left side.
manuals4you.com
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 25-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017a
Symptom Corrected
Suffix

When sending with Centro, Waiting is displayed even after the I/F switching time has been
reached.
Same line width when bitSW3 #3 is ON in CAD printer (GFPR #RE02050016).
power is turned Off/On (not saved in NARAM), and are returned to their defaults.
G3385204
th
displayed.
Text characters appear too thick with some bolded fonts, removing the fine detail.
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/5
Reissued: 27-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Dec-02
No.: RB064020b
RTB Correction
The "RTB Correction" explanation in the last re-issue contained a mistake,
and has been corrected as shown below (bold/italics portion):
The illustration on pg. 3/5 has been changed. The gears in which the arrow position and cut-out
position match are OK, and those that do not match are OK. -- i.e. the shape of the arrow is
irrelevant.
Subject: Paper jam (paper feed area) check procedure
From: Technical Services Sec. Servicce Planning Dept.

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Please note the following troubleshooting procedure for paper feed jams.
If the following SP modes have logged many jams, perform the procedure on the next
page:
SP7504- 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 12, 53, 54, 55, 58, 59, 60
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/5
Reissued: 14-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Dec-02
No.: RB064020a
Procedure
1. If the paper jam occurs with a tray infrequently used (e.g. By-pass, Tray 2/3):
If the color of the surface of the pick-up, feed or separation rollers is lighter than
those installed in more commonly used trays, replace the roller(s).
2. If noise is generated from the paper feed unit:
Adjust the timing belt tension as follows.

(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Loosen screw [A] and move the motor toward the tray (see the photograph).
[A]
(3) Loosen screws [B] and [C] and allow the spring to reposition the unit.
[B]
[A]
[C]
(4) Tighten screws [B] and [C].
manuals4you.com
Tray side
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/5
Reissued: 14-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Dec-02
No.: RB064020a
3. If neither #1 nor #2 above apply:

(1) Using the following table, check the jam count values. For locations that show
frequent occurrences, replace gears [A] and/or [B] below in which the arrow and
cutout are as shown in the NG illustration.
Tray
Jam 12
Jam 8
1st
Gear A
Gear B
2nd
3rd
Gear A
Jam 9
Jam 10
Gear B
Gear A
Gear B
(2) Clean the shaft, then replace the gear(s).
! Which gears need to be replaced:

As shown above, replace gears whose cutouts and arrows are in different positions.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/5
Reissued: 14-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Dec-02
No.: RB064020a
Caution
When replacing the gear, be sure to orient the side with the arrow mark (silver)
outward.
Gear A
Arrow
Gear B
Arrow
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/5
Reissued: 14-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Dec-02
No.: RB064020a
Temporary Action for Item #3 only:
If the gear above is not available for replacement, perform the following:
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the gear.
(3) Clean the gear shaft and the inside of the gear.
(4) Reattach the gear.
(5) Reattach the paper feed unit.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 18-Dec-02
Subject: Waste toner lock - additional information
No.: RB064021

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
The following is additional information on the waste toner lock previously announced in
RTB RB064014, as well as important notes for when replacing the coil.
Before occurrence
Before a toner lock occurs, SC441 (development motor lock) or SC590 (toner collection
motor error) will occur. When these SCs are reported on machines operating in the field,
please check whether or not the waste toner is blocked. If either of these SCs occurs at
arrival, there is a high possibility of a motor error.
Important notes for when replacing the either of the two coils below
As mentioned in RTB RB064014, we ask that the entire unit be replaced in the field. If
however there are cases where it is necessary to replace the coil alone, please note the
following:
1. Toner supply unit coil
Replace the coil only if the gear in the front of the toner supply unit (B0653138/B0653139)
is not damaged. If the gear is already damaged, it is very possible that the gear shaft has
been warped, making it necessary to replace the entire unit (this is to avoid gear damage).
2. Toner collection unit coil
Before replacing the coil, be sure to clean out the toner inside the toner separation case
(B0653629). If this is not done, the B0653645 gear cannot be properly set after replacing
the coil. Please make sure that the gear pawl is tightly hooked into the coil groove.
Also, if the toner in the case cannot be cleaned out completely, please do not replace the
coil alone. This can cause the coil to come out of position while the machine is running,
and catch on the lower transport coil.
Technical Bulletin
Model: General RTB
Date: 27-Dec-02
Subject: GW Products - Hardware Ethernet Problem
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RGene012

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
When the main switch is turned on, the error message Hardware Ethernet Problem may
be displayed under the following condition on the GW-based products.
Conditions:
Network speed on the hub has been set to 100Mbps fixed with full duplex, and
Length of network cable is too long (60 m or more) or the cable quality is not good
enough
CAUSE
When the main switch is turned on, the machine performs a loop-back test. If the cable
length is too long or its quality is not good enough, the damping factor for the data
transmission becomes worse, and the machine incorrectly detects an error during this test.
This happens only when the network speed is set to 100Mbps fixed with full duplex. The
PHY chip used on the controller board causes this.
SOLUTION
- Temporary Solution Set the network speed on the hub to Auto-sensing,
Use a shorter cable or a cable with a lower damping factor, or
Disconnect the network cable and power on the printer; then, set the cable after the
printer comes to the ready condition.
- Permanent Solution The controller firmware will be modified to avoid the incorrect detection of this error
message. The schedule of firmware modification is as follows.
Product Type
Product
Firmware Modification
NOTE:
Cut-in Schedule
Firmware will be
at next modification
Fax
Kaiser 3
posted in the usual
Printer
Model-K P1
manner when it is
Model-K P2
released.
Model-J P1b
MFP
Model-J CF
Model-U P1e
Model-A P3
Model-R C2
Model-A C2
Model-M C1
Model-U C1
03 January production run

03 March production run
at next modification run
03 February production run
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 31-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001b
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
USA
B0655176
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.08
1.12
F112
2C31
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
B0655177
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.08
1.12
49C4
7F92
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
B0655235
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.08
1.12
9959
C4FC
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
B0655236
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
85C4
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
46B5
1st Mass Prod.
Europe
Asia/Taiwan
China
Korea
B0655237
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 31-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001b

B0655238
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
2.64
2.65
2.72
E914
5B62
0D5B
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
January Prod 03
Symptom Corrected
USA
The words for stack and sort in Portuguese were reversed

in the following areas:
System Initial Settings General Features
Copier error/notification pop-ups
Copier Initial Settings Peripheral Settings Menu
Fax (main screen)
Some messages in copier error/notification pop-ups that were
longer than the maximum number of characters have been
shortened to fit on the screen.
New: Copies
801.11.
manuals4you.com
EU
Asia/
Twn
CHN
KOR
GEN
B
_
A
_
A
_
A
_
A
_
_
A
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 7-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003b
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
H
1.11
1.12.2
1.12.3
3.01.2
B179
66AF
AFC2
242A
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
November Prod 02
February Prod 03
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Reserved jobs are sometimes deleted when the current copy job is halted by a jam or other
cause.
The Load paper message is not displayed when all feed trays are empty and there is
paper in the Cover Interposer Tray.
If Copy Interrupt is used once an original has been set in the DF, and is then replaced with
an original with (an effectively) different width, the estimated size of the first original is not
cleared.
Pre-stack jams with the B478 Finisher are not displayed.
Image problem occurs when using Magazine Copy together with Margin Adjustment.
The size of the window for User Tools ! System Settings ! SSID was incorrect.
Current settings appear overlapped with the default settings on the SMC printout if the
report is printed out with a proportional font.
If the virtual keyboard is displayed inside User Tools ! System Settings ! SSID (or WEP),
and the User Tools key is then pressed to exit User Tools, the keyboard will appear again
when entering System Settings.
If a normal stapling job with limitless paper exit is halted with Copy Interrupt to print out a
center-stapling job (before switching trays), and the original job is then resumed, the
machine will exit the copies directly on top of the interrupt job.
When printing out a job using Slip Sheet and Stapling, the machine will allow the slip
sheets to be stapled even when the specifications state that the slip sheet paper type
cannot be stapled..
SC990 appears when cover sheets are added at the end of a sample copy trial and the job
is initiated.
The Wireless LAN Signal (Interface Settings) sometimes does not function.
DEC is not displayed for December dates in the SMC logging data.
Titles for group registration/changes and group name changes are not displayed correctly
on the virtual keyboard.
An incorrect number is displayed on the operation panel when SC870 occurs.
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 7-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003b
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
SC990 occurs if performing continuous print jobs using the LPR port when network traffic
is high.
Recovery is not possible if the power is turned off during a simultaneous upgrade of the
System and Copier firmware.
The waiting display sometimes does not clear when the machine recovers from Energy
Saver Mode.
The @ and _ marks have been added to the virtual keyboard so that it is no longer
necessary to use the SHIFT key to make them appear.
Added the names of all SP2901 test patterns.
Software modified to support Punch Units that only allow a certain number of holes to be
punched (units with no hole qty selection).

screen.
Paper Setting.
"
"
"
"
process.
G
G
F
F
manuals4you.com
H
H
H
H
H
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 7-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004b
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
B0655123
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
B1105123
3.12a
3.14e
3.16b
4.01
BFCC
64E0
2142
F4BF
1st Mass Prod.

September Prod. 02
September Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
Symptom Corrected
Some Finisher SCs and jams were not reported to the mainframe.
SC335/336 were triggered with a detection time of 10 seconds, even though the correct
detection time is 20 seconds.
SC990 sometimes occurs with jobs using Stapling.
Test patterns 18 to 30 for SP2902-1 and 2902-2 do not function.
Minimum setting interval for scanner resolution changed from 3dpi to 1dpi.
When copying originals for reduction through the DF with nearly 100% image area coverage, part
of the trailing edge shows dirtying.
SC181 occurs when the DF is opened and the main power is turned on with a specific timing.
When a 1-page, non-stapling printing job is sent in between two stapling jobs, it is stapled along
nd
with the following (2 stapling) job.
copy when the image is shifted by Create Margin for stapling.
SC990 sometimes occurs at power ON.
Suffix
B110
5123
B110
5123
B110
5123
B110
5123
B110
5123
G
G
G
G
G
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 7-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004b
Symptom Corrected
1. Web End detection priority given to the web end sensor (previously, SP1902 value had
priority).
manuals4you.com
Suffix
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Jan-03
Subject: Controller Lock-up when Printing
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064022

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
The Data In (Buffer) light keeps blinking, and the machine indicates "Printing" or "Waiting,
but nothing prints.
CAUSE
The PCL interpreter continues waiting for "tandem tray ready" status from the mainframe
because the interpreter misses the "tandem tray ready" status after auto-loading paper in
the tandem tray.
SOLUTION
We released printer firmware v1.09 on Dec.07 to https://support.ricoh.com/.
In addition, we will fix this issue from the first mass production in January.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Feb-03
Subject: Cleaning Brush Gears Brake when changing SP
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064023
mode

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
SYMPTOM
The Brush Roller Gears may break if SP2912-002 is changed from its default (0).
Note: Although the gear damage is the same as in RTB #RB064010a, the above cannot
be fixed with the installation of the Damper Kit (B0649900).
CAUSE
Software bug.
SOLUTION
Temporary:
Keep the value of SP2912-002 at its default of 0.
Permanent:
Firmware modification.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Feb-03
Subject: Service Manual Revision (SP7504)
PAGE: 1/5
No.: RB064024

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
Please apply the following correction to your Service Manuals.

Addition: Descriptions for SP7504 codes.
<001 to 074>
Paper Late Error No. Paper Lag Error No.
1
3
53
4
54
5
55
6
56
7
57
8
58
9
59
10
60
11
61
12
62
13
63
14
15
16
66
19
69
20
21
71
22
72
23
73
24
74
34
Error
At Power On
4th Paper Feed Sensor (Japan Only)
LCT Paper Feed Sensor
4th Vertical Transport Sensor (Japan Only)
Relay Sensor
Registration Sensor
Fusing Exit Sensor
Paper Exit Sensor
1-Bin Tray Sensor (Japan Only)
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Feb-03
PAGE: 2/5
No.: RB064024
<100 to 168>
Related
Error
Occurrence Condition
Error
SC
No.
Finisher (B469) 101 Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the entrance sensor
(No Saddle
at the precise time or remains at the entrance sensor
Stitch)
for longer than the prescribed time.
102 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the proof tray exit
sensor at the precise time after activating the
entrance sensor or remains at the proof tray exit
sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
103 Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the
precise time after activating the entrance sensor or
remains at the exit sensor for longer than the
prescribed time.
104 Staple Entrance
When the paper fails to activate the staple entrance
Sensor
entrance sensor or remains at the staple entrance
105 Exit Sensor after
When the paper from the jogger unit fails to activate
jogging
the exit sensor at the precise time or remains at the
exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
106 Stapler Unit 1
When the stapler unit fails to send any signals while
stapling.
109 Shift Motor
SC733 When the signal status of the lower tray encoder
sensor does not change at the precise time during
motor rotation.
110 Jogger Fence Motor
SC722 When the status of the jogger fence HP sensor does
not change at the precise time during jogger fence
motor rotation.
111 Shift Roller or Guide
SC732 When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not
Plate Motor
SC736 change at the precise time during shift roller motor
rotation, or the status of the guide plate position
guide plate motor rotation.
112 Stapler Movement or
SC730 When the status of the stapler HP sensor does not
Stapler Rotation Motor SC727 change at the precise time during stapler movement
motor rotation, or the status of the stapler rotation
stapler rotation motor.
113 Stapler Unit 2
SC724 Not logged.
115 Feed Out Belt Motor
SC725 When the status of the feed out belt HP sensor does
not change at the precise time during feed out belt
motor rotation.
116 Punch Hole Motor
SC729 When the status of the punch HP sensor does not
change at the precise time during punch hole motor
rotation.
Peripheral
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Error
Error
No.
(Saddle Stitch)
Peripheral
Date: 7-Feb-03
Related
SC
123 Exit Sensor
124 Staple Entrance

Sensor
jogging
126 Stapler Unit 1
127 Saddle Stitch Stapler
Unit
128 Saddle Stitch
129 Shift Motor
SC733
SC726
SC722

Plate Motor
SC732
SC736
132 Stapler Movement or

SC730
Stapler Rotation Motor SC727
133 Stapler Unit 2
SC724
SC740
SC741
PAGE: 3/5
No.: RB064024
prescribed time.
When the paper from jogger unit fails to activate the
exit sensor at the precise time or remains at the exit
When the stapler unit fails to send any signals while
stapling.
When the saddle stitch stapler fails to send any
signals while stapling.
When the status of the exit sensor does not change at
the precise time during saddle stitching.
When the status of the upper tray limit sensor does
not change at the precise time while lifting the upper
exit tray, the status of the upper tray full sensor does
not change at the precise time while lowering the
upper exit tray, or the status of the lower tray encoder
sensor does not change at the precise time while
moving the lower tray.
When the status of the jogger fence HP sensor does
motor rotation.
When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not
change at the precise time during shift roller motor
When the status of the stapler HP sensor does not
change at the precise time during stapler movement
motor rotation, or the status of the stapler rotation
stapler rotation motor.
Not logged.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Feb-03
PAGE: 4/5
No.: RB064024
Related
SC
SC739 When the status of the folder plate HP sensor does
not change at the precise time during folder plate
motor rotation.
motor rotation.
rotation.
143 Exit Sensor
prescribed time.
144 Staple Entrance
Sensor
When the paper from jogger unit fails to activate the
jogging
exit sensor at the precise time or remains at the exit
148 Upper Transport Motor
When the upper transport motor fails to send any
signals while rotating.
149 Shift Motor
SC733 When the status of the lower tray encoder sensor
does not change at the precise time during shift motor
rotation.
SC722 When the status of the jogger fence HP sensor does
motor rotation.
SC732 When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not
Plate Motor
SC736 change at the precise time during shift roller motor
153 Stapler Unit
SC724 When the stapler unit fails to send any signals while
stapling.
motor rotation.
rotation.
DFU
157 Data
Error
Error
No.
Finisher (B468) 134 Folder Plate Motor
(Saddle Stitch)
Peripheral
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Peripheral
Mail Box
(B471)
Error
Error
No.
161 Transport Sensor 1
Cover
Interposer
Tray (B470)
166 Feed or Pull-out

Sensor
167 Exit Sensor
168 Bottom Plate Position
Sensor
Date: 7-Feb-03
Related
SC
PAGE: 5/5
No.: RB064024
When the paper fails to activate transport sensor 1 at

the precise time or remains at transport sensor 1 for
When the paper fails to activate the feed or pull-out
sensor at the precise time.
precise time or remains at the exit sensor for longer
than the prescribed time.
SC750 When the status of the bottom plate position sensor
does not change at the precise time during bottom
plate motor rotation.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 12-Feb-03
Model: General RTB
Date: 4-Feb-03
No.: RGene013a
RTB Reissue
Subject: Service remarks at installation
From: Technical Service Sec. Service Planning Dept.

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Action required
Transmit/receive
Other (Specification change)
Please note the following change in counter specification. Although a production line
modification will not be applied to some products, the action described in 4. Important
Notes for Installation below must be taken for all products at installation.
Overview:
Electronic counters will now be set to 0 when released from the factory, instead of being
set to a negative value.
Background:
Previously, counters were set to a negative value when shipped from the factory, and later
set to 0 at installation, following installation test copies/prints. However this may cause
confusion among some customers as to why the counter value at the commencement of
the contract is 0, even though some installation test copies have already been made.
Details:
1. Specification Change
Current
New
Specification
The initial value of the electrical counter is negative when products
are shipped from the factory.
Note: After making test samples at installation, the negative counter

value can be set to 0 with SP mode.
The initial value of the electrical counter is 0 when products are
shipped from the factory.
Note: After making test samples at installation, the (positive) counter
value cannot be set back to 0 with SP mode.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 12-Feb-03
Model: General RTB
Date: 4-Feb-03
No.: RGene013a
2. Firmware Modification
Due to the counter modification, SP5-849 has also been changed as follows for products
that have this SP mode (listed below).
Current
SP mode name:
Counter Clear
Day
New
Installation Date
Specification:
When the electrical counter is changed from a
negative value to 0, the machine recognizes this
as the counter clear day and stores this date in the
NVRAM.
When the electrical counter reaches a value of
20, the machine recognizes this as the installation
date and stores this date in the NVRAM.
NOTE: The following products have SP5-849. The new firmware for these products has
not yet been released. However, the release notes for each will clearly mention the
new firmware version.
New products:
Bellini-C2, Adonis C3
Current products: Martini C1, Model-U C1
3. Schedule for the Counter Modification
The following is the current schedule for when the counter modification will be applied.
Please note that there are some models to which the change will not be applied (marked
as ---), due to production schedules, production lot quantities, and sales figures.
NOTE: The actual cut-in months that have been confirmed appear in the Cut-in
production month column below. This RTB will be reissued when these
dates have been confirmed for the remaining products.
(1) New products
Product Name
Bellini C2
Adonis C3
Model J-P2
Model J-P2 CF
Model AR- P1
Model K-C1a
Product
Code
B070
B079/82
G080
G367
G081/92
B120
Target cut-in
production month
2003.03
2003.03
2003.03
2003.03
2003.03
2003.03
Cut-in production month

First mass production lot
(2) Current products

Product Name
Product
Code
Digital B&W Copiers

Bellini C1
A294
Martini C1
B064/65
Model M-C2b
B098
Adonis C2
B003/04/06/07
Target cut-in
production month
--2003.03
2003.03
---
-----
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 12-Feb-03
Model: General RTB
Product Name
Date: 4-Feb-03
Product
Code
Russian C2
B022/27/31
Model K-C1
B039/40/43
Stella C1
B044/45/46/49
Digital WF Copiers
Dolphin
B010
Any Analog Copiers
All products
Color Copiers
Model I2
B018
Model L2
B017
Model C2
B023
Model U-C1
B051/52
Color Printers
Model J-P1
G060
Model J-P1 CF
G570
Model U-P1
G071
Pomelo P3
G063
Target cut-in
production month
2003.03
2003.03
2003.03
No.: RGene013a

February 02 production
2003.03
---
---
----2003.02
2003.03
----February 02 production
----2003.03
2003.03
-----
NOTE: The counter change will be applied as a running change to production units only.
For machines already shipped out or in the field, please be sure to take the action
described below in Section 4.
4. Important Notes for Machine Installation All Products

Please be sure to perform the following at machine installation:
1. If the product is from before the counter modification, i.e. the counter is at a negative
value, be sure to set the counter to 0 first, then make the installation test samples.
Digital products
Analog products
Set the electrical counter to 0 with SP mode.

Set the mechanical counter to 0 with a reset key (tool).
2. If the product is modified, i.e. the counter is already at 0 (or above 0 following preinstallation at a service depot), simply make the installation test samples.
3. After completing the installation, make sure to record the counter value. This is very
important, as this value will be used for billing with Meter Click contracts. Also, inform
the customer of the value along with the reason why the counter does not start from
0.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 14-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: RB064015a
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
B0655114
NIB (PHY)
Version
NetFile (NFA)
Version
C.SUM
Production
D
E
F
3.54
3.55
3.56
1.11
1.11
1.11
2658
4088
177E
1st Mass Prod.

November Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
SC990 occurs with continuous LPR print jobs sent from a Windows NT station.
Note: When upgrading to this version, the DHCP setting will only change to ON if it is manually
set or a factory default clear is performed after update.
Note: After performing the setting to disable HTTP, it is not possible to access the target device
through the web browser. To change this setting, use telnet to open HTTP. When the telnet port is
disabled, it is necessary to clear the network settings (Memory Clear for NCS) to open the telnet
port.
3. Supports new wireless LAN (IEEE802.11b).
Note: Since this is due to a vendor change, the new LAN cannot be used with suffix D firmware.
F
E
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 20-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017b
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
Part Number
Printer
Version
Scanner
Version
C.SUM
Production
B0665205A
B
G3385204
A
B
C
D
1.00
1.02
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.09
1.10
1.13
1.13
1.13
1.20
1.20
2.00
2.00
9A16
0286
97B6
3C5F
EE07
6A71
D2D4
1st Mass Prod.

August 02 Prod.
October 02 Prod.
November 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
March 03 Prod.
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Duplex face settings (front/rear) not applied correctly when specified with PCL
commands.
NOTE: In addition to this firmware version, see RTB # RB064026 for other necessary
action.
Selecting a HDD font or DIMM font may reduce available memory.
CAD files not printed out correctly.
Duplex printing does not function.
- Selecting a HDD font or DIMM font may reduce available memory.
- Support for SAP Barcode & OCR printing.
If the MIB cannot successfully retrieve the display language information from the machine, the
driver will be displayed in English.
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
manuals4you.com
D
D
D
D
C
B
B
B
B
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 20-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017b
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
#RA02090003).
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
report.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
scanner history.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
and Ready.
column).
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 20-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017b
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Spec change:
left side.
reached.
G3385204
G3385204
th
displayed.
manuals4you.com
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 14-Feb-03
Subject: ROM History (Martini-C1 PS3)
No.: RB064025

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
This is to inform you of the firmware history for the Martini-C1 PS3.
B5255902
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.00
1.01
7CB0
61A7
1st Mass Prod.

October Prod. 02
Symptom Corrected
Suffix

The printer controller freezes when printing from Unix Acrobat.
The printing speed of a PS job slows down after a PS3 job is reset.
When data is sent selected for 3-hole punching to the EU model, which only supports 2 & 4-hole
punching, two holes are punched in the paper. Software modified so that no holes are punched
when this data is sent.
Many "PunchCancelled" messages may be displayed in the Summary Error Log after sending
data for which punching could not be applied.
Lines sometimes appear in (what should be) blank areas.
Printer controller unable to recognize the copy <filename> <printername> PS job command sent
from a DOS prompt, and prints out the command itself as a character string.
Customized job not printed when feeding from a paper tray due to a paper mismatch, which
occurs even though the paper size set in the driver has also been set at the operation panel.
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Feb-03
Subject: Mixed Simplex/Duplex commands do not work
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064026
properly

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
SYMPTOM
Simplex/duplex face settings are not applied correctly when specified with PCL commands
(see firmware history RTB # RB064017b).
CAUSE
The GPS module does not correctly process the incoming PCL commands.
SOLUTION
The following combination is only necessary for customers using PCL commands to
specify simplex/duplex face settings:
!
Modified Printer/Scanner firmware v1.10 Applied from Mar 03 production, released

to the global server at beginning of March.
Modified PCL 5e/XL driver v1.3.0.0 Applied from Mar 03 production, released to
global server Feb 7.
Change bit SW6, #2 from 0 to 1 (enabled) Necessary to change this manually on all
units.
NOTE: Therefore for production units from Mar 03, it is only necessary to change the bit
switch setting.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Date: 6-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Subject: Loose screw on drum shaft (N.A. only)
PAGE: 1/2
No.: RB064027

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
NOTE: The following only applies to the N.America field.
SYMPTOM
Varying registration and blurry copies.
CAUSE
1. Boss attachment error.
When the boss was attached to the shaft, the screw was tightened without the boss set on
the concave portion (indent) of the white gear. Then, at some point later during operation,
shock or other stress forced the gear into its correct position. A gap develops between the
screw and shaft (of about 4 mm), which causes the screw to fall out.
2. Incorrect torque driver used during production.
There are 2 separate drivers used to fix the screw in place, one an 18-20 kg driver and the
other a 6-8 kg driver; in some cases the weaker of the two (6-8 kg) was mistakenly used.
SOLUTION
Production:
1. After the boss has been attached, it will go through a visual check to make sure it is in
the correct position.
2. The screw is checked with the proper (handheld) torque driver at the following station to
make sure it has been tightened correctly.
For cases reported from the field, please check this area at installation or the next service
visit.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Date: 6-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
NG setting (Boss is not set in the dent of the gear)
No.: RB064027
OK setting
If the machine is working with the NG setting, the boss may set with the dent and as a
result a gap will be made between screw and boss.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 14-Mar-03
Subject: Combinations of BCU/GW firmware
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064028

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
Please note the following regarding the combinations of BCU and GW firmware:
With BCU firmware ver4.x or later, please use GW firmware ver3.x or later (and with GW
ver3.x or later, please use BCU ver4.x or later).
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/4
Reissued: 19-Mar-03
Model: General RTB
Date: 4-Feb-03
No.: RGene013b
RTB Reissue
The items in bold italics have been corrected or updated.
Subject: Service remarks at installation

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Action required
Transmit/receive
Other (Specification change)
Please note the following change in counter specification. Although a production line
modification will not be applied to some products, the action described in 4. Important
Notes for Installation below must be taken for all products at installation.
Overview:
Electronic counters will now be set to 0 when released from the factory, instead of being
set to a negative value.
Background:
Previously, counters were set to a negative value when shipped from the factory, and later
set to 0 at installation, following installation test copies/prints. However this may cause
confusion among some customers as to why the counter value at the commencement of
the contract is 0, even though some installation test copies have already been made.
Details:
1. Specification Change
Current
New
Specification
The initial value of the electrical counter is negative when products
are shipped from the factory.
Note: After making test samples at installation, the negative counter

value can be set to 0 with SP mode.
The initial value of the electrical counter is 0 when products are
shipped from the factory.
Note: After making test samples at installation, the (positive) counter
value cannot be set back to 0 with SP mode.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/4
Reissued: 19-Mar-03
Model: General RTB
Date: 4-Feb-03
No.: RGene013b
2. Firmware Modification
Due to the counter modification, SP5-849 has also been changed as follows for products
that have this SP mode (listed below).
Current
SP mode name:
Counter Clear
Day
New
Installation Date
Specification:
When the electrical counter is changed from a
negative value to 0, the machine recognizes this
as the counter clear day and stores this date in the
NVRAM.
When the electrical counter reaches a value of
20, the machine recognizes this as the installation
date and stores this date in the NVRAM.
NOTE: The following products have SP5-849. The new firmware for these products has
not yet been released. However the release notes for each will clearly mention the
new firmware version.
New products:
Bellini-C2, Adonis C3
Current products: Martini C1, Model-U C1
3. Schedule for the Counter Modification
The following is the current schedule for when the counter modification will be applied.
Please note that there are some models to which the change will not be applied (marked
as ---), due to production schedules, production lot quantities and sales figures.
NOTE: The actual cut-in months that have been confirmed appear in the Cut-in
production month column below. This RTB will be reissued when these dates
have been confirmed for the remaining products.
(1) New products
Product Name
Bellini C2
Adonis C3
Model J-P2
Model J-P2 CF
Model AR- P1
Model K-C1a
Product
Code
B070
B079/82
G080
G367
G081/92
B120
Target cut-in
production month
2003.03
2003.03
2003.03
2003.03
2003.03
2003.03

April 03 production
First mass production lot
March 03 production
March 03 production
March 03 production
March 03 production
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/4
Reissued: 19-Mar-03
Model: General RTB
Date: 4-Feb-03
No.: RGene013b
(2) Current products

Product Name
Product
Code
Digital B&W Copiers

Bellini C1
A294
Martini C1
B064/65
Model M-C2b
B098
Adonis C2
B003/04/06/07
Russian C2
B022/27/31
Model K-C1
B039/40/43
Stella C1
B044/45/46/49
Digital WF Copiers
Dolphin
B010
Analog Copiers
All products
J2SS-C3
B047/48
Whale
A174
Color Copiers
Model I2
B018
Model L2
B017
Model C2
B023
Model U-C1
B051/52
Color Printers
Model J-P1
G060
Model J-P1 CF
G570
Model U-P1
G071
Pomelo P3
G063
Target cut-in
production month
--2003.03
2003.03
--2003.03
2003.03
2003.03
--April 03 production (see Note)

March 03 production
--February 03 production
March 03 production
March 03 production
2003.03
March 03 production
--(See Note)
--March 03 production
March 03 production
----2003.02
2003.03
----February 03 production
April 03 production
----2003.03
2003.03
----March 03 production
March 03 production
NOTE: The counter change will be applied as a running change to production units only.
For machines already shipped out or in the field, please be sure to take the action
described below in Section 4.
NOTE: For Martini-C1 mainframes assembled in Japan, the counter change will be
applied from the first unit of April 03 production. For mainframes assembled
at REI, the change will be applied midway through April production. These
cut-in serial numbers will be announced as soon as they have been
confirmed.
NOTE: The change will also be applied to analog models J2SS-C3 and Whale, as
production will continue for a while. However, as these models use only
mechanical counters, the initial value when shipped from the factory will be
1 or 2 (not 0), following the 1 or 2 factory test copies.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/4
Reissued: 19-Mar-03
Model: General RTB
Date: 4-Feb-03
No.: RGene013b
4. Important Notes for Machine Installation All Products

Please be sure to perform the following at machine installation:
1. If the product is from before the counter modification, i.e. the counter is at a negative
value, be sure to set the counter value to 0 first, then make the installation test
samples.
Digital products
Analog products
Set the electrical counter to 0 with SP mode.

Set the mechanical counter to 0 with a reset key (tool).
2. If the product is modified, i.e. the counter is already at 0 (or above 0 following preinstallation at a service depot), simply make the installation test samples.
3. After completing the installation, make sure to record the counter value. This is very
important, as this value will be used for billing with Meter Click contracts. Also, inform
the customer of the value along with the reason why the counter does not start from
0.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Mar-03
Subject: Pinched Web Drive Motor Harness (N.A. only)
PAGE: 1/2
No.: RB064029

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
NOTE: The following applies to the N.A. field only.
SYMPTOM
The harness for the Web Drive Motor (AX040136: Cleaning Motor) may be pinched when
the Fusing Inner Cover (B0654268) is set.
CAUSE
The harness is led as shown below during factory assembly.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Mar-03
PAGE: 2/2
No.: RB064029
SOLUTION
Production:
The harness position has been changed as shown below.
B06417: From J4235100324, 338, 402, 405, 430, 440.
B06517: From J4335100231
In the field:
! Set the harness as shown below at the next service visit.
!
Make sure to set the harness in this position whenever replacing the Web Drive Motor.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 2-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001c
RTB Correction
From: 1st Tech. Support Sec. Service Support Dept.

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required

USA
B0655176
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.08
1.12
1.13
F112
2C31
715B
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
B0655177
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.08
1.12
1.13
49C4
7F92
5D94
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
B0655235
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.08
1.12
1.13
9959
C4FC
5AD3
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
B0655236
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
85C4
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
46B5
1st Mass Prod.
Europe
Asia/Taiwan
China
Korea
B0655237
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 2-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001c

B0655238
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
2.64
2.65
2.72
E914
5B62
0D5B
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
January Prod 03
Symptom Corrected
New SP mode added:
SP4999: ADF Scan Glass Dust Check.
001: Enables or disables the check (0: OFF, 1: ON). Default: 0.
002: Detection Level (Weak 0 - 8 Strong). Default: 4.
When this SP is enabled and dust is detected, a message is
displayed on the LCD instructing the operator to clean the
exposure glass.
Note:
1. Before enabling this mode, make sure to clean the
scanning guide plate (B4772517). If this is not done, a
misdetection may occur.
2. To use this function, it is necessary to install the following
firmware versions:
BCU: v4.02 or later.
GW controller: v3.51 or later.
A display error occurs if the Reset key is pressed while
performing touch screen calibration.
The telephone number is not displayed in the correct area if
SC672 occurs during a system stall.
The words for stack and sort in Portuguese were reversed in the
following areas:
Fax (main screen)
longer than the maximum amount of characters have been
shortened to fit the screen.
New: Copies
801.11.
USA
EU
Asia/
Twn
B
CHN
KOR
GEN
_
A
_
A
_
A
_
A
_
_
A
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 2-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003c
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
H
J
1.11
1.12.2
1.12.3
3.01.2
3.51
B179
66AF
AFC2
242A
679A
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
November Prod 02
February Prod 03
March Prod. 03
IMPORTANT
When installing ver. 3.01.2 or newer, it is necessary to install BCU 4.01 or later together as a
set.
Symptom Corrected
Supports SMTP authentication.
Note: To use this function, it is necessary to update to the following firmware versions:
NIB: v3.72 or newer
Scanner: v2.08 or newer
New SP mode added:
When this SP is enabled and dust is detected, a message is displayed on the LCD
instructing the operator to clean the exposure glass.
Note:
1. Before enabling this mode, make sure to clean the scanning guide plate (B4772517). If
this is not done, a misdetection may occur.
2. To use this function, it is necessary to install the following firmware versions:
BCU: v4.02 or newer
LCDC: v1.13 or newer
Supports the Document Mall/Global Scan function.
Specification change: The date the machine recognizes as the installation date has been
changed as follows, due to the changeover to counter NVRAMs with an initial value of 0.
Old: The day that the counter reaches 0.
New: The day the counter reaches 21.
The filename of a Document Server file appears garbled on the document delete screen if
the name is written in Chinese.
manuals4you.com
Suffix
J
J
J
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 2-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003c
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Wireless LAN communication error when using 802.11 adhoc mode.

The NIB P/N is not displayed in SP7801 or on the SMC printout when TCP/IP is disabled in
the User Tools.
The Weekly Timer does not function unless the Auto Off timer expires first.
SC990 sometimes occurs if 100 Desig./Chapter is specified for a print job.
Reserved jobs are sometimes deleted when the current copy job is halted by a jam or other
cause.
The Load paper message is not displayed when all feed trays are empty and there is paper in
the Cover Interposer Tray.
If Copy Interrupt is used once an original has been set in the DF, and is then replaced with an
original with (an effectively) different width, the estimated size of the first original is not cleared.
Image problem occurs when using Magazine Copy together with Margin Adjustment.
Current settings appear overlapped with the default settings on the SMC printout if the report is
printed out with proportional font.
If the virtual keyboard is displayed inside User Tools ! System Settings ! SSID (or WEP), and
the User Tools key is then pressed to exit User Tools, the keyboard will appear again when
entering System Settings.
If a normal stapling job with limitless paper exit is halted with Copy Interrupt to print out a centerstapling job (before switching trays), and the original job is then resumed, the machine will exit the
copies directly on top of the interrupt job.
When printing out a job using Slip Sheet and Stapling, the machine will allow the slip sheets to be
stapled even when the slip sheet paper type cannot be stapled by specification.
SC990 appears when cover sheets are added at the end of a sample copy trial and the job is
initiated.
Titles for group registration/changes and group name changes are not displayed correctly on the
virtual keyboard.
SC990 occurs if performing continuous print jobs using the LPR port when network traffic is high.
Recovery is not possible if the power is turned off during a simultaneous upgrade of the System
and Copier firmware.
The waiting display sometimes does not clear when the machine recovers from Energy Saver
Mode.
The @ and _ marks have been added to the virtual keyboard so that it is no longer necessary
to use the SHIFT key to make them appear.
Software modified to support Punch Units that only allow a certain number of holes to be punched
(units with no hole qty selection).
J
J

screen.
Paper Setting.
J
J
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
G
G
F
F
F
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 2-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003c
Symptom Corrected
Suffix

"
"
"
"
process.
F
F
F
manuals4you.com
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 2-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004c
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
B0655123
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
B1105123
A
3.12a
3.14e
3.16b
4.01
4.02
BFCC
64E0
2142
F4BF
3C0B
1st Mass Prod.

September Prod. 02
September Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
March Prod. 03
IMPORTANT
When installing ver. 4.01 or newer, it is necessary to install GW controller 3.01.2 or later
together as a set.
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
The drum sometimes rotates backwards when SP2912-2 is not set to a value of 0.
SC990 sometimes occurs with simplex originals ! duplex copies when a jam occurs
during rear side feeding.
New SP mode added:
A
A
Note:
1. Before enabling this mode, make sure to clean the scanning guide plate (B4772517). If
this is not done, a misdetection may occur.
GW controller: v3.51 or newer.
LCDC: v1.13 or newer.
SC335/336 were triggered with a detection time of 10 seconds, even though the correct detection
time is 20 seconds.
B110
5123
B110
5123
B110
5123
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 2-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004c
Symptom Corrected
with the following (2nd stapling) job.
priority).
manuals4you.com
Suffix
B110
5123
B110
5123
G
G
G
G
G
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 2-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: RB064015b
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
Firmware history for the Martini-C1 NIB/Netfile.
B0655114
NIB (PHY)
Version
NetFile (NFA)
Version
C.SUM
Production
D
E
F
G
3.54
3.55
3.56
3.72
1.11
1.11
1.11
1.11
2658
4088
177E
F232
1st Mass Prod.

November Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
March Prod. 03
Symptom Corrected
Suffix

Note: To use this function, it is necessary to update to the following firmware versions (or
newer):
GW Controller: 3.51 or later
Scanner: 2.08 or later
Note: When upgrading to this version, the DHCP setting will only change to ON if it is manually
set or a factory default clear is performed after update.
Note: After performing the setting to disable HTTP, it is not possible to access the target device
through the web browser. To change this setting, use telnet to open HTTP. When the telnet port is
disabled, it is necessary to clear the network settings (Memory Clear for NCS) to open the telnet
port.
Note: Since this is due to a vendor change, the new LAN cannot be used with suffix D firmware.
F
E
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/4
Reissued: 8-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017c
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
Firmware history for the Martini-C1 Printer/Scanner.
Part Number
Printer
Version
Scanner
Version
C.SUM
Production
B0665205A
B
G3385204
A
B
C
D
E
1.00
1.02
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.13
1.13
1.13
1.20
1.20
2.00
2.00
2.08
9A16
0286
97B6
3C5F
EE07
6A71
D2D4
43A1
1st Mass Prod.

August 02 Prod.
October 02 Prod.
November 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
March 03 Prod.
March 03 Prod.
NOTE: When installing Scanner Version 2.08 or later, it is necessary to install the following
GW controller and NIB firmware:
GW Controller: V3.51 or later
NIB: V3.72 or later
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
[Printer]
Sample Prints are not shifted when printed out to the shift tray.
[Printer]
Barcodes are shifted when printed out (GFPR#RE03010016).
[Printer]
Firmware modified so that if there is no paper in the paper tray specified in the driver, the
machine will perform Auto Tray Select and print out the job (previously, the job would be
halted with an error).
Note: To activate this function, it is necessary to turn BitSW#3-4 ON.
[Scanner]
The following functions have been added for SMTP E-mail transmission:
- SMTP Authentication
- POP before SMTP
[Scanner]
Supports Free BSD2.2.8/sendmail Wbeta7.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/4
Reissued: 8-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017c
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Duplex face settings (front/rear) not applied correctly when specified with PCL commands.
NOTE: In addition to this firmware version, see RTB # RB064026 for other necessary action.
Selecting HDD font or DIMM font may reduce available memory.
- Selecting HDD font or DIMM font may reduce available memory.
- Supported SAP Barcode & OCR printing.
If the MIB cannot successfully retrieve the display language information from the machine, the
driver will be displayed in English.
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
#RA02090003).
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
report.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
scanner history.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
D
D
D
D
D
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/4
Reissued: 8-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017c
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
and Ready.
column).
Spec change:
left side.
Incorrect: Remove the paper from Finisher shift tray 1.
Correct: Remove the paper from Finisher shift tray.
reached.
manuals4you.com
A
A
A
A
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
G3385204
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/4
Reissued: 8-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017c
Suffix
Symptom Corrected
The Orientation, Edge to Edge Print and Extend A4 Width menu settings are lost when the G3385204
B0665205
th
displayed.
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
B0665205
B
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 2-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 14-Feb-03
No.: RB064025a
RTB Correction
Subject: ROM History (Martini-C1 PS3)

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
Firmware history for the Martini-C1 PS3.

B5255902
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
C
1.00
1.01
1.02
7CB0
61A7
E285
1st Mass Prod.

October Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Modified for Adobe certification.

Wording correction on job info. descriptions.
Modified so that Media Handling can be used when specifying the SuperOption.
Slow printing from AutoCAD.
Configuration error when MediaType is set to an undefined value in the PS file (modified to
a default of 1). Refer to FPR R030020001.
Supports Edge-to-Edge printing.
Supports CtIZ.
Only the first duplex command is applied when the PS file contains a mixture of simplex
and duplex short/long stapling orientations.
Note: This does not occur when printing from Windows.
The printer controller freezes when printing from Unix Acrobat.
The printing speed of a PS job slows down after a PS3 job is reset.
When data is sent selected for 3-hole punching to the EU model, which only supports 2 & 4-hole
punching, two holes are punched in the paper. Software modified so that no holes are punched
when this data is sent.
Many "PunchCancelled" messages may be displayed in the Summary Error Log after sending
data to which punching could not be applied.
Lines sometimes appear in (what should be) blank areas.
Printer controller unable to recognize the copy <filename> <printername> PS job command sent
from a DOS prompt, and prints out the command itself as a character string.
Customized job not printed when feeding from a paper tray due to a paper mismatch, which
occurs even though the paper size set in the driver has also been set at the operation panel.
C
C
C
C
C
manuals4you.com
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Apr-03
Subject: Wireless LAN cannot communicate in 802.11adhoc
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064030
mode

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
SYMPTOM
The Wireless LAN Card modified from Dec 02 (see RTB #RB064019) cannot
communicate with the PC after a certain interval when using 802.11adhoc mode.
Note:
This does not occur with 1) adhoc or infrastructure modes, or 2) Wireless LAN Cards
produced up until Nov 02.
CAUSE
Program bug
SOLUTION
When installing the Wireless LAN option, update the GW controller firmware to v3.51 or
later.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/3
Date: 28-Apr-03
Subject: Transfer Belt Damage
No.: RB064031

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
NOTE: The following does not apply to the North America model.
SYMPTOM
The transfer belt shifts to the front edge, contacting and sometimes damaging the edge of
the transfer belt unit.
CAUSE
Due to a defect in the factory adjustment tool, the gap between the positioning plate that
secures the transfer belt unit and the right edge of the machine frame was shortened to
0.9mm (gap G1 on the next page, which should normally be 1.56mm +/- 0.1mm).
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Apr-03
PAGE: 2/3
No.: RB064031
Field Action required

Adjust the gap to within the 1.56 +/- 0.1mm specification only on machines from the S/N
range listed below using the Rear Fusing Plate, located at the rear of the fusing unit (Parts
Catalog, pg. 103, #31). The thickness of the plate is 1.6mm, which will allow the gap to be
adjusted to within specification.
1. Remove the Rear Fusing Plate (P/N B0654154).
2. Check if the transfer belt has shifted toward the front of the transfer unit case. If it has,
reposition the belt to the center position (see S/M, pg. 3-53).
Note: This is not necessary at arrival; only for machines operating in the field.
3. Remove the PCU Inner Cover (P/N B0651313), then the Transfer Unit Guide Plate [A].
4. Loosen the 2 paint-locked screws [B].
5. Insert the Rear Fusing Plate removed in Step 1 above into the gap between the
positioning plate [C] and the right edge of the machine frame (gap G1 in the photo
below), then tighten the two positioning plate screws.
[C]
[B]
[A]
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Apr-03
PAGE: 3/3
No.: RB064031
Serial Numbers
Machines that require the above adjustment procedure:
<B06419: J4230200xxx>
016, 017, 018, 019, 020, 021
<B06422: J4230200xxx >
034, 035, 036, 041, 044, 051, 054, 055, 058, 064, 065, 069, 076, 079, 082, 085, 090, 092,
095, 096, 114, 127, 425, 432, 433, 437, 440, 444, 559, 561, 566, 568, 577, 578, 579, 580,
586, 590, 591, 592, 594, 595, 596, 597, 598, 599, 604, 801, 809, 810
<B06424: L1283020xxx >
004, 008, 009, 012, 017, 018, 021, 026, 027, 028, 036, 038
<B06427: J4230200xxx >
178, 208, 225, 241, 276, 282, 286, 304, 305, 306, 307, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 498, 503,
513, 524, 530, 531, 532, 707, 741
<B06428: J4230200xxx>
316-335
<B06429: J4230200xxx >
336-415
<B06522: J4330200xxx >
154, 155, 158, 171, 197, 199, 204, 208, 214, 222, 224, 230, 236, 256, 262
<B06527: J4330xxxxxx>
200133, 200136, 200144, 300068, 300069, 300072, 300077, 300090
<B06528: J4330200xxx>
021-030
<B06529: J4330200xxx >
031-044
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 30-Apr-03
Subject: Noise from deformed toner supply case agitator
PAGE: 1/2
No.: RB064032

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
Noise is heard from the Toner Supply Case (B0653161) in the initial period after
installation.
CAUSE
The agitator in the toner supply case is deformed, causing it to get caught in the rotating
toner transport coil and to generate noise. Specifically, as shown below, the left portion is
positioned lower than the right by 4.0mm or more.
Note: This only occurs on certain toner supply cases (see the affected machine S/N
below).
SOLUTION
In the Field:
When installing the developer at machine installation, check the gap shown above
(difference in height).
If it is 4.0mm or more, replace the toner supply case.
Production Line:
Agitators will be visually inspected, and any that show deformation will be sorted out.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 30-Apr-03
PAGE: 2/2
No.: RB064032
Serial Numbers
The following are the S/N for machines which may contain the deformed toner supply case
agitators.
B06417: J4234900001 - J4235100875
B06419: J4230200416 - J4230200421
B06422: J4230100210 - J4230300046
B06424: L1283010001 - L1283030038
B06426: 7P10130001 - 7P10330100
B06427: J4230100001 - J4230300215
B06428: J4230200316 - J4230300296
B06429: J4230100284 - J4230300276
B06469: J4230100344 - J4230200652
B06517: J4334900001 - J4335100999
B06519: J4330100024 - J4330100033
B06522: J4330200145 - J4330300272
B06524: L1293010001 - L1293030006
B06526: 7P20130001 - 7P20330070
B06527: J4330100037 - J4330300373
B06528: J4330200021 - J4330300189
B06529: J4330100001 - J4330300179
B06569: J4330100034 - J4330100036
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 9-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004d
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
B0655123
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
B1105123
A
B
3.12a
3.14e
3.16b
4.01
4.02
4.02a
BFCC
64E0
2142
F4BF
3C0B
36C6
1st Mass Prod.

September Prod. 02
September Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
March Prod. 03
May Prod. 03
IMPORTANT
When installing ver. 4.01 or newer, it is necessary to install GW controller 3.01.2 or later together
as a set.
Symptom Corrected
Suffix
Web End (SC550) occurs prematurely.

Memory Setting Error (SC955) occurs with large print jobs (approx. 1,500 sheets).
Drum sometimes rotates backwards when SP2912-2 is not set to a value of 0.
SC990 sometimes occurs with simplex originals ! duplex copies when a jam occurs during rear
side feeding.
New SP mode added:
B
B
A
A
When this SP is enabled and dust is detected, a message is displayed on the LCD instructing the
operator to clean the exposure glass.
Note:
1. Before enabling this mode, make sure to clean the scanning guide plate (B4772517). If this is
not done, a misdetection may occur.
SC335/336 were triggered with a detection time of 10 seconds, even though the correct detection
time is 20 seconds.
B110
5123
B110
5123
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 9-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004d
Symptom Corrected
with the following (2nd stapling) job.
priority).
manuals4you.com
Suffix
B110
5123
B110
5123
B110
5123
G
G
G
G
G
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 21-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 16-May-03
No.: RB064033a
RTB Correction
The items in bold italics have been corrected.
Subject: Web End (SC550) occurs prematurely

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
SYMPTOM
Note: The error occurs before 300k in all cases, and depending on the mode used, it can
occur at around 135k.
CAUSE
Software bug: The web counter does not increment.
SOLUTION
Production Line:
Software has been modified from May '03 production.
v4.02 (B1105123A) v4.02a (B1105123B).
Note: For the B064-17, this modification was applied from the end of April 03 production
(from J4235201427).
In the Field:
There are 3 types of machines as follows:
A. Machines which contain BCU firmware 4.01 or 4.02
<B064-17>
J4235100001 - J4235201426
<B064-19, -22, -27, -28, -29, -69>
J42302xxxxx, J42303xxxxx, or J42304xxxxx
<B064-24>
L128302xxxx, L128303xxxx, or L128304xxxx
<B064-26>
7P1023xxxx, 7P1033xxxx, or 7P1043xxxx
<B065-17>
J43351xxxxxx or J43352xxxxx
<B065-19, -22, -27, -28, -29, -69>
J43302xxxxx, J43303xxxxx, or J43304xxxxx
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 21-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 16-May-03
No.: RB064033a
<B065-24>
L129302xxxx, L129303xxxx, or L129304xxxx
<B065-26>
7P2023xxxx, 7P2033xxxx, or 7P2043xxxx
B. Machines originally containing BCU firmware v3.16 or earlier and were later upgraded
to v4.01 or later
C. Machines originally containing BCU firmware v3.16 or earlier but were NOT upgraded.
<A> Machines:
- Install BCU firmware 4.02a or later
- Set SP1902-001 as follows:
TCV (K)
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
SP1902-001
11
13
16
18
21
24
27
31
TCV (K)
65
70
75
80
100
105
110
115
118
SP1902-001
34
38
62
67
72
77
80
41
45
85
49
90
53
95
58
Note: If the TCV is higher than 118K, it is necessary to replace the Cleaning Web. This is
because the web Near End condition is triggered when the value of SP1902-001 is 80k.
<B> Machines:
- Replace the Cleaning Web (AE045046)
- Install BCU firmware 4.02a or later
- Set SP1902-001 to 0.
<C> Machines:
Although not required, if upgrading the BCU firmware, be sure to use v4.02a or newer. At
this time, it is also necessary to install GW v3.01.2 or newer together as a set.
Note: Make sure NOT to install BCU v4.01 or v4.02.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/4
Reissued: 21-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001d
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
USA
B0655176
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.08
1.12
1.13
F112
2C31
715B
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
B0655177
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.08
1.12
1.13
49C4
7F92
5D94
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
B0655235
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.08
1.12
1.13
9959
C4FC
5AD3
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
B0655236
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
85C4
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
46B5
1st Mass Prod.
Europe
Asia/Taiwan
China
Korea
B0655237
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/4
Reissued: 21-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001d

B0655238
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
C
2.64
2.65
2.72
3.01
E914
5B62
0D5B
79F9
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
January Prod. 03
May Prod. 03
Symptom Corrected
USA
EU
Asia/
Twn
_
The words for stack and sort in Portuguese were reversed

in the following areas:
Copy main screen
Facsimile main screen
Some messages in copier error/notification pop-ups in
Portuguese that were longer than the maximum amount of
characters have been shortened to fit the screen.
Display for System Auto Reset Timer inside User Tools !
System Settings ! Timer Settings was incorrectly displayed
as System Auto Reset Reset Timer in Italian.
Wording correction:
SC code: External Charge Unit (Italian).
Display for Ethernet Speed in the pop-ups inside User Tools
! System Settings ! Interface Settings was incorrectly
displayed as Ethernet Type in Dutch.
Display in the pop-ups inside User Tools ! System Settings !
Interface Settings ! IEEE802.11b ! WEP (Encryption)
Settings was incorrectly displayed as follows in Dutch:
Incorrect: 10 alphanumeric characters must be entered for 64
bit.
Correct: 10 alphanumeric characters must be entered for 64
bit, 26 alphanumeric characters for 128 bit.
Display for To print counter list of all user codes, select
counter type, then press [Start] in the pop-ups inside User
Tools !Key Operator Tools !Display/Clear/Print Counter per
User Code was translated into Russian incorrectly (incorrect
spelling).
Display for Press # to use special size or paper. in the copier
main screen, which appears when the bypass tray is selected,
was translated into German incorrectly (included unnecessary
words).
Wording correction:
Copy main screen: Displays and messages related to machine
status and tray selection with certain job functions (German,
Polish, Hungarian, Russian).
Wording correction:
Copy main screen, Tray 2/Bypass tray selectable sizes
(Italian):
Incorrect: 4 1/2x9 1/2
Correct: 4 1/8x9 1/2
manuals4you.com
CHN
KOR
GEN
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/4
Reissued: 21-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected
Wording corrections:
- Copy main screen ! Edit/Print Tab (Italian, Spanish,
Swedish, Czech)
- Copy main screen ! Printing position/Size (Swedish)
- Copy alert messages (Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish,
Norwegian, Russian)
- Copy system settings screen ! Edit ! User Code settings
(Norwegian)
- Copy System Settings ! Scanner Settings ! Document
Server screens (Czech).
- Scanner system settings ! Scanner settings screens
(Swedish, Hungarian).
- Scanner alert messages (Swedish)
- Scanner main screen ! Destination Search (Hungarian,
Dutch).
- Scanner main screen ! Scanning parameters ! Image
Density (Russian).
- Printer alert messages (Italian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish,
Czech, Hungarian, Russian).
Added terminology for the Copy Connection and SDK features.
Added terminology for the Printing Backup feature.
Wording correction:
Document Server ! Document selection screens (Dutch).
New SP mode added:
displayed on the LCD instructing the operator to clean the exposure
glass.
Note:
1. Before enabling this mode, make sure to clean the scanning
guide plate (B4772517). If this is not done, a misdetection may
occur.
firmware versions:
A display error occurs if the Reset key is pressed while performing
touch screen calibration.
The telephone number is not displayed in the correct area if SC672
occurs during a system stall.
following areas:
Fax (main screen)
No.: RB064001d
USA
EU
Asia/
Twn
_
CHN
KOR
GEN
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
C
C
C
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/4
Reissued: 21-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected
No.: RB064001d
USA
EU
Asia/
Twn
_
_
A
_
A

longer than the maximum amount of characters have been
New: Copies
801.11.
manuals4you.com
CHN
KOR
GEN
_
A
_
A
_
_
A
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 21-May-03
Subject: Web Drive Gear (N.A. only)
PAGE: 1/2
No.: RB064034

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
NOTE: The following applies to the N.A. field only.
SYMPTOM
The Oil Web unravels.
CAUSE
An error in the assembly manual.
The ratchet shown below was installed in the reverse orientation on machines produced
up until Jan 28, 2003.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 21-May-03
PAGE: 2/2
No.: RB064034
SOLUTION
In the Field:
Please set the ratchet in the correct position when reported, or at the next web
replacement. To determine if the ratchet is in the wrong position, please check the gap
between the ratchet and the pressure roller.
The upper photo shows the correct orientation (large gap), while the bottom one shows
the incorrect orientation (hardly any gap visible).
Production Line:
Correct
Incorrect
The orientation of the Drive Gear has been corrected

from Jan 29, 2003 production.

B06417: From J4234801045
B06517: From J4335000001
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 10-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 23-May-03
No.: RB064035a
RTB Correction
Subject: Noise from broken cleaning brush gears (reoccur) and Prepared by: K.Miura
Black line

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
This RTB is to announce the changeover to the Mojito drum and SP5 cleaning blade as
well as related field action. This is to completely solve the PCU gear damage announced
in RTB RB064010 and cleaning failure (black lines), both of which can recur even when
the previous modifications are applied.
1. PCU Gear Damage Recurrence

SYMPTOM
The PCU cleaning brush drive gear breaks. This is reported by customers as noise, dirty
background or toner scattering.
CAUSE
A cam-driven pressure release mechanism was previously added to release the cleaning
blade from the drum and remove the toner/paper dust that accumulates on the blade edge.
However PCU gear damage sometimes recurs due to the following side effect.
In the initial period of operation, the friction between the drum and cleaning brush is high,
requiring a relatively high amount of force to remove the blade from the drum. However
this friction decreases over time, so that when the blade is released with the same (large)
amount of force, the cam eventually hits the stopper and damages the gear from the
resulting shock.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 10-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 23-May-03
No.: RB064035a
ACTION
Temporary
Change SP2912-001 (Drum Reverse Rotation - Rotation Amount) to a value of 2.
Permanent
Same as the production line countermeasure below for the cleaning failure.
This is because the above adjustment simply reduces the release force, and in some
cases the blade may not release properly from the drum, which can cause poor cleaning.
2. Cleaning Failure Recurrence

SYMPTOM
Black lines appear following a period of copy jobs of 1 to 30 or more.
CAUSE
The pressure-release mechanism previously applied for this issue does prevent the black
lines with low-medium volume jobs, but paper dust can build up enough to cause black
lines with high-volume runs (e.g. 1 to 30). This is because the blade is not released from
the drum until the completion of the job, allowing the blade edge to be deformed and toner
to slip under the blade.
Note: This is more noticeable with paper types containing a large amount of paper dust.
ACTION
Production line
1. The drum will be changed over to the Mojito drum, and the cleaning brush to the SP5
cleaning brush.
2. The pressure-release mechanism for the cleaning blade will be removed.
The above modifications are scheduled to be applied from June '03 production.
Field machines
At the next drum replacement, please:
1) Install the Mojito drum (A2949510) and SP5 cleaning brush (AD042038), AND
2) Remove the pressure-release mechanism (see below).
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 10-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 23-May-03
No.: RB064035a
Important: Please be sure to do both items above. If only one is performed, this can
cause dirty background, black lines/bands or blurred images.
<Removing the pressure-release mechanism>

Remove the e-ring (105) and related parts (27, 28, 29, 29).
The related MB will be issued as soon as the cut-in serial numbers have been confirmed.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/5
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001e
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
1) Machines without the Copy Connector Kit or MLB option installed

USA
B0655176
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.08
1.12
1.13
F112
2C31
715B
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
B0655177
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.08
1.12
1.13
49C4
7F92
5D94
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
B0655235
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
1.08
1.12
1.13
9959
C4FC
5AD3
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
March Prod. 03
B0655236
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
85C4
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
1.13
46B5
1st Mass Prod.
Europe
Asia/Taiwan
China
Korea
B0655237
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/5
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001e

B0655238
Version
C.SUM
Production
A
B
C
2.64
2.65
2.72
3.01
E914
5B62
0D5B
79F9
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod. 02
January Prod. 03
May Prod. 03
Note: Language firmware can be used for both usual and Copy Connector Kit/MLB
machines.
2) Machines with the Copy Connector Kit or MLB option installed

USA
B5254176
Version
C.SUM
Production
2.04
21D2
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
2.04
CAC5
1st Mass Prod.
Europe
B5254177
IMPORTANT:
With the Copy Connector/MLB modifications, the machine firmware has been divided up
into 2 main groups (BCU, GW, NIB/Netfile, LCDC, Printer/Scanner):
1) The usual firmware used up to the present, i.e. for machines without the Copy Connector
or MLB options.
2) The Copy Connector/MLB group
Firmware from these two groups cannot be used interchangeably. Always update within the
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/5
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001e
CCK/
MLB
Usual
Symptom Corrected
Supports the Copy Connector Kit and MLB option.
following areas:
Copy main screen
Facsimile main screen
Some messages in copier error/notification pop-ups in Portuguese
that were longer than the maximum amount of characters have been
Display for System Auto Reset Timer inside User Tools ! System
Settings ! Timer Settings was incorrectly displayed as System Auto
Reset Reset Timer in Italian.
Wording correction:
SC code: External Charge Unit (Italian).
Display for Ethernet Speed in the pop-ups inside User Tools !
System Settings ! Interface Settings was incorrectly displayed as
Ethernet Type in Dutch.
Display in the pop-ups inside User Tools ! System Settings !
Interface Settings ! IEEE802.11b ! WEP (Encryption) Settings was
incorrectly displayed as follows in Dutch:
Incorrect: 10 alphanumeric characters must be entered for 64 bit.
Correct: 10 alphanumeric characters must be entered for 64 bit, 26
alphanumeric characters for 128 bit.
Display for To print counter list of all user codes, select counter type,
then press [Start] in the pop-ups inside User Tools !Key Operator
Tools !Display/Clear/Print Counter per User Code was translated
into Russian incorrectly (incorrect spelling).
Display for Press # to use special size or paper. in the copier main
screen, which appears when the bypass tray is selected, was
translated into German incorrectly (included unnecessary words).
Wording correction:
Copy main screen: Displays and messages related to machine status
and tray selection with certain job functions (German, Polish,
Hungarian, Russian).
Wording correction:
Copy main screen, Tray 2/Bypass tray selectable sizes (Italian):
Incorrect: 4 1/2x9 1/2
Correct: 4 1/8x9 1/2
- Copy main screen ! Edit/Print Tab (Italian, Spanish, Swedish,
Czech)
- Copy main screen ! Printing position/Size (Swedish)
- Copy alert messages (Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian,
Russian)
- Copy system settings screen ! Edit ! User Code settings
(Norwegian)
manuals4you.com
US
EU
A
ASI
GE
CH KO US
EU
/T
N
N
R
A
WN
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
C
_
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/5
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001e
CCK/
MLB
Usual
Symptom Corrected
- Copy System Settings ! Scanner Settings ! Document Server
screens (Czech).
- Scanner system settings ! Scanner settings screens (Swedish,
Hungarian).
- Scanner alert messages (Swedish)
- Scanner main screen ! Destination Search (Hungarian, Dutch).
- Scanner main screen ! Scanning parameters ! Image Density
(Russian).
- Printer alert messages (Italian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Russian).
Added terminology for the Copy Connection and SDK features.
Added terminology for the Printing Backup feature.
Wording correction:
Document Server ! Document selection screens (Dutch).
New SP mode added:
displayed on the LCD instructing the operator to clean the exposure
glass.
Note:
1. Before enabling this mode, make sure to clean the scanning
guide plate (B4772517). If this is not done, a misdetection may
occur.
firmware versions:
A display error occurs if the Reset key is pressed while performing
touch screen calibration.
The telephone number is not displayed in the correct area if SC672
occurs during a system stall.
following areas:
Fax (main screen)
Some messages in copier error/notification pop-ups that were longer
than the maximum amount of characters have been shortened to fit
the screen.
US
EU
A
ASI
CH KO US
GE
EU
/T
N
R
A
N
WN
_
_
_
_
_
C
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
C
C
C
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/5
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Sep-02
No.: RB064001e
CCK/
MLB
Usual
Symptom Corrected
New: Copies
Interface Settings ! Network was incorrectly displayed as 801.11.
manuals4you.com
US
EU
A
ASI
CH KO US
GE
EU
/T
N
R
A
N
WN
A
_
_
_
_
A
_
_
A
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
A
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/4
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003d
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required

B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
H
J
1.11
1.12.2
1.12.3
3.01.2
3.51
B179
66AF
AFC2
242A
679A
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
November Prod 02
February Prod 03
March Prod. 03
IMPORTANT
When installing ver. 3.01.2 or newer, it is necessary to install BCU 4.01 or later together as a set.

System
B5254108
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.07
4AA6
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.07
1215
1st Mass Prod.
Copy
B5254109
IMPORTANT:
1. With the Copy Connector/MLB modifications, the machine firmware has been divided up
1) The usual firmware used up to the present, i.e. for machines without the Copy
Connector or MLB options.
2. The firmware has been divided into GW System and GW Copy, as the increased size
exceeded the card's storage capacity.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/4
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003d

Note: To use this function, it is necessary to update to the following firmware
versions:
NIB: v3.72 or newer
New SP mode added:
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
When this SP is enabled and dust is detected, a message is displayed on the

LCD instructing the operator to clean the exposure glass.
Note:
1. Before enabling this mode, make sure to clean the scanning guide plate
(B4772517). If this is not done, a misdetection may occur.
BCU: v4.02 or newer
Supports Document Mall/Global Scan function.
Specification change: The date the machine recognizes as the installation date
has been changed as follows, due to the changeover to counter NVRAMs with an
initial value of 0.
The filename of a Document Server file appears garbled on the document delete
screen if the name is written in Chinese.
The NIB P/N is not displayed in SP7801 or on the SMC printout when TCP/IP is
disabled in User Tools.
Reserved jobs are sometimes deleted when the current copy job is halted by a
jam or other cause.
The Load paper message is not displayed when all feed trays are empty and
there is paper in the Cover Interposer Tray.
If Copy Interrupt is used once an original has been set in the DF, and is then
replaced with an original with (an effectively) different width, the estimated size of
the first original is not cleared.
Image problem occurs when using Magazine Copy together with Margin
Adjustment.
Current settings appear overlapped with the default settings on the SMC printout
if the report is printed out with proportional font.
manuals4you.com
Usual
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
B525
4109
_
CCK/
MLB:
System
B525
4108
_
Symptom Corrected
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/4
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003d
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
H
H
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
G
G
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
_
_
_
_
Symptom Corrected
Usual
If the virtual keyboard is displayed inside User Tools ! System Settings ! SSID
(or WEP), and the User Tools key is then pressed to exit User Tools, the
keyboard will appear again when entering System Settings.
If a normal stapling job with limitless paper exit is halted with Copy Interrupt to
print out a center-stapling job (before switching trays), and the original job is then
resumed, the machine will exit the copies directly on top of the interrupt job.
When printing out a job using Slip Sheet and Stapling, the machine will allow the
slip sheets to be stapled even when the slip sheet paper type cannot be stapled
by specification.
SC990 appears when cover sheets are added at the end of a sample copy trial
and the job is initiated.
Titles for group registration/changes and group name changes are not displayed
correctly on the virtual keyboard.
SC990 occurs if performing continuous print jobs using the LPR port when
network traffic is high.
Recovery is not possible if the power is turned off during a simultaneous upgrade
of the System and Copier firmware.
The waiting display sometimes does not clear when the machine recovers from
Energy Saver Mode.
The @ and _ marks have been added to the virtual keyboard so that it is no
longer necessary to use the SHIFT key to make them appear.
Software modified to support Punch Units that only allow a certain number of
holes to be punched (units with no hole qty selection).
At the completion of Document Box scanning, a message was sometimes displayed asking
the user to remove the paper from the Finisher tray.
SC870 occurs after multiple groups are selected and assigned a number in the address
book programming screen.
SC819 occurs if Continue to Program is performed 196 times in the address book
programming screen.
After the main power comes on with the Weekly Timer, and the Access Code screen
prompts the user for code entry, the screen can be cleared by simply opening and closing
the cover.
Bond Paper does not appear as a selection for Tray 1 or the LCT in User Tools System
Settings Tray Paper Setting.
SP2912-001 (Drum Reverse Rotation, Rotation Amount) default value changed from 2 !
3, setting range changed from 0-10 ! 1-3.
SP2201-001, 002, 003, 005 (Development Bias Adjustment) maximum setting changed
from 900 ! 800.
SP2931/2/3/4/5/6-001 (Transfer Current On/Off Timing) default value changed from 0 !
20.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/4
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected

15.
SP1902-004 (Fusing Web Motor Control, Web Near End Value) default value changed
from 90 ! 80.
"
"
"
Automatic jam when counter reaches 0 has been disabled, so that all remaining
pages are printed out.
"
Firmware modified so that when 2: Europe is selected in SP5131 (Paper Size Type
Selection), it is possible to select F-sized originals in User Tools System Settings
General Features.
SC990 sometimes occurs if the signal timing during scanning and printing causes a delay
in the scanning process.
manuals4you.com
No.: RB064003d
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
Usual
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004e
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required

B0655123
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
B1105123
A
B
3.12a
3.14e
3.16b
4.01
4.02
4.02a
BFCC
64E0
2142
F4BF
3C0B
36C6
1st Mass Prod.

September Prod. 02
September Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
March Prod. 03
May Prod. 03
IMPORTANT
as a set.

B5254123
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.03d
FF28
1st Mass Prod.
IMPORTANT:
or MLB options.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004e

New SP mode added:
B
B
A
A
CCK/
MLB
B525
4123
_
_
_
_
B110
5123
B110
5123
B110
5123
B110
5123
B110
5123
G
G
G
_
_
G
F
_
_
F
F
_
_
F
F
F
_
_
_
Symptom Corrected
Note:
1. Before enabling this mode, make sure to clean the scanning guide plate (B4772517).
If this is not done, a misdetection may occur.
timing.
When a 1-page, non-stapling printing job is sent in between two stapling jobs, it is stapled
along with the following (2nd stapling) job.
With DF 2-sided scanning, the edge of the original is sometimes visible on the rear side of
the copy when the image is shifted by Create Margin for stapling.
When making duplex copies from the exposure glass, sometimes both the front and rear
sides come out as the front side of the original.
When the main power is turned on, SP1902-002 sometimes changes to an illegal value,
and the Fusing Web End condition occurs much earlier than normal.
SC345 sometimes occurs during the initial paper feed just after the main power is turned
on, or at the end of a job while making the ID sensor pattern.
manuals4you.com
Usual
_
_
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004e
Symptom Corrected
1. Web End detection priority given to the web end sensor (previously, SP1902 value
had priority).
2. Near End now triggered at 80% (previous: 90%), and the default for SP1902-001 has
been changed to 80% accordingly.
Usual
F
F
CCK/M
LB
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: RB064015c
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
Firmware history for the Martini-C1 NIB/Netfile.

B0655114
NIB (PHY)
Version
NetFile (NFA)
Version
C.SUM
Production
D
E
F
G
3.54
3.55
3.56
3.72
1.11
1.11
1.11
1.11
2658
4088
177E
F232
1st Mass Prod.

November Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
March Prod. 03

NIB (PHY)
Version
NetFile (NFA)
Version
C.SUM
Production
3.00
B5254114
1.79.1
5859
1st Mass Prod.
IMPORTANT:
or MLB options.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: RB064015c
Usual
CCK/
MLB

newer):
firmware.
B525
4114
_
F
E
_
_
Symptom Corrected
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/4
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017d
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
Firmware history for the Martini-C1 Printer/Scanner.

Part Number
Printer
Version
Scanner
Version
C.SUM
Production
B0665205A
B
G3385204
A
B
C
D
E
1.00
1.02
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.13
1.13
1.13
1.20
1.20
2.00
2.00
2.08
9A16
0286
97B6
3C5F
EE07
6A71
D2D4
43A1
1st Mass Prod.

August 02 Prod.
October 02 Prod.
November 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
March 03 Prod.
March 03 Prod.
NOTE: When installing Scanner Version 2.08 or later, it is necessary to install the following GW
controller and NIB firmware:
NIB: V3.72 or later

Part Number
Printer
Version
Scanner
Version
C.SUM
Production
B5255204
4.15
5.00
5AA6
1st Mass Prod.
IMPORTANT:
or MLB options.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/4
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017d
Usual
CCK/
MLB
[Printer]
B525
5204
_
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Scanner]
- POP before SMTP
[Scanner]
commands.
action.
[Printer]
With duplex jobs containing mixed printing orientations, the printing orientation may
sometimes be in reverse after changing back from landscape to portrait.
[Printer]
When specifying Front and Back Cover Sheet, the paper is not stapled/punched as
expected.
[Printer]
Supports mixed binding orientations with duplex jobs using cover sheets (GFPR
#RC02080003).
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
#RA02090003).
D
D
D
D
_
_
_
_
Symptom Corrected
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/4
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017d
Symptom Corrected
Usual
CCK/
MLB
[Printer]
[Printer]
When performing forced print/error skip printing with the PCL, a delay occurs when
printing out each page, slowing down the printing speed markedly.
[Scanner]
The Start key standby condition (machine waiting to scan second side of original) cannot
be cleared if the number of sheets specified for scanning is 1.
[Scanner]
Modified so that the machine does not enter Night Mode while printing out the scanner
history report.
[Scanner]
When selecting a 100-member group after selecting 1 destination inside the same
Scanner page, the destination initially selected is removed.
[Scanner]
No paper in the bypass tray is displayed if there is no paper in the LCT while printing out
the scanner history.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
When Sending is displayed during re-forwarding (Scanner), and the input registration
number button is pressed (machine prompts operator for number), the timer for the
Sending message comes on line and clears it, even though the registration number
button is still active.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
A transmission error occurs during fragmented mail transmission, followed by a
connection error on the first retry, then SC990 (should not be displayed) on the second
retry.
[Scanner]
When the printer is in standby for printing out pre-set jobs, it displays both the job
information and Ready.
Display errors on pre-set job screen (user name, document name, last character in
details column).
If the host cancels the spool-printing job of a large file (10MB or more) while it is being
printed out, the display reads, Resetting job and does not change.
With PCL5e/PCL6 printing, the job name is not displayed on the LCD panel, and the job is
not listed in the job history.
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
manuals4you.com
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/4
Reissued: 3-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017d
Symptom Corrected
Usual
CCK/
MLB
Spec change:
The default for the Custom Size (Printer initial settings ! Bypass Paper Size ! Custom
Size) has been changed from A4 ! letter for NA. Note: A4 is still the default for EU.
When specifying 4 holes to be punched in the right side of the paper, 4 holes are punched
in the left side.
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
With the Chinese display language, on the bypass tray size setting screen, the characters
used for the up/down scroll keys are displayed outside their boxes.
When sending with Centro, Waiting is displayed even after the I/F switching time has
been reached.
On the forced printing screen when specifying LG (8 1/2 x 14) paper with no orientation,
this size is incorrectly displayed as 8 1/4 x 14.
When locked printing or copy server printing is performed with screen spooling and user
access control both ON, the display reads, Printing.
When using job cancel while printing out multiple jobs with locked printing, only the
current job is canceled (all other jobs are printed out).
The Orientation, Edge to Edge Print and Extend A4 Width menu settings are lost when
the power is turned Off/On (not saved in NARAM), and are returned to their defaults.
th
displayed.
When menu lock is enabled from WEB, the Printer initial settings key mark is not
displayed.
Line spacing command, lochEsc&l#D loch causes incorrect output (GFPR
#RC02050002).
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/8
Reissued: 30-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 5-Jun-03
No.: RB064036a
RTB Reissue
Revised: Step 3 on pg. 3, illustration and Step 9 on pg. 6, illustration on pg. 7.
Subject: Installation Procedure for Copy Connector Kit Type
Prepared by: Y.Urushihara
1075

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
This bulletin contains the installation procedure for the Copy Connector Kit Type 1075, to
be released in June 2003, and is arranged in the layout style of the Service Manual.
Note:
There will be two destination codes:
-10: America (North/Central/South)
-12: Europe, Asia, Oceania
manuals4you.com
4 August, 2003
Copy Connector Kit Installation Procedure

Important notes:
Connector Kit or MLB option. When installing either of these options, it is
necessary to install the following firmware together as a set.
Software
GW Controller: Copy
BCU
Printer/Scanner
NIB/Netfile
LCDC
Part Number
B5254108
B5254109
B5254123
B5255204
B5254114
B5254176 (NA)
B5254177 (EU)

5.07
5.07
5.03d
4.15/5.00
3.00/1.79
2.04
Always update within the same group, otherwise the machine will not operate
correctly.
3. The Copy Connector Kit and MLB options cannot be installed in the same
machine. It is necessary to install one or the other.
group has been divided into GW System and GW Copy, as the increased size
has exceeded the card's storage capacity.
1-1
4 August, 2003
Accessory Check
1. Copy Connector Board .................................................. 2
2. MLB Interface Board ...................................................... 2
3. Interface Cable............................................................... 3
4. Interface Harness Power Line..................................... 2
5. Hub ................................................................................ 2
6. Key Top Application .................................................... 6
7. Operating Instructions (English)..................................... 1
8. Key Top Printer ........................................................... 2
9. Anti-static Cap................................................................ 2
10. Ferrite Core.................................................................. 4
11. Knob Screw.................................................................. 4
12. Decal Copy Connector .............................................. 4
13. Tapping Screw M3 x 8 ............................................. 4
1-2
manuals4you.com
4 August, 2003
!CAUTION
Unplug the machine main power cord before starting the following
procedure.
Perform the following procedures for both the main and sub copiers.
[A]
B110I201.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover (2 screws).

2. Remove the controller cover (10 screws).
3. Turn on DIP SW2-1 on the controller board [A].
Note: Only perform this step when installing the Copy Connector Kit.
Leave the switch off whenever performing any future updates.
Printer/Scanner
NIB Netfile
BCU
LCDC
1-3
4 August, 2003
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B110I201.WMF
B110I202.WMF
1. Replace the interface board [A] with the MLB Interface Board [B].
NOTE: This step is not necessary from the following Serial Numbers:
Part Number
B06417
B06419
B06422
B06424
B06426
B06427
B06428
B06429
B06469
Serial Number
J4235300054
J42304XXXXX
J42304XXXXX
L1283040001
7P10430001
J4230300409
J42304XXXXX
J42304XXXXX
J42304XXXXX
Part Number
B06517
B06519
B06522
B06524
B06526
B06527
B06528
B06529
B06569
Serial Number
J4335300191
J43304XXXXX
J43304XXXXX
L1293040001
7P20430001
J43304XXXXX
J43304XXXXX
J43304XXXXX
J43304XXXXX
2. Remove the 4P connector [C] for the HDD and connect it to CN319 on the MLB
Board.
3. Connect one end of the power interface harness [D] to the HDD connector, and
the other end to CN318 on the MLB Board.
1-4
manuals4you.com
4 August, 2003
[G]
[F]
[H]
B110I203.WMF
[E]
B110I102.WMF
4. Remove the connector cover [E] (2 screws).

5. Install the CCK interface board [F] as shown.
6. Connect the harness [G] to CN315 on the MLB Board.
7. Attach the decals [H] as shown.
1-5
4 August, 2003
America (North/Central/South):
Europe, Asia, Oceania:
[K]
[J]
[I]
B110I204_RTB.WMF
Note: There is a grounding wire attached to the

anti-static cap on Europe/Asia/Oceania models.
[L]
B110I103_RTB.WMF
8. Lead the interface cable [I] through the anti-static cap [J], and then connect it to
the interface board.
9. Attach the anti-static cap (2 knob screws [K]).
10. Replace the key top [L].
11. Repeat both the firmware and hardware procedures above for the other copier.
1-6
manuals4you.com
4 August, 2003
Perform Steps 12 and 13 below if the distance between the two machines is
more than 4.5m.
America (North/Central/South):
[N]
[M]
B110I205.WMF
Europe/Asia/Oceania:
[N]
[M]
B110I205.WMF
12. Use the Hubs [M] to connect the interface cables.

NOTE: When connected in this way, the maximum length possible is 13.5m (3
interface cables).
13. Attach the ferrite cores [N] as shown.
1-7
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/4
Reissued: 29-Mar-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Jun-03
No.: RB064037b
RTB Reissue
The items in bold italics (last page) have been revised.
Subject: Installation Procedure for File Format Converter
Prepared by: S. Watanabe
From: 2nd Tech. Support Sec. Service Support Dept.

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
This bulletin contains the installation procedure for the File Format Converter (B519-17), to
be released in June 2003, and is arranged in the layout style of the Service Manual.
manuals4you.com
FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

NOTE:
Connector Kit or File Format Converter (MLB option). When installing either of
these options, it is necessary to install the following firmware together as a
set.
Software
GW Controller: Copy
BCU
Printer/Scanner
NIB/Netfile
LCDC
Part Number
B5254108
B5254109
B5254123
B5255204
B5254114
B5254176 (NA)
B5254177 (EU)

5.07
5.07
5.03d
4.15/5.00
3.00/1.79
2.04
Always update within the same group, or the machine will not operate correctly.
3. The MLB option cannot operate with any of the following installed, i.e. it is
necessary to remove these before beginning the procedure below:
- Wireless LAN board
- IEEE1394 I/F board
- USB2.0 I/F board
- Copy Connector Kit components
group has been divided into GW System and GW Copy, because the increased
size has exceeded the card's storage capacity.
1-1
Accessory Check
1. File Format Converter Board ..........................................1
2. MLB bracket ...................................................................1
3. MLB panel ......................................................................1
4. Screw M3x6....................................................................2
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.

1. Remove the rear cover (2 screws).
2. Remove the controller cover (10 screws).
3. Turn on DIP SW2-1 on the controller board.
Printer/Scanner
NIB Netfile
BCU
LCDC
1-2
manuals4you.com
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B110I104.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] (2 screws).

2. Remove the bracket [B] and attach the MLB panel [C].
3. Attach the File Format Converter board [D] to the controller board (2 screws).
4. Replace the controller board cover and rear cover.
5. Turn the main switch ON.
6. Perform a network function Memory Clear (SP5-801-010).
7. Perform an NCS function Memory Clear (SP5-801-011), which will reset the
network password to password.
Note: This step is necessary to ensure that the password is properly reset
as mentioned.
8. Input the following default values manually (SP5-836).
SP Number
5-836-01
5-836-02
5-836-72
5-836-73
5-836-75
5-836-76
Value
0
0
0
0
0
1
SP Number
5-836-82
5-836-83
5-836-85
5-836-86
5-836-91
1-3
Value
1
1
1
2
50
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/5
Reissued: 13-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003e
RTB Correction
Prepared by: M. Tsuyuki

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required

B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
H
J
K
1.11
1.12.2
1.12.3
3.01.2
3.51
3.52
B179
66AF
AFC2
242A
679A
BCB9
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
November Prod 02
February Prod 03
March Prod. 03
June Prod. 03
IMPORTANT

System
B5254108
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.07
4AA6
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.07
1215
1st Mass Prod.
Copy
B5254109
IMPORTANT:
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/5
Reissued: 13-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003e
same group, otherwise the machine will not operate correctly.
Symptom Corrected
New SP mode added: SP 6903: Fold Position Adjustment (1 Sheet)
Usual
K
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
_
J
B525
4108
_
B525
4109
_
Adjusts the fold position for single sheets.

Adjustment Range: -7.5mm to 7.5mm (default 0).
Default: 0
Step: 0.5
001: A3
002: B4
003: A4 lengthwise
004: DLT
005: LT lengthwise
006: Other
Note:
- To enable this SP mode, it is also necessary to install the following:
1. BCU v4.02b or later.
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
- The CCK/MLB firmware (B5254108/4109) already contains this SP mode
from its first release.
Adjustment range for SP 6120 changed (Jogger Fence Adjustment):
Old range: [0 to 1.5mm]
New range: [-1.5mm to 1.5mm]
Note:
- This SP mode is new to the firmware used with the SR840.
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
change from its first release.
versions:
NIB: v3.72 or newer
New SP mode added:
Note:
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/5
Reissued: 13-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected
BCU: v4.02 or newer
initial value of 0.
jam or other cause.
Adjustment.
manuals4you.com
No.: RB064003e
Usual
CCK/
MLB:
System
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/5
Reissued: 13-Jun-03
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003e
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
H
H
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
G
G
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
_
_
_
_
Symptom Corrected
Usual
by specification.
Energy Saver Mode.
programming screen.
the cover.
from 900 ! 800.
20.
manuals4you.com
Model: Martini-C1
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/5
Reissued: 13-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected

15.
from 90 ! 80.
"
"
"
"
General Features.
manuals4you.com
No.: RB064003e
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
Usual
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 13-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004f
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required

B0655123
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
B1105123
A
B
C
3.12a
3.14e
3.16b
4.01
4.02
4.02a
4.02b
BFCC
64E0
2142
F4BF
3C0B
36C6
7606
1st Mass Prod.

September Prod. 02
September Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
March Prod. 03
May Prod. 03
June Prod. 03
IMPORTANT
as a set.

B5254123
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.03d
FF28
1st Mass Prod.
IMPORTANT:
or MLB options.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 13-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004f
Symptom Corrected
Usual
C
CCK/
MLB
_
_
B
B
A
A
B525
4123
_
_
_
_

Default: 0
Step: 0.5
001: A3
002: B4
003: A4 lengthwise
004: DLT
005: LT lengthwise
006: Other
Note:
2. GW firmware v3.52 or later.
3. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
- The CCK/MLB firmware (B5254123) already contains this SP mode from its first
release.
Note:
1. GW firmware v3.52 or later.
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
- The CCK/MLB firmware (B5254123) already contains this SP mode from its first
release.
New SP mode added:
Note:
1. Before enabling this mode, make sure to clean the scanning guide plate (B4772517).
If this is not done, a misdetection may occur.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 13-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064004f
Symptom Corrected
timing.
When a 1-page, non-stapling printing job is sent in between two stapling jobs, it is stapled
along with the following (2nd stapling) job.
With DF 2-sided scanning, the edge of the original is sometimes visible on the rear side of
the copy when the image is shifted by Create Margin for stapling.
When making duplex copies from the exposure glass, sometimes both the front and rear
sides come out as the front side of the original.
When the main power is turned on, SP1902-002 sometimes changes to an illegal value,
and the Fusing Web End condition occurs much earlier than normal.
SC345 sometimes occurs during the initial paper feed just after the main power is turned
on, or at the end of a job while making the ID sensor pattern.
1. Web End detection priority given to the web end sensor (previously, SP1902 value
had priority).
2. Near End now triggered at 80% (previous: 90%), and the default for SP1902-001 has
been changed to 80% accordingly.
Usual
B110
5123
B110
5123
CCK/
MLB
_
_
B110
5123
B110
5123
B110
5123
G
G
G
_
_
G
F
_
_
F
F
_
_
F
F
F
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissue: 10-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Jun-03
No.: RB064038a
RTB Reissue
SP description and EP ROM versions revised (bold italics).
Subject: New SP (SP6903/6120)

Troubleshooting
Part information
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
Action required
The following two SP modes have been added. Please be sure to also see the firmware
requirements on the last page.
1. SP6903 (Fold Position Adjustment (1 sheet))
Purpose
The amount of folding skew for multiple sheets is different from that of a single sheet. This
new SP adjusts the folding position and applies it to single-sheet booklets, while the
existing SP6902 applies the adjustment to both single and multiple-sheet booklets.
Important Note
Whenever setting both SP6902 and SP6903:
Always be sure to set SP6902 first and then SP6903. If they are set in the opposite order,
the value of SP6902 will be added to that of SP6903, causing the folding position for
single-sheets to shift and the booklet to skew.
Settings
6903
Fold Position Adjustment (1 sheet)

001
A3 length
002
B4 length
003
A4 length
004
DLT length
005
LT length
006
Other
Adjusts the folding position for single-sheet

Booklet copies to minimize vertical folding
skew.
[-7.5~+7.5/0mm/0.5mm]
A higher value brings the fold closer to the
trailing edge, while a lower value moves it
farther away.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissue: 10-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Jun-03
No.: RB064038a
2. SP6120 (Staple Jogger Adjustment)

Purpose
Horizontal folding skew can occur when the distance between the jogger fences and paper
edges is not 0 - 0.5mm. This new SP allows the jogger fences to be moved away from or
closer to the paper edges to reach this target distance.
6120
Staple Jogger Adjustment

001
A3
002
B4
003
A4 length
004
A4 side
005
B5 length
006
B5 side
007
DL length
008
LG
009
LT length
010
LT side
011
other
Adjusts the closed-position width of the jogger

fences for each paper size.
[-1.5~+1.5/0mm/0.5mm]
A higher value moves the fences away from
the paper, while a lower value brings them
closer in.
Note: For machines using the SR850/860, this is an entirely new SP mode (previously
displayed only). For machines using the SR840, the range of the existing SP has been
expanded to include negative values.
Firmware requirements
The following firmware combinations are required to activate the above two SP modes:
1. Machines without the Copy Connector Kit or MLB option installed (usual):
!
BCU (B1105123) 4.02b or later
GW (B0655102) 3.52 or later
EP-ROM (B4685132 or later)
2. Machines with the Copy Connector Kit or MLB option installed (CCK/MLB):
!
BCU (B5254123) 5.03d or later
GW (B5254108) System 5.07 or later
GW (B5254109) Copy 5.07 or later
EP-ROM (B4685132 or later)
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006a
RTB Correction
The jogger fence adjustment procedure for the SR860 Finisher has been revised. The
specific improvements made are mentioned below under Solution.
Subject: Jogger Fence Adjustment

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
SYMPTOM
Booklet skew when using the B468.
CAUSE
1. The front and rear jogger fences are not parallel.
2. The paper is not transported straight.
SOLUTION
Adjust the jogger fence position.
The following adjustment procedure has been revised for the following reasons:
!
An adjustment board has been registered as a service part for more accurate jogger
fence alignment, as paper can tend to slack during the adjustment.
Adjustment Board Jogger Fence
(250mm x 280mm)
B4689003
A new SP mode (SP6120) has been added which allows the fences to be adjusted for
different paper sizes (see RTB #RB064038 for the adjustment procedure).
Important: Specific firmware combinations are necessary to activate this SP mode.
See RTB #RB064038 for details.
Revisions to the procedure below have been applied to ensure that booklet skewing
(horizontal and vertical) is kept within the specification tolerance of 2mm or less.
Important: 2mm or less refers to the amount of skew between the edges of the
innermost sheet of a folded set (or single sheet).
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Adjusting the Jogger Fences

1. Move the belt hook down to the position shown
in the photograph to the right by moving the stack
feed out belt on the rear side of the unit by hand.
Important: Do not move the belt by the hook
itself. Also, be sure to move the belt in the
correct direction, shown by the arrow in the
photograph below.
2. Insert the adjustment board (B4689003)

between the jogger fences.
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006a
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
3. By manually moving the stack-feed out belt on

the rear side of the unit, bring the adjustment
board up until its edge is about at the top edge of
the upper stay.
4. Loosen the 2 screws for the lower jogger

shafts.
5. Rotate the R7 knob until the upper stay

lightly contacts the adjustment board.
manuals4you.com
No.: RB064006a
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006a
6. By turning the motor pulley (black knob),

bring the fences together until they are roughly
parallel to one another.
Note: At this point, the fences should not be
tight against the boards edges.
7. Bring the board flush against the rear

jogger fence.
02073006.WMF
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006a
8. Adjust the rear jogger shaft position until the top edge
of the upper stay and upper edge of the board are
parallel to one another.
Left edge height + Right edge height = 0.5mm or less.
9. Tighten the screw for the rear jogger shaft all the way
Rear
B View
A View
ADD1.WMF
A View
B View
Upper Stay
Paper
8A.WMF
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Upper Stay
Paper
8B.WMF
manuals4you.com
Front
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 6/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006a
10Bring the front jogger fence flush against the edge of the board, then adjust the front
fence shaft until the board/fence gaps on both sides are:
Board/fence gap (top + bottom) = 0 - 0.5mm.
B View
Check Points
A View
ADD1.WMF
A View
Front
Jogger
Fence
Paper
9A.WMF
Front
Jogger
Fence
B View
Rear
Front
Paper
Rear
Front
9B.WMF
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 7/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006a
11. Tighten the screw for the front jogger fence all the way.
12. Print out 3 Booklet sets (2-3 sheets each) and check for folding skew.
All distances shown below (A, B, C, D): 2mm or less.

Note: As mentioned on pg. 1, measure this from the edges of the innermost sheet.
A
D
B
C
Paper
Paper
13.WMF
13. If A, B, C or D is over 2mm, perform the following.
A. Open the finisher front door, then insert a driver or other tool into the door switch to
create the door-closed condition. Also, make sure to push in the stapler unit.
B. Print out 3 Booklet sets (2-3 sheets each) using the exposure glass (not the DF).
C. Once the paper is fed into the stapler unit and the machine stops operation, pull out the
stapler unit.
D. Press the # key on the operation panel, and then pull out the driver from the door
switch as soon as the jogger fences close in to the paper edges from the standby
position (10mm outside the paper width).
E. Check to see that the paper/fence gaps on both sides are:
Paper/fence gap (top + bottom) = 0 - 0.5mm.
If the fences are positioned too wide or too narrow, adjust the gap to 0 0.5mm for the
given paper size using SP6120.
14. Repeat Step 13 above, and if A, B, C or D is still above 2mm, go on to Step 15.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 8/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
15. Adjust the folding position using SP6902 until the two
edges intersect in the middle (point X). This will minimize
vertical folding skew, i.e. bring the leading/trailing edges of the
sheets closer together.
No.: RB064006a
Point X
Paper
ADD2.WMF
16. Repeat Step 13 above, and if A, B, C or D is still above 2mm, go on to Step 17.
Note: Although the fences may be parallel and 0 0.5mm from the paper edges, they may
not be 90 degrees with respect to the folding mechanism. Step 16 can correct this.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 9/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006a
B View
A View
ADD1.WMF
17.
1) If A/B are over 2mm, raise the rear jogger fence shaft and re-secure the shaft in
place. Then, loosen the screw for the front jogger fence shaft, lower the shaft to
B View
A
B
Paper
front
rear
14A.WMF
2) If C/D are over 2mm, lower the rear jogger fence shaft and re-secure the shaft in
place. Then, loosen the screw for the front jogger fence shaft, raise the shaft to
B View
D
C
Paper
rear
front
14B.WMF
Note: Be sure to raise/lower both shafts by the same number of marked increments.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 10/10
Reissued: 20-Jun-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006a
18. Repeat Step 16 until A, B, C and D are all 2mm or less.

19. Bring the belt hook to the position shown
in the photograph below then adjust the hook
until it is parallel to the belt itself.
NG
OK
02073004.WMF
20. If the charge-removal brush is bent upwards, adjust it so that its fibers are
perpendicular to the belt.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/4
Date: 25-Jun-03
Subject: Feed Lever Attachment Procedure
No.: RB064039

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
After a job is initiated for paper tray feed, the machine begins to feed the paper stacked in
the Bypass tray as well, resulting in a C-jam.
CAUSE
The pulley breaking torque decreases, allowing the idling torque to take over and rotate
the feed roller.
SOLUTION
Attach the Feed Lever (P/N #B0656445) to the Drive Reverse Shaft.
See the installation procedure on the next page.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 25-Jun-03
PAGE: 2/4
No.: RB064039
Installation Procedure for the #B0656445 Feed Lever

Preparation: Make sure the main power switch has been turned OFF.
1. Remove the rear upper cover (2 screws).
2. Open the controller board frame.
3. Remove the Long Toner Separation Shaft (snap ring).
4. Remove the clutch shown below (e-ring).
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 25-Jun-03
PAGE: 3/4
No.: RB064039
5. Loosen the screw for the tightener, slide the tightener up to its upper-right position,
then re-tighten the screw.
6. Remove the Timing Belt.

7. Remove the Gear Pulley (e-ring).
8. Remove the e-ring behind the Gear Pulley, on the Drive Reverse Shaft.
9. Attach the Feed Lever to the Drive Reverse Shaft, then reattach the e-ring.
Important: Lever orientation
The Feed Lever should be attached with:
!
The one-way clutch facing inward (facing the frame)
The arm of the lever facing the solenoid (facing right in the photo below)
B0656445
(Feed lever)
Drive
Reverse
Shaft
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 4/4
Date: 25-Jun-03
No.: RB064039

RCL (Japan) Production
MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J42305xxxxx
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J42305xxxxx
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L128305xxxx
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P105xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J42305xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42305xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J42305xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42305xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43305xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J43305xxxxx
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L129305xxxx
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P205xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J43305xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43305xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J43305xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43305xxxxx
REI (U.S.A) Production

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235400001
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335400001
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 24-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 22-Oct-02
No.: RB064006b
RTB Correction
The items on the first page in bold italics have been revised.
Previous reissue:
The jogger fence adjustment procedure for the SR860 Finisher has been revised. The
specific improvements made are mentioned below under Solution.
Subject: Jogger Fence Adjustment

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
SYMPTOM
Booklet skew when using the B468.
CAUSE
1. The front and rear jogger fences are not parallel with one another.
2. The jogger fences are too close or too far from the paper edges, and the paper is
not fed out of the booklet maker straight.
3. The jogger fence(s) themselves are bent.
SOLUTION
The following three solutions correspond to each of the three causes above:
1. Perform the Adjustment Procedure below to bring the jogger fences parallel to
one another.
2. Perform the Adjustment Procedure below to ensure the fences will close to the
proper width.
Note: To ensure the proper width for each paper size, update the ROM
(see RTB #RB064038).
3. Replace the jogger fences with the modified ones to ensure the fences are not
deformed when they expand by heat (see MB #B468028a).
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 8-Aug-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: RB064015d
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
This is to inform you of the firmware history for the Martini-C1 NIB/Netfile.

B0655114
NIB (PHY)
Version
NetFile (NFA)
Version
C.SUM
Production
D
E
F
G
H
3.54
3.55
3.56
3.72
3.73
1.11
1.11
1.11
1.11
1.1.2
2658
4088
177E
F232
7C8D
1st Mass Prod.

November Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
March Prod. 03
June Prod 03

NIB (PHY)
Version
NetFile (NFA)
Version
C.SUM
Production
3.00
B5254114
1.79.1
5859
1st Mass Prod.
IMPORTANT:
With the Copy Connector/MLB modifications, the machine firmware has been divided up into 2
main groups (BCU, GW, NIB/Netfile, LCDC, Printer/Scanner):
1) The usual firmware used up to the present, i.e. for machines without the Copy Connector or
MLB options.
Firmware from these two groups cannot be used interchangeably. Always update within the same
group, otherwise the machine will not operate correctly.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 8-Aug-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: RB064015d
Symptom Corrected
Usual
CCK/
MLB
SC819 sometimes occurs when browsing devices with SmartNetMonitor for Client
using NetBEUI protocol.

newer):
firmware.
B525
4114
_
F
E
_
_
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 1-Sep-03
Subject: File Format Converter supports DTB V2 from
PAGE: 1/1
No.: RB064040
Prepared by: K. Ichihara
v3.0.0.0, error message unclear
From: NS Support Sec. Service Support Dept.

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (Infomation)
Please note the following regarding File Format Converter and DeskTopBinder
compatibility:
The File Format Converter supports DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional from ver3.0.0.0.
If previous versions of DTB V2 Lite are used with the File Format Converter, the
Insufficient Memory Error will be displayed.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/5
Reissued: 3-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003f
RTB Correction

From: 2nd Tech.Support Sec. Service Support Dept.
Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (

B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1.11
1.12.2
1.12.3
3.01.2
3.51
3.52
3.53
B179
66AF
AFC2
242A
679A
BCB9
CD84
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
November Prod 02
February Prod 03
March Prod. 03
June Prod. 03
September Prod. 03
IMPORTANT

System
B5254108
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.07
4AA6
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.07
1215
1st Mass Prod.
Copy
B5254109
IMPORTANT:
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/5
Reissued: 3-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003f
Symptom Corrected
Usual
L
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
Changes made to the Frequency Change setting for the wireless LAN card
had no effect.
The rear side of the last sheet comes out blank when feeding A4 sheets
from the bypass tray in duplex mode.
_
J
B525
4108
_
B525
4109
_

Default: 0
Step: 0.5
001: A3
002: B4
003: A4 lengthwise
004: DLT
005: LT lengthwise
006: Other
Note:
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
- The CCK/MLB firmware (B5254108/4109) already contains this SP mode from
its first release.
Note:
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
versions:
NIB: v3.72 or newer
New SP mode added:
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/5
Reissued: 3-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected

Note:
BCU: v4.02 or newer
initial value of 0.
jam or other cause.
Adjustment.
manuals4you.com
No.: RB064003f
Usual
CCK/
MLB:
System
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/5
Reissued: 3-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003f
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
H
H
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
G
G
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
_
_
_
_
Symptom Corrected
Usual
by specification.
Energy Saver Mode.
programming screen.
the cover.
from 900 ! 800.
20.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/5
Reissued: 3-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected

15.
from 90 ! 80.
"
"
"
"
General Features.
manuals4you.com
No.: RB064003f
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
Usual
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/5
Reissued: 8-Aug-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017e
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (

Part Number
Printer
Version
Scanner
Version
C.SUM
Production
B0665205A
B
G3385204
A
B
C
D
E
F
1.00
1.02
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.13
1.13
1.13
1.13
1.20
1.20
2.00
2.00
2.08
2.14
9A16
0286
97B6
3C5F
EE07
6A71
D2D4
43A1
4FD6
1st Mass Prod.

August 02 Prod.
October 02 Prod.
November 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
December 02 Prod.
March 03 Prod.
March 03 Prod.
August 03 Prod
NOTE: When installing Scanner Version 2.14 or later, it is necessary to install the following
GW controller and NIB firmware:
NIB: V3.72 or later

Part Number
Printer
Version
Scanner
Version
C.SUM
Production
B5255204
4.15
5.00
5AA6
1st Mass Prod.
IMPORTANT:
MLB options.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/5
Reissued: 8-Aug-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017e
Usual
CCK/
MLB
[Printer]
SNMP trap cannot be sent when an SC occurs (even when enabled).
[Scanner]
SC990 or a panel freeze occurs if 70 or more scan-to-emails are sent since the last
power ON with the mainframe POP3 Encryption set to Auto Select.
[Scanner]
Scanner sometimes freezes when an email address is 123 characters or longer.
[Scanner]
Garbled text when printing out SP5990-23 report (Scanner User Program).
[Scanner]
Display error with operation panel keyboard (Korean display language).
[Printer]
B525
5204
_
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Scanner]
- POP before SMTP
[Scanner]
commands.
action.
[Printer]
With duplex jobs containing mixed printing orientations, the printing orientation may
sometimes be in reverse after changing back from landscape to portrait.
[Printer]
When specifying Front and Back Cover Sheet, the paper is not stapled/punched as
expected.
[Printer]
Supports mixed binding orientations with duplex jobs using cover sheets (GFPR
#RC02080003).
D
D
D
D
_
_
_
_
Symptom Corrected
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/5
Reissued: 8-Aug-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017e
Symptom Corrected
Usual
CCK/
MLB
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
[Printer]
#RA02090003).
[Printer]
[Printer]
When performing forced print/error skip printing with the PCL, a delay occurs when
printing out each page, slowing down the printing speed markedly.
[Scanner]
The Start key standby condition (machine waiting to scan second side of original) cannot
be cleared if the number of sheets specified for scanning is 1.
[Scanner]
Modified so that the machine does not enter Night Mode while printing out the scanner
history report.
[Scanner]
When selecting a 100-member group after selecting 1 destination inside the same
Scanner page, the destination initially selected is removed.
[Scanner]
No paper in the bypass tray is displayed if there is no paper in the LCT while printing out
the scanner history.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
When Sending is displayed during re-forwarding (Scanner), and the input registration
number button is pressed (machine prompts operator for number), the timer for the
Sending message comes on line and clears it, even though the registration number
button is still active.
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
[Scanner]
A transmission error occurs during fragmented mail transmission, followed by a
connection error on the first retry, then SC990 (should not be displayed) on the second
retry.
[Scanner]
When the printer is in standby for printing out pre-set jobs, it displays both the job
information and Ready.
Display errors on pre-set job screen (user name, document name, last character in
details column).
G338
5204
G338
5204
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/5
Reissued: 8-Aug-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
No.: RB064017e
Symptom Corrected
Usual
CCK/
MLB
If the host cancels the spool-printing job of a large file (10MB or more) while it is being
printed out, the display reads, Resetting job and does not change.
With PCL5e/PCL6 printing, the job name is not displayed on the LCD panel, and the job is
not listed in the job history.
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
G338
5204
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
Spec change:
The default for the Custom Size (Printer initial settings ! Bypass Paper Size ! Custom
Size) has been changed from A4 ! letter for NA. Note: A4 is still the default for EU.
When specifying 4 holes to be punched in the right side of the paper, 4 holes are punched
in the left side.
With the Chinese display language, on the bypass tray size setting screen, the characters
used for the up/down scroll keys are displayed outside their boxes.
When sending with Centro, Waiting is displayed even after the I/F switching time has
been reached.
On the forced printing screen when specifying LG (8 1/2 x 14) paper with no orientation,
this size is incorrectly displayed as 8 1/4 x 14.
When locked printing or copy server printing is performed with screen spooling and user
access control both ON, the display reads, Printing.
When using job cancel while printing out multiple jobs with locked printing, only the
current job is canceled (all other jobs are printed out).
The Orientation, Edge to Edge Print and Extend A4 Width menu settings are lost when
the power is turned Off/On (not saved in NARAM), and are returned to their defaults.
th
displayed.
When menu lock is enabled from WEB, the Printer initial settings key mark is not
displayed.
Line spacing command, lochEsc&l#D loch causes incorrect output (GFPR
#RC02050002).
manuals4you.com
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/5
Reissued: 8-Aug-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Dec-02
Symptom Corrected

No.: RB064017e
Usual
CCK/
MLB
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
B066
5205B
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/5
Reissued: 15-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003g
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (

B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
1.11
1.12.2
1.12.3
3.01.2
3.51
3.52
3.53
3.53.3
B179
66AF
AFC2
242A
679A
BCB9
CD84
5534
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
November Prod 02
February Prod 03
March Prod. 03
June Prod. 03
September Prod. 03
November Prod. 03
IMPORTANT

System
B5254108
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.07
4AA6
1st Mass Prod.
Version
C.SUM
Production
5.07
1215
1st Mass Prod.
Copy
B5254109
IMPORTANT:
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/5
Reissued: 15-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003g

CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
B525
4108
_
B525
4109
_
Symptom Corrected
Usual
Real time clock time is shifted slightly if any of the weekly timer setup
settings are changed.
SC870 occurs when the machine recovers from Energy Saver Mode if the #B5145970
hard drive is installed.
Changes made to the Frequency Change setting for the wireless LAN card had
no effect.
The rear side of the last sheet comes out blank when feeding A4 sheets from the
bypass tray in duplex mode.
Default: 0
Step: 0.5
001: A3
002: B4
003: A4 lengthwise
004: DLT
005: LT lengthwise
006: Other
Note:
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
its first release.
Note:
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
versions:
NIB: v3.72 or newer
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/5
Reissued: 15-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected

New SP mode added:
Note:
BCU: v4.02 or newer
initial value of 0.
jam or other cause.
Adjustment.
manuals4you.com
No.: RB064003g
Usual
CCK/
MLB:
System
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/5
Reissued: 15-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003g
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
H
H
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
G
G
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
_
_
_
_
Symptom Corrected
Usual
by specification.
Energy Saver Mode.
programming screen.
the cover.
from 900 ! 800.
20.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/5
Reissued: 15-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected
15.
from 90 ! 80.
"
"
"
"
General Features.
manuals4you.com
No.: RB064003g
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
Usual
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 17-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: RB064015e
RTB Correction

From: 2nd Tech. Support Sec. Service Suport Dept.
Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
This is to inform you of the firmware history for the Martini-C1 NIB/Netfile.

B0655114
NIB (PHY)
Version
NetFile (NFA)
Version
C.SUM
Production
D
E
F
G
H
J
3.54
3.55
3.56
3.72
3.73
374
1.11
1.11
1.11
1.11
1.1.2
1.1.2
2658
4088
177E
F232
7C8D
8353
1st Mass Prod.

November Prod. 02
February Prod. 03
March Prod. 03
June Prod 03
October Prod. 03

NIB (PHY)
Version
NetFile (NFA)
Version
C.SUM
Production
3.00
B5254114
1.79.1
5859
1st Mass Prod.
IMPORTANT:
MLB options.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 17-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: RB064015e
Symptom Corrected
Usual
CCK/
MLB
Modified to support X1325 wireless LAN cards.

(Note: Previously an error message was displayed since the software had not yet
actually been modified to support these cards).
The printer is unable to log on to the Netware server even when the Netware server
SAP setting is unchecked.
The printer is unable to access the target local Netware server (TechMail
#RE020229).
SC819 sometimes occurs when browsing devices with SmartNetMonitor for Client using
NetBEUI protocol.
_
G
B525
4114
_
F
E
_
_

newer):
firmware.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/8
Date: 16-Feb-04
Subject: Customized Adjustment for Booklet Skew
No.: RB064041
From: 2nd Tech Support Sec. Service Support Dept.

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
As a follow-up to RTB #RB064006b, please use this bulletin:

1) To further minimize booklet skew being reported from the field, even cases already
within specification, and
2) To prevent any future booklet skew
SYMPTOM
Booklet skew when using the SR860
CAUSE
The jogger fences or other stapling unit components are not aligned properly.
SOLUTION
To minimize booklet skew reported from the field and ensure future skew is prevented,
please perform all checks and adjustments mentioned in I. Check/Adjustment
Overview below.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 16-Feb-04
PAGE: 2/8
No.: RB064041
I. Check/Adjustment Overview
Even when only one type of booklet skew is reported, be sure and do the checks and
adjustments for all six items below.
Note: Since booklet skew may recur during the course of the adjustments, it may be
necessary to return to a previous step and do an adjustment again.
Symptom
1. Horizontal Folding Skew
The center folding position is not
perpendicular to the side edges.
Cause
The jogger fences are not
perpendicular to the center
folding position.
2. Vertical Folding Skew I

The center folding and stapling
positions are perpendicular to the
side edges and lined up with
each other, but are not centered
vertically.
a. The belt pawl does not lift

up the paper stack the
correct amount, causing a
vertical shift and offsetting
the folding position.
Check/Adjustment
Adjust the vertical
orientation of the jogger
fences.
# See RTB #RB064006b.
Adjust the center stapling

folding position using
SP6902 (Fold Position
Adjustment).
Adjust the position of the

belt HP sensor.
Make sure there is at least

2.3mm clearance between
the belt and HP sensor
feeler (gap shown below),
by shifting then re-securing
the feeler position.
Note: Factors that

contribute to this are the
papers curl and stiffness
(type/length).
b. Incorrect belt home
positioning causes the belt
to stop in the wrong
position, thereby placing the
stack in the wrong position
for folding.
Note: This can be caused
by deformation in the HP
sensor or pawl.
H P S ensor
P aw l
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Symptom
3. Vertical Folding Skew II
The center folding and stapling
positions are perpendicular to the
side edges, but the folding
position is shifted toward the
upper edge (stapling position
normal).
Date: 16-Feb-04
Cause
a. The jogger fences are not
parallel with one another.
Specifically, the upper ends
of the fences are pointed
inward (gap too narrow),
causing the stacks trailing
edge to fold up and shift the
actual folding position.
b. The jogger fences are

parallel to one another, but
the gap between the two is
too narrow (too tight against
the paper). This also causes
the trailing edge to fold up
and shift the actual folding
position.
PAGE: 3/8
No.: RB064041
Check/Adjustment
Check to see that the
jogger fences are parallel to
one another (Jogger
Fence Parallel Check
below), and bring them
parallel if necessary.
Check the current width of

the jogger fence gap
(Jogger Fence Gap
Check below), and if
necessary adjust the gap
using SP6120 (in the +
direction).
# See Adjusting the
Jogger Fence Gap
below.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Symptom
4. Jams with Center Stapling I
Both the center stapling and
folding positions are correct and
the paper is stacking correctly,
but the stack remains in the
stapling tray and jams.
Date: 16-Feb-04
Cause
a. The jogger fences are
parallel to one another but
the fence gap is too narrow,
or the upper ends are in
closer than the lower ends
(fences not parallel),
causing the lower area of
the stack to buckle, which
then prevents the belt pawl
from raising the stack for
folding.
PAGE: 4/8
No.: RB064041
Check/Adjustment
(Jogger Fence Gap
direction).
# See Adjusting the
Jogger Fence Gap
below.
!
Check to see that the
jogger fences are parallel to
one another (Jogger
Fence Parallel Check
below), and bring them
b. Incorrect belt home

positioning causes the belt
to stop in the wrong
position, thereby placing the
stack in the wrong position
for folding.
Note: This can be caused

by deformation in the HP
sensor or pawl.
H P Sensor
P aw l
manuals4you.com
Make sure there is at least

2.3mm clearance between
the belt and HP sensor
feeler (gap shown below),
by shifting then re-securing
the feeler position.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 5/8
Date: 16-Feb-04
Symptom
5. Jams with Center Stapling II
The center stapling position is
shifted toward the upper edge,
and there is vertical shifting within
the stack itself.
Cause
The jogger fence gap is too
narrow, causing the central
area of the stack to bulge
out when aligned and the
stack to drop into the pawls
HP trough instead of the
pawl. As a result, the pawl is
unable to raise the stack.
P aw l
No.: RB064041
Check/Adjustment
(Jogger Fence Gap
direction).
# See Adjusting the
Jogger Fence Gap
below.
H P T rough
6. Poor Stacking Within a

Booklet Stack
Sheets in the booklet stack shift,
primarily in the horizontal (shortedge) direction.
The jogger fence gap is too

wide, which prevents proper
aligning of the stacks side
edges.

(Jogger Fence Gap
using SP6120 (in the
direction).
# See Adjusting the
Jogger Fence Gap
below.
Fig. 1: The Stack in the Output and Staple Trays

I O utput Tray (
n
Top V i )
ew
I S tapl Tray (
n
e
Leadi Edge)
ng
Front
R ear
Fol ng P ostn.
di
C tr S taplng P os.
i
O
p
e
n
O utput tray
Stapl ( enter)
es C
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 16-Feb-04
PAGE: 6/8
No.: RB064041
II. Specific Procedures for Settings Checks, Adjustments

Jogger Fence Gap Check
Use the following to make sure the proper gap exists between the front and rear jogger fences.
Note: This procedure assumes that the paper fed from the tray is the same size as the original.
1. Feed one sheet into the staple tray in platen mode with center stapling.
Note: The machine will stop and remain stopped unless the # key is pressed to continue feeding,
therefore when performing the following steps be sure not to touch the operation panel.
2. Open the front door of the SR860 and slowly pull out the stapler unit.
3. Place the edge of the stack flush against the rear jogger fence (Photo 1).
Photo 1
Photo 2
4. Measure the distance between the paper contact area on the front jogger fence and the front edge of the
paper stack (Photo 2).
$ This distance should be 19mm for all paper sizes.
$ This same 19mm should be used as the reference target in cases where the jogger fence gap is
adjusted with SP6120 (procedure below).
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 16-Feb-04
PAGE: 7/8
No.: RB064041
Jogger Fence Parallel Check

Use the following to make sure the jogger fences are parallel to one another, and then if necessary, use the
procedure in RTB #RB064006b to correct this.
1. Place one A3 sheet (thick paper) in the tray, and then manually move the belt pawl so that the paper
position is raised approximately 100mm (Photo 3).
Photo 3
Photo 4
Motor Pulley
2. Place the paper flush against the rear jogger fence, then slowly close the front fence to the edge of the
paper manually by rotating the jogger motor pulley (black knob in Photo 4 above).
3. Make sure the lower area of the front jogger fence and paper stack are touching, then measure the
distance between the paper contact area on the upper area of the front jogger fence and the front edge of
the upper area of the paper stack.
$ It is essential to make the measurement on the upper area, as shown in Figure 2 below.
$ The allowable distance is 0-1mm.
R ear Fence
0 - 1m m
C orrect
Front Fence
( aper)
P
Fig. 2: Upper Area Paper-Fence Gap
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 8/8
Date: 16-Feb-04
No.: RB064041
Adjusting the Jogger Fence Gap using SP6120-001 to 011

! Paper Sizes to which the Setting is Applied
Each subdivision (-001 to 011) corresponds to a specific paper size, as shown in Table 1.
Table 1
-001
-002
-003
-004
-005
-006
-007
-008
-009
-010
-011
A3 SEF
B4SEF
A4SEF
A4LEF
B5SEF
B5LEF
DLT
LG
LT SEF
LT LEF
Other
0.5
+1.0
1.0
+2.0
1.5
+3.0
! SP Settings and Corresponding Gap Change

The following are the setting values for SP6120-001 to 011.
Table 2
SP Mode Setting (step 0.5)
Jogger Fence Gap Change (mm)
-1.5
-3.0
-1.0
-2.0
-0.5
-1.0
0
0
Note:
! As previously announced, specific firmware combinations are necessary to activate the above SP
mode. See RTB #RB064038 for details.
! This gap adjustment is applied to center stapling, and affects all jogger fence gaps for stapling and
folding operations.
! The 0.5 step cannot be changed due to structural design limitations.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 5-Mar-04
Subject: OPC Drum Change/ Drum Setting Powder
PAGE: 1/2
No.: RB064042

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
The OPC drum has been changed as follows:
Purpose of This Change

1. Changing over to environmentally-friendly materials
As of the end of February 2004, the use of the organic solvent dichloromethane for the
OPC drum production process was discontinued as part of Ricohs ongoing efforts,
through the expanding application of in-house environmental management standards, to
eliminate the use of environmentally sensitive materials in the manufacturing process.
Important Note: It is necessary to apply setting powder when installing the new
drum (!See pg. 2 below).
!
2. Increasing the drum yield
The yield of the OPC drum has been increased through a thicker surface layer.
Affected Drums and Models

To distinguish the drums from before and after this change, the drum lot numbers and
service parts numbers have been changed as follows.
1. Lot Number Change:
Old: XXXXXXXXXXXX (12 digits)
New: __L__XXXXXXXXX
Space
2. Service P/N Change:

New Drum P/N: B0709510
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 5-Mar-04
PAGE: 2/2
No.: RB064042
Important Note for Installation of the New Drum

Since the smoothness of the new drum (without dichloromethane) is reduced, it is
essential to apply the Drum Setting Powder (P/N: 54429101) to the drum surface as
shown below before installing.
Note: If the setting powder is not applied, the drums cleaning blade may turn outward,
causing a drum cleaning failure.
Drum Setting Powder Application Procedure
1. Apply the setting powder (P/N 54429101) to the drum by tapping the powder bag across
the surface area shown in the illustration below, i.e. spanning the entire length of the drum
but covering about a 45-90 degree portion (up to 1/4) of the total surface.
Note:
"
Be sure to apply enough powder to give the area a moderate dusting (so that the
area turns white).
"
If setting powder is not available, please apply waste toner in the same manner
described above (waste toner is charged and will be attracted to the drum surface).
Please note that although dirty background will have a greater tendency to occur,
be sure to apply the waste toner if there is no setting powder available.
2. Install the new drum in the OPC unit so that the powdered area (shown in black below)
faces the cleaning blade.
3. Rotate the drum once along its normal rotational direction (arrow shown below), so that
it stops again at the exact same position.
Note: Be sure not to rotate the drum in the opposite direction.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 12-Apr-04
Subject: Paper jam in the finisher exit
PAGE: 1/4
No.: RB064043

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
Paper jam in the finisher exit area when using the B468/B469.
CAUSE
Insufficient tension in the shift-transfer timing belt causes excess torque in the belts motor
when the paper passes, resulting in a motor lock and paper jam in the finisher exit section.
SOLUTION
Adjust the tension of the timing belt (P/N: AA043054).
Note: The procedure begins on the next page.
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 12-Apr-04
PAGE: 2/4
No.: RB064043
Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension

1. Remove all of the following shift-transfer section components (P/C: pg. 13).
The stay assembly

P/N:B4682861
Worm Gear
P/N:AA043054
Timing Belt
Pulley
P/N:B4685780
Stepper Motor
P/N:B4682851
Guide Plate Stay
Fig. 1
2. Remove the spring (P/N: A6971518) located in drive section 2 (P/C: pg. 41, index 12).
Fig. 2
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 12-Apr-04
PAGE: 3/4
No.: RB064043
3. Attach the spring removed above to the area shown below (one end to the motor pulley,
the other end to the edge of the stay). This spring will be used to apply the optimum
tension in the belt (63.5N/3mm).
Fig. 3
4. Loosen the two tapping screws shown below (P/N: 04513006B) and allow the belt to
settle to its new position (pulled by the spring).
Fig. 4
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 12-Apr-04
PAGE: 4/4
No.: RB064043
5. Tighten the screws while the belt is in the new position.

Note: After tightening, make sure that the motor is securely locked in place.
6. Reattach the spring and stay assembly removed in Step 1.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/5
Reissued: 4-Jun-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003h
RTB Correction

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (

B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
1.11
1.12.2
1.12.3
3.01.2
3.51
3.52
3.53
3.53.3
B179
66AF
AFC2
242A
679A
BCB9
CD84
5534
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
November Prod 02
February Prod 03
March Prod. 03
June Prod. 03
September Prod. 03
November Prod. 03
IMPORTANT

System
Software
Version
C.SUM
Production
B5254108
A
5.07
5.07.3.1
4AA6
22E3
1st Mass Prod.

May Prod. 04
Software
Version
C.SUM
Production
B5254109
A
5.07
5.07.3.1
1215
1215
1st Mass Prod.

May Prod. 04
Copy
IMPORTANT:
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/5
Reissued: 4-Jun-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003h
Symptom Corrected
SC955 sometimes occurs when printing out a Printer Document Server file
in Magazine mode if the data contains a blank page and was originally
stored with Paper Saving mode disabled in the driver settings.
SC819 sometimes occurs when capturing PCL data and sending to eCabinet
if the data contains a blank page.
RTC time is shifted slightly if any of the weekly timer setup settings are changed.
SC870 occurs when the machine recovers from Energy Saver Mode if the
#B5145970 hard drive is installed.
no effect.
CCK/
MLB:
System
A
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
A
M
M
Usual

Default: 0
Step: 0.5
001: A3
002: B4
003: A4 lengthwise
004: DLT
005: LT lengthwise
006: Other
Note:
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
its first release.
Note:
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/5
Reissued: 4-Jun-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003h
Symptom Corrected
Usual
CCK/
MLB:
System
CCK/
MLB:
Copy

_
J
B525
4108
_
B525
4109
_
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_

versions:
NIB: v3.72 or newer
New SP mode added:
Note:
BCU: v4.02 or newer
initial value of 0.
jam or other cause.
Adjustment.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/5
Reissued: 4-Jun-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003h
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
H
H
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
G
G
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
_
_
_
_
Symptom Corrected
Usual
by specification.
Energy Saver Mode.
programming screen.
the cover.
from 900 ! 800.
20.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/5
Reissued: 4-Jun-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected
15.
from 90 ! 80.
"
"
"
"
General Features.
No.: RB064003h
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
Usual
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/5
Reissued: 5-Jul-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003i
RTB Correction
The checksum for the most recent Copier firmware has been corrected (in bold
italics).

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (

B0655102
Version
C.SUM
Production
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
1.11
1.12.2
1.12.3
3.01.2
3.51
3.52
3.53
3.53.3
B179
66AF
AFC2
242A
679A
BCB9
CD84
5534
1st Mass Prod.

August Prod 02
November Prod 02
February Prod 03
March Prod. 03
June Prod. 03
September Prod. 03
November Prod. 03
IMPORTANT

System
Software
Version
C.SUM
Production
B5254108
A
5.07
5.07.3.1
4AA6
22E3
1st Mass Prod.

May Prod. 04
Software
Version
C.SUM
Production
B5254109
5.07
1215
1st Mass Prod.
5.07.3.1
944B
May Prod. 04
Copy
IMPORTANT:
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/5
Reissued: 5-Jul-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003i
Symptom Corrected
SC955 sometimes occurs when printing out a Printer Document Server file
in Magazine mode if the data contains a blank page and was originally
stored with Paper Saving mode disabled in the driver settings.
SC819 sometimes occurs when capturing PCL data and sending to eCabinet
if the data contains a blank page.
RTC time is shifted slightly if any of the weekly timer setup settings are changed.
SC870 occurs when the machine recovers from Energy Saver Mode if the
#B5145970 hard drive is installed.
no effect.
Usual
CCK/
MLB:
System
A
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
A
M
M

Default: 0
Step: 0.5
001: A3
002: B4
003: A4 lengthwise
004: DLT
005: LT lengthwise
006: Other
Note:
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
its first release.
Note:
2. SR850/860 ROM #B4685131 or later.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/5
Reissued: 5-Jul-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003i
Symptom Corrected
Usual
CCK/
MLB:
System
CCK/
MLB:
Copy

_
J
B525
4108
_
B525
4109
_
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
_
_
_
_
J
J
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_

versions:
NIB: v3.72 or newer
New SP mode added:
Note:
BCU: v4.02 or newer
initial value of 0.
jam or other cause.
Adjustment.
The size of the window for User Tools
System Settings
SSID was incorrect.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/5
Reissued: 5-Jul-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
No.: RB064003i
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
H
H
H
_
_
_
_
_
_
H
H
_
_
_
_
G
G
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
F
_
_
_
_
_
_
F
F
_
_
_
_
Symptom Corrected
Usual
If the virtual keyboard is displayed inside User Tools

System Settings
SSID
by specification.
Energy Saver Mode.
programming screen.
the cover.
SP2912-001 (Drum Reverse Rotation, Rotation Amount) default value changed from 2
3, setting range changed from 0-10
1-3.
SP2210 (ID Sensor Pattern Interval) default value changed from 10
100.
from 900
800.
SP2931/2/3/4/5/6-001 (Transfer Current On/Off Timing) default value changed from 0
20.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/5
Reissued: 5-Jul-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Sep-02
Symptom Corrected
SP2931/2/3/4/5/6-002 (Transfer Current On/Off Timing) default value changed from 0

15.
from 90
80.
General Features.
manuals4you.com
No.: RB064003i
CCK/
MLB:
System
_
CCK/
MLB:
Copy
_
Usual
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/2
Date: 7-Sep-04
Subject: Finisher Jam Code
No.: RB064044

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
This bulletin announces the finisher jam codes, locations and related SC codes for
finishers used with the MT-C1.
Note: These codes appear on the SMC report and in SP7504.
Finisher B469 (SR850) Jam Codes
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
109
110
111
112
113
115
116
Location
Entrance Sensor
Exit Sensor
Stapler Unit 1
Shift Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Stapler Unit 2
Feed Out Belt Motor
Punch Hole Motor
Related SC Code
SC733
SC722
SC732, SC736
SC727, SC730
SC724
SC725
SC729

No.
Location
121
Entrance Sensor
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
Exit Sensor
Stapler Unit 1
Shift Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Related SC Code
SC733, SC726
SC722
SC732, SC736
SC727, SC730
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
No.
133
Date: 7-Sep-04
Stapler Unit 2
134
135
136
PAGE: 2/2
Location
Folder Plate Motor

Feed Out Belt Motor
Punch Hole Motor
No.: RB064044
Related SC Code
SC724, SC728, SC740,
SC741
SC739
SC725
SC729

No.
141
142
143
144
145
148
149
150
151
153
155
156
Location
Entrance Sensor
Exit Sensor
Shift Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Stapler Unit
Feed Out Belt Motor
Punch Hole Motor
Related SC Code
SC733, SC726
SC722
SC732, SC736
SC724, SC738, SC740, SC741
SC725
SC729
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Sep-04
Subject: SC670
PAGE: 1/3
No.: RB064045

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Classification:
Electrical
Transmit/receive
Paper path
Other (
SYMPTOM
The "Please Wait" message is not cleared, and SC670 (engine start up error ) shows at
main power on.
CAUSE
Soldering error with the IC104 circuit pattern on the IPU board (P/N B1105140).
The solder was changed from April 15 to a chrome-free, environmentally friendly material.
However, this material did not adhere to the board as well as the previous solder. This was
changed again from June 3rd to another chrome-free, environmentally friendly material.
Note: The symptom described above is limited to IC104, because its unique shape
requires unique soldering conditions compared to other IC elements on the board.
SOLUTION
Replace the IPU board with P/N B1105140.
Note: You cannot modify existing boards.
Please contact Ricoh subsidiaries for the replacement part.
Subjective units:
Please see the attached sheet for the serial numbers of the production unit that have a
possibility of the soldering error IPU. (The error ratio is approximately 4%)
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Sep-04
PAGE: 2/3
No.: RB064045
Serial Numbers of the machines

Model
EDP
Good Machines
B064-22
411166
J4240400165
Potentially Affected Machines

J4240400343J4240400405,
Good Machines
J4240600032
J4240400500J4240400525,
J4240400616J4240400625,
J4240500059J4240500099,
J4240500387J4240500428,
J4240500455J4240500503,
J4240500564J4240500572,
J4240600019J4240600031
B064-24
411168
B064-26
411167
L1284040036
L1284050001L1284050061,
L1284060051
L1284060001L1284060050
7P10440060
7P105400017P10540070,
7P10640051
7P106400017P10640050
B064-27
411161
J4240400282
4240400406J4240400499,
J4240600072
J4240400526J4240400615,
J4240400626J4240400635,
J4240500001J4240500043,
J4240500100J4240500237,
J4240500429J4240500454,
J4240500504J4240500563,
J4240500573J4240500675
B064-29
411162
J4240400064
J4240500238J4240500262,
J4240600177
J4240500273J4240500368
B065-22
411175
J4340300126
J4340500016J4340500106
J4340600006
B065-24
411177
L1294040042
L1294050001L1294050048,
L1294060035
B065-26
411176
L1294060001L1294060034
7P20440015
7P205400017P20540010,
7P20640011
7P206400017P20640010
B065-27
411170
J4340400223
J4340400224J4340400335,
J4340500107J4340500334,
J4340500404J4340500405
manuals4you.com
J4340600116
Technical Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 9-Sep-04
PAGE: 3/3
No.: RB064045
Martini-C1 IPU Board (P/N:B1105140)

IPU Board
IC104
Serial Number
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 1/18
Updated: 15th September 2004: Changes in bold italics

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
Subject: Troubleshooting
No.: RB064000e
Prepared by: S.Watanabe

Troubleshooting
Part information
Action required
Mechanical
Electrical
Paper path
Classification:
Transmit/receive
Other (
This bulletin is a troubleshooting guide for symptoms that have occurred in the past, all
with known solutions. For most items below, there are related MBs and RTBs containing
modification details and adjustment procedures.
Note: This RTB is numbered 000 since the information contained in it has already been
announced.
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 2/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
Troubleshooting for Martini-C1

Table of contents
1. Image Quality.....................................................................................4
Black Lines
Image Problems
Dirty Image
Dirty Background
Toner Scattering
Poor Fusing
Offset Image
Blank page in duplex mode
2. Jamming ............................................................................................5
Jamming
Tandem Tray
Exit Roller
Fusing Unit
3. Noise ..................................................................................................5
Cleaning Brush Gear
Toner Supply Unit
Toner Supply Case
4. Skew ...................................................................................................6
Tandem Tray
5. Operation Panel.................................................................................6
Translation Error
Display Error (Touch Screen Calibration)
Display Error (Document Server)
Waiting Display
Job Name Not Displayed
Blank screen
Display error (Korean)
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 3/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
6. SC ....................................................................................................... 7
181/183
310/335/337/345
441
501/502/503/541/542/544/550/590
620/670
819/870
925/955/990
7. Cover Interposer ............................................................................... 9
Side Guide Plate Damage
8. Finisher ..............................................................................................10
Wrong Stapling
Screw detaches
Jamming
Booklet Skew
Paper Damaged
Wrinkling
Punch Full Message
9. Printer.................................................................................................13
10. Scanner ..............................................................................................15
11. Wireless LAN .....................................................................................16
Communication Error
No Function
AP MAC Address Displayed
X1325 Wireless LAN cards
12. File Format Converter .......................................................................16
13. Network ..............................................................................................16
Netware server
14. Other...................................................................................................17
Weekly Timer
Job Deleted
Duplex Error
Developer Carrier Scattering
Transfer Belt Damage
Toner Spill
Loose Drum Shaft Screw
Pinched Web Drive Motor Harness
Oil Web Unravels
Real time clock
15. Notes when upgrading firmware......................................................18
Upgrading BCU firmware
Upgrading GW firmware
Upgrading scanner firmware
Machines with and without the Copy Connector Kit or MLB option installed
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 4/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
1. Image Quality
Subject
Black Line
Symptom
Black line appears when
using ADF (front side, along
feed direction).
RTB #
001
003
004
Cause
Dirty DF
exposure glass
Black Line
With DF 2-sided scanning,

the edge of the original is
sometimes visible on the rear
side of the copy when the
image is shifted by Create
Margin for stapling.
Black lines appear when
running a job of 1 to 30 or
more (a while after
installation).
004
BCU software
bug
Solution
- Install the latest
BCU/GW/LCDC firmware.
- Advise the customer to
clean the DF exposure
glass when black lines
appear on the front side
along the feed direction.
Set SP4999-001 to 1 (ON)
if the customer requires
this, which will activate an
alert message for DF
glass cleaning.
Install the latest BCU
firmware.
035
Image problem occurs when

using Magazine Copy
together with Margin
Adjustment.
When copying originals for
reduction through the DF with
nearly 100% image area
coverage, part of the trailing
edge shows dirtying.
Dirty background occurs.
003
Toner/paper
dust that
accumulates
on the blade
edge.
GW controller
software bug
- Replace with the Mojito

drum and SP5 cleaning
brush.
- Remove the cleaning
blade release mechanism.
Install the latest GW
controller firmware.
004
BCU software
bug

firmware.
035

brush.
Toner
Scattering
Toner scattering occurs.
035
Toner
Scattering
Toner scattering occurs.
Poor Fusing
or Offset
Image
Poor fusing occurs around a

few months after installation.
PCU brush
roller gear
damage due to
the cleaning
blade release
mechanism.
PCU brush
roller gear
damage due to
the cleaning
blade release
mechanism.
Cleaning brush
has reached its
lifetime.
Surface layer
of the fusing
roller peels off.
Black Line
Image
Problem
Dirty Image
Dirty
Background
Note
Ver.
3.14e or
later
Ver.
3.01.2 or
later
Ver.
3.16b or
later
- Replace the drum and

cleaning brush.
Replace the cleaning
brush.
PM parts
Replace the hot roller.
B064
MB46
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 5/18

Model: Martini-C1
Subject
Blank page
in duplex
mode
Date: 26-Jun-03
Symptom
The rear side of the last sheet
comes out blank when feeding
A4 sheets from the bypass tray
in duplex mode.
RTB #
03f
Cause
GW software
bug
No.: RB064000e
Solution
firmware.
Note
Ver 3.53 or
later
2. Jamming
Subject
Jamming
Symptom
Jam codes 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10,
12, 53, 54, 55, 58, 59, 60
RTB #
020
Tandem
Tray
Exit
Roller
Jamming occurs when

feeding Tandem Tray.
Jamming occurs at exit
section.
Fusing
Unit
Jamming occurs at fusing

unit.
By-pass
Paper set in the bypass tray

is fed along with the paper
selected, causing a jam.
039
Subject
Cleaning
Brush
Gear
Symptom
Noise from the PCU brush
roller gear.
RTB #
035
Toner
Supply
Unit
Noise generated due to

damaged toner supply unit
gears.
014
021
Toner
Supply
Case
Noise is heard from the

Toner Supply Case.
032
Cause
1. Wrong
material used
for paper feed
roller on prod.
line.
2. Incorrect belt
tension (paper
feed unit).
3. PFU gear
failure.
PFC board
failure
Wrong position
of plastic rollers
Surface layer
of the fusing
roller peels off.
Bypass feed
roller rotates
even though
bypass tray is
not selected.
Solution
1. Replace the rollers.
2. Adjust the tension of
the belt.
3. Replace the gears.
Note
Replace PFC board.
B064 MB30
Do not insert (lock)

plastic rollers into rubber
exit roller.
Replace the hot roller.
B064 MB19
B064 MB46
Add Feed Lever

(B0656445).
3. Noise
Cause
PCU brush
roller gear
damage due to
the cleaning
blade release
mechanism.
Poor toner
transportation
in the Toner
Transport Coil.
The agitator in
the toner
supply case is
deformed.
Solution
brush.
- Remove the cleaning blade
release mechanism.
Replace toner supply unit
and waste toner vertical
transport unit, and remove
the steel ball.
Replace the toner supply
case.
manuals4you.com
Note
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 6/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
4. Skew
Subject
Tandem
Tray
Symptom
Skewing occurs when
feeding from the Tandem
Tray.
RTB #
Cause
PFC board
failure
Solution
Replace the PFC board.
Note
B064 MB30
Cause
Translation
error
(language
firmware)
LCDC
software bug
Solution
Install the latest language
firmware.
Install the latest LCDC
firmware.
Ver. 1.13
or later
5. Operation Panel
Subject
Translation
Error
Symptom
Translation error
RTB #
001
Display
Error
(Touch
Screen
Calibration)
Display
Error
(Document
Server)
A display error occurs if

the Reset key is pressed
while performing touch
screen calibration.
001
The filename of a
Document Server file
appears garbled on the
document delete screen if
the name is written in
Chinese.
The "Waiting" display
sometimes does not clear
when the machine
recovers from Energy
Saver Mode.
The job name is not
displayed on the LCD
panel, and the job is not
listed in the job history
with PCL5e/PCL6 printing,
Blank screen when 70 or
more scan-to-emails are
sent since the last power
ON with the mainframe
POP3 Encryption set to
Auto Select.
Display error with
operation panel keyboard
(Korean display
language).
003
GW controller
software bug

Ver. 3.51
or later
003
GW controller
software bug

Ver.
3.01.2 or
later
017
Printer
software bug
Install the latest printer

firmware.
Ver. 1.07
or later
017e
Scanner
software bug
Install the latest scanner

firmware.
Ver. 2.14
or later
017e
Scanner
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 2.14
or later
Waiting
Display
Not
Displayed
Job Name
Blank
screen
Display
error
(Korean)
Note
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 7/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
6. SC
Subject
SC181
SC181
SC183
SC310
SC541
SC335
SC337
Symptom
SC181 occurs when the DF
is opened and the main
power is turned on with a
specific timing.
SC181 or SC183 occurs.
SC441
SC310 and SC541 occur at

the same time.
SC335/337 occur when BCU
board warm-up is performed
with a specific timing.
SC345 occurs during the
initial paper feed just after the
main power is turned on, or
at the end of a job while the
ID sensor pattern is being
created.
SC441 occurs.
SC441
SC590
SC550 occurs when installing

BCU firmware Ver. 3.14e or
later.
SC550 (Web End) occurs
prematurely.
SC590 occurs.
SC620
Immediately after you turn

the main power on; Please
Wait stays on the display
Note
Ver. 3.16b
or later
CIS failure
Replace the CIS.
Dirty potential
sensor
BCU software
bug
Clean the potential sensor

firmware.
B064
MB14
RTB will be
issued.
Ver. 3.16b
or later
004
BCU software
bug

firmware.
Ver. 3.14e
or later
021
Waste toner
lock

the steel ball.
Replace the development
drive motor.
B064
MB47
SC620 occurs.
SC670
Solution
firmware.
SC501, 502, or 503 occurs.
SC550
Cause
BCU software
bug
SC441 occurs at installation.
SC501
SC502
SC503
SC542
SC544
RTB #
004
SC345
SC550
004
Development
drive motor
failure
PFC board
failure
SC542/544 occurs.
004
009
016
004
033
021
Middle
thermistor
failure.
BCU software
bug
BCU software
bug
Waste toner
lock
Finisher
software bug.
045
Soldering
error on the
IPU board
Replace PFC board.
B064
MB30
Replace the middle

thermistor.
B064
MB41
Replace the web.
Ver. 3.14e
or later

firmware.
the steel ball.
Replace with the latest
finisher ROM (B4685132 or
later).
Replace the IPU board
with P/N B1105140. You
cannot modify existing
boards.
Ver. 4.02a
or later
manuals4you.com
B468
MB24
See the
RTB for
serial
numbers
of affected
machines.
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 8/18

Model: Martini-C1
Subject
SC819
SC819
SC870
SC870
SC925
SC955
SC955
SC990
SC990
SC990
SC990
Symptom
SC819 occurs if "Continue to
Program" is performed 196
times in the address book
programming screen.
When capturing PCL data
and sending to eCabinet, if
the data contains a blank
page.
Date: 26-Jun-03
RTB #
003
No.: RB064000e
003h
Solution
Install the latest NIB/Netfile
firmware
Note
Ver. 1.12.2
or later
RTB 15d
for details.
Ver.
5.07.3.1 or
later
Only for
machines with
the Copy
Connector Kit
or MLB option
installed
GW controller
software bug

Ver. 1.12.2
or later
GW controller
software bug

Ver. 3.53.3
or later
HDD failure
015d
Cause
GW controller
software bug
NIB/Netfile
software bug
GW controller
software bug
HDD will
be
modified.
SC870 occurs after multiple

groups are selected and
assigned a number in the
address book programming
screen.
Occurs when the machine
leaves Energy Saver Mode if
the #B5145970 hard drive is
installed.
SC925 occurs when
installing.
003
SC995 (Memory Setting

Error) occurs with large print
jobs (approx. 1,500 sheets).
When printing out a Printer
Document Server file in
Magazine mode, if the data
contains a blank page and
was originally stored with
Paper Saving mode disabled
in the driver settings.
004
BCU software
bug
1. Perform the HDD

formatting (SP5832)
2. If unsuccessful, replace
the HDD.
firmware.
003h
GW controller
software bug

Ver.
5.07.3.1 or
later
SC990 occurs during a print

job if 100 sheets is specified
for Desig/Chapter.
SC990 occurs when cover
sheets are added at the end
of a sample copy trial and the
job is initiated.
SC990 occurs if performing
continuous print jobs using
the LPR port when network
traffic is high.
SC990 occurs if the signal
timing during scanning and
printing causes a delay in the
scanning process.
003
Only for
machines with
the Copy
Connector Kit
or MLB option
installed
GW controller
software bug

Ver. 3.51
or later
003
GW controller
software bug

Ver. 3.01.2
or later
003
GW controller
software bug

Ver. 3.01.2
or later
003
GW controller
software bug

Ver. 1.12.2
or later
003g
Ver. 4.02a
or later
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 9/18

Model: Martini-C1
Subject
SC990
SC990
SC990
SC990
SC990
SC990
SC990
SC990
Symptom
Sometimes occurs with
simplex originals
duplex
copies when a jam occurs
SC990 occurs with jobs using
Stapling.
SC990 occurs at power ON.
SC990 occurs with
continuous LPR print jobs
sent from a Windows NT
station.
Finisher does not stop then
SC990 occurs.
A transmission error occurs
during fragmented mail
transmission, followed by a
connection error on the first
retry. then SC990 (should not
be displayed) on the second
retry.
Finisher does not stop then
SC990 occurs.
70 or more scan-to-emails
are sent since the last power
ON with the mainframe POP3
Encryption set to Auto Select.
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
RTB #
004
Cause
BCU software
bug
Solution
firmware.
Note
Ver. 4.02
or later
004
BCU software
bug
BCU software
bug
NIB software
bug

firmware.
firmware.
Install the latest NIB
firmware.
Ver. 4.01
or later
Ver. 3.14e
or later
Ver. 3.56
or later
Finisher
software bug.
Scanner
software bug
Replace the latest finisher

ROM (B4685131 or later).
firmware.
B468
MB24
Ver. 1.20
or later
Finisher
software bug.
Scanner
software bug
Replace the latest finisher

ROM (B4685131 or later).
firmware.
B468
MB24
Ver. 2.14
or later
Cause
Shock when
finisher is
docked to
mainframe.
Solution
Replace the side guide
plate.
Note
The side
guide plate
will be
changed.
004
015
017
017e
7. Cover Interposer
Subject
Side
Guide
Plate
Damage
Symptom
Side guide plate is damaged
when installing the finisher
with cover interposer tray.
RTB #
012
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 10/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
8. Finisher
Subject
Wrong
Stapling
Symptom
When a 1-page, nonstapling printing job is
sent in between two
stapling jobs, it is stapled
along with the following
(2nd stapling) job.
The screw for the slide rail
bracket comes loose or
detaches.
Jamming occurs under
the following conditions:
- LT LEF
- Punching
- Shift mode
Jamming occurs under
the following conditions:
- LT LEF
- Punching
- 75cpm machine
- Proof tray exit
Jamming (side effect of a
previous modification).
RTB #
004
Cause
BCU software bug
Solution
firmware.
005
Vibration during
transport
Re-attach the screw.
Finisher software
bug.

finisher ROM (B4685124
or later).
B468 MB6
Finisher software
bug.

or later).
B468 MB6
Finisher software
bug.
B468 MB6
Jamming
Paper jam in the finisher

exit area when using the
B468/B469.
043

or later).
Adjust the tension of the
timing belt (P/N:
AA043054).
Booklet
Skew
Booklet skew when using

the B468 finisher.
006b
Adjust the jogger fence

position.
Change to the new type
of jogger fence that does
not deform with heat.
New jogger
fence: B468
MB28a
Booklet
skew

the B468 finisher: The
center folding position is
not perpendicular to the
side edges.
041
Adjust the vertical

orientation of the jogger
fences.
RTB 006b
Screw
detaches
Jamming
Jamming
Jamming
Insufficient
tension in the
guide plate motor
timing belt
1. The front and
rear jogger fences
are not parallel.
2. The paper is
not transported
straight.
3. The jogger
fences are too
close or too far
from the paper
edges, and the
paper is not fed
out of the booklet
maker straight.
4. The jogger
fences are bent.
The jogger fences
are not
perpendicular to
the center folding
position.
Note
Ver. 3.16b or
later
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 11/18

Model: Martini-C1
Subject
Booklet
skew
Booklet
skew
Booklet
skew
Booklet
skew
Date: 26-Jun-03
Symptom
center folding and stapling
positions are
perpendicular to the side
edges and lined up with
each other, but are not
centered vertically.
RTB #
041

center folding and stapling
positions are
perpendicular to the side
edges, but the folding
position is shifted toward
the upper edge (stapling
position normal).
041

the B468 finisher: Both
the center stapling and
folding positions are
correct and the paper is
stacking correctly, but the
stack remains in the
stapling tray and jams.
041

center stapling position is
shifted toward the upper
edge, and there is vertical
shifting within the stack
itself.
041
Cause
The belt pawl
does not lift up the
paper stack the
correct amount
Incorrect belt
home positioning,
so the belt stops
in the wrong
position
The jogger fences
are not parallel
with one another.
Specifically, the
upper ends of the
fences are
pointed inward
(gap too narrow).
The jogger fences
are parallel to one
another, but the
gap between the
two is too narrow
(too tight against
the paper).
The jogger fences
are parallel to one
another but the
fence gap is too
narrow, or the
upper ends are in
closer than the
lower ends
(fences not
parallel).
Incorrect belt
home positioning
causes the belt to
stop in the wrong
position
The jogger fence
gap is too narrow,
causing the
central area of the
stack to bulge out
when aligned.
No.: RB064000e
Solution
Adjust the center stapling
folding position using
SP6902 (Fold Position
Adjustment).
Adjust the position of the
belt HP sensor.
Make sure there is at
least 2.3mm clearance
between the belt and HP
sensor feeler.
Check if the jogger
fences are parallel to
one another. Make them
Note
Also see
RTB 006b
Check the current width

of the jogger fence gap,
and if necessary adjust
the gap using SP6120
(in the + direction).
Check if the jogger
fences are parallel to
one another. Make them
Make sure there is at
least 2.3mm clearance
between the belt and HP
sensor feeler.
manuals4you.com
Also see
RTB 006b
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 12/18

Model: Martini-C1
Subject
Booklet
skew
Paper
Damaged
Wrinkling
Punch
Full
Message
Symptom
the B468 finisher: Poor
Stacking Within a Booklet
Stack
Sheets in the booklet
stack shift, primarily in the
horizontal (short-edge)
direction.
The center of the paper
edge is damaged during
2-spot stapling.
Wrinkling occurs near by
saddle-stitch area.
The "Hole punch
receptacle is full"
message is displayed
when the punch unit is not
installed and the client PC
is using SmartNet Monitor
for Admin on a
Win98/2000 platform.
Date: 26-Jun-03
RTB #
041
No.: RB064000e
Cause
The jogger fence
gap is too wide,
which prevents
proper aligning of
the stacks side
edges.
Solution
(in the direction).
Finisher software
bug.

or later).
or later).
or later).
Finisher software
bug.
Finisher software
bug.
Note
B468 MB6
B468 MB12
B468 MB12
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 13/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
9. Printer
Subject
Sample
Print Error
Barcodes
Error
Duplex
Error
CAD Error
Duplex
Error
Duplex
Error
Cover
Sheet
Mixed
Binding
Error
Chinese
Fonts Error
Overlapped
Characters
Stop
Printing
Form Lines
Setting
Slow
Printing
Resetting
Job
Message
Symptom
Sample Prints are not
shifted when printed out to
the shift tray.
Barcodes are shifted when
printed out.
Duplex face settings
(front/rear) not applied
correctly when specified
with PCL commands.
CAD files not printed out
correctly.
Duplex printing does not
function.
The printing orientation is in
reverse after changing back
from landscape to portrait
with duplex jobs containing
mixed printing orientations.
The paper is not
stapled/punched as
expected when specifying
Front and Back Cover
Sheet.
The function that the mixed
binding orientations with
duplex jobs using cover
sheets is not worked
correctly.
Some Chinese fonts do not
print out correctly.
Some characters overlap
with Booklet printing.
Printing stops with files sent
from INFCO.
The Form Lines setting
(PCL menu) is changed
when the machine is
rebooted.
When performing forced
print/error skip printing with
the PCL, a delay occurs
when printing out each
page, slowing down the
printing speed markedly.
If the host cancels the
spool-printing job of a large
file (10MB or more) while it
is being printed out, the
display reads, Resetting
job and does not change.
RTB
017
Cause
Printer
software bug
Solution
firmware.
Note
Ver. 1.11
or later
017
Printer
software bug
Printer
software bug

firmware.
firmware.
Ver. 1.11
or later
Ver. 1.10
or later
Printer
software bug
Printer
software bug
Printer
software bug

firmware.
firmware.
firmware.
Ver. 1.10
or later
Ver. 1.10
or later
Ver. 1.09
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.09
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.09
or later
017
Printer
software bug
Printer
software bug
Printer
software bug
Printer
software bug

firmware.
firmware.
firmware.
firmware.
Ver. 1.09
or later
Ver. 1.09
or later
Ver. 1.09
or later
Ver. 1.08
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.08
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.07
or later
017
026
017
017
017
017
017
017
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 14/18

Model: Martini-C1
Subject
Alert When
Printing Bypass Tray
Wrong
Punch
Position
Waiting
Display
Continuous
Printing
Current Job
is Canceled
Bold Not
Function
Slow
Printing
CAD Error
Lost
Extended
A4 Width
Menu
Stall
Euro
Symbol is
not Printed
Short Black
Lines
Text
Characters
Printing or
Waiting
Symptom
An alert is displayed and
does not clear if a slip-sheet
size different from the original
is specified (Bypass Tray
printing).
4 holes are punched in the
left side when specifying 4
holes to be punched in the
right side of the paper.
Waiting is displayed even
after the I/F switching time
has been reached when
sending with Centro.
The machine continues
printing if Clear is pressed
on the error clear alert.
Only the current job is
canceled when using job
cancel while printing out
multiple jobs with locked
printing (all other jobs are
printed out).
Bold does not work with
some True Type fonts.
Slow printing from AutoCAD.
Same line width when
bitSW3 #3 is ON in CAD
printer.
The Orientation, Edge to
Edge Print and Extend A4
Width menu settings are lost
when the power is turned
Off/On (not saved in
NARAM), and are returned to
their defaults.
Stall occurs when there is
little memory installed (PCL).
Euro currency symbol is not
printed.
Short lines may appear
around text characters when
using bold fonts.
Text characters appear too
thick with some bolded fonts,
removing the fine detail.
Data In (Buffer) Light keeps
blinking, machine indicates
"Printing" or "Waiting" but
nothing prints.
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
RTB
017
Cause
Printer
software bug
Solution
firmware.
Note
Ver. 1.07
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.07
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.07
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.07
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.07
or later
017
Printer
software bug
Printer
software bug
Printer
software bug

firmware.
firmware.
firmware.
Ver. 1.07
or later
Ver. 1.07
or later
Ver. 1.07
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.07
or later
017
Printer
software bug
Printer
software bug

firmware.
firmware.
Ver. 1.06
or later
Ver. 1.06
or later
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.06
or later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.06
or later
022
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.09
or later
017
017
017
Gen.
011
017
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 15/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
Subject
No Function
Symptom
Printer does not function.
RTB
008
SNMP error
SNMP trap not sent when an

SC occurs
017e
Cause
Wrong
installation
Printer
software bug
No.: RB064000e
Solution
1. Replace GW controller.
2. Install the DIMM correctly.
firmware.
Note
Ver. 1.13
or later
10. Scanner
Subject
Start Key
Standby
Condition
not
cleared
Cleared
Scanner
History
No Paper
Message
Stop Key
not
working
Memory
Leak
No
Function
Scanner
freezes
Garbled
report
Symptom
The Start key standby
condition (machine waiting to
scan second side of original)
cannot be cleared if the
number of sheets specified
for scanning is 1.
The job for the scanner
history report is cleared when
the machine switches over to
Night Mode while printing.
No paper in the bypass tray
is displayed if there is no
paper in the LCT while
printing out the scanner
history.
The Stop key cannot be used
with re-forwarding mode.
RTB #
017
Cause
Scanner
software bug
Solution
firmware.
Note
Ver. 1.20
or later
017
Scanner
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.20
or later
017
Scanner
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.20
or later
017
Scanner
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.20
or later
Memory leak occurs after

repeatedly canceling
documents in standby for
forwarding.
Printer and/or Scanner does
not function.
017
Scanner
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.20
or later
008
Installation
error
Scanner sometimes freezes

when an email address is 123
characters or longer.
Garbled text when printing out
SP5990-23 report (Scanner
User Program).
017e
Scanner
software bug
1. Replace GW controller.
2. Be sure to install the
DIMM correctly.
firmware.
Ver. 2.14
or later
017e
Scanner
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 2.14
or later
manuals4you.com
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 16/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
11. Wireless LAN

Subject
Communication
Error
No
Function
AP MAC
Address is
Displayed
X1325
wireless
LAN cards
Symptom
Wireless LAN
communication error when
using 802.11 adhoc mode.
The "Wireless LAN Signal"
(Interface Settings)
sometimes does not
function.
The AP MAC address is
displayed even when the
wireless LAN is set for
Adhoc mode.
Error message displayed
RTB #
003
030
Cause
GW controller
software bug
Solution
Note
Ver. 3.51
or later
003
GW controller
software bug

Ver.
3.01.2 or
later
017
Printer
software bug

firmware.
Ver. 1.07
or later
015e
NIB/NetFile
software
Install the latest NIB/NetFile

software
Ver. 3.74
or later
040
DeskTopBinder
V2 Lite/Pro
must be
version 3.0.0.0.
or later
Install the correct version of

DeskTopBinder V2
Lite/Professional
RTB #
015e
Cause
NIB/NetFile
software
Solution
Install the latest NIB/NetFile
software
12. File Format Converter

Not
enough
memory
Insufficient Memory Error is

displayed.
13. Network
Subject
Netware
server
Symptom
Cannot access or log on
Note
Ver. 3.74
or later
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 17/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
14. Other
Subject
Weekly
Timer
Symptom
Weekly Timer does not
function unless the Auto Off
timer expires first.
Job
Reserved jobs are
Deleted
sometimes deleted when the
current copy job is halted by
a jam or other cause.
Duplex
When making duplex copies
Error
from the exposure glass,
sometimes both the front and
rear sides come out as the
front side of the original.
Developer Developer carrier scattering.
Carrier
Scattering
The transfer belt moves,
Transfer
contacting and sometimes
Belt
damaging the edge of the
Damage
transfer belt unit.
RTB #
003
Cause
GW controller
software bug
Solution
Note
Ver. 3.51
or later
003
GW controller
software bug

Ver.
3.01.2 or
later
004
BCU software
bug

firmware.
Ver.
3.14e or
later
004
BCU software
bug

firmware.
Ver.
3.14e or
later
007
031
Incorrect gap
between the
positioning
plate securing
the transfer
belt unit and
right edge of
the machine
frame.
1. Waste Toner
Clog.
2. The Development filter
was not set
correctly.
1. Boss
attachment
error.
2. Incorrect
torque driver
used during
production.
Harness was
led incorrectly
during factory
assembly.
Adjust the side plate

position.
Factory
assembly error.
GW controller
software bug
Toner
Spill
Toner spill from the

development filter.
014
018
Loose
Drum
Shaft
Screw
Loose screw on drum shaft.
027
Pinched
Web
Drive
Motor
Harness
Oil Web
Unravels
Real time
clock
The Web Drive Motor

Harness is pinched.
029
Oil Web unravels
034
Real time clock time is

shifted slightly if any of the
weekly timer setup settings
are changed.
003g
1. Replace toner supply unit

the steel ball.
2. Install the Filter Plate.
Re-attach the boss.
N.A. only
Leading the harness

correctly.
N.A. only
Setting the ratchet in the

correct position.
N.A. only
manuals4you.com
Ver.
3.53.3 or
later
Technical Bulletin
PAGE: 18/18

Model: Martini-C1
Date: 26-Jun-03
No.: RB064000e
15. Notes when installing new firmware

Subject
Upgrading BCU
firmware
Upgrading BCU
firmware
Upgrading GW
firmware
Upgrading GW
firmware
Upgrading
scanner firmware
Upgrading
scanner firmware
Machines with
and without the
Copy Connector
Kit or MLB option
Details
With BCU firmware ver 4.x or later, please use GW firmware
ver 3.x or later.
With BCU firmware ver 4.01 or later, please use GW firmware
ver 3.01.2 or later.
With GW firmware ver 3.x or later, please use BCU firmware
ver 4.x or later.
With GW firmware ver 3.01.2 or later, please use BCU
firmware ver 4.02a or later.
When installing Scanner Version 2.08 or later, it is necessary
to install the following GW controller and NIB firmware:
NIB: V3.72 or later
When installing Scanner Version 2.14 or later, it is necessary
to install the following GW controller and NIB firmware:
NIB: V3.72 or later
With the Copy Connector/MLB modifications, the machine
firmware (BCU, GW, NIB/Netfile, LCDC, Printer/Scanner) has
been divided into 2 main groups:
1) The usual firmware used up to the present, i.e. for
machines without the Copy Connector or MLB options.
2) The Copy Connector/MLB group, i.e. for machines with the
Firmware from these two groups cannot be used
interchangeably. Always update within the same group, or the
machine will not operate correctly.
RTB
028
004c
028
003c
033a
017c
017e
001e
Note
Modification Bulletin
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/3
Date: 17-Oct-02
Modified Article: Parts Catalog Correction
No.: MB064001

Parts catalog correction
Vendor change
To facilitate assembly
To improve reliability
Part standardization
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Please correct your Parts Catalogs as follows:

Page 19
Description change:
Part
number
B0651406
B0651404
B0651416
Old description
New description
Operation Panel Assy - LT

Operation Panel Assy - A4
(CHN9
Operation Panel Assy - A4 (EU)

Operation Panel Assy - LT
(CHN)
Page 64
Illustration change:
Page 65
Deletion:
Part
number
B0656328
Description
Reverse Bracket
Index Note
28
manuals4you.com
Index Note
1
1
1
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Oct-02
Page 125
Part number change:
Old part
number
New part
number
Description
04513006B
03603006B
Index Note
Screw - M3X6
109
Part number addition, index change (only in 3 places circled below):

Part
number
03603008B
Description
Screw - M3X8
Old New Note

index index
101
113
PAGE: 2/3
No.: MB064001
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Oct-02
Page 126
Illustration change:
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 3/3
No.: MB064001
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 29-Oct-02
Modified Article: ADF Unit
No.: MB064002

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Please add the following part to your Parts Catalog:

New part
number
B0657001
Description
ADF Unit
Qty
1
Page Index Note

21
12
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 22-Nov-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 21-Nov-02
No.: MB064003a
MB Correction

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Please correct your Parts Catalogs as follows.

Index correction:
Index #33 in the lower half of the illustration below should be corrected to #44.
Note: Index #33 in the upper half of the illustration is correct, and should be left as is.
Part number
B0653633
Description
Transport Screw
Old
Index
33
(Lower)
manuals4you.com
New Page Qty

Index
44
123
Note
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 22-Nov-02
Modified Article: NVRAM
No.: MB064004

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The description of the NVRAM has been changed as follows:

Part
number
B0649099
Old description
Total Counter
New description
Qty Page Index Note

1
127
33
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 28-Nov-02
Modified Article: Pick-off Pawl
No.: MB064005

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
As the edge of the Pick-off Pawl can be damaged during transport, causing paper jams in
the PCU section, a protective plastic covering has been added to this area.
Old part
number
New part
number
AD025023
AD025024
Description
Pick-off Pawl
Qty
Int
O/O
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

89
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/2
Date: 28-Nov-02
Modified Article: Spacer - M6
No.: MB064006

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The part shown below has been standardized in all places used in the PCU.
Old part
number
New part
number
AA132024
AA132208
Description
Spacer - M6
Spacer - M6
Qty
Int
2 -> 0
1 -> 3
O/O
Page Index Note

85
85
17
29
Model: Martini-C1
Old part
number
New part
number
AA132024
AA132208
PAGE: 2/2
Date: 28-Nov-02
Description
Qty
Int
1
1
O/O
Spacer - M6
Spacer - M6
manuals4you.com
No.: MB064006
Page Index Note
89
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 4-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Nov-02
No.: MB064007a
Serial Number Update

The Serial Number information has been update.
Modified Article: DIMM Connector for Controller Board

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to ensure that the DIMM connector pins are not bent
when the DIMM is installed.
Old part
number
New part
number
11028566
11029349
Description
Connector SX1B-72S-0.635SH
Connector - DIMM
Qty
Int
X/O
Page Index Note

171
171
108
108
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 4-Dec-02
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Nov-02
No.: MB064007a
[RCL (Japan) Production ]

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282090001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10820051
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220900001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220800210
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42208xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292080041
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20820041
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320800298
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320800245
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321000473
[REI (U.S.A) Production ]

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225700231
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325700399
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 2-Dec-02
No.: MB064008a

The Serial Number information has been updated.
Modified Article: Development Filter Plate

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following part has been added to further ensure that toner does not leak out of the
development unit.
Part
number
B0653108
Description
Filter Plate
Qty
1
Page Index Note

79
19
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 2-Dec-02
No.: MB064008a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4220800001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282080001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10820009
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220900001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220800151
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42208xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4320800001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292080001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20820001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320800176
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320800181
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225700571
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325700710
manuals4you.com
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 2-Dec-02
Modified Article: Lower PCU Assembly
No.: MB064009

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following part has been registered:
B0652263
Description
PCU Lower Assy
Qty
1
Page Index Note

85
32
manuals4you.com
Part
number
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Dec-02
No.: MB064010a

Modified Article: Misfeed Removal Decal

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
To ensure that operators do not bend the pick-up roller back too far when removing
jammed originals, which can prevent the roller from returning to its default position, the
instructions on the following decals have been changed.
Old part
number
New part
number
B4774351
B4774352
B4774361
B4774362
Description
Qty
Int
X/X
X/X
Note: These parts must be replaced together as a set.

<Page 27>
<Page 175>
34
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

27
175
21
175
9
34
11
35
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
<Page 21>
<Page 175>
Date: 4-Dec-02
No.: MB064010a
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Dec-02
No.: MB064010a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4220800001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282080001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10820001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220700250
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220700942
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42208xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4320800001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292080001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20820001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320700201
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320700479
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225600518
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325600292
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 5-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 5-Dec-02
No.: MB064011a
Serial Number Update.

Modified Article: Toner Collection Coil, other

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following parts have been changed to ensure that waste toner does not get blocked
around the coil in the Toner Supply Unit and Toner Collection Assembly transfer area.
Old part
number
New part
number
Description
Qty
Int
B0653710
B0653110
B0653638
B0653551
A0963736
B0653720
B0653111
B0653670
B0653554
Toner Collection Coil - Exit

Toner Supply Unit
Transport Screw
Toner Collection Assy - Transfer
Steel Ball - M11
1
1
1
1
1
X/X
X/X
X/X
X/X
Page Index Note

77
77
123
123
123
7
18
33
37
43
A
B
A
B
A, B
Note: Replace all parts marked A together as a set, as well as parts marked B together
as a set.
<Page 77>
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 5-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 5-Dec-02
<Page 123>
manuals4you.com
No.: MB064011a
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 5-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
MODEL NAME
Date: 5-Dec-02
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
No.: MB064011a
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282090001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10820051
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220900001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220800210
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42208xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292080041
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20820041
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320800293
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320800225
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321000473

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235100103
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335100001
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: MB064012a

The Serial Number information has been updated
Modified Article: Toner Supply Decal

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
To further ensure that the toner bottle is set correctly, the decal shown below has been
added.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0653342
Description
Qty
<Page 75 Index 41>
manuals4you.com
Int
Page Index Note

75
175
41
45
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: MB064012a
<Page 174 Index 45>

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J42212xxxxx
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282090001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10820001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220900001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220900079
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43212xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292090001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21020001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320900001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320900115
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: MB064012a

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225600234
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325600292
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: MB064013a

Modified Article: Tapping Screw

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The Tapping Screw has been changed to ensure the screw head does not contact the
paper tray holder base.
Old part
number
New part
number
04504008B
B0656579
Description
Tapping Screw - 4X8
Tapping Screw - M4X8
Qty
Int
X/O
Page Index Note

59
59
106
39
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Dec-02
No.: MB064013a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4220700001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282070001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10720001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220700176
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220700942
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42207xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4320700001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292070001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20720001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320700201
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320700479
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321000473

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225901112
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325900839
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Dec-02
No.: MB064014a

Modified Article: CIS Inverter Bracket and CIS

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been changed to ensure that SC18x does not occur.
Old part
number
New part
number
B4773931
B4775820
B4773933
B4775830
Description
CIS Inverter Bracket
Note: These parts must be replaced together as a set.
Qty
Int
1
1
X/X
X/X
Page Index Note

33
33
6
14
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Dec-02
No.: MB064014a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282090001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220900001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220800210
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42209xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4331000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292080041
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20820064
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320800293
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320800507
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225700456
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325700651
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Dec-02
No.: MB064015a

Modified Article: ADF Main Control Board

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to increase the latitude for compliance with EMI
Standards.
Old part
number
New part
number
B4775561
B4775571
Description
ADF Main Control Board
Qty
Int
O/O
Page Index Note

39
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Dec-02
No.: MB064015a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282090001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220900001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220800210
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42209xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292080041
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20820064
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320800293
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320800507
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225700456
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325700651
manuals4you.com
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 17-Dec-02
Modified Article: Hot Roller
No.: MB064016

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Please correct your Parts Catalog as follows:

Old part
number
New part
number
AE011069
AE011074
Description
Hot Roller
Qty
1
Int
Page Index Note

99
23
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064017a

Modified Article: Cushion

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following part has been added to ensure the Brush Roller Gear does not break:
Old part
number
New part
number
AA130042
A3764131
04514008B
04514014B
Description
Sleeve
Cushion - T1
Tapping Screw M4x8
Tapping Screw M4x14
Qty
Int
1
1
X/O
Page Index Note

85
85
85
85
30
31
104
107
Before installing the Cushion -T1 (A3764131), insert the Sleeve (AA130042) into the hole
in the Cushion - T1.
Note: Another part was also added for this issue, as announced in MB# MB064018. For
details on the above issue, see RTB #RB064010.
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064017a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221100001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282120001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4221100216
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4221100541
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42211xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321100001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292110008
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21120001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321100101
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4321100157
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321100208

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225800864
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325800494
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064018a

Modified Article: Spacer - M6

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Part
number
AA132208
Description
Spacer - M6
Qty
3 -> 4
Page Index Note

85
29
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064018a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J42212xxxxx
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221200178
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282120001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11220065
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4221200063
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4221200640
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4221200667
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43212xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J43212xxxxx
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292120001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21220061
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321200001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4321200299
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4234900203
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4334900007
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064019a

Modified Article: Exit Drive Roller

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Although used on previous models, the two plastic rollers in between the rubber exit drive
rollers that give the paper added stiffness (optional tray) have been deleted, as they are
not necessary for this model.
Old part
number
New part
number
AF020508
AF020581
Description
Qty
Int
X/O
Exit Drive Roller
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

107
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064019a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282090001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220900001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220900079
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42209xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292090001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21020001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320900001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320900115
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225800595
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325800242
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 28-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064020b


Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to ensure that the adhesive between the surface layer
and the metallic core is applied evenly.
Old part
number
New part
number
AE011074
AE011075
Description
Qty
Int
X/O
Hot Roller
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

99
23
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 28-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064020b

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282090001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220900001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220800210
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42209xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292080041
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20820064
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320800293
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320800507
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225500684
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325500690
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 20-Dec-02
Modified Article: Gear - 22Z
No.: MB064021

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other

Part
number
B0653645
Old description
New description
Gear - 22Z
manuals4you.com
Qty Page Index Note

1
123
41
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/2
Date: 25-Dec-02
Modified Article: Paper Set Decal
No.: MB064022

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other

Old part
number
New part
number
A2936637
B0656833
AA003015
B0656879
AA003014
B0656878
A2936678
B0656885
<Page 53>
Description
Qty
Int

(KOR)
(KOR/CHN/TWN)
Decal - Left Paper Set (KOR)
53
10
53
10
53
12
53
175
55
12
3
12
Decal - Right Paper Set (KOR/

CHN/TWN)
Base - Right Tandem LCT (KOR)
55
175
55
12
2
13
Base - Right Tandem Tray (KOR/

CHN/TWN)
55
13
Decal - Left Paper Set (KOR/

CHN/TWN)
Decal - Right Paper Set (KOR)
Page Index Note
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 25-Dec-02
<Page 55>
<Page 175>
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
No.: MB064022
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/2
Date: 25-Dec-02
Modified Article: LD Decal
No.: MB064023

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other

Old part
number
<Page 49>
Description
AA000250
<Page 45>
New part
number
Qty
Int
Page Index Note

45
49
175
2
28
39
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 25-Dec-02
<Page 175>
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
No.: MB064023
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/2
Date: 25-Dec-02
Modified Article: LD Decal
No.: MB064024

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other

Old part
number
Description
B0657133
Qty
Int
B0657134
B4774341
B4774342
B0653343
B0653344
<Page 15>
New part
number
Page Index Note

15
175
15
175
27
175
27
175
75
175
75
175
32
41
32
41
8
40
8
40
41
45
41
45
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 25-Dec-02
<Page 75>
<Page 175>
45
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
No.: MB064024
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 25-Dec-02
Modified Article: Misfeed Removal Decal
No.: MB064025

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other

Old part
number
New part
number
Description
Qty
Int
B0654253
B0654257
<Page 175>
B0654256
<Page 95>
Page Index Note

95
175
95
175
95
175
2
20
2
20
2
20
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 25-Dec-02
Modified Article: Model Name Plate
No.: MB064026

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other

Old part
number
New part
number
B0647015
B0647016
B0647017
B0657015
B0657016
B0657017
Description
Model Name Plate - GES 6002
Model Name Plate - NSH 6005
Model Name Plate - REX 6008
Model Name Plate - GES 7502
Model Name Plate - NSH 7505
Model Name Plate - REX 7508
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
manuals4you.com
Int
Page Index Note

15
15
15
15
15
15
12
12
12
12
12
12
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 21-Apr-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 25-Dec-02
No.: MB064027a
MB Correction
Modified Article: Caster (NA Field only)

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following part has been changed due to a vendor change:

Old part
number
New part
number
AH012016
AH012015
Note: NA field only.
Description
Caster - G60
Caster - 1470N
Qty
Int
4
4
O/O
Page Index Note

145
145
7
7
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 27-Dec-02
Modified Article: Caution Decal
No.: MB064028

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following part has been changed due to the adding the Korean, Simplified Chinese,
and Traditional Chinese languages:
Old part
number
New part
number
Description
B0654798
B0654797
Qty
Int
O/O
<Page 109>
<Page 175>
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

109
175
2
23
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 17-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 27-Dec-02
No.: MB064029a

Modified Article: Oil Supply Roller Bushing and Bracket

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
To prevent the cleaning web pressure roller from locking up, the following parts have been
changed:
Old part
number
New part
number
Description
Qty
Int
AE031026
AE031026
B0654210
B0654209

Rear Bushing - Oil Supply Roller
Stopper Bracket
2->1
1
1
X/X
X/X
B0654212
Note: Replace both parts marked A together as a set.
Page Index Note

95
95
95
9
40
11
A
A
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 17-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 27-Dec-02
No.: MB064029a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000225
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282110001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4221100216
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4221000365
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42211xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321100001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292110001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21120001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321100101
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4321100157
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321000478

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225900493
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325900502
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 27-Dec-02
No.: MB064030a

Modified Article: PFC Board

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The software for the PFC Board has been changed for the following reasons:
- To ensure the 1st tray lift motor does not over-run, which can cause jamming or
skewing.
- To ensure that paper in the right tandem tray is correctly detected.
- To minimize occurrences of SC501/502/503.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0655132
B0655139
Description
PFC Board
Qty
Int
X/O
Page Index Note

133
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 27-Dec-02
No.: MB064030a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4220700001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282070001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10720009
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220700176
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220700942
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42207xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4320700001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292070001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20720001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320700201
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320700479
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225500200
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325500248
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 17-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 27-Dec-02
No.: MB064031a

Modified Article: Lower Right Cover and Lower Left Cover

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The Lower Right and Left Covers have been changed to ensure they are not deformed
from stress during transport.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0651306
B0651307
B0651333
B0651334
Description
Lower Right Cover
Lower Left Cover
Qty
Int
1
1
X/O
X/O
Page Index Note

17
17
32
6
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 17-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 27-Dec-02
No.: MB064031a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282100001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4221000077
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4221000365
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42210xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292100001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21020001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321000232
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4321000442
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321000473

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225800532
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325800519
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064017a

Modified Article: Cushion

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Old part
number
New part
number
AA130042
A3764131
04514008B
04514014B
Description
Sleeve
Cushion - T1
Tapping Screw M4x8
Tapping Screw M4x14
Qty
Int
1
1
X/O
Page Index Note

85
85
85
85
30
31
104
107
Before installing the Cushion -T1 (A3764131), insert the Sleeve (AA130042) into the hole
in the Cushion - T1.
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064017a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221100001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282120001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4221100216
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4221100541
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42211xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321100001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292110008
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21120001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321100101
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4321100157
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321100208

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225800864
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325800494
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064020a


Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to ensure that the adhesive between the surface layer
and the metallic core is applied evenly.
Old part
number
New part
number
AE011074
AE011075
Description
Hot Roller
Qty
Int
X/O
Page Index Note

99
23
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 10-Jan-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 20-Dec-02
No.: MB064020a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282090001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220900001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220800210
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42209xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292080041
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20820064
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320800293
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43212xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320800507
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43212xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225800629
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325800358
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 18-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Jan-03
No.: MB064032a

Modified Article: Registration Rollers

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The Upper and Lower Registration Rollers have been changed to ensure noise does not
occur from the rollers.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0652613
B0652617
B0652623
B0652627
Description
NOTE: These parts should be changed as a set.
Qty
Int
1
1
X/X
X/X
Page Index Note

71
71
6
5
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 18-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Jan-03
No.: MB064032a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4211000203
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282110001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4221100216
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4221000365
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42211xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321100001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292110001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21120001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321100101
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4321100157
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321000478

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225900846
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325900720
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 18-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Jan-03
No.: MB064033a

Modified Article: Pick-up Roller Bracket

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
To ensure that operators do not bend the pick-up roller back too far when removing
jammed originals, which can prevent the roller from returning to its default position, the
shape of the following part has been changed.
Old part
number
New part
number
B4772221
B4772222
Description
Qty
Int
X/O
Page Index Note

25
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 18-Feb-03
Model: Martini-C1
MODEL NAME
Date: 7-Jan-03
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
No.: MB064033a
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4220800001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282080001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10820001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4220700250
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4220700942
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42208xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4320800001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292080001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20820001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4320700201
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4320700479
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321000473

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225600518
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325600304
manuals4you.com
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 7-Jan-03
Modified Article: Caution Decal
No.: MB064034

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other

Old part
number
New part
number
AA000550
<Page 17>
<Page 175>
Description
Caution Decal - CHN
Qty
1
Int
Page Index Note

17
175
4
5
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 14-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Feb-03
No.: MB064035a

Modified Article: Paper Feed Sensor Bracket

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following part has been modified to ensure that the Driven Exit Roller stays properly
secured in place.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0654355
B0654358
Description
Qty
Int
X/O
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

103
12
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 14-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 7-Feb-03
No.: MB064035a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221100101
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282120001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4221100216
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4221100541
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42211xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321100001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292120001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21120001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321100101
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4321100157
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321100208

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4226001310
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4334900001
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 19-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Feb-03
No.: MB064036a

Modified Article: One-way Clutch Gears

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
To ensure the one-way clutch gear does not slip, the following parts have been changed.
For details, please refer to RTB #RB064020.
Old part
number
New part
number
AB011467
AB011468
AB011490
AB011491
Description
Qty
Int
1
1
X/O
X/O
Gear - 38Z
Gear - 21Z
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

65
65
23
24
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 19-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Feb-03
No.: MB064036a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230200416
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230200001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283020001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P1023xxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230200146
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4230200316
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230200336
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42302xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43302xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330200145
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L129302xxxx
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P2023xxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330200001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330200021
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330200031
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43302xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235100526
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335100428
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 5-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Feb-03
No.: MB064037a

Modified Article: Sensor Harnesses

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been changed to provide an even greater margin in conforming to EMI
Standards.
Old part
number
B4775641
B4775661
New part
number
B4775601
16070622
Description
Paper Size Sensor Harness
Qty
Int
1
1
1
X/O
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

39
39
39
2
3
109
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 5-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Feb-03
No.: MB064037a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230200416
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230100275
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283010021
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10130001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230200146
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4230200316
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230200336
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230100348
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43302xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330200145
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293010003
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20130001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330100037
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330200021
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330200031
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330100034

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235100003
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335100001
PAGE: 1/4
Reissued: 14-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Feb-03
No.: MB064038a

Modified Article: Decals

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The German, French, Italian and Spanish versions of the following decals have been
changed or added.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0651369
B4774371
Qty
Int
Decal - Cleaning
X/O
B0653345
B0653346
B0653347
B0653348
G5646076
Description
G5646077
Decal - Exposure Glass
<Page 15 Index 32>
manuals4you.com
X/O
Page Index Note

15
175
75
175
75
175
75
175
75
175
27
175
32
41
41
45
41
45
41
45
41
45
8
40
PAGE: 2/4
Reissued: 14-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
<Page 27 Index 8>
<Page 75 Index 41>
Date: 18-Feb-03
No.: MB064038a
PAGE: 3/4
Reissued: 14-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Feb-03
<Page 175 Index 40>
<Page 175 Index 41>
<Page 175 Index 45>
manuals4you.com
No.: MB064038a
PAGE: 4/4
Reissued: 14-Mar-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 18-Feb-03
No.: MB064038a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J42303xxxxx
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230100210
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283010001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10130001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230100001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42303xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230100284
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42303xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43303xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330200145
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293010001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20130001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321200064
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43303xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330100001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43303xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4234901037
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335000001
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 21-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Mar-03
No.: MB064039a
MB Correction
The cut-in serial numbers for REI (USA) production have been deleted, as the
following part is not used on the N.A. model.
Modified Article: End Fence Guide

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The parts below have been modified to ensure that the shaft for the front end fence of the
tandem tray does not break.
This part can break under the following conditions:
1. If the right tray is pushed in with the paper in the left tray not properly pushed up
against the back fence, the end fence will rub up against the paper stack, which can
cause the end fence to open and the end fence guide to hit the left tray bottom plate.
2. If the right tray is pushed in after it has separated from the rail, the end fence can open
momentarily when the tray tries to return to the rail. If the opened fence lines up with
the side indentations of the left tray bottom plate, the end fence guide can hit the left
tray bottom plate.
Old part
number
New part
number
A2936712
B0656712
Description
Qty
Int
X/O
End Fence Guide
Page Index Note

57
Note: Both the old and new End Fence Guides above can be used with the Rear End
Fence (O/O).
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 21-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Mar-03
No.: MB064039a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230200416
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230100210
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283010001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10130001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230100180
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4230200316
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230100284
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230100344
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4330100029
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330200145
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293010001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20130001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330100037
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330200021
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330100001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330100034
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/3
Date: 14-Mar-03
Modified Article: Upper Fusing Cover and Guide Plate
No.: MB064040
Bracket

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been changed due to parts standardization with the Japanese model.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0654117
B0654391
03604006B
B1104117
B1104391
09544006B
Description
Upper Fusing Cover
Guide Plate Bracket
Screw - M4x6
Qty
Int
1
1
O/O
O/O
<Page 97>
manuals4you.com
O/O
Page Index Note

97
97
99
99
7
19
103
111
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 2/3
Date: 14-Mar-03
No.: MB064040
<Page 99>

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J42ymmxxxxx
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J42ymmxxxxx
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L128ymmxxxx
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P1mmyxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J42ymmxxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42ymmxxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J42ymmxxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42ymmxxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43ymmxxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J43ymmxxxxx
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L129ymmxxxx
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P2mmyxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J43ymmxxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43ymmxxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J43ymmxxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43ymmxxxxx
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 3/3
Date: 14-Mar-03
No.: MB064040

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J42ymm(+48)xxxxx
120/60
USA
B065-17
J43ymm(+48)xxxxx
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 6-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 14-Apr-03
No.: MB064041a

Modified Article: Middle Thermistor

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been changed to ensure that an abnormal temperature misdetection
does not occur, which can occur when the silver contained in the adhesive separates out
and gets in between the thermistor chip electrodes.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0654017
B0654027
B0654019
AW100075
B0654018
B0654028
B0654020
AW100084
<Page 97>
Description
Fusing Unit - 120V
Fusing Unit - 230V
Fusing Unit (TWN)
Thermistor
Middle Thermistor
Qty
Int
1
1
1
1
1
X/O
X/O
X/O
X/O
Page Index Note

97
97
97
99
99
1
1
1
6
6
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 6-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 14-Apr-03
No.: MB064041a
<Page 99>

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230200416
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230100279
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283010021
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10130001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230200146
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4230200316
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230200336
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230200643
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43302xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330200145
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293010003
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20130001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330100037
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330200021
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330200031
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330400182
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 6-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 14-Apr-03
No.: MB064041a

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4234900550
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4334900338
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 6-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 15-Apr-03
No.: MB064042a

Modified Article: Pulley Drive Wire A'ssy

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The Pulley Drive Wire Assembly has been changed to ensure that the wire does not get
locked between the pulley and pulley cover.
Old part
number
New part
number
Description
A2486684
A2936684
Pulley Drive Wire Assy
Qty
Int
X/X
Page Index Note

57
19
Note: When replacing, it is necessary to replace both Pulley Drive Assemblies together as
a set.
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 6-May-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 15-Apr-03
No.: MB064042a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221000001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282100001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4221000077
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4221000365
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42210xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4321000001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292100001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21020001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321000232
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4321000442
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321000473

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4225900298
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4325900292
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 17-Apr-03
Modified Article: Contact Image Sensor
No.: MB064043

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following part has been changed due to a vendor change.

Old part
number
New part
number
B4775830
B4775840
Description
Qty
Int
O/O
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

33
14
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 17-Apr-03
Modified Article: Harness Clamp
No.: MB064044

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to facilitate assembly.

Old part
number
New part
number
11050511
11050516
Description
Clamp
Qty
Int
O/O
Page Index Note

117
117
104
110
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 9-May-03
Modified Article: Original Connecting Harness
No.: MB064045

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Please apply the following correction to your Parts Catalogs.

Old part
number
New part
number
B4775671
B4775741
Description
Qty

manuals4you.com
1
1
Int
Page Index Note

23
23
17
17
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Jun-03
No.: MB064046a


Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The Hot Roller has been modified to ensure that it reaches its lifetime of 500k.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0654018
B0654028
B0654020
AE011075
B0654016
B0654029
B0654021
AE011087
<Page 97>
Description
Fusing Unit - 120V
Fusing Unit - 230V
Fusing Unit (TWN)
Hot Roller
Qty
Int
1
1
1
1
X/O
X/O
X/O
X/O
Page Index Note

97
97
97
99
1
1
1
23
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Jun-03
No.: MB064046a
<Page 99>

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230500622
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230500307
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283050001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10530001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230500001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4230500246
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230500256
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230500300
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43305xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330500063
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293050001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20530001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330500001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330500078
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330500088
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330500096
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 4-Jun-03
No.: MB064046a

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235400001
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335400001
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 4-Jun-03
Modified Article: Development Drive Motor
No.: MB064047

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed due to parts standardization with the Japanese model.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0655305
B1105305
Description
Development Drive Motor
Qty
Int
O/O
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

119
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 4-Jun-03
Modified Article: Screw for Heater Holder
No.: MB064048

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to facilitate factory assembly.

Old part
number
New part
number
04514008B
03604008B
Description
Screw - M3x8
Qty
Int
O/O
Page Index Note

139
139
101
105
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 4-Jun-03
Modified Article: IPU Board
No.: MB064049

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed due to parts standardization with the Japanese model.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0655144
B1105140
Description
IPU Board
Qty
Int
O/O
<Page 127>
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

127
163
28
*
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Jun-03
No.: MB064050a

Modified Article: ADF Exposure Glass Cloth and Holder

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
When streaks appear on ADF scanned images, it is necessary to clean the ADF exposure
glass. The cloth and cloth holder are added as accessories.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0651371
B0651374
Description
Cloth Holder
Qty
1
1
Int
Page Index Note

27
27
28
29
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 6-Jun-03
No.: MB064050a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4221100366
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4221100101
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1282120001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11120001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4221100216
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4221100582
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4221100541
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4221200667
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4321100152
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J43212xxxxx
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1292120001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21120001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4321100101
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4321100223
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4321100157
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4321100208

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4226000353
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4326000259
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 5-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 10-Jun-03
No.: MB064051b
MB Correction
The illustrations have changed as shown below.
Modified Article: OPC Drum and Cleaning Brush

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been changed to prevent recurrences of black lines and noise from the
cleaning brush gears. For details, please see RTB #RB064035.
Note: Except for the PCU Lower Assembly, when installing the parts below for the first
time, it is necessary to replace the parts marked A together as a set.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0649510
A2949510
B0652423
B0652424
AA132208
AA130042
A3764131
B0652263
07200040E
04514014B
B1102261
04514008B
B0652421
B0652347
B0652422
09513006B
B1102322
AD042038
Description
Drum
OPC Drum
Release Cam - Cleaning Blade
Cam Spring
Spacer - M6
Sleeve
Cushion - T1
PCU Lower Assy
Retaining Ring - M4
Agitator Shaft
Agitator Assy
Cleaning Brush
Agitator Cleaning
Philips Screw with Flat Washer M3x6
Qty
Int
1
1->0
1->0
4->2
1->0
1->0
1
2->1
X/X
X/O
X/X
1
1
1->0
1->0
X/X
X/X
Page Index Note

85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
87
87
87
87
87
25
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
105
107
104
2
2
7
23
101
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 5-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 10-Jun-03
<Page 85>
<Page 87>
manuals4you.com
No.: MB064051b
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 5-Dec-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 10-Jun-03
No.: MB064051b

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230500622
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230500427
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283050037
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10530101
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230500547
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42307xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230600076
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230600160
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43307xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330600001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293060001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20630001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330600139
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330600155
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330600165
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43307xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235400001
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335400001
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 12-Jun-03
No.: MB064052a

Modified Article: MLB Board

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to support the Copy Connector Kit modification.
Note: This is not the MLB option board.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0665300
B0665400
Description
Qty
Int
X/O
MLB Board
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

127
36
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 12-Jun-03
No.: MB064052a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J42304xxxxx
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230400119
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283040001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10430001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230300409
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4230400505
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230400472
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42304xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43304xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330400101
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293040001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20430001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330400001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330500078
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330400192
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330400182

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235300054
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335300191
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Jun-03
No.: MB064053a

Modified Article: Fusing Gear

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been temporarily changed to the gear used on the Mojito for customs
purposes. These parts will be changed back to their original P/N in the near future.
Old part
number
New part
number
AB012316
AB012317
AB013792
AB017357
Description
Qty
Int
1
1
X/X
X/X
Fusing Gear
Fusing Drive Gear
Page Index Note

99
101
22
22
Note: When installing for the first time, these parts should be changed together as a set.
<Page 99>
<Page 101>
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 13-Jun-03
No.: MB064053a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230500622
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230400650
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283050001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10530001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230500001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4230500246
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230500256
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230500300
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43305xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330500063
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293050001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20530001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330500001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330500078
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330500088
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330500096

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235000127
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335000261
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 16-Jun-03
Modified Article: Gear 16Z
No.: MB064054

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Due to a vendor change, the following P/N has changed.

Old part
number
New part
number
AB013492
B0983492
Description
Gear 16Z
Qty
Int
1-1
O/O
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

61
17
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 30-Jun-03
No.: MB064055a

Modified Article: Toner Collection Coil

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to further improve PCU toner transport efficiency.
Old part
number
New part
number
AD043077
B1102326
Description
Qty
Int
1-1
O/O
Page Index Note

87
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 2-Jul-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 30-Jun-03
No.: MB064055a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230500622
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230500307
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283050001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10530001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230500001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4230500246
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230500256
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230500300
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43305xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330500063
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293050001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20530001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330500001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330500078
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330500088
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330500096

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235400252
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335400346
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 20-Nov-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 24-Jul-03
No.: MB064056b
MB Correction
Modified Article: Document Feeder Pick-up Roller

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The Pickup Roller and Coupling have been registered separately due to parts
standardization with the next DF model.
Old part
number
New part
number
A8061321
B4772225
B4772226
Description
Pickup Roller
Pickup Roller
Pickup Roller - Coupling
Qty
1-0
0-1
0-1
Int
Page Index Note

25
25
25
6
6
27
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 20-Nov-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 24-Jul-03
No.: MB064056b

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230600474
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230600229
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283060011
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10630001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230600175
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42307xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230600381
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230600160
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43307xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330600191
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293060052
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20630061
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330600326
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43307xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330600173
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330600565

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4335500043
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4235500191
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 12-Sep-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 1-Aug-03
No.: MB064057a
MB Correction
Modified Article: Development Screw

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Please note the following part has added to the Martini-C1 Parts Catalog, which were
applied from the beginning of mass production. Please correct your part catalogue.
Old part
number
New part
number
A2943116
Description
Development Screw
Qty
0-1
Int
Page Index Note

79
20
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 3-Sep-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Aug-03
No.: MB064058a

Modified Article: Feed Lever

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following part has been added to further ensure paper is fed properly without jamming.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0656445
Description
Qty
Feed Lever
Int
0-1
Page Index Note

71
35
The serial number information is as follows.

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230800133
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230800096
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L128309xxxx
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10930001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230800139
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42309xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230800196
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230800083
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4330900001
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330900006
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L129309xxxx
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P2093xxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330900103
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330900182
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330900187
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330800039
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 3-Sep-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Aug-03
No.: MB064058a
REI (U.S.A) Production ]

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235400001
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335400001
B1102713
B0656445
(Feed lever)
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 2-Oct-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 24-Sep-03
No.: MB064059a

Modified Article: Fusing Gear

Reason for
Modification:
Vendor change
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been changed back to the original P/N after checked cuntoms
purposes.
Old part
number
New part
number
AB013792
AB017357
AB012316
AB012317
Description
Fusing Gear
Fusing Drive Gear
Qty
Int
1
1
X/X
X/X
Page Index Note

99
101
22
22
Note: When installing for the first time, these parts should be changed together as a set.
<Page 99>
<Page 101>
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 2-Oct-03
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 24-Sep-03
No.: MB064059a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230900614
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230900305
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L128310xxxx
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10930001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230900293
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42310xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4231000139
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42310xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43310xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330900142
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L129310xxxx
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P2103xxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330900063
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43310xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330900035
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43310xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235700452
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335700495
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 11-May-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 3-Oct-03
No.: MB064060b

Modified Article: Phillips Pan Head Screw M4x10

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to facilitate assembly.

Incorrect Correct part
part number
number
03140100B
03140120B
Description
Phillips Pan Head Screw
M4x10
Qty
Int
1-1
X/X
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

99
107
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 2-Feb-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 3-Oct-03
No.: MB064060a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230900001
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230900208
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L128309xxxx
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10930001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230900067
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42309xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230900008
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42309xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4330900001
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330900142
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L129309xxxx
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P2093xxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330900063
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330900030
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330900006
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43309xxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J42ymm(+48)xxxxx
120/60
USA
B065-17
J43ymm(+48)xxxxx
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 22-Jan-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Dec-03
No.: MB064061a

Modified Article: HDD

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The HDD has been changed due to a vendor change.

Note: When installing the new HDD(B5145970), it is necessary to install the B0655102M
(GW/GEN.al/V3.53.3) firmware together as a set.
Old part
number
New part
number
B5145960
Description
B5145970
Int
O/O
HDD-40GB
Qty
Page Index Note

126
13

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4231200181
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4231100346
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283120001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11230001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4231100375
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42312xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4231200021
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42312xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43312xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4331200001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293120001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21230001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4331200215
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43312xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4331200048
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4331200093
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 22-Jan-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Dec-03
No.: MB064061a

Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235900321
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335900813
manuals4you.com
MODEL NAME
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 8-Jan-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 19-Dec-03
No.: MB064062a

Modified Article: Duplex Fan Bracket

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The shape of the following has been changed to further ensure the proper gap between
the fan bracket and DLT Kit.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0651195
B0651200
Description
Duplex Fan Bracket
Qty
Int
1-1
X/O
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

141
20
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 8-Jan-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 19-Dec-03
No.: MB064062a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4231200181
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4231200067
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283120024
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11230026
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4231200293
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42401xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4231200186
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42401xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43401xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4331200098
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293120049
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21230026
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4331200215
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43401xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4331200051
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4331200093

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235700784
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335800001
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 9-Feb-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 29-Jan-04
No.: MB064063a

Modified Article: Rear Side Fence

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been changed to increase the durability of the Rear Side Fence.
Old part
number
New part
number
Description
B0656541
B0656540
B0656543
B0656542
Rear Side Fence

Rear Side Fence Assy
Qty
Int
1-1
1-1
X/O
X/O
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

59
59
22
27
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 9-Feb-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 29-Jan-04
No.: MB064063a

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230900614
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230900236
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L128310xxxx
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10930001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230900242
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42310xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4231000139
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42310xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4331000021
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330900142
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293100001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21030001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330900063
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43310xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330900035
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J43ymmxxxxx

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235800182
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335800001
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 12-Apr-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 30-Jan-04
No.: MB064064a

Modified Article: Development Unit

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been changed due to parts standardization with the new model.
Old part
number
New part
number
B0653050
B0653091
B0653099
B0653100
Description
B1103050
B1103091
B1103099
B1103100
Development Unit
Entrance Seal
Front Drum Seal
Rear Drum Seal
Qty
Int
1
1
1
1
O/O
O/O
O/O
O/O
Page Index Note

79
79
79
79
1
4
3
6

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4231200181
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4231200067
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283120024
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11230026
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4231200293
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42401xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4231200052
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42401xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4340100001
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4331200098
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293120049
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21230026
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4331200215
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43401xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4331200048
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4331200093
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 12-Apr-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 30-Jan-04
No.: MB064064a

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4245100786
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4345200001
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/1
Date: 30-Jan-04
No.: MB064065

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Please correct your Parts Catalogs as follows.

Description and Illustration correction.
Part
Number
Incorrect
Description
B0653301
BOTTLE:DRIVE
Correct
Description
BOTTLE:DRIVE:ASSY
B
39 O T T LE: R I E: S S '
D V A
Y
manuals4you.com
Int
1
Page Index Note

74
39
PAGE: 1/1
Reissued: 4-Aug-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 17-Feb-04
No.: MB064066b
MB Correction
Modified Article: Polygon Motor Cover
Prepared by: F.Noguchi

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Due to parts standardization the polygon motor cover has been changed.
Old part
number
New part
number
BO651691
B1101691
B1101691
B1401691
Description
Qty
Int
Page Index Note
Polygon Motor Cover
O/O
45
Polygon Motor Cover
O/O
45
PAGE: 1/2
Reissued: 24-Mar-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 19-Feb-04
No.: MB064067a

Modified Article: Charge Power Pack

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following has been changed to a lead-free component as part of the ongoing
utilization of environmentally-friendly materials.
Old part
number
New part
number
AZ320106
Description
AZ320139
Qty
Int
O/O
Charge Power Pack
Page Index Note

129
13

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J42402xxxxx
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4240100308
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1284010039
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P1024xxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4240100363
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42402xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J42402xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42402xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J43402xxxxx
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4340200001
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1294010027
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P2024xxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4340200022
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43402xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4340200074
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4340100228
manuals4you.com
PAGE: 2/2
Reissued: 24-Mar-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 19-Feb-04
No.: MB064067a

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4245100690
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4345100581
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/2
Date: 02-Sep-04
Modified Article: ADF Unit etc.
No.: MB064068
Prepared by: F.Noguchi

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
Due to parts standardization with another model, the following parts have been changed.
Old part
number
New part
number
A2931343
B0981342
B0651223
B0657001
B4775571
B0655469
B1401223
B0657002
B4775581
B1405469
B0655470
B1405470
B0651715
A1341698
AX060250
B1401715
B1401680
AX060277
A2935310
B1405301
B0651852
B1401852
B0656320
B1406320
B1406320
A4234432
B0652655
B1406321
AA143809
B1402655
A1343216
AD004091
A0962053
AD020053
07200025B
09653008B
AA143816
B0702010
B0702365
B0702364
07200025E
04503008N
Description
Upper Hinge
Hinge: upper
Lower Hinge
Hinge Lower Ass'y
ADF Unit
ADF Main Control Board
FFC/SBC Harness - 15P
Harness - FFC SBU
15WICK/120mm
FFC/SBC Harness - 40P
Harness - FFC SBU
40WICK/120mm
Scanner wire
Idle Pulley
Polygon Mirror Motor
SYNC Detector Board
PCB:SYNC Detector
IPS Unit
Imaging Unit: Ass'y
Reverse Roller - Pressure Release
Reverse Roller: Pressure Release
DC Solenoid: Guide Plate
Screw
Flat Screw: Chuck: Bottle
Charge Corona Unit
Cleaner Motor Cover
Charge Corona Wire
RETAINING RING - M2.5
Tapping Screw with Washer- M3X8
Tapping Screw - M3X8
Stopper Bracket
B0654209
B1404209
Bracket: Stopper: Ass'y
manuals4you.com
Qty
Int Page Index Note
1-1
O/O
15
1-1
O/O
15
1-1
1-1
O/O
O/O
21
39
12
8
2-2
O/O
45
1-1
O/O
45
2-2
2-2
O/O
O/O
49
49
5
18
1-1
O/O
51
13
1-1
O/O
51
29
1-1
O/O
51
30
1-1
O/O
65
29
1-1
O/O
65
29
1-1
O/O
67
29
1-1
X/O
73
30
1-1
O/O
75
20
1-1
1-1
1-1
n-n
O/O
O/O
O/O
O/O
83
83
83
83
3
4
19
102
n-n
O/O
83
103
1-1
X/O
95
11
Model: Martini-C1
Old part
number
New part
number
AA143037
B0654500
AA143307
AA143810
B0654501
AA143811
A2291132
A2291133
A0961173
B1401132
B1401133
B1101173
B1101173
B1401173
AX310044
AX310047
53011662
AA143803
AA143749
AA143798
A0966693
B0986693
PAGE: 2/2
Date: 02-Sep-04
Description
Duplex Unit
Stepped Screw M3
Stepped Screw M3X4
Bracket Registration Motor
Stepper Motor Base Assy
Fusing Drive Joint
Joint: Fusing Drive: Sub Unit
Joint: Fusing Drive: Sub Unit
Fusing Drive Sub-Unit Joint
Counter
Total Counter: 7FIG: 24V: MI2
Hexagon Bolt
Flanged hexagonal Head Bolt
Stand Hexagonal Bolt M12X35
HEXAGONAL BOLT: M12X35
Paper Guide Sheet
Shield: Frame: paper Bank: Upper
Qty
No.: MB064068
Int Page Index Note
1 - 1 O/O
1 - 1 O/O
33
O/O
1-1
101
109
109
113
16
15
17
26
1-1
O/O
119
1-1
O/O
119
1-1
X/O
119
14
1-1
X/O
119
14
1-1
O/O
139
12 12
X/O
145
4-4
X/O
145
1-1
O/O
145
10
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/2
Date: 2-Sep-04
Modified Article: OPC Drum
No.: MB064069

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following part has been changed.

For details, please refer to RTB #RB064042.
Old part
number
New part
number
A2949510
B0709510
Description
Qty
Int
O/O
OPC Drum
manuals4you.com
Page Index Note

85
25
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 2/2
Date: 2-Sep-04
No.: MB064069

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4240300160
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4240300001
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1284030001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10340001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4240300038
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J4240400283
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4240300175
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42404xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4340300001
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4340300040
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1294030001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P20340001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4340300127
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4340400032
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4340300006
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4340300035

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J42ymm(+48)xxxxx
120/60
USA
B065-17
J43ymm(+48)xxxxx
PAGE: 1/3
Reissued: 7-Sep-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Aug-03
No.: MB064058b
MB Correction
The items in bold italics has been added.
Modified Article: Feed Lever

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The following have been changed to further ensure paper is fed properly without jamming.
Note: It is necessary to replace the parts marked A together as a set.
Old part
number
AB030577
AB030578
B0652703
B0652713
B4783505
New part
number
B0656445
B1102713
Description
Qty
Timing Pulley 18Z

Timing Pulley 20Z
Bracket Brake Peen
Feed Lever
Drive Reverse Shaft
Timing Belt B40S2M84
1->0
1->0
1->0
0->1
1
1->0
New Drive Reverse Shaft
B1102713
Feed Lever
B0656445
(Feed lever)
manuals4you.com
Int
X/O
Page
Index
71
71
71
71
71
71
33
34
31
35
12
32
Note
A
A
PAGE: 2/3
Reissued: 7-Sep-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Aug-03
No.: MB064058b
The serial number information is as follows.

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4230800133
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4230800096
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L128309xxxx
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P10930001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4230800139
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42309xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4230800196
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J4230800083
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4330900001
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4330900006
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L129309xxxx
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P2093xxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4330900103
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J4330900182
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4330900187
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4330800039
PAGE: 3/3
Reissued: 7-Sep-04
Model: Martini-C1
Date: 28-Aug-03
No.: MB064058b
REI (U.S.A) Production ]

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J4235400001
120/60
USA
B065-17
J4335400001
manuals4you.com
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 1/2
Date: 8-Sep-04
No.: MB064070
The item in bold italics have been added.

Modified Article: ADF UNIT

Vendor change
Reason for
Modification:
To meet standards
(
)
Other
The ADF Unit has been changed due to vender change.

Old part
number
New part
number
B0657001
B0657002
Description
ADF UNIT
ADF UNIT
Qty
Int
O/O
Page Index Note

21
12
Model: Martini-C1
PAGE: 2/2
Date: 8-Sep-04
No.: MB064070

MODEL NAME
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
Ricoh Aficio 1060
110/60
Taiwan
B064-19
J4231100001
Gestetner 6002
Nashuatec 6005
Rex Rotary 6008
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-22
J4231000402
Lanier LD060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, Australia
B064-24
L1283120001
Infotec IS 2060
220-240V/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-26
7P11030001
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B064-27
J4231000509
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/60
Korea
B064-28
J42311xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
Asia, Australia
B064-29
J4231000347
Ricoh Aficio 1060
220/50,60
China
B064-69
J42311xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
110/60
Taiwan
B065-19
J4331000021
Gestetner 7502
Nashuatec 7505
Rex Rotary 7508
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-22
J4331000045
Lanier LD075
220-240/50,60
Europe, Australia
B065-24
L1293100001
Infotec IS 2075
220-240/50,60
Europe, etc.
B065-26
7P21030001
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220-240/50, 60
Europe, etc
B065-27
J4331000127
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/60
Korea
B065-28
J43311xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
Asia, Australia
B065-29
J4331000024
Ricoh Aficio 1075
220/50, 60
China
B065-69
J4331100011

MODEL NAME
Ricoh Aficio 1060
Savin 2560
Gestetner 6002
Lanier LD060
Ricoh Aficio 1075
Savin 2575
Gestetner 7502
Lanier LD075
V/Hz
DESTINATION
CODE
SERIAL NO.
120/60
USA
B064-17
J42ymm(+48)xxxxx
120/60
USA
B065-17
J43ymm(+48)xxxxx

Ricoh 1060 (B064 - B065 - B140 - B141 - B142 - B143 - B163 - B228) Aficio 1060 - Aficio 1075 - Aficio 2051 - Aficio 2051SP - Aficio 2060 - Aficio 2075 Parts & Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh 1060 (B064 - B065 - B140 - B141 - B142 - B143 - B163 - B228) Aficio 1060 - Aficio 1075 - Aficio 2051 - Aficio 2051SP - Aficio 2060 - Aficio 2075 Parts & Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MODEL MT-C1/C2

(Machine Code: B064/B065

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

What This Manual Contains

This manual uses several symbols.

Short Edge Feed (SEF)

Long Edge Feed (LEF)

1.8 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470) .....................................................1-40

1.16.4 USB 2.0 (B525-01) .......................................................................1-88

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................... 2-1

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 3-1

3.4.10 SCANNER WIRE REPLACEMENT ..............................................3-20

3.9 FUSING UNIT..........................................................................................3-60

3.11.11 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD.........................3-108

3.14.3 ADF SCANNING ADJUSTMENTS .............................................3-146

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 4-1

Z-Folding Unit B660 Jam Codes.........................................................4-69

5. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 5-1

5.6 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES...................................................5-29

6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ....................................................... 6-1

SBU (Sensor Board Unit)......................................................................6-8

6.7 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-45

6.10.2 TRANSFER BELT LIFT ................................................................6-79

6.12.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-112

EXTERNAL COVERS ........................................................................ B473-1

2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B473-7

A3/DLT TRAY KIT (B475)

2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B475-3

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B468/B469/B674)

EXTERNAL COVERS ........................................................................ B468-1

Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT (B674 ONLY)........................................... B468-10

2. DETAILS ............................................................................. B468-24

OVERVIEW ...................................................................................... B468-24

PUNCH UNIT (B377)

2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B377-2

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)

EXTERNAL COVERS ........................................................................ B470-1

2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B470-8

9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)

2. DETAILS ............................................................................... B471-4

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B478)

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................ B478-27

6. DETAILS ............................................................................. B478-29

TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE ........................................ B478-29

7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ................................ B478-47

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706)

Right to Left Adjustment............................................................... B706-27

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................ B706-31

6. DETAILS ............................................................................. B706-33

TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE ........................................ B706-33

7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ................................ B706-52

Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................ B660-15

SCANNER UNIT/PRINTER UNIT (G338/G339)

Related SP Mode........................................................................... G338-8

MFP OPTIONS (B659/B581/B596/B582/G377/B609/B735)

Scanner ....................................................................................... B659-12

JOGGER UNIT (B513) ............................................................ SPEC-18

Recommended: 15C to 25C (59F to 77F)

15% to 80% RH (27C 80%, 32C 54%)

Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or